Preface Table of Contents Introduction

SIPROTEC Multi-Functional Protective Relay with Local Control 7SJ62/63/64

V4.4

Functions Installation and Commissioning Technical Data Appendix Index

1 2 3 4 A

Manual

C53000-G1140-C1471

Liability Statement We have checked the text of this manual against the hardware and software described. Exclusions and deviations cannot be ruled out; we accept no liability for lack of total agreement. The information in this manual is checked periodically, and necessary corrections will be included in future editions. We appreciate any suggested improvements. We reserve the right to make technical improvements without notice. Release 4.40.02

Copyright Copyright Siemens AG 2002. All rights reserved. Dissemination or reproduction of this document, or evaluation and communication of its contents, is not authorized except where expressly permitted. Violations are liable for damages. All rights reserved, particularly for the purposes of patent application or trademark registration. Registered trademarks SIPROTEC, SIMATIC, SIMATIC NET , SINAUT , SICAM, and DIGSI are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. Other designations in this manual may be trademarks that if used by third parties for their own purposes may violate the rights of the owner.

Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Buch-Nr. C53000-G1140-C1471

Preface
Purpose of This Manual This manual describes the functions, operation, installation, and placing into service of the devices 7SJ62, 7SJ63 and 7SJ64. In particular, one will find: Descriptions of device functions and settings Chapter 2; Instructions for mounting and commissioning Chapter 3; Compilation of technical specifications Chapter 4; As well as a compilation of the most significant data for experienced users in the Appendix. General information about design, configuration, and operation of SIPROTEC devices are laid down in the SIPROTEC 4 system manual, order no. E50417H1176 C151. Target Audience Protection engineers, commissioning engineers, personnel concerned with adjustment, checking, and service of selective protective equipment, automatic and control facilities, and personnel of electrical facilities and power plants. This manual is valid for: SIPROTEC 4 7SJ62/63/64 Multifunction Protective Relays; firmware version 4.4. Indication of Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws of the member states relating to electromagnetic compatibility (EMC Council Directive 89/336/EEC) and concerning electrical equipment for use within certain voltage limits (Low-voltage Directive 73/23/EEC). This conformity is proved by tests conducted by Siemens AG in accordance with Article 10 of the Council Directive in agreement with the generic standards EN 50081 and EN 50082 for EMC directive, and with the standard EN 602556 for the low-voltage directive. The product conforms with the international standard of the series IEC 60255 and the German standard DIN 57435 /Part 303 (corresponds to VDE 0435/Part 303).

Applicability of This Manual

ANSI

This product has been designed according to ANSI C37.90.* standards.

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-11

Preface

This product is ULcertified with the data as stated in Section 4.1:

IND. CONT. EQ. TYPE 1 69CA

IND. CONT. EQ. TYPE 1

Additional Support

Should further information be desired or should particular problems arise which are not covered sufficiently for the purchaser's purpose, the matter should be referred to the local Siemens representative. Individual course offerings may be found in our Training Catalogue, or questions may be directed to our training center. Please contact your Siemens representative. The warnings and notes contained in this manual serve for your own safety and for an appropriate lifetime of the device. Please observe them! The following terms are used:

Training Courses

Instructions and Warnings

DANGER
indicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage will result if proper precautions are not taken.

Warning
indicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.

Caution
indicates that minor personal injury or property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. This particularly applies to damage on or in the device itself and consequential damage thereof. Note indicates information about the device or respective part of the instruction manual which is essential to highlight.

Warning!
Hazardous voltages are present in this electrical equipment during operation. Non observance of the safety rules can result in severe personal injury or property damage. Only qualified personnel shall work on and around this equipment after becoming thoroughly familiar with all warnings and safety notices of this manual as well as with the applicable safety regulations. The successful and safe operation of this device is dependent on proper handling, installation, operation, and maintenance by qualified personnel under observance of all warnings and hints contained in this manual. In particular the general erection and safety regulations (e.g. IEC, DIN, VDE, EN or other national and international standards) regarding the correct use of hoisting gear must be observed. Nonobservance can result in death, personal injury or substantial property damage.

ii

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-11

Preface

QUALIFIED PERSONNEL For the purpose of this instruction manual and product labels, a qualified person is one who is familiar with the installation, construction and operation of the equipment and the hazards involved. In addition, he has the following qualifications: Is trained and authorized to energize, de-energize, clear, ground and tag circuits and equipment in accordance with established safety practices. Is trained in the proper care and use of protective equipment in accordance with established safety practices. Is trained in rendering first aid. Typographic and Symbol Conventions The following text formats are used when literal information from the device or to the device appear in the text flow: Parameter names, i.e. designators of configuration or function parameters which may appear word-for-word in the display of the device or on the screen of a personal computer (with operation software DIGSI 4), are marked in bold letters of a monospace type style. Parameter options, i.e. possible settings of text parameters, which may appear word-for-word in the display of the device or on the screen of a personal computer (with operation software DIGSI 4), are written in italic style, additionally. Annunciations, i.e. designators for information, which may be output by the relay or required from other devices or from the switch gear, are marked in a monospace type style in quotation marks. Deviations may be permitted in drawings when the type of designator can be obviously derived from the illustration. The following symbols are used in drawings:
Earth fault

device-internal logical input signal device-internal logical output signal internal input signal of an analogue quantity external binary input signal with function number Fno external binary output signal with function number Fno

Earth fault
UL1L2
FNo 567

>Release
FNo 5432

Dev. Trip
Parameter address Parameter name

1234 FUNCTION On Off

Parameter options

example of a parameter switch designated FUNCTION with the address 1234 and the possible settings On and Off

Besides these, graphical symbols are used according to IEC 6061712 and IEC 6061713 or similar. Some of the most frequently used are listed below:

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-11

iii

Preface

Input signal of an analogue quantity

or

OR gate

&
signal inversion

AND gate

=1

ExclusiveOR gate (antivalence): output is active, if only one of the inputs is active Coincidence gate (equivalence): output is active, if both input are active or inactive at the same time Dynamic inputs (edgetriggered) above with positive, below with negative edge Formation of one analogue output signal from a number of analogue input signals (example: 3)

2610 Iph>>

Iph> 2611 T Iph>> T 0

Limit stage with setting address and parameter designator (name)

Timer (pickup delay T, example adjustable) with setting address and parameter designator (name)

Timer (dropout delay T, example non-adjustable)

Dynamic triggered pulse timer T (monoflop)

S R

Q Q

Static memory (RSflipflop) with setting input (S), resetting input (R), output (Q) and inverted output (Q)

Furthermore, the graphic symbols according IEC 6061712 and IEC 6061713 or similar are used in most cases. n

iv

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-11

Table of Contents
1 Introduction.......................................................................................................................................... 1 1.1 1.2 1.3 Overall Operation ................................................................................................................... 2 Applications ............................................................................................................................ 6 Characteristics........................................................................................................................ 9

Functions............................................................................................................................................ 15 2.1 2.1.1 2.1.2 2.1.2.1 2.1.2.2 2.1.3 2.1.3.1 2.1.3.2 2.1.3.3 2.1.3.4 2.1.3.5 2.1.4 2.1.4.1 2.1.5 2.1.5.1 2.1.5.2 2.1.6 2.1.6.1 2.1.6.2 2.2 2.2.1 2.2.1.1 2.2.1.2 2.2.1.3 2.2.1.4 2.2.1.5 2.2.2 2.2.2.1 2.2.2.2 2.2.2.3 2.2.2.4 2.2.2.5 General................................................................................................................................. 17 Configuration of Functions.................................................................................................... 19 General Device Data ............................................................................................................ 23 Setting Notes ........................................................................................................................ 24 Information Overview............................................................................................................ 24 Power System Data 1........................................................................................................... 26 Power System ...................................................................................................................... 26 Current Transformers (CTs) ................................................................................................ 28 Voltage Transformers (VTs) ................................................................................................ 28 Circuit Breaker (CB) ............................................................................................................. 29 Information .......................................................................................................................... 30 Waveform Capture ............................................................................................................... 31 Information ........................................................................................................................... 32 Setting Groups ..................................................................................................................... 33 Settings ................................................................................................................................ 33 Information ........................................................................................................................... 33 Power System Data 2........................................................................................................... 34 Settings ................................................................................................................................ 36 Information .......................................................................................................................... 37 Overcurrent Protection (50, 50N, 51, 51N)........................................................................... 38 Description ........................................................................................................................... 39 Definite Time, Instantaneous Overcurrent Protection (50, 50N)........................................... 39 Inverse Time-Overcurrent Protection (51, 51N) ................................................................... 43 Dynamic Cold Load Pick-up Function .................................................................................. 46 Inrush Restraint .................................................................................................................... 47 Reverse Interlocking Bus Protection .................................................................................... 49 Programming Time-Overcurrent Settings............................................................................. 50 General................................................................................................................................. 50 Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (50-2, 50-1) ............................................................... 51 Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (51) ............................................................................ 53 Programming Settings for Time-Overcurrent Ground Protection ......................................... 57 Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (51N) ......................................................................... 58

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

Table of Contents

2.2.2.6 2.2.3 2.2.3.1 2.3 2.3.1 2.3.1.1 2.3.1.2 2.3.1.3 2.3.1.4 2.3.2 2.3.2.1 2.3.2.2 2.3.2.3 2.3.2.4 2.3.2.5 2.3.3 2.3.3.1 2.4 2.4.1 2.4.2 2.4.2.1 2.4.2.2 2.4.2.3 2.4.2.4 2.4.2.5 2.4.2.6 2.4.2.7 2.5 2.5.1 2.5.1.1 2.5.1.2 2.5.1.3 2.5.2 2.5.2.1 2.5.2.2 2.5.2.3 2.5.2.4 2.5.2.5 2.6 2.6.1 2.6.1.1 2.6.1.2 2.6.1.3 2.6.2 2.6.2.1 2.6.2.2 2.6.2.3 2.6.2.4 2.6.2.5

Inrush Restraint .................................................................................................................... 58 Settings................................................................................................................................. 59 Information List ..................................................................................................................... 61 Directional Overcurrent Protection (67, 67N)........................................................................ 64 Description of Directional Overcurrent Protection................................................................. 66 Definite Time, Directional Overcurrent Protection ................................................................ 66 Inverse Time, Directional Overcurrent Protection (67-TOC, 67N-TOC) ............................... 68 Determination of Direction .................................................................................................... 70 Reverse Interlocking for Looped Lines ................................................................................. 73 Programming Directional Overcurrent Settings .................................................................... 75 General ................................................................................................................................. 75 Definite-Time, Directional Overcurrent Protection (67-2, 67-1) ............................................ 77 Inverse-Time Directional Overcurrent Protection (67-TOC) ................................................. 78 Programming Settings for Directional Overcurrent Ground Protection................................. 81 Inverse-Time Directional Overcurrent Protection (67N-TOC)............................................... 82 Settings................................................................................................................................. 83 Information List for Directional Ground Overcurrent Protection............................................ 85 Dynamic Cold Load Pick-Up Function (50c, 50Nc, 51Nc, 67c, 67Nc).................................. 87 Description of Dynamic Cold Load Pick-Up Function ........................................................... 87 Programming Settings .......................................................................................................... 90 General ................................................................................................................................. 90 Non-Directional Phase Elements.......................................................................................... 91 Non-Directional Ground Elements ........................................................................................ 91 Directional Phase Elements.................................................................................................. 91 Directional Ground Element.................................................................................................. 92 Settings for Dynamic Cold Load Adjustments ...................................................................... 92 Information List for Dynamic Cold Load Setting Adjustments............................................... 93 Voltage Protection (27, 59) ................................................................................................... 94 Description of Voltage Protection ......................................................................................... 94 Measurement Principle ......................................................................................................... 94 Overvoltage Protection (59).................................................................................................. 95 Undervoltage Protection (27)................................................................................................ 96 Programming Settings ........................................................................................................ 100 Voltage Protection General.............................................................................................. 100 Undervoltage Protection ..................................................................................................... 100 Overvoltage Protection ....................................................................................................... 101 Settings for Voltage Protection .......................................................................................... 102 Information List for Voltage Protection................................................................................ 102 Negative Sequence Protection (46).................................................................................... 104 Description of Negative Sequence Protection .................................................................... 104 Determination of Unbalanced Load .................................................................................... 104 Definite Time Elements (46-1, 46-2)................................................................................... 104 Inverse Time Element (46-TOC)......................................................................................... 105 Programming Settings ........................................................................................................ 107 General ............................................................................................................................... 107 Definite Time Elements....................................................................................................... 107 Inverse Time Element 46-TOC ........................................................................................... 109 Settings for Negative Sequence (Phase Balance) Current Protection ............................... 110 Information List for Negative Sequence Current Protection ............................................... 111

vi

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

Table of Contents

2.7 2.7.1 2.7.2 2.7.3 2.7.3.1 2.7.3.2 2.7.3.3 2.7.3.4 2.7.3.5 2.8 2.8.1 2.8.2 2.8.2.1 2.8.2.2 2.8.2.3 2.8.2.4 2.9 2.9.1 2.9.2 2.9.2.1 2.9.2.2 2.9.2.3 2.9.2.4 2.10 2.10.1 2.10.1.1 2.10.1.2 2.10.1.3 2.10.1.4 2.10.2 2.10.2.1 2.10.2.2 2.10.2.3 2.10.2.4 2.10.2.5 2.10.3 2.10.4 2.10.4.1 2.10.4.2 2.10.5 2.10.6 2.11 2.11.1 2.11.1.1 2.11.1.2 2.11.1.3 2.11.1.4

Motor Protection (Motor Starting Protection, 48 and Start Inhibit for Motors, 66/68).......... 112 Description of Motor Starting Protection............................................................................. 112 Description of Start Inhibit for Motor ................................................................................... 114 Programming Settings ........................................................................................................ 118 General............................................................................................................................... 118 Motor Starting Protection (48) ............................................................................................ 119 Start Inhibit for Motors (66, 86)........................................................................................... 120 Settings .............................................................................................................................. 123 Information ......................................................................................................................... 124 Frequency Protection (81 O/U)........................................................................................... 126 Description of Frequency Protection .................................................................................. 126 Programming Settings ........................................................................................................ 127 General............................................................................................................................... 127 Frequency Protection Settings ........................................................................................... 127 Settings for Frequency Protection ...................................................................................... 128 Information List for Frequency Protectio............................................................................. 129 Thermal Overload Protection (49) ...................................................................................... 130 Description of Thermal Overload Protection....................................................................... 130 Programming Settings ........................................................................................................ 134 General............................................................................................................................... 134 Overload Settings ............................................................................................................... 134 Settings for Thermal Overload Protection .......................................................................... 138 Information List for Thermal Overload Protection............................................................... 139 Monitoring Functions .......................................................................................................... 140 Description of Measured Values Monitoring....................................................................... 140 Hardware Monitoring .......................................................................................................... 140 Software Monitoring............................................................................................................ 141 Monitoring of External Current Transformer Circuits .......................................................... 142 Description of Fuse-Failure-Monitor ................................................................................... 144 Programming Settings for Measured Values Monitoring .................................................... 144 General............................................................................................................................... 144 Measured Values Monitoring.............................................................................................. 144 Fuse-Failure-Monitor .......................................................................................................... 145 Settings for Measured Values Monitoring........................................................................... 145 Information List for Measured Values Monitoring ............................................................... 146 Description of Trip Circuit Monitor (74TC) .......................................................................... 147 Programming Settings for Trip Circuit Monitor ................................................................... 150 Setting for Trip Circuit Monitor............................................................................................ 152 Information ......................................................................................................................... 152 Malfunction Responses of the Monitoring Functions.......................................................... 152 Group Alarms ..................................................................................................................... 154 Sensitive Ground Fault Detection (64, 50Ns, 67Ns)........................................................... 155 Description of Sensitive Ground Fault Detection................................................................ 155 Voltage Element ................................................................................................................. 155 Current Elements................................................................................................................ 156 Determination of Direction .................................................................................................. 156 Location of Ground Connections ........................................................................................ 160

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

vii

Table of Contents

2.11.2 2.11.2.1 2.11.2.2 2.11.2.3 2.11.2.4 2.11.2.5 2.11.2.6 2.11.2.7 2.11.2.8 2.12 2.12.1 2.12.2 2.12.2.1 2.12.2.2 2.13 2.13.1 2.13.1.1 2.13.1.2 2.13.1.3 2.13.1.4 2.13.2 2.13.2.1 2.13.2.2 2.13.2.3 2.13.2.4 2.13.2.5 2.13.2.6 2.13.2.7 2.13.2.8

Programming Settings ........................................................................................................ 161 General Settings ................................................................................................................. 161 Definite Current Stage (50Ns-2, 50Ns-1)............................................................................ 162 Inverse Current Stage (51Ns)............................................................................................. 162 Phase-to-Ground Voltage ................................................................................................... 164 Direction.............................................................................................................................. 164 Current Transformer ........................................................................................................... 166 Settings for Sensitive Ground Fault Detection.................................................................... 166 Information List for Sensitive Ground Fault Detection ........................................................ 168 Intermittent Ground Fault Protection................................................................................... 170 Functional Description ........................................................................................................ 170 Functional Settings ............................................................................................................. 175 Settings of the Intermittent Ground Fault Protection........................................................... 176 Information List of the Intermittent Ground Fault Protection .............................................. 176 Automatic Reclosing System (79M).................................................................................... 177 Description of Automatic Reclosing System ....................................................................... 177 General ............................................................................................................................... 177 Program Execution ............................................................................................................. 178 Controlling Protective Stages ............................................................................................. 184 Zone Sequence Coordination1) .......................................................................................... 186

Programming Settings ........................................................................................................ 188 General Settings ................................................................................................................. 188 Configuration ...................................................................................................................... 190 First Reclosing Attempt....................................................................................................... 191 Second to Fourth Reclosuring Attempt............................................................................... 191 Fifth to Ninth Reclosing Attempt ......................................................................................... 192 Blocking .............................................................................................................................. 192 Zone Sequencing1)............................................................................................................. 193 Controlling Directional/Non-Directional Overcurrent Protection Stages via Cold Load Pickup................................................................................................................ 193 2.13.2.9 Settings for Automatic Reclosing........................................................................................ 194 2.13.2.10Information List for Automatic Reclosing ............................................................................ 199 2.14 2.14.1 2.14.2 2.14.2.1 2.14.2.2 2.15 2.15.1 2.15.2 2.15.2.1 2.15.2.2 2.16 2.16.1 2.16.2 2.16.2.1 2.16.2.2 2.16.2.3 Fault Location ..................................................................................................................... 201 Description of Fault Location .............................................................................................. 201 Setting The Functional Parameters .................................................................................... 203 Settings for Fault Locator.................................................................................................... 204 Information List for Fault Location ...................................................................................... 204 Breaker Failure Protection (50BF) ...................................................................................... 205 Description of Breaker Failure Protection ........................................................................... 205 Programming Settings ........................................................................................................ 208 Settings for Breaker Failure Protection .............................................................................. 209 Information List for Breaker Failure Protection ................................................................... 209 Synchronism and Voltage Check (7SJ64 only) .................................................................. 210 Functional Description ........................................................................................................ 210 Functional Settings ............................................................................................................. 217 General Settings ................................................................................................................. 217 Power System Data ............................................................................................................ 219 Asynchronous Conditions ................................................................................................... 221

viii

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

Table of Contents

2.16.2.4 Synchronous Conditions..................................................................................................... 221 2.16.2.5 Synchrocheck ..................................................................................................................... 222 2.16.3 2.16.4 2.17 2.17.1 2.17.2 2.17.2.1 2.17.2.2 2.18 2.18.1 2.18.2 2.19 2.19.1 2.19.2 2.19.2.1 2.19.2.2 Settings .............................................................................................................................. 222 List of Information ............................................................................................................... 224 Temperature Detection via RTD-boxes .............................................................................. 226 Functional Description ........................................................................................................ 226 Configuration Notes............................................................................................................ 227 Settings .............................................................................................................................. 229 List of Information ............................................................................................................... 233 Phase Rotation ................................................................................................................... 235 Description of Phase Rotation ............................................................................................ 235 Programming Settings ........................................................................................................ 235 Protection Function Logic ................................................................................................... 236 Pickup Logic for the Entire Device...................................................................................... 236 Tripping Logic of the Entire Device..................................................................................... 236 Description ......................................................................................................................... 236 Programming Settings for Tripping Logic ........................................................................... 237

2.19.3 Statistical Counters............................................................................................................. 237 2.19.3.1 Description ......................................................................................................................... 237 2.19.3.2 Reading/Setting/Resetting.................................................................................................. 238 2.20 2.20.1 2.20.1.1 2.20.1.2 2.20.1.3 2.20.1.4 2.20.1.5 2.20.1.6 2.20.2 2.20.3 2.20.3.1 2.20.3.2 2.20.3.3 2.20.3.4 Auxiliary Functions ............................................................................................................. 239 Message Processing .......................................................................................................... 239 Event Log (Operating messages)....................................................................................... 240 Trip Log (Fault messages).................................................................................................. 240 Ground Fault Messages ..................................................................................................... 241 General Interrogation ......................................................................................................... 241 Spontaneous Messages ..................................................................................................... 241 Statistics ............................................................................................................................. 242 Measurements.................................................................................................................... 242 Commissioning Aids ........................................................................................................... 245 Test Messages to the SCADA Interface during Test Operation ......................................... 245 Testing System Ports ......................................................................................................... 246 Checking the Binary Inputs and Outputs ............................................................................ 246 Triggering Oscillographic Recordings................................................................................. 246

2.20.4 Programming Settings ........................................................................................................ 247 2.20.4.1 Settings for Auxiliary Functions .......................................................................................... 247 2.20.4.2 Information List for Auxiliary Functions............................................................................... 248 2.21 2.21.1 2.21.2 2.21.3 2.21.3.1 2.21.4 Breaker Control .................................................................................................................. 252 Types of Commands .......................................................................................................... 253 Steps in the Command Sequence...................................................................................... 254 Interlocking ......................................................................................................................... 255 Interlocked/Non-Interlocked Switching ............................................................................... 255 Recording and acknowledgement of commands................................................................ 262

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

ix

Table of Contents

Installation and Commissioning..................................................................................................... 265 3.1 3.1.1 3.1.2 3.1.2.1 3.1.2.2 3.1.2.3 3.1.2.4 3.1.3 3.1.3.1 3.1.3.2 3.1.3.3 3.1.3.4 3.1.3.5 3.1.3.6 3.1.3.7 3.2 3.2.1 3.2.2 3.3 3.3.1 3.3.2 3.3.3 3.3.4 3.3.5 3.3.6 3.3.7 3.3.8 3.3.9 3.3.10 3.3.11 3.3.12 3.3.13 3.3.14 3.3.15 3.4 Installation and Connections............................................................................................... 266 Installation .......................................................................................................................... 266 Connections........................................................................................................................ 275 Connection Examples for 7SJ62 ........................................................................................ 275 Connection Examples for 7SJ63 ........................................................................................ 275 Connection Examples for 7SJ64 ........................................................................................ 276 General Connections for 7SJ62/63/64................................................................................ 276 Hardware Modifications ...................................................................................................... 279 General ............................................................................................................................... 279 Disassembly of the Device ................................................................................................. 281 Jumper Settings on Printed Circuit Boards of 7SJ62.......................................................... 288 Switching Elements on the Printed Circuit Boards of 7SJ63 .............................................. 294 Switching Elements on the Printed Circuit Boards of 7SJ64 .............................................. 302 Interface Modules ............................................................................................................... 313 Reassembly of Device ........................................................................................................ 317 Checking Connections........................................................................................................ 318 Data Connections ............................................................................................................... 318 Checking Power Plant Connections ................................................................................... 321 Commissioning ................................................................................................................... 323 Testing mode and transmission blocking............................................................................ 324 Checking the System (SCADA) Interface ........................................................................... 324 Checking the Binary Inputs and Outputs ............................................................................ 326 Tests for the Circuit Breaker Failure Protection.................................................................. 329 Testing User-Defined Functions ......................................................................................... 330 Current, Voltage, and Phase Rotation Testing ................................................................... 331 Testing the Reverse Interlocking Scheme (if applicable).................................................... 332 Directional Checks with Load Current ................................................................................ 333 Polarity check for the voltage input U4 (only 7SJ64) .......................................................... 334 Ground Fault Check in a Non-Grounded System ............................................................... 336 Polarity Check for the Current Measuring Input IN............................................................................... 337 Checking the Temperature Measurement via RTD-Box..................................................... 339 Measuring the operating time of the circuit breaker (only 7SJ64) ...................................... 341 Switching Check for the Configured Operating Devices..................................................... 341 Triggering Oscillographic Recordings................................................................................. 342 Final Preparation of the Device .......................................................................................... 344

Technical Data.................................................................................................................................. 345 4.1 4.1.1 4.1.2 4.1.3 4.1.4 4.1.5 4.1.6 General Device Data .......................................................................................................... 346 Analog Inputs...................................................................................................................... 346 Power Supply...................................................................................................................... 346 Binary Inputs and Outputs .................................................................................................. 347 Communications Interfaces ................................................................................................ 349 Electrical Tests ................................................................................................................... 353 Mechanical Stress Tests..................................................................................................... 355

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

Table of Contents

4.1.7 4.1.8 4.1.9 4.1.10 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7 4.8 4.8.1 4.8.2 4.9 4.10 4.11 4.12 4.13 4.14 4.15 4.16 4.17 4.18 4.19 4.20 4.21 4.22 4.23

Climatic Stress Tests.......................................................................................................... 356 Service Conditions.............................................................................................................. 356 Certifications....................................................................................................................... 357 Construction ....................................................................................................................... 357 Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (50 and 50N Elements) ........................................... 359 Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (51 and 51N Elements) ........................................... 360 Directional Time Overcurrent Protection (67 and 67N Elements) ...................................... 370 Inrush Restraint .................................................................................................................. 371 Dynamic Cold Load Pick-up Function (50c, 50Nc, 51Nc, 67c, 67Nc) ................................ 371 Voltage Protection (27 and 59)........................................................................................... 372 Negative Sequence Protection (46).................................................................................... 373 DefiniteTime Elements (46-1 and 46-2)............................................................................ 373 InverseTime Elements (46-TOC)...................................................................................... 373 Motor Starting Protection (48) ............................................................................................ 379 Start Inhibit for Motors (66/68)............................................................................................ 380 Frequency Protection (81 Over-Frequency and Under-Frequency) ................................... 381 Thermal Overload Protection (49) ...................................................................................... 382 Sensitive Ground Fault Detection (64, 50Ns, 67Ns)........................................................... 384 Intermittent Ground Fault Protection .................................................................................. 387 Automatic Reclosing System (79M) ................................................................................... 388 Fault Location ..................................................................................................................... 389 Breaker Failure Protection (50BF)...................................................................................... 389 Synchronism and Voltage Check (25) (7SJ64 only)........................................................... 390 RTD-Boxes for Temperature Detection ............................................................................. 391 User Defined Functions with CFC ...................................................................................... 392 Additional Functions ........................................................................................................... 395 Breaker Control .................................................................................................................. 399 Dimensions......................................................................................................................... 400

Appendix .......................................................................................................................................... 409 A.1 A.1.1 A.1.2 A.1.3 A.1.4 Ordering Information and Accessories ............................................................................... 410 Ordering Information 7SJ62 V4.4 (present release .../EE and higher) ............................... 410 Ordering Information 7SJ62 V4.2 (releases to date until .../DD) ........................................ 413 Ordering Information 7SJ63 V4.4 (present release .../EE and higher) ............................... 415 Ordering Information 7SJ63 V4.2 (releases to date until .../DD) ........................................ 418

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

xi

Table of Contents

A.1.5 A.1.6 A.2 A.2.1 A.2.1.1 A.2.1.2 A.2.2 A.2.2.1 A.2.2.2 A.2.2.3 A.2.2.4 A.2.3 A.2.3.1 A.2.3.2 A.2.3.3 A.2.3.4 A.3 A.3.1 A.3.2 A.3.3 A.3.4 A.4 A.4.1 A.4.2 A.4.3 A.4.4 A.4.5 A.4.6 A.4.7 A.5 A.6 A.7 A.8 A.9 A.10 A.11

Ordering Information 7SJ64 V4.4 ....................................................................................... 420 Accessories ........................................................................................................................ 423 Elementary Diagrams ......................................................................................................... 426 Elementary Diagrams for 7SJ62......................................................................................... 426 Housing for panel flush mounting or cubicle installation..................................................... 426 Panel Surface Mounting ..................................................................................................... 428 Elementary Diagrams for 7SJ63......................................................................................... 432 Housing for panel flush mounting or cubicle installation..................................................... 432 Housing for panel surface mounting ................................................................................... 437 Devices With Detached Operation Unit .............................................................................. 446 Devices for panel surface mounting without Operation Unit............................................... 451 Elementary Diagrams for 7SJ64......................................................................................... 456 Housing for panel flush mounting or cubicle installation..................................................... 456 Housing for panel surface mounting ................................................................................... 460 Housing for Mounting with Detached Operator Panel ........................................................ 464 Devices for panel surface mounting without Operator Panel.............................................. 467 Connection Examples......................................................................................................... 470 Connection Examples for 7SJ62 ........................................................................................ 470 Connection Examples for 7SJ63 ........................................................................................ 476 Connection Examples for 7SJ64 ........................................................................................ 484 Connection Examples for RTD-Box.................................................................................... 493 Default Settings .................................................................................................................. 494 LED Displays ...................................................................................................................... 494 Binary Inputs....................................................................................................................... 494 Binary Outputs .................................................................................................................... 496 Function Keys ..................................................................................................................... 497 Standard Default Display .................................................................................................... 498 Spontaneous Display Annunciations .................................................................................. 499 Pre-Defined CFC Charts..................................................................................................... 500 Interoperability List.............................................................................................................. 503 Protocol-dependent functions ............................................................................................. 505 Functions Overview ............................................................................................................ 506 Settings............................................................................................................................... 508 Overview of the masking features of the user defined information..................................... 541 Information List ................................................................................................................... 545 Measured Values................................................................................................................ 582

Index.................................................................................................................................................. 589

xii

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

Introduction

1
The SIPROTEC 4 7SJ62/63/64 devices are introduced in this section. An overview of the devices is presented in their application, characteristics, and scope of functions. 1.1 1.2 1.3 Overall Operation Applications Characteristics 2 6 9

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000G1140C1471

Introduction

1.1

Overall Operation
The SIPROTEC 4 7SJ62/63/64 are numerical, multi-functional, protective and control devices equipped with a powerful microprocessor. All tasks, such as the acquisition of the measured quantities, issuing of commands to circuit breakers and other primary power system equipment, are processed in a completely digital way. Figure 1-1 illustrates the basic structure of the devices 7SJ62/63, Figure 1-1 illustrates the basic structure of the device 7SJ64.

Analog Inputs

The measuring inputs (MI) section consists of current and voltage transformers. They convert the signals from the measuring transducers to levels appropriate for the internal processing of the device. Four current inputs are available in the MI section. Three inputs are used for measuring of the phase currents. The use of the fourth input depends on the version of the device ordered. The fourth input can be used for measuring the ground current as the residual of the phase current transformers (In), or for measuring the ground current from a separate current transformer (INs/3I0). The latter is used in a highly sensitive

MI
Ia Ib

IA

AD A

AV
ERROR RUN

Status Ic
Output Relays, UserProgrammable

In / INs

Va Vb Vc / 3V0 7 4 1 .
ESC

C D
8 5 2 0 9 6 3 +/-

LEDs on the Front Panel, UserProgrammable

Display on the Front Panel Front PC Port System Serial Interface Rear Service Port Time Synchronization

Operator Control Panel

To PC To SCADA PC/Modem/ RTD-Box DCF 77/ IRIG B

CTRL

ENTER

Binary Inputs, Programmable

Uaux. Figure 1-1

Power Supply

Hardware Structure of the Numerical Device 7SJ62/63

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000G1140C1471

Overall Operation

ground fault protective scheme (INs) or as a polarizing 3I0 current to determine the fault direction. The 7SJ62/63 has three voltage inputs in the MI section. The inputs can either be used to measure the three phase-ground voltages, or two phase-phase voltages and 3V0 from, for example, open delta voltage transformers. Displacement voltage is another term used for 3V0. It is also possible to connect two phase-to-phase voltages in opendelta connection. The 4 voltage transformers of 7SJ64 can either be applied for the input of 3 phaseground voltages, one displacement voltage Uen or a further voltage for the synchronizing function. The analog input quantities from the MI stage are passed on to the input amplification (IA) stage, which provides high-resistance terminations for the analog quantities. The IA stage consists of filters for processing the measured values. The filters are optimized with regard to bandwidth and processing speed.

MI
Ia Ib Ic In / INs Va Vb Vc Vsyn/3V0

IA

AD A

AV
ERROR RUN

Status

Output Relays, UserProgrammable

LEDs on the Front Panel, UserProgrammable

D
7 4 1 .
ESC

Display on the Front Panel Front PC Port System Serial Interface Rear Service Port Additional Port Time Synchronization

Operator Control Panel

8 5 2 0

9 6 3 +/-

To PC To SCADA PC/Modem/ RTD-Box RTD-Box DCF 77/ IRIG B

CTRL

ENTER

Binary Inputs, Programmable

Uaux. Figure 1-2

Power Supply

Hardware Structure of the Numerical Device 7SJ64

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000G1140C1471

Introduction

The analog-to-digital (AD) stage consists of memory components, a multiplexer, and an analog-to-digital (A/D) converter. The A/D converter processes the analog signals from the IA stage. The digital signals from the converter are input to the microcomputer system where they are processed as numerical values in the residing algorithms. Microcomputer System The actual protection and control functions of the 7SJ62/63/64 are processed in the microcomputer system (C). In addition, the C controls the measured quantities. Specifically, the C performs: Filtering and preparation of the measured quantities Continuous monitoring of the measured quantities Monitoring of the pickup conditions for the individual elements and functions Evaluation of limit values and sequences in time Control of signals for the logic functions Decision for trip, close, and other control commands Output of control commands for switching devices (output contacts) Recording of messages and data for events, alarms, faults, and control actions, and provision of their data for analysis Management of the operating system and the associated functions such as data recording, real-time clock, communications, interfaces, etc. Binary Inputs and Outputs The C obtains external information through the binary inputs such as blocking commands for protective elements or position indications of circuit breakers. The C issues commands to external equipment via the output contacts. These output commands are generally used to operate circuit breakers or other switching devices. They can also be connected to other protective devices, annunciators, or external carrier equipment for use in Pilot-Relaying schemes. The devices with integrated or detached operator panel light-emitting diodes (LEDs) and a display screen (LCD) on the front panel providing information such as messages related to events and functional status of the device. Integrated control and numeric keys in conjunction with the LCD facilitate local interaction with the 7SJ62/63/64. All information of the device can be accessed using the integrated control and numeric keys. The information includes protective and control settings, operating and fault messages, and metering values (see also Chapter 2). The settings can be modified; the procedures are discussed in Chapter 2. In addition, control of circuit breakers and other equipment is possible from the 7SJ62/63/64 front panel. Serial Interfaces A serial PC Port on device is provided for local communications with the 7SJ62/63/ 64 through a personal computer. Convenient operation of all functions of the device is possible. The operating program DIGSI 4 is required which facilitates a comfortable handling of all device functions. A separate Service Port can be provided for remote communications via a modem, or substation computer. The operating program DIGSI 4 is required. This port is especially well suited for the fixed wiring of the devices to the PC or operation via a mo-

Front Elements

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000G1140C1471

Overall Operation

dem. The service port can also be used to connect a RTD-Box (= resistance temperature detector) for entering external temperatures (e.g. for overload protection). The additional port (only 7SJ64) is exclusively designed for the connection of a RTDBox (= resistance temperature detector) for entering external temperatures. All 7SJ62/63/64 data can be transferred to a central control and monitor system (RTU/ SCADA) through the Scada Port. Various protocols and physical interfaces are available to suit the particular application. A further port is provided for the time synchronization of the internal clock via external synchronization sources. Further communications protocols can be realized via additional interface modules. Power Supply The 7SJ62/63/64 can be supplied with any of the common power supply voltages from 24 VDC to 250 VDC. The device can also be supplied with 115 VAC. Momentary dips of the supply voltage up to 50 ms are bridged by a capacitor (see Technical Data, Subsection 4.1). Voltage dips can occur, for example, if the voltage supply system (substation battery) becomes short-circuited or experiences a severe variation in load.

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000G1140C1471

Introduction

1.2

Applications
The numerical, multi-functional SIPROTEC 4 7SJ62/63/64 are versatile devices designed for many applications. The 7SJ62/63/64 can be used as protective, control, and monitoring devices for distribution feeders and transmission lines of any voltage in networks that are grounded, low-resistance grounded, ungrounded, or of a compensated neutral point structure. The devices are suited for networks that are radial or looped, and for lines with single or multi-terminal feeds. The 7SJ62/63/64 are equipped with motor protection applicable for asynchronous machines of all sizes. The 7SJ62/63/64 includes the functions that are necessary for protection, monitoring of circuit breaker positions, and control of the circuit breakers in straight bus applications or breaker-and-a-half configurations; therefore, the devices can be universally employed. The 7SJ62/63/64 provides excellent backup facilities of differential protective schemes of lines, transformers, generators, motors, and busbars of all voltage levels.

Protective Functions

Non-directional overcurrent protection (50, 50N, 51, 51N) is the basis of the 7SJ62/63/ 64. Four definite-time overcurrent protective elements exist, two for the phase and two for the ground (50 and 50N) currents. The elements can be set with no time delay, where instantaneous tripping is desired. Inverse-time overcurrent protective elements are also available for both the phase and the ground (51 and 51N) currents. The common U.S. ANSI time-characteristics are also available. Alternatively, user-defined characteristics can be programmed or IEC characteristics can be selected. Depending on the version of the device that is ordered, the non-directional overcurrent protection can be supplemented with directional overcurrent protection (67, 67N), breaker failure protection (50BF), and sensitive ground fault detection for high-resistance ground faults or systems that are resistively grounded (50 Ns, 67Ns). The highly sensitive ground fault detection can be directional or non-directional. Other protective functions are available, some of which depend on the version of the device that is ordered. These additional functions include negative sequence (phase balance) current protection (46), automatic reclosing (79), thermal overload protection (49), overvoltage protection (59), undervoltage protection (27), and over/under frequency protection (81O/U). For motor protection, starting time supervision (48), start inhibit (66/68), and undercurrent monitoring (37) are optionally available. Finally, the 7SJ62/63/64 is equipped with a fault locator. A protection feature can be ordered for the detection of intermittent ground faults which detects and accumulates transient ground faults. External detectors account for ambient temperatures or coolant temperatures (by means of an external RTD-box). Before reclosing after three-pole tripping 7SJ64 can verify the validity of the reclosure by voltage check and/or synchronous check. The synchronization function can also be controlled externally.

Control Functions

The 7SJ62/63/64 supports all control and monitoring functions that are required for operating medium to high-voltage substations. A major application is the reliable control of switchgear or circuit breakers. Such control can be accomplished via the integrated operator panel, the system interface, the binary inputs, and the serial port using a personal computer with DIGSI 4.

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000G1140C1471

Applications

The status of the primary equipment or auxiliary devices can be transmitted to the 7SJ62/63/64 via auxiliary contacts connected to binary inputs. The present status (or position) of the primary equipment can be displayed on the 7SJ62/63/64, and used for interlocking or, if applicable, plausibility monitoring. Only the quantity of binary inputs and outputs available in the 7SJ62/63/64 limits the number of primary devices that can be operated. Depending on the primary equipment being controlled, one binary input (single indication) or two binary inputs (double indication) can be used in the position monitoring process. The capability of switching primary equipment can be restricted by a setting associated with switching authority Local, DIGSI 4 PC, or Remote, and by the operating mode Interlocked or Non-Interlocked, with password request. Processing of interlocking conditions for switching (e.g. switching error protection) can be established with the aid of integrated, user-configurable logic functions. Messages and Measured Values; Recording of Event and Fault Data The operating messages provide information about conditions in the power system and the 7SJ62/63/64. Measurement quantities and values that are calculated can be displayed locally and communicated via the serial interfaces. Messages of the 7SJ62/63/64 can be indicated by a number of programmable LEDs on the front panel, externally processed through programmable output contacts, and communicated via the serial interfaces (see Communication below). Important events and changes in conditions are saved under Annunciation in the Event Log or the Trip Log, the latter being used for faults. Waveform capture is available, as an option. Communication Serial interfaces are available for communications with PCs, RTUs, and SCADA systems. A 9-pin D-subminiature female connector on the front panel is used for local communications with a personal computer. DIGSI 4 software is required to communicate via this port. Using the DIGSI 4 software, settings and configuration can be made to the relay, Realtime operating quantities can be viewed, Waveform capture and Event Log records can be displayed, and controls can be issued. A DIGSI 4 service interface port, a system (SCADA) port and a time-sync port (IRIGB or DCF77) are optionally available on the rear of the device. A rear service interface can be supplied as RS-232, RS-485, or multimode fiber optics type ST. DIGSI 4 software is required to communicate via this port. The additional port (only 7SJ64) is designed exclusively for connection of a RTD-Box (= resistance temperature detector) for entering external temperatures. It can also be operated via data lines or fibre optic cables. A rear system interface can be supplied as RS-232, RS-485, or multimode fiber optics type ST for communications between the 7SJ62/63/64 and a PCs, RTUs, or SCADA systems Standard Protocols, IEC 608705103 are available via the system port. Integration of the devices into the automation systems SINAUT LSA and SICAM also take place with this profile. Alternatively, a field bus coupling with PROFIBUS FMS is available for the 7SJ62/63/ 64. The PROFIBUS FMS is performed in accordance with IEC 61850, is an open communications standard that particularly has wide acceptance in process control and automation engineering, with especially high performance. A profile has been defined for the PROFIBUS communication that covers all of the information types required for

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000G1140C1471

Introduction

protective and process control engineering. The integration of the devices into the energy automation system SICAM can also take place with this profile. Besides the field-bus connection with PROFIBUS FMS, further couplings are possible with PROFIBUS DP and the protocols DNP3.0 and MODBUS. These protocols do not support all possibilities which are offered by PROFIBUS FMS.

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000G1140C1471

Characteristics

1.3

Characteristics
Powerful 32-bit microprocessor system. Complete digital processing and control of measured values, from the sampling of the analog input quantities to the initiation of outputs for, as an example, tripping or closing circuit breakers or other switchgear devices. Total electrical separation between the processing stages of the 7SJ62/63/64 and the external transformer circuits, control circuits, and DC supply circuit because of the design of the binary inputs, outputs, and the DC converters. Complete set of functions necessary for the proper protection of lines, feeders, motors, and busbars. Easy devise operation through an integrated operator panel or by means of a connected personal computer running DIGSI 4. Continuous calculation and display of measured quantities on the front of the device. Storage of min/max measured values (slave pointer function) and storage of longterm mean values; Recording of event data, fault data, and waveform captures with SER information to be used for analysis and troubleshooting. Constant monitoring of the measurement quantities, as well as continuous self-diagnostics covering the hardware and software. Communication with SCADA or substation controller equipment via serial interfaces through the choice of data cable, modem, or optical fibers. Battery-buffered clock that can be synchronized with an IRIG-B (or DCF77) signal, binary input signal, or system interface command; Recording of circuit breaker statistics including the number of trip signals sent and the accumulated, interrupted currents of each pole of the circuit breaker; Tracking of operating hours (time when load is supplied) of the equipment being protected; Commissioning aids such as connection check, direction determination, status indication of all binary inputs/outputs and display of test recordings.

General Characteristics

Time-Overcurrent Protection

Two instantaneous (Definite-Time) overcurrent elements and an inverse-time overcurrent element, for both phase protection and ground protection (50-1, 50-2, 51, 50N-1, 50N-2, and 51N); The 50 and 50N elements can be set with definite-time delay; Common ANSI and IEC time overcurrent curves are available for 51 and 51N, or user defined characteristics can be employed. Blocking capability for reverse-interlocking busbar protection, or directional comparison line protection; Second harmonic inrush restraint of 50, 50N, 51, and 51N for transformer energizing; Instantaneous tripping by any overcurrent element upon manual closure of a circuit breaker, if selected (Switch-Onto-Fault-Protection). 9

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000G1140C1471

Introduction

Directional TimeOvercurrent Protection

Three directional time-overcurrent elements for both phase protection and ground protection (67-1, 67-2, 67-TOC, 67N-1, 67N-2, and 67N-TOC). The 67 and 67N elements can have instantaneous or definite-time tripping. The 67-TOC and 67NTOC elements have inverse-time characteristics. The directional time-overcurrent elements are independent of the non-directional time-overcurrent elements; Fault direction is calculated for each phase and direction is determined independently for phase faults (using phase-phase voltage opposite of the current being compared) and for ground faults (using zero sequence quantities).

Dynamic Cold Load Setting Adjustment

Dynamic adjustments of the pickup values and the tripping times of both the directional and non-directional time-overcurrent functions when cold load conditions are anticipated; Cold load conditions are anticipated when the circuit breaker has been in the open position for an extended period of time. Circuit breaker position is determined by auxiliary contacts or the state of a sensitive overcurrent element. Activation via automatic reclosure (AR) possible; Start also possible via binary input.

Voltage Protection

Two undervoltage elements 27-1 and 27-2 measuring positive sequence voltage; Choice of current supervision for 27-1 and 27-2; Adjustable dropout voltage for 27-1; Separate two overvoltage elements 59-1 and 59-2.

Negative Sequence Current Protection

Two definite-time elements 46-1 and 46-2 and one inverse-time element 46-TOC; Common U.S. ANSI time-characteristics or IEC characteristics are available for 46TOC. Current dependent tripping based on an evaluation of the motor starting current. Blocked rotor protection. Rotor temperature is calculated based on the stator currents; Start-up is permitted only if the rotor has sufficient thermal reserves for a complete start-up; Disabling of the start inhibit is possible if an emergency start-up is required.

Starting Time Monitoring for Motors Start Inhibit for Motors

Frequency Protection

Four elements that are independently adjustable for function - underfrequency or overfrequency, pickup, and time delay; Insensitive to harmonics and abrupt phase angle changes; Adjustable undervoltage blocking.

Thermal Overload Protection

Temperature rise of the protected equipment is calculated using a thermal homogeneous-body model that takes into account energy entering the equipment and energy losses. Thermal overload protection has full memory capability;

10

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000G1140C1471

Characteristics

True r.m.s. calculation; Adjustable warning levels based on temperature rise and current magnitude; Additional time constant setting for motors to accommodate both the motor rotating and the motor at standstill. Integration of ambient temperature or coolant temperature is possible via external temperature sensors and RTD-Box. Monitoring Functions Availability of the 7SJ62/63/64 is greatly increased because of self-monitoring of the internal measurement circuits, power supply, hardware, and software; Current transformer and voltage transformer secondary circuits are monitored using summation and symmetry check techniques; Trip circuit monitoring; Phase rotation. Sensitive Ground Fault Detection Ideal for sensing a grounded phase on ungrounded networks; Displacement voltage (3V0) is calculated from the measurements of the three phase-ground voltages, or measured from the output of, for example, voltage transformers connected in a open delta configuration; Ground fault detection optionally with high sensitivity or for large current range; Two sensitive ground fault instantaneous overcurrent elements 50Ns-1 and 50Ns2 that can have definite time delay; Pickup currents of 50Ns-1 and 50Ns-2 are adjustable and can be set very sensitive (as low as 1 mA); Sensitive ground fault time-overcurrent element 51Ns is available instead of 50Ns1, if selected; Time-current characteristic curve for 51Ns is defined by the user; Two ground fault elements 67Ns-1 and 67Ns-2 that can be set as non-directional, forward sensing directional, or reverse sensing directional; Fault direction is determined by calculating the zero sequence real power or reactive power, as determined by a setting; Directional characteristics of 67Ns-1 and 67Ns-2 are adjustable; Optionally applicable as additional ground fault protection. Intermittent Ground Fault Protection Detects and accumulates intermittent ground faults; Tripping after configurable total time. Single-shot or multi-shot; Dead times associated with the first, second, third, and fourth shots are programmable and can be different from one another. Dead times for the remaining shots are identical to the dead time for the fourth shot; Protective elements that initiate automatic reclosing are selectable. The choices can be different for phase faults and ground faults; Different programs for phase and ground faults; 11

Automatic Reclosing

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000G1140C1471

Introduction

Monitoring of the circuit breaker response during reclosing sequence is possible. Interaction to time overcurrent protection stages and ground fault stages. They can be blocked in dependence of the reclosing cycle or released instantaneously; Synchronous reclosing is possible (only 7SJ64) in combination with the integrated synchronizing feature. Fault Location Triggers include a trip command, reset of the trip command, operation of a protective element, and an external command via a binary input; Fault distance is calculated and given in secondary ohms, miles, or kilometers. Breaker Failure Protection Breaker failure condition determined by current flow and/or evaluation of the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts after a trip signal has been issued; Breaker failure protection initiated by the tripping of any integrated protective element that trips the circuit breaker (internal start); Initiation possible through a binary input from an external protective device (external start); Initiation possible through the integrated control function (control start). Synchronizing Function (only 7SJ64) Verification of the synchronous conditions before reclosing after three-pole tripping; Fast measurement of the voltage difference U, the phase angle difference and the frequency difference f; Alternatively, check of the de-energized state before reclosing; Switching possible for asynchronous system conditions with prediction of the synchronization time; Settable minimum and maximum voltage; Verification of the synchronous conditions or de-energized state also possible before the manual closing of the circuit breaker, with separate limit values; Measurement also possible via transformer without external intermediate matching transformer; Measuring voltages optionally phasephase or phaseground. RTD-Boxes Detection of any ambient temperatures or coolant temperatures by means of RTDBoxes and external temperature sensors. Selectable ABC or ACB with a setting (static) or binary input (dynamic). Internal and external signals can be logically combined to establish user-defined logic functions; All common logic functions are available for programming (AND, OR,NOT, Exclusive OR, etc.); Time delays and limit value inquiries are available; Processing of measured values, including zero suppression, adding a knee characteristic for a transducer input, and live-zero monitoring.

Phase Rotation User-defined Functions

12

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000G1140C1471

Characteristics

Breaker Control

Circuit breakers can be opened and closed via the process control keys (models with graphic displays only) or the programmable function keys on the front panel, through the SCADA, or through the front PC interface using a personal computer with DIGSI 4; Circuit breakers are monitored via the breaker auxiliary contacts; Plausibility monitoring of the circuit breaker position and check of interlocking conditions. n

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000G1140C1471

13

Introduction

14

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000G1140C1471

Functions

2
This chapter describes the numerous functions available on the SIPROTEC 7SJ62/ 63/64 relay. The setting options for each function are defined, including instructions for reporting setting values and formulas where required. 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 2.9 2.10 2.11 2.12 2.13 2.14 2.15 2.16 2.17 2.18 2.19 2.20 2.21 General Overcurrent Protection (50, 50N, 51, 51N) Directional Overcurrent Protection (67, 67N) Dynamic Cold Load Pick-Up Function (50c, 50Nc, 51Nc, 67c, 67Nc) Voltage Protection (27, 59) Negative Sequence Protection (46) 17 38 64 87 94 104

Motor Protection (Motor Starting Protection, 48 and Start Inhibit for Motors, 66/68) 112 Frequency Protection (81 O/U) Thermal Overload Protection (49) Monitoring Functions Sensitive Ground Fault Detection (64, 50Ns, 67Ns) Intermittent Ground Fault Protection Automatic Reclosing System (79M) Fault Location Breaker Failure Protection (50BF) Synchronism and Voltage Check (7SJ64 only) Temperature Detection via RTD-boxes Phase Rotation Protection Function Logic Auxiliary Functions Breaker Control 126 130 140 155 170 177 201 205 210 226 235 236 239 252

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

15

Functions

Regionalization

The SIPROTEC 7SJ62/63/64 devices are offered in regional versions. The prepared functions are adapted to the technical requirements of the regions. The user should purchase only the functional scope that is needed.

Table 2-1 Function Language Frequency

Regionalization Region DE Germany German 50 Hz km Region Worldwide Worldwide English 50 Hz / 60 Hz Default 50 Hz km / Miles Default km for IEC- and ANSI Curves Region US USA American English 60 Hz Miles X

Unit of distance given by Fault Locator

Disk-emulation for reset X characteristics of inverse time-overcurrent elements (emulation of (electromechanical elements) Characteristic curves for inverse time-overcurrent elements IEC Curves X

X Default IEC Characteristic Curves X

ANSI Curves Automatic Reclosing Automatic Reclosing with zone sequence coordination Control Buttons on Front Panel (7SJ63, 7SJ64)

Red, Green Control Buttons

Red, Green Control Buttons

Gray Colored Control Buttons

Legend (X) Selectable Option () Function not available for this region

16

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

General

2.1

General
The settings associated with the various device functions may be modified using the controls on the front panel of the device or by using the operator interface in DIGSI 4 in conjunction with a personal computer. The SIPROTEC 4System Manual gives a detailed description of the procedure. Therefore, it will only be described briefly here. Password No. 5 is required to modify individual settings.

From PC with DIGSI 4

To select a function, the user should double-click on Settings, and then double-click on the desired setting function (e.g. Power System Data 1 is selected by doubleclicking Settings, and then double-clicking Power System Data 1 as illustrated in Figure 2-1).

Figure 2-1

Navigating Using DIGSI 4 Example

A dialog box associated with the selected function is displayed (e.g., if Power System Data 1 function is selected, the dialog box shown in Figure 2-2 will appear). If a function contains many settings, the dialog box may include multiple windows. In this situation, the user can select individual windows via tabs located at the top of the dialog box (e.g., In Figure 2-2, tabs exist for Power System, CTs, VTs, and Breaker).

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

17

Functions

Figure 2-2

Power System Data Dialog Box in DIGSI 4 Example

The left column of the dialog box (identified as the No. column) contains the four-digit address number of the setting. The middle column of the dialog box (identified as the Settings column) contains the title of the setting, and the right column of the dialog box (identified as the Value column) contains the current value of the setting in text or numerical format. When the mouse cursor is positioned over a numerical field in the Value column, the allowable range is shown. To modify a setting, the user must click on the setting value which is displayed in the Value column. Text Values When a text setting value is selected, a pull-down menu of possible setting options is displayed. To modify the setting, the user simply clicks on the desired option. The pulldown menu closes, and the new setting value appears in the Value column. When a numerical setting value is selected, the setting is modified using the number keys, if applicable, with a decimal comma (not a decimal point). A value of infinity may be entered by pressing the small o key twice. The setting modification is confirmed by clicking on Apply, or the user may select another setting to modify. If the value entered is outside the allowable range, a message block appears on the screen describing the error and displaying the acceptable range of values. To acknowledge the message, the user should click OK, and the original value reappears. A new entry can be made or another setting value can be modified. Primary or Secondary Values Setting values can be entered and displayed in primary terms or secondary terms, as desired. DIGSI 4 automatically performs the conversions. For this, the station data have to be entered correctly.

Numerical Values (including )

18

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

General

To switch between primary values and secondary values:

G G

Click on Options in the menu bar, as shown in Figure 2-3. Click on the desired alternative.

Figure 2-3

Selection of Primary or Secondary Value Entry Example

Additional Settings

Those settings that are modified only in special cases are typically hidden. They may be made visible by checking on Display Additional Settings.

2.1.1
General

Configuration of Functions
The 7SJ62/63/64 relay contains selectable protection functions as well as many other functions, based on the options purchased. The first step in configuring the relay is to determine which functions are required. Example for the configuration of functional scope: A protected system consists of overhead and underground feeders. Since automatic reclosing is only needed for the overhead feeders, the automatic reclosing function is not configured or Disabled for the relays protecting the underground feeders. The available functions must be configured as enabled or disabled. For individual functions, the choice between several alternatives may be presented, as described below. Functions configured as disabled are not processed by the 7SJ62/63/64. There are no messages, and corresponding settings (functions, limit values) are not displayed during detailed settings.

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

19

Functions

Note: Available functions and default settings are depending on the ordering code of the relay (see table 2-1 and ordering code in the appendix for details).

Determination of Functional Scope

Configuration settings must be entered using a PC and the software program DIGSI 4 and transferred via the front serial port, or via the DIGSI 4 serial port interface. Operation via DIGSI 4 is described in the SIPROTEC 4 System Manual. Entry of password No. 7 (for setting modification) is required to modify configuration settings (see Section 4). Without the password, the settings may be read, but may not be modified and transmitted to the device. The functional scope with the available alternatives is set in the Device Configuration dialog box to match equipment requirements.

Special Characteristics

Most settings are self-explaining. Peculiarities will be explained in the following. If use of the setting group change function is desired, address 0103 Grp Chge OPTION should be set to Enabled. In this case, up to four different groups of settings (see Chapter 6) may be entered quickly and easily during device operation. Only one setting group may be selected and used if the setting is Disabled. For the relay elements associated with non-directional overcurrent protection (both phase and ground), various tripping characteristics may be selected at the addresses 0112 Charac. Phase and 0113 Charac. Ground. If only the definite time characteristic is desired, then Definite Time should be selected. Additionally, depending on the relay model ordered, various inverse time characteristics are available (based on either IEC (TOC IEC) standards or ANSI (TOC ANSI) standards), or user defined characteristics may be specified. The dropout behavior of the IEC and ANSI curves will be specified later during the setting (addresses 1210 and 1310), however, for the user-defined characteristic you determine in address 0112 and 0113 whether to specify only the pick-up characteristic (User Defined PU) or the pick-up and the dropout characteristic (User def. Reset). The superimposed high-current stage 50-2 is available in all these cases. Non-directional overcurrent protection may be defeated during configuration by selecting Disabled. For directional overcurrent protection, the same information can be entered at addresses 0115 67/67-TOC (phase) and 0116 67N/67N-TOC (ground) that was entered for the non-directional overcurrent protection at addresses 0112 and 0113. For sensitive ground fault protection, address 0131 Sens. Gnd Fault is used to specify whether the function should be Disabled, enabled with definite time tripping characteristics only (Definite Time), or enabled with a user defined inverse time characteristic (User Defined PU). For the intermittent ground-fault protection specify in address 0133 INTERM.EF the measured quantity (with Ignd, with 3I0 or with Ignd,sens.) which is to be used by this protection function. For negative sequence protection, address 0140 46 is used to specify whether the function should be Disabled, enabled with Definite Time tripping characteristics only, or enabled with an inverse time characteristic (TOC IEC or TOC ANSI).

20

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

General

Set in address 0142 49 for the overload protection whether (With amb. temp.) or not (No ambient temp) the thermal replica of the overload protection will account for a coolant temperature or ambient temperature or whether the entire function is set to Disabled. Up to four function groups are available for the synchronizing function. They are enabled in address 016x (x = 1 ... 4). Parameters 0161 25 Function 1 to 0164 25 Function 4 indicate whether a synchronizing function is to be Disabled or enabled. The latter is determined by pre-selecting the operating mode ASYN/SYNCHRON (switching takes place for asynchronous and synchronous conditions) or SYNCHROCHECK (corresponds to the classical synchro-check function). The function groups which are configured to enabled via ASYN/SYNCHRON or SYNCHROCHECK are displayed when you select the synchronizing function; function groups set to Disabled are hidden. For trip circuit monitoring, address 00182 74 Trip Ct Supv is used to specify whether two binary inputs should be utilized (2 Binary Inputs), one binary input should be utilized (1 Binary Input), or the function should be Disabled. If you want to detect an ambient temperature or a coolant temperature and send the information to the overload protection, specify in address 0190 RTD-BOX INPUT the port to which the RTD-box is connected. For 7SJ62/63 Port C (service port) is used for this purpose, for 7SJ64 either Port C (service port) or Port D (additional port). The number and transmission type of the temperature detectors (RTD = Resistance Temperature Detector) can be specified in address 0191 RTD CONNECTION: 6 RTD simplex or 6 RTD HDX (with one RTD-box) or 12 RTD HDX (with two RTD-boxes). Appendix A.3.4 gives design examples. The settings in address 0191 has to comply with those at the RTD-box (see Subsection 2.17.2).

Addr. 103 104 112

Setting Title Grp Chge OPTION Disabled Enabled OSC. FAULT REC. Disabled Enabled Charac. Phase

Setting Options

Default Setting Disabled Disabled Definite Time only

Comments Setting Group Change Option Oscillographic Fault Records 50/51

Disabled Definite Time only Time Overcurrent Curve IEC Time Overcurrent Curve ANSI User Defined Pickup Curve User Defined Pickup and Reset Curve Disabled Definite Time only Time Overcurrent Curve IEC Time Overcurrent Curve ANSI User Defined Pickup Curve User Defined Pickup and Reset Curve Disabled Definite Time only Time Overcurrent Curve IEC Time Overcurrent Curve ANSI User Defined Pickup Curve User Defined Pickup and Reset Curve

113

Charac. Ground

Definite Time only

50N/51N

115

67/67-TOC

Definite Time only

67, 67-TOC

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

21

Functions

Addr. 116

Setting Title 67N/67N-TOC

Setting Options Disabled Definite Time only Time Overcurrent Curve IEC Time Overcurrent Curve ANSI User Defined Pickup Curve User Defined Pickup and Reset Curve Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Definite Time only User Defined Pickup Curve Disabled with Ignd (measured) with 3I0 (calculated) with Ignd,sensitive (measured) Disabled Time Overcurrent Curve ANSI Time Overcurrent Curve IEC Definite Time only Disabled Enabled Disabled Without ambient temperature measurement With ambient temperature measurement Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled ASYN/SYNCHRON SYNCHROCHECK Disabled ASYN/SYNCHRON SYNCHROCHECK Disabled ASYN/SYNCHRON SYNCHROCHECK Disabled ASYN/SYNCHRON SYNCHROCHECK

Default Setting Definite Time only

Comments 67N, 67N-TOC

117 122 131

Coldload Pickup InrushRestraint Sens. Gnd Fault

Disabled Disabled Disabled

Cold Load Pickup 2nd Harmonic Inrush Restraint sensitive Ground fault

133

INTERM.EF

Disabled

Intermittent earth fault protection

140

46

Disabled

46 Negative Sequence Protection

141 142

48 49

Disabled Disabled

48 Startup Supervision of Motors 49 Thermal Overload Protection

143 150 154 161

66 #of Starts 27/59 81 O/U 25 Function 1

Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

66 Startup Counter for Motors 27, 59 Under/Overvoltage Protection 81 Over/Underfrequency Protection 25 Function group 1

162

25 Function 2

Disabled

25 Function group 2

163

25 Function 3

Disabled

25 Function group 3

164

25 Function 4

Disabled

25 Function group 4

22

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

General

Addr. 170 171 180 182

Setting Title 50BF 79 Auto Recl. Fault Locator 74 Trip Ct Supv Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled

Setting Options

Default Setting Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

Comments 50BF Breaker Failure Protection 79 Auto-Reclose Function Fault Locator 74TC Trip Circuit Supervision

Disabled with 2 Binary Inputs with 1 Binary Input Disabled Port C Port D (only 7SJ64) 6 RTD simplex operation 6 RTD half duplex operation 12 RTD half duplex operation

190

RTD-BOX INPUT

Disabled

External Temperature Input

191

RTD CONNECTION

6 RTD simplex ope- Ext. Temperature Input Conration nection Type

2.1.2

General Device Data

The device requires some general information such as the type of annunciation to be issued in the event a power system fault occurs. The required data can be entered directly at the device if it features an integrated or detached operator panel: Select the MAIN MENU by pressing the MENU key. Using the key, select Settings, and then press the key to navigate to the SETTINGS display. There use the key to select the Device submenu. Double-click SETTINGS in DIGSI 4 and the corresponding menu appears. A dialog box will open under the option Device in which you can configure the individual parameters.

No Trip No Flag Option

The indication of messages masked to local LEDs, and the maintenance of spontaneous messages, can be made dependent on whether the device has issued a trip signal. In this situation, messages are not reported, if one or more protective functions have picked up on a fault, but a trip signal has not been issued yet by the device because the fault was cleared by another device (for instance, in another line). These messages are then limited to faults in the line to be protected. Figure 2-4 shows the logic diagram for this function. When the relay drops off, stationary conditions (fault display on every pickup/on trip only; trip/no trip) decide whether the new fault will be stored or reset.

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

23

Functions

0610 FltDisp.LED/LCD Targets on every PU

1

Targets on Trip only

F# 00511

Relay TRIP Trip Signal drop out

&

Reset LED und LCD-Messages

Figure 2-4

Generation of Reset Command for LED and LCD Display Memory

Spontaneous Annunciations on the Display

You can determine whether or not the most important data of a fault event is displayed automatically after the fault has occurred (see also Subsection 2.20.1.2).

2.1.2.1

Setting Notes Pickup of a new protective function generally turns off any previously set light displays, so that only the latest fault is displayed at any time. It can be selected whether the stored LED displays and the spontaneous messages on the display appear upon renewed pickup, or only after a renewed trip signal is issued. In order to enter the desired type of display, select the sub-menu Device in the SETTINGS menu. The two alternatives (Target on PU or Target on TRIP) are selected at address 0610 FltDisp.LED/LCD. Use parameter 0611 Spont. FltDisp. to specify whether or not a spontaneous fault annunciation will appear on the display.

Addr. 610

Setting Title FltDisp.LED/LCD

Setting Options

Default Setting

Comments

Display Targets on every Display Targets on Fault Display on LED / LCD Pickup every Pickup Display Targets on TRIP only YES NO NO Spontaneous display of flt.annunciations

611

Spont. FltDisp.

2.1.2.2
F.No.

Information Overview
Alarm Comments >Synchronize Internal Real Time Clock >Reset LED >Back Light on Device is Operational and Protecting At Least 1 Protection Funct. is Active

00003 >Time Synch 00005 >Reset LED --->Light on

00051 Device OK 00052 ProtActive

24

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

General

F.No. 00055 Reset Device 00056 Initial Start 00060 Reset LED 00067 Resume 00068 Clock SyncError

Alarm Reset Device Initial Start of Device Reset LED Resume Clock Synchronization Error Daylight Saving Time Event lost Flag Lost Chatter ON Error with a summary alarm Alarm Summary Event I/O-Board Error Error 5V Error 0V Error -5V Error Power Supply Failure: Battery empty

Comments

00069 DayLightSavTime 00110 Event Lost 00113 Flag Lost 00125 Chatter ON 00140 Error Sum Alarm 00160 Alarm Sum Event 00178 I/O-Board error 00144 Error 5V 00145 Error 0V 00146 Error -5V 00147 Error PwrSupply 00177 Fail Battery 00070 Settings Calc. 00071 Settings Check 00072 Level-2 change 00073 Local change 00183 Error Board 1 00184 Error Board 2 00185 Error Board 3 00186 Error Board 4 00187 Error Board 5 00188 Error Board 6 00189 Error Board 7 00301 Pow.Sys.Flt. 00302 Fault Event 00303 sens Gnd flt ---DataStop

Setting calculation is running Settings Check Level-2 change Local setting change Error Board 1 Error Board 2 Error Board 3 Error Board 4 Error Board 5 Error Board 6 Error Board 7 Power System fault Fault Event sensitive Ground fault Stop data transmission >Stop data transmission Test mode

00016 >DataStop ---Test mode

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

25

Functions

F.No. 00015 >Test mode ------------------Feeder gnd Brk OPENED HWTestMod SynchClock Error FMS1 Error FMS2

Alarm >Test mode Feeder GROUNDED Breaker OPENED Hardware Test Mode Clock Synchronization Error FMS FO 1 Error FMS FO 2

Comments

2.1.3

Power System Data 1

The device requires certain basic data regarding the protected equipment, so that the device will be compatible with its desired application. Phase sequence data, nominal system frequency data, CT&PT ratios and their physical connections, as well as, breaker operating times and minimum current thresholds are selected in the Power System Data 1 display. To modify these settings from the front of the device, the user should press the MENU key and wait for the MAIN MENU to appear. From the MAIN MENU, the user should use the key to select Settings, and then use the key to navigate to the SETTINGS display. To obtain the P.System Data1 display, the user should use the key to select P.System Data1 in the SETTINGS display, and then press the ENTER key. To modify settings associated with Power System Data 1 using DIGSI 4, the user should double-click Settings, and then Power System Data 1, and the desired selection options will be displayed. A dialog box opens under Power System Data 1 which contains the tabs Power System, CTs, VTs and Circuit Breaker. In these tabs individual settings are configured. Thus the following Subsections are structured accordingly.

2.1.3.1

Power System Address 0214 Rated Frequency corresponds to the frequency at which the protected equipment operate. The setting is dependent on the model number of the relay purchased, and must be in accordance with the nominal frequency of the power system. Address 0209 PHASE SEQ. is used to establish phase rotation. The default phase sequence is A B C. For systems that use a phase sequence of A C B, address 0209 should be set accordingly. A temporary reversal of rotation is also possible using binary inputs (see Section 2.18). Address 0276 TEMP. UNIT allows you to display the temperature values either in degree Celsius or in degree Fahrenheit.

Nominal Frequency

Phase Sequence

Temperature Unit

26

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

General

Polarity of Current Transformers

At address 0201 CT Starpoint, the polarity of the wye-connected current transformers is specified (see Figure 2-5 for options). Modifying this setting also results in a polarity reversal of the ground current inputs IN or INS.

Busbar

IA IB IC IG

IG IA IB IC

Line
Address 0201 = towards Line

Line
Address 0201= towards Busbar

Figure 2-5

Current Transformer Polarity

Voltage Connection

Address 0213 VT Connection specifies how the voltage transformers are connected. When the voltage transformers are connected in a wye configuration, address 0213 is set at Van, Vbn, Vcn. VT Connection = Vab, Vbc, VGnd meaning that two phase-to-phase voltages (V-connection) and Vgnd are connected. The latter setting is also selected when only two phase-to-phase voltage transformers are utilized or when only the displaced voltage (zero sequence voltage) is connected to the device. 7SJ64 features 4 voltage measuring inputs which enable further options besides the above mentioned connection types: VT Connection = Van,Vbn,Vcn,VGn is selected if the three phase voltages in wye-connection and Vgnd are connected to the fourth voltage input of the device. Select VT Connection = Van,Vbn,Vcn,VSy if the fourth voltage input is used for the synchronizing function.

Units of Length

Address 0215 Distance Unit corresponds to the units of length (km or Miles) applicable to fault locating. If a fault locator is not included with the device, or if the fault locating function is disabled, this setting has no effect on operation of the device. Changing the length unit will not result in an automatic conversion between the systems. Such conversions must be entered at the appropriate addresses. Parameter 0235A ATEX100 allows to fulfil the requirements for the protection of hazardous-duty motors for thermal replicas. Set this parameter to YES to save all thermal replicas of 7SJ62/63/64 in the event of a power supply failure. After the supply voltage has been restored the thermal replicas will resume operation using the stored values. Set the parameter to NO to reset the calculated overtemperatures of all thermal replicas to zero if the power supply fails. With Parameter 0613A 50N/51N/67N w. You can specify whether the ground fault protection function operates with measured values (Ignd (measured)) or with the values calculated from the three phase currents (Ignd (measured)) . In the first case the measured quantities applying at the fourth current input are evaluated, the latter case calculates the summation current from the three phase current

ATEX100

Ground Fault Protection

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

27

Functions

inputs. If the device features a sensitive ground current input (measuring range starts at 1 mA), the ground fault protection generally uses the calculated quantity 3I0.

2.1.3.2

Current Transformers (CTs) At addresses 0204 CT PRIMARY and 0205 CT SECONDARY, information is entered regarding the primary and secondary ampere ratings of the current transformers. It is important to note that the primary ampere rating of the current transformers is based on the actual tapped connection of the current transformers secondary winding (i.e. for a 1200/5 ampere multi-ratio current transformer connected at a 600/5 ampere tap, the user should enter a value of 600 for CT PRIMARY and a value of 5 for CT SECONDARY). It is also important to ensure that the rated secondary current of the current transformer matches the rated current of the device, otherwise the device will incorrectly calculate primary amperes. Addresses 0217 Ignd-CT PRIM and 0218 Ignd-CT SEC provide the device with information on the primary and secondary rated current of the ground CT. In case of a normal connection (starpoint current connected to Ignd-transformer) 0217 Ignd-CT PRIM and 0204 CT PRIMARY must be set to the same value. If the device is equipped with a sensitive ground fault current input, parameter 0218 Ignd-CT SEC is preset to 1 A. In this case the setting cannot be modified.

CTs Nominal Values

2.1.3.3

Voltage Transformers (VTs) At addresses 0202 Vnom PRIMARY and 0203 Vnom SECONDARY, information is entered regarding the rated primary nominal voltage and rated secondary nominal voltages (L-L) of the connected voltage transformers. Address 0206A Vph / Vdelta corresponds to the factor by which the secondary phase-to-ground voltage must be adjusted relative to the secondary displacement voltage (zero sequence voltage), and only applies in situations where the displacement voltage is actually measured by the device as opposed to calculated by the device. If the voltage transformer set provides open delta windings and if these windings are connected to the device, this must be specified accordingly in address 0213 (see above margin heading Voltage Connection). The relationships between the secondary device input voltages and the primary phase-to-ground and displacement voltages are given as follows: For the secondary input voltages representing phase-to-phase voltages: Vprim- Vsec-input = ----------------------- = VT Ratio Vprim-g 3 -----------------------VT Ratio

VTs Nominal Values

VTs Ratio

For the secondary input voltage representing displacement voltage: Vprim-disp Vsec-input = 3 --------------------------VT Ratio

28

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

General

Since the per unit base values of the phase-to-ground voltage and the displacement voltage are equivalent, Vsec-input / Vprim-g should equal Vsec-input / Vprim-disp. To compensate for the voltage transformer connection, the device must adjust the secondary phase-to-ground voltage upward by a factor of 3. Therefore, in this case, address 0206A Vph / Vdelta would be set at 1.73 (= 3). For situations where displacement voltage is measured by the device and other types of voltage transformer connections are utilized, the setting at address 0206A should be modified accordingly.

2.1.3.4

Circuit Breaker (CB) Address 0210A TMin TRIP CMD is used to set the minimum time the tripping contacts will remain closed. This setting applies to all protective functions that initiate tripping. Address 0211A TMax CLOSE CMD is used to set the maximum time the closing contacts will remain closed. This setting applies to the integrated reclosing function and must be long enough to allow the circuit breaker contacts to reliably engage. An excessive duration causes no problem since the closing command is interrupted in the event another trip is initiated by a protective function.

Trip and Close Command Duration

Current Flow Monitoring

Address 0212 BkrClosed I MIN corresponds to the threshold value of the integrated current flow monitoring system. This setting is used by several protective functions (e.g., voltage protection with current supervision, breaker failure protection, overload protection, and restart block for motors). If the threshold value set at address 0212 is exceeded, the circuit breaker is considered closed. The threshold value setting applies to all three phases, and takes precedence over all other protective functions. With regard to breaker failure protection, the threshold value must be set at a level below the minimum fault current for which breaker failure protection must operate. On the other hand, the current threshold should not be set more sensitive than necessary to avoid extended resetting times on transient phenomena of the current transformers after interruption of high shortcircuit currents. A setting of 10% below the minimum fault current for which breaker failure protection must operate is recommended. When using the device for motor protection, overload protection, and restart blocking; the protective relay can distinguish between a running motor and a stopped motor, as well as take into account the varying motor cool-down behavior. Under this application, the set value must be lower than the minimum no-load current of the motor.

Addr. 214 209 276

Setting Title Rated Frequency PHASE SEQ. TEMP. UNIT 50 Hz 60 Hz ABC ACB

Setting Options

Default Setting 50 Hz ABC Degree Celsius

Comments Rated Frequency Phase Sequence Unit of temparature measurement

Degree Celsius Degree Fahrenheit

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

29

Functions

Addr. 201 213

Setting Title CT Starpoint VT Connection

Setting Options towards Line towards Busbar Van, Vbn, Vcn Vab, Vbc, VGnd Van, Vbn, Vcn, VGnd *) Van, Vbn, Vcn, VSyn *) km Miles NO YES Ignd (measured) 3I0 (calculated) 10..50000 A 1A 5A 1..50000 A 1A 5A 0.10..800.00 kV 100..225 V 1.00..3.00 0.01..32.00 sec 0.01..32.00 sec 0.04..1.00 A

Default Setting towards Line Van, Vbn, Vcn

Comments CT Starpoint VT Connection

215 235A 613A 204 205 217 218 202 203 206A 210A 211A 212

Distance Unit ATEX100 50N/51N/67N w. CT PRIMARY CT SECONDARY Ignd-CT PRIM Ignd-CT SEC Vnom PRIMARY Vnom SECONDARY Vph / Vdelta TMin TRIP CMD TMax CLOSE CMD BkrClosed I MIN

km NO Ignd (measured) 100 A 1A 60 A 1A 12.00 kV 100 V 1.73 0.15 sec 1.00 sec 0.04 A

Distance measurement unit Storage of th. Replicas w/o Power Supply 50N/51N/67N Ground Overcurrent with CT Rated Primary Current CT Rated Secondary Current Ignd-CT rated primary current Ignd-CT rated secondary current Rated Primary Voltage Rated Secondary Voltage (L-L) Matching ratio Phase-VT To Open-Delta-VT Minimum TRIP Command Duration Maximum Close Command Duration Closed Breaker Min. Current Threshold

*) 7SJ64 only

2.1.3.5
F.No.

Information
Alarm >Reverse Phase Rotation Phase rotation ABC Phase rotation ACB Comments

05145 >Reverse Rot. 05147 Rotation ABC 05148 Rotation ACB

30

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

General

2.1.4

Waveform Capture
The 7SJ62/63/64 relay is equipped with an oscillographic data saving feature. The momentary values for the measurement quantities Ia, Ib, Ic, IG, and INs, and Va, Vb, Vc, 3V0 and VSYN (only 7SJ64) (voltages depending on the connection) are scanned at intervals of 1.04 ms for 60 Hz (1.25 ms for 50 Hz) and stored in a revolving buffer (16 samples per cycle). For a fault, the data are stored for an adjustable period of time, but not more than 5 seconds. Up to 8 fault records can be recorded in this buffer. The memory is automatically updated with every new fault, so no acknowledgment for previously recorded faults is required. Waveform capture can also be started with protection pickup, via binary input, via PCinterface, or SCADA. Using the PC-interface or the rear service port, data can be retrieved by a personal computer and processed, using the protective data processing program DIGSI 4, and the graphics program DIGRA 4. DIGRA 4 graphically prepares the data generated during the fault, and calculates additional quantities, such as impedance or rms values, from the delivered measured values. The currents and voltages can be represented as primary or secondary quantities. In addition, relay sequence of events signals are recorded as well. Fault data may be retrieved via the serial interface of a PC. Data evaluation is performed by the PC using the respective programs. For this, the currents and voltages are related to their maximum values, are standardized to the nominal value, and prepared for graphical display. Additionally, events such as the pickup of a relay element or the initiation of a trip signal can be displayed as well. If configured in SCADA, data are transferred automatically to the SCADA computer. Programming Settings

Waveform Capture

Waveform capture of faults is executed only when Address 0104 OSC. FAULT REC. is set for Enabled. Other settings pertaining to waveform capture are found under the OSC. FAULT REC. sub-menu of the SETTINGS menu. The trigger for an oscillographic record and the criterion to save the record are determined with the setting of Address 0401 WAVEFORMTRIGGER. With the setting Save w. Pickup, the trigger and the criterion for saving are the same the pickup of a protective element. Another option for Address 0401 is Start w. TRIP. A trip command issued by the device is both the trigger and the criterion to save the record with this setting. The final and more commonly used option for Address 0401 is Save w. TRIP. The trigger under this setting is the pickup of a protective element (first element to pick up) and saving of the waveforms occurs only if the device issues a trip command. Each setting for Address 0401 has specific advantages. The choice depends primarily on the expected duration of faults, the time period of a complete fault duration that is of most interest (e.g. inception or clearing), and the frequency of waveform capturing that is to be expected. There are two options available for the coverage of oscillographic recording. The selection is made under Address 0402 WAVEFORM DATA and is based on the users preference for recording events that occur while automatic reclosing is performed by the device. With the setting Fault event, waveform capturing occurs each time the recording trigger and save criterion are established. If automatic reclosing in the device is employed, the second option Pow.Sys.Flt. can be selected if desired.

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

31

Functions

With this setting, the entire course of a fault - from inception, through reclosing, to clearing - is captured. This option provides detailed data for analysis of the entire fault history; however, the option also requires considerable memory for recording during dead times. An oscillographic record includes data recorded prior to the time of trigger, and data after the dropout of the recording criterion. The user determines the length of pre-trigger time and post-dropout time to be included in the fault record with the settings in Address 0404 PRE. TRIG. TIME and Address 0405 POST REC. TIME. The settings depend on Address 0401 and the information desired. For example, consider the trigger being a pickup of a protective element and the save criterion being a trip. The pre-trigger time is set based on the amount of pre-fault information that is desired. The post-dropout time is set based on the amount of information desired after clearing (e.g. checking for restrikes). The maximum length of time of a record is entered in Address 0403 MAX. LENGTH. The largest value here is 5 seconds. A total of 8 records can be saved. However the total length of time of all fault records in the buffer may not exceed 5 seconds. Once the capacity of the buffer is exceeded the oldest fault is deleted, whereas the new fault is saved in the buffer. An oscillographic record can be triggered and saved by a change in status of a binary input or via the operating interface connected to a PC. The trigger is dynamic. The length of a record for these special triggers is set in Address 0406 BinIn CAPT.TIME (upper bound is Address 0403). Pre-trigger and post-dropout settings in Addresses 0404 and 0405 do not apply. If Address 0406 is set for , then the length of the record equals the time that the binary input is activated (static), or the MAX. LENGTH setting in Address 0403, whichever is shorter.

Addr. 401

Setting Title WAVEFORMTRIGGER

Setting Options Save with Pickup Save with TRIP Start with TRIP

Default Setting Save with Pickup

Comments Waveform Capture

402 403 404 405 406

WAVEFORM DATA Fault event Power System fault MAX. LENGTH PRE. TRIG. TIME POST REC. TIME BinIn CAPT.TIME 0.30..5.00 sec 0.05..0.50 sec 0.05..0.50 sec 0.10..5.00 sec;

Fault event 2.00 sec 0.25 sec 0.10 sec 0.50 sec

Scope of Waveform Data Max. length of a Waveform Capture Record Captured Waveform Prior to Trigger Captured Waveform after Event Capture Time via Binary Input

2.1.4.1

Information

F.No.

Alarm >Trigger Waveform Capture

Comments

00004 >Trig.Wave.Cap.

32

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

General

F.No. 00203 Wave. deleted ---FltRecSta

Alarm Waveform data deleted Fault Recording Start

Comments

2.1.5

Setting Groups
A setting group is nothing more than a collection of setting values to be used for a particular application. In the 7SJ62/63/64 relay, 4 independent setting groups (A ~ D) are possible. The user can switch back and fourth between setting groups locally, via binary inputs (if so configured), via the operator or service interface using a personal computer, or via the system interface. For reasons of safety it is not possible to change between setting groups during a power system fault. A setting group includes the setting values for all functions that have been selected as Enabled during configuration (see Chapter 5). While setting values may vary among the 4 setting groups, the selected functions of each setting group remain the same. Multiple setting groups allows a specific relay to be used for more than one application. While all setting groups are stored in the relay, only one setting group may be active at a given time. If multiple setting groups are not required, Group A is the default selection, and the following paragraph is not applicable. If multiple setting groups are desired, address 0103 Grp Chge OPTION must be set to Enabled in the relay configuration. For the setting of the function parameters, you configure each of the required setting groups A to D, one after the other. A maximum of 4 is possible. Please refer to the DIGSI 4System Manual, Order No. E50417 H1176C151 to learn how to copy setting groups or reset them to their status at delivery and also what you have to do to change from one setting group to another. Subsection 3.1.2 tells you how to change between several setting groups externally via binary inputs.

Purpose of Setting Groups

2.1.5.1
Addr. 302

Settings
Setting Title CHANGE Setting Options Group A Group B Group C Group D Binary Input Protocol Default Setting Group A Comments Change to Another Setting Group

2.1.5.2
F.No.

Information
Alarm >Setting Group Select Bit 0 >Setting Group Select Bit 1 Comments

00007 >Set Group Bit0 00008 >Set Group Bit1

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

33

Functions

F.No. ------------Group A Group B Group C Group D

Alarm Group A Group B Group C Group D

Comments

2.1.6

Power System Data 2

General protective data (P.SYSTEM DATA2) includes settings associated with all functions rather than a specific protective or monitoring function. In contrast to the P.SYSTEM DATA1 as discussed in Sub-section 2.1.3, these settings can be changed over with the setting groups. To modify these settings, the user should select SETTINGS menu option Group A (setting group A), and then P.System Data2. The other setting groups are Group B, Group C, and Group D, as described in Subsection 2.1.5.

Definition of Nominal Rated Values

At addresses 1101 FullScaleVolt. and 1102 FullScaleCurr., the reference voltage (phase-to-phase) and reference current (phase) of the protected equipment is entered (e.g., motors). These values do not effect pickup settings. If these reference values match the primary VTs and CTs, they correspond to the settings in address 0202 and 0204 (Subsection 2.1.3). They are generally used to show values in reference to full scale. For example, if a CT ratio of 600/5 is selected and the full load current of a motor is 550 amps, a value of 550 amps should be entered for FullScaleCurr. if monitoring in reference to full load current is desired. 550 amps are now displayed as 100 % in the percentage metering display. The ground impedance ratios must be entered to facilitate line fault location. At address 1103 RG/RL Ratio, the resistance ratio of the line is entered, and at address 1104 XG/XL Ratio, the reactance ratio of the line is entered. The ground impedance ratios are calculated separately, and do not correspond to the real and imaginary components of Z0/Z1. Therefore, no complex calculations are necessary. The ground impedance ratios are obtained from conductor data using the following formulas: Resistance Ratio: RG 1 R0 ------- = -- ------ 1 3 R R
L 1

Ground Impedance Ratios (only for fault location)

Reactance Ratio: XG 1 X0 ------- = -- ------ 1 3 X X

L 1

Where R0 = Zero sequence resistance of the line X0 = Zero sequence reactance of the line R1 = Positive sequence resistance of the line X1 = Positive sequence reactance of the line The ground impedance ratios may be calculated using the impedance values for the entire line or the impedance per mile values associated with the conductor, since the

34

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

General

length of the line is factored out in the formulas above. Calculation example: 20 kV free line 120 mm2 with the following data: R1/s = 0.39 /mile X1/s = 0.55 /mile R0/s = 1.42 /mile X0/s = 2.03 /mile Positive sequence impedance Zero sequence impedance

For ground impedance ratios, the following emerge: RG 1 R0 1 1.42 mile ------- = -- ------ 1 = -- ------------------------------- 1 = 0.89 3 R1 3 0.39 mile RL XG 1 2.03 mile 1 X0 ------- = -- ------ 1 = -- ------------------------------- 1 = 0.90 3 0.55 mile 3 X1 XL
These values are set at addresses 1103 and 1104 respectively.

Reactance Setting (only for fault location)

The reactance setting must be entered if line fault location is desired. The reactance setting enables the protective relay to report fault location in terms of distance. The reactance value is entered as a secondary value at address 1105 in ohms per mile if address 0215 is set to Miles, or at address 1106 in ohms per kilometer if address 0215 is set to Kilometers (see Subsection 2.1.3 under Units of Length). If the setting of address 0215 is modified after entry of a reactance value at address 1105 or 1106, the reactance value must be modified and reentered accordingly. The calculation of primary ohms in terms of secondary ohms is accomplished using the following formula: Current-Transformer-Ratio Z sec ondary = ------------------------------------------------------------------------- Z primary Voltage-Transformer - Ratio Because the reactance value must be entered in secondary ohms per unit length, the formula above must be used to convert primary ohms per unit length into secondary ohms per unit length as shown below: N CTR X sec = -------------- X prim N VTR where: NCTR = Current transformer ratio NVTR = Voltage transformer ratio

Example calculation: The same example used to illustrate calculation of ground impedance ratios will be used to illustrate calculation of the reactance setting, with the following additional data on the current transformers and voltage transformers: Current transformer 500 A / 5 A Voltage transformer 20 kV / 0.1 kV
7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

35

Functions

The secondary reactance value is calculated as follows:

N CTR 500 A/5 A X sec = -------------- X prim = ---------------------------------- 0.55 /mile = 0.275 /mile 20 kV/0.1 kV N VTR This value is entered at Address 1106. Recognition of Running Condition (only for motors) Address 1107 I MOTOR START, is used for motor protection applications and corresponds to the minimum starting current of the protected motor. The current setting entered at address 1107 enables the device to determine if the protected motor is in start-up mode, thus allowing the device to properly perform the start-up time monitoring and overload protection functions. In determining the setting for address 1107, the following should be considered: A setting must be selected that is lower than the actual motor start-up current under all load and voltage conditions. Because the thermal cure of the overload protection is frozen (held constant) during motor start-up, the setting must be high enough to allow operation of the overload protection at higher load current levels.

2.1.6.1

Settings In the list below, the setting ranges and default setting values are for a device with a nominal current rating IN = 1 A. Consider the current transformer ratios when setting the device with primary values For a nominal current rating IN = 5 A: For the pickup current (I MOTOR START), multiply the Setting Options values and default setting values by 5. For the Ground resistance and reactance ratios, divide Setting Range and Setting Increments by 5.

Addr. 1101 1102 1103 1104 1105

Setting Title FullScaleVolt. FullScaleCurr. RG/RL Ratio XG/XL Ratio x'

Setting Options 0.10..800.00 kV 10..50000 A -0.33..7.00 -0.33..7.00 0.010..10.000 Ohm / mile

Default Setting 12.00 kV 100 A 1.00 1.00 1.000 Ohm / mile

Comments Measurem:FullScaleVoltage(Equipm.rating) Measurem:FullScaleCurrent(Equipm.rating) RG/RL - Ratio of Gnd to Line Resistance XG/XL - Ratio of Gnd to Line Reactance x' - Line Reactance per length unit

36

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

General

Addr. 1106 1107 x'

Setting Title

Setting Options 0.005..6.215 Ohm / km 0.60..10.00 A

Default Setting 0.620 Ohm / km 2.50 A

Comments x' - Line Reactance per length unit Motor Start Current (Block 49, Start 48)

I MOTOR START

2.1.6.2
F.No.

Information
Alarm >Manual close signal >Enable 50/67-(N)-2 (override 79 blk) >52-a contact (OPEN, if bkr is open) >52-b contact (OPEN, if bkr is closed) Primary fault current Ia Primary fault current Ib Primary fault current Ic Relay PICKUP Relay GENERAL TRIP command Manual close signal detected Protection ON/OFF (via system port) Comments

00356 >Manual Close 02720 >Enable ANSI#-2 04601 >52-a 04602 >52-b 00533 Ia = 00534 Ib = 00535 Ic = 00501 Relay PICKUP 00511 Relay TRIP 00561 Man.Clos.Detect 00126 ProtON/OFF

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

37

Functions

2.2
General

Overcurrent Protection (50, 50N, 51, 51N)

Time-overcurrent protection is the main protective function of the 7SJ62/63/64 relay. It may be enabled or disabled for phase or ground faults, and may be configured with various time-overcurrent characteristic curves. There are four definite time (Instantaneous elements with optional timers) and two inverse time-overcurrent elements in the device. The definite time elements include two phase elements and two ground elements. The definite time (Instantaneous) phase elements are designated 50-2 and 50-1, whereas the definite time (Instantaneous) ground elements are designated 50N-2 and 50N-1. The inverse time elements include a phase element designated as 51 and a ground element designated as 51N. The overcurrent protection for the ground current can operate either using measured values Ignd or the quantities 310 calculated from the three phase currents depending on the parameter 0613A 50N/51N/67N w. Devices featuring a sensitive ground current input, however, use generally the calculated quantity 3I0. All overcurrent elements, inverse and definite time, enabled in the device may be blocked via the automatic reclosure function (depending on the cycle) or via an external signal to the binary inputs of the device. Removal of the external signal to the binary input will re-enable these elements. Also, a feature described as Manual Close Mode can be configured to improve fault clearing times associated with Switch-on-toFault Conditions. Under this situation, the time delay may be bypassed for one of the three time-overcurrent phase elements and one of the three time-overcurrent ground elements via an impulse from the external control switch, thus resulting in high speed tripping. This impulse is prolonged by a period of 300 ms. The phase and ground elements utilized for high speed tripping in this situation are selected at addresses 1213 and 1313 respectively. The automatic reclosure function may also initiate the immediate tripping for the overcurrent stages and high-current stages depending on the cycle. Pickup and delay settings may be quickly adjusted to system requirements via Cold Load Pickup function (see Section 2.4). Tripping by the 50-1, 51, 50N-1, and 51N elements may be blocked for inrush conditions by utilizing the inrush restraint feature. Table 2-2 gives an overview of the interconnection to other functions of 7SJ62/63/64..
Table 2-2 Interconnection to other functions Connection to Automatic Reclosure Manual CLOSE Dynamic Cold-LoadPick-up Inrush Restraint

Time Overcurrent Stages 50-1 50-2 51 50N-1 50N-2 51N

38

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Overcurrent Protection (50, 50N, 51, 51N)

2.2.1
2.2.1.1

Description
Definite Time, Instantaneous Overcurrent Protection (50, 50N) The 50-2 and 50N-2 overcurrent elements, phase and ground currents are compared separately with the pickup values of the 50-2 (50-2 PICKUP) and 50N-2 (50N-2 PICKUP) relay elements. Currents above the pickup values are detected and recorded within the protective relay. After the user-configured time delay has elapsed, a trip signal is issued. Figures 2-6 and 2-7 show the logic diagrams for the 50-2 and 50N-2 protection.

50-2, 50N-2

1213A MANUALCLOSEMODE 1 Inactive 51 instant. 50 -1 instant. 50-2 instant.

Manual Close 79 AR 50-2 instant.

FNo. 01910

&

or

>INSTANT. 50-2 50-2 PhA PU

FNo. 01800 50-2 picked up

or
&
1203 50-1 DELAY

or or or

&

FNo. 01805 50-2 TRIP FNo. 01804 50-2 TimeOut

A B C

Measurement/Logic

79 AR 50-2 blk
FNo. 01721

or

FNo. 01852 50-2 BLOCKED

>BLOCK 50-2
FNo. 01704 >BLK 50/51 1201 Charac. Phase OFF 1 ON FNo. 01752 50/51 PH BLK

or

FNo. 01751 50/51 PH OFF

Figure 2-6

Logic Diagram for 50-2 Relay Element

If the parameter MANUALCLOSEMODE is set to 50N-2 instant. and if manual close mode is applied, the pick-up is tripped instantaneously, also for blocking of the stage via binary input. The same applies to 79 AR 50-2 instant. and the binary input for instantaneous tripping.

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

39

Functions

1313A MANUALCLOSEMODE Inactive 51N instant. 50N-1 instant. 50N-2 instant.

Manual Close 79 AR 50N-2 inst.

FNo. 01916

&

or

>INSTANT. 50N-2. 50N-2 PU &

1303 50N-2 DELAY FNo. 01831 50N-2 picked up FNo. 01833 50N-2 TRIP FNo. 01832 50N-2 TimeOut FNo. 01854 50N-2 BLOCKED

or

&

Measurement/Logic

79 AR 50N-2 blk
FNo. 01724 >BLOCK 50N-2 FNo. 01714

or

FNo. 01757

>BLK 50N/51N
1301 FCT 50N/51N OFF 1 ON

50N/51N BLK

or

FNo. 01756 50N/51N OFF

Figure 2-7

Logic Diagram for 50N-2 Relay Element

If the parameter MANUALCLOSEMODE is set to 50N-2 instant. and if manual close mode is applied, the pick-up is tripped instantaneously, also for blocking of the stage via binary input. The same applies to 79 AR 50N-2 instant. and the binary input for instantaneous tripping. 50-1, 50N-1 The 50-1 and 50N-1 overcurrent elements, phase and ground currents are compared separately with the pickup values of the 50-1 (50-1 PICKUP) and 50N-1 (50N-1 PICKUP) relay elements. Currents above the pickup values are detected and recorded within the protective relay. After the user-configured time delay has elapsed, a trip signal is issued. If the inrush restraint feature is enabled (see below), and an inrush condition exist, no tripping takes place, but a message is recorded and displayed indicating when the overcurrent element time delay elapses. Different messages are recorded and displayed appear depending on whether tripping takes place or the time delay expires without tripping. The dropout value of the definite time, time-overcurrent elements is roughly equal to 95 % of the pickup value for currents greater than or equal to 30 % of the nominal current of the device. These stages may be blocked by the automatic reclosure function. Figures 2-8 and 2-9 show the logic diagrams for the 50-1 and 50N-1 protection.

40

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Overcurrent Protection (50, 50N, 51, 51N)

Pickup and delay settings for the 50-1, 50-2, 50N-1, and 50N-2 elements may be individually programmed.

1313A MANUALCLOSEMODE Inactive 51 instant. 50-2 instant. 50 -1 instant.

Manual Close 79 AR 50-1 inst.

FNo. 01912

&

or
Inrush Recognition 50-1 (see Figure 2-12)

50-1 INSTANT.
FNo. 07551

50-1 PhA PU &

1205 50-1 DELAY

or or or or

&

50-1 InRushPU
FNo. 01810

& &

50-1 picked up
FNo. 01815 50/51 TRIP

&

A B C

FNo. 01814 50-1 TimeOut

Measurement/Logic

79 AR 50-1 blk FNo. 01722 >BLOCK 50-1

FNo. 01704

or

FNo. 01851

50-1 BLOCKED
FNo. 01752

>BLK 50/51
1201 FCT 50/51 OFF 1 ON

50/51 PH BLK

or

FNo. 01751

50/51 PH OFF

Figure 2-8

Logic Diagram for the 50-1 Relay Element

If the parameter MANUAL CLOSE is set to 50 -1 instant. and if manual close mode is applied, the pick-up is tripped instantaneously, also for blocking of the stage via binary input. The same applies to 79 AR 50-1 inst. and the binary input for instantaneous tripping.

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

41

Functions

1313A MANUALCLOSEMODE Inactive 51N instant. 50N-2 instant. 50N-1 instant.

Manual Close 79 AR 50N-1 inst.

FNo. 01919

&

or
Inrush Recognition 50N-1 (see Figure 2-12)

>INSTANT. 50N-1
FNo. 07552 50N-1 InRushPU FNo. 01834 50N-1 picked up FNo. 01836

& 50N-1 PU &

1305 50N-1 DELAY

&

or

&

&

50N-1 TRIP
FNo. 01835

Measurement/Logic

50N-1 TimeOut
FNo. 01853

79 AR 50N-1 blk FNo. 01725 >BLOCK 50N-1 FNo. 01714 >BLK 50N/51N
1301 FCT 50N/51N OFF 1 ON

or

50N-1 BLOCKED
FNo. 01757

50N/51N BLK

or

FNo. 01756

50N/51N OFF

Figure 2-9

Logic Diagram for the 50N-1 Relay Element

If the parameter MANUAL CLOSE is set to 50 -1 instant. and if manual close mode is applied, the pick-up is tripped instantaneously, also for blocking of the stage via binary input. The same applies to 79 AR 50N-1 inst. and the binary input for instantaneous tripping. The pickup values of each stage 50-1, 50-2 for the phase currents and 50N-1, 50N-2 for the ground current and the valid delay times for each stage can be set individually. Pickup Logic and Tripping Logic The pick-up signals of the individual phases (or ground) and the individual stages are connected with each other such that the phase information and the stage are issued that have picked up (Table 2-3).

42

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Overcurrent Protection (50, 50N, 51, 51N)

Also for the tripping signals the stage is indicated which has initiated the tripping.
Table 2-3 Pick-up indications of the time overcurrent protection Figure 2-6 2-8 2-10 2-6 2-8 2-10 2-6 2-8 2-10 2-7 2-9 2-11 2-6 2-6 2-6 2-7 2-8 2-8 2-8 2-9 2-10 2-10 2-10 2-11 Output indication 50/51 Ph A PU FNo. 01762

Internal indication 50-2 Ph A PU 50-1 Ph A PU 51 Ph A PU 50-2 Ph B PU 50-1 Ph B PU 51 Ph B PU 50-2 Ph C PU 50-1 Ph C PU 51 Ph C PU 50N-2 PU 50N-1 PU 51N PU 50-2 Ph A PU 50-2 Ph B PU 50-2 Ph C PU 50N-2 PU 50-1 Ph A PU 50-1 Ph B PU 50-1 Ph C PU 50N-1 PU 51 Ph A PU 51 Ph B PU 51 Ph C PU 51N PU (all pickups)

50/51 Ph B PU

01763

50/51 Ph C PU

01764

50N/51NPickedup

01765

50-2 picked up

01800

50-1 picked up

01810

51 picked up

01820

50(N)/51(N) PU

01761

2.2.1.2

Inverse Time-Overcurrent Protection (51, 51N) Inverse time-overcurrent protection, the 51 and 51N relay elements may contain IEC characteristic curves or ANSI characteristic curves depending on the model ordered. A user-specified curve may also be applied to the inverse-overcurrent relay elements. The curves and associated formulas are given in Technical Specifications (Figures 41 to 4-6 in Section 4.3). During configuration of the 51 and 51N characteristic curves, the definite time relay elements (50-2, 50-1, 50N-2, and 50N-1) are enabled (see Subsection 2.2.1.1).

Pickup and Tripping

Each phase and ground current is separately compared with the pickup values of the 51 and 51N relay elements. When the current in the 51 and 51N relay elements exceeds the corresponding pickup value by a factor of 1.1, the element picks up and a message is displayed and recorded within the device. Pickup of a 51 or 51N relay element is based on the rms value of the fundamental harmonic. When the 51 and 51N elements pickup, the time delay of the trip signal is calculated using an integrated measurement process. The calculated time delay is dependent on the actual fault cur-

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

43

Functions

rent flowing and the selected time-current characteristic curve. Once the time delay elapses, a trip signal is issued. If the inrush restraint feature is enabled, and an inrush condition exist, no tripping takes place, but a message is recorded and displayed indicating when the overcurrent element time delay elapses. These stages can be blocked by the automatic reclosing function. The characteristic curves of the 51 and 51N relay elements may be selected independently of each other. In addition, pickup, time multipliers, and time dials for the 51 and 51N elements may be individually set. Figures 2-10 and 2-11 show the logic diagram for the 51 and 51N protection, Figure 2-12 the logic diagram of the inrush restraint. Dropout for ANSI and IEC Curves For ANSI and IEC curves you can specify whether the dropout of a stage, after it has fallen below a threshold, takes places instantaneously or via disk emulation. Instantaneously means that the dropout of a stage which has picked up is performed as soon as the value falls below approximately 95 % of the pickup value. The timer will start again for all new pick-ups. Dropout of an element occurs when the current decreases to about 95 % of the pickup value if instantaneous reset is selected, or 90 % of the pickup value if disk emulation is selected. When instantaneous reset is selected, reset of the element occurs without delay. When disk emulation is selected, reset occurs just as it would for an electromechanical relay utilizing an induction disk. For disk emulation, the reset process begins after fault current is interrupted. Reset corresponds to the unwinding of an induction disk. A subsequent pickup of the device element prior to full reset will result in a reduced tripping time delay. The reduced tripping time delay will be based on the degree to which the device had reset when the subsequent pickup occurred. When the current in the relay element is between 90 % and 95 % of the pickup value following dropout, neither disk movement in the tripping or reset direction is simulated. When the current in the relay elements falls below 5 % of the pickup value, disk emulation is canceled and full reset takes place. Disk emulation offers advantages when the inverse time, time-overcurrent relay elements must be coordinated with conventional electromechanical overcurrent relays located toward the source. User Specified Curves When user specified curves are utilized, the time-current characteristic curve may be defined point by point. Up to 20 pairs of values (current, time) may be entered. The relay element then approximates the curve using linear interpolation. When utilizing user specified time-current curves, the reset curve may user specified as well. See reset for ANSI and IEC characteristics in the function description. If user specified reset curves are not utilized, the relay element drops out when current decreases to about 95 % of the relay elements pickup value, and immediate reset takes place.

44

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Overcurrent Protection (50, 50N, 51, 51N)

1213A MANUALCLOSEMODE Inactive 50-2 instant. 50 -1 instant. 51 instant.

&

Manual Close 79 AR 51 inst.

FNo. 01914

or

Inrush Recognition 51 (see Figure 2-12)

>INSTANT. 51 51 Ph A PU &
1208 51 TIME DIAL FNo. 07553

or or or or

&

51 InRushPU
FNo. 01820

& &

51 picked up
FNo. 01825

51 TRIP

&

A B C

FNo. 01824

51 Time Out
measurement pickup/tripping logic

79 AR 51 blk FNo. 01723 >BLOCK 51

or

FNo. 01855

51 BLOCKED

FNo. 01704 >BLK 50/51 1201 FCT 50/51 OFF 1 ON

FNo. 01752 50/51 PH BLK

or

FNo. 01751 50/51 PH OFF

Figure 2-10

Logic Diagram for the 51 Relay Element

If the parameter MANUAL CLOSE is set to 51 instant. and if manual close mode is applied, the pick-up is tripped instantaneously, also for blocking of the stage via binary input and the binary input for instantaneous tripping. The same applies to 79 AR 51 inst. and the binary input for instantaneous tripping.

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

45

Functions

1313A MANUALCLOSEMODE Inactive 50N-2 instant. 50N-1 instant. 51N instant.

& Manual Close 79 AR 51N inst.

FNo. 01983

or
Inrush Recognition 51N (s. Figure 2-12)

>INSTANT. 51N

& 51N PU &

1308 51N TIME DIAL

FNo. 07554 51N InRushPU FNo. 01837

&

51N picked up
FNo. 01839 51N TRIP FNo. 01838 51N TimeOut

or

&

&
measurement pickup/tripping logic

79 AR 51N blk. FNo. 01726 >BLOCK 51N

FNo. 01856

or

51N BLOCKED

FNo. 01714

FNo. 01757

>BLK 50N/51N
1301 FCT 50N/51N OFF 1 ON

50N/51N BLK

or

FNo. 01756

50N/51N OFF

Figure 2-11

Logic Diagram for the 51N Relay Element

If the parameter MANUAL CLOSE is set to 51N instant. and if manual close mode is applied, the pick-up is tripped instantaneously, also for blocking of the stage via binary input and the binary input for instantaneous tripping. The same applies to 79 AR 51N inst. and the binary input for instantaneous tripping.

2.2.1.3

Dynamic Cold Load Pick-up Function With the dynamic cold load pick-up feature, it is possible to dynamically increase the pickup values of the directional and non-directional overcurrent relay elements when dynamic cold load pickup conditions are anticipated (i.e. after a long period of zero voltage). By allowing pickup settings to increase dynamically, it is not necessary to incorporate dynamic cold load capability in the normal pickup settings, and directional and non-directional overcurrent protection may be set more sensitive. This dynamic pick-up value changeover is common to all overcurrent stages and is described in Section 2.4. The alternative pick-up values can be set individually for each stage of the time overcurrent protection.

46

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Overcurrent Protection (50, 50N, 51, 51N)

2.2.1.4

Inrush Restraint When the 7SJ62/63/64 relay is installed to protect a power transformer, large magnetizing inrush currents will flow when the transformer is energized. These inrush currents may be several times the nominal transformer current, and, depending on the transformer size and design, may last from several milliseconds to several seconds. Although pickup of the relay elements is based only on the fundamental harmonic component of the measured currents, false device pickup due to inrush is still a potential problem since, depending on the transformer size and design, the fundamental harmonic comprises a large component of the inrush current. The 7SJ62/63/64 features an integrated inrush restraint function that may be utilized when the device is installed at or near a transformer. It supervises the normal tripping of all directional and non-directional overcurrent relay elements with the exception of the 50-2, 50N-2, 67-2 and 67N-2 relay elements. For example, when a transformer is energized the current levels may exceed the normal pickup of the overcurrent elements set in the device. If inrush conditions are identified (the 2nd harmonic content of current exceeds the value of setting at address 2202 2nd HARMONIC), special inrush messages are created within the device that will block tripping of the overcurrent elements. Note, that only the tripping elements are affected by harmonic inrush detection, the pickup values and corresponding timers continue to operate normally. If inrush conditions are still present after the tripping time delay has elapsed, a corresponding message is displayed and recorded, but the overcurrent tripping is blocked. (see Figures 2-8 to 2-11). Inrush current contains a relatively large second harmonic component which is nearly absent during a short-circuit fault. Inrush current detection, therefore, is based on the evaluation of the second harmonic component present during inrush conditions. For frequency analysis, digital filters are used to conduct a Fourier analysis of all three phase currents and the ground current. As soon as the second harmonic component of the current flowing in a specific phase or ground relay element exceeds a set value, tripping is blocked for that element (does not apply to 50-2, 50N-2, 67-2, and 67N-2 elements). Since quantitative analysis of the harmonic components of the current flowing through a specific relay element cannot be completed until a full cycle of inrush current has been measured, inrush restraint blocking, and the associated inrush detection message, is automatically delayed by one cycle. It is important to note, however, that the tripping time delays associated with the relay elements are started immediately after pickup of the relay element, even if the inrush conditions are detected. If inrush blocking drops out during the time delay, tripping will occur when the time delay of the element elapses. If inrush blocking drops out after the time delay has elapsed, tripping will occur immediately. Therefore, utilization of the inrush restraint feature will not result in any additional tripping delays. If a relay element drops out during inrush blocking, the associated time delay will reset.

Cross Blocking

Since inrush restraint operates individually for each phase, inrush restraint will not block tripping in situations where a power transformer is energized into a single-phase fault and inrush currents are detected on the unfaulted phases. This feature provides maximum protection, however, inrush restraint can be configured to allow inrush detection on one phase to block tripping by the elements associated with the other phases. This is referred to as cross-blocking and can be enabled at address 2203. Inrush currents flowing in the ground path will not cross-block tripping by the phase elements. The cross-blocking function may also be limited to a particular time interval, which can be set at address 2204. After expiration of this time interval, the cross-blocking function will be disabled. 47

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Functions

The inrush restraint has an upper limit. It no longer takes effect when a (configurable) current value is surpassed since, in this case, it can only be an internal high-current fault. Figure 2-12 shows the logic diagram of the inrush restraint including cross-blocking.
FNo. 07565 Ia InRush PU FNo. 07566 Ib InRush PU FNo. 07567 Ic InRush PU FNo. 07564 Gnd InRush PU

I2 fn Ph A
2202 2nd HARMONIC

a a>bc b c

& &

Ia

1/2 Period

2205 I Max

a a<b b

or

&

Inrush Recog. 50-1

50-1 Ph A PU 51 Ph A PU

or

1 Period

or or

&

Inrush Recog. 50N-1

&

Inrush Recog. 51

or
&
Inrush Recog. 51N

67-1 Ph A PU 67-TOC Ph A PU

or or
1 Period

&

Inrush Recog. 67-1

or

&

Inrush Recog. 67N-1

&

Inrush Recog. 67-TOC

&

Inrush Recog. 67N-TOC

Inrush Recog. 50-1 Inrush Recog. 67-1 Inrush Recog. 51 Inrush Recog. 67-TOC

2204 CROSS BLK TIMER

&

or

S Q R

FNo. 01843 INRUSH X-BLK

Inrush Recognition for phase and ground (50-1, 51, 50N-1, 51N, 67-1, 67-TOC, 67N-1, 67N-TOC)

&

2203 CROSS BLOCK YES 1 NO measurement/logic FNo. 07557 InRushPhBLOCKED

FNo. 07563 >BLOCK InRushPh 2201 INRUSH REST.

1

ON OFF

or
FNo. 07556 InRush OFF

Figure 2-12

Logic Diagram for Inrush Restraint

48

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Overcurrent Protection (50, 50N, 51, 51N)

2.2.1.5

Reverse Interlocking Bus Protection The pickup of a time-overcurrent relay element may be blocked via binary inputs. At the users option, the binary inputs can be set up to block tripping when DC voltage is applied or when DC voltage is removed. Reverse interlocking allows for faster protection by eliminating the need for time-current coordination. Reverse interlocking is often used, for example, at generating stations in applications where a station supply transformer supplied from the transmission grid serves internal loads of the generation station via a medium voltage bus with multiple feeders (see Figure 2-13). When the 7SJ62/63/64 relay is used as the source-side relay in a reverse interlocking scheme, a short time delay must be set for the 50-2 element so that a load-side relay has the chance to block tripping (Figure 2-13). The load-side relay should pickup immediately for down-line faults so that a blocking signal is immediately sent to the source-side relays binary inputs. The load-side protective device can then initiate a time delayed trip, as long as the time delay is less than the time delay settings of the source-side relays 50-1 and 50N-1 relay elements and the time multiplier settings of the source-side relays 51 and 51N relay element. The source side relays 50-1, 50N1, 51 and 51N relay elements will provide redundant protection against faults in the load side relays zone of protection since their associated time delay settings are greater than the load side relays time delay setting. Pickup messages generated by the load-side relay are passed to a binary input of the source-side relay as input message >50-2 block..
A B Normal Load Flow

Application Example

52 52 52
50-1 50-2 50-2 Block 50-1 50-1

T50-1 TRIP

T50-2 TRIP

t1

t1

TRIP

TRIP

T50-1

T50-2

t1

Fault Location B: Source-side Trip Time = T50-2 = Source side 50-2 Delay Fault Location A: Load-side Trip Time = t1 Source-side Backup Trip Time = T50-1 =Source-side 50-1 Delay

Figure 2-13

Reverse Interlocking Protection Scheme

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

49

Functions

2.2.2

Programming Time-Overcurrent Settings

Selecting the time-overcurrent protection in DIGSI 4 opens a dialog box containing the tabs General, 50, 51, 50N, 51N and Inrush Restraint in which you can modify the individual settings. The setting notes in this manual are structured accordingly.

2.2.2.1 50/51

General The functions associated with time-overcurrent protection were established during configuration of protective functions (Section 2.1.1) at address 0112 Charac. Phase. If address 0112 was set to Definite Time, then only the settings for the definite-time elements are available. The selection of TOC IEC or TOC ANSI makes available additional inverse characteristics. The superimposed high-current stage 502 is available in all these cases. At address 1201 FCT 50/51, phase time-overcurrent protection may be switched ON or OFF.

50N/51N

The functions associated with time-overcurrent protection were established during configuration of protective functions (Section 2.1.1) at address 0113. If address 0113 was set equal to Charac. Ground = Definite Time, then only the settings for the definite-time elements are available. Inverse characteristics may be available in addition. The superimposed high-set stage 50N-2 is available in all these cases. Depending on the parameter 0613A 50N/51N/67N w.the overcurrent protection for ground currents can either operate with measured values IGnd or with the quantities 3I0 calculated from the three phase currents. Devices featuring a sensitive ground current input, however, generally use the calculated quantity 3I0. The time-overcurrent protection for ground currents can be switched ON or OFF in address 1301 FCT 50N/51N independent of the time-overcurrent protection for phase currents. For ground faults characteristic, pick-up value and delay time can be set separately from those of the phase branches. This allows to use a different grading with shorter delays and more sensitive settings for ground faults.

Manual Close Mode (Phase, Ground)

When a circuit breaker is closed into a faulted line, a high speed trip by the circuit breaker is often desired. The manual closing feature is designed to remove the delay from one of the time-overcurrent elements when a circuit breaker is manually closed into a fault. The time delay may be bypassed for one of the three time-overcurrent phase elements and one of the three time-overcurrent ground elements via an impulse from the external control switch, thus resulting in high speed tripping. This impulse is prolonged by a period of 300 ms. Address 1213A MANUALCLOSEMODE can be set such that the delay is defeated for the 50-2 element, the 50-1 element, the 51 element, or none of the elements (Inactive). Defeating the delay on just one of the three elements allows control over what level of fault current is required to initiate high speed tripping of a circuit breaker that is closed into a fault. Accordingly, address 1313A MANUALCLOSEMODE is taken into account for the ground path. It specifies for the phase and ground which pick-up value takes effect with what delay time if the circuit breaker is closed manually.

50

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Overcurrent Protection (50, 50N, 51, 51N)

External control switch

If the manual closing signal is not from a 7SJ62/63/64, that is, neither via the built-in operator interface nor via a series interface, but, rather, directly from a control switch, this signal must be passed to a 7SJ62/63/64 binary input, and configured accordingly so that the element selected for high speed tripping will be effective. The manual closing information must be routed via CFC (interlocking task-level) using the CMD_Information block, if the internal control function is used (see Figure 2-14).

Internal control function

IN: Control Device 52 Breaker CF_D12

OUT: P. System Data 2 >Manual Close SP

Figure 2-14

Example for manual close feature using the internal control function

Inrush Restraint

When applying the protection device to transformers where high inrush currents must be expected, 7SJ62/63/64 can make use of an inrush restraint function for the time overcurrent stages 50-1 PICKUP, 51 PICKUP, 50N-1 PICKUP and 51N PICKUP. The inrush restraint option is enabled or disabled in 2201 INRUSH REST.. Subsection 2.2.2.6 shows the characteristic values of the inrush restraint function.

2.2.2.2

Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (50-2, 50-1) The pickup and delay of the 50-2 relay element are set at addresses 1202 50-2 PICKUP and 1203 50-2 DELAY respectively. The 50-2 relay element is typically utilized for protection against high magnitude faults. For this reason, the relay element pickup is often set high while the delay is set short. It is always important to set the pickup and delay such that operation of the 50-2 element will coordinate with other protective equipment in the system. Below is an example of how a 50-2 relay element might be set to protect a power transformer in a radial distribution system against high magnitude internal faults: Example: Transformer used to supply distribution bus with the following data: Base Transformer Rating Transformer Impedance (ZTX) Nominal High Side Voltage Nominal Low Side Voltage Transformer Connection High Side Fault MVA High Side Current Transformer Ratio Low Side Current Transformer Ratio 16 MVA 10% 110 kV 20 kV Delta-Grounded Wye 1,000 MVA 100 A / 1 A 500 A / 1 A

50-2 Relay Element

Based on the data above, the following are calculated: 3-phase high side fault current @ 110kV 3-phase low side fault current @ 20kV 3-phase low side fault current @ 110kV 5250 A 3928 A 714 A

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

51

Functions

Transformer full load current @ 110kV (IBase-110kV) Transformer full load current @ 20kV (IBase-20kV) High side current transformer ratio (CTR-HS) Low side current transformer ratio (CTR-LS)

84 A 462 A 100 A / 1 A 500 A / 1 A

The minimum pickup setting for the 50-2 element can be governed by a single inequality: I Base-110kV 1 50-2 Pickup > --------- --------------------------CTR-HS Z TX If the pickup of the 50-2 relay element is set according to the inequality above, the 502 element will never pickup for a fault beyond the transformers low-side bushings, even if changing system conditions increase the high side fault MVA. Using the inequality above as a guide, a setting of 10.00 amperes is chosen for the 50-2 element. At address 1203, a short time delay should be entered to prevent inrush currents from initiating false trips. For motor protection, the 50-2 relay element must be set smaller than the smallest phase-to-phase fault current and larger than the largest motor starting current. Since the maximum motor starting current is generally on the order of 1.6 times the nominal motor current, the 50-2 phase element should be set as follows: 1,6 I startup < 50-2 Pickup < I Min The potential increase in starting current caused by overvoltage conditions is already accounted for by the 1.6 factor. The 50-2 phase element may be set with no delay since, unlike the transformer, no saturation of the cross reactance occurs in a motor. If the reverse interlocking principle is used (see Subsection 2.2.1.5), the 50-2 element can be employed in a high speed bus protection scheme. With a brief safety delay entered at address 1203 (50 ms), the 50-2 element can be blocked for faults beyond the bus feeder breakers. The 50-1 element or 51 element will serve as redundant protection for the bus. The pickup values of both the 50-2 unit and the 50-1 or 51 unit are set equal to each other. The time delay associated with the 50-1 or 51 element is then time-coordinated with the individual bus feeder devices. The delay set at address 1203 is in addition to the 50-2 pickup time. The delay of the 50-2 element may be set to . The 50-2 element will then pickup and generate a message, but will never trip. If the 50-2 element is not required at all, then the pickup value should be set to , thus preventing pickup, trip, and the generation of a message. 50-1 Relay Element The pickup value of the 50-1 relay element (set at address 1204 50-1 PICKUP) should be set above the maximum anticipated load current. Pickup due to overload should never occur since the 50-1 relay element is designed only for fault protection. For this reason, a setting equal to 120 % of the expected peak load is recommended for line protection, and a setting equal to 140 % of the expected peak load is recommended for transformers and motors. If the 7SJ62/63/64 relay is used to protect transformers with large inrush currents, the energization stabilization feature may be used to prevent a false trip of the 50-1 relay

52

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Overcurrent Protection (50, 50N, 51, 51N)

element. The configuration data for the inrush restraint feature is programmed at address block 22 (see Subsection 2.9.2). The delay of the 50-1 element is set at address 1205 50-1 DELAY and should be based on system coordination requirements. The delay set at address 1205 is in addition to the 50-1 elements pickup time. The delay of the 50-1 element may be set to . The 50-1 element will then pickup and generate a message, but will never trip. If the 50-1 element is not required at all, then the pickup value should be set to , thus preventing pickup, trip, and the generation of a message. Interaction with Automatic Reclosing Equipment When reclosing occurs, it is desirable to have high speed protection against temporary faults. If the fault still exists after the first reclose, the 50-2 elements can be blocked and the 50-1 and/or 51 elements will provide time delay tripping. At address 1214A 50-2 active, it can be specified whether or not the 50-2 elements should be supervised by the status of an internal or external automatic reclosing device. If address 1214A is set to With 79 Active, the 50-2 elements will not operate unless automatic reclosing is not blocked. If address 1214A is set to Always, the 50-2 elements will always operate. The integrated automatic reclosing function of 7SJ62/63/64 also provides the option to individually determine for each time overcurrent stage whether tripping or blocking is to be carried out instantaneously or with time delay, unaffected by the AR (see Subsection 2.13.1.3).

2.2.2.3

Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (51) Having set TOC IEC or TOC ANSI when configuring the protection functions (Subsection 2.1.1) in address 0112 Charac. Phase, also the parameters for the inverse characteristics are available. Having set TOC IEC in address 0112 Charac. Phase, specify the desired IEC curve (Normal Inverse, Very Inverse, Extremely Inv. or Long Inverse) in address 1211 51 IEC CURVE. If TOC ANSI was selected in address 0112 Charac. Phase, specify the desired ANSI curve (Very Inverse, Inverse, Short Inverse, Long Inverse, Moderately Inv., Extremely Inv. or Definite Inv.) in address 1212 51 ANSI CURVE. Pickup of the 51 relay element will occur for currents greater than or equal to 110 % of the 51 elements pickup value, and may or may not occur for currents between 100 % and 110 % of the 51 elements pickup value. Dropout of the 51 relay element occurs when the current decreases to 95 % of the 51 elements pickup value. Selecting the option Disk Emulation in address 1210 51 Drop-out, the dropout is performed according to the dropout characteristic as described in Subsection 2.2.1.2. The pickup of the 51 element is set at address 1207 51 PICKUP. As is the case for the 50-1 relay element, the pickup value of the 51 relay element should be set above the maximum anticipated load current. Pickup due to overload should never occur since the 51 relay element is designed only for fault protection. For this reason, a setting equal to 120 % of the expected peak load is recommended for line protection, and a setting equal to 140 % of the expected peak load is recommended for transformers and motors.

51 Relay Element With IEC or ANSI Curves

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

53

Functions

The associated time multiplier becomes accessible when selecting an IEC curve at address 1208 51 TIME DIAL and an ANSI curve at address 1209 51 TIME DIAL. It must be coordinated with the time grading of the network. The time multiplication factor may be set to . The 51 element will then pickup and generate a message, but will never trip. If the 51 element is not required at all, address 0112 should set to Charac. Phase = Definite Time during protective function configuration. User Specified Characteristic Curves If address 0112 Charac. Phase = User Defined PU or User def. Reset during configuration of the user-specified curve option, a maximum of 20 value pairs (current and time) may be entered at address 1230 51/51N to represent the time-current characteristic curve associated with the 51 element. This option allows point-by-point entry of any desired curve. This option allows point-by-point entry of any desired curve. If address 0112 was set to User def. Reset during configuration of the user-specified curve option, additional value pairs (current and reset time) may be entered at address 1231 MofPU Res T/Tp to represent the reset curve associated with the 51 element. Since the entered current values are rounded off in a certain grid system of the device before the editing (see Table 2-4), we recommend the use of these exact values. Current and time values are entered as multiples of the address 1207 and 1208 settings. Therefore, it is recommended that addresses 1207 and 1208 be initially set to 1.00 to simplify the calculation of these ratios. Once the curve is entered, the settings at addresses 1207 and 1208 may be modified if necessary. Upon delivery of the device, all time values are set at , preventing pickup of the device from initiating a trip signal. When entering a user-specified curve, the following must be observed: Enter the data points in ascending order. The time overcurrent functions will sort the data points by current values in ascending order. The graphical representation displays the data points in the order they are entered. As few as 10 pairs of numbers may be entered at the users option. Each unused pair must then be marked as unused by entering as for the time and current values. It is important to view the curve to ensure that it is clear and constant. The current values entered should be those from Table 2-4, along with the matching times. Other values for MofPU are changed to the nearest adjacent value although this is not indicated.
Table 2-4 Preferential Values of Standardized Currents for User Specific Tripping Characteristics MofPU = 1 to 1.94 1.00 1.06 1.13 1.19 1.25 1.50 1.56 1.63 1.69 1.75 MofPU = 2 to 4.75 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 MofPU = 5 to 7.75 5.00 5.25 5.50 5.75 6.00 6.50 6.75 7.00 7.25 7.50 MofPU = 8 to 20 8.00 9.00 10.00 11.00 12.00 15.00 16.00 17.00 18.00 19.00

54

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Overcurrent Protection (50, 50N, 51, 51N)

Table 2-4

Preferential Values of Standardized Currents for User Specific Tripping Characteristics MofPU = 1 to 1.94 1.31 1.38 1.44 1.81 1.88 1.94 MofPU = 2 to 4.75 3.25 4.75 MofPU = 5 to 7.75 6.25 7.75 MofPU = 8 to 20 13.00 14.00 20.00

Current flows which are less than the smallest current value entered will not lead to an extension of the tripping time beyond the time associated with the smallest current value entered. The characteristic curve (see Figure 2-15) represents constant tripping time for currents less than the smallest current value entered .
t Reset Curve
Largest Current Point Smallest Current Point

Characteristic Curve

Smallest Current Point

Largest Current Point

0.05

0.9 1 1.1

20

Figure 2-15

Use of a User-Specified Curve

Current flows which are greater than the largest current value entered will not lead to a reduction of the tripping time below the time associated with the largest current value entered. The characteristic curve (see Figure 2-15) represents constant tripping time for currents greater than the largest current value entered. The time and current value pairs are entered at address 1231 to recreate the dropdown curve. The following must be observed: The current values entered should be those from Table 2-5, along with the matching times. Other values for MofPU are changed to the nearest adjacent value although this is not indicated.

Table 2-5

Preferential Values of Standardized Currents for User Specific Tripping Characteristics MofPU = 0.84 to 0.67 MofPU = 0.66 to 0.38 0,84 0.83 0.81 0.80 0,75 0.73 0.72 0.70 0.66 0.64 0.63 0.61 0.53 0.50 0.47 0.44 MofPU = 0.34 to 0.00 0.34 0.31 0.28 0.25 0.16 0.13 0.09 0.06

MofPU = 1 to 0.86 1.00 0.99 0.98 0.97 0.93 0.92 0.91 0.90

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

55

Functions

Table 2-5

Preferential Values of Standardized Currents for User Specific Tripping Characteristics MofPU = 0.84 to 0.67 MofPU = 0.66 to 0.38 0.78 0.77 0.69 0.67 0.59 0.56 0.41 0.38 MofPU = 0.34 to 0.00 0.22 0.19 0.03 0.00

MofPU = 1 to 0.86 0.96 0.95 0.94 0.89 0.88 0.86

Current flows which are less than the smallest current value entered will not lead to a reduction of the reset time below the time associated with the smallest current value entered. The reset curve (see Figure 2-15) represents constant reset time for currents smaller than the smallest current value entered Current flows which are greater than the largest current value entered will not lead to an extension of the reset time beyond the time associated with the largest current value entered. The reset curve (see Figure 2-15) represents constant reset time for currents larger than the largest current value entered. When using DIGSI 4 to modify settings, a dialog box is available to enter up to twenty pairs of values for a characteristic curve (see Figure 2-16).

Figure 2-16

Entry and Visualization of a User Specified Characteristic Curve in DIGSI 4

In order to represent the curve graphically, the user should click on Characteristic. The pre-entered curve will appear as shown in Figure 2-16. The characteristic curve shown in the graph can be modified by placing the mouse cursor over a point on the curve, holding down the left mouse button, and dragging the data point to the desired new position. Releasing the mouse button will automatically update the value in the value table. The upper limits of the value ranges are shown by dotted lines at the top and right extremes of the coordinate system. If the position of a data point lies outside these limits, the associated value will be set to infinity.

56

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Overcurrent Protection (50, 50N, 51, 51N)

2.2.2.4 General

Programming Settings for Time-Overcurrent Ground Protection The functions associated with time-overcurrent protection were established during configuration of protective functions (Section 2.1.1) at address 0113 Charac. Ground. If address 0113 was set equal to Definite Time, then only the settings for the definite-time elements are available. Inverse characteristics may be available in addition. The superimposed high-set stage 50N-2 is available in all these cases. At address 1301 FCT 50N/51N, ground time-overcurrent protection may be switched ON or OFF independent of the phase time-overcurrent protection. Pickup values, time delays, and characteristic curves for ground protection are set separately from the pickup values, time delays and characteristic curves associated with phase protection. Because of this, relay coordination for ground faults is independent of relay coordination for phase faults, and more sensitive settings can often be applied to ground protection.

50N-2 Relay Element

The pickup and delay of the 50N-2 relay element are set at addresses 1302 50N-2 PICKUP and 1303 50N-2 DELAY respectively. The same considerations apply for these settings as did for 50-2 settings discussed earlier. The delay set at address 1303 is in addition to the 50N-2 elements pickup time. The delay of the 50N-2 element may be set to . The 50N-2 element will then pickup and generate a message, but will never trip. If the 50N-2 element is not required at all, then the pickup value should be set to , thus preventing pickup, trip, and the generation of a message.

50N-1 Relay Element

The pickup value of the 50N-1 relay element (set at address 1304 50N-1 PICKUP) should be set below the minimum anticipated ground fault current in the relays zone of protection. If the 7SJ62/63/64 relay is used to protect transformers or motors with large inrush currents, the energization stabilization feature may be used to prevent a false trip of the 50N-1 relay element. It can be enabled or disabled for both the phase current and the ground current in address 2201 INRUSH REST.. The characteristic values of the inrush restraint are listed in Subsection 2.2.2.6. The delay of the 50N-1 element is set at address 1305 50N-1 DELAY and should be based on system coordination requirements. The delay set at address 1305 is in addition to the 50N-1 elements pickup time. The delay of the 50N-1 element may be set to . The 50N-1 element will then pickup and generate a message, but will never trip. If the 50N-1 element is not required at all, then the pickup value should be set to , thus preventing pickup, trip, and the generation of a message.

Interaction with Automatic Reclosing Equipment

When reclosing occurs, it is desirable to have high speed protection against temporary faults. If the fault still exists after the first reclose, the 50N-2 elements can be blocked and the 50N-1 and/or 51N elements will provide time delay tripping. At address 1314A 50N-2 active, it can be specified whether or not the 50N-2 elements should be supervised by the status of an internal or external automatic reclosing device. If address 1314A is set to With 79 Active, the 50N-2 elements will not operate unless automatic reclosing is not blocked. If address 1314A is set to Always, the 50N-2 elements will always operate.

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

57

Functions

The integrated automatic reclosing function of 7SJ62/63/64 also provides the option to individually determine for each time overcurrent stage whether tripping or blocking is to be carried out instantaneously or with time delay, unaffected by the AR (see Subsection 2.13.1.3).

2.2.2.5

Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (51N) Setting TOC IEC in address 0113 Charac. Ground when configuring the protection functions (Subsection 2.1.1), also the parameters for the inverse characteristics are available. Set the desired IEC curve (Normal Inverse, Very Inverse, Extremely Inv. or Long Inverse) in address 1311 51 IEC CURVE. Setting TOC ANSI in address 0113 Charac. Ground, specify the desired ANSI curve (Very Inverse, Inverse, Short Inverse, Long Inverse, Moderately Inv., Extremely Inv. or Definite Inv.) in address 1312 51 ANSI CURVE. Pickup of the 51N relay element will occur for currents greater than or equal to 110 % of the 51N pickup value, and may or may not occur for currents between 100 % and 110 % of the 51 elements pickup value. Dropout of the 51N relay element occurs when the current decreases to 95 % of the 51N elements pickup value. If option Disk Emulation in enabled in address 1310 51 Drop-out, the dropout is performed according to the dropout characteristic as described in Subsection 2.2.1.2. The pickup value of the 51N element is set at address 1307 51N PICKUP. As is the case for the 50N-1 relay element, the pickup value of the 51N relay element should be set below the minimum anticipated ground fault current in the relays zone of protection. The 51N element time multiplication factor for an IEC curve is set at address 1308 51N TIME DIAL and in address 1309 51N TIME DIAL for an ANSI curve and should be based on system coordination requirements. The time multiplication factor may also be set to . The 51N element will then pickup and generate a message, but will never trip. If the 51N element is not required at all, address 0113 should be set to Definite Time during protective function configuration (see Section 2.1.1).

51N Relay Element with IEC or ANSI Curves

2.2.2.6

Inrush Restraint Inrush restraint will only operate, and is only accessible, if enabled at address 0122 InrushRestraint during configuration of protective functions. If the function is not required, address 0122 should be set to Disabled. In address 2201 INRUSH REST. the function is switched ON or OFF jointly for the overcurrent stages 50-1 PICKUP, 51 PICKUP, 50N-1 PICKUP and 51N PICKUPON. The inrush restraint is based on the evaluation of the 2nd harmonic present in the inrush current. Upon delivery from the factory, the device is programmed to initiate inrush restraint when the second harmonic component of the measured current exceeds 15 % of the total current. This value is identical for all phases and ground, and may be modified at address 2202. Under normal circumstances, this setting will not need to be changed. However, in special situations, this setting may be as low as 12 %. The effective duration of the cross-blocking 2203 CROSS BLK TIMER can be set to a value between 0 s (harmonic restraint active for each phase individually) and a max-

58

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Overcurrent Protection (50, 50N, 51, 51N)

imum of 180 s (harmonic restraint of a phase blocks also the other phases for the specified duration). The maximum current where inrush restraint can operate is set at address 2205 I Max

2.2.3

Settings
In the list below, the setting ranges and default setting values for the pickup currents are for a device with a nominal current rating IN = 1 A. For a nominal current rating IN = 5 A, multiply the Setting Options values and Default Setting values by 5. Consider the current transformer ratios when setting the device with primary values. Note: Addresses to which the letter A is attached can only be modified via the DIGSI 4 software at Additional Settings.

Addr. 1201 1213A

Setting Title FCT 50/51 MANUAL CLOSE ON OFF

Setting Options

Default Setting ON 50-2 instantaneously

Comments 50, 51 Phase Time Overcurrent Manual Close Mode

50-2 instantaneously 50 -1 instantaneously 51 instantaneously Inactive ON OFF 50N-2 instantaneously 50N-1 instantaneously 51N instantaneously Inactive OFF ON 0.10..35.00 A; 0.00..60.00 sec; 0.10..35.00 A; 0.00..60.00 sec; Always with 79 active 0.10..4.00 A 0.05..3.20 sec; 0.50..15.00; Instantaneous Disk Emulation

1301 1313A

FCT 50N/51N MANUALCLOSEMODE

ON 50N-2 instantaneously

50N, 51N Ground Time Overcurrent Manual Close Mode

2201 1202 1203 1204 1205 1214A 1207 1208 1209 1210

INRUSH REST. 50-2 PICKUP 50-2 DELAY 50-1 PICKUP 50-1 DELAY 50-2 active 51 PICKUP 51 TIME DIAL 51 TIME DIAL 51 Drop-out

OFF 2.00 A 0.00 sec 1.00 A 0.50 sec Always 1.00 A 0.50 sec 5.00 Disk Emulation

Inrush Restraint 50-2 Pickup 50-2 Time Delay 50-1 Pickup 50-1 Time Delay 50-2 active 51 Pickup 51 Time Dial 51 Time Dial Drop-out characteristic

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

59

Functions

Addr. 1211

Setting Title 51 IEC CURVE

Setting Options Normal Inverse Very Inverse Extremely Inverse Long Inverse Very Inverse Inverse Short Inverse Long Inverse Moderately Inverse Extremely Inverse Definite Inverse 1.00..20.00 I / Ip; 0.01..999.00 Time Dial 0.05..0.95 I / Ip; 0.01..999.00 Time Dial 0.05..35.00 A; 0.00..60.00 sec; 0.05..35.00 A; 0.00..60.00 sec; Always with 79 Active 0.05..4.00 A 0.05..3.20 sec; 0.50..15.00; Instantaneous Disk Emulation Normal Inverse Very Inverse Extremely Inverse Long Inverse Very Inverse Inverse Short Inverse Long Inverse Moderately Inverse Extremely Inverse Definite Inverse 1.00..20.00 I / Ip; 0.01..999.00 Time Dial 0.05..0.95 I / Ip; 0.01..999.00 Time Dial 10..45 % NO YES

Default Setting Normal Inverse IEC Curve

Comments

1212

51 ANSI CURVE

Very Inverse

ANSI Curve

1230 1231 1302 1303 1304 1305 1314A 1307 1308 1309 1310 1311

51/51N MofPU Res T/Tp 50N-2 PICKUP 50N-2 DELAY 50N-1 PICKUP 50N-1 DELAY 50N-2 active 51N PICKUP 51N TIME DIAL 51N TIME DIAL 51N RESET 51N IEC CURVE

51/51N Multiple of Pickup <-> T/Tp 0.50 A 0.10 sec 0.20 A 0.50 sec Always 0.20 A 0.20 sec 5.00 Disk Emulation Normal Inverse 50N-2 Pickup 50N-2 Time Delay 50N-1 Pickup 50N-1 Time Delay 50N-2 active 51N Pickup 51N Time Dial 51N Time Dial Drop-Out Characteristic IEC Curve

1312

51N ANSI CURVE

Very Inverse

ANSI Curve

1330 1331 2202 2203

50N/51N MofPU Res T/TEp 2nd HARMONIC CROSS BLOCK

50N/51N Multiple of Pickup <-> T/TEp 15 % NO 2nd. harmonic in % of fundamental Cross Block

60

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Overcurrent Protection (50, 50N, 51, 51N)

Addr. 2204 2205

Setting Title

Setting Options

Default Setting 0.00 sec 7.50 A

Comments Cross Block Time Maximum Current for Inrush Restraint

CROSS BLK TIMER 0.00..180.00 sec I Max 0.30..25.00 A

2.2.3.1
F.No.

Information List
Alarm 50(N)/51(N) O/C PICKUP 50(N)/51(N) TRIP >BLOCK 50/51 >BLOCK 50-2 >BLOCK 50-1 >BLOCK 51 50/51 O/C switched OFF 50/51 O/C is BLOCKED 50/51 O/C is ACTIVE 50/51 Phase A picked up 50/51 Phase B picked up 50/51 Phase C picked up 50-2 picked up 50-2 TRIP 50-1 picked up 50/51 I> TRIP 51 picked up 51 TRIP 50-2 Time Out 50-1 Time Out 51 Time Out 50-2 BLOCKED 50-1 BLOCKED 51 BLOCKED >50-2 instantaneously >50-1 instantaneously >51 instantaneously 50-2 instantaneously 50-1 instantaneously Comments

01761 50(N)/51(N) PU 01791 50(N)/51(N)TRIP 01704 >BLK 50/51 01721 >BLOCK 50-2 01722 >BLOCK 50-1 01723 >BLOCK 51 01751 50/51 PH OFF 01752 50/51 PH BLK 01753 50/51 PH ACT 01762 50/51 Ph A PU 01763 50/51 Ph B PU 01764 50/51 Ph C PU 01800 50-2 picked up 01805 50-2 TRIP 01810 50-1 picked up 01815 50/51 TRIP 01820 51 picked up 01825 51 TRIP 01804 50-2 TimeOut 01814 50-1 TimeOut 01824 51 Time Out 01852 50-2 BLOCKED 01851 50-1 BLOCKED 01855 51 BLOCKED 01910 >INSTANT. 50-2 01912 >INSTANT. 50-1 01914 >INSTANT. 51 01911 50-2 INSTANT. 01913 50-1 INSTANT.

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

61

Functions

F.No. 01915 51 INSTANT. 01714 >BLK 50N/51N 01724 >BLOCK 50N-2 01725 >BLOCK 50N-1 01726 >BLOCK 51N 01756 50N/51N OFF 01757 50N/51N BLK 01758 50N/51N ACT

Alarm 51 instantaneously >BLOCK 50N/51N >BLOCK 50N-2 >BLOCK 50N-1 >BLOCK 51N 50N/51N is OFF 50N/51N is BLOCKED 50N/51N is ACTIVE 50N/51N picked up 50N-2 picked up 50N-2 TRIP 50N-1 picked up 50N-1 TRIP 51N picked up 51N TRIP 50N-2 Time Out 50N-1 Time Out 51N Time Out 50N-2 BLOCKED 50N-1 BLOCKED 51N BLOCKED >50N-2 instantaneously >50N-1 instantaneously >51N instantaneously 50N-2 instantaneously 50N-1 instantaneously 51N instantaneously >BLOCK InRush Phase

Comments

01765 50N/51NPickedup 01831 50N-2 picked up 01833 50N-2 TRIP 01834 50N-1 picked up 01836 50N-1 TRIP 01837 51N picked up 01839 51N TRIP 01832 50N-2 TimeOut 01835 50N-1 TimeOut 01838 51N TimeOut 01854 50N-2 BLOCKED 01853 50N-1 BLOCKED 01856 51N BLOCKED 01916 >INSTANT. 50N-2 01918 >INSTANT. 50N-1 01983 >INSTANT. 51N 01917 50N-2 INSTANT. 01919 50N-1 INSTANT. 01984 51N INSTANT. 07563 >BLOCK InRushPh 01840 PhA InrushBlk 01841 PhB InrushBlk 01842 PhC InrushBlk 01843 INRUSH X-BLK 07551 50-1 InRushPU 07552 50N-1 InRushPU

Phase A trip blocked by inrush detection Phase B trip blocked by inrush detection Phase C trip blocked by inrush detection Cross blk: PhX blocked PhY 50-1 InRush picked up 50N-1 InRush picked up

62

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Overcurrent Protection (50, 50N, 51, 51N)

F.No. 07553 51 InRushPU 07554 51N InRushPU 07556 InRush OFF

Alarm 51 InRush picked up 51N InRush picked up InRush OFF InRush Phase BLOCKED InRush Ground BLOCKED 67-1 InRush picked up 67N-1 InRush picked up 67-TOC InRush picked up 67N-TOC InRush picked up Phase A InRush picked up Phase B InRush picked up Phase C InRush picked up Ground InRush picked up

Comments

07557 InRushPhBLOCKED 07558 InRush Gnd BLK 07559 67-1 InRushPU 07560 67N-1 InRushPU 07561 67-TOC InRushPU 07562 67N-TOCInRushPU 07565 Ia InRush PU 07566 Ib InRush PU 07567 Ic InRush PU 07564 Gnd InRush PU

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

63

Functions

2.3
General

Directional Overcurrent Protection (67, 67N)

The 7SJ62/63/64 features directional overcurrent protection. Therefore, this device can be applied to systems where proper protection depends on knowing both the magnitude of the fault current and the direction of energy flow to the fault location. Directional overcurrent protection requires that the device be connected to both current transformers and voltage transformers. The time-overcurrent protection (non-directional) described in Section 2.2 may operate as overlapping back-up protection or may be disabled. Additionally, the user may select between directional overcurrent protection and non-directional overcurrent protection on a relay element by relay element basis. To better understand the benefits of directional overcurrent protection, consider the parallel transformers shown in Figure 2-17. These transformers are designated as I and II and are supplied from a single source. For a fault internal to Transformer I, some of the fault current will flow from Bus A through Transformer I to the fault while the remaining fault current flows from Bus A through Transformer II and Bus B to the fault. In order to avoid tripping out Bus B for this fault, the load side relays protecting Transformer II must coordinate with the load side relays protecting Transformer I. Likewise, for a fault internal to Transformer II, some of the fault current will flow from Bus A through Transformer II to the fault while the remaining fault current flows from Bus A through Transformer I and Bus B to the fault. In order to avoid tripping out Bus B for this fault, the load side relays protecting Transformer I must coordinate with the load side relays protecting Transformer II. If the load side relays on Transformer I and Transformer II are conventional overcurrent elements, it is clearly impossible for the load side relays on Transformer I and Transformer II to coordinate properly with each other for both faults internal to Transformer I and Transformer II. By employing directional overcurrent relays as the load side relays protecting Transformers I and II, coordination between the relays is no longer necessary since the load side relays on Transformer I will only detect faults internal to Transformer I and the load side relays on Transformer II will only detect fault internal to Transformer II. It is important to note that the directional overcurrent relays must be polarized toward the faults they are to protect, which does not necessarily correspond to the direction of normal power flow. For the same reasons discussed above, directional overcurrent protection is also used to protect transmission lines and distribution feeders operated in a loop configuration or supplied from two directions, as shown in Figure 2-18. Phase and ground directional overcurrent protection may be turned on and off independently. Directional overcurrent relay elements are available with a wide array of directional curves and characteristic time-current curves. There are four definite time (Instantaneous elements with optional timers) and two inverse time directional overcurrent elements in the device. The definite time (Instantaneous) directional elements include two phase elements and two ground elements. The definite time directional phase elements are designated 67-2 and 67-1 whereas the definite time directional ground elements are designated 67N-2 and 67N-1. The inverse time directional elements include a directional phase element designated as 67-TOC and a directional ground element designated as 67N-TOC.

64

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Directional Overcurrent Protection (67, 67N)

t A I B

Direction of Load Flow

II

Time-Overcurrent Protection Directional Overcurrent Protection

Figure 2-17 Overcurrent Protection for Parallel Transformers

t G Time-Overcurrent Protection Directional Overcurrent Protection

Figure 2-18 Transmission Lines with Sources at Each End

Depending on the setting of parameter 0613A 50N/51N/67N w.the ground current stage can operate either with measured values Ignd or with the values 3I0 calculated from the three phase currents. Devices featuring a sensitive ground current input, however, generally use the calculated quantity 3I0. All directional overcurrent elements, inverse and definite time, enabled in the device may be blocked via an external signal to the binary inputs of the device or via automatic reclosure (cyclically). Removal of the external signal to the binary input will reenable these elements. Also, a feature described as Manual Close Mode can be configured to improve fault clearing times associated with Switch-on-to-Fault Conditions.

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

65

Functions

Under this situation, the time delay may be defeated for one of the three directional overcurrent phase elements and one of the three directional overcurrent ground elements via an impulse from the external control switch, thus resulting in high speed tripping. This impulse is prolonged by a period of 300 ms. The directional phase and ground elements utilized for high speed tripping in this situation are selected at addresses 1513 and 1613 respectively. Pickup and delay settings may be quickly adjusted to system requirements via dynamic setting swapping (see Section 2.4). Tripping by the 67-1, 67-TOC, 67N-1, and 67N-TOC elements may be blocked for inrush conditions by utilizing the inrush restraint feature. Table 2-6 gives an overview of the interconnection to other functions of 7SJ62/63/64.
Table 2-6 Interconnection to other functions Connection to Automatic Reclosing Manual CLOSE Dynamic ColdLoad Pickup Inrush Restraint

Directional Time Overcurrent Protection Stages 67-1 67-2 67-TOC 67N-1 67N-2 67N-TOC

2.3.1
2.3.1.1

Description of Directional Overcurrent Protection

Definite Time, Directional Overcurrent Protection The 67-2 and 67N-2 directional overcurrent elements, phase and ground currents are compared separately with the pickup values of the 67-2 and 67N-2 relay elements. Currents in the set direction above the pickup values are detected and recorded within the device. After the user-configured time delay has elapsed, a trip signal is issued. The dropout value of the definite time, directional overcurrent elements is roughly equal to 95% of the pickup value for currents greater than or equal to 30% of the nominal current of the device. These stages can be blocked by the automatic reclosure feature. Figure 2-20 shows by way of example the logic diagram for the 67-2 relay element.

67-2, 67N-2

66

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Directional Overcurrent Protection (67, 67N)

1513A MANUALCLOSEMODE Inactive 67-TOC instant. 67-1 instant. 67-2 instant.

Manual Close 79 AR 67-2 inst.

FNo. 14501

&

or

>INSTANT. 67-2. 67-2 Ph A PU

FNo. 02642

or
&
1503 67-2 DELAY

67-2 picked up

or or or

FNo. 02649

&

67-2 TRIP
FNo. 02647 67-2 Time Out

A B C

Measurement Pickup-/Tripping Logic

79 AR 67-2 blk FNo. 02615 >BLOCK 67-2

FNo. 02604

or

FNo. 02655 67-2 BLOCKED FNo. 02652

>BLK 67/67-TOC
1501 FCT 67/67-TOC OFF 1 ON

67 BLOCKED

or

FNo. 02651 67/67-TOC OFF

Figure 2-19

Logic Diagram for the 67-2 Relay Element

If parameter MANUALCLOSEMODE is set to 50-2 instant. and manual close detection applies, the pick-up is tripped instantaneously, also for blocking of the stage via binary input. The same applies to 79 AR 67-2 inst. and the binary input for instantaneous tripping. 67-1, 67N-1 The 67-1 and 67N-1 directional overcurrent elements, phase and ground currents are compared separately with the pickup values of the 67-1 and 67N-1 relay elements. Currents in the set direction above the pickup values are detected and recorded within the device. After the user-configured time delay has elapsed, a trip signal is issued. If the inrush restraint feature is enabled, and an inrush condition exist, no tripping takes place, but a message is recorded and displayed indicating when the overcurrent element time delay elapses. Different messages are recorded and displayed appear depending on whether tripping takes place or the time delay expires without tripping. The dropout value of the definite time, directional overcurrent elements is roughly equal to 95% of the pickup value for currents greater than or equal to 30% of the nominal current of the device. These stages can be blocked by the automatic reclosure feature.

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

67

Functions

Figure 2-20 shows by way of example the logic diagram for the 67-1 relay element.

1513A MANUALCLOSEMODE Inactive 67-TOC instant. 67-1 instant. 67-2 instant.

Manual Close 79 AR 67-1 inst.

FNo. 14503

&

or
Inrush Recognition 67-1 (see Figure 2-12)

>INSTANT. 67-1 A 67-1 PU &

1505 67-1 DELAY FNo. 07559

or or 1 or

&

67-1 InRushPU
FNo. 02660

& &

67-1 picked up
FNo. 02665 67-1 TRIP

&

Direction Determination
Forward
1 Undefined

FNo. 02664 67-1 Time Out

FNo. 02628 Phase A forward FNo. 02632 Phase A reverse

Reverse

A B C

Measurement/Logic

79 AR 67-1 blk. FNo. 02621 >BLOCK 67-1

FNo. 02604

or

FNo. 02637

67-1 BLOCKED
FNo. 02652

>BLK 67/67-TOC
1501 FCT 67N/67NOFF 1 ON

67 BLOCKED

or

FNo. 02651

67/67-TOC OFF

Figure 2-20

Logic Diagram for the 67-1 Relay Element

2.3.1.2

Inverse Time, Directional Overcurrent Protection (67-TOC, 67N-TOC) Inverse time, directional overcurrent protection, the 67-TOC and 67N-TOC relay elements may contain IEC characteristic curves or ANSI characteristic curves depending on the model ordered. A user-specified curve may also be applied to the inverse time, directional overcurrent relay elements. The curves and associated formulas are given in Technical Specifications (Figures 4-1 to 4-6 in Section 4.3). During configuration of the 67-TOC and 67N-TOC characteristic curves, the definite time directional relay elements (67-2, 67-1, 67N-2, and 67N-1) are enabled (see Subsection 2.3.1.1).

68

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Directional Overcurrent Protection (67, 67N)

Pickup and Tripping

Each phase and ground current is separately compared with the pickup values of the 67-TOC and 67N-TOC relay elements. When the currents in the 67-TOC and 67NTOC relay elements exceed the corresponding pickup value by a factor of 1.1, the element picks up and a message is reported, if the current is in the set direction. If the inrush restraint feature is being utilized, then the message reported is dependent on whether or not an inrush condition exists. Pickup of a 67-TOC or 67N-TOC relay element is based on the rms value of the fundamental harmonic. When the 67-TOC and 67N-TOC elements pickup, the time delay of the trip signal is calculated using an integrated measurement process. The calculated time delay is dependent on the actual fault current flowing and the selected time-current characteristic curve. Once the time delay elapses, a trip signal is issued. If the inrush restraint feature is enabled, and an inrush condition exist, no tripping takes place, but a message is recorded and displayed indicating when the overcurrent element time delay elapses. The r.m.s. values of the fundamental waves are used for the pickup. The characteristic curves of the 67-TOC and 67N-TOC relay elements may be selected independently of each other. In addition, pickup, time multipliers, and time dials for the 67-TOC and 67N-TOC elements may be individually set.

Dropout For IEC or ANSI Curves

Dropout of an element using an IEC or ANSI curve occurs when the current decreases to about 95 % of the pickup value if instantaneous reset is selected, or 90 % of the pickup value if disk emulation is selected. When instantaneous reset is selected, reset of the element occurs without delay. When disk emulation is selected, reset occurs just as it would for an electromechanical relay utilizing an induction disk. For disk emulation, the reset process begins after fault current is interrupted. Reset corresponds to the unwinding of an induction disk. A subsequent pickup of the relay element prior to full reset will result in a reduced tripping time delay. The reduced tripping time delay will be based on the degree to which the relay had reset when the subsequent pickup occurred. When the current in the relay element is between 90 % and 95 % of the pickup value following dropout, neither disk movement in the tripping or reset direction is simulated. Disk emulation offers advantages when the inverse time, directional overcurrent relay elements must be coordinated with conventional electromechanical overcurrent relays located toward the source.

User Specified Curves

When user specified curves are utilized, the time-current characteristic curve may be defined point by point. Up to 20 pairs of values (current, time) may be entered. The relay element then approximates the curve using linear interpolation. When utilizing user specified time-current curves, the reset curve may be user specified as well. This is advantageous when the inverse time, directional overcurrent protection must be coordinated with conventional electromechanical overcurrent relays located toward the source. If user specified reset curves are not utilized, the relay element drops out when current decreases to about 95% of the relay elements pickup value, and immediate reset takes place. Figure 2-21 shows by way of example the logic diagram for the overcurrent stage 67TOC of the inverse directional time-overcurrent protection of the phase currents.

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

69

Functions

1513A MANUALCLOSEMODE Inactive 67-2 instant. 67-1 instant. 67-TOC instant.

Manual Close 79 AR 67-TOC inst.

FNo. 14506

&

or
Inrush Recognition 67-TOC (s. Figure 2-12)

>INSTANT 67-TOC A 67-TOC PU

FNo. 07561 67-TOC InRushPU FNo. 02670 67-TOC pickedup FNo. 02675 67-TOC TRIP

or
&
1508 51 TIME DIAL

&

&

or or or
&

&

Direction Determination
Forward
1 Undefined Reverse

FNo. 02674 67-TOC Time Out

FNo. 02628 Phase A forward FNo. 02632 Phase A reverse

A B C

Measurement/Logic

79 AR 67-TOC blk FNo. 02622 >BLOCK 67-TOC

FNo. 02604

or

FNo. 02669 67-TOC BLOCKED FNo. 02652 67 BLOCKED

>BLK 67/67-TOC
1501 FCT 67N/67N-TOC OFF 1 ON

or

FNo. 02651 67/67-TOC OFF

Figure 2-21

Logic Diagram for the 67-TOC Relay Element

2.3.1.3

Determination of Direction Determination of fault direction is performed independently for each phase element and for the ground element.

Methods of Determining Direction

For the a-phase directional elements, direction is determined by comparing Ia with Vbc at the relay location. For the b-phase and c-phase directional elements, direction is determined by comparing Ib with Vca and Ic with Vab at the relay location. For phase-toground, phase-to-phase, and double phase-to-ground faults, sufficient voltage magnitude is available at the relay location to determine direction for all possible fault locations. For three-phase faults, stored voltage values are used to determine direction unless sufficient voltage magnitudes exists at the relay location. The stored voltage values correspond to the voltage magnitudes and angles during the last two cycles where

70

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Directional Overcurrent Protection (67, 67N)

sufficient voltage magnitude was available to determine direction. When sufficient voltage magnitude is not available to determine direction, direction is locked until sufficient voltage returns. When closing into a three-phase fault, if voltage magnitude is not sufficient to determine direction and no stored voltage values exist in the buffer, the relay element will trip without regard to fault direction. In all other cases the voltage magnitude will be sufficient for determining the direction. For the directional ground fault elements, direction is determined by comparing V0 with I0. The current I0 may be obtained from a current transformer connected in the residual path or may be calculated by the device from the three phase currents. The voltage V0 may be calculated by the device from the three phase-to-ground voltages or the voltage 3V0 may be obtained by connecting the secondary windings of the voltage transformers in a broken delta configuration. If the magnitude of V0 or 3V0 is not sufficient to determine direction, then the directional ground elements will not initiate a trip signal. If the current I0 cannot be determined because only two current transformers are utilized or the current transformers are connected in an open delta configuration, then the directional ground elements will not be able to function. Phase-to-ground faults are detected by the directional ground element, and may be detected by the directional phase element associated with the faulted phase if the magnitude of the fault current is sufficient. Phase-to-phase faults are detected by the two directional phase elements associated with the faulted phases. Double phase-toground faults are detected by the directional ground element, and may be detected by the directional phase elements associated with the faulted phases if the magnitude of the fault current flowing in the phase conductors is sufficient. Three-phase faults, of course, are detected by all directional phase elements, but not by the directional ground elements. As was stated earlier, in order for any ground fault to be detected by a directional ground element, current transformers and voltage transformers must be connected so as to supply sufficient magnitudes of zero sequence currents and voltage. For a phase-to-ground fault, the voltage supplied to the directional phase element protecting the faulted phase is 90 out of phase with the phase-to-ground voltage existing on the faulted phase at the relay location (see Figure 2-22). The device compensates for this phase difference by adding 90 when the phase sequence is abc and subtracting 90 when the phase sequence is acb. The resulting voltage is called the polarizing voltage. For phase-to-phase faults, the angles of the polarizing voltages associated with the directional phase elements which protect the faulted phases can vary based upon the location of the fault with respect to the device. The relationship between the polarizing voltage angle and the phase current angle for a phase-to-phase fault is identical to the relationship between the polarizing voltage angle and the phase current angle for a phase-to-ground fault only when the fault location and relay location are identical.

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

71

Functions

VA

VA VCA VAB

VC

UL2L3 a) Phase to Ground Fault (a-g)

VB

VC

VBC

VB

b) Phase to Phase Fault (a-c)

Figure 2-22

Voltages Used for Direction Determination

Table 2-7 shows the assignment of voltage and current values for the determination of fault direction for various types of short-circuit faults.

Table 2-7

Voltage and Current Values for the Determination of Fault Direction

A B Voltage Current Voltage Current C Voltage GROUND Current Voltage

Pick up

Current

A B C G A, G B, G C, G A, B B, C C, A A, B, G B, C, G C, A, G A, B, C A, B, C, G

Ia

Vbc Ib Vca Ic Vab I0 V01) V01) V01) V01)

Ia

Vbc Ib Vca Ic Vab

I0 I0 I0

Ia

Vbc

Ib Ib

Vca Vca Ic Ic Vab Vab I0 Ic Ic Vab Vab Vab Vab I0 V01) I0 I0 V01) V01) V01)

Ia Ia

Vbc Vbc Ib Ib Vca Vca

Ia Ia Ia
1)

Vbc Vbc Vbc Ib Ib Vca Vca

Ic Ic

or 3 * V0= |Vag + Vbg + Vcg|, depending on type of connection for the voltages

The direction curve for the directional phase relay element is shown in Figure 2-23 in a complex R-X diagram. The curve illustrates the operating direction of the relay in terms of the impedance viewed by the directional phase relay element, that is, the ratio

72

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Directional Overcurrent Protection (67, 67N)

of the directional phase element polarizing voltage to the directional phase element current. Line a represents the directional limit line, and when the protective relay views an impedance which lies on the same of the directional limit line as the shaded area, the fault is assumed to be in the forward direction. For a phase-to-phase fault, the actual directional limit line will deviate from the theoretical when the fault location is different than the relay location because the polarizing voltage angle varies with fault location (see Figure 2-22b). For a b-to-c fault, the directional limit for the b-phase directional element rotates clockwise as the location between the relay and fault increases (dotted line b in Figure 2-23). Likewise, the directional limit for the c-phase directional element rotates counterclockwise as the location between the relay and fault increases (dotted line c in Figure 2-23). Rotation of the directional limit in this manner is irrelevant in practice, since the impedance viewed by the relay either lies in the first or third quadrant of the R-X diagram.

jX

a Torque angle

Line Impedance Z

Forwards

Reserve Torque angle limits

Figure 2-23

Torque angle limits

2.3.1.4

Reverse Interlocking for Looped Lines The reverse interlocking principle may be applied to a group of transmission lines and distribution feeders which operate in a looped configuration or which are supplied from two directions. High speed protection is possible using reverse interlocking by having the directional overcurrent elements block high speed non-directional overcurrent elements as shown in Figure 2-24. This scheme is feasible when the lengths of the lines are not too great and when pilot wires are available for signal transfer. For each line, a separate data transfer path is required to facilitate signal transmission in each direction. These transfer paths carry the blocking signals to the opposite end of the lines. In addition, at each line terminal, two directional overcurrent elements must be employed, one polarized to operate for faults in the forward direction (toward the line) and one polarized to operate for faults in the reverse direction. If a line is energized, but open at one end, an interruption of the transfer path is noted and reported with a delay.

Application Example

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

73

Functions

During a line fault, the directional overcurrent element that detects faults in the forward (line) direction will block the high speed operation of the non-directional overcurrent elements in the reverse direction. The non-directional relays that are blocked are generally located at the same substation. In addition, a message is generated regarding the fault direction and transmitted to the relays located in the reverse direction. During a fault in the reverse direction, the directional overcurrent element that detects faults in the reverse direction will block the high-speed operation of the non-directional overcurrent element at the opposite end of the line. The relay at the opposite end of the line is generally located at a different substation, thus blocking is accomplished via the pilot wires. In addition, a message is generated regarding the fault direction and transmitted to the relay located at the opposite end of the line.

52
7SJ6* 50-1

52
7SJ6* 50-1

52
7SJ6* 50-1

52
7SJ6* 50-1

52
7SJ6* 50-1

52
7SJ6* 50-1

52
7SJ6* 50-1 50-1

Blocking Non-directional Element Directional Element

52
7SJ6* 50-1

Figure 2-24

Reverse Interlocking Using Directional Elements

forwards

Pickup of 50-1 A

Phase A forward

Direction determination Phase A

reverse Phase A reverse

forwards

Pickup of 50N-1

Direction determination Ground

Ground forward Ground reverse

reverse

Figure 2-25

Logic Diagram for Generation of Fault Direction Signals

The directional overcurrent elements can be coordinated with each other to provide time delayed backup protection for the reverse interlocking scheme. Figure 2-25 shows the logic diagram for the generation of fault direction signals.

74

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Directional Overcurrent Protection (67, 67N)

2.3.2

Programming Directional Overcurrent Settings

In contrast to the main functions of non-directional phase and ground overcurrent protection, all other protective functions are disabled upon device delivery. The accompanying addresses appear in the overview of setting groups only when the functions are configured as present (Section 2.1.1). The functions may be enabled by selecting a time characteristic(i.e. Definite, ANSI, or User-Defined) during configuration. When selecting the directional time-overcurrent protection in DIGSI 4 a dialog box appears with several tabs for setting individual parameters. Depending on the functional scope specified during configuration of the protective functions in addresses 0115 67/67-TOC and 0116 67N/67N-TOC the number of tabs can vary.

2.3.2.1

General If address 0115 67/67-TOC was set to Definite Time, then only the settings for the definite-time elements are available. Selecting TOC IEC or TOC ANSI the inverse characteristics will be available in addition. The superimposed directional stages 67-2 and 67-1 apply in all these cases. At address 1501 FCT 67/67-TOC, directional phase overcurrent protection may be switched ON or OFF.

Phase Current Stages

Ground Current Stage

At address 1601 FCT 67N/67N-TOC, directional ground time-overcurrent protection may be switched ON or OFF independent of the directional phase time-overcurrent protection. Depending on the parameter 0613A 50N/51N/67N w., the device can either operate using measured values Ignd or the quantities 3I0 calculated from the three phase currents. Devices featuring a sensitive ground current input, however, generally use the calculated value 3I0. Pickup values, time delays, and characteristic curves for ground protection are set separately from the pickup values, time delays and characteristic curves associated with directional phase protection. Because of this, relay coordination for ground faults is independent of relay coordination for phase faults, and more sensitive settings can often be applied to directional ground protection.

Manual Close Mode (Phase, Ground)

When a circuit breaker is closed into a faulted line, a high speed trip by the circuit breaker is often desired. The manual closing feature is designed to remove the delay from one of the directional overcurrent elements when a circuit breaker is manually closed into a fault. The time delay may be bypassed via an impulse from the external control switch, thus resulting in high speed tripping. This impulse is prolonged by a period of 300 ms. Address 1513A MANUALCLOSEMODE can be set such that the delay is defeated for the 67-2 element, the 67-1 element, the 67-TOC element, or none of the elements. Accordingly, address 1613A MANUALCLOSEMODE is considered for the ground path address. Defeating the delay on just one of the three elements (phase and ground) allows control over what level of fault current is required to initiate high speed tripping of a circuit breaker that is closed into a fault. If the manual closing signal is not from a 7SJ62/63/64, that is, neither via the built-in operator interface nor via a series interface, but, rather, directly from a control ac-

External Control Switch

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

75

Functions

knowledgment switch, this signal must be passed to a 7SJ62/63/64 binary input, and configured accordingly so that the element selected for high speed tripping will be effective. Internal control function The manual closing information must be routed via CFC (interlocking task-level) using the CMD_Information block, if the internal control function is used (see Figure 2-26).

IN: Control Device 52 Breaker CF_D12

OUT: P. System Data 2 >Manual Close SP

Figure 2-26

Example for manual close feature using the internal control function

Direction Limit Line and Directional Orientation

At address 1515A Normal Load, the directional limit line may be set as Inductive(135), Resistive (90), or Capacitive(45) (see Figure 2-27). As a rule, the option Inductive(135) is used since power system elements are inductive by nature. The directional orientation may be established at address 1516 67N Direction. Directional overcurrent protection normally operates in the direction of the facility to be protected (line, transformer, etc.). If the device is properly connected in accordance with one of the circuit diagrams in Appendix A3, this is the Forward direction.

jX

jX

jX

INDUCTIVE (135)

RESISTIVE (90)

CAPACITIVE (45)

Figure 2-27

Definition of the Directional Limit Line (addresses 1515A and 1516)

If the voltage used to determine fault direction drops below the minimum value, recorded voltage values are available from a buffer based on the last two cycles of sufficient voltage. If recorded voltage is not available due to closing in on a fault, tripping will take place without directional determination. Direction Line Limit and Direction Orientation (Ground) At address 1615A Normal Load, the directional limit line may be set as Inductive(135), Resistive (90), or Capacitive(45) (see Figure 2-27). As a rule, the option Inductive(135) is used since power system elements are inductive by nature. The directional orientation may be established at address 1616 67N Direction. Directional overcurrent protection normally operates in the direction of the facility to be protected (line, transformer, etc.). If the device is properly connected in accordance with one of the circuit diagrams in Appendix A.3, this is the Forward direction.

76

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Directional Overcurrent Protection (67, 67N)

jX

jX

jX

INDUCTIVE (135)

RESISTIVE (90)

CAPACITIVE (45)

Figure 2-28

Definition of the Directional Limit Line (addresses 1615A and 1616)

If the voltage used to determine fault direction drops below the minimum value, recorded voltage values are available from a buffer based on the last two cycles of sufficient voltage. If recorded voltage is not available due to closing in on a fault, a tripping will not occur. Inrush Restraint When applying the protection device to transformers where high inrush currents are to be expected, 7SJ62/63/64 can make use of an inrush restraint function for the directional overcurrent stages 50-1 PICKUP, 51 PICKUP, 50N-1 PICKUP and 51N PICKUP together with the non-directional overcurrent stages. The inrush restraint option is enabled or disabled at 2201 INRUSH REST. (at the parameters for the nondirectional time overcurrent protection) Subsection 2.2.2.6 shows the characteristic values of the inrush restraint feature.

2.3.2.2

Definite-Time, Directional Overcurrent Protection (67-2, 67-1) The pickup and delay of the 67-2 relay element are set at addresses 1502 67-2 PICKUP and 1503 67-2 DELAY respectively. In setting the pickup and delay of the 67-2 element, the same considerations apply as did for the determining the pickup and delay of the 50-2 element in Subsection 2.2.2.1. The delay set at address 1503 is in addition to the 67-2 pickup time. The delay of the 67-2 element may be set to . The 67-2 element will then pickup and generate a message, but will never trip. If the 67-2 element is not required at all, then the pickup value should be set to thus preventing pickup, trip, and the generation of a message.

67-2 Relay Element

67-1 Relay Element

The pickup value of the 67-1 relay element (set at address 1504 67-1 PICKUP) should be set above the maximum anticipated load current. Pickup due to overload should never occur since the 50-1 relay element is designed only for fault protection. For this reason, a setting equal to 120 % of the expected peak load is recommended for line protection, and a setting equal to 140 % of the expected peak load is recommended for transformers and motors. If the 7SJ62/63/64 relay is used to protect transformers or motors with large inrush currents, the inrush restraint feature may be used to prevent a false trip of the 67-1 relay element. The configuration data for the inrush restraint feature is programmed at address block 22 (see Subsection 2.9.2). The delay of the 67-1 element is set at address 1505 67-1 DELAY and should be based on system coordination requirements. The delay for directional elements is usually set shorter than the delay for non-directional elements since the non-directional elements overlap the directional elements as backup protection.

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

77

Functions

For parallel transformers supplied from a single source (see Figure 2-17), the delay of the directional elements located on the load side of the transformers may be set to zero if desired. The delay set at address 1505 is in addition to the 67-1 pickup time. The delay of the 67-1 element may be set to . The 67-1 element will then pickup and generate a message, but will never trip. If the 67-1 element is not required at all, then the pickup value should be set to thus preventing pickup, trip, and the generation of a message. Interaction with Automatic Reclosing Equipment When reclosing occurs, it is desirable to have high speed protection against temporary faults. If the fault still exists after the first reclose, the 67-2 elements can be blocked and the 67-1 elements will provide time delay tripping. At address 1514A 67 active, it can be specified whether or not the 67-2 elements should be supervised by the status of an internal or external automatic reclosing device. If address 1514A is set to With 79 Active, the 67-2 elements will not operate unless automatic reclosing is not blocked. If address 1514A is set to Always, the 67-2 elements will always operate. Die integrierte Wiedereinschaltautomatik im 7SJ62/63/64 bietet auerdem die Mglichkeit, fr jede der gerichteten berstromzeitschutzstufen getrennt festzulegen, ob unverzgert, unbeeinflusst von der AWE mit der eingestellten Zeit ausgelst oder blockiert werden soll (siehe Abschnitt 2.13.1.3).

2.3.2.3

Inverse-Time Directional Overcurrent Protection (67-TOC) Having set TOC IEC or TOC ANSI in address 0115 67/67-TOC when configuring the protective functions (Subsection 2.1.1), the parameters for the inverse characteristics will also be available. Pickup of the 67-TOC relay element will occur for currents greater than or equal to 110% of the 67-TOC elements pickup value, and may or may not occur for currents between 100% and 110% of the 67-TOC elements pickup value. Dropout of the 67TOC relay element occurs when the current decreases to 95 % of the 67-TOC elements pickup value. The pickup of the 67-TOC element is set at address 1507 67/67-TOC. As is the case for the 67-1 relay element, the pickup value of the 67-TOC relay element should be set above the maximum anticipated load current. Pickup due to overload should never occur since the 67-TOC relay element is designed only for fault protection. For this reason, a setting equal to 120 % of the expected peak load is recommended for line protection, and a setting equal to 140 % of the expected peak load is recommended for transformers and motors. The 67-TOC element time multiplication factor for an IEC curve is set at address 1508 67 TIME DIAL and in address 1509 51c TIME DIAL for an ANSI curve and should be based on system coordination requirements. The time multiplication factor may be set to . The 67-TOC element will then pickup and generate a message, but will never trip. If the 67-TOC element is not required at all, address 0115 should be set to Definite Time during protective function configuration (see Section 2.1.1). If Disk Emulation is selected at address 1510 67-TOC Drop-out, then reset occurs according to the reset curve as described in Subsection 2.2.1.2.

67-TOC Relay Element With IEC or ANSI Curves

78

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Directional Overcurrent Protection (67, 67N)

If address 0115 67/67-TOC was set to TOC IEC, you can specify the desired IEC curve (Normal Inverse, Very Inverse, Extremely Inv. or Long Inverse) in address 1511 51N IEC CURVE. Having selected TOC ANSI in address 0115 67/ 67-TOC, you can specify the desired ANSI curve (Very Inverse, Inverse, Short Inverse, Long Inverse, Moderately Inv., Extremely Inv. oder Definite Inv.) in address 1512 51N ANSI CURVE. User Specified Curves If address 0115 67/67-TOC was set to User Defined PU or User def. Reset during configuration of the user-specified curve option, a maximum of 20 value pairs (current and time) may be entered at address 1530 67 to represent the time-current characteristic curve associated with the 67-TOC element. This option allows point-bypoint entry of any desired curve. If address 0115 was set to User def. Reset during configuration of the user-specified curve option, additional value pairs (current and reset time) may be entered at address 1531 MofPU Res T/Tp to represent the reset curve associated with the 67TOC element. Current and time values are entered as multiples of the address 1507 and 1508 settings. Therefore, it is recommended that addresses 1507 and 1508 be initially set to 1.00 to simplify the calculation of these ratios. Once the curve is entered, the settings at addresses 1507 and 1508 may be modified if necessary. Upon delivery of the device, all time values are set at , preventing pickup of the device from initiating a trip signal. When entering a user-specified curve, the following must be observed: The value pairs should be entered in increasing sequence. As few as 10 pairs of numbers may be entered at the users option. Each unused pair must then be marked as unused by entering for the time and current values. It is important to view the curve to ensure that it is clear and constant. The current values entered should be those from Table 2-8, along with the matching times. Other values for MofPU are changed to the nearest adjacent value although this is not indicated.

Table 2-8

Preferential Values of Standardized Currents for User Specific Tripping Characteristics MofPU = 1 to 1.94 1.00 1.06 1.13 1.19 1.25 1.31 1.38 1.44 1.50 1.56 1.63 1.69 1.75 1.81 1.88 1.94 MofPU = 2 to 4.75 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 MofPU = 5 to 7.75 5.00 5.25 5.50 5.75 6.00 6.25 6.50 6.75 7.00 7.25 7.50 7.75 MofPU = 8 to 20 8.00 9.00 10.00 11.00 12.00 13.00 14.00 15.00 16.00 17.00 18.00 19.00 20.00

Current flows which are less than the smallest current value entered will not lead to a reduction of the reset time below the time associated with the smallest current val-

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

79

Functions

ue entered. The reset curve (see Figure 2-29 right) represents constant reset time for currents smaller than the smallest current value entered. Current flows which are greater than the largest current value entered will not lead to an extension of the reset time beyond the time associated with the largest current value entered. The reset curve (see Figure 2-29 right) represents constant reset time for currents larger than the largest current value entered. The time and current value pairs are entered at address 1531 to recreate the dropdown curve. The following must be observed:

Reset Curve
Largest Current Point

Characteristic Curve
Smallest Current Point

Smallest Current Point

Largest Current Point

0.05

0.9 1 1.1

20

Figure 2-29

Use of a User-Specified Curve

The current values entered should be those from Table 2-9, along with the matching times. Other values for MofPU are changed to the nearest adjacent value although this is not indicated.
Table 2-9 Preferential Values of Standardized Currents for User Specific Tripping Characteristics MofPU = 0.84 to 0.67 MofPU = 0.66 to 0.38 0.84 0.83 0.81 0.80 0.78 0.77 0.75 0.73 0.72 0.70 0.69 0.67 0.66 0.64 0.63 0.61 0.59 0.56 0.53 0.50 0.47 0.44 0.41 0.38 MofPU = 0.34 to 0.00 0.34 0.31 0.28 0.25 0.22 0.19 0.16 0.13 0.09 0.06 0.03 0.00

MofPU = 1 to 0.86 1.00 0.99 0.98 0.97 0.96 0.95 0.94 0.93 0.92 0.91 0.90 0.89 0.88 0.86

Current flows which are greater than the largest current value entered will not lead to an extension of the reset time beyond the time associated with the largest current value entered. The reset curve (see Figure 2-29) represents constant reset time for currents larger than the largest current value entered.

80

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Directional Overcurrent Protection (67, 67N)

Current flows which are less than the smallest current value entered will not lead to a reduction of the reset time below the time associated with the smallest current value entered. The reset curve (see Figure 2-29) represents constant reset time for currents smaller than the smallest current value entered.

2.3.2.4 General

Programming Settings for Directional Overcurrent Ground Protection The functions associated with time-overcurrent protection were established during configuration of protective functions (Section 2.1.1) at address 0116 67N/67N-TOC. If address 0116 was set to Definite Time, then only the settings for the definitetime elements are available. Select 67N/67N-TOC = TOC IEC or = TOC ANSI to have available inverse characteristics in addition. The superimposed directional high-set stage 67N-2 is available in all these cases. At address 1601 FCT 67N/67N-TOC, directional ground time-overcurrent protection may be switched ON or OFF independent of the directional phase time-overcurrent protection. Pickup values, time delays, and characteristic curves for ground protection are set separately from the pickup values, time delays and characteristic curves associated with directional phase protection. Because of this, relay coordination for ground faults is independent of relay coordination for phase faults, and more sensitive settings can often be applied to directional ground protection.

67N-2 Relay Element

The pickup and delay of the 67N-2 relay element are set at addresses 1602 67N-2 PICKUP and 1603 67N-2 DELAY respectively. The same considerations apply for these settings as did for 67-2 settings discussed earlier. The delay set at address 1603 is in addition to the 67N-2 pickup time. The delay of the 67N-2 element may be set to . The 67N-2 element will then pickup and generate a message, but will never trip. If the 67N-2 element is not required at all, then the pickup value should be set to , thus preventing pickup, trip, and the generation of a message.

67N-1 Relay Element

The pickup value of the 67N-1 relay element (set at address 1604 67N-1 PICKUP) should be set below the minimum anticipated ground fault current in the relay zone of protection. If the 7SJ62/63/64 relay is used to protect transformers or motors with large inrush currents, the inrush restraint feature may be used to prevent a false trip of the 67N-1 relay element. The configuration data for the inrush restraint feature is programmed at address block 22 (at the parameters for the non-directional time overcurrent protection, see Subsection 2.2.2.6). The delay of the 67N-1 element is set at address 1605 67N-1 DELAY and should be based on system coordination requirements. The delay set at address 1605 is in addition to the 67N-1 pickup time. The delay of the 67N-1 element may be set to . The 67N-1 element will then pickup and generate a message, but will never trip. If the 67N-1 element is not required at all, then the pickup value 67N-1 PICKUP should be set to thus preventing pickup, trip, and the generation of a message.

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

81

Functions

2.3.2.5

Inverse-Time Directional Overcurrent Protection (67N-TOC) Having set TOC IEC in address 0116 67N/67N-TOC when configuring the protective functions (Section 2.1.1), the parameters for the inverse characteristics will also be available. Specify in address 1611 67N-TOC IEC the desired IEC curve (Normal Inverse, Very Inverse, Extremely Inv. or Long Inverse). If you have set TOC ANSI at address 0116 67N/67N-TOC, you can specify the desired ANSI curve (Very Inverse, Inverse, Short Inverse, Long Inverse, Moderately Inv., Extremely Inv. or Definite Inv.) in address 1612 67N-TOC ANSI. Pickup of the 67N-TOC relay element will occur for currents greater than or equal to 110% of the 67N-TOC elements pickup value, and may or may not occur for currents between 100% and 110% of the 67N-TOC elements pickup value. Dropout of the 51N relay element occurs when the current decreases to 95% of the 67N-TOC elements pickup value. If Disk Emulation is selected at address 1610 67N-TOC RESET, then reset occurs according to the reset curve as described in Subsection 2.3.1.2. The pickup value of the 67N-TOC element is set at address 1607 67N-TOC PICKUP. The corresponding time dial for an IEC curve is set at address 1608 67N-TOC TDIAL and for an ANSI curve at address 1609 67 TIME DIAL and should be based on system coordination requirements. As is the case for the 67N-1 relay element, the pickup value of the 67N-TOC relay element should be set below the minimum anticipated ground fault current in the relay zone of protection. The time multiplication factor may also be set to . The 67N-TOC element will then pickup and generate a message, but will never trip. If the 67N-TOC element is not required at all, address 0116 should be set to Definite Time during protective function configuration (see Section 2.1.1).

67N-TOC with IEC or ANSI Curves

User Specified Curves

If address 0116 67N/67N-TOC was set to User Defined PU or User def. Reset during configuration of the user-specified curve option, a maximum of 20 value pairs (current and time) may be entered at address 1630 M.of PU TD to represent the time-current characteristic curve associated with the 67N-TOC element. This option allows point-by-point entry of any desired curve. If address 0116 was set to User def. Reset during configuration of the user-specified curve option, additional value pairs (current and reset time) may be entered at address 1631 I/IEp Rf T/TEp to represent the reset curve associated with the 67NTOC element. Current and time values are entered as multiples of the address 1607 and 1608 settings. Therefore, it is recommended that addresses 1607 67N-TOC PICKUP and 1608 67N-TOC T-DIAL be initially set to 1.00 to simplify the calculation of these ratios. Once the curve is entered, the settings at addresses 1607 and 1608 may be modified if necessary. Upon delivery of the device, all time values are set at , preventing pickup of the device from initiating a trip signal. When entering user specified curve data, the same instructions apply as in Subsection 2.3.2.3 for the phase elements.

82

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Directional Overcurrent Protection (67, 67N)

2.3.3

Settings
In the list below, the setting ranges and default setting values for the pickup currents are for a device with a nominal current rating IN = 1 A. For a nominal current rating IN = 5 A, multiply the Setting Options values and Default Setting values by 5. Consider the current transformer ratios when setting the device with primary values. Note: Addresses to which the letter A is attached can only be modified via the DIGSI 4 software at Additional Settings.

Addr. 1501 1513A

Setting Title FCT 67/67-TOC MANUALCLOSEMODE OFF ON

Setting Options

Default Setting OFF 67-2 instantaneously

Comments 67, 67-TOC Phase Time Overcurrent Manual Close Mode

67-2 instantaneously 67-1 instantaneously 67-TOC instantaneously Inactive Inductive (135) Resistive (90) Capacitive(45) Forward Reverse OFF ON 67N-2 instantaneously 67N-1 instantaneously 67N-TOC instantaneously Inactive Inductive (135) Resistive (90) Capacitive(45) Forward Reverse 0.10..35.00 A; 0.00..60.00 sec; 0.10..35.00 A; 0.00..60.00 sec; with 79 active always 0.10..4.00 A 0.05..3.20 sec; 0.50..15.00; Instantaneous Disk Emulation

1515A

Normal Load

Inductive (135)

Normal Load (Torque angle of dir. fct) Phase Direction 67N, 67N-TOC Ground Time Overcurrent Manual Close Mode

1516 1601 1613A

67 Direction FCT 67N/67N-TOC MANUALCLOSEMODE

Forward OFF 67N-2 instantaneously

1615A

Normal Load

Inductive (135)

Normal Load (Torque angle of dir. fct) Ground Direction 67-2 Pickup 67-2 Time Delay 67-1 Pickup 67-1Time Delay 67 active 67-TOC Pickup 67-TOC Time Dial 67-TOC Time Dial Drop-Out Characteristic

1616 1502 1503 1504 1505 1514A 1507 1508 1509 1510

67N Direction 67-2 PICKUP 67-2 DELAY 67-1 PICKUP 67-1 DELAY 67 active 67-TOC PICKUP 67 TIME DIAL 67 TIME DIAL 67-TOC Drop-out

Forward 2.00 A 0.10 sec 1.00 A 0.50 sec always 1.00 A 0.50 sec 5.00 Disk Emulation

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

83

Functions

Addr. 1511

Setting Title 67- IEC CURVE

Setting Options Normal Inverse Very Inverse Extremely Inverse Long Inverse Very Inverse Inverse Short Inverse Long Inverse Moderately Inverse Extremely Inverse Definite Inverse 1.00..20.00 I / Ip; 0.01..999.00 Time Dial 0.05..0.95 I / Ip; 0.01..999.00 Time Dial 0.05..35.00 A; 0.00..60.00 sec; 0.05..35.00 A; 0.00..60.00 sec; always with 79 active 0.05..4.00 A 0.05..3.20 sec; 0.50..15.00; Instantaneous Disk Emulation Normal Inverse Very Inverse Extremely Inverse Long Inverse Very Inverse Inverse Short Inverse Long Inverse Moderately Inverse Extremely Inverse Definite Inverse 1.00..20.00 I / Ip; 0.01..999.00 Time Dial 0.05..0.95 I / Ip; 0.01..999.00 Time Dial

Default Setting Normal Inverse IEC Curve

Comments

1512

67- ANSI CURVE

Very Inverse

ANSI Curve

1530 1531 1602 1603 1604 1605 1614A 1607 1608 1609 1610 1611

67 MofPU Res T/Tp 67N-2 PICKUP 67N-2 DELAY 67N-1 PICKUP 67N-1 DELAY 67N active 67N-TOC PICKUP 67N-TOC T-DIAL 67N-TOC T-DIAL 67N-TOC RESET 67N-TOC IEC

67 Multiple of Pickup <-> T/Tp 0.50 A 0.10 sec 0.20 A 0.50 sec always 0.20 A 0.20 sec 5.00 Disk Emulation Normal Inverse 67N-2 Pickup 67N-2 Time Delay 67N-1 Pickup 67N-1 Time Delay 67N active 67N-TOC Pickup 67N-TOC Time Dial 67N-TOC Time Dial Drop-Out Characteristic IEC Curve

1612

67N-TOC ANSI

Very Inverse

ANSI Curve

1630 1631

M.of PU TD I/IEp Rf T/TEp

Multiples of PU Time-Dial 67N TOC

2.3.3.1

Information List for Directional Ground Overcurrent Protection

84

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Directional Overcurrent Protection (67, 67N)

F.No.

Alarm 67/67N picked up 67/67N TRIP >BLOCK 67/67-TOC >BLOCK 67-2 >BLOCK 67-1 >BLOCK 67-TOC 67/67-TOC switched OFF 67/67-TOC is BLOCKED 67/67-TOC is ACTIVE 67-2 picked up 67-2 TRIP 67-1 picked up 67-1 TRIP 67-TOC picked up 67-TOC TRIP

Comments

02691 67/67N pickedup 02696 67/67N TRIP 02604 >BLK 67/67-TOC 02615 >BLOCK 67-2 02621 >BLOCK 67-1 02622 >BLOCK 67-TOC 02651 67/67-TOC OFF 02652 67 BLOCKED 02653 67 ACTIVE 02642 67-2 picked up 02649 67-2 TRIP 02660 67-1 picked up 02665 67-1 TRIP 02670 67-TOC pickedup 02675 67-TOC TRIP 02692 67 A picked up 02693 67 B picked up 02694 67 C picked up 02647 67-2 Time Out 02664 67-1 Time Out 02674 67-TOC Time Out 02628 Phase A forward 02629 Phase B forward 02630 Phase C forward 02632 Phase A reverse 02633 Phase B reverse 02634 Phase C reverse 02637 67-1 BLOCKED 02655 67-2 BLOCKED 02669 67-TOC BLOCKED 14501 >INSTANT. 67-2 14503 >INSTANT. 67-1 14505 >INSTANT 67-TOC 14502 67-2 INSTANT.

67/67-TOC Phase A picked up 67/67-TOC Phase B picked up 67/67-TOC Phase C picked up 67-2 Time Out 67-1 Time Out 67-TOC Time Out Phase A forward Phase B forward Phase C forward Phase A reverse Phase B reverse Phase C reverse 67-1 is BLOCKED 67-2 is BLOCKED 67-TOC is BLOCKED >67-2 instantaneously >67-1 instantaneously >67-TOC instantaneously 67-2 instantaneously

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

85

Functions

F.No. 14504 67-1 INSTANT.

Alarm 67-1 instantaneously 67-TOC instantaneously >BLOCK 67N/67N-TOC >BLOCK 67N-2 >BLOCK 67N-1 >BLOCK 67N-TOC

Comments

14506 67-TOC INSTANT. 02614 >BLK 67N/67NTOC 02616 >BLOCK 67N-2 02623 >BLOCK 67N-1 02624 >BLOCK 67N-TOC 02656 67N OFF 02657 67N BLOCKED 02658 67N ACTIVE 02646 67N-2 picked up 02679 67N-2 TRIP 02681 67N-1 picked up 02683 67N-1 TRIP 02684 67N-TOCPickedup 02686 67N-TOC TRIP 02695 67N picked up 02648 67N-2 Time Out 02682 67N-1 Time Out 02685 67N-TOC TimeOut 02636 Ground reverse 02635 Ground forward 02668 67N-2 BLOCKED 02659 67N-1 BLOCKED 02677 67N-TOC BLOCKED 14507 >INSTANT. 67N-2 14509 >INSTANT. 67N-1 14511 >INST. 67N-TOC 14508 67N-2 INSTANT. 14510 67N-1 INSTANT. 14512 67N-TOC INSTANT

67N/67N-TOC switched OFF 67N/67N-TOC is BLOCKED 67N/67N-TOC is ACTIVE 67N-2 picked up 67-2 TRIP 67N-1 picked up 67N-1 TRIP 67N-TOC picked up 67N-TOC TRIP 67N/67N-TOC picked up 67N-2 Time Out 67N-1 Time Out 67N-TOC Time Out Ground reverse Ground forward 67N-2 is BLOCKED 67N-1 is BLOCKED 67N-TOC is BLOCKED >67N-2 instantaneously >67N-1 instantaneously >67N-TOC instantaneously 67N-2 instantaneously 67N-1 instantaneously 67N-TOC instantaneously

86

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Dynamic Cold Load Pick-Up Function (50c, 50Nc, 51Nc, 67c, 67Nc)

2.4
General

Dynamic Cold Load Pick-Up Function (50c, 50Nc, 51Nc, 67c, 67Nc)
With the dynamic cold load pickup feature, it is possible to dynamically increase the pickup values of the directional and non-directional overcurrent relay elements when dynamic cold load pickup conditions are anticipated (i.e. after a long period of zero voltage). By allowing pickup settings to increase dynamically, it is not necessary to incorporate dynamic cold load capability in the normal pickup settings, and directional and non-directional overcurrent protection may be set more sensitive. As a further option the pickup thresholds can be modified in dependence of an automatic reclosure function that is ready or not ready. Note: Dynamic Cold Load Pickup is in addition to the 4 setting groups (A to D), which are configured separately. It is possible to change pickup thresholds and delay times.

2.4.1
Effect

Description of Dynamic Cold Load Pick-Up Function

When using the dynamic cold load pick-up function, there are two primary methods used by the device to determine if the protected equipment is de-energized: Via a binary input, an auxiliary contact in the circuit breaker can be used to determine if the circuit breaker is open or closed. If the circuit breaker is open, the equipment will be considered de-energized. If this method is chosen, address 1702 Start Condition should be set to Breaker Contact. The current flow monitoring threshold (Subsection ) may be used to determine if the equipment is de-energized. If this method is chosen, address 1702 should be set to No Current. If the device determines the protected equipment is de-energized via one of the methods above, a time CB Open Time is started and after its expiration the increased thresholds take effect. In addition, switching between parameters can be tripped by two further signals: By signal 79M Auto Reclosing ready of the internal automatic reclosure function (address 1702 Start Condition = 79 ready). Thus the protection thresholds and the tripping times can be changed if automatic reclosure is ready for tripping (see also Section 2.13). Irrespective of the setting of parameter 1702 Start Condition the release for the cold load pickup can always be granted via the binary input >ACTIVATE CLP. Figure 2-31 shows the logic diagram for dynamic cold load pick-up function. When the auxiliary contact or current criterion detects that the system is de-energized, i.e. the circuit breaker is open, the CB open time (CB Open Time) starts. As soon as the time period expired, the greater thresholds become enabled. When the protected equipment is re-energized (i.e. the device receives input via a binary input that the circuit breaker is closed or the current flowing through the circuit

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

87

Functions

breaker increases above the current flow monitoring threshold set at address 0212 BkrClosed I MIN), a second time delay referred to as the Active Time is initiated. Once the Active Time elapses, the pickup values of the relay elements return to their normal settings. The Active Time is set at address 1704 and controls how long dynamic cold load pick-up settings remain in place once the equipment is re-energized. Upon re-energizing of the equipment, if the measured current values are below the normal pickup settings, an alternative time delay referred to as the Stop Time is also initiated. As in the case with the Active Time, once the Stop Time elapses, the pickup values of relay elements change from the dynamic cold load pickup values to their normal settings. The Stop Time is set at address 1705 and controls how long dynamic cold load pick-up settings remain in place given that measured currents are below the normal pickup settings. This Stop Time is typically set very short since the actual measurement of currents indicates dynamic cold load conditions will not inadvertently pickup the relay elements. To defeat the Stop Time from switching the relay element pickup settings back to normal, it may be set to or blocked via a binary input. If a relay element picks up while the dynamic settings are enabled, elapse of the Active Time or Stop Time will not restore the normal pickup settings until drop out of the relay element occurs based on the dynamic settings. When the dynamic setting values have taken effect via the binary input >ACTIVATE CLP or the signal 79M Auto Reclosing ready and this cause drops out, the normal settings are restored immediately, even if a pick up is to follow. If the dynamic cold load pick-up function is blocked via a binary input, all triggered timers will be immediately reset and all normal settings will be restored. If blocking occurs during an on-going fault with dynamic cold load pick-up functions enabled, the timers of all directional and non-directional overcurrent relay elements will be stopped, and then restarted based on their normal duration. During power up of the protective relay with an open circuit breaker, the time delay set at address 1703 CB Open Time is started, and is processed using the normal settings. Therefore, when the circuit breaker is closed, the normal settings are effective. Figure 2-30 shows a timing diagram, Figure 2-31 describes the logic for cold load pickup function.

88

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Dynamic Cold Load Pick-Up Function (50c, 50Nc, 51Nc, 67c, 67Nc)

Breaker
Closed Open

CB Open Time Address 1703

CB open CB open

Active Time Address 1704

Active Time

Operating State
CLP setting active normal setting active

Possible shorter CLP, due to Stop Time

Stop Time Address 1705

Stop Time

Normal PickUp Levels

Pickup Dropout increased power consumption after long outage Trip, if increased power demand is present after Active Time expired

Figure 2-30

Cold Load Pickup Timing Sequence

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

89

Functions

FNo. 01730

>BLOCK CLP
1701 COLDLOAD PICKUP In 1 Aus

FNo. 01995 CLP BLOCKED

or

or

FNo. 01996 CLP running FNo. 01994

CLP OFF

52a Configured 52b Configured

or

&

FNo. 01732

Measurement/Logic

>ACTIVATE CLP 79 ready &

FNo. 04601

or

FNo. 01997

Dyn set. ACTIVE

Processing of the cold load pick-up settings in the overcurrent elements

>52-a
FNo. 04602

or
&

1703 CB Open Time

>52-b
1702 Start Condition

or
79 ready Breaker Contact No Current &

CircuitBreaker open T

S Q
&

0212 BkrClosed I MIN

Max. of Ia, Ib, Ic

Dynamic Pickup

<
1704 Active Time

Exceeding one of the dynamic cold pick-up thresholds of the directional or non-directional overcurrent elements (Address blocks 18 to 21)

Exceeding one of the normal pick-up thresholds of the directional or non-directional overcurrent elements

1705 Stop Time

or

Normal Pickup
FNo. 01731

T
&

>BLK CLP stpTim

Figure 2-31

Logic Diagram for Dynamic Cold Load Pickup Feature

2.4.2
2.4.2.1

Programming Settings
General Dynamic cold load Pickup feature can only be enabled if address 0117 Coldload Pickup was set to Enabled during configuration of protective functions. If the func-

90

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Dynamic Cold Load Pick-Up Function (50c, 50Nc, 51Nc, 67c, 67Nc)

tion is not required, address 0117 should be set to Disabled. In address 1701 Coldload Pickup can be set ON or OFF. Depending on the start conditions for the cold load pickup function address 1702 Start Condition is set to either No Current, Breaker Contact or to 79 ready. Naturally, the option Breaker Contact can only be selected if the device receives an information on the position of the circuit breaker via at least one binary input. The option 79 ready modifies dynamically the pickup thresholds of the directional and non-directional time overcurrent protection when the automatic reclosing feature is ready. For controlling the cold load pickup the automatic reclosing function provides the internal signal 79M Auto Reclosing ready. It is always active when auto reclosure is available, activated, unblocked and ready for a further cycle (see also side title Controlling Directional/Non-Directional Overcurrent Protection Stages via Cold Load Pickup in Subsection 2.13.2). Time Delays There are no specific procedures on how to set the time delays at addresses 1703 CB Open Time, 1704 Active Time and 1705 Stop Time. These time delays must be based on the specific loading characteristics of the equipment being protected, and should be selected to allow the brief overloads associated with dynamic cold load conditions.

2.4.2.2

Non-Directional Phase Elements The dynamic pickup values and time delays associated with non-directional overcurrent phase protection are set at address block 18. The dynamic pickup and delay settings for the 50-2 element are set at addresses 1801 50c-2 PICKUP and 1802 50c-2 DELAY respectively; the dynamic pickup and delay settings for the 50-1 element are set at addresses 1803 50c-1 PICKUP and 1804 50c-1 DELAY respectively; and the pickup, time multiplier (for IEC curves), and time dial (for ANSI curves) settings for the 51 element are set at addresses 1805 51c PICKUP, 1806, and 1807 respectively (51c TIME DIAL).

2.4.2.3

Non-Directional Ground Elements The dynamic pickup values and time delays associated with non-directional overcurrent ground protection are set at address block 19. The dynamic pickup and delay settings for the 50N-2 element are set at addresses 1901 50Nc-2 PICKUP and 1902 50Nc-2 DELAY respectively; the dynamic pickup and delay settings for the 50N-1 element are set at addresses 1903 50Nc-1 PICKUP and 1904 50Nc-1 DELAY respectively; and the pickup, time multiplier (for IEC curves), and time dial (for ANSI curves) settings for the 51N element are set at addresses 1905 51Nc PICKUP, 1906, and 1907 respectively (51c TIME DIAL).

2.4.2.4

Directional Phase Elements The dynamic pickup values and time delays associated with directional overcurrent phase protection are set at address block 20. The dynamic pickup and delay settings for the 67-2 element are set at addresses 2001 67c-2 PICKUP and 2002 67c-2 DELAY respectively; the dynamic pickup and

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

91

Functions

delay settings for the 67-1 element are set at addresses 2003 67c-1 PICKUP and 2004 67c-1 DELAY respectively; and the pickup, time multiplier (for IEC curves), and time dial (for ANSI curves) settings for the 67-TOC element are set at addresses 2005 67c-TOC PICKUP, 2006, and 2006 respectively (67c-TOC T-DIAL).

2.4.2.5

Directional Ground Element The dynamic pickup values and time delays associated with directional overcurrent ground protection are set at address block 21. The dynamic pickup and delay settings for the 67N-2 element are set at addresses 2101 50Nc-2 PICKUP and 2102 67Nc-2 DELAY respectively; the dynamic pickup and delay settings for the 67N-1 element are set at addresses 2103 67Nc-1 PICKUP and 2104 67Nc-1 DELAY respectively; and the pickup, time multiplier (for IEC curves), and time dial (for ANSI curves) settings for the 67N-TOC element are set at addresses 2105 67Nc-TOC PICKUP, 2106, and 2107 respectively (67Nc-TOC TDIAL).

2.4.2.6

Settings for Dynamic Cold Load Adjustments In the list below, the setting ranges and default setting values for the pickup currents are for an equipment with a nominal current rating IN = 1 A. For a nominal current rating IN = 5 A, multiply the Setting Options values and Default Setting values by 5. Consider the current transformer ratios when setting the equipment with primary values.

Addr. 1701 1702

Setting Title COLDLOAD PIKKUP Start Condition OFF ON

Setting Options

Default Setting OFF No Current

Comments Cold-Load-Pickup Function Start Condition

No Current Breaker Contact 79M Auto Reclosing ready 0..21600 sec 1..21600 sec 1..600 sec; 0.10..35.00 A; 0.00..60.00 sec; 0.10..35.00 A; 0.00..60.00 sec; 0.10..4.00 A; 0.05..3.20 sec; 0.50..15.00; 0.05..35.00 A; 0.00..60.00 sec;

1703 1704 1705 1801 1802 1803 1804 1805 1806 1807 1901 1902

CB Open Time Active Time Stop Time 50c-2 PICKUP 50c-2 DELAY 50c-1 PICKUP 50c-1 DELAY 51c PICKUP 51c TIME DIAL 51c TIME DIAL 50Nc-2 PICKUP 50Nc-2 DELAY

3600 sec 3600 sec 600 sec 10.00 A 0.00 sec 2.00 A 0.30 sec 1.50 A 0.50 sec 5.00 7.00 A 0.00 sec

Circuit Breaker OPEN Time Active Time Stop Time 50c-2 Pickup 50c-2 Time Delay 50c-1 Pickup 50c-1 Time Delay 51c Pickup 51c Time dial 51c Time dial 50Nc-2 Pickup 50Nc-2 Time Delay

92

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Dynamic Cold Load Pick-Up Function (50c, 50Nc, 51Nc, 67c, 67Nc)

Addr. 1903 1904 1905 1906 1907 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2101 2102 2103 2104 2105 2106 2107

Setting Title 50Nc-1 PICKUP 50Nc-1 DELAY 51Nc PICKUP 51Nc T-DIAL 51Nc T-DIAL 67c-2 PICKUP 67c-2 DELAY 67c-1 PICKUP 67c-1 DELAY 67c-TOC PICKUP 67c-TOC T-DIAL 67c-TOC T-DIAL 50Nc-2 PICKUP 67Nc-2 DELAY 67Nc-1 PICKUP 67Nc-1 DELAY

Setting Options 0.05..35.00 A; 0.00..60.00 sec; 0.10..4.00 A; 0.05..3.20 sec; 0.50..15.00; 0.10..35.00 A; 0.00..60.00 sec; 0.10..35.00 A; 0.00..60.00 sec; 0.10..4.00 A; 0.05..3.20 sec; 0.50..15.00; 0.05..35.00 A; 0.00..60.00 sec; 0.05..35.00 A; 0.00..60.00 sec;

Default Setting 1.50 A 0.30 sec 1.00 A 0.50 sec 5.00 10.00 A 0.00 sec 2.00 A 0.30 sec 1.50 A 0.50 sec 5.00 7.00 A 0.00 sec 1.50 A 0.30 sec 1.00 A 0.50 sec 5.00

Comments 50Nc-1 Pickup 50Nc-1 Time Delay 51Nc Pickup 51Nc Time Dial 51Nc Time Dial 67c-2 Pickup 67c-2 Time Delay 67c-1 Pickup 67c-1 Time Delay 67c Pickup 67c Time Dial 67c Time Dial 50Nc-2 Pickup 67Nc-2 Time Delay 67Nc-1 Pickup 67Nc-1 Time Delay 67Nc-TOC Pickup 67Nc-TOC Time Dial 67Nc-TOC Time Dial

67Nc-TOC PICKUP 0.05..4.00 A; 67Nc-TOC T-DIAL 67Nc-TOC T-DIAL 0.05..3.20 sec; 0.50..15.00;

2.4.2.7
F.No.

Information List for Dynamic Cold Load Setting Adjustments

Alarm >BLOCK Cold-Load-Pickup >BLOCK Cold-Load-Pickup stop timer >ACTIVATE Cold-Load-Pickup Cold-Load-Pickup switched OFF Cold-Load-Pickup is BLOCKED Cold-Load-Pickup is RUNNING Dynamic settings are ACTIVE Comments

01730 >BLOCK CLP 01731 >BLK CLP stpTim 01732 >ACTIVATE CLP 01994 CLP OFF 01995 CLP BLOCKED 01996 CLP running 01997 Dyn set. ACTIVE

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

93

Functions

2.5
General

Voltage Protection (27, 59)

Voltage protection has the function to protect electrical equipment against undervoltage and overvoltage. Both operational states are unfavorable as undervoltage may cause for example stability problems and overvoltage may lead to insulation problems.

2.5.1
2.5.1.1

Description of Voltage Protection

Measurement Principle The voltages supplied to the device may correspond to the three phasetoground voltages, or two phase-to-phase voltages and the displacement voltage, depending on how the voltage transformers are connected. 7SJ64 provides the option to detect three phase-ground voltages and the ground voltage in addition. The connection mode has been specified during the configuration in address 0213 VT Connection. Overvoltage protection requires the phasephase voltages and if necessary they are calculated from the phase-earth voltages. In case of phase-phase connection two voltages are measured and the third is calculated. Undervoltage protection relies on the positive-sequence component of the phase-tophase voltages. The option between phaseground and phasephase voltage allows voltage asymmetries (e.g. caused by a ground fault) to be taken into account (phaseground) or left unconsidered (phasephase).

VT Connection

Current Supervision

The primary voltage transformers are arranged, depending on the system, either on the supply side or the load side of the associated circuit breaker. These different arrangements lead to different behavior of the voltage protection function when a fault occurs. When a circuit breaker is opened, full voltage remains on the supply side while the load side voltage becomes zero. Opening the circuit breaker when voltage transformers are located on the load side of the circuit breaker causes the undervoltage protection to remain picked up. Therefore, the flow of current through the circuit breaker can be used as an additional criteria for pickup of undervoltage protection. When current supervision is active, for undervoltage pickup to occur, the current through the circuit breaker must exceed a minimum current level which corresponds to the current flow monitoring setting at address 0212 BkrClosed I MIN. The circuit breaker is tripped, when the current decreases below the current flow monitoring setting, and undervoltage protection will drop out. Note: If current supervision is turned off under address 5120A CURRENT SUPERV., the undervoltage function will pick up without 3 phase voltage applied. The device cannot be programmed if in pickup. Apply 3 phase voltage or block the voltage protection to continue with programming! Moreover you have the option of setting a flag via device operation for blocking the voltage protection. This initiates the reset of the pickup and device parameterization can be resumed.

94

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Voltage Protection (27, 59)

Preparation of Measured Data

Using a Fourier Analysis, the fundamental harmonic component of the three phase-tophase voltages are filtered out and passed along for further processing. For undervoltage protection, the positive sequence components of the phase-to-phase voltages are evaluated, while for overvoltage protection, the largest of the three phase-to-phase voltages is evaluated.

2.5.1.2

Overvoltage Protection (59) The overvoltage protection has the task of preventing insulation failure by protecting against abnormally high voltage levels. Abnormally high voltages often occur in low loaded, long distance transmission lines, in islanded systems when generator voltage regulation fails, or after full load shutdown of a generator from the system.

Application

Function

Overvoltage protection consists of two definite time elements designated 59-2 and 591. The pickup and delay settings of each element are individually adjustable. The fundamental harmonic of the largest phasetophase voltages is provided to the overvoltage protection elements. When an adjustable setting is exceeded, the 59 element pickups, and after an adjustable time delay elapses, initiates a trip signal. The 59 element is a definite time element in that the time delay is not a function of the voltage magnitude. Figure 2-32 shows the logic diagram of the overvoltage protection element.

5007 59-2 DELAY 5006 59-2 PICKUP T 0 FNo. 06573

&

59-2 TRIP
FNo. 06571

U>>
59-2 picked up
5004 59-1 DELAY 5002 59-1 PICKUP T 0 FNo. 06570

U>

&

59-1 TRIP
FNo. 06568

59-1 picked up
Measurement/Logic FNo. 234.210

27, 59 blk Tagging BLK. 27, 59

FNo. 06513 FNo. 06566

or or

59 BLOCKED

>BLOCK 59-1
5001 FCT 59

OFF
1

FNo. 06565

59 OFF
FNo. 06567

ON Alarm Only &

59 ACTIVE

Figure 2-32

Logic Diagram of the Overvoltage Protection

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

95

Functions

2.5.1.3

Undervoltage Protection (27) Undervoltage protection detects and reports abnormally low voltage conditions, some of which could be related to system stability problems (voltage collapse, etc.). Undervoltage protection is generally used for load shedding and loss of phase purposes. Undervoltage protection consists of two definite time elements designated 27-2 and 27-1. The pickup and delay settings of each element are individually adjustable. For undervoltage protection, the positive sequence components of the phase-to-phase voltages are evaluated. The 27 element is a definite time element in that the time delay is not a function of the voltage magnitude. With the 27-1 element, the ratio of drop out voltage to pickup voltage (27-1 DOUT RATIO) is settable as well. The undervoltage protection will not be blocked when the permissible frequency range of fN = 10 % (45 Hz to 55 Hz at fN = 50 Hz) is left. This ensures that the protective function is preserved even when it is applied as motor protection in context with decelerating motors. However, the r.m.s. value of the positive-sequence component of the voltages is evaluated too small for strongly deviating frequencies so that the device tends to exhibit unwanted operation. If application cases are anticipated who leave the frequency range of fN 10 %, the current criterion will not return a correct result. The current criterion must be deactivated. Figure 2-33 shows a typical voltage profile during a fault for source side connection of the voltage transformers. Because full voltage is present after the circuit breaker is opened, current supervision is unnecessary. After the voltage has decreased below the pickup setting of the 27-1 element, the 271 time delay is initiated, after which, the 27-1 element is used to block reclosing. As long as the voltage remains below the drop out setting, reclosing is blocked. When the voltage increases above the drop out level, the 27-1 element drops out and allows reclosing of the circuit breaker.

Application

Function

96

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Voltage Protection (27, 59)

27-1 Pickup V(t) Vn 27-1 DO 27-1 PU

27-1 Tripping Drop Out Signal

Reclosing Signal

Drop Out Setting Pickup Setting

Pickup Drop out

27-1 Delay Tmin com

t Reclosing Blocked Tmin com=Minimum Command Line

Figure 2-33

Typical Fault Profile for Source Side Connection of the Voltage Transformer (without current supervision)

Figure 2-34 shows a fault profile for a load side connection of the voltage transformers. When the circuit breaker is open, the voltage disappears and the 27-1 element picks up and times out. When the current drops below the current flow monitoring setting at address 0212 BkrClosed I MIN (i.e. the current criterion is no longer met) the 271 element will drop out even though the voltage remains below the pick-up setting of the 27-1 element.

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

97

Functions

27-1 Pickup V(t) Vn 27-1 DO 27-1 PU

Tripping Signal

Closing 27-1 Signal Drop Out V<

Drop Out Setting Pickup Setting

t I(t) In

Addr. 0212 TMIN COM

Current Flow Monitoring Setting t 27 Delay 40 ms

Pickup Drop Out

t 27-1 Pickup t Current Criterion Met Current Criterion Met t Pickup = 27-1 Pickup and Current Criterion Met

Tmin com = Minimum Command Line Figure 2-34 Typical Fault Profile for Load Side Connection of the Voltage Transformers (with current supervision)

The instant after a circuit breaker is closed, the load side voltage begins to increase and current begins to flow through the circuit breaker. To ensure that the 27-1 element does not pickup, the element remains dropped out for a short period of time (about 40ms) until both the current flowing through the circuit breaker and the load side voltage stabilize. It is important to understand, however, that if a low voltage condition exists on the load after the circuit breaker is closed (i.e. a fault exists on the load side of the circuit breaker), pickup of the 27-1 element will be delayed by 40 ms. Figure 2-35 shows the logic diagram for the undervoltage protection.

98

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Voltage Protection (27, 59)

5120A CURRENT SUPERV.

OFF
1

ON

0212 BkrClosed I MIN

I>

or or
40 ms

FNo. 06505

>27 I SUPRVSN
5102 27-1 PICKUP

5106 27-1 DELAY T 0 FNo. 06539

& & &

27-1 TRIP
FNo. 06534

U>
FNo. 06506

27-1 PU CS
FNo. 06533

>BLOCK 27-1

&

27-1 picked up
5112 27-2 DELAY

5110 27-2 PICKUP

FNo. 06540

& & &

27-2 TRIP
FNo. 06538 27-2 PU CS FNo. 06537

U<<
FNo. 06508

>BLOCK 27-2

&
Measurement/Logic

27-2 picked up

FNo. 06509

>FAIL:FEEDER VT
FNo. 06510

>FAIL: BUS VT
FNo. 06503

or or

FNo. 06531

27 BLOCKED

>BLOCK 27 Tagging BLK. 27, 59

5101 FCT 27

FNo. 234.2100

27, 59 blk

OFF
1

FNo. 06530

27 OFF
FNo. 06532

ON Alarm Only &

27 ACTIVE

Figure 2-35

Logic Diagram for Undervoltage Protection

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

99

Functions

2.5.2

Programming Settings
Voltage protection is only in effect and accessible if address 0150 27/59 is set to Enabled during configuration of protective functions. If the voltage protection function is not needed, address 0150 should be set to Disabled. All setting values are based on phase-to-phase voltages. The setting ranges depend on the type of voltage transformer connection utilized (specified at address 0213 VT Connection). For voltage transformers connected in a grounded-wye configuration, higher setting values may be used because the voltage inputs are subjected only to phase-to-ground voltage levels.

2.5.2.1

Voltage Protection General Undervoltage protection can be turned ON, OFF, or set to Alarm Only at address 5101 FCT 27. When undervoltage protection is turned ON, tripping by the undervoltage elements is allowed. Overvoltage protection can be turned ON, OFF, or set to Alarm Only at address 5001 FCT 59. When address 5001 is set to ON, tripping by the overvoltage element is allowed.

2.5.2.2

Undervoltage Protection There are not clear cut procedures for setting the pickup values of the undervoltage relay elements. However, because the undervoltage protection function is primarily intended to protect induction machines from voltage dips and to prevent stability problems, the pickup values will usually be between 60% and 85% of the nominal voltage. The time delay settings should be selected to prevent voltage dips from causing unstable conditions, however, the time delay should be long enough to avoid tripping due to momentary voltage dips. Undervoltage protection includes two definite time elements. The pickup value of the 27-2 element is set at either address 5110 or 5111 27-2 PICKUP (depending on the voltage transformer connection) while the time delay is set at address 5112 27-2 DELAY. The pickup of the 27-2 element is typically set low while the time delay is set short, thus this element is used for fast protection against severe undervoltage conditions. The pickup value of the 27-1 element is set at either address 5102 or 5103 271 PICKUP (depending on the voltage transformer connection) while the time delay is set at address 5106 27-1 DELAY. The pickup of the 27-1 element is typically set high while the time delay is set long, thus this element is used for slower protection against less severe undervoltage conditions. Setting the 27-2 and 27-1 relay elements in this matter allows the undervoltage protection function to closely follow the stability behavior of the system.

Pickup Values

Dropout Setting

While the drop out setting on the 27-2 element is set permanently to 105% of the pickup setting, the drop out setting on the 27-1 element can be set at address 5105A 271 DOUT RATIO as a multiple of the pickup setting. However, the following limitations are to be observed:

100

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Voltage Protection (27, 59)

(Address 5105A) x (Address 5103) cannot exceed 130 V when address 0213 = Vab, Vbc, VGnd. (Address 5105A) x (Address 5102) cannot exceed 225 V when address 0213 = Van, Vbn, Vcn. Note: If a setting has a value of greater than 130 V or 225 V results for the drop out setting, the drop out setting will be automatically limited. No error message occurs.

Current Supervision

The 27-2 and 27-1 elements can be supervised by the current flow monitoring setting (BkrClosed I MIN) entered at address 0212. If address 5120A CURRENT SUPERV. is switched on, then the 27-2 and 27-1 elements will not pickup until the current flowing through the circuit breaker exceeds the setting entered at address 0212 (typically set very sensitive). In other words the sustained pickup of the 27-2 and 27-1 elements is dependent on the circuit breaker being closed, as determined by BkrClosed I MIN. A benefit of current supervision is that the feature prevents an immediate general-pickup of the device that would otherwise be caused by the 27 elements when the device is powered-up without voltage being present. Note: When switching off the CURRENT SUPERV. setting under Address 5120A, the device immediately picks up if voltage is not present and the undervoltage protection is switched on. The device cannot be programmed if in pickup. Apply 3 phase voltage to continue with programming or block voltage protection! The blocking can be initiated via device operation in DIGSI 4 and via communication from the control center by means of a tagging command. This causes the reset of the pickup and parameterization can be resumed. The 50 element BkrClosed I MIN is used in other protective functions as well, including breaker failure protection, overload protection, and start inhibit for motors.

2.5.2.3

Overvoltage Protection The overvoltage protection relies on phase-phase voltages. Accordingly, the pickup values, too, must always be considered phasetophase voltages. The overvoltage protection is designed in two stages. Thus, the lower threshold (address 5002 or 5003, 59-1 PICKUP can be assigned a long delay time (depending on whether phase-ground or phase-phase voltages are connected) (address 5004, 59-1 DELAY) and the upper threshold (address 5005 or 5006, 59-2 PICKUP) can be assigned a short delay time (address 5007, 59-2 DELAY). There are not clear cut procedures on how to set the pickup value of the overvoltage element. However, because the overvoltage function is primarily intended to prevent insulation damage, the pickup of the overvoltage element 59-1 PICKUP should be set between 110 % and 115 % of nominal voltage, and the pickup of the overvoltage element 59-2 PICKUP should be set about 130 % of nominal voltage. Depending on the type of voltage transformer connection utilized, the pickup value may be entered at address 5002 and 5005 (used when voltage transformers are connected in a grounded-wye configuration) or 5003 and 5006 (used when voltage transformers are not connected in a grounded-wye configuration). The time delays of the overvoltage elements are entered at addresses

Pickup Values

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

101

Functions

5004 59-1 DELAY and 5007 59-2 DELAY and should be selected to allow the brief voltage spikes that are generated during switching operations.

2.5.2.4

Settings for Voltage Protection

Addr. 5101

Setting Title FCT 27

Setting Options OFF ON Alarm Only OFF ON Alarm Only 10..210 V 10..120 V 1.05..3.00 0.00..100.00 sec; 10..210 V 10..120 V 0.00..100.00 sec; OFF ON 40..260 V 40..130 V 0.00..100.00 sec; 40..130 V 40..260 V 0.00..100.00 sec;

Default Setting OFF

Comments 27 Undervoltage Protection

5001

FCT 59

OFF

59 Overvoltage Protection

5102 5103 5105A 5106 5110 5111 5112 5120A 5002 5003 5004 5006 5005 5007

27-1 PICKUP 27-1 PICKUP 27-1 DOUT RATIO 27-1 DELAY 27-2 PICKUP 27-2 PICKUP 27-2 DELAY CURRENT SUPERV. 59-1 PICKUP 59-1 PICKUP 59-1 DELAY 59-2 PICKUP 59-2 PICKUP 59-2 DELAY

75 V 75 V 1.20 1.50 sec 70 V 70 V 0.50 sec ON 110 V 110 V 0.50 sec 120 V 120 V 0.50 sec

27-1 Pickup 27-1 Pickup 27-1 Drop out Ratio 27-1 Time Delay 27-2 Pickup 27-2 Pickup 27-2 Time Delay Current Supervision 59-1 Pickup 59-1 Pickup 59-1 Time Delay 59-2 Pickup 59-2 Pickup 59-2 Time Delay

2.5.2.5
F.No.

Information List for Voltage Protection

Alarm Comments >BLOCK 27 undervoltage protection >27-Switch current supervision ON >BLOCK 27-1 Undervoltage protection >BLOCK 27-2 Undervoltage protection 27 Undervoltage protection switched OFF

06503 >BLOCK 27 06505 >27 I SUPRVSN 06506 >BLOCK 27-1 06508 >BLOCK 27-2 06530 27 OFF

102

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Voltage Protection (27, 59)

F.No. 06531 27 BLOCKED 06532 27 ACTIVE 06533 27-1 picked up 06534 27-1 PU CS 06537 27-2 picked up 06538 27-2 PU CS 06539 27-1 TRIP 06540 27-2 TRIP 06513 >BLOCK 59-1 06565 59 OFF 06566 59 BLOCKED 06567 59 ACTIVE 06568 59-1 picked up 06570 59-1 TRIP 06571 59-2 picked up 06573 59-2 TRIP 234.2 27, 59 blk 100

Alarm

Comments 27 Undervoltage protection is BLOCKED 27 Undervoltage protection is ACTIVE 27-1 Undervoltage picked up 27-1 Undervoltage PICKUP w/curr. superv 27-2 Undervoltage picked up 27-2 Undervoltage PICKUP w/curr. superv 27-1 Undervoltage TRIP 27-2 Undervoltage TRIP >BLOCK 59-1 overvoltage protection 59-Overvoltage protection switched OFF 59-Overvoltage protection is BLOCKED 59-Overvoltage protection is ACTIVE 59 picked up 59 TRIP 59-2 Overvoltage V>> picked up 59-2 Overvoltage V>> TRIP 27, 59 blocked via operation

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

103

Functions

2.6
General

Negative Sequence Protection (46)

Negative sequence protection detects unbalanced loads on the system. In addition, it may be used to detect interruptions, faults, and polarity problems with current transformers. It is particularly useful in detecting phase-to-ground, phase-to-phase, and double phase-to-ground faults with magnitudes lower than the maximum load current. The application of negative sequence protection to motors has a special significance. The negative sequence currents associated with unbalanced loads create counter-rotating fields in three-phase induction motors, which act on the rotor at double frequency. Eddy currents are induced at the rotor surface, and local overheating of the rotor begins to take place. In addition, the threat of thermal overload exists when the motor is supplied by unbalanced system voltages. Because the motor represents a small impedance to negative sequence voltages, small voltage imbalances can lead to large negative sequence currents.

Use with Motors

2.6.1
2.6.1.1

Description of Negative Sequence Protection

Determination of Unbalanced Load The negative sequence protection feature of the 7SJ62/63/64 relay uses filtering to dissect the phase currents into their symmetrical components. The negative-phase sequence system is evaluated by these components, i.e. the inverse current I2. If the largest of the three phase currents is at least 10% of the nominal device current, and all phase currents are less than four (4) times the nominal device current, then the negative sequence current is fed into three time-overcurrent relay elements, two of which are definite time (see Figure 2-36) and one of which contains an inverse time characteristic (see Figure 2-37). Refer to phase rotation via binary input section 2.1.3 and 2.18.

2.6.1.2

Definite Time Elements (46-1, 46-2) The two definite time elements are designated 46-2 and 46-1. Each of the two definite time elements will generate a message and initiate a time delay when picked up. Once either time delay elapses, a trip signal is initiated. Figure 2-36 illustrates the definite time characteristic when the 46-1 element is set with a more sensitive pickup value while the 46-2 element is set with a shorter tripping delay.

104

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Negative Sequence Protection (46)

Tripping Area

46-1

46-2

46-1

46-2

I2

Figure 2-36

Definite Time Characteristic for Negative Sequence Protection

2.6.1.3

Inverse Time Element (46-TOC) The inverse time element is designated 46-TOC and can operate with IEC or ANSI characteristic tripping curves depending on the model ordered. The curves and associated formulas are given in the Technical Specifications (Figures 4-7 to 4-9 in Section 4.8). When programming the inverse time curve, the definite time elements are available (see Subsection 2.6.1.2).

Pickup and Tripping

When the negative sequence current exceeds the pickup setting of the 46-TOC element by 110%, the element picks up, generates a message, and initiates time delayed tripping based on the selected characteristic curve. Once the corresponding time interval on the curve elapses, a tripping signal is initiated. The characteristic curve is illustrated in Figure 2-37. When IEC curves are used, the 46-TOC element drops out when the negative sequence current decreases to 95 % of the pickup setting. The time delay resets immediately in anticipation of another pickup. When ANSI curves are used, the 46-TOC element may drop out immediately when the negative sequence current decreases to 95 % of the pickup setting, or disk emulation may be used to simulate the unwinding of an electromechanical induction disc. If disk emulation is selected, the drop out begins when the current decreases to 90 % of the pickup value, and reset proceeds in accordance with the selected reset curve. When the negative sequence current is between 90 % and 95 % of the pickup setting, neither forward nor reverse movement of the disk is simulated. When the negative sequence current falls below 5 % of the pickup value, disk emulation is terminated and immediate reset takes place. Figure 2-37 illustrates the overall tripping characteristic.

Drop Out for IEC Curves

Drop Out for ANSI Curves

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

105

Functions

Negative Sequence Warning Level

46-1

Tripping area

Thermal Protection

Severe Imbalance Protection

46-2 46-1 1.1 x I2P 46-2 I2

Figure 2-37

Inverse Time Characteristic for Negative Sequence Protection

FNo. 05166

46-TOC pickedup
0140 46 4008 46-TOC PICKUP TOC IEC 4006 46 IEC CURVE 4010 46-TOC TIMEDIAL

I2

Definite Time

I2p
FNo. 05165

46-1 picked up
4002 46-1 PICKUP 4003 46-1 DELAY T 0

I2>
4010 46-2 PICKUP

or

FNo. 05170

46 TRIP

4005 46-2 DELAY T 0 FNo. 05159 46-2 picked up

I2>>

Measurement/Logic
FNo. 05143

>BLOCK 46

FNo. 05152 46 BLOCKED

or
4001 FCT 46

or

FNo. 05153 46 ACTIVE

OFF
1

FNo. 05151

46 OFF

ON

Figure 2-38

Logic Diagram for Negative Sequence Protection

106

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Negative Sequence Protection (46)

Disk emulation offers advantages when the negative sequence protection must be coordinated with conventional source side relays. Logic Figure 2-38 shows the logic diagram for negative sequence protection. The protection may be blocked via a binary input. This resets pick-ups and time steps and clears measured values. When the negative sequence protection criteria are no longer satisfied (i.e. all phase currents drop below 10 % of the nominal relay current or at least one phase current is greater than four (4) times the nominal device current, the tripping time delay is immediately reset.

2.6.2
2.6.2.1

Programming Settings
General Negative sequence protection is configured at address 0140 46. If only the definite time elements are desired, address 0140 should be set to Definite Time. If both definite time and inverse time elements are to be used, address 0140 should be set to TOC IEC or TOC ANSI, and if negative sequence protection is not needed, address 0140 should be set to Disabled. Negative sequence protection is switched ON or OFF at address 4001 FCT 46. The default pickup settings and delay settings of the negative sequence time-overcurrent relay elements are generally sufficient for most applications. If the device is used to protect a motor, and data is available from the manufacturer regarding the allowable long-term load imbalance and the allowable load imbalance per unit of time, this data should be used as the basis for selecting the pickup and delay settings. In this situation, it is important to ensure that the values given by the manufacturer represent the primary values for the motor. For example, if the long-term allowable thermal inverse current (with respect to the nominal motor current) is given, this value is used to calculate the settings for the negative sequence time-overcurrent element. For this situation: I 2perm prim I CT sec I 2 = --------------------------- I NMotor ----------------- I NMotor I CT prim

Pickup Setting
where I2 perm prim

IN Motor
ICT sec ICT prim

Permissible Thermal Inverse Current of the Motor Nominal Motor Current Secondary Nominal Current of the Current Transformer Primary Nominal Current of the Current Transformer

2.6.2.2

Definite Time Elements The pickup and delay settings associated with the 46-1 element are set at addresses 4002 46-1 PICKUP and 4003 46-1 DELAY respectively while the pickup and delay settings for the 46-2 element are set at address 4004 46-2 PICKUP and 4005 462 DELAY respectively. Typically the 46-1 element is set with a lower pickup value and

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

107

Functions

higher time delay than the 46-2 element. This allows the 46-1 element to act as an alarm while the 46-2 element will initiate fast tripping for severe imbalances. If the 46-2 element is used for fast tripping against severe imbalances, the pickup value should be set at 60 % of the nominal phase current. This will ensure pickup for the complete loss of one phase. On the other hand, because the loss of a phase could be interpreted as a phase-to-phase fault, the time delay of this element should be coordinated with fault protection relays. The magnitude of the negative sequence current with respect to the phase current when one phase is out of service is given as follows: 1 I 2 = ------ I = 0.58 I 3 Examples: Motor: IN Motor I2 long-term prim / IN Motor I2 short-term prim /IN Motor Current Transformers Set Value 46-1 Set Value 46-2 This ensures When protecting a feeder, negative sequence protection may serve to identify low magnitude unsymmetrical faults below the pickup values of the directional and nondirectional overcurrent elements. To detect load magnitude faults, the pickup value of the negative sequence time-overcurrent elements must be set below the following: a phase-to-phase fault (I) results in the following negative sequence current: 1 I 2 = ------ I = 0.58 I 3 a phase-to-ground fault (I) corresponds to the following negative sequence current: 1 I 2 = -- I = 0.33 I 3 To prevent false operations for fault in other zones of protection, the time delay should be coordinated with other fault protection relays in the system. For a transformer, negative sequence protection may be used as sensitive protection for low magnitude phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase faults. In particular, this application is well suited for delta-wye transformers where low side phase-to-ground faults do not generate high side zero sequence currents. The relationship between negative sequence currents and total fault current for phaseto-phase faults and phase-to-ground faults are valid for the transformer as long as the turns ratio is taken into consideration. CT = 545A = 0.11 long-term = 0.55 for Tmax = 1s = 600A/1A

Address 4002 Address 4004

= 0.11 545A (1/600A) = 0.10A = 0.55 545A (1/600A) = 0.50A

108

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Negative Sequence Protection (46)

Consider a transformer with the following data: Transformer Base Rating Nominal High Side Voltage Nominal Low Side Voltage Transformer Connection High Side CT Ratio 16 MVA VHS = 110 kV VLS = 20 kV Delta-Grounded Wye CTR = 100 A / 1 A

The following faults may be detected at the lower-voltage side: If the pickup setting (PU) of the device on the high side is set to 0.1 A, then a phaseto-ground fault current of I = (1/0.33) * CTR * PU * VHS / VLS = 3 * 100 * 0.1 A * 110 kV / 20 kV = 165 A and a phase-to-phase fault current of I = (1/0.58) * CTR * PU * VHS / VLS = 1.732 * 100 * 0.1 A * 110 kV / 20 kV = 95 A can be detected at the low side. These faults correspond to 36 % and 20 % of the base transformer rating respectively. It is important to note that load current is not taken into account in this simplified example. As it cannot be recognized reliably on which side the thus detected fault is located, the delay time must be coordinated with other relays in the system to prevent false operation for faults in other zones of protection.

2.6.2.3

Inverse Time Element 46-TOC If the 46-TOC element is employed, a characteristic tripping curve should be selected to coordinate with the thermal overload curve representing the protected equipment (e.g. induction motor, etc.). The curve should be selected at address 4006 46 IEC CURVE. The characteristic tripping curves, and the formulas on which they are based, are given in the Technical Specifications, Section 4.8. The 46-TOC element picks up when the negative sequence input current exceeds 110% of the pickup settings and drops out when he negative sequence current decreases to 95 % of the pickup setting. The pickup settings is entered at address 4008 46-TOC PICKUP. The associated time multiplier is entered at address 4010 46-TOC TIMEDIAL. The time multiplier may also be set to thus allowing the element to pickup and generate a message, but never to trip. If the inverse time element is not required at all, address 0140 should be set to Definite Time during configuration of protective functions (Section Configuration of Functions, 2.1.1).

IEC Curves

ANSI Curves

If the 46-TOC element is employed, a characteristic tripping curve should be selected to coordinate with the thermal overload curve representing the protected equipment (e.g. induction motor, etc.). The curve should be selected at address 4007 46 ANSI CURVE. The characteristic tripping curves, and the formulas on which they are based, are given in the Technical Specifications, Section 4.8.

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

109

Functions

The 46-TOC element picks up when the negative sequence input current exceeds 110 % of the pickup settings and drops out when the negative sequence current decreases to 95 % of the pickup setting. The pickup settings is entered at address 4008 46-TOC PICKUP. If Disk Emulation was selected at address 4011 46-TOC RESET, reset will occur in accordance with the reset curve as described in Subsection 2.6.1.3. The associated time dial is entered at address 4009 46-TOC TIMEDIAL. The time may also be set to thus allowing the element to pickup and generate a message, but never to trip. If the inverse time element is not required at all, address 0140 should be set to Definite Time during configuration of protective functions (Section 2.1.1).

2.6.2.4

Settings for Negative Sequence (Phase Balance) Current Protection In the list below, the setting ranges and default setting values for the pickup currents are for a device with a nominal current rating IN = 1 A. For a nominal current rating IN = 5 A, multiply the Setting Options values and Default Setting values by 5. Consider the current transformer ratios when setting the device with primary values.

Addr. 4001 4002 4003 4004 4005 4006

Setting Title FCT 46 46-1 PICKUP 46-1 DELAY 46-2 PICKUP 46-2 DELAY 46 IEC CURVE OFF ON

Setting Options

Default Setting OFF 0.10 A 1.50 sec 0.50 A 1.50 sec Extremely Inverse

Comments 46 Negative Sequence Protection 46-1 Pickup 46-1 Time Delay 46-2 Pickup 46-2 Time Delay IEC Curve

0.10..3.00 A 0.00..60.00 sec; 0.10..3.00 A 0.00..60.00 sec; Normal Inverse Very Inverse Extremely Inverse Extremely Inverse Inverse Moderately Inverse Very Inverse 0.10..2.00 A 0.50..15.00; Instantaneous Disk Emulation 0.05..3.20 sec;

4007

46 ANSI CURVE

Extremely Inverse

ANSI Curve

4008 4009 4011 4010

46-TOC PICKUP 46-TOC TIMEDIAL 46-TOC RESET 46-TOC TIMEDIAL

0.90 A 5.00 Instantaneous 0.50 sec

46-TOC Pickup 46-TOC Time Dial 46-TOC Drop Out 46-TOC Time Dial

110

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Negative Sequence Protection (46)

2.6.2.5
F.No.

Information List for Negative Sequence Current Protection

Alarm >BLOCK 46 46 switched OFF 46 is BLOCKED 46 is ACTIVE 46-2 picked up 46-1 picked up 46-TOC picked up 46 TRIP 46 Disk emulation picked up Comments

05143 >BLOCK 46 05151 46 OFF 05152 46 BLOCKED 05153 46 ACTIVE 05159 46-2 picked up 05165 46-1 picked up 05166 46-TOC pickedup 05170 46 TRIP 05171 46 Dsk pickedup

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

111

Functions

2.7

Motor Protection (Motor Starting Protection, 48 and Start Inhibit for Motors, 66/68)
Description of Motor Starting Protection
When the 7SJ62/63/64 relay is used to protect a motor, the starting time monitoring feature supplements the overload protection described in Section 2.9 by protecting the motor against the potential damage that might result from frequent starting or extended starting durations. In particular, rotor-critical high-voltage motors can quickly be heated above their thermal limits when multiple starting attempts occur in a short period of time. If the durations of these starting attempts are lengthened by excessive voltage surges during motor starting, by excessive load moments, or by blocked rotor conditions, a tripping signal will be initiated by the device. Motor starting protection consists of two time-overcurrent tripping characteristics initiated by the motor starting recognition setting entered at address 1107 I MOTOR START. One characteristic is definite time while the other one is inverse time. When the motor phase currents exceed the setting entered at address 1107, time delayed tripping will be initiated. To gain a better understanding of how to set the motor starting recognition setting at address 1107, refer to side title Recognition of Running Condition in Subsections 2.1.6 and 2.9.2.2.

2.7.1
General

Inverse Time-Overcurrent Characteristic

The inverse time-overcurrent characteristic is designed to operate only when the rotor is not blocked. When the phase currents exceed the motor starting recognition setting entered at address 1107, time delayed tripping via the inverse time characteristic is initiated. The inverse time characteristic allows motor starting protection to adjust for those situations where high starting voltages result in decreased starting currents. The tripping time is calculated based on the following formula:

IA 2 t TRIP = ---- t Amax I

where tTRIP tA max I IA

where I> IMOT START

Actual tripping time for flowing current I Tripping time for nominal start-up current IA (set at address 4103) Current actually flowing (measurement value) Nominal starting current of the motor (set at address 4102)

IMOT START Pickup value for recognition of motor starting (set at address 1107)

112

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Motor Protection (Motor Starting Protection, 48 and Start Inhibit for Motors, 66/68)

tTRIP [s]

tA max

IMOT START

IA

Figure 2-39

Inverse Time Characteristic Tripping Curve for Motor Starting Current

Therefore, if the starting current I actually measured is smaller (or larger) than the nominal starting current IA entered at address 4102 STARTUP CURRENT, the actual tripping time ttrip is lengthened (or shortened) accordingly. See Figure 2-39. Definite Time Overcurrent Tripping Characteristic (Blocked Rotor Time) During motor starting, the definite time characteristic is designed to initiate a trip if the motor starting time exceeds the maximum allowable blocked rotor time. The device can detect a blocked rotor condition via a binary input (>Rotor locked) from an external rpm-counter. If the current in any of the phases exceeds the motor starting recognition setting entered at address 1107, and if a blocked rotor conditions is detected via a binary input, a motor starting condition is assumed, and time delayed tripping via the definite time characteristic will be initiated (based on the maximum allowable blocked rotor time). It is important to note that message generation does not occur unless a trip is initiated. Furthermore, when a blocked rotor condition is detected via a binary input, and the definite time characteristic times out, immediate tripping will take place regardless of whether the blocked rotor condition was detected before or after the definite time characteristic timed out. Logic Motor starting protection may be switched on or off at address 4101 48. In addition, motor starting protection may be blocked via a binary input, at which time pickup messages and time delays will be reset. Figure 2-40 illustrates the logic for motor starting protection. A pick up does not create a fault record. Fault recording is not started until a trip command has been issued. When the function drops out the starting time, the blocked rotor time and the annunciations are reset and the fault recording is terminated.

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

113

Functions

Fault Cond. Pickup A

or
4102 STARTUP CURRENT 4103 STARTUP TIME

FNo. 06823

START-SUP pu

or or or
R FNo. 06821 START-SUP TRIP

4104 LOCK ROTOR TIME T 0

or

&

FNo. 06822 Rotor locked

Measurement/Logic
FNo. 06805

>Rotor locked
FNo. 06801 FNo. 06812

>BLK START-SUP

START-SUP BLK

4101 FCT 48/66

FNo. 06813

ON OFF

or

or

START-SUP ACT
FNo. 06811

START-SUP OFF

Figure 2-40

Logic Diagram for Motor Starting Protection

2.7.2
General

Description of Start Inhibit for Motor

The rotor temperature of a motor generally remains well below its maximum allowable temperature during normal operation and even during severe loading conditions. However, during motor starting, the rotor can heat up quickly. If multiple starting attempts are made in a short duration of time, the rotor could suffer thermal damage. Therefore, the 7SJ62/63/64 motor start blocking feature is available. A motor start blocking signal is initiated when the relay projects rotor temperature will exceed the maximum allowable rotor temperature, and blocking continues until the calculated rotor temperature decreases below the reset level. To block starting, the blocking signal must be connected to a binary output whose contact is inserted in the motor starting circuit. Because the rotor current cannot be measured directly, the stator current must be used to generate a thermal profile of the rotor. The excessive rotor temperature is calculated using the highest of the three phase currents. The thermal limit values for the rotor winding are based on manufacturers data regarding the nominal starting current, maximum permissible starting time, and the number of starts permitted from cold and warm conditions. From this data, the device performs the necessary calculations to establish the thermal rotor profile and issues a blocking signal until the thermal rotor profile decreases below the restarting limit.

Determining Excessive Rotor Temperature

114

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Motor Protection (Motor Starting Protection, 48 and Start Inhibit for Motors, 66/68)

L
Maximum Allowable Rotor Temperature Temperature Curve @: Rotor Cage Bar Upper Side Limit Rotor Cage Bar Lower Side Limit

Cool-down with kRUNNING

Restarting

Cool-down with kSTOP

Thermal Profile 1st Start Motor Started Current Equilibrium Time 2nd Start Motor Started Equilibrium Time 3rd Start Motor Started Equilibrium Time t

LS I > t

Figure 2-41

Temperature Curve at the Rotor and the Thermal Profile during Repeated Starting Attempt

Although the heat distribution at the rotor brushes can range widely during motor starting, the different maximum temperatures in the rotor do not necessarily affect motor start blocking (see Figure 2-41). It is much more important to establish a thermal profile, after a complete motor start, that is appropriate for the protection of the motors thermal condition. Figure 2-41 shows, as an example, the heating processes during repeated motor starts (three starts from cold operating condition), as well as the thermal reproduction by the protective relay. Restarting Limit If the rotor temperature has exceeded the restarting limit, the motor cannot be restarted. When the rotor temperature goes below the restarting limit, that is, when exactly one start becomes possible without exceeding the excessive rotor temperature limit, the blocking signal is terminated. Therefore the restarting temperature related to trip temperature is expressed as:

n cold 1 Restart ------------------- = ------------------- Trip n cold

ncold Restart/Trip

2 50 %

3 66,7 %

4 75 %

The restarting limit Restart/Trip is displayed as operational measured value in the thermal measured values. The value changes only if the number of admissible cold restarts ncold alters and is indicated in % and without decimal positions.

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

115

Functions

Restarting Times

When giving the maximum allowable cold and warm starting attempts, the motor manufacturer assumes the motor is not restarted immediately after motor shutdown. This assumption is made because the distribution of heat in the rotor, is very different immediately after motor shutdown. Only after a certain heat equilibrium time has passed can a new starting attempt be made. The device can allow for the equilibrium time via a programmable time interval entered at address 4304 T Equal. Each time the motor is shutdown, the timer starts, and the calculated thermal profile of the rotor does not change until this timer elapses. Once the time interval entered at address 4304 elapses, the device assumes equilibrium has taken place in the rotor, and the thermal profile begins to update. A time of zero can be entered at address 4304 at the option of the user. Then the thermal model with the corresponding time constant (rotor time constant extension factor) cools down. During the equilibrium time the motor cannot be restarted. As soon as the temperature sinks below the restarting threshold, the next restarting attempt can be made. Regardless of thermal profiles, some motor manufacturers require a minimum inhibit time after the maximum number of permissible starting attempts has been exceeded. The total duration of the inhibit signal depends on which of the times T MIN INIHBIT or TRESTART is longer.

Equilibrium Time

Minimum Inhibit Time

Total Time Treclose until release of reclose blocking

The entire time that must elapse before motor starting can resume is equal to the equilibrium time entered at address 4304 and the amount of time, calculated via the thermal model, that it takes for the rotor temperature to decrease to the reset temperature level. If the calculated excessive temperature of the rotor is above the restarting limit when the motor is shut down, the minimum inhibit time will be started together with the equilibrium time. Thus the total inhibit time Treclose can become equal to the minimum inhibit time if it is longer than the sum of the two first mentioned times: T reclose = T Equal + T Restart for TMIN INHIBIT < TEqual+ TRESTART

T reclose = T MIN INHIBIT

for TMIN INHIBIT TEqual + TRESTART, if the calculated excessive temperature > restarting limit

The operational measured value Treclose (visible in the thermal measured values) is the remaining time until the next restart is permissible. When the rotor overtemperature is below the restarting limit and thus the next restarting attempt is permitted, the operational measured value for the waiting time Treclose has reached zero. Extension of Time Constants In order to properly account for the reduced heat exchange when a self-ventilated motor is stopped, the cooling time constants can be increased relative to the time constants for a running machine with the factor Kt at STOP (address 4308). A stopped motor is defined by current below an adjustable current flow monitoring threshold BkrClosed I MIN, assuming that the motor idle current is greater than this threshold. The pickup threshold BkrClosed I MIN also effects the thermal overload protection function (see Section 2.9). While the motor is running, the heating of the thermal profile is modelled with the time constant L calculated from the motor ratings and the cool-down calculated with the

116

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Motor Protection (Motor Starting Protection, 48 and Start Inhibit for Motors, 66/68) time constant L Kt at RUNNING (address 4309). In this way, the protection caters to the requirements in case of a slow cool-down (slow temperature equilibrium). For the calculation of the restarting time TRESTART the following holds: pre n cold T RESTART = k at STOP L ln ---------------------------n cold 1 pre n cold T RESTART = k at RUNNING L ln ---------------------------n cold 1
with k at STOP

at Stop

at Running

extension factor for the time constant = Kt at STOP, address 4308 k at RUNNING extension factor for the time constant = Kt at RUNNING, address 4309 rotor time constant, calculated internally: L L = ta (ncold nwarm) STARTUP2 with ta = startup time in s STARTUP = startup current in pu pre thermal replica the instant the motor stops (depends on the operational status)

Behavior in Case of Power Supply Failure

Depending on the setting of parameter 0235A ATEX100 in Power System Data 1 (see Subsection 2.1.3) the value of the thermal replica will be reset to zero if power supply voltage fails (ATEX100 = NO) or if it is buffered cyclically in a non-transient buffer storage (ATEX100 = YES) that is preserved in the event of a supply voltage failure. In the latter case, the thermal replica uses the buffered values for its calculation and adapts it to the operational conditions. The first option is set by default. For further information please refer to the Device Description on the Protection of Explosion-Protected Motors of Protection Type Increased-Safety e (Order No. C53000-B1174C157). If, under emergency conditions, motor starting in excess of the maximum allowable rotor temperature must take place, the motor start blocking signal can be terminated via a binary input (>66 emer.start), thus allowing a new starting attempt.The thermal rotor profile continues to function, however, the maximum allowable rotor temperature will be exceeded. No motor shutdown will be initiated by motor start blocking, but the calculated excessive temperature of the rotor can be observed for risk assessment. The restarting limit does not feature a pickup annunciation and neither a fault recording is initiated. If the motor start blocking function is blocked via binary input >BLOCK 66 or switched off, the thermal profile of the excessive rotor temperature and the equilibrium time are reset, and any existing motor start blocking signal is terminated. Via a binary input (>66 RM th.repl.) the thermal replica can be reset independently. This may be useful for testing and commissioning, and after a power supply voltage failure. Figure 2-42 shows the logic diagram of the start inhibit for motors function.

Emergency Start

Blocking/Logic

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

117

Functions

Ic

Ib

Ia

Imax

4309 Kt at RUNNING kRUNNING x 4302 STARTUP CURRENT 4308 Kt at STOP kSTOP x 4303 STARTUP TIME 4306 4307 4304 T Equal T 0
S R Q

MAX.WARM STARTS #COLD-#WARM

CB closed = Motor is running 0212 CB Cl

L(t) Calculator L = 0

or
&

or
L(t) > RES

4310 T MIN. INHIBIT

S Q

&

FNo. 04823

FNo. 04827

&

>66 emer.start

66 TRIP

Measurement/Logic
FNo. 04828 FNo. 04829

>66 RM th.repl.
FNo. 04822

or

66 RM th.repl.
FNo. 04825

>BLOCK 66

66 BLOCKED
FNo. 04826

or
4301 FCT 66

or

66 ACTIVE
FNo. 04824

OFF
1

ON

66 OFF

Figure 2-42

Logic Diagram of the Start Inhibit for Motors Function

2.7.3
2.7.3.1

Programming Settings
General Motor starting protection is only effective and accessible if address 0141 48 was set to Enabled during configuration of protective function. If the motor starting protection

118

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Motor Protection (Motor Starting Protection, 48 and Start Inhibit for Motors, 66/68)

feature is not required, address 0141 should be set to Disabled. The function may switched ON or OFF at address 4101 48. The motor start inhibit function is only in effect and accessible if address 0143 66 #of Starts is set to Enabled during configuration of protective functions. If the function is not needed, then Disabled is set. The function can be turned ON or OFF under address 4301 FCT 66.

2.7.3.2

Motor Starting Protection (48) Under normal conditions the values of the startup current are entered at address 4102 STARTUP CURRENT and those of the startup time at address 4103 STARTUP TIME. At all times this enables timely tripping if the value I2 t calculated in the protection device is exceeded. If the startup time is longer than the permissible blocked rotor time, an external rpmcounter can initiate the definite-time tripping characteristic via binary input (>Rotor locked). A locked rotor leads to a loss of ventilation and therefore to a reduced thermal load capacity of the machine. For this reason the motor starting time supervision is to issue a tripping command before reaching the thermal tripping characteristic valid for normal operation. A current above the current threshold is interpreted as motor startup. Consequently, this value must be selected such that under all load and voltage conditions during motor startup the actual startup current safely exceeds the setting, but stays below the setting in case of permissible, momentary overload. Example: Motor with the following data: Nominal Voltage Nominal Current Start-Up Current Long-Term Current Rating Start-Up Duration for ISTARTUP CT Ratio IN CT prim / IN CT sec V N = 6600 V IG = 126 A ISTARTUP = 624 A IMAX = 135 A TSTA MAX = 8.5 sec 200 A / 1 A

The setting for Address 4102 STARTUP CURRENT is calculated as follows: I STARTUP 624 A I STARTUP-sec = ----------------------- I N CT sec = -------------- I A = 3.12 A 200 A I N CT prim For reduced voltage, the start-up current is also reduced almost linearly. At 80% nominal voltage, the start-up current in this example is reduced to 0.8 * I.STARTUP = 2.5 A. The setting at address 1107 I MOTOR START must lie above the maximum load current and below the minimum start-up current. If no other influencing factors are present (peak loads), the value set at address 1107 may be a median value: Based on the Long-Term Current Rating: 135 A -------------- = 0.68 I N CT sec 200 A

2.5 I N + 0.68 I N I STARTUP-SEC = --------------------------------------- 1.6 INCT sec 2

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

119

Functions

For ratios deviating from nominal conditions, the motor tripping time changes:, I STARTUP 2 T TRIP = ----------------------- T STARTUP I At 80 % of nominal voltage (which corresponds to 80 % of nominal starting current), the tripping time is:
2 624 A T TRIP = --------------------------- 8.5 s = 13.3 s 0.8 624 A

After the definite time characteristic times out (4104 LOCK ROTOR TIME), the blocked rotor binary input becomes effective and initiates a tripping signal. If the time delay associated with the definite time characteristic is set such that at normal startup the binary input >Rotor locked (06805) is blocked during the delay time LOCK ROTOR TIME, a shorter delay time of the tripping command can be realized than for unblocked startup. Note: Overload protection characteristic curves are effective during motor starting conditions, however, thermal dissipation during motor starting is constant. The setting at address 1107 (I MOTOR START) limits the working range of the overload protection to larger current values.

2.7.3.3

Start Inhibit for Motors (66, 86) Many of the variables needed to calculate the rotor temperature are supplied by the motor manufacturer. Among these variables are the starting current, the nominal motor current, the maximum allowable starting time T START MAX (address 4303), the number of allowable starts from cold conditions (ncold), and the number of allowable starts from warm conditions (nwarm). The starting current is entered at address 4302 IStart/IMOTnom, expressed as a multiple of nominal motor current. In contrast, the nominal motor current is entered as a secondary value, directly in amperes, at address 4305 I MOTOR NOMINAL. The number of warm starts allowed is entered at address 4306 MAX.WARM STARTS and the difference between the number of allowable cold and warm starts is entered at address 4307 #COLD-#WARM. For motors without separate ventilation, the reduced cooling at motor stop can be accounted for by entering the factor Kt at STOP at address 4308. As soon as the current no longer exceeds the current flow monitoring setting entered at address 0212 BkrClosed I MIN, the time constant is increased by the k factor. If no difference between the time constants is to be used (e.g. externally-ventilated motors), then the factor Kt at STOP should be set to 1. Cool-down with running motor is influenced by the extension factor 4309 Kt at RUNNING. This factor considers that motor running under load and a stopped motor do not cool down at the same speed. It becomes effective as soon as the current exceeds the value set at address 0212 BkrClosed I MIN. With Kt at RUNNING = 1 the heating and the cooling time constant are the same at operating conditions (I > BkrClosed I MIN).

120

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Motor Protection (Motor Starting Protection, 48 and Start Inhibit for Motors, 66/68)

Example: Motor with the following data: Nominal Voltage Nominal Current Starting Current Starting Duration @ IStart Allowable Starts with Cold Motor Allowable Starts with Warm Motor Current Transformer Ratio VN = 6600 V IN = 126 A IStart= 624 A TANL max = 8.5 s ncold= 3 nwarm= 2 200 A/1 A

The following settings are derived from these data: 624 A I START I N = -------------- = 4.95 126 A 126 A I N = -------------- = 0.62 I NCTsec 200 A The following settings are made: IStart/IMOTnom = I MOTOR NOMINAL = MAX.WARM STARTS= #COLD-#WARM =

4.9 0.6 AT START MAX=8.5 s 2 1

For the rotor temperature equilibrium time, (address 4304) a setting time of approx. T Equal = 1 min has proven to be a good value. The value for the minimum inhibit time 4310 T MIN. INHIBIT depends on the requirements made by the motor manufacturer, or by the system conditions. It must in any case be higher than 4304 T Equal. In this example, a value has been chosen that reflects the thermal profile (T MIN. INHIBIT = 6.0 min). The motor manufacturer's, or system requirements determine also the extension factor for the time constant during cool-down, especially with the motor stopped. Where no other specifications are made, the following settings are recommended: Kt at STOP = 5 und Kt at RUNNING = 2. For a proper functioning, it is also important that the CT values and the threshold current for distinction between stopped and running motor (address 0212 BkrClosed I MIN, recommended setting 0.1 I/IN Motor) have been set correctly. An overview of the parameters and their default settings is given in the tables at the end of this section and in the Appendix. Temperature Behavior during Changing Operating States For a better understanding of the above considerations several possible operating states in two different operating areas will be discussed in the following paragraph. The examples use the settings indicated above. 3 cold and 2 warm startup attempts have resulted in a restart limit of 66.7 %: A. Below the thermal restarting limit 1.A normal startup brings the machine into a temperature range below the thermal restarting limit and the machine is stopped. The stop launches the equilibrium time 4304 T Equal and generates the message 66 TRIP. The equilibrium time expires and the message 66 TRIP is cleared. During the time T Equal the thermal model remains frozen (see Figure 2-43, to the left).

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

121

Functions

2.A normal startup brings the machine into a temperature range below the thermal restarting limit, the machine is stopped and is started by an emergency startup without expiration of the equilibrium time. The equilibrium time is shed and the thermal model is released and 66 TRIP is reported cleared (see Figure 2-43, to the right).

Temperature p.u. 1.0

Example A.1 Example A.2 Emergency startup Restarting

0.8

0.6

0.4

0.2

0 t

66 TRIP t

Current

BkrClosed I MIN

Figure 2-43

Startups according to examples A.1 and A.2

B. Above the thermal restarting limit: 1.A startup brings the machine from load operation into a temperature range far above the thermal restarting limit and the machine is stopped. The minimum inhibit time and the equilibrium time are started and 66 TRIP is reported. The temperature cool-down below the restarting limit takes longer than 4310 T MIN. INHIBIT and 4304 T Equal, so that the time passing until the temperature falls below the temperature limit is the decisive factor for clearing the message 66 TRIP. The thermal model remains frozen while the minimum inhibit time expires (see Figure 2-44, to the left).

122

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Motor Protection (Motor Starting Protection, 48 and Start Inhibit for Motors, 66/68)

2.A startup brings the machine from load operation into a temperature range just above the thermal restarting limit and the machine is stopped. The minimum inhibit time and the equilibrium time are started and 66 TRIP is reported. Although the temperature soon falls below the restarting limit, the blocking 66 TRIP is preserved until the equilibrium time and the minimum inhibit time have expired (see Figure 2-44, to the right).

Temperature p.u. 1.0

Example B.1

Example B.2

T Equal T MIN. INHIBIT T Equal T MIN. INHIBIT

0.8
Restarting

0.6

0.4

0.2

0 t

66 TRIP t

Current

BkrClosed I MIN

Figure 2-44

Startups according to examples B.1 and B.2

2.7.3.4

Settings In the list below, the setting range and default setting value for the current-based setting are for a device with a nominal current rating IN = 1 A. For a nominal current rating IN = 5 A, multiply the Setting Options values and Default Setting value by 5. Consider the current transformer ratios when setting the device with primary values.

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

123

Functions

Addr. 1107

Setting Title I MOTOR START

Setting Options 0.60..10.00 A

Default Setting 2.50 A

Comments Motor Start Current (Block 49, Start 48)

Addr. 4101 4301 4102 4103 4104 4302 4303 4304 4305 4306 4307 4308 4309 4310

Setting Title FCT 48/66 FCT 66 STARTUP CURRENT STARTUP TIME LOCK ROTOR TIME IStart/IMOTnom T START MAX T Equal OFF ON OFF ON

Setting Options

Default Setting OFF OFF 5.00 A 10.0 sec 2.0 sec 4.9 10 sec 1.0 min 1.00 A 2 1 5.0 2.0 6.0 min

Comments 48 / 66 Motor (Startup Monitor/ Counter) 66 Startup Counter for Motors Startup Current Startup Time Permissible Locked Rotor Time I Start / I Motor nominal Maximum Permissible Starting Time Temperature Equalizaton Time Rated Motor Current Maximum Number of Warm Starts Number of Cold Starts - Warm Starts Extension of Time Constant at Stop Extension of Time Constant at Running Minimum Restart Inhibit Time

1.00..16.00 A 1.0..180.0 sec 0.5..120.0 sec; 3.0..10.0 3..320 sec 0.0..320.0 min

I MOTOR NOMINAL 0.20..1.20 A MAX.WARM STARTS #COLD-#WARM K at STOP K at RUNNING T MIN. INHIBIT 1..4 1..2 0.2..100.0 0.2..100.0 0.2..120.0 min

2.7.3.5
F.No.

Information
Alarm Comments >BLOCK Startup Supervision >Rotor locked Startup supervision OFF Startup supervision is BLOCKED Startup supervision is ACTIVE Startup supervision TRIP

06801 >BLK START-SUP 06805 >Rotor locked 06811 START-SUP OFF 06812 START-SUP BLK 06813 START-SUP ACT 06821 START-SUP TRIP

124

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Motor Protection (Motor Starting Protection, 48 and Start Inhibit for Motors, 66/68)

F.No. 06822 Rotor locked 06823 START-SUP pu 04822 >BLOCK 66 04823 >66 emer.start 04828 >66 RM th.repl. 04824 66 OFF 04825 66 BLOCKED 04826 66 ACTIVE 04827 66 TRIP 04829 66 RM th.repl.

Alarm Rotor locked Startup supervision Pickup

Comments

>BLOCK Motor Startup counter >Emergency start >66 Reset thermal memory 66 Motor start protection OFF 66 Motor start protection BLOCKED 66 Motor start protection ACTIVE 66 Motor start protection TRIP 66 Reset thermal memory

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

125

Functions

2.8
2.8.1
General

Frequency Protection (81 O/U)

Description of Frequency Protection
The frequency protection function detects abnormally high and low frequencies in the system. If the frequency lies outside the allowable range, appropriate actions are initiated, such as load shedding or separating a generator from the system. A decrease in system frequency occurs when the system experiences an increase in the real power demand, or when a malfunction occurs with a generator governor or automatic generation control (AGC) system. An increase in system frequency occurs when large blocks of load are removed from the system, or again when a malfunction occurs with a generator governor or AGC system. The frequency is detected from the phasetophase voltages Va-b applying at the device. If the amplitude of this voltage is too small, one of the other phasetophase voltages is used instead. Through the use of filters and repeated measurements, the frequency evaluation is free from harmonic influences and very accurate.

Underfrequency and Overfrequency Protection

Frequency protection consists of four frequency elements. Any given frequency element can be set to pickup for either overfrequency or underfrequency conditions. Each element can be independently set, and utilized to perform different functions within the system. The setting decides on the purpose of the individual frequency stage. For the f4 frequency stage, the user can specify independently of the parameterized limit value if this stage shall function as decrease or increase stage. For this reason, it can also be used for special applications, if, for example, the user desires a signalization in case of a frequency overrange being below the nominal frequency. The frequency can be determined as long as at least one of the phasetophase voltages is present and of sufficient magnitude. If the measurement voltage drops below a settable value Vmin, then frequency protection is blocked. For elements used in an underfrequency protection mode, as soon as the frequency of the measured voltage decreases below the setting, the element picks up and remain picked up until the system frequency increases above the setting. For elements used in an overfrequency protection mode, as soon as the frequency of the measured voltage increases above the setting, the element picks up and remains picked up until the frequency decreases below the setting. Each frequency element has an associated settable time delay. When a frequency element picks up and the time delay elapses, a trip signal is generated. When a frequency elements drops out, the control signal (tripping or alarm signal) is immediately terminated, but not before the minimum command duration 0210A TMin TRIP CMD has elapsed. Each of the four frequency elements can be blocked individually by binary inputs. Figure 2-45 shows the logic diagram for the frequency protection function. The 81 element is a definite time element in that the time delay is not a function of the frequency magnitude.

Operating Ranges

Logic

126

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Frequency Protection (81 O/U)

5403 81-1 PICKUP

>BLOCK 81-1 FNo. 05206

5402 Vmin

81-1 picked up &

f> f<

5405 81-1 DELAY T 0

FNo. 05232

U1 f

V > Vmin

81-1 TRIP FNo. 05236

Measurement/Logic

or
5401 FCT 81 O/U

FNo. 05214 81 Under V Blk

ON
1

OFF

FNo. 05211 81 OFF

or
FNo. 05203

or

FNo. 05213 81 ACTIVE FNo. 05212 81 BLOCKED

>BLOCK 81O/U

Figure 2-45

Logic Diagram of the Frequency Protection

2.8.2
2.8.2.1

Programming Settings
General The frequency protection will only be effective and accessible if address 0154 81 O/ U is set to Enabled during configuration of protective functions. If the frequency protection function is not required, then address 0154 should be set to Disabled. The function can be turned ON or OFF at address 5401 FCT 81 O/U.

Minimum Voltage

The minimum voltage is set at address 5402 Vmin. If the phasetophase voltage is less than this value, the frequency protection is blocked.

2.8.2.2

Frequency Protection Settings The nominal system frequency is programmed in POWER SYSTEM DATA 1 and the pickup settings for each of the frequency elements should be set higher than nominal frequency if the element is to be used for overfrequency protection or lower than the nominal frequency if the element is to be used for underfrequency protection.

Pickup Values

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

127

Functions

Note: If the element is not required, the frequency setting should be set equal to the nominal frequency, in which case the element becomes inactive. If underfrequency protection is used for load shedding purpose, then the frequency settings relative to other feeder relays are generally based on the priority of the customers served by the protective relay. The actual settings of the underfrequency elements must be based on network stability requirements. For 60 Hz systems, the frequency pickup settings for elements one (1) through four (4) are entered at addresses 5404, 5407, 5410, and 5413 respectively. For 50 Hz systems, the frequency pickup settings for elements one (1) through four (4) are entered at addresses 5403, 5406, 5409, and 5412 respectively. Delays The time delays (Definite Time) entered at addresses 5405, 5408, 5411, and 5414, allow the device to prioritize or order corrective actions based on the degree to which the actual system frequency departs (upward or downward) from the nominal system frequency.

2.8.2.3

Settings for Frequency Protection

For 60 Hz systems:
Addr. 5401 5402 5404 5405 5407 5408 5410 5411 5413 5414 LCD-Text FCT 81 O/U Vmin 811 PICKUP 811 DELAY 812 PICKUP 812 DELAY 813 PICKUP 813 DELAY 814 PICKUP 814 DELAY OFF ON 10 .. 150 V 55.50 .. 64.50 Hz 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; 55.50 .. 64.50 Hz 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; 55.50 .. 64.50 Hz 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; 55.50 .. 64.50 Hz 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; Setting Options Default Setting OFF 65 V 59.50 Hz 60.00 sec 59.00 Hz 30.00 sec 57.50 Hz 3.00 sec 61.00 Hz 30.00 sec Comments 81 Over/Under Frequency Protection Minimum required voltage for operation 81-1 Pickup 81-1 Time Delay 81-2 Pickup 81-2 Time Delay 81-3 Pickup 81-3 Time delay 81-4 Pickup 81-4 Time delay

For 50 Hz systems:
Addr. 5401 LCD-Text FCT 81 O/U OFF ON Setting Options Default Setting OFF Comments 81 Over/Under Frequency Protection

128

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Frequency Protection (81 O/U)

Addr. 5402 5403 5405 5406 5408 5409 5411 5412 5414 Vmin

LCD-Text

Setting Options 10 .. 150 V 45.50 .. 54.50 Hz 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; 45.50 .. 54.50 Hz 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; 45.50 .. 54.50 Hz 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; 45.50 .. 54.50 Hz 0.00 .. 100.00 sec;

Default Setting 65 V 49.50 Hz 60.00 sec 49.00 Hz 30.00 sec 47.50 Hz 3.00 sec 51.00 Hz 30.00 sec

Comments Minimum required voltage for operation 81-1 Pickup 81-1 Time Delay 81-2 Pickup 81-2 Time Delay 81-3 Pickup 81-3 Time delay 81-4 Pickup 81-4 Time delay

811 PICKUP 811 DELAY 812 PICKUP 812 DELAY 813 PICKUP 813 DELAY 814 PICKUP 814 DELAY

2.8.2.4
F.No.

Information List for Frequency Protectio

Alarm >BLOCK 81O/U >BLOCK 81-1 >BLOCK 81-2 >BLOCK 81-3 >BLOCK 81-4 81 OFF 81 BLOCKED 81 ACTIVE 81 Under Voltage Block 81-1 picked up 81-2 picked up 81-3 picked up 81-4 picked up 81-1 TRIP 81-2 TRIP 81-3 TRIP 81-4 TRIP Comments

05203 >BLOCK 81O/U 05206 >BLOCK 81-1 05207 >BLOCK 81-2 05208 >BLOCK 81-3 05209 >BLOCK 81-4 05211 81 OFF 05212 81 BLOCKED 05213 81 ACTIVE 05214 81 Under V Blk 05232 81-1 picked up 05233 81-2 picked up 05234 81-3 picked up 05235 81-4 picked up 05236 81-1 TRIP 05237 81-2 TRIP 05238 81-3 TRIP 05239 81-4 TRIP

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

129

Functions

2.9
2.9.1
General

Thermal Overload Protection (49)

Description of Thermal Overload Protection
The thermal overload protection feature of the 7SJ62/63/64 is designed to prevent overloads from damaging the protected equipment. The device is capable of projecting excessive operating temperatures for the protected equipment in accordance with a single-body thermal model, based on the following differential equation: d 1 1 I 2 ------- + ------ = ------ ------------ + u dt th th k I N
where Actual operating temperature expressed as a percent of the

operating temperature corresponding to the maximum permissible operating current (k*IN)

th I k IN

Thermal time constant for the heating of the equipment being protected Operating current expressed as a percentage of the maximum permissible operating current (k*IN)
kfactor indicating the maximum permissible constant phase

current referred to the nominal current of the protected object

Nominal current of the protected object

u 40C u = ------------------------2 k N
where u N Measured ambient or coolant temperature Temperature at nominal current

If the ambient or coolant temperature is not measured, a constant value of u = 40C is assumed so that u = 0. The thermal overload protection feature models a heat image of the equipment being protected. Both the previous history of an overload and the heat loss to the environment are taken into account. Thermal overload protection calculates the operating temperature of the protected equipment as a percent of the maximum allowable operating temperature. When the calculated operating temperature reaches a settable percentage (49 Q ALARM) of the maximum allowable operating temperature, a warning message is issued to allow time for the load reduction measures to take place. When the calculated operating temperature reaches 100 % of the maximum allowable operating temperature, a trip signal is initiated to de-energize the overloaded equipment. Initiation of a trip signal is based on the phase with the highest calculated temperature. The maximum thermally-permissible continuous current Imax is described as a multiple of the nominal current IN:

130

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Thermal Overload Protection (49)

Imax = k IN For thermal overload protection to calculate operating temperature as a percent of maximum allowable operating temperature, it is necessary to enter the k factor setting (49 K-FACTOR), the time constant setting th (TIME CONSTANT) and the warning temperature level (49 Q ALARM) in percent of the trip temperature TRIP. Thermal overload protection also features a current warning element (I ALARM) in addition to the temperature warning stage. The current warning element may report an overload current prematurely, even if the calculated operating temperature has not yet attained the warning or tripping levels. Coolant Temperature (Ambient Temperature) The device can account for external temperatures. Depending on the type of application, this may be a coolant or ambient temperature. The temperature can be measured via a temperature detection unit (RTD-box). For this purpose, the required temperature detector is connected to detector input 1 of the first RTD-box. If incorrect temperature values are measured or there are disturbances between the RTD-box and the device, an alarm will be issued and the standard temperature of u = 40 C is used for calculation with the ambient temperature detection simply being ignored. For the detection of coolant temperature, the maximum permissible current Imax is influenced by the difference between the coolant and the standard temperature of 40 C. If the ambient or coolant temperature is low, the protected object can be charged higher than it is when the temperature is high. Extension of Time Constants When using the device to protect motors, the varying thermal behaviors associated with cycling the motor on and off may be correctly evaluated. Under a cycling condition, a motor without external cooling losses heat more slowly, and a longer thermal time constant must be used. For a motor that is cycled on and off, the 7SJ62/63/64 increases the time constant th by a programmable factor (k factor). The motor is considered off the motor currents drop below a programmable minimum current setting (BkrClosed I MIN, refer to Current Flow Monitoring in Subsection 2.1.3). For externally-cooled motors, cables, and transformers, the Kt-FACTOR = 1. The thermal overload protection feature may be reset via a binary input (>RES 49 Image). The current-induced overtermperature value is reset to zero. The same is accomplished via the binary input (>BLOCK 49 O/L); in that case the overload protection is blocked completely, including the current warning stage. When motors must be started for emergency reasons, operating temperatures above the maximum permissible operating temperatures can be allowed by blocking the tripping signal via a binary input (>EmergencyStart). Since the calculated operating temperature may be higher than the maximum allowable operating temperature after drop out of the binary input has taken place, the thermal overload protection function features a programmable run-on time interval (T EMERGENCY) which is started when the binary input drops out. Tripping will be defeated until this time interval elapses. On a final note, the binary input used for emergency starting affects only the tripping signal. There is no effect on the fault condition protocol nor does the thermal image reset. Behavior in Case of Power Supply Failure Depending on the setting in address 0235A ATEX100 of Power System Data 1 (see Subsection 2.1.3) the value of the thermal replica is either reset to zero (ATEX100 = NO) if the power supply voltage fails, or cyclically buffered in a non-volatile memory (ATEX100 = YES) until the power supply voltage is back again. In the latter case, the

Blocking

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

131

Functions

thermal replica uses the stored value for calculation and matches it to the operating conditions. The first option is the default setting. For further information, please refer to Device Description on the Protection of Explosion-Protected Motors of Protection Type Increased-Safety e (Order No. C53000-B1174-C157). Figure 2-46 shows the logic diagram for thermal overload protection.

132

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Thermal Overload Protection (49)

4205 I ALARM

4202 49 K-FACTOR

Ia

Ib

Ic

I> 2 d 1 1 I ------- + ------- = ------- ------------- + u dt k I N th th

or

FNo. 01515 49 O/L I Alarm

4204 49 Q ALARM

A
CB closed 0212 BkrClosed I MIN

th
= const.

u = 0

max

>
100 %

FNo. 01516 49 / FNo. 01517 49 Winding O/L

I>

>
&

4203 TIME CONSTANT 4207A Kt-FACTOR th = K Time Constant th = Time Constant FNo. 01521

49 Th O/L TRIP

1107 I MOTOR START

I>
0142 FCT 49

u = 0 C u (RTD-box)
FNo. 01580

Disabled No ambient temp With amb. temp.

Measurement/ Logic

>RES 49 Image

or

FNo. 01581

49 Image res.
FNo. 01512

FNo. 01503

>BLOCK 49 O/L

49 O/L BLOCK
FNo. 01513 49 O/L ACTIVE FNo. 01511 49 O / L OFF

4201 FCT 49

or

&

OFF ON Alarm Only

4208A T EMERGENCY FNo. 01507

>EmergencyStart

or

Figure 2-46

Logic Diagram for Thermal Overload Protection

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

133

Functions

2.9.2
2.9.2.1

Programming Settings
General Thermal overload protection is only effective and accessible if address 0142 49 was set to No ambient temp or With amb. temp. during configuration of protective functions. If the thermal overload protection is not required, address 0142 49 should be set to Disabled. Transformers and cable are prone to damage by overloads which last for an extended period of time. For this reason, fault protection elements such as the directional and non-directional overcurrent elements should not be used to protect against overload. The short time delays associated with fault protection elements do not allow sufficient time for the orderly curtailment of load by operating personnel. In addition, fault protection elements set to trip for overload will not allow short-duration, non-damaging overloads a practice which is often required in real operating situations. The 7SJ62/63/64 protective relay features an thermal overload protective function with a thermal tripping characteristic curve which may be adapted to the overload tolerance of the equipment being protected. Thermal overload protection may be switched ON or OFF or Alarm Only at address 4201 FCT 49. If switched ON, tripping is also possible.

2.9.2.2 kFactor

Overload Settings The nominal device current is used as a basis for overload detection. The programmable 49 K-FACTOR (set at address 4202) is calculated as the ratio of the thermallypermissible continuous current Imax to the nominal device current IN: I max k = ---------IN The thermally-permissible continuous current for the equipment being protected is known from manufacturers specifications. The thermal overload function is normally not applicable to aerial lines since the actual current capability of aerial lines is dependent on factors that are generally unknown (e.g. wind speed, ambient temperature, etc.). For cables, the permissible continuous current is dependent on the cross-section, insulating material, design, and the cable routing, among other things. It may be taken from pertinent tables, or is specified by the cable manufacturer. If no specifications are available, a value of 1.1 times the nominal current rating is assumed. When determining the nominal current rating of the protected equipment, it is important to relate this current to the nominal current rating of the device. For example, the maximum permissible continuous current for a motor and the nominal current rating of the motor are given in primary amperes. For the k factor to be set based on the nominal device current, the following equation must be used: Set the 49 K-FACTOR I max prim I NMotor k = -------------------- ----------------------I NMotor I N CT prim

134

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Thermal Overload Protection (49)

where Imax prim

IN Motor
IN CT prim

Maximum permissible continuous motor current in primary amperes Nominal motor current in primary amperes Current transformer primary nominal current

Example: Motor and current transformer with the following data: Permissible Continuous Current: Motor Nominal Current Current Transformer Ratio Imax prim= 1.2 IN IN Motor = 1100 A 1200 A/1 A

1100 A Set the 49 K-FACTOR = 1.2 ------------------ = 1.1 1200 A

Time Constant th

The thermal overload protection element tracks excessive temperature progression, employing a thermal differential equation whose solution is an exponential function. The TIME CONSTANT th (set at address 4203) is used in the calculation to determine the operating temperature. This is expressed as a maximum allowable operating temperature. For cable protection, the heat-gain time constant th is determined by cable specifications and by the cable environment. If no time-constant specification is available, it may be determined from the short-term load capability of the cable. The 1-sec current (i.e. the maximum current permissible for a one-second period of time), is often known or available from tables. Then, the time constant may be calculated from the formula: I 1 sec 1 Set Value th (min) = ----- --------------------60 I max Prim
2

If the short-term load capability is given for an interval other than one sec, the corresponding short-term current is used in the above formula instead of the 1-sec current, and the result is multiplied times the given duration. For example, if the 0.5-second current rating is known, I 0.5 sec 0.5 et Value th (min) = ------- --------------------60 I max Prim
2

It is important to note, however, that the longer the effective duration, the less accurate the result. Example: Cable and current transformer with the following data: Continuous permissible current Maximum current for 1 sec Current transformer Imax = 500 A @ 40 oC I1s = 45 * Imax = 22.5 kA 600 A / 1 A

The k factor and time constant are calculated as follows:

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

135

Functions

I max 500 A k = ---------- = -------------- = 0.833 600 A IN

I 1s 1 2 1 min = ----- ---------- = ----- 45 = 33.75 min 60 I max 60 The settings are: 49 K-FACTOR (Address 4202)= 0.83 TIME CONSTANT = 33.7 min Warning Temperature Level By setting the thermal warning level 49 Q ALARM at address 4204, a warning message can be issued prior to tripping, thus allowing time for load curtailment procedures to be implemented. This warning level simultaneously represents the dropout level for the tripping signal. In other words, the tripping signal is interrupted only when the calculated operating temperature falls below the warning level, thus allowing the protected equipment to be placed back into service. The thermal warning level is given in % of the tripping temperature level (maximum allowable operating temperature). A current warning level is also available (I ALARM 4205). The setting at address 4205 corresponds to secondary amperes, of course, and should be set equal to, or slightly less than, permissible continuous current (k * INsec). The current warning level may be used in lieu of the thermal warning level by setting the thermal warning level to 100 %. Extension of Time Constants The time constant programmed at address 4203 is valid for a running motor. For cycling motors without external cooling, the motor loses heat more slowly. For a cycling motor, the 7SJ62/63/64 takes the reduced heat loss into account by increasing the time constant th by a programmable factor (Kt-FACTOR, set at address 4207A). Motor stop is detected if the current falls below the threshold value BkrClosed I MIN of the current flow monitoring (see side title Current Flow Monitoring in Subsection 2.1.3) assuming that the motor idle current is greater than this threshold. The pickup threshold BkrClosed I MIN affects also the following protection functions: voltage protection, breaker failure protection and restart inhibit for motors. If no distinguishing of the time constants is necessary (e.g. externally-cooled motors, cables, transformers, etc.) the Kt-FACTOR is set at 1 (Default Setting value). Emergency Starting The drop-out time T EMERGENCY to be entered at address 4208A must ensure that after an emergency startup and after dropout of the binary input >EmergencyStart the trip command is blocked until the thermal replica is below the dropout threshold again. The indications specified up to now are sufficient for a temperature rise replica. The ambient or coolant temperature, however, can also be processed. This has to be communicated to the device as digitalized measured value via the interface. During configuration the parameter 0142 49 must be set to With amb. temp. If the ambient temperature detection is used, the user must be aware that the 49 KFACTOR to be set refers to an ambient temperature of u = 40 C, i.e. it corresponds to the maximum permissible current at a temperature of 40 C.

Ambient or Coolant Temperature

136

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Thermal Overload Protection (49)

All calculations are performed with standardized quantities. The ambient temperature must also be standardized. The temperature with nominal current is used as standardized quantity. If the nominal current deviates from the nominal CT current, the temperature must be adapted according to the following formula. In address 4209 or 4210 49 TEMP. RISE I the temperature adapted to the nominal transformer current is set. This setting value is used as standardized quantity for the ambient temperature input. I NprimCT 2 N sec = NMach ---------------------- I NMach mit N sec NMach INMach Machine temperature with secondary nominal current = setting at the 7SJ62/63/64 relay (address 4209 or 4210) Machine temperature with nominal machine current

INprim CT Primary rated current of the current transformers Rated current of the machine

If the temperature input is used, the trip times change if the coolant temperature deviates from the internal reference temperature of 40 C. The following formula can be used to calculate the trip time: u 40 C I vor 2 I ------------ 2 + -------------------------- ------------ k I N k I N 2 k N t = th ln --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- u 40 C I ------------ 2 + -------------------------- 1 k I N 2 k N mit th TIME CONSTANT (Adresse 4203) k IN I 49 K-FACTOR (Adresse 4202) Nominal device current Actually flowing secondary current

Ipre Previous load current N Temperature with nominal current IN (Address 4209 49 TEMP. RISE I) u Coolant temperature input (scaling with address 4209 or 4210) Example: Machine: INMach NMach th = 483 A ImaxMach = 1.15 IN at K = 40 C = 93 C Temperature at INMach = 600 s (thermal time constant of the machine)
(to be set in address 4202)

Current Transformer Ratio: 500 A/1 A 483 A K-FAKTOR = 1.15 -------------- 1.11 500 A

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

137

Functions

500 Nsec = 93 C --------- 100 C 483

(to be set in address 4209 or 4210 49 TEMP. RISE I)

Motor Starting Recognition

To ascertain whether or not a motor is starting, the motor currents are compared with the setting I MOTOR START at address 1107. If the motor currents exceed the setting at address 1107, a motor starting condition is assumed. Information on how to set address 1107 is given under Recognition of Running Condition (only for motors) in Subsections 2.1.6 and 2.7.3.

2.9.2.3

Settings for Thermal Overload Protection In the list below, the setting range and default setting value for I ALARM is for a device with a nominal current rating IN = 1 A. For a nominal current rating IN = 5 A, multiply the Setting Options values and Default Setting value by 5. Consider the current transformer ratios when setting the device with primary values.

Addr. 4201

Setting Title FCT 49

Setting Options OFF ON Alarm Only 0.10..4.00 1.0..999.9 min 50..100 % 0.10..4.00 A 1.0..10.0 10..15000 sec 40..200 C 104..392 F

Default Setting OFF

Comments 49 Thermal overload protection

4202 4203 4204 4205 4207A 4208A 4209 4210

49 K-FACTOR TIME CONSTANT 49 ALARM I ALARM K-FACTOR T EMERGENCY 49 TEMP. RISE I 49 TEMP. RISE I

1.10 100.0 min 90 % 1.00 A 1.0 100 sec 100 C 212 F

49 K-Factor Time Constant 49 Thermal Alarm Stage Current Overload Alarm Setpoint Kt-FACTOR when motor stops Emergency time 49 Temperature rise at rated sec. curr. 49 Temperature rise at rated sec. curr.

138

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Thermal Overload Protection (49)

2.9.2.4
F.No.

Information List for Thermal Overload Protection

Alarm Comments >BLOCK 49 Overload Protection >Emergency start of motors >49 Reset of Thermal Overload Image 49 Overload Protection is OFF 49 Overload Protection is BLOCKED 49 Overload Protection is ACTIVE 49 Overload Current Alarm (I alarm) 49 Overload Alarm! Near Thermal Trip 49 Winding Overload 49 Thermal Overload TRIP 49 Thermal Overload Image reset

01503 >BLOCK 49 O/L 01507 >EmergencyStart 01580 >RES 49 Image 01511 49 O / L OFF 01512 49 O/L BLOCK 01513 49 O/L ACTIVE 01515 49 O/L I Alarm 01516 49 O/L Alarm 01517 49 Winding O/L 01521 49 Th O/L TRIP 01581 49 Image res.

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

139

Functions

2.10

Monitoring Functions
The device is equipped with extensive monitoring capabilities - both for hardware and software. In addition, the measured values are also constantly monitored for plausibility, therefore, the current transformer and voltage transformer circuits are largely integrated into the monitoring. It is also possible to implement trip and closing circuit monitoring, using appropriate binary inputs as available.

2.10.1 Description of Measured Values Monitoring

2.10.1.1 Hardware Monitoring The device is monitored from the measurement inputs to the binary outputs. Monitoring checks the hardware for malfunctions and disallowed conditions. Auxiliary and Reference Voltages The processor voltage of 5 V DC is monitored, and if the voltage decreases below the minimum value, the device is removed from operation. When the normal voltage returns, the processor system is restarted. Removal of or switching off the supply voltage removes the device from operation and a message is immediately generated by a dead contact. Brief voltage interruptions of less than 50 ms do not disturb the readiness of the device (for nominal auxiliary voltage 110 V DC). The processor monitors the offset and reference voltage of the AD (analog-digital) converter. The protection is suspended if the voltages deviate outside an allowable range, and lengthy deviations are reported. Buffer Battery The buffer battery, which ensures the operation of the internal clock and the storage of counters and messages if the auxiliary voltage fails, is periodically checked for charge status. If it is less than an allowed minimum voltage, then the Fail Battery message is issued. The internal battery of 7SJ64 is switched off automatically by the clock module when the device has been disconnected from the auxiliary voltage for a period of 1 to 2 days meaning that clock management will be discontinued. The memory containing the messages and fault data is however preserved. Memory Components The working memory (RAM) is tested when the system is started up. If a malfunction occurs then, the starting sequence is interrupted and an LED blinks. During operation, the memory is checked using its checksum. For the program memory, the cross sum is formed periodically and compared to the stored program cross sum. For the settings memory, the cross sum is formed periodically and compared to the cross sum that is freshly generated each time the setting process takes place. If a malfunction occurs, the processor system is restarted.

140

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Monitoring Functions

Probing

Probing and the synchronization between the internal buffer components are constantly monitored. If any deviations cannot be removed by renewed synchronization, then the processor system is restarted. Up to four input currents are measured by the device. Three of the currents correspond to phase currents and the fourth current corresponds to the neutral or ground current measured from a separate current transformer. If all four currents inputs are connected, their digitized sum must be zero. Faults in the current circuit are recognized if IF = |ia+ib+ic+(kNig) | > S I THRESHOLD IN + S I FACTOR Imax The factor kN takes into account a possible difference in the neutral current transformer ratio (e.g. toroidal current transformer see addresses 0217, 0218, 0204 and 0205): Ignd-CT PRIM Ignd-CT SEC k N = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------CT PRIMARY CT SECONDARY

Measurement Value Collection Currents

S I THRESHOLD and S I FACTOR are programmable settings. The component S I FACTOR Imax takes into account the allowable error of the input transformer, which can be especially large when high fault current levels are present (Figure 2-47). The dropout ratio is about 97%. This malfunction is reported as Failure S I.

IF IN
Increase:

I FACTOR

I THRESHOLD

Imax IN Figure 2-47 Current Sum Monitoring

2.10.1.2 Software Monitoring Watchdog For continuous monitoring of the program sequences, a time monitor is provided in the hardware (hardware watchdog) that runs upon failure of the processor or an internal program, and causes a complete restart of the processor system.

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

141

Functions

An additional software watchdog ensures that malfunctions during the processing of programs are discovered. This also initiates a restart of the processor system. To the extent such a malfunction is not cleared by the restart, an additional restart attempt is begun. After three unsuccessful restarts within a 30 second window of time, the device automatically removes itself from service and the red Error LED lights up. The readiness relay opens and indicates device malfunction with its normal contact.

2.10.1.3 Monitoring of External Current Transformer Circuits Interruptions or short circuits in the secondary circuits of the current transformers or voltage transformers, as well as faults in the connections (important for start-up!), are detected and reported by the device. The measured quantities are periodically checked in the background for this purpose, as long as no system fault is present. Current Symmetry During normal system operation (i.e. the absence of a short-circuit fault), symmetry among the input currents is expected. This symmetry is checked by the device, using a quantity monitor. The smallest phase current is compared to the largest phase current, and asymmetry is recognized if: |Imin|/|Imax| < BAL. FACTOR I, as long as Imax /IN > BALANCE I LIMIT / IN where Imax is the largest of the three phase currents and Imin is the smallest. The symmetry factor BAL. FACTOR I represents the allowable asymmetry of the phase currents while the limit value BALANCE I LIMIT is the lower limit of the operating range of this monitoring (see Figure 2-48). Both settings are adjustable, and the dropout ratio is about 97 %. This malfunction is reported as Fail I balance.

Imin IN

Increase:

BAL.FACTOR I

BALANCE I LIMIT

Imax IN

Figure 2-48

current Symmetry Monitoring

Voltage Symmetry

During normal system operation (i.e. the absence of a short-circuit fault), symmetry among the input voltages is expected. Because the phase-to-phase voltages are insensitive to ground connections, the phase-to-phase voltages are used for the symmetry monitoring. If the device is connected to the phase-to-ground voltages, then the phase-to-phase voltages are calculated accordingly, whereas if the device is connected to phase-to-phase voltages and the displacement voltage, then the third phase-tophase voltage is calculated accordingly. From the phase-to-phase voltages, the small-

142

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Monitoring Functions

est and largest phase-to-ground voltages are calculated and compared to check for symmetry. Asymmetry is recognized if: |Vmin|/|Vmax| < BAL. FACTOR V, as long as |Vmax| > BALANCE V-LIMIT where Vmax is the largest of the three phase-to-ground voltages and Vmin is the smallest. The symmetry factor BAL. FACTOR V is the measure for the asymmetry of the conductor voltages; the limit value BALANCE V-LIMIT is the lower limit of the operating range of this monitoring (see Figure 2-49). Both settings are adjustable. The dropout ratio is about 97 %. This malfunction is reported as Fail V balance.

vmin V

Increase:

BAL.FACTOR V

BALANCE VLIMIT

Vmax V

Figure 2-49

Voltage Symmetry Monitoring

Current and Voltage Rotation

To detect swapped phase connections in the voltage and current input circuits, the phase sequence of the phase-to-phase measured voltages and the phase currents are checked by the monitoring. Direction measurement with normal voltages, path selection for fault location, and negative sequence detection all assume a phase sequence of abc. The phase sequence of the phase-to-ground voltages is verified by ensuring the following Va leads Vb leads Vc leads Va Likewise, the phase sequence of the phase currents is verified by ensuring the following Ia leads Ib leads Ic leads Ia Verification of the voltage rotation occurs when each measured voltage is at least | Vc |, |Vb |, | Va| > 40V / 3. Verification of the current rotation occurs when each measured current is at least |Ia|, |Ib|, |Ic| > 0.5 IN. For abnormal phase sequences, the messages Fail Ph. Seq. V or Fail Ph. Seq. I are issued, along with the switching of this message Fail Ph. Seq.. For applications in which an opposite phase sequence is expected, the protective relay should be adjusted via a binary input or a programmable setting. If the phase sequence is changed in the relay, phases b and c internal to the relay are reversed, and the positive and negative sequence currents are thereby exchanged (see also

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

143

Functions

Section 2.18). The phase- related messages, malfunction values, and measured values are not affected by this.

2.10.1.4 Description of Fuse-Failure-Monitor Single-Phase Measurement Voltage Loss or Fuse Failure Monitoring In the event of a loss of measured voltage on one phase (typically due to a short circuit or broken conductor in the voltage transformer secondary circuit), the device will falsely detect zero voltage. False detection of zero voltage can cause problems with the directional overcurrent protection and the undervoltage protection. If fuses are used instead of a secondary miniature circuit breaker with connected auxiliary contacts, then the fuse failure monitoring can detect problems in the voltage transformer secondary circuit. If phase-to-phase voltages and the displacement voltage are supplied to the system, then the fuse failure monitor is masked. Of course, supervision of the miniature circuit breaker and the fuse failure monitor can be used at the same time. If zero sequence voltage occurs, without a ground current being measured at the same time, the device concludes that an unsymmetrical fault has occurred in the voltage transformer secondary circuit. The processing of the displacement voltage processing of the sensitive ground fault detection and the undervoltage protection functions are blocked.

Note: For ungrounded systems or systems which generate small amounts of ground fault current, fuse failure monitoring must not be used!

2.10.2 Programming Settings for Measured Values Monitoring

2.10.2.1 General Measured value monitoring can be turned ON or OFF at address 8101 MEASURE. SUPERV. The fusefailure monitor can be set ON or OFF at address 5301 FUSE FAIL MON.

Note: For ungrounded systems or systems which generate small amounts of ground fault current, fuse failure monitoring must not be used!

2.10.2.2 Measured Values Monitoring The sensitivity of measured value monitor can be modified. Default values are set at the factory, which are sufficient in most cases. If especially high operating asymmetry in the currents and/or voltages is to be expected for the application, or if it becomes 144

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Monitoring Functions

apparent during operation that certain monitoring functions activate sporadically, then the setting should be less sensitive. Address 8102 BALANCE V-LIMIT determines the limit voltage (Phase-to-Phase), above which the voltage symmetry monitor is effective (see also Figure 2-49). Address 8103 BAL. FACTOR V is the associated symmetry factor; that is, the slope of the symmetry characteristic curve (Figure 2-49). Address 8104 BALANCE I LIMIT determines the limit current, above which the current symmetry monitor is effective (see also Figure 2-48). Address 8105 BAL. FACTOR I is the associated symmetry factor; that is, the slope of the symmetry characteristic curve (Figure 2-48). Address 8106 S I THRESHOLD determines the limit current, above which the current sum monitor (see Figure 2-47) is activated (absolute portion, only relative to IN). The relative portion (relative to the maximum conductor current) for activating the current sum monitor (Figure 2-47) is set at address 8107 S I FACTOR. Note: Current sum monitoring is only in effect if the ground current for the line to be protected is connected.

Note: The connections of the ground paths and their adaption factors were set when configuring the general station data. These settings must be correct for the measured values monitoring to function properly.

2.10.2.3 Fuse-Failure-Monitor

Note: The settings for the fuse failure monitor (address 5302 FUSE FAIL 3Vo) are to be selected so that reliable activation occurs if a phase voltage fails, but not such that false activation occurs during ground faults in a grounded network. The value entered at address 5302 should be based on the settings entered in P.SYSTEM DATA1 regarding the voltage transformer connections. Address 5303 FUSE FAIL RESID must be set below the smallest anticipated ground fault current. Fuse failure monitoring can be turned off completely at address 5301 FUSE FAIL MON..

2.10.2.4 Settings for Measured Values Monitoring In the list below, the setting ranges and default setting values for current-based settings are for a device with a nominal current rating IN = 1 A. For a nominal current rating IN = 5 A, multiply the Setting Options values and Default Setting values by 5. Consider the current transformer ratios when setting the device with primary values.

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

145

Functions

Addr. 8101 5301 8102 8103 8104 8105 8106 8107 5302 5303

Setting Title MEASURE. SUPERV FUSE FAIL MON. BALANCE V-LIMIT BAL. FACTOR V BALANCE I LIMIT BAL. FACTOR I I THRESHOLD I FACTOR FUSE FAIL 3Vo FUSE FAIL RESID OFF ON ON OFF

Setting Options

Default Setting ON OFF 50 V 0.75 0.50 A 0.50 0.10 A 0.10 30 V 0.10 A

Comments Measurement Supervision Fuse Fail Monitor Voltage Threshold for Balance Monitoring Balance Factor for Voltage Monitor Current Threshold for Balance Monitoring Balance Factor for Current Monitor Summated Current Monitoring Threshold Summated Current Monitoring Factor Zero Sequence Voltage Residual Current

10..100 V 0.58..0.90 0.10..1.00 A 0.10..0.90 0.05..2.00 A; 0.00..0.95 10..100 V 0.10..1.00 A

2.10.2.5 Information List for Measured Values Monitoring

F.No. 00162 Failure I 00163 Fail I balance 00167 Fail V balance 00161 Fail I Superv. 00171 Fail Ph. Seq. 00176 Fail Ph. Seq. V 00175 Fail Ph. Seq. I 00197 MeasSup OFF 06509 >FAIL:FEEDER VT 06510 >FAIL: BUS VT 06575 VT Fuse Failure Alarm Failure: Current Summation Failure: Current Balance Failure: Voltage Balance Failure: General Current Supervision Failure: Phase Sequence Failure: Phase Sequence Voltage Failure: Phase Sequence Current Measurement Supervision is switched OFF >Failure: Feeder VT >Failure: Busbar VT Voltage Transformer Fuse Failure Comments

146

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Monitoring Functions

2.10.3 Description of Trip Circuit Monitor (74TC)

The 7SJ62/63/64 are equipped with an integrated trip circuit monitor. Depending on the number of available binary inputs, monitoring with one or two binary inputs can be selected. If the configuration of the binary inputs needed for this does not match the selected monitoring type, then a message to this effect is sent (74TC ProgFail). When using two binary inputs, malfunctions in the trip circuit can be detected under all circuit breaker conditions. When only one binary input is used, malfunctions in the circuit breaker itself cannot be detected. Monitoring with Two Binary Inputs When using two binary inputs, these are connected according to Figure 2-50, parallel to the associated trip contact on one side, and parallel to the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts on the other. A condition for the use of trip circuit monitoring is that the control voltage for the circuit breaker is greater than the sum of the minimum voltage drops of both binary inputs (VSt > 2 VBImin). Since at least 19 V are needed for each binary input, the monitor can only be used with a system control voltage of over 38 V.

V+

VSt VBI1 7SJ62/63/64

7SJ62/63/64
F# 06852 >74TC trip rel. F# 06853 >74TC brk rel.

RTC

Legend:

VBI2 52TC

52

52a

52b

RTC 52 52TC 52a 52b VSt VBI1 VBI2

Trip Contact Circuit Breaker Circuit Breaker Trip Coil Circuit Breaker Auxiliary Contact (closed when 52 is closed) Circuit Breaker Auxiliary Contact (closed when 52 is open) Control Voltage Input Voltage for 1st Binary Input Input Voltage for 2nd Binary Input

Note: The above diagram refers to a closed circuit breaker position

Figure 2-50

Principle of Trip Circuit Monitor with Two Binary Inputs

Monitoring with binary inputs not only detects interruptions in the trip circuit and loss of control voltage, it also monitors the response of the circuit breaker using the position of the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts. Depending on the conditions of the trip contact and the circuit breaker, the binary inputs are activated (logical condition H in Table 2-10), or not activated (logical condition L). Even for healthy trip circuits the condition that both binary inputs are not actuated (L) is possible during a short transition period (trip contact is closed, but the circuit breaker has not yet opened.) A continuous state of this condition is only possible when the trip circuit has been interrupted, a short-circuit exists in the trip circuit, a loss of battery voltage occurs, or malfunctions occur with the circuit breaker mechanism.

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

147

Functions

Table 2-10 No.

Condition Table for Binary Inputs, Depending on RTC and CB Position Circuit Breaker 52a Contact 52b Contact BI 1 BI2

Relay Trip Contact

1 2

Open Open

Closed Open Closed Open

1)

Closed Open Closed Open

Open Closed Open Closed

H H L L

L H L H

3 1) Closed 4 1) Closed

Trip Circuit is faulty

The conditions of the two binary inputs are checked periodically. A check takes place about every 600 ms. If three consecutive conditional checks detect an abnormality (after 1.8 s), an annunciation is reported (see Figure 2-51). This is used to avoid the annunciation for brief transition periods. When the fault in the trip circuit has been cleared, the annunciation is automatically reset.

F# 06852

>74TC trip rel.

F# 06853

F# 06865

&

> n

FAIL: Trip cir.

>74TC brk rel.

n . ..... Number of Condition Checks (= 3) (Measurement Repetition Occurs every 600 ms)

Figure 2-51

Logic Diagram for Trip Circuit Monitoring with Two Binary Inputs

Monitoring with One Binary Input

The binary input is connected according to figure 2-52 in parallel with the associated trip contact. The circuit breaker auxiliary contact 52-b is connected in series with a high-ohm resistor R. The control voltage for the circuit breaker should be about two times the value of the minimum voltage drop at the binary input (VSt > 2 VBImin). Since the minimum voltage to activate a binary input is 19 V, a DC voltage supply of 38 V or higher is required.

148

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Monitoring Functions

V+

VSt VBI 7SJ62/63/64

7SJ62/63/64
F# 06852 >74TC trip rel.

RTC
Legend: RTC 52 52TC 52a 52b Trip Contact Circuit Breaker Circuit Breaker Trip Coil Circuit Breaker Auxiliary Contact (closed when 52 is closed) Circuit Breaker Auxiliary Contact (closed when 52 is open) Control Voltage Input Voltage for Binary Input

R
52TC 52a 52b

52

VSt VBI

V
Figure 2-52

Note: The above diagram refers to a closed circuit breaker position

Principle of Trip Circuit Monitoring with One Binary Input

During normal operation, the binary input is activated (logical condition H) when the trip contact is open and the trip circuit is intact, because the monitoring circuit is closed by either the 52a circuit breaker auxiliary contact (if the circuit breaker is closed) or through the replacement resistor R by the 52b circuit breaker auxiliary contact. Only as long as the trip contact is closed, the binary input is short circuited and thereby deactivated (logical condition L). If the binary input is continuously de-activated during operation, this leads to the conclusion, there is an interruption in the trip circuit or loss of control voltage. The trip circuit monitor does not operate during system faults. A momentary closed tripping contact does not lead to a failure message. If, however, tripping contacts from other devices operate in parallel with the trip circuit, then the failure annunciation must be delayed (see also Figure 2-53). The conditions of the binary input are, therefore, checked 500 times before an annunciation is sent. A condition check takes place about every 600 ms, so trip circuit monitoring is only activated during an actual malfunction of the trip circuit (after 300 s). After the malfunction in the trip circuit is cleared, the failure annunciation is reset automatically.
F# 06852

>74TC trip rel. 52a Contact

&

F# 06865

> n

FAIL: Trip cir.

n.. .....Number of Condition Checks (= 500) (Measurement Repetition Occurs every 600 ms)

Figure 2-53

Logic Diagram for Trip Circuit Monitoring with One Binary Input

Figure 2-54 shows the logic diagram for the message that can be generated by the trip circuit monitor, depending on the control settings and binary inputs.

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

149

Functions

0182 74 Trip Ct Supv Disabled

1

2 Binary Inputs 1 Binary Input

or
&
F# 06864

F#. 06852

&
Configured

74TC ProgFail

>74TC trip rel.

F# 06853

&
Configured

>74TC brk rel.

F# 06861

8201 FCT 74TC OFF

1 S R Q

74TC OFF
F# 06865

&

Function

FAIL: Trip cir.

F# 06863

ON

74TC ACTIVE
F# 06851 F# 06862

>BLOCK 74TC

74TC BLOCKED

Figure 2-54

Message Logic for the Trip Circuit Monitor

2.10.4 Programming Settings for Trip Circuit Monitor

Trip circuit monitoring is only in effect and accessible if address 0182 was set to either 2 Binary Inputs or to 1 Binary Input, and the appropriate number of binary inputs have been masked for this purpose (refer Subsection 2.1.1). Trip circuit monitoring can be turned ON and OFF at address 8201 FCT 74TC. If the masking of the required binary inputs does not match the selected monitoring type, then a message to this effect is generated (74TC ProgFail). If the trip circuit monitor is not to be used at all, then address 0182 should be set to Disabled. Further settings are not needed. The message of a trip circuit interruption is delayed by a fixed amount of time. For two binary inputs, the delay is about 2 seconds, and for one binary input, the delay is about 300 s. This ensures that, for the longest possible duration of a trip signal, a false malfunction message will not be generated. Monitoring with One Binary Input NOTE: When using only one binary input (BI) for the trip circuit monitor, some malfunctions, such as interruption of the trip circuit or loss of battery voltage, can indeed be detected, but malfunctions with closed trip contacts cannot. Therefore, the measurement must take place over a period of time that bridges the longest possible duration of a closed trip contact. This is ensured by the fixed number of measurement repetitions and the time between the condition checks. When using only one binary input, a resistor R is inserted into the circuit on the system side, instead of the missing second binary input. Through appropriate sizing of the resistor and depending on the system relationship, a lower control voltage can often be sufficient. The resistor R is inserted into the circuit of the 52b circuit breaker auxiliary contact, to facilitate the detection of a malfunction when the 52a circuit breaker auxiliary contact open and the trip contact has dropped out (see Figure 2-52). This resistor must be sized such that the circuit breaker trip coil is no longer energized when the 150

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Monitoring Functions

circuit breaker is open (which means 52a is open and 52b is closed). The binary input should still be picked up when the trip contact is simultaneously opened. This results in an upper limit for the resistance dimension, Rmax, and a lower limit Rmin, from which the optimal value of the arithmetic mean should be selected: R max + R min R = --------------------------------2 In order that the minimum voltage for controlling the binary input is ensured, Rmax is derived as: V St V BI min R max = -------------------------------- R CBTC I BI (High) So the circuit breaker trip coil does not remain energized in the above case, Rmin is derived as: V St V CBTC (LOW) R min = R CBTC ------------------------------------------------ V CBTC (LOW)
IBI (HIGH) VBI min Constant Current with BI on Minimum Control Voltage for BI (=19 V for delivery setting for nominal voltage of 24/ 48/60 V; =88 V for delivery setting for nominal voltage of 110/125/220/250 V) Control Voltage for Trip Circuit DC Resistance of Circuit Breaker Trip Coil

VST RCBTC

VCBTC (LOW) Maximum Voltage on the Circuit Breaker Trip Coil that does not lead to Tripping

If the calculation results that Rmax < Rmin, then the calculation must be repeated, with the next lowest pickup threshold VBI min, and this threshold must be implemented in the device using plug-in bridges (see Subsection 8.1.3). For the power consumption of the resistance: 2 V St 2 P R = I R = --------------------------- R R + R CBTC Example:
IBI (HIGH) UBI min 1.8 mA (from SIPROTEC 7SJ62/63/64) 19 V for delivery setting for nominal voltage 24/48/60 V (from SIPROTEC7SJ62/63/64) 88 V or delivery setting for nominal voltage 110/125/220/250 V) (from SIPROTEC 7SJ62/ 63/64) VST RCBTC 110 V (from system / release circuit) 500 (from system / release circuit)

VCBTC (LOW) 2 V (from system / release circuit)

110 V 19 V R max = --------------------------------- 500 = 50.1 k 1.8 mA 110 V 2 V R min = 500 ----------------------------- = 27 k 2V

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

151

Functions

R max + R min R = ------------------------------- = 38.6 k 2 The closest standard value of 39 k is selected; the power is: 2 110 V P R = --------------------------------------- 39 k 39 k + 0.5 k P R 0.3 W

2.10.4.1 Setting for Trip Circuit Monitor

Addr. 8201 Setting Title FCT 74TC ON OFF Setting Options Default Setting ON Comments 74TC TRIP Circuit Supervision

2.10.4.2 Information
F.No. 06851 >BLOCK 74TC 06853 >74TC brk rel. 06852 >74TC trip rel. 06861 74TC OFF 06862 74TC BLOCKED 06863 74TC ACTIVE 06864 74TC ProgFail 06865 FAIL: Trip cir. Alarm >BLOCK 74TC >74TC Trip circuit superv.: bkr relay >74TC Trip circuit superv.: trip relay 74TC Trip circuit supervision OFF 74TC Trip circuit supervision is BLOCKED 74TC Trip circuit supervision is ACTIVE 74TC blocked. Bin. input is not set 74TC Failure Trip Circuit Comments

2.10.5 Malfunction Responses of the Monitoring Functions

Depending on the type of malfunction discovered, an annunciation is sent, a restart of the processor system is initiated, or the device is taken out of service. after three unsuccessful restart attempts. The live status contact operates to indicate the device is malfunctioning. Also, the red LED ERROR lights up on the front cover, if the internal auxiliary voltage is present, and the green RUN LED goes out. If the internal power supply fails, then all LEDs are dark. Table 2-11 shows a summary of the monitoring functions and the malfunction responses of the relay.

152

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Monitoring Functions

.
Table 2-11

Summary of the Device Malfunction Responses

Possible Cause Malfunction Response Message Output

Monitoring

AC/DC Supply Voltage Loss Internal Supply Voltages

External (aux. Voltage) Internal (power supply) Internal (power supply) Ribbon cable disconnected Internal battery discharged Internal (processor failure) Internal (program sequence) Internal (Hardware)

Device shutdown

All LEDs dark

Live status contact de-energized Live status contact de-energized2)

Device shutdown

LED ERROR

Battery

Annunciation

Fail Battery
(FNo. 00177)

Hardware Watchdog Software Watchdog ROM

Restart attempt 1)

LED ERROR

Live status contact de-energized2) Live status contact de-energized2) Live status contact de-energized2)

Restart attempt 1)

LED ERROR

Restart attempt 1)

LED ERROR

RAM

Internal (Hardware)

Detection during boot sequence Detection during operation: Restart attempt 1)

LED blinks Live status contact de-energized2) LED ERROR

Settings

Internal (Hardware)

Restart attempt 1)

LED ERROR

Live status contact de-energized2) Live status contact de-energized2)

as masked

Analogue data acquisition Current Summation Current Symmetry Voltage Symmetry

1 2

Internal (Hardware)

Device shutdown

LED ERROR

CT Error)

Message

Failure S I
(FNo. 00162)

CT Error

Message

Fail I balance (FNo. 00163)

as masked

VT Error

Message

Fail Ph. Seq. V as masked (FNo. 00167)

) After three unsuccessful restart attempts, the device will go out of service. ) Protection and control function are blocked, HMI might be still accessible.

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

153

Functions

Table 2-11

Summary of the Device Malfunction Responses

Possible Cause Malfunction Response Message Message Fail V balance (FNo. 00176) Output

Monitoring

Voltage Phase Sequence Current Phase Sequence FuseFailure Monitor Trip Circuit Monitoring
1) 2

External (connections or power system) External (connections or power system) External (VTs, fuses, or control cable) External (open trip coil or blown fuses)

as masked

Message

Fail Ph. Seq. I as masked (FNo. 00175) VT Fuse Failure as masked (FNo. 06575) FAIL: Trip cir. as masked (FNo. 06865)

Message

Message

After three unsuccessful restart attempts, the device will go out of service. ) Protection and control function are blocked, HMI might be still accessible.

2.10.6 Group Alarms

Certain messages of the monitoring functions are already combined to group alarms. Table 2-12 shows an overview of these group alarms an their composition.
Table 2-12 Group alarms Group alarm Designation Fail I Superv. Alarm Sum Event Composed of Designation Failure S I Fail I balance Failure S I Fail I balance Fail V balance Fail Ph. Seq. I Fail Ph. Seq. V Fail Ph. Seq. I/O-BG gestrt Strung BG 1 .. 7 Error 5V Error 0V Error -5V Error PwrSupply Fail Battery

FNo 161 160

FNo 0162 0163 0162 0163 0167 0175 0176 0171 0178 0183 .. 0189 0144 0145 0146 0147 0177

140

Error Sum Alarm

154

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Sensitive Ground Fault Detection (64, 50Ns, 67Ns)

2.11
General

Sensitive Ground Fault Detection (64, 50Ns, 67Ns)

Sensitive ground fault detection may be used in isolated or compensated systems to detect ground faults. In solidly or low-resistance grounded systems, sensitive ground fault detection is used to detect high impedance ground faults. For this protection function, the relays fourth current input must be equipped with a sensitive input transformer (see Ordering Data in Annex A.1). Because of its high sensitivity, ground fault detection is not suited for detection of high magnitude ground faults (over about 1.6 A at the sensitive ground fault detection relay terminals). The directional and non-directional overcurrent protection functions are preferred for this application (Sections 2.2 and ).

2.11.1 Description of Sensitive Ground Fault Detection

2.11.1.1 Voltage Element The voltage element of sensitive ground fault detection relies on the zero sequence or displacement voltage V0 or 3V0. Additionally the faulty phase is determined. The displacement voltage V0 can be directly applied to the device, or the summary voltage 3V0 can be calculated by the device based on the three phase-to-ground voltages. In the latter case, the three voltage inputs must be connected to voltage transformers in a grounded-wye configuration (see Subsection 2.1.3, address 0213 VT Connection). If the device is only with phase-to-phase voltages, it is not possible to calculate a displacement voltage from them. In this case the direction cannot be determined. If the displacement voltage is directly applied to the device, then V0 is the voltage at the device terminals. It is not affected by the voltage adjustment factor set at address 0206A Vph / Vdelta. If the displacement voltage is calculated, then: 3V0 = Va + Vb + Vc The displacement voltage is used both to detect a ground fault and to determine direction, in accordance with Subsection 2.11.1.3. When the voltage element pickups, a preset time delay must elapse before detection of the displacement voltage is reported. This time delay is preset at the factory to 1 second and may be modified at address 3111 T-DELAY Pickup. After the time delay set at address 3111 has elapsed, a second time interval may be started, after which the voltage element may initiate a trip signal. This second time interval is set at address 3112 64-1 DELAY. It is important to reiterate that the total tripping time consists of the displacement voltage measurement time (about 60 ms) plus the Pickup Time delay (set at address 3111) plus the tripping delay (set at address 3112). Determination of the Grounded Phase After the voltage element pickups due to detection of a displacement voltage, the grounded phase is identified, if possible. To do this, the individual phase-to-ground voltages are measured. Of course, this is only possible if three phase-to-ground voltages are obtained from voltage transformers connected in a grounded-wye configuration. If the voltage magnitude for any given phase is below the setting value entered

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

155

Functions

at address 3106 VPH MIN, that phase is detected as the grounded phase as long as the voltage magnitudes of the other two phases are simultaneously above the setting value entered at address 3107 VPH MAX. Figure 2-55 shows the logic for determining the grounded phase.

3106 VPH MIN

3107 VPH MAX

V< Va Vb

V>
V<
F# 01272 Sens. Gnd Ph A F# 01273 Sens. Gnd Ph B F# 01274 Sens. Gnd Ph C

&
V> V< V>

&

Vc
From Figure 2-59

V< V>
Ground fault

&

Figure 2-55

Detection of the grounded phase

2.11.1.2 Current Elements The current elements associated with sensitive ground fault detection typically operate for low magnitudes of zero sequence current. They are typically applied in systems where ground fault currents are limited by neutral resistors. There are two current elements used for sensitive ground fault protection. A definite time element similar to the 50N-2 or 67N-2 elements is used, as well as an element that may be operated with either a fixed time delay (similar to the 50N-1 and 67N-1 elements) or with a user defined curve (similar to the 51N and 67N-TOC elements). Each of the elements may be directional or non-directional.

2.11.1.3 Determination of Direction Curves When determining the sensitive ground fault direction it is not the current value that is crucial but the part of the current which is perpendicular to a settable directional characteristic (axis of symmetry). As a prerequisite for determining the direction, the displacement voltage V0 must be exceeded as well as a configurable current part influencing the direction (active or reactive component). Figure 2-56 illustrates the directional characteristic of the sensitive ground fault detection function using a complex vector diagram in which the displacement voltage V0 is the reference magnitude. Address 3125 is set to COS PHI, therefore, the current 3I0real is calculated and compared with the value set at address 3123 RELEASE DIRECT.. The directional limit lines are perpendicular to 3I0real.

156

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Sensitive Ground Fault Detection (64, 50Ns, 67Ns)

TYPE OFSMEASUREMENTC=O COS P H I MES ART = S PHI

V0 U E 3I0Real (resistive)

Forward

3I0dirG E R . { I3I0 IE E 3I0reactive (capacitive)

EE

Setting

Reverse

O P PHI CORRECTIONK = 0.0 = 0 , 0 HI KORRE TUR Figure 2-56 Directional Lines for cos- Measurement

3I0 dir. = Value Set at Address 3123

The directional limit lines may be rotated by a correction angle set at address 3124 PHI CORRECTION up to 45. Therefore, it is possible to increase sensitivity in the resistive-inductive range with a rotation of 45, or in the resistive-capacitive range with a rotation of +45 (see Figure 2-57). If the sin- method is used, the directional limit lines would be rotated by 90. If address 3124 PHI CORRECTION is set other than 0, the angle of the directional limit line is determined from the sum of the real and reactive components of zero sequence power.

TYPE S S AR T = co s COS I M E OF MEASUREMENT = P H PHI 3I0realV0 w I EE

U E

TYPE E S S AR T = c o= COS HI M OF MEASUREMENT s P PHI 3I0real V0

I EE UE w

Forward
3I0dir IE E
GER
IE E 3I0dir G ER

Forward
3I0 I EE

3I0reactive (capacitive) I EE (kapa itiv) z b

}
IE E 3I0

Inductive

in u d ktiv

3I0I EEb (kapazitiv) reactive (capacitive)

Inductive in u d ktiv

Reverse

Reverse

P H I K O R R E K T U R = +4 5 , 0
Figure 2-57

PHI CORRECTION = +45.0

PHI K ORR EKT UR= -4 5,0

PHI CORRECTION = -45.0

3I0 dir. = Value Set at Address IEE GER = Einstellwert FREIGABE RICHT.3123

Directional Lines for cos- Measurement

Method of Directional Measurement

The calculation algorithm filters the measured values so that it is highly accurate and insensitive to higher harmonics (particularly the 3rd and 5th harmonics which are often present in zero sequence currents). Both the zero sequence or displacement voltage (V0 or 3V0) and the zero sequence current (3I0) are used to determine direction to a fault or grounded connection. Before the determination of direction is initiated, the voltage element (and possibly the current element) must be picked up and a programmable component of 3I0 must exceed a programmable setting (address 3123 RELEASE DIRECT.). The programmable com157

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Functions

ponent of 3I0 compared to address 3123 depends on the setting at address 3125 MEAS. METHOD. Address 3125 establishes the directional measurement method that will be used. If address 3125 is set to COS j, then the component of 3I0 that is in phase with the displacement voltage is compared to the setting at address 3123. This current is designated 3I0real, and if larger than the setting at address 3123, directional determination is initiated. Once directional determination is initiated, the current 3I0real and the displacement voltage V0 (or 3V0) are used to calculate the real component of the zero sequence power supplied to the fault. Both in a grounded system and in an ungrounded system, a ground fault actually supplies zero sequence real power to the rest of the system. Therefore, if the calculated zero sequence real power supplied to the fault is negative (P0<0), the fault is considered in the direction of the protected equipment (forward direction). If the calculated zero sequence real power supplied to the fault is positive (P0>0), then the fault is considered to be in the opposite direction (reverse direction). This method is typically used to determine the direction of high impedance faults in a grounded system. If address 3125 is set to SIN j, then the component of 3I0 that is 90 out of phase with the displacement voltage is compared to the setting at address 3123. This current is designated 3I0 reactive, and if larger than the setting at address 3123, directional determination is initiated. Once directional determination is initiated, the current 3I0reactive and the displacement voltage V0 (or 3V0) are used to calculate the reactive component of the zero sequence power supplied to the fault. Both in a grounded system and in an ungrounded system, a ground fault actually supplies zero sequence reactive power to the rest of the system. Therefore, if the calculated zero sequence reactive power supplied to the fault is negative (Q0 <0), the fault is considered in the direction of the protected equipment (forward direction). If the calculated zero sequence reactive power supplied to the fault is positive (Q0 >0), then the fault is considered to be in the opposite direction (reverse direction). This method it typically used to determine the direction of ground connections in an ungrounded system. Implementation Instructions In an ungrounded system, the reactive component of the current should be used to determine the direction. In a grounded system, the real component of the current should be used to determine the direction. Therefore, in an ungrounded system, address 3125 should be set for SIN j measurement whereas in a grounded system, address 3125 should be set for COS j measurement. Figure 2-58 illustrates the condition logic for the sensitive ground fault pickup. Ground fault pickup may be switched ON or OFF, or into Alarm Only condition at address 3101 Sens. Gnd Fault. When ground fault protection is ON, tripping is possible. In mode Alarm Only ground faults are recorded in a separate log file for ground faults. The pickup of the displacement voltage V0 starts the ground fault recording. As the pickup of the V0 stage drops out, fault recording is terminated. The entire function may be blocked via a binary input. Switching off or blocking means the measurement logic (shown in Figure 2-59) is deactivated, therefore, time delays and messages are reset. All stages can be blocked individually via binary inputs. In this case pickups as well as direction and grounded phase will still be reported, however, tripping does not take place since the time stages are blocked.

Logic

158

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Sensitive Ground Fault Detection (64, 50Ns, 67Ns)

F# 01207

>BLK 50Ns/67Ns
3101 Sens. Gnd Fault

F# 01230 Sens. Gnd block

Alarm Only ON OFF

Alarm Only

or

Reset Measurement Logic F# 01211

to Figure 2-59

50Ns/67Ns OFF
F# 01212 50Ns/67Ns ACT

&

Figure 2-58

Activation of Sensitive Ground Fault Detection

Generation of a tripping message, for both current elements, is dependent on the direction selection for each element. If the element is set to non-directional and parameter PU CRITERIA = Vgnd OR INs, a pickup message is generated as soon as the current threshold is exceeded, irrespective of the status of the V0 stage. If, however, the setting of parameter PU CRITERIA is Vgnd AND INs, the V0 stage must have picked up also for non-directional mode. But, if a direction is programmed, the current element must be picked up and the direction determination results must be present to generate a message. Once again, a condition for valid direction determination is that the voltage element be picked up as well. Based on the setting at address 3130 PU CRITERIA, the generation of a fault condition message can be dependent on either the pickup of both the voltage and current elements (AND function), or a pickup of at least one of those two elements (OR function). The former may be advantageous if the pickup setting of the voltage element was chosen to be very low.

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

159

Functions

3130 PU CRITERIA

Vgnd AND INs Vgnd OR INs

Ground fault

V0-Element

3111 T-DELAY Pickup

T 0

To Figure 2-55
F# 01215 64 Pickup

&

V0
3115 67Ns-2 DIRECT. Non-Directional
1

V0 >

or

3112 64-1 DELAY

Forward/ Reverse

or
=

&

F# 01217 64 TRIP

3122 67Ns-1 DIRECT. Forward/ Reverse

1

Direction Determination

3126 RESET DELAY F# 01276 SensGnd Forward T 0

F# 01277 SensGnd Reverse

Non-Directional

or or

F# 01278 SensGnd undef. F# 01221 50Ns-2 Pickup 3114 50Ns-2 DELAY

50Ns-2

INS
0131 Sens. Gnd Fault Definite Time User Defined PU

50Ns-2 50Ns-1 50Ns-1 51Ns

&

& &
T 0

F# 01223 50Ns-2 TRIP F# 01224 50Ns-1 Pickup

& &

&

3118 50Ns-1 DELAY

&

&

F# 01226 50Ns-1 TRIP F# 01227 51Ns Pickup

3120 51Ns TIME DIAL

&

F# 01229 51Ns TRIP

Measurement Logic
F# 01201 >BLOCK 64 F# 01202 >BLOCK 50Ns-2 F# 01203 >BLOCK 50Ns-1 F# 01204 >BLOCK 51Ns

From Figure 2-58 Figure 2-59

Alarm Only Reset Measuring Device

Logic Diagram for Sensitive Ground Fault Detection

2.11.1.4 Location of Ground Connections Application Example Directional determination may often be used to locate a grounded connection. In radial systems, locating the ground connection is relatively simple. Since all feeders from a

160

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Sensitive Ground Fault Detection (64, 50Ns, 67Ns)

common bus (Figure 2-60) deliver a capacitive charging current, practically the same ground connection current is available at the relay location of a faulted feeder in an ungrounded system. In a looped system, the relay locations of the faulted line receive the maximum ground connection current. Forward is reported at both ends only for the faulted line (Figure 2-61), However, the other directional indicators in the system may also be of help, if not missing due to insufficient ground current.

Figure 2-60

Location of a Ground Fault in a Radial System

Figure 2-61

Location of Ground Connection based on Direction Indicators in a Looped System

2.11.2 Programming Settings

2.11.2.1 General Settings During configuration of protective functions, address 0131 Sens. Gnd Fault should be set to Definite Time if the inverse characteristic is not required, User Defined PU if both a definite time and inverse time characteristic are required, and Disabled if the function is not required at all. Also, during configuration, address 0213 VT Connection determines how the voltage transformers are connected (phase-to-ground or phase-to-phase), and addresses

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

161

Functions

0206A Vph / Vdelta, 0217 and 0218 (primary and secondary rated transformer current in the ground path) must be set correctly. Sensitive ground fault detection may be switched ON, OFF, or to Alarm Only, at address 3101 Sens. Gnd Fault. If sensitive ground fault protection is switched ON, both tripping and message reporting is possible. The ground fault is detected and reported only when the displacement voltage has applied for at least the time T-DELAY Pickup (address 3111). Address 3130 PU CRITERIA specifies whether ground fault detection is enabled only for pickups of V0 and INs (Vgnd AND INs) or as soon as one of the two have picked up (Vgnd OR INs). Current Elements, General The two time-overcurrent elements are set at addresses 3113 through 3120. Each of these elements may be directional or non-directional. These elements operate from the zero sequence current. They typically operate, therefore, only in grounded systems (solid or low resistance), or for motors connected to an ungrounded bus where the entire system capacitance supplies zero sequence current to the motor ground connection, but the ground current in the ground connection is insignificant because of the low motor capacitance.

2.11.2.2 Definite Current Stage (50Ns-2, 50Ns-1) 50Ns2 Element The 50Ns-2 element pickup and delay settings are entered at addresses 3113 50Ns2 PICKUP and 3114 50Ns-2 DELAY respectively. Pickup and time out of the 50Ns2 element can result just in the generation of a message, or in both the generation of a message and tripping. The latter is only possible if address 3101 is set to ON. If configured as Definite Time at address 0131, the 50Ns-1 element will be enabled. The pickup and delay settings for the 50Ns-1 element are at addresses 3117 50Ns-1 PICKUP and 3118 50Ns-1 DELAY respectively.

50Ns-1 / 51Ns Element

2.11.2.3 Inverse Current Stage (51Ns) 51Ns Element The inverse tripping characteristic 51Ns is mainly determined by addresses 3119 and 3120 (address 0131 Sens. Gnd Fault = User Defined PU). If a user defined curve is configured at address 0131, it should be noted that the device will not necessarily pickup until the current exceeds 110 % of the pickup value, as is standard for inverse curves. Entry of the value pair (current and time) is a multiple of the settings at addresses 3119 51Ns PICKUP and 3120 51Ns TIME DIAL. Therefore, it is recommended that addresses be initially set to 1.00 for simplicity. Once the curve has been entered, the settings at addresses 3119 and 3120 can be modified if desired. As delivered, The default settings for all current values is . They are, therefore, not enabled and no pickup or tripping of these protective functions will occur. Up to 20 pairs of values (current and time) may be entered at address 3131 M.of PU TD. The device then approximates the curve, using linear interpolation.

User Defined Curve

162

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Sensitive Ground Fault Detection (64, 50Ns, 67Ns)

The following must be observed: The value pairs should be entered in increasing sequence. If desired, fewer than 20 pairs may be entered. In most cases, about 10 pairs is sufficient to define the curve accurately. Each unused pair must then be marked as unused by entering as the limit value. The user must ensure the value pairs produce a clear and constant curve. The current values entered should be those from Table 2-13, along with the matching times. Other values for MofPU are changed to the nearest adjacent value although this is not indicated.
Table 2-13 Preferential Values of Standardized Currents for User Specific Tripping Characteristics MofPU = 1 to 1.94 1.00 1.06 1.13 1.19 1.25 1.31 1.38 1.44 1.50 1.56 1.63 1.69 1.75 1.81 1.88 1.94 MofPU = 2 to 4.75 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 MofPU = 5 to 7.75 5.00 5.25 5.50 5.75 6.00 6.25 6.50 6.75 7.00 7.25 7.50 7.75 MofPU = 8 to 20 8.00 9.00 10.00 11.00 12.00 13.00 14.00 15.00 16.00 17.00 18.00 19.00 20.00

Current flows less than the smallest current value entered will not lead to an extension of the tripping time. The pickup curve (see Figure 2-62) continues, from the smallest current point parallel to the current axis. Current flows greater than the highest current value entered will not lead to an abbreviation of the tripping time. The pickup curve (see Figure 2-62) continues, from the largest current point parallel to the current axis.

T/Tp

Pickup Curve

Smallest Current Point

Largest Current Point 1 1.1 20 I/Ip

Figure 2-62

Use of a User Defined Curve

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

163

Functions

2.11.2.4 Phase-to-Ground Voltage Determination of the Phase with a Ground Connection The phase connected to ground may be identified in an ungrounded system, if the device is supplied by three voltage transformers connected in a grounded-wye configuration. The phase whose voltage lies below the minimum voltage setting at address 3106 VPH MIN is identified as the phase connected to ground as long as the other two phase voltages simultaneously exceed the maximum voltage setting at address 3107 VPH MAX. The setting at address 3106 must be set less than the minimum allowable phase-to-ground voltage. A typical setting for this address would be 40 V. The maximum voltage setting at address 3107 must be greater than the minimum allowable phase-to-ground voltage, but less than the minimum phase-to-phase voltage. For VN = 100 V, approximately 75 V is a typical setting. These settings have no significance in a grounded system. The pickup due to displacement voltage is set at address 3109 64-1 VGND if V0 is measured or address 3110 64-1 VGND if 3V0 is calculated. Pickup of the voltage element is a condition for initiation of directional determination. Depending on the setting at 0213 VT Connection, only the applicable limit value at address 3109 or 3110 is accessible. That is, if two phase-to-phase voltages and the displacement voltage V0 are supplied to the device, the measured displacement voltage is used directly for ground fault recognition. The limit value for V0 is programmed at address 3109, where a more sensitive setting can be made. If three phase-to-ground voltages are connected to the device, the displacement voltage 3V0 is calculated from the three phase-toground voltages, and address 3110 is where the voltage element pickup is set. The ground connection is first detected and reported when the displacement voltage has existed for the entire time delay set at address 3111 T-DELAY Pickup. With regard to an ungrounded system, nearly the entire displacement voltage appears at the device terminals, therefore the pickup setting is not critical, and typically lies between 30 V and 60 V (address 3109) or 50 V and 100 V (address 3110). Large fault resistances may require higher sensitivity (i.e. a lower pickup setting). With regard to a grounded system, a more sensitive (lower) pickup value may be set, but it must be above the maximum anticipated displacement voltage during normal (unbalanced) system operation. Trip Time Delay Pickup of just the voltage element may initiate time delayed tripping depending on the setting at address 3130 PU CRITERIA (address 3101 Sens. Gnd Fault = ON) and moreover address 3130 PU CRITERIA is configured Vgnd OR INs. The tripping delay is then set at address 3112 64-1 DELAY. It is important to note that the total tripping time consists of the displacement voltage measurement time (about 50 ms) plus the pickup time delay (address 3111) plus the tripping time delay (address 3112).

Displacement Voltage V0 or 3V0

2.11.2.5 Direction Directional Characteristic Addresses 3115 to 3126 are for direction determination. The direction the definite high-set stage 67Ns-2 may be set at address 3115 67Ns-2 DIRECT. as Forward, Reverse or Non-Directional.

164

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Sensitive Ground Fault Detection (64, 50Ns, 67Ns)

The direction of the definite high-set stage 67Ns-1 or of the inverse characteristic may be set at address 3122 67Ns-1 DIRECT. as Forward, Reverse or Non-Directional. The current setting at address 3123 RELEASE DIRECT. supervises the initiation of directional determination, and is based on the current components which are perpendicular to the directional limit lines. The position of the directional limit lines themselves are based on the settings entered at address 3124 PHI CORRECTION and 3125 MEAS. METHOD. When address 3124 PHI CORRECTION is set to 0.0, the following apply to address 3125: Address 3125 = COS j: the real component of the zero sequence current with respect to the displacement voltage (the component of 3I0 in phase with V0 or 3V0) is evaluated by the setting at address 3123 (see Figure 2-56); Address 3125 = SIN j: the reactive (capacitive) component of the zero sequence current with respect to the displacement voltage (the component of 3I0 that leads V0 or 3V0 by 90) is evaluated by the setting at address 3123 (see Figure 2-63).

TYPE OF MEASUREMENT = SIN PHI

3I0real V0

Forward

3I0

3I0reactive (capacitive)

3I0 dir

Inductive Reverse 3I0dir= Set at Addr. 3123

PHI CORRECTION = 0,0

Figure 2-63 Directional Line for sin Measurement

The directional line, in this respect, may be rotated within the range 45 as shown in Figure 2-57. Ungrounded System In an ungrounded system, no zero sequence fault current exists, therefore, the zero sequence charging current must be used for directional determination. As is the case with the zero sequence fault current, the zero sequence charging current will also lead the zero sequence voltage for a fault in the forward direction. A setting equal to about half of this current should be selected at address 3123. The measurement time selected at address 3125 should be SIN j.

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

165

Functions

Grounded System

In a grounded system, address 3123 should be set below the minimum anticipated ground fault current. It is important to note that only the current components that are perpendicular to the directional limit lines defined at addresses 3124 and 3125 will be evaluated. COS j is the type of measurement used, and the correction angle is set to 45, since the ground fault current is typically resistive-inductive (right portion of Figure 2-57). One may set the value COS j for the measurement type and use a correction angle of +45 for electrical motors supplied from a common bus in an ungrounded system, since the ground connection current is often composed of an overlap of the capacitive ground current from the system and the resistive current of the load resistance (Figure 2-57, left section). The following is valid for determination of direction during ground faults: The minimum current for directional determination entered at address 3123 RELEASE DIRECT. must be set as high as possible so as not to be a false limit of the device during the flow of asymmetrical currents in the system. If direction determination is used in conjunction with one of the current elements discussed above (50Ns-1 PICKUP or 51Ns PICKUP), a value for address 3123 is only significant if it is less than or equal to the current element pickup value. A corresponding message (reverse, forward, or undefined) is issued upon direction determination. To avoid chatter for this message resulting from sharply-varying ground connection currents, a dropout delay RESET DELAY, entered at address 3126, is initiated when directional determination drops out, and the message is held for this period of time.

Electrical Motors

General

2.11.2.6 Current Transformer Angular Error Compensation Addresses 3102 through 3105 only apply to compensated systems which utilize Petersen coils. Since the utilization of compensated systems is primarily limited to European practices, a detailed explanation of these settings is beyond the scope of this particular instruction manual. In the rare event that this protective relay is utilized in a compensated system, the reader should contact Siemens Power T&D for more information regarding application of the 7SJ62/63/64 relay in a compensated system.

2.11.2.7 Settings for Sensitive Ground Fault Detection The current-based setting ranges and Default Setting values are independent of the nominal current rating of the device. The sensitive ground fault detection measures the current at a special, sensitive input. In general, current-based settings can be entered in primary terms with consideration given to the ratio of the applicable current transformer. However, problems related to the resolution of the pickup currents can occur when very small settings and small primary currents are involved. The user is therefore encouraged to enter settings for the sensitive ground fault detection in secondary terms.

166

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Sensitive Ground Fault Detection (64, 50Ns, 67Ns)

Addr. 3101

Setting Title Sens. Gnd Fault

Setting Options OFF ON Alarm Only 0.04..320.00 sec; Vgnd OR INs Vgnd AND INs 0.001..1.500 A 0.05..35.00 A 0.25..175.00 A

Default Setting OFF

Comments Sensitive Ground Fault

3111 3130 3113

T-DELAY Pickup PU CRITERIA 50Ns-2 PICKUP

1.00 sec Vgnd OR INs 0.300 A 10.00 A 50.00 A 1.00 sec 0.100 A 2.00 A 10.00 2.00 sec 0.100 A 1.00 A 5.00 A 1.00 sec

Time-DELAY Pickup Sensitive Ground Fault PICKUP criteria 50Ns-2 Pickup, sensitive 50Ns-2 Pickup, IEN = 1 A 50Ns-2 Pickup, IEN = 5 A 50Ns-2 Time Delay 50Ns-1 Pickup, sensitive 50Ns-1 Pickup, IEN = 1 A 50Ns-1 Pickup, IEN = 5 A 50Ns-1 Time delay 51Ns Pickup, sensitive 51Ns Pickup, IEN = 1 A 51Ns Pickup, IEN = 5 A 51Ns Time Dial Multiples of PU Time-Dial

3114 3117

50Ns-2 DELAY 50Ns-1 PICKUP

0.00..320.00 sec; 0.001..1.500 A 0.05..35.00 A 0.25..175.00 A

3118 3119

50Ns-1 DELAY 51Ns PICKUP

0.00..320.00 sec; 0.001..1.400 A 0.05..4.00 A 0.25..20.00 A

3120 3131

51Ns TIME DIAL M.of PU TD

0.10..4.00 sec; 1.00..20.00 Multiple of Pikkup; 0.01..999.00 Time Dial 10..100 V 10..100 V 1.8..130.0 V 10.0..225.0 V 0.10..40000.00 sec; Forward Reverse Non-Directional Forward Reverse Non-Directional

3106 3107 3109 3110 3112 3115

VPH MIN VPH MAX 64-1 VGND 64-1 VGND 64-1 DELAY 67Ns-2 DIRECT.

40 V 75 V 40.0 V 70.0 V 10.00 sec Forward

L-Gnd Voltage of Faulted Phase Vph Min L-Gnd Voltage of Unfaulted Phase Vph Max 64-1 Ground Displacement Voltage 64-1 Ground Displacement Voltage 64-1 Time Delay 67Ns-2 Direction

3122

67Ns-1 DIRECT.

Forward

67Ns-1 Direction

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

167

Functions

Addr. 3123

Setting Title

Setting Options

Default Setting 0.010 A 0.50 A 2.50 A 0.0 COS Phi 1 sec 0.050 A 1.00 A 5.00 A 0.0 1.000 A 10.00 A 50.00 A 0.0

Comments Release directional element , sensitive Release directional element, IEN = 1 A Release directional element, IEN = 5 A Correction Angle for Dir. Determination Measurement method for Direction Reset Delay Current I1 for CT Angle Error, sensitive Current I1 for CT Angle Error, IEN = 1 A Current I1 for CT Angle Error, IEN = 5 A CT Angle Error at I1 Current I2 for CT Angle Error, sensitive Current I2 for CT Angle Error, IEN = 1 A Current I2 for CT Angle Error, IEN = 5 A CT Angle Error at I2

RELEASE DIRECT. 0.001..1.200 A 0.05..30.00 A 0.25..150.00 A

3124 3125 3126 3102

PHI CORRECTION MEAS. METHOD RESET DELAY CT Err. I1

-45.0..45.0 COS Phi SIN phi 0..60 sec 0.001..1.600 A 0.05..35.00 A 0.25..175.00 A

3103 3104

CT Err. F1 CT Err. I2

0.0..5.0 0.001..1.600 A 0.05..35.00 A 0.25..175.00 A

3105

CT Err. F2

0.0..5.0

2.11.2.8 Information List for Sensitive Ground Fault Detection

F.No. 01201 >BLOCK 64 01202 >BLOCK 50Ns-2 01203 >BLOCK 50Ns-1 01204 >BLOCK 51Ns 01207 >BLK 50Ns/67Ns 01211 50Ns/67Ns OFF 01212 50Ns/67Ns ACT 01215 64 Pickup 01217 64 TRIP Alarm >BLOCK 64 >BLOCK 50Ns-2 >BLOCK 50Ns-1 >BLOCK 51Ns >BLOCK 50Ns/67Ns 50Ns/67Ns is OFF 50Ns/67Ns is ACTIVE 64 displacement voltage pick up 64 displacement voltage element TRIP Comments

168

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Sensitive Ground Fault Detection (64, 50Ns, 67Ns)

F.No. 01221 50Ns-2 Pickup 01223 50Ns-2 TRIP 01224 50Ns-1 Pickup 01226 50Ns-1 TRIP 01227 51Ns Pickup 01229 51Ns TRIP 01230 Sens. Gnd block 01272 Sens. Gnd Ph A 01273 Sens. Gnd Ph B 01274 Sens. Gnd Ph C

Alarm 50Ns-2 Pickup 50Ns-2 TRIP 50Ns-1 Pickup 50Ns-1 TRIP 51Ns picked up 51Ns TRIP

Comments

Sensitive ground fault detection BLOCKED Sensitive Ground fault picked up in Ph A Sensitive Ground fault picked up in Ph B Sensitive Ground fault picked up in Ph C Sensitive Gnd fault in forward direction Sensitive Gnd fault in reverse direction Sensitive Gnd fault direction undefined

01276 SensGnd Forward 01277 SensGnd Reverse 01278 SensGnd undef.

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

169

Functions

2.12
General

Intermittent Ground Fault Protection

Intermittent ground faults can occur in cables due to poor insulation or water ingress in cable joints. Often such faults disappear automatically to strike again after some time. They can last between a few milliseconds and several seconds. This is why such faults are not detected at all or not selectively by the ordinary time overcurrent protection. If pulse durations are extremely short, not all protection devices in a short-circuit path may pick up; selective tripping is thus not ensured. Due to the time delay of the overcurrent protection function such faults are too short to initiate shutdown of the faulted cable. Only when they have become permanent can such ground faults be removed selectively by the short-circuit protection. But such intermittent ground faults already bear the risk of causing thermal damage to equipment. This is why the 7SJ62/63/64 device features a protective function that is able to detect such intermittent ground faults and accumulates their duration. If within a certain time their sum reaches a configurable value, the thermal load capacity has been achieved. If the ground faults are distributed over a long period of time or if the ground fault goes off and does not re-ignite after some time, the eqiupment under load is expected to cool down. Tripping is not necessary in this case.

2.12.1 Functional Description

The intermittent ground fault can either be detected via the ground current input I4 (IN or INs) or it is calculated from the sum of the three phase currents (3I0). Unlike the overcurrent protection which uses the fundamental wave, the intermittent ground fault protection creates the r.m.s. value of this current and compares it to a configurable threshold Iie>. This method accounts for high harmonic contents (up to 400 Hz) and for the direct component since both factors contribute to the thermal load. Exceeding the threshold value Iie> initiates a pickup message (IIE Fault det, see Figure 2-64). The pickups are also counted; as soon as the counter content has reached the value of parameter Nos.det., the message Intermitt.EF is issued. A stabilized pickup is obtained by prolonging the pickup message IIE Fault det by a settable time T-det.ext. This stabilization is especially important for coordination with existing static or electromechanical relays. The duration of the stabilized pickups IIE stab.Flt is summed up in an integrator T-sum det. If the accumulated pickup time reaches a configurable threshold value, a corresponding message is generated (IEF Tsum exp.) and tripping takes place, however, only while a ground fault is present (message IEF Trip). The trip command is maintaned during the entire minimum tripping time specified for the device, even if the ground fault is of short duration. After completion of the tripping command all memories are reset and the protection resumes normal condition. The (much longer) resetting time T-reset (message IEF Tres run.) is launched simultaneously with T-sum det. when a ground fault occurs. Unlike T-sum det. each new ground fault resets this time to its initial value and it expires anew. If T-reset expires and no new ground fault is recorded during that time, all memories are reset and the protection resumes normal position. T-reset thus determines the time during which the next ground fault must occur to be processed yet as intermittent ground fault in connection with the previous fault. A ground fault that occurs later will be considered a new fault event.

170

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Intermittent Ground Fault Protection

The message IIE Fault det will be entered in the fault log and reported to the system interface only until the message Intermitt.EF is issued. This prevents a burst of messages. If the message is allocated to an LED or a relay, this limitation does not apply. This is accomplished by doubling the message (message numbers 06924, 06926). Interaction with Automatic Reclosure Automatic reclosure is not an effective measure against intermittent ground faults as the function only trips after repeated detection of a fault or after expiration of the summation monitoring time T-sum det. and besides its basic design is to prevent thermal overload. For these reasons the intermittent ground fault protection is not implemented as starting feature of the automatic reclosing function. A pickup that is present when the time delay TRIP-Timer has expired is interpreted by the breaker failure protection as a criterion for a tripping failure. Since permanent pickup is not ensured after a tripping command of the intermittent ground fault protection, cooperation with the breaker failure protection is not reasonable. Therefore, this function is not activated by the intermittent ground fault protection. Figure 2-64 shows the logic diagram of the intermittent ground fault protection.

Interaction with Breaker Failure Protection

Logic Diagram

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

171

Functions

IEF TRIP

FNo. 06932

&

Nos.IIE=
FNo. 06931

Iie/In=
FNo. 06927
3306 Nos.det.

Intermitt.EF
FNo. 06926

Counter

Reset Counter

reset

a ab b

&

IIE Fault det

(for log)

count

3302 Iie>

3303 T-det.ext.

FNo. 06925

or

IIE stab.Flt
FNo. 06924

IIE Fault det

(for LED/Relays)
3305 T-reset 3304 T-sum det.

FNo. 06928

IEF Tsum exp.

res

Integrator

Gen.Trip

or

res

or
Reset Counter
0210A TMin TRIP CMD

& &

S R

FNo. 06930

IEF Trip IEF Trip Gen. Trip

IEF Trip

FNo. 06929

IEF Tres run.

Measurement / Logic
FNo. 06903 FNo. 06922

>IEF block

IEF blocked

FNo. 06923

or
3301 INTERM.EF

or

IEF enabled
FNo. 06921

OFF
1

IEF OFF

ON

Figure 2-64

Logic diagram of the protection for intermittent ground fault Principle

Fault Logging

A fault event and thus fault logging is initated when the Interm. E/F detection stage Iie> first picks up. The message IIE Fault det is issued and entered in the fault log (and reported to the system interface) so often until the number of pickups IIE Fault det has reached the value set for parameter Nos.det.. When this happens, the message Intermitt.EF is issued and IIE Fault det is blocked for the fault log and the system interface. This method accounts for the fact that the Interm. E/F detection stage Iie> may also pick up for a normal short-circuit. In this case the pickup does not launch the alarm Intermitt.EF. Intermittent ground faults may cause other time overcurrent stages to pick up (e.g. 501, 50N-1, 50Ns-1) and produce a burst of messages. To avoid overflow of the fault log such messages are not entered anymore in the fault log after detection of an intermit-

172

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Intermittent Ground Fault Protection

tent ground fault (message Intermitt.EF) unless they cause a tripping command. If an intermittent ground fault has been detected, the following pickup messages of the time overcurrent protection will still be reported without restraint (see table 2-14):
Table 2-14 FNo. 01800 02642 07551 07552 07553 07554 07559 07560 07561 07562 07565 07566 07567 07564 Unrestricted messages Function 50-2 picked up 67-2 picked up 50-1 InRushPU 50N-1 InRushPU 51 InRushPU 51N InRushPU 67-1 InRushPU 67N-1 InRushPU 67-TOC InRushPU 67N-TOCInRushPU Ia InRush PU Ib InRush PU Ic InRush PU Gnd InRush PU Description

50-2 picked up 67-2 picked up 50-1 InRush picked up 50N-1 InRush picked up 51 InRush picked up 51N InRush picked up 67-1 InRush picked up 67N-1 InRush picked up 67-TOC InRush picked up 67N-TOC InRush picked up Phase A InRush picked up Phase B InRush picked up Phase C InRush picked up Ground InRush picked up

Table 2-15 shows all messages subject to a restraint mechanism avoiding a message burst during an intermittent ground fault:
Table 2-15 FNo. 01761 01762 01763 01764 01810 01820 01765 01831 01834 01837 02691 02660 Buffered messages Function 50(N)/51(N) PU 50/51 Ph A PU 50/51 Ph B PU 50/51 Ph C PU 50-1 picked up 51 picked up 50N/51NPickedup 50N-2 picked up 50N-1 picked up 51N picked up 67/67N pickedup 67-1 picked up Description

50(N)/51(N) O/C PICKUP 50/51 Phase A picked up 50/51 Phase B picked up 50/51 Phase C picked up 50-1 picked up 51 picked up 50N/51N picked up 50N-2 picked up 50N-1 picked up 51N picked up 67/67N picked up 67-1 picked up

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

173

Functions

Table 2-15 FNo. 02670 02692 02693 02694 02646 02681 02684 02695 05159 05165 05166 01215 01221 01224 01227 06823

Buffered messages Function 67-TOC pickedup 67 A picked up 67 B picked up 67 C picked up 67N-2 picked up 67N-1 picked up 67N-TOCPickedup 67N picked up 46-2 picked up 46-1 picked up 46-TOC pickedup 64 Pickup 50Ns-2 Pickup 50Ns-1 Pickup 51Ns Pickup START-SUP pu Description

67-TOC picked up 67/67-TOC Phase A picked up 67/67-TOC Phase B picked up 67/67-TOC Phase C picked up 67N-2 picked up 67N-1 picked up 67N-TOC picked up 67N/67N-TOC picked up 46-2 picked up 46-1 picked up 46-TOC picked up 64 displacement voltage pick up 50Ns-2 Pickup 50Ns-1 Pickup 51Ns picked up Startup supervision Pickup

Before they are entered in the fault log (event buffer) and transmitted to the system interface or CFC, the messages of table 2-15 are buffered (starting with the first pickup message received after Intermitt.EF was signalled). The buffering does not apply for signalling to relays and LEDs as it is required by time-graded protection systems for reverse interlocking. The intermediate buffer can store a maxium of two status changes (the most recent ones) for each message. Buffered messages are signalled to the fault log, CFC and to the system interface with the original time flag only when a TRIP command is initiated by a protective function other than the intermittent ground fault protection. This ascertains that a pickup, although delayed, is always signalled in association with each TRIP command. All pickup messages which usually do not occur during an intermittent ground fault are not affected by this mechanism. Among others this includes the pickup and TRIP commands of the following protective functions: Breaker failure protection, Overload protection, Frequency protection and Voltage protection. The pickup signals of these functions will still be logged immediately. A TRIP command of one of these protective functions will cause the buffered messages to be cleared since no connection exists between tripping function and buffered message. A fault event is cleared when the time T-reset has expired or the TRIP command IEF Trip has been terminated.

174

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Intermittent Ground Fault Protection

Terminating a fault event for the intermittent ground fault protection thus is a special case since it is the time T-reset that keeps the fault event opened and not the pickup.

2.12.2 Functional Settings

General Protection against intermittent ground faults can only take effect and is only accessible if the current to be evaluated (with Ignd, with 3I0 or with Ignd,sens.) was configured in address 0133 INTERM.EF. If the function is not needed, it is set to Disabled. In address 3301 INTERM.EF you can switch the function to ON or OFF. The pickup threshold (r.m.s. value) is set in address 3302 Iie>. A rather sensitive setting is possible to respond also to short ground faults since the pickup time shortens as the excess current increases. The setting range depends on the selection of the current to be evaluated at address 0133 INTERM.EF. The pickup time can be prolonged at address 3303 T-det.ext.. This pickup stabilization is especially important for the coordination with existing analog or electromechanical overcurrent relays. The time T-det.ext. can also be disabled (Tdet.ext. = 0). The stabilized pickup starts the counter Tsum. This counter is stopped but not reset as the picked up function drops out. Basing on the last counter content the counter resumes metering when the stabilized function picks up next. This sum of individual pickup times, which are to initiate tripping, is set at address 3304 T-sum det. It serves as selectivity criterion for coordinating the relays of one busbar run and is comparable to the time grading of the time overcurrent protection. The relay in the radial network which is closest to the intermittent fault and picks up, is set to the shortest summation time T-sum det. (see Figure 2-65).

7SJ62/63/64 7SJ511
1.5s Pick up

7SJ62/63/64 7SJ511
1.0s Pick up

7SJ62/63/64 7SJ511
0.5s No Pick up

IN
Figure 2-65 Example of the setting of the time stage T-sum det.

The reset time T-reset, after which the summation is reset in healthy operation and the protection resumes normal status, is configured at address 3305. Address 3306 Nos.det. specifies the number of pickups after which a ground fault is considered intermittent.

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

175

Functions

2.12.2.1 Settings of the Intermittent Ground Fault Protection

Addr. 3301 3302 Setting Title INTERM.EF Iie> OFF ON 0.05..35.00 A 0.05..35.00 A 0.050..1.500 A 3303 3304 3305 3306 T-det.ext. T-sum det. T-reset Nos.det. 0.00..10.00 sec 0.00..100.00 sec 1..600 sec 2..10 Setting Options Default Setting OFF 1.00 A 1.00 A 1.000 A 0.10 sec 20.00 sec 300 sec 3 Comments Intermittent earth fault protection Pick-up value of interm. E/F stage, IN measured Pick-up value of interm. E/F stage, 3I0 calculated Pick-up value of interm. E/F stage, INs measured Detection extension time Sum of detection times Reset time No. of det. for start of int. E/F prot

2.12.2.2 Information List of the Intermittent Ground Fault Protection

F.No. 06903 >IEF block 06923 IEF enabled 06921 IEF OFF 06922 IEF blocked 06924 IIE Fault det 06926 IIE Fault det 06925 IIE stab.Flt 06927 Intermitt.EF 06930 IEF Trip 06928 IEF Tsum exp. 06929 IEF Tres run. 06932 Nos.IIE= 06931 Iie/In= Alarm >block interm. E/F prot. Interm. E/F prot. is active Interm. E/F prot. is switched off Interm. E/F prot. is blocked Interm. E/F detection stage Iie> Interm. E/F detection stage Iie> Interm. E/F stab detection Interm. E/F detected Interm. E/F: trip Counter of det. times elapsed Interm. E/F: reset time running No. of detections by stage Iie>= Max RMS current value of fault = Comments

176

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Automatic Reclosing System (79M)

2.13

Automatic Reclosing System (79M)

2.13.1 Description of Automatic Reclosing System

2.13.1.1 General From experience, the majority of faults associated with overhead distribution feeders are temporary in nature. Therefore, to maximize service availability, it is desirable to employ a system that will close the circuit breaker shortly after it is tripped. This is accomplished in the 7SJ62/63/64 relay via the automatic reclosing system. When using the automatic reclosing system, if the fault still exists after the circuit breaker has been reclosed, then the protective elements will re-trip the circuit breaker. Depending on the number of reclosing attempts programmed for the automatic reclosing system (up to nine are possible), the circuit breaker will either be reclosed again, or will remain open. The automatic reclosure system can also operate in interaction with the integrated synchronizing function or with an external synchrocheck. Figure 2-66 shows an example of a timing diagram for a successful second reclosure.

Pick up Trip Command Breaker Status 52-a Dead Time Reclose Command Reset Time 79 i. progress 79 1st cycle 79 2nd cycle
open closed

T-Action

T-Action

T AUS-SVS Dead Time 1 Dead Time 2

Tmax Close CMD.

Reset Time

Reclosing Successful Starting cycle

Cycle 1

Cycle 2 1st cycle finished

Figure 2-66

Timing Diagram for a Second Successful Reclosure

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

177

Functions

Figure 2-67 shows an example of a timing diagram for two unsuccessful reclosing shots, with no additional reclosing of the circuit breaker.

Trip Command open closed

Breaker Status 52-a

Dead Time 1

Dead Time 2
Cancel with a new Trip Command Cancel with a new Trip Command

Dead Time

Reclose Command Reset Time

Reclosing Successful

79 DynBlock

79 Lockout

Starting cycle
Figure 2-67

Cycle 1

Cycle 2

Timing Diagram showing Two Unsuccessful Reclosing Shots (no additional reclosing of the circuit breaker)

The automatic reclosing function can also be initiated by an external protection relay. For this application, an output contact from the tripping relay must be wired to a binary input of the 7SJ62/63/64 relay. It is also possible to allow the 7SJ62/63/64 relay to work in conjunction with an external reclosing device. The trip commands initated by the automatic reclosure function are counted. A statistical counter is available for this purpose for the first and all subsequent reclosing commands. The automatic reclosing function is typically utilized only in situations where the occurrence of temporary faults is anticipated. Therefore, the automatic reclosing system is not applied when the 7SJ62/63/64 relay is used to protect generators, motors, transformers, and cables.

2.13.1.2 Program Execution Initiation Initiation of the automatic reclosing function can be caused by internal protective functions or externally using a binary input. The automatic reclosing system can be pro-

178

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Automatic Reclosing System (79M)

grammed such that any of the elements of table 2-16 can initiate (Starts 79), not initiate (No influence), or block reclosing (Stops 79).:
Table 2-16 79 start Directional start 67-1 67N-1 67-2 67N-2 67 TOC 67N TOC Start other sens Ground Flt(50Ns, 51Ns) 46 BINARY INPUT

Non-directional start 50-1 50N-1 50-2 50N-2 51 51N

If an element initiates reclosing, the appropriate reclosing program is executed. The binary input messages 02715 >Start 79 Gnd and 02716 >Start 79 Ph for starting an automatic reclosure program can also be activated via CFC (fast PLC task processing). Automatic reclosure can thus be initiated via any messages (e.g. protective pickup) if address 7164 BINARY INPUT is set to Starts 79. Operating Time The operatng time serves for monitoring the time between a general device pickup and the trip command of a protective function configured as starter. The operating time is launched when pickup of any function is detected, irrespective of whether this function interacts with the automatic reclosure program or not. If a protective function configured as starter initiates a trip command during the operating time, the automatic reclosure program is started. Trip commands of a protective function configured as starter occurring in the time between expiration of the operating time and dropout of the general device pickup cause the dynamic blocking of the automatic reclosing program. Trip commands of protective functions which are not configured as starter do not affect the operative time. If the automatic reclosure program interacts with an external protection device, the general device pickup for start of the operating time is communicated to the automatic reclosing program via binary input 02711 >79 Start. Reclosing Programs Depending on the type of fault, two different reclosing programs can be used. The following applies: The single phase fault (ground fault) reclosing program applies if a phase-to-ground fault is detected. Therefore, the ground fault reclosing program is executed only when the elements associated with a specific phase and/or ground pick up. This program can also be started via a binary input. The multiple phase fault (phase fault program) reclosing program applies to all other cases. That is, when elements associated with two or more phases pickup, with or without the pickup of ground elements, the phase reclosing program is executed. In addition, when automatic reclosing is initiated by other functions, such as negative sequence elements, the program is started. Like the ground fault reclosing program, this program can be started via a binary input as well. The reclosure program evaluates only elements that pick up as elements dropping out may corrupt the result if they drop out at differen times when opening the circuit breaker. Therefore, the ground fault reclosure program is executed only when the elements

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

179

Functions

associated with one particular phase pick up until the circuit breaker is opened; all others will initate the phase fault program. For each of the programs, up to 9 reclosing attempts can be separately programmed. The open breaker times preceding the first four reclosing attempts can be independently set, however, the open breaker times preceding the fifth through the ninth reclosing attempts will correspond to the open breaker time that precedes the fourth reclosing attempt. Reclosing Before Selectivity For the automatic reclosure sequence to be successful, faults on any part of the line must be cleared from the feeding line end(s) within the same shortest possible time. Usually, therefore, an instantaneous protection element is set to operate before an automatic reclosure. In addition, when two or more reclosing attempts are anticipated, high speed tripping should be allowed. To begin with, high speed tripping minimizes the impact fault current might have on the system. Second, high speed tripping prevents the operation of load side fuses for temporary faults. Prior to the final reclosing attempt, however, high speed tripping should be defeated to prevent a feeder lockout from occurring due to faults beyond load side protective devices. When a trip signal is programmed to initiate the automatic reclosing system, the appropriate automatic reclosing program will be executed. Once the circuit breaker has opened, the programmable dead time interval is started (see also side title Reclosing Programs). Once the dead time interval has elapsed, a closing signal is issued to reclose the circuit breaker. A blocking time interval TIME RESTRAINT is started at the same time. If a new fault occurs before the blocking time elapses, the automatic reclosing system is dynamically blocked causing the final tripping of the circuit breaker. The dead time can be set individually for each of the two reclosing programs. Criteria for opening the circuit breaker may either be the auxiliary contacts of the circuit breaker or the dropout of the general device pickup if auxiliary contacts are not configured. If the fault is cleared (successful reclosing attempt), the blocking time expires and automatic reclosing is reset in anticipation of a future fault. If the fault is not cleared (unsuccessful reclosing attempt), then a final tripping signal is initiated by one or more protective elements. Multi-Shot Reclosing The 7SJ62/63/64 relay can be programmed to initiate up to nine (9) reclosing attempts. The number of reclosing attempts can be set differently for the phase fault reclosing program and the ground fault reclosing program. The first dead time interval precedes, in principle, the first reclosing attempt. If the first reclosing attempt is unsuccessful, the blocking time interval is reset and the second dead time interval begins. At the end of the second open breaker interval, a second reclosing attempt is initiated. This cycle can be repeated until the allowable number of reclosing attempts programmed have been made. The dead time intervals preceding the first four (4) reclosing attempts can be set differently for each of the two reclosing programs. The dead time intervals preceding the fifth (5) through the ninth (9) reclosing attempts will be equal to the dead time interval that precedes the fourth (4) reclosing attempt. If one of the reclosing attempts is successful, the blocking time expires and the automatic reclosing system is reset.

Single-Shot Reclosing

180

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Automatic Reclosing System (79M)

If none of the reclosing attempts is successful, then a final circuit breaker trip will take place after the last allowable reclosing attempt has been made. After the final circuit breaker trip, the automatic reclosing system is dynamically blocked (see below). Blocking Time The function of the blocking time has already been described in the paragraphs at side title Single-/Multi-Shot Reclosing. The blocking time can be prolonged when the following conditions are fulfilled. The time TMax CLOSE CMD defines the maximum time during which a close command applies. If a new trip command occurs before this time has run out, the close command will be terminated. If the time TMax CLOSE CMD is set higher than the blocking time TIME RESTRAINT, the blocking time will be extended after expiry to the remaining close command duration. Likewise, a pickup from a protective function that is set to initiate the automatic reclosing system will lead to an extension of the blocking time! Static Blocking Static blocking means that the automatic reclosing system is not ready to initiate reclosing, and cannot initiate reclosing as long as the blocking signal is present. When static blocking takes place, a corresponding message is generated (79 is NOT ready). The static blocking signal is also used internally to block the protection elements that are only supposed to work when reclosing is enabled (see also side title Reclosing Before Selectivity further above). The automatic reclosing system is statically blocked for one or more of the following: A blocking signal (FNo. 02703 >BLOCK 79) is present at a binary input, if the automatic reclosing system is not initiated (associated message: >BLOCK 79). A signal (FNo. 02730 >CB Ready) indicating the circuit breaker is ready disappears from a binary input, if the automatic reclosing system is not initiated (associated message >CB Ready). The number of allowable reclosing attempts set for both reclosing programs is zero (associated message: 79 no cycle). No protective functions (parameters 7150 to 7163) or binary inputs are set to initiate the automatic reclosing system (associated message: 79 no starter). The circuit breaker position is reported as being open and no trip command applies (associated message: 79 BLK: CB open). This presumes that 7SJ62/63/ 64 be informed on the condition of the trip contact via the auxiliary contacts of the circuit breaker. Dynamic blocking/ lock out Dynamic blocking of the automatic reclosure program occurs in those cases where the reclosure program is active and one of the conditions for blocking is fulfilled. The dynamic blocking is signalled by the message 79 DynBlock. The dynamic blocking function is associated with the configurable lock-out time SAFETY 79 ready. This lock-out time is usually started by a blocking condition that has been fulfilled. After the lock-out time has elapsed the device checks whether or not the blocking condition can be reset. If the blocking condition is still present or if a new blocking condition is fulfilled, the lock-out time is restarted. If, however, the blocking condition no longer holds after the lock-out time has elapsed, the dynamic blocking will be reset.

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

181

Functions

Dynamic blocking/lock out is initiated if: The maximum number of reclosure attempts has been achieved. If a trip command now occurs within the lock-out time, the automatic reclosure program will be blocked dynamically, (indicated by 79 Max. No. Cyc) The protection function has detected a three-phase fault and the device is programmed (3Pol.PICKUP BLK) not to reclose into three-phase faults, (indicated by 79 BLK:3ph p.u. ). the operating time has elapsed without a TRIP command being issued, each TRIP command that occurs after the operating time has expired and before the pickedup element drops out, will initiate the dynamic blocking (indicated by 79 Tact expired). A protective function trips which is to block the automatic reclosure function (as configured). This applies irrespective of the status of the automatic reclosure system (started / not started) if a TRIP command of a blocking element occurs (indicated by 79 BLK by trip ). The circuit breaker failure function is initiated. The circuit breaker does not trip within the configured time T-Start MONITOR after a trip command was issued thus leading to the assumption that the circuit breaker has failed. (The breaker failure monitoring is primarily intented for VSI purposes. VSI safety checks are often conducted with the circuit breaker disconnected. The breaker failure monitoring prevents unexpected reclosing after the circuit breaker has been reconnected, indiciated by 79 T-Start Exp). The circuit breaker is not ready after the breaker monitoring time has elapsed, provided that the circuit breaker check has been activated (address 7113 CHECK CB? = Chk each cycle, indicated by 79 T-CBreadyExp), The circuit breaker is not ready after maximum extension of the dead time Max. DEAD EXT.. The monitoring of the circuit breaker status and the synchrocheck may cause undesired extension of the dead time. To prevent the automatic reclosure system from assuming an undefined state, the extension of the dead time is monitored. The extension time is started when the regular dead time has elapsed. When it has elapsed, the automatic reclosure function is blocked dynamically and the lockout time launched. The automatic reclosure system resumes normal state when the lock-out time has elapsed and new blocking conditions do not apply (indicated by 79 TdeadMax Exp) . Manual closing has been detected (externally) and parameter BLOCK MC Dur. (T 0) was set such that the automatic reclosing system responds to manual closing, Via a correspondingly marshalled binary input (FNo. 02703 >BLOCK 79). If the blocking takes places while the automatic recloser is in normal state, the latter will be blocked statically (79 is NOT ready). The blocking is terminated immediately when the binary input has been cleared and the automatic reclosure function resumes normal state. If the automatic reclosure function is already running when the blocking arrives, the dynamic blocking takes effect (79 DynBlock). In this case the activation of the binary input starts the lock-out time SAFETY 79 ready. Upon its expiration the device checks if the binary input is still activated. This the case, the automatic reclosure program changes from dynamic blocking to static blocking. If the binary input is no longer active when the time has elapsed and if no new blocking conditions apply, the automatic reclosure system resumes normal state.

182

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Automatic Reclosing System (79M)

Circuit Breaker Status

The detection of the actual circuit breaker position is necessary for the correct functionality of the auto reclose function. The breaker position can be detected via the breaker contacts and the binary inputs 04602 >52-b and 04601 >52-a. The method to be used depends on the masking of the binary inputs: >52-a (FNo. 04601) and >52-b (FNo. 04602). The following applies: If binary input 04601 >52-a and binary input 04602 >52-b are used, the automatic reclosure function can detect whether the circuit breaker is open, closed or in intermediate position. If the circuit breaker is open or in intermediate position without a trip command being present, the automatic reclosure function is blocked dynamically if it is already running. If the automatic reclosure system is in normal state, it will be blocked statically. When checking whether a trip command applies, all trip commands of the device are taken into account irrespective of whether the function acts as starting or blocking element on behalf of the automic reclosure program. If binary input 04601>52-a alone is allocated, the circuit breaker is considered open while the binary input is not active. If the binary input becomes inactive while no trip command of (any) function applies, the automatic reclosure system will be blocked. The blocking will be of static nature if the automatic reclosure system is in normal state at this time. If the automatic reclosing system is already running, the blocking will be a dynamic one. The dead time is started if the binary input becomes inactive following the trip command of a starting element. An intermediate position of the circuit breaker cannot be detected for this type of allocation. If binary input 04602 >52-b alone is allocated, the circuit breaker is considered open while the binary input is active. If the binary input becomes active while no trip command of (any) function applies, the automatic reclosure system will be blocked dynamically provided it is already running. Otherwise the blocking will be a static one. The dead time is started if the binary input becomes active following the trip command of a starting element. An intermediate position of the circuit breaker cannot be detected for this type of allocation. If neither binary input 04602 >52-b nor 04601 >52-a are allocated, the automatic reclosure program cannot detect the position of the circuit breaker. In this case, the automatic reclosure system will be controlled exclusively via pickups and trip commands. Monitoring for 52-b without TRIP and starting the dead time in dependence of the circuit breaker feedback is not possible in this case.

Circuit Breaker Monitoring

The ability of a circuit breaker to reclose and re-trip if necessary can be monitored by the 7SJ62/63/64 relay. A precondition for a reclosing attempt, following a trip command initiated by a protective relay element and subsequent initiation of the automatic reclosing function, is that the circuit breaker is ready for at least one TRIP-CLOSE-TRIP cycle. The readiness of the circuit breaker is monitored by the device using a binary input (>CB Ready). In the case where this signal from the breaker mechanism is not available, the circuit breaker monitoring feature should be disabled, otherwise reclosing attempts will remain blocked. When multiple reclosing attempts are programmed, it is a good idea to monitor the circuit breaker condition prior to each reclosing attempt as well, since operation of, for example, pneumatically controlled circuit breakers will result in reduced air pressure. A reclosing attempt will be blocked until the binary input, configured with the

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

183

Functions

function 02730,indicates that the circuit breaker is ready to complete another CLOSE-TRIP cycle. The recovery time of the circuit breaker can be monitored by the 7SJ62/63/64 relay. The monitoring time CB TIME OUT expires for as long as the circuit breaker does not indicate that it is ready via binary input >CB Ready (FNo. 02730). Meaning that as the binary input >CB Ready is cleared, the monitoring time CB TIME OUT is started. If the binary input returns before the monitoring time has elapsed, the monitoring time will be cancelled and the reclosure process is continued. If the monitoring time runs longer than the dead time, the dead time will be extended accordingly. If the monitoring time elapses before the circuit breaker signals its readiness, the automatic reclosure function will be blocked dynamically. Interaction with the synchronizing function may cause the dead time to extend inadmissibly. To prevent the automatic reclosure function from remaining in an undefined state, dead time extension is monitored. The maximum extension of the dead time can be set at Max. DEAD EXT.. The monitoring time Max. DEAD EXT. is started when the regular dead time has elapsed. If the synchronizing function responds before the time has elapsed, the monitoring time will be stopped and the close command generated. If the time expires before the synchronizing function reacts, the automatic reclosure function will be blocked dynamically. Please make sure that the above mentioned time is not shorter than the monitoring time CB TIME OUT. The time 7114 T-Start MONITOR serves for monitoring the response of the automatic reclosure function to a breaker failure. It is activated by a trip command arriving before or during a reclosing operation and marks the time that passes between tripping and opening of the circuit breaker. If the time elapses, the device assumes a breaker failure and the automatic reclosure function is blocked dynamically. If parameter T-Start MONITOR is set to , the start monitoring is disabled.

2.13.1.3 Controlling Protective Stages Depending on the reclosing cycle it is possible to control stages of the directional and non-directional overcurrent protection by means of the automatic reclosure system. Protective stage control implies that, 1. time overcurrent stages may trip instantaneously depending on the automatic reclosure cycle (T = 0), they may remain unaffected by the auto reclosing function AR (T = T) or may be blocked (T = ). 2. time overcurrent stages can be influenced via the cold load pickup function (see Section 2.4) regarding thresholds and trip time delays depending on whether the automatic reclosure system is ready or not. Control of the overcurrent protection stages takes effect by releasing the cycle marked by the corresponding parameter. The cycle zone release is indicated by the messages 79 1.CycZoneRel through 79 4.CycZoneRel. If the automatic reclosure system is in normal state, the settings for the starting cycle apply. Consequently, their settings always take effect when the automatic reclosure system assumes normal state. The settings are released for each following cycle by issuing the close command and starting the blocking time. Following a successfull auto reclosing operation (blocking time elapsed) or when reset after blocking, the automatic reclosure system assumes

184

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Automatic Reclosing System (79M)

normal state. Control of the protection is again assumed by the parameters for the starting cycle. Figure 2-68 shows an example of protection stages control

Pick up T=0 Trip Command open closed Breaker Status 52-a Dead Time Reclose Command Reset Time 79 1.CycZoneRel T=0

79 2.CycZoneRel

79 3.CycZoneRel
Time delay 50-2, 50N-2 79 1stCyc. 79 1stCyc. Starting cycle
Figure 2-68

T=0

T=0

T=

T=0

Cycle 1

Cycle 2

Startingcycle

Control of protection stages for two-fold, successful auto reclosure

Example: Before the first reclosure faults are to be eliminated quickly applying stages 50-2 or 50N-2. Fast fault termination thus has priority over selectivity aspects as the reclosing action aims at maintaining normal system operation. If the fault prevails, a second tripping is to take place instantaneously and a second reclosure. After the second reclosure, however, stages 50-2 or 50N-2 are to be blocked so the fault can be eliminated applying stages 50-1 or 50N-1 according to the networks time grading schedule giving priority to selectivity concerns. Addresses 7202 bef.1.Cy:50-2, 7214 bef.2.Cy:50-2 and 7203 bef.1.Cy:50N-2 and 7215 bef.2.Cy:50N-2 are set to instant. T=0 so these stages are active after the first reclosure. To the contrary, addresses 7226

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

185

Functions

bef.3.Cy:50-2 and 7227 bef.3.Cy:50N-2 are set to blocked T= causing stages 50-2 and 50N-2 to be blocked after the second reclosure. The back-up stages e.g., 50-1 and 50N-1 must obviously not be blocked (addresses 7200, 7201, 7212, 7213, 7224 and 7225).
The blocking applies only after reclosure according to the settings address. Hence, it is possible to specify again other conditions for a third reclosure. The blocking conditions are also valid for the zone sequence coordination, provided it is available and activated (address 7140, see also Subsection 2.13.1.4, Zone Sequence Coordination1)). 2.13.1.4 Zone Sequence Coordination1) It is the task of the zone sequence coordination to harmonize the automatic reclosure function of this device with that of another device that is part of the same power system. It is a complementary function to the automatic reclosure program and allows for example to perform group reclosing operations in radial systems. In case of multiple reclosures, groups may also be in nested arrangement and further high-voltage fuses can be overgraded or undergraded. Zone sequencing works by blocking certain protective functions depending on the reclose cylce. This is implemented by the protective stages control (see Subsection 2.13.1.3). As a special feature, changing from one reclosing cycle to the next is possible without trip command only via pickup/dropout of stage 50-1 or 50N-1. Figure 2-69 shows an example of how zone sequencing and protection of load side fuses is possible in a radial distribution system. Consider the relays protecting Feeder #3 and the busbar. Assume that the relay protecting Feeder #3 is programmed for one reclosing attempt and that the busbar relay does not utilize reclosing. For fault F1 at Tap Line #2, the 50-2 elements associated with both the Feeder #3 relay and the busbar relay pickup. The time delay of the 50-2 element protecting Feeder #3 is set so that the Feeder #3 circuit breaker will clear the fault before the fuse at Tap Line #2 is damaged. After the first reclosing attempt, if the fault was cleared, normal service is restored to all customers (including the customers served by Tap Line #2). If after the first reclosing attempt, the fault continues to exist, the 50-2 element at Feeder #3 is blocked, and the fuse operates to clear the fault. If the fuse fails to clear the fault, then the 50-1 element protecting Feeder #3 will initiate a delayed trip signal (0.4 seconds), thus serving as backup protection for the fuse. Assume protection requirement require that the 50-2 element at the busbar relay be set with a delay of 0.4 seconds as well. When the fault first appears at F1, the 50-2 element at the bus relay picks up, but drops out when the 50-2 element at Feeder #3 trips the circuit breaker. Upon reclosing, if the fault still remains, the 50-2 element associated with the bus relay picks up again, however, the fuse operates to clear the fault, thus resulting in a drop out of the 50-2 element at the busbar relay. Had the fault been on Feeder #3, however, the 50-2 element associated with the busbar relay would have initiated a trip (simultaneously with the trip initiated by the Feeder #3 50-1 element) after reclosing had occurred. All three feeders supplied by the bus would have

1)not

applicable for version 7SJ62/63/64****A**

186

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Automatic Reclosing System (79M)

been cut off from the incoming supply for a fault that should have locked out Feeder #3 only. To prevent this from happening, zone sequencing is switched on at the bus relay (See AR setting dress 7140). With zone sequencing in operation, the bus relay counts the number of times a fault is interrupted. For the first fault, the 50-2 element at the bus is allowed to trip. If the fault is at F1 or on Feeder #3, the 50-2 element protecting Feeder #3 will initiate a high speed trip, thus causing the 50-2 element at the bus relay to drop out.

Bus Supply

7SJ62/63/ 50-1

50-2

0.4 s 0.9 s

F2

7SJ62/63/

7SJ62/63/

7SJ62/63/ 50-1

50-2

0.0 s 0.4 s

Tap Line 1 Tap Line 2 F1 Feeder 1 Feeder 2 Feeder 3

Figure 2-69

Illustration of Zone Sequencing and the Protection of Load Side Fuses

For the second fault, the 50-2 element at the bus relay must be blocked because the 50-2 element at Feeder #3 is blocked, and a permanent fault on Feeder #3 could result in an inadvertent trip by the 50-2 element protecting the bus. Because zone sequencing is switched on at the bus relay, the bus relay counts the number of faults, and after the first fault, blocks the 50-2 element from tripping. Therefore, for a permanent fault on Feeder #3, the 50-2 element at the bus would have been blocked after the reclosing attempt, and the 50-1 element at Feeder #3 would have tripped the circuit breaker in 0.4 seconds. Had the 50-1 element failed to clear the fault, the 50-1 element at the bus relay, which is set for 0.9 seconds, would serve as backup protection. For the bus fault F2, the 50-2 element at the bus would have cleared the fault in 0.4 seconds. The 50-1 element at the bus serves to backup the 50-2 element. Had zone sequencing not been available, the 50-2 element at the bus relay could not have been set to clear the bus fault in 0.4 seconds without causing coordination problems between the bus relay and the Feeder #3 relay. On a final note, zone sequencing is only effective at the bus relay when all three feeders utilize high speed tripping prior to the first reclosing attempt.

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

187

Functions

2.13.2 Programming Settings

2.13.2.1 General Settings The internal automatic reclosure system will only be effective and accessible if address 0171 79 Auto Recl. is set to Enabled during configuration or protective functions. If the automatic reclosing function is not required, then address 0171 should be set to Disabled. The function can be turned ON or OFF at address 7101 FCT 79. If no automatic reclosures are performed on the feeder for which the 7SJ62/63/64 relay is used (e.g. cables, tranformers, motors, etc.), the automatic reclosure function is disabled by configuration. The automatic reclosure function will then have absolutely no effect i.e., 7SJ62/63/64 will not process the automatic reclosure function. No messages exist for this purpose and binary inputs for the automatic reclosure function are ignored. All parameters of block 71 are inaccessible and insignificant. Blocking Duration for Manual-CLOSE Detection Parameter 7103 BLOCK MC Dur. defines the reaction of the automatic reclosure function when a manual closing signal is detected. The parameter can be set to specify how long the auto reclose function will be blocked dynamically in case of an external manual close-command being detected via binary input (00356 >Manual Close). If the setting is 0, the automatic reclosure system will not respond to a manual close-signal. The blocking time set at address 7105 TIME RESTRAINT defines the time that must elapse, after a successful reclosing attempt, before the automatic reclosing function is reset, in preparation of a new fault. If a protective element picks up before the blocking time elapses, the reclosing cycle is continues. If a protective trip occurred after the last allowable reclosing attempt was made, then together with the trip command the feeder is locked out. If a protective element picks up after the blocking time has elapsed, then a new reclosing cycle is initiated. In general, address 7105 should be set for only a few seconds. In areas with frequent thunderstorms, a shorter blocking time may be necessary to avoid feeder lockout due to sequential lightning strikes. A longer blocking time should be chosen if there is no possibility to monitor the circuit breaker ready status (see below) during multiple reclosing. In this case, the blocking time should be longer than the time required for the circuit breaker mechanism to be ready. If a dynamic blocking/lock out of the automatic reclosing system was initiated, then reclosing functions remain blocked until the cause of the blocking has been cleared. Subsection 2.13.1 gives further information on this topic, see side title Dynamic Blocking. The dynamic blocking is associated to the configurable blocking time SAFETY 79 ready. It is usually started by a blocking condition that has picked up. Circuit Breaker Monitoring Reclosing after a short-circuit tripping presupposes that the circuit breaker is ready for at least one TRIP-CLOSE-TRIP cycle at the time when the reclosing function is initiated (i.e. at the beginning of a trip command): The ready-state of the circuit breaker is signalled to the device via the binary input >CB Ready (FNo. 02730).

Blocking Time and Dynamic Blocking

188

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Automatic Reclosing System (79M)

It is possible to check the status of the circuit breaker before each reclosure or to disable this option (address 7113, CHECK CB?): CHECK CB? CHECK CB? = No check, deactivates the circuit breaker check, = Chk each cycle, to verify the circuit breaker status before each reclosing command.

Checking the status of the circuit breaker is usually recommended. Should the breaker not provide such a signal, you can disable the circuit breaker check at address 7113 CHECK CB? to No check, as otherwise auto reclosure would be impossible. The status monitoring time CB TIME OUT can be configured at address 7115 if the circuit breaker check was enabled at address 7113. This time is set slightly higher than the maximum recovery time of the circuit breaker following reclosure. If the circuit breaker is not ready after the time has expired, reclosing is omitted and dynamic blocking is initiated thus locking the auto reclose function. Time Max. DEAD EXT. serves for monitoring the dead time extension. The extension can be initiated by the circuit breaker monitoring time CB TIME OUT and by the synchronizing function. The monitoring time Max. DEAD EXT. is started after the configured dead time has elapsed. This time must not be shorter than CB TIME OUT. When using the monitoring time CB TIME OUT, the time Max. DEAD EXT. should be set to a value CB TIME OUT. If the auto reclose system is operated with a (internal or external) synchronizing function, Max. DEAD EXT. assures that the auto reclose system does not remain in undefined state when the synchronizing function fails to check back. If the synchronization is used as synchrocheck (for synchronous systems), the monitoring time may be configured rather short e.g., to some seconds. In this case the synchronizing function merely checks the synchronism of the power systems. If synchronism prevails it switches in instantaneously, otherwise it will not. If the synchronization is used for synchronous/asynchronous networks, the monitoring time must grant sufficient time for determining the time for switching in. This depends on the frequency slip of the two subnetworks. A monitoring time of 100s should be sufficient to account for most applications for asynchronous networks. Generally, the monitoring time should be longer than the maximum duration of the synchronization process (parameter 6x12). The breaker failure monitoring time 7114 T-Start MONITOR determines the time between tripping (closing the trip contact) and opening the circuit breaker (checkback of the CB auxiliary contacts). This time is started each time a tripping operation takes place. When it has elapsed, the device assumes breaker failure and blocks the auto reclose system dynamically. Operating Time The operating time monitors the time between pickup and trip command of a protective function configured as starter while the auto reclose system is ready but not yet running. A trip command issued by a protective function configured as starter occuring within the operating time will start the automatic reclosing function. If this time differs from the setting value of T-ACTION (addresse7117), the automatic reclosing system will be blocked dynamically.

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

189

Functions

The trip time of inverse tripping characteristics is considerably determined by the fault location or fault resistance. The operative time prevents reclosing in case of far remote faults with long tripping time. Trip commands of a protective function that is not configured as starter do not affect the operative time. Number of Reclosing Attempts The number of reclosing attempts can be set separately for the programs Phase (address 7136, # OF RECL. PH) and Ground (address 7135, # OF RECL. GND). The exact definition of the programs is described in Subsection 2.13.1 at side title Reclosing Programs. Address 7137 Cmd.via control can be set to either generate directly the close command via the automatic reclosing function (setting Cmd.via control = none) or have the closing initated by the control function. The setting list for parameter 7137 is created dynamically in dependence of the masked switchgear components. If one of the switchgear components is selected, usually the circuit breaker 52 Breaker, reclosure is accomplished via control. In this case, the automatic reclosing function does not create a close command but issues a close request. This request is forwarded to the control which then assumes the switching. Thus, the properties defined for the switchgear component such as interlocking and command times apply for. Hence, it is possible that the close command will not be carried out due to an applying interlocking condition. If this behavior is not desired, the auto reclose function can also generate the close command 79 Close directly which must be marshalled to contact. Connection to Internal Synchrocheck (only 7SJ64) The auto reclose function can interact with the internal synchronizing function of the 7SJ64 relay. For this purpose, one of the four synchronization groups must be selected at address 7138 Internal SYNC thus specifying the synchronization conditions for automatic reclosing. Moreover, the close command must be issued via control. Therefore, address 7137 Cmd.via control must be set to select the appropriate switchgear component, usually the circuit breaker 52 Breaker. Synchronous reclosing via the close command 79 Close is not possible. If interaction with the internal synchronization is not desired, address 7138 must be set to none. Auto Reclosing with External Synchrocheck Parameter 7139 External SYNC can be set to determine that the auto reclose function operates with external synchrocheck. External synchronization is possible if the parameter is set to YES and 7SJ64 is linked to the external synchrocheck via the message 02865 79 Sync.Request and the binary input >Sync.release.

Close Command: Direct or via Control

2.13.2.2 Configuration Initiation and Blocking of Reclosing by Protective Functions At addresses 7150 to 7164 (see table 2-16), reclosing can be initiated or blocked for various types of protective elements. They constitute the interconnection between protective elements and auto reclose function. Each address designates a protective function together with its ANSI synonym e.g., 50-2 for the high-set stage of the nondirectional time overcurrent protection (address 7152). The setting options have the following meaning:

190

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Automatic Reclosing System (79M)

Starts 79 No influence Stops 79

The protective element initiates the automatic reclosure via its trip command; the protective element does not start the automatic reclosure, it may however be initated by other functions; the protective element blocks the automatic reclosure, neither can it be started by other functions; a dynamic blocking is initiated.

2.13.2.3 First Reclosing Attempt Open Breaker Times The dead time preceding the first reclosing attempt is set at address 7127 DEADTIME 1: PH for the multiple phase fault reclosing program and at address 7128 DEADTIME 1: G for the single phase fault reclosing program. The time defined by this parameter is started when the circuit breaker opens (if auxiliary contacts are allocated) or when the pickup drops out following the trip command of a starter. The exact definition of the programs is described in Subsection 2.13.1 at Reclosing Programs. The dead time should be set long enough to allow a temporary fault to clear (0.9 to 1.5 seconds) unless stability is a concern, in which case faster times may be required (typically 0.3 to 0.6 seconds). In radial networks prolonged idle times are usually permitted. Addresses 7200 to 7211 allow cyclic control of the various protective functions by the automatic reclosing function. Thus protective stages can be blocked selectively, switched instantaneously or according to the configured delay times. The following options are available: Set value T=T instant. T=0 blocked T= The protective stage is delayed as configured i.e., the auto reclose function does not effect this stage; The protective stage becomes instantaneous if the auto reclose function is ready to perform the mentioned cycle; The protective stage is blocked if the auto reclose function reaches the cycle defined in the parameter.

Cyclic Control of Protective Functions via Automatic Reclosure

2.13.2.4 Second to Fourth Reclosuring Attempt Open Breaker Times If more than one reclosing cycle was set, you can now configure the individual reclosing settings for the 2nd to 4th cycle. The same options are available as for the first cycle. For the 2nd cycle:

DEADTIME 2: PH Dead time for the second (2nd) reclosing attempt (multiple phase recl. program) Address 7130 DEADTIME 2: G Dead time for the second (2nd) reclosing attempt (single phase recl. program) Addresses7212 through 7223 Cyclic control of the various protective functions before the 2nd reclosing attempt
Address 7129

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

191

Functions

For the 3rd cycle: Address 7131

DEADTIME 3: PH Dead time for the second (3rd) reclosing attempt (multiple phase recl. program) Address 7132 DEADTIME 3: G Dead time for the second (3rd) reclosing attempt (single phase recl. program) Addresses7224 through 7235 Cyclic control of the various protective functions before the third reclosing attempt
Address 7133

For the 4th cycle:

DEADTIME 4: PH Dead time for the second (4th) reclosing attempt (multiple phase recl. program) Address 7134 DEADTIME 4: G Dead time for the second (4th) reclosing attempt (single phase recl. program) Addresses7236 through 7247 Cyclic control of the various protective functions before the fourth reclosuring attempt

2.13.2.5 Fifth to Ninth Reclosing Attempt If more than four cycles are configured, the dead times preceding the fifth (5th) through the ninth (9th) reclosing attempts are equal to the open breaker time which precedes the fourth (4th) reclosing attempt.

2.13.2.6 Blocking Blocking ThreePhase Faults Regardless of which reclosing program is executed, automatic reclosing can be blocked for trips following three-phase faults at address 7165 3Pol.PICKUP BLK. The pickup of all three phases for a specific phase element is the criterion required for three-phase fault blocking. The auto reclose function can be blocked, if control commands are issued. The control information must be routed via CFC (interlocking task-level) using the CMD_Information block (see Figure 2-70).

Blocking of auto reclose via internal control

IN: Control Device 52 Breaker CF_D12

OUT: >BLOCK 79

Figure 2-70

Blocking of the auto reclose function using the internal control function

192

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Automatic Reclosing System (79M)

2.13.2.7 Zone Sequencing1) At address 7140, ZONE SEQ.COORD., the zone sequencing feature can be turned ON or OFF. If multiple reclosures are performed and the zone sequencing function is deactivated, only those reclosing cycles are counted which the device has conducted after a trip command. With the zone sequencing function switched on, an additional sequence counter also counts such auto reclosures which (in radial systems) are carried out by relays connected on load side. This presupposes that the pickup of the 50-1/50N-1 stages drops out without a trip command being issued by a protective function initiating the auto reclose function. The parameters at addresses 7200 through 7247 (see paragraph below at Initiation and Blocking of Reclosing by Protective Functions and Controlling Directional/Non-Directional Overcurrent Protection Stages via Cold Load Pickup can thus be set to determine which protective stages are active or blocked during what dead time cycles. In the example shown in Figure 2-69 (Subsection 2.13.1.4), the zone sequencing would be initated at the bus relay. Moreover, the 50-2 stages would have to be blocked after the second reclosure i.e., address 7214 bef.2.Cy:50-2 set to blocked T=. The zone sequencing of the feeder relays is switched off but the 50-2 stages must also be blocked here after the second reclosing attempt. Moreover, it must be ensured that the 50-2 stages start the automatic reclosing function: address 7152 50-2 set to Starts 79.

2.13.2.8 Controlling Directional/Non-Directional Overcurrent Protection Stages via Cold Load Pickup The cold load pickup function is another possibility to control the protection via the automatic reclosing system (see also Section 2.4). This function provides the address 1702 Start Condition. It determines the starting conditions for the increased setting values of current and time of the cold load pickup to apply for directional and nondirectional overcurrent protection. If address 1702 Start Condition = 79 ready, the directional and non-directional overcurrent protection always employ the increased setting values if the automatic reclosing system is ready. The auto reclosing function provides the signal 79 ready for controlling the cold load pickup. The signal 79 ready is always active if the auto reclosing system is available, active, unblocked and ready for another cycle. Control via the cold load pickup function is non-cyclic. Since control via cold load pickup and cyclic control via auto reclosing system can run simultaneously, the directional and non-directional overcurrent protection must coordinate the input values of the two interfaces. In this context the cyclic auto reclosing control has the priority and thus overwrites the release of the cold load pickup function. If the protective stages are controlled via the automatic reclosing function, changing the control variables (e.g. by blocking) has no effect on stages that are already running. The stages in question are continued.

1)Not

applicable for version 7SJ62/63/64****A**

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

193

Functions

2.13.2.9 Settings for Automatic Reclosing The setting options of address 7137 Cmd.via control are generated dynamically according to the current configuration. Address 7138 Internal SYNC is only available for 7SJ64.

Addr. 7101 7103 7105 7108 7113 7114 7115 7116 7117 7135 7136 7137 7138 7139 7140 7165 7150

Setting Title FCT 79 BLOCK MC Dur. TIME RESTRAINT SAFETY 79 ready CHECK CB? T-Start MONITOR CB TIME OUT Max. DEAD EXT. T-ACTION # OF RECL. GND # OF RECL. PH Cmd.via control Internal SYNC External SYNC ZONE SEQ.COORD. 3Pol.PICKUP BLK 50-1 YES NO OFF ON YES NO OFF ON

Setting Options

Default Setting OFF 1.00 sec 3.00 sec 0.50 sec No check 0.50 sec 3.00 sec 100.00 sec 0.20 sec 1 1

Comments 79 Auto-Reclose Function AR blocking duration after manual close 79 Auto Reclosing reset time Safety Time until 79 is ready Check circuit breaker before AR? AR start-signal monitoring time Circuit Breaker (CB) Supervision Time Maximum dead time extension Action time Number of Reclosing Cycles Ground Number of Reclosing Cycles Phase Close command via control device Internal 25 synchronisation

0.50..320.00 sec; 0 0.50..320.00 sec 0.01..320.00 sec No check Check each cycle 0.01..320.00 sec; 0.10..320.00 sec 0.50..1800.00 sec; 0.01..320.00 sec; 0..9 0..9

NO OFF NO No influence

External 25 synchronisation ZSC - Zone sequence coordination 3 Pole Pickup blocks 79 50-1

No influence Starts 79 Stops 79 No influence Starts 79 Stops 79 No influence Starts 79 Stops 79

7151

50N-1

No influence

50N-1

7152

50-2

No influence

50-2

194

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Automatic Reclosing System (79M)

Addr. 7153

Setting Title 50N-2

Setting Options No influence Starts 79 Stops 79 No influence Starts 79 Stops 79 No influence Starts 79 Stops 79 No influence Starts 79 Stops 79 No influence Starts 79 Stops 79 No influence Starts 79 Stops 79 No influence Starts 79 Stops 79 No influence Starts 79 Stops 79 No influence Starts 79 Stops 79 No influence Starts 79 Stops 79 No influence Starts 79 Stops 79 No influence Starts 79 Stops 79 0.01..320.00 sec 0.01..320.00 sec Set value, T=T instantaneous, T= 0 blocked, T= infinite Set value, T=T instantaneous, T= 0 blocked, T= infinite

Default Setting No influence 50N-2

Comments

7154

51

No influence

51

7155

51N

No influence

51N

7156

67-1

No influence

67-1

7157

67N-1

No influence

67N-1

7158

67-2

No influence

67-2

7159

67N-2

No influence

67N-2

7160

67 TOC

No influence

67 TOC

7161

67N TOC

No influence

67N TOC

7162

sens Ground Flt

No influence

(Sensitive) Ground Fault

7163

46

No influence

46

7164

BINARY INPUT

No influence

Binary Input

7127 7128 7200

DEADTIME 1: PH DEADTIME 1: G bef.1.Cy:50-1

0.50 sec 0.50 sec Set value, T=T

Dead Time 1: Phase Fault Dead Time 1: Ground Fault before 1. Cycle: 50-1

7201

bef.1.Cy:50N-1

Set value, T=T

before 1. Cycle: 50N-1

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

195

Functions

Addr. 7202

Setting Title bef.1.Cy:50-2

Setting Options Set value, T=T instantaneous, T= 0 blocked, T= infinite Set value, T=T instantaneous, T= 0 blocked, T= infinite Set value, T=T instantaneous, T= 0 blocked, T= infinite Set value, T=T instantaneous, T= 0 blocked, T= infinite Set value, T=T instantaneous, T= 0 blocked, T= infinite Set value, T=T instantaneous, T= 0 blocked, T= infinite Set value, T=T instantaneous, T= 0 blocked, T= infinite Set value, T=T instantaneous, T= 0 blocked, T= infinite Set value, T=T instantaneous, T= 0 blocked, T= infinite Set value, T=T instantaneous, T= 0 blocked, T= infinite 0.01..320.00 sec 0.01..320.00 sec Set value, T=T instantaneous, T= 0 blocked, T= infinite Set value, T=T instantaneous, T= 0 blocked, T= infinite Set value, T=T instantaneous, T= 0 blocked, T= infinite Set value, T=T instantaneous, T= 0 blocked, T= infinite

Default Setting Set value, T=T

Comments before 1. Cycle: 50-2

7203

bef.1.Cy:50N-2

Set value, T=T

before 1. Cycle: 50N-2

7204

bef.1.Cy:51

Set value, T=T

before 1. Cycle: 51

7205

bef.1.Cy:51N

Set value, T=T

before 1. Cycle: 51N

7206

bef.1.Cy:67-1

Set value, T=T

before 1. Cycle: 67-1

7207

bef.1.Cy:67N-1

Set value, T=T

before 1. Cycle: 67N-1

7208

bef.1.Cy:67-2

Set value, T=T

before 1. Cycle: 67-2

7209

bef.1.Cy:67N-2

Set value, T=T

before 1. Cycle: 67N-2

7210

bef.1.Cy:67 TOC

Set value, T=T

before 1. Cycle: 67 TOC

7211

bef.1.Cy:67NTOC

Set value, T=T

before 1. Cycle: 67N TOC

7129 7130 7212

DEADTIME 2: PH DEADTIME 2: G bef.2.Cy:50-1

0.50 sec 0.50 sec Set value, T=T

Dead Time 2: Phase Fault Dead Time 2: Ground Fault before 2. Cycle: 50-1

7213

bef.2.Cy:50N-1

Set value, T=T

before 2. Cycle: 50N-1

7214

bef.2.Cy:50-2

Set value, T=T

before 2. Cycle: 50-2

7215

bef.2.Cy:50N-2

Set value, T=T

before 2. Cycle: 50N-2

196

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Automatic Reclosing System (79M)

Addr. 7216

Setting Title bef.2.Cy:51

Setting Options Set value, T=T instantaneous, T= 0 blocked, T= infinite Set value, T=T instantaneous, T= 0 blocked, T= infinite Set value, T=T instantaneous, T= 0 blocked, T= infinite Set value, T=T instantaneous, T= 0 blocked, T= infinite Set value, T=T instantaneous, T= 0 blocked, T= infinite Set value, T=T instantaneous, T= 0 blocked, T= infinite Set value, T=T instantaneous, T= 0 blocked, T= infinite Set value, T=T instantaneous, T= 0 blocked, T= infinite 0.01..320.00 sec 0.01..320.00 sec Set value, T=T instantaneous, T= 0 blocked, T= infinite Set value, T=T instantaneous, T= 0 blocked, T= infinite Set value, T=T instantaneous, T= 0 blocked, T= infinite Set value, T=T instantaneous, T= 0 blocked, T= infinite Set value, T=T instantaneous, T= 0 blocked, T= infinite Set value, T=T instantaneous, T= 0 blocked, T= infinite

Default Setting Set value, T=T

Comments before 2. Cycle: 51

7217

bef.2.Cy:51N

Set value, T=T

before 2. Cycle: 51N

7218

bef.2.Cy:67-1

Set value, T=T

before 2. Cycle: 67-1

7219

bef.2.Cy:67N-1

Set value, T=T

before 2. Cycle: 67N-1

7220

bef.2.Cy:67-2

Set value, T=T

before 2. Cycle: 67-2

7221

bef.2.Cy:67N-2

Set value, T=T

before 2. Cycle: 67N-2

7222

bef.2.Cy:67 TOC

Set value, T=T

before 2. Cycle: 67 TOC

7223

bef.2.Cy:67NTOC

Set value, T=T

before 2. Cycle: 67N TOC

7131 7132 7224

DEADTIME 3: PH DEADTIME 3: G bef.3.Cy:50-1

0.50 sec 0.50 sec Set value, T=T

Dead Time 3: Phase Fault Dead Time 3: Ground Fault before 3. Cycle: 50-1

7225

bef.3.Cy:50N-1

Set value, T=T

before 3. Cycle: 50N-1

7226

bef.3.Cy:50-2

Set value, T=T

before 3. Cycle: 50-2

7227

bef.3.Cy:50N-2

Set value, T=T

before 3. Cycle: 50N-2

7228

bef.3.Cy:51

Set value, T=T

before 3. Cycle: 51

7229

bef.3.Cy:51N

Set value, T=T

before 3. Cycle: 51N

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

197

Functions

Addr. 7230

Setting Title bef.3.Cy:67-1

Setting Options Set value, T=T instantaneous, T= 0 blocked, T= infinite Set value, T=T instantaneous, T= 0 blocked, T= infinite Set value, T=T instantaneous, T= 0 blocked, T= infinite Set value, T=T instantaneous, T= 0 blocked, T= infinite Set value, T=T instantaneous, T= 0 blocked, T= infinite Set value, T=T instantaneous, T= 0 blocked, T= infinite 0.01..320.00 sec 0.01..320.00 sec Set value, T=T instantaneous, T= 0 blocked, T= infinite Set value, T=T instantaneous, T= 0 blocked, T= infinite Set value, T=T instantaneous, T= 0 blocked, T= infinite Set value, T=T instantaneous, T= 0 blocked, T= infinite Set value, T=T instantaneous, T= 0 blocked, T= infinite Set value, T=T instantaneous, T= 0 blocked, T= infinite Set value, T=T instantaneous, T= 0 blocked, T= infinite Set value, T=T instantaneous, T= 0 blocked, T= infinite

Default Setting Set value, T=T

Comments before 3. Cycle: 67-1

7231

bef.3.Cy:67N-1

Set value, T=T

before 3. Cycle: 67N-1

7232

bef.3.Cy:67-2

Set value, T=T

before 3. Cycle: 67-2

7233

bef.3.Cy:67N-2

Set value, T=T

before 3. Cycle: 67N-2

7234

bef.3.Cy:67 TOC

Set value, T=T

before 3. Cycle: 67 TOC

7235

bef.3.Cy:67NTOC

Set value, T=T

before 3. Cycle: 67N TOC

7133 7134 7236

DEADTIME 4: PH DEADTIME 4: G bef.4.Cy:50-1

0.50 sec 0.50 sec Set value, T=T

Dead Time 4: Phase Fault Dead Time 4: Ground Fault before 4. Cycle: 50-1

7237

bef.4.Cy:50N-1

Set value, T=T

before 4. Cycle: 50N-1

7238

bef.4.Cy:50-2

Set value, T=T

before 4. Cycle: 50-2

7239

bef.4.Cy:50N-2

Set value, T=T

before 4. Cycle: 50N-2

7240

bef.4.Cy:51

Set value, T=T

before 4. Cycle: 51

7241

bef.4.Cy:51N

Set value, T=T

before 4. Cycle: 51N

7242

bef.4.Cy:67-1

Set value, T=T

before 4. Cycle: 67-1

7243

bef.4.Cy:67N-1

Set value, T=T

before 4. Cycle: 67N-1

198

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Automatic Reclosing System (79M)

Addr. 7244

Setting Title bef.4.Cy:67-2

Setting Options Set value, T=T instantaneous, T= 0 blocked, T= infinite Set value, T=T instantaneous, T= 0 blocked, T= infinite Set value, T=T instantaneous, T= 0 blocked, T= infinite Set value, T=T instantaneous, T= 0 blocked, T= infinite

Default Setting Set value, T=T

Comments before 4. Cycle: 67-2

7245

bef.4.Cy:67N-2

Set value, T=T

before 4. Cycle: 67N-2

7246

bef.4.Cy:67 TOC

Set value, T=T

before 4. Cycle: 67 TOC

7247

bef.4.Cy:67NTOC

Set value, T=T

before 4. Cycle: 67N TOC

2.13.2.10Information List for Automatic Reclosing

F.No. 02701 >79 ON 02702 >79 OFF 02703 >BLOCK 79 02730 >CB Ready 02715 >Start 79 Gnd 02716 >Start 79 Ph 02722 >ZSC ON 02723 >ZSC OFF 02781 79 OFF 02782 79 ON 02784 79 is NOT ready 02785 79 DynBlock 02801 79 in progress 02851 79 Close 02862 79 Successful 02863 79 Lockout 02878 79 L-N Sequence 02879 79 L-L Sequence 02883 ZSC active 02884 ZSC ON 02885 ZSC OFF Alarm >79 ON >79 OFF >BLOCK 79 >Circuit breaker READY for reclosing >Start 79 Ground program >Start 79 Phase program >Switch zone sequence coordination ON >Switch zone sequence coordination OFF 79 Auto recloser is switched OFF 79 Auto recloser is switched ON 79 Auto recloser is NOT ready 79 - Auto-reclose is dynamically BLOCKED 79 - in progress 79 - Close command 79 - cycle successful 79 - Lockout 79-A/R single phase reclosing sequence 79-A/R multi-phase reclosing sequence Zone Sequencing is active Zone sequence coordination switched ON Zone sequence coordination switched OFF Comments

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

199

Functions

F.No. 00127 79 ON/OFF

Alarm

Comments 79 ON/OFF (via system port) 79: CB ready monitoring window expired 79: Maximum dead time expired 79 1st cycle zone extension release 79 2nd cycle zone extension release 79 3rd cycle zone extension release 79 4th cycle zone extension release 79: Start-signal monitoring time expired 79: Synchro-check request 79 1st cycle running 79 2nd cycle running 79 3rd cycle running 79 4th or higher cycle running >AR: Sync. release from ext. sync.-check >79 External start of internal A/R 79: CB open with no trip 79: no starter configured 79: no cycle configured 79: blocking due to trip 79: blocking due to 3-phase pickup 79: action time expired before trip 79: max. no. of cycles exceeded 79: Close request to Control Function

02788 79 T-CBreadyExp 02810 79 TdeadMax Exp 02889 79 1.CycZoneRel 02890 79 2.CycZoneRel 02891 79 3.CycZoneRel 02892 79 4.CycZoneRel 02809 79 T-Start Exp 02865 79 Sync.Request 02844 79 1stCyc. run. 02845 79 2ndCyc. run. 02846 79 3rdCyc. run. 02847 79 4thCyc. run. 02731 >Sync.release 02711 >79 Start 02808 79 BLK: CB open 02823 79 no starter 02824 79 no cycle 02827 79 BLK by trip 02828 79 BLK:3ph p.u. 02829 79 Tact expired 02830 79 Max. No. Cyc 02899 79 CloseRequest

200

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Fault Location

2.14

Fault Location
Measurement of the distance to a short-circuit fault is an important feature of the 7SJ62/63/64 relay allowing faster determination of the fault location. Fault location is only possible if the device is connected to both current and voltage transformers.

2.14.1 Description of Fault Location

Initiation Fault location is initiated if the directional or non-directional overcurrent relay elements have initiated a trip signal. Once initiated, the fault locator determines the valid measurement loop and measurement window. Sampled pairs of values of short circuit current and short circuit voltage, are stored in a buffer, and made available for the impedance calculations R (Resistance) and X (Reactance). Measurement quantity filtering and the number of impedance calculations automatically adjust to the number of relevant measurement value pairs stored in the buffer. Fault location can also be initiated using a binary input as long as a directional or nondirectional overcurrent relay element has picked up. This feature allows fault location calculations to proceed even if another protective relay (load side relay, etc.) cleared the fault, (e.g. the internal time-overcurrent elements did not trip). Measurement Process The evaluation of the measured quantities takes place after the fault has been has been isolated and cleared. At least three result pairs of R and X are calculated from the stored and filtered measured quantities in accordance with the line equations. If fewer than three pairs of R and X are calculated, then the fault location feature will generate no information. Average and standard deviations are calculated from the result pairs. After eliminating questionable results, which are recognized via a large variance from the standard deviation, average values are calculated once again for X. This average is the fault reactance, and is proportional to the fault distance. Using the pickup of the overcurrent time elements (directional or non-directional), the valid measurement paths for the calculation of fault reactances are selected. The fault reactances can, of course, only be calculated for phase-to-ground paths if the device is connected to three current transformers connected in a grounded-wye configuration and three voltage transformers connected in a grounded-wye configuration. Table 2-17 shows the assignment of the evaluated paths to the possible pickup scenarios of the protective elements given that the device is supplied from three voltage transformers connected in a grounded-wye configuration. If the voltage transformers are connected in an open delta configuration, then Table 2-18 applies. Of course, no phase-to-ground paths can be measured in this case. In addition, paths are not available for further calculation if one of the two currents in a path are less than 10% of the other current in that path, or if any currents in the path are less than 10% of the nominal device current.

Path Selection

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

201

Functions

Table 2-17 Pickup A

Selection of Paths to be Reported for Wye-Connected Voltage Transformers Possible Paths AG, AB, CA Evaluated Paths AG or AG and least LL BG or BG and least LL Notes

BG, AB, BC

CG, CA, BC

CG or CG and least LL

If only one phase is picked up, then only the appropriate phase-toground path is displayed. If the reactances of one or both - paths are less than the -G reactance, then the - path with the least reactance is also displayed. Only the -G path with the least reactance is displayed.

AG, BG, CG

least LG

A, G B, G C, G A, B

AG BG CG AB, AG, BG

AG BG CG AB or AB and AG and BG

The appropriate phaseto-ground path is displayed

B, C

BC, BG, CG

A, C

CA, AG, CG

The appropriate - path is always displayed; if the reactance differential between the -G paths is BC or BC and BG and CG larger than 15% of the larger -G path, then both -G paths are also disCA or CA and AG and CG played. The appropriate - path is always displayed; if the reactance differential between the -G paths is BC or BC and BG and CG larger than 15% of the larger -G path, then both -G paths are also disCA or CA and AG and CG played.
AB or AB and AG and BG

A, B, G

AB, AG, BG

B, C, G

BC, BG, CG

A, C, G

CA, AG, CG

A, B, C A, B, C, G

AB, BC, CA AB, BC, CA

Least - path Least - path

Only the least - path is displayed.

202

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Fault Location

Table 2-18

Selection of Paths to be Reported for Open-Delta Connected Voltage Transformers Possible Paths AB, CA AB, BC CA, BC AB BC CA AB, BC, CA Evaluated Paths Notes

Pickup A B C A, B B, C A, C A, B, C

Least Least Least

AB BC CA Least - path The least - path is displayed. The appropriate - path is displayed. The least - path is displayed.

Result

As results of the fault location, the following results are displayed or obtained using DIGSI 4: One or more short circuit paths from which the fault reactance was derived. One or more reactances per phase in secondary. The fault distances, proportional to the reactances, in km or miles of line, converted on the basis of the lines predetermined reactance (entered at address 1105 or 1106, see Subsection 2.1.6). Note: The distance result, in miles or kilometers, can only be accurate for homogenous line sections. If the line is made up of several sections with different reactances, then the reactance derived by the fault location can be evaluated for a separate calculation of the fault distance. For transformers and motors, only the reactance result, not the distance result, is significant.

2.14.2 Setting The Functional Parameters

General The calculation of fault distance will only take place if address 0180 Fault Locator is set to Enabled. If the fault locating function is not needed, then address 0180 should be set to Disabled. Normally the fault location calculation is started when a protective element initiates a trip signal (8001 START = TRIP). However, address 8001 START is set to Pickup, fault location can be initiated just by the pickup of a protective element. Irrespective of this fact, calculation of the fault location can be started externally via binary input (FNo. 01106, >Start Flt. Loc).

Initiation

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

203

Functions

Line Constants

To calculate the fault distance in miles or kilometers, the device needs the per distance reactance of the line in /mile or /kilometer, expressed as a secondary quantity. These values were entered during setting of the general protection data under address 1105 or 1106 (see Subsection 2.1.6).

2.14.2.1 Settings for Fault Locator

Addr. 8001

Setting Title START

Setting Options Pickup TRIP

Default Setting Pickup

Comments Start fault locator with

2.14.2.2 Information List for Fault Location

F.No. 01106 >Start Flt. Loc 01118 Xsec = 01119 dist = 01123 FL Loop AG 01124 FL Loop BG 01125 FL Loop CG 01126 FL Loop AB 01127 FL Loop BC 01128 FL Loop CA 01132 Flt.Loc.invalid Alarm >Start Fault Locator Flt Locator: secondary REACTANCE Flt Locator: Distance to fault Fault Locator Loop AG Fault Locator Loop BG Fault Locator Loop CG Fault Locator Loop AB Fault Locator Loop BC Fault Locator Loop CA Fault location invalid Comments

204

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Breaker Failure Protection (50BF)

2.15

Breaker Failure Protection (50BF)

2.15.1 Description of Breaker Failure Protection

General The breaker failure protection function monitors the reaction of a circuit breaker to a trip signal. To determine if the circuit breaker has properly opened in response to a trip signal, one of the following methods is used to ascertain the status of the circuit breaker: The current flow through the circuit breaker. The position of a circuit breaker auxiliary contact. If after a programmable time delay, the circuit breaker has not opened, a breaker failure trip signal issued, and all adjacent circuit breakers that represent sources to the fault can be tripped (see Figure 2-71, as an example).

52

52

52

52
I>IMIN

Breaker Failure Protection Schalterversagerschutz

Protective Schutzfunktion Function Trip Figure 2-71

&

BF Ttrip

0 Trip BF

Functional Principle of the Breaker Failure Protection Function

Initiation

The breaker failure protection function can be initiated by two different sources: Internal protective function of the 7SJ62/63/64, External trip signals via binary inputs (>50BF ext SRC). For each of the two sources, a unique pickup message is generated, a unique time delay is initiated, and a unique tripping signal is generated. The setting values for breaker failure pickup and delay apply to both sources.

Criteria

The criteria used to determine if the circuit breaker has operated is selectable and should depend on the protective function that initiated the breaker failure function. If voltage protection initiated breaker failure protection, fault current may or may not be flowing through the circuit breaker, therefore, current flow through the circuit breaker is not a reliable indication as to whether the circuit breaker operated properly. In this case, the position of the breaker auxiliary contact should be used to determine if the circuit breaker properly operated. For protective functions that operate in response to

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

205

Functions

currents (e.g. directional and non-directional overcurrent protection, etc.), both the current flow through the circuit breaker and the position of the circuit breaker auxiliary contact can be used to determine if the circuit breaker properly operated. However, operation of a circuit breaker auxiliary contact does not always mean that the circuit breaker successfully cleared the fault current, therefore, the device can be programmed such that only the current flow criterion is used to determine breaker status. The current criterion is met if at least one of the three phase currents exceeds the current flow monitoring setting entered at address 0212 BkrClosed I MIN (see Subsection 2.1.3.4, Current Flow Monitoring). This pickup threshold is also used by other protective functions. Evaluation of the circuit breaker auxiliary contact depends on the type of contact(s), and how they are connected to the binary inputs: Both a and b type auxiliary contacts are connected. Only an a type auxiliary contact is connected. Only a b type auxiliary contact is connected. No auxiliary contact is connected. The circuit breaker condition can be detected prior to the initiation of a trip signal, depending on the configuration of binary inputs and auxiliary contacts. After a trip command has been issued it is the aim to detect whether the circuit breaker is open or in intermediate postion by means of the checkbacks of its auxiliary contacts. This information can be used to properly operate the breaker failure function. Logic If breaker failure is initiated, an alarm message is generated (50BF int Pickup or 50BF ext Pickup), and the breaker failure timer is started. Once the time delay elapses, a breaker failure trip signal is issued (50BF TRIP). The trip signal can be configured to one of the output relays. Figure 2-72 shows the logic diagram for the breaker failure protection scheme. It is possible to turn the entire breaker failure protection function on or off, or it can be blocked dynamically via binary inputs. If one of the criteria (current value, breaker auxiliary contacts) that led to pickup of the breaker failure scheme is no longer met during the time delay elapses, then breaker failure timer drops out and no trip signals are issued. To protect against nuisance tripping due to excessive contact bounce, a stabilization of the binary inputs for external trip signals takes place. This external signal must be present during the entire period of the delay time, otherwise the timer is reset and no tripping signal is issued.

206

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Breaker Failure Protection (50BF)

7004 Chk BRK CONTACT

1

OFF ON

>Configured 52-b >Configured 52-a FNo. 04602 >52-b FNo. 04601 >52-a

Evaluation of Aux. Cont.

No auxiliary contact is configured Interm. position CB closed

or

Release

Internal Source

64 TRIP 27 TRIP 59 TRIP

or

FNo. 01456 50BF int Pickup S Q R Q

&

or
&

7005 TRIP-Timer FNo. 01480 T 0 50BF int TRIP

General TRIP 0212 BkrCl I MIN

Max. of Ia, Ib, Ic

&

>

External Source FNo. 01457 50BF ext Pickup 7005 TRIP-Timer FNo. 01481 T 0 50BF ext TRIP

FNo. 01431 >50BF ext SRC

& &

0212 BkrCl I MIN

Max. of Ia, Ib, Ic

>
FNo. 01471 50BF TRIP

or
Measurement/Logic
FNo. 01403 >BLOCK 50BF 7001 FCT 50BF
1

FNo. 01452 50BF BLOCK

ON OFF

or

or

FNo. 01453 50BF ACTIVE FNo. 01451 50BF OFF

Figure 2-72

Logic Diagram for the Breaker Failure Protection

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

207

Functions

2.15.2 Programming Settings

General The breaker failure protection function is only effective and available if address 0170 50BF is set to Enabled. If the breaker failure function is not required, then address 0170 should be set to Disabled. The function can be turned ON or OFF under address 7001 FCT 50BF. Address 7004 Chk BRK CONTACT establishes whether or not a breaker auxiliary contact is used, via a binary input, to detect the position of a circuit breaker. If address 7004 is set to ON, then both the current flow through the circuit breaker and the position of the circuit breaker auxiliary contact are used to ascertain the position of the circuit breaker. This is important if the current is smaller than the configured current threshold (BkrClosed I MIN, address 0212) despite closed circuit breaker. The latter may apply if protective tripping was caused by a voltage measurement (e.g. 59, 27, 64). If these protective functions issue a trip command, the criteria for current and auxiliary contacts are linked by a logical OR operation. Without the auxiliary contact criterion the circuit breaker failure protection would not be able to take effect in this case. If address 7004 is set to OFF, only the current flow through the circuit breaker is used to indicate the position of the circuit breaker. The current flow monitoring setting programmed at address 0212 BkrClosed I MIN applies to all three phases, and should be selected such that it is at least 10 % below the smallest fault current the circuit breaker would interrupt when responding to trip signals initiated by protective relays. The setting at address 0212 should not be set too low, otherwise, the danger exists that equalization processes in the current transformer secondary circuit could lead to extended drop out times under conditions of extremely high current to be switched off. In addition, it should be noted that other protection functions depend on the current flow monitoring settings as well (e.g. voltage protection, overload protection, and restarting block for motors). Time Delay The breaker failure time delay setting is entered at address 7005 TRIP-Timer. This setting should be based on the circuit breaker interrupting time plus the dropout time of the current flow monitoring element plus a safety margin. Figure 2-73 illustrates the timing of a typical breaker failure scenario.

Criteria

Fault Occurs Normal Fault Clearing Time Trip. Time Current Flow Monitoring Safety Drop Out Time Time

Breaker Interrupting Time Breaker Failure Pickup

Breaker Failure Time Delay TRIPTimer (address 7005)

Backup Breaker Interruption Time (approx.)

Total Fault Clearing Time for Breaker Failure Condition

Figure 2-73

Time Chart for Typical Breaker Failure Operation

208

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Breaker Failure Protection (50BF)

2.15.2.1 Settings for Breaker Failure Protection

Addr. 7001 7004 7005 Setting Title FCT 50BF Chk BRK CONTACT TRIP-Timer OFF ON OFF ON 0.06..60.00 sec; Setting Options Default Setting OFF OFF 0.25 sec Comments 50BF Breaker Failure Protection Check Breaker contacts TRIP-Timer

2.15.2.2 Information List for Breaker Failure Protection

F.No. 01403 >BLOCK 50BF 01431 >50BF ext SRC 01451 50BF OFF 01452 50BF BLOCK 01453 50BF ACTIVE 01456 50BF int Pickup 01457 50BF ext Pickup 01471 50BF TRIP 01480 50BF int TRIP 01481 50BF ext TRIP Alarm >BLOCK 50BF >50BF initiated externally 50BF is switched OFF 50BF is BLOCKED 50BF is ACTIVE 50BF (internal) PICKUP 50BF (external) PICKUP 50BF TRIP 50BF (internal) TRIP 50BF (external) TRIP Comments

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

209

Functions

2.16

Synchronism and Voltage Check (7SJ64 only)

2.16.1 Functional Description

General When connecting two components of a power system, the synchronizing feature verifies that the start does not endanger the stabilty of the power system. Typical applications are for example the synchronization of a feeder and a busbar (see Figure 274) or the synchronization of two busbar sections via bus coupler (see Figure 2-75). The configuration decides whether the synchronism check is carried out only for automatic reclosing or only for circuit breaker control or both. It is also possible to specify different release criteria for automatic close or control close. Synchronous connection is always accomplished via the integrated control. For comparing the two voltages the synchronizing functions takes the reference voltage V1 and an additional voltage to be connected U2. The reference voltage U1 is connected to the multi-phase system. The voltage to be synchronized U2 is assigned to the single-phase connection and may be any phase-ground or phase-phase voltage.

Busbar

7SJ64

V2
3

V4 Va Vb Vc

V1

Infeed
Figure 2-74

Infeed

If a transformer is switched between the two VTs (Figure 2-74), its vector group can be adapted in the 7SJ64 relay so that external adaptors are not required. The synchronizing feature of 7SJ64 usually cooperates with the integrated automatic reclosing system and the control function. It is also possible to employ an external automatic reclosing system. In such a case signal exchange between the devices is accomplished via binary inputs and outputs.

210

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Synchronism and Voltage Check (7SJ64 only)

Busbar 1 Busbar 2

7SJ64

V2 V1

V4 Va Vb Vc

Figure 2-75

Bus coupler

Operating Modes

The synchronizing function can be operated in two modes: Synchrocheck Synchron/Asynchron Synchronous power systems exhibit small differences regarding phase angle and voltage modulus. The operating time of the circuit breaker doesnt have to be taken into account. The SYNCHROCHECK mode is used which corresponds to the classic synchrocheck function. To the contrary, asynchronous systems include bigger differences and the time window for switching on is passed more quickly. It is reasonable to consider the operating time of the circuit breaker. The ASYN/SYNCHRON mode is used.

Functional Sequence

The synchronizing function only opperates if it receives a measurement request. This request may be issued by the control, the automatic reclosing function or externally via binary input e.g., from an external automatic reclosing system. The measurement request initiates the measurement (message 25x meas.; with x = 1..4, according to the function group). Depending on the selected operating mode, the configured release conditions are then checked (see side titles Synchrocheck / Synchronous/ Asynchronous). Each condition is indicated explicitely ( messages 25 Vdiff ok, 25 fdiff ok, 25 adiff ok); also those conditions that are not fulfilled if, for example, voltage differences (messages 25 V2>V1, 25 V2<V1), frequency differences (messages 25 f2>f1, 25 f2<f1) or angle differences (messages 25 a2>a1, 25 a2<a1) are outside the threshold values. For these messages to be sent, both voltages must lie within the operating range of the synchronizing function (see side title Operating Range). These conditions met, the synchronizing function issues a release signal for closing the relay (25 CloseRelease). This release signal is generally processed by the

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

211

Functions

control which issues the actual close command for controlling the circuit breaker (see also side title Interaction with the Control). Measuring the synchronism conditions can be confined to the a maximum monitoring time T-SYN. DURATION. If the conditions are not fulfilled during T-SYN. DURATION, the release is cancelled (message 25 MonTimeExc). A new synchronization can only be performed if a new measurement request is received. Operating Range The operating range of the synchronizing function is defined by the configured voltage thresholds Vmin and Vmax, and the fixed frequency band fN 3 Hz. If measurement is started and one or both voltages are outside the operating range, or one voltage leaves the permissible range, corresponding messages indicate this behavior (25 f1>>, 25 f1<<, 25 V1>>, 25 V1<<, etc.). Synchrocheck Synchrocheck verifies the synchronism before connecting the two system components and cancels the connecting process if parameters for synchronism lie outside the configured thresholds. Before a release is granted, the following conditions are checked: Is the reference voltage V1 above the value Vmin but below the maximum voltage Vmax? Is the voltage V2 to be synchronized above the setting value Vmin but below the maximum voltage Vmax? Is the voltage difference V2 V1 within the permitted threshold dV ASYN V2>V1? Is the voltage difference V1 V2 within the permitted threshold dV ASYN V2<V1? Are the two frequencies f1 and f2 within the permitted operating range fN 3 Hz? Is the frequency difference f2 f1 within the permitted threshold df ASYN f2>f1? Is the frequency difference f1 f2 within the permitted threshold df ASYN f2<f1? Is the angle difference 2 1 within the permitted threshold da SYNC a2> a1? Is the angle difference 1 2 within the permitted thresholdda SYNC a2< a1? Synchronous/ Asynchronous The operating mode Synchronous/Asynchronous uses the frequency slip of the two power systems (parameter F SYNCHRON) to determine whether the to power systems are asynchronous to each other (Switching under Asynchronous System Conditions) or synchronous (Switching under Synchronous System Conditions). If they are asynchronous, the time window for switching is passed relatively quickly. Therefore, it is reasonable to take into account the operating time of the circuit breaker. Thus the device can issue the On command at a time where asynchronous conditions prevail. When the poles make contact the conditions will be synchronous. It is thus possible to generally account for the operating time of the circuit breaker i.e., also with synchronous conditions prevailing. Switching under Synchronous System Conditions Switching under synchronous conditions means that the On command will be released as soon as the characteristic data (voltage difference, angle difference) are within the thresholds specified by configuration.

212

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Synchronism and Voltage Check (7SJ64 only)

Before granting a release for closing under synchronous conditions, the following conditions are checked: Is the reference voltage V1 above the setting value Vmin but below the maximum voltage Vmax? Is the voltage V2 to be synchronized above the setting value Vmin but below the maximum voltage Vmax? Is the voltage difference V2 V1 within the permitted threshold dV ASYN V2>V1? Is the voltage difference V1 V2 within the permitted threshold dV ASYN V2<V1? Are the two frequencies f1 and f2 within the permitted operating range fN 3 Hz? Is the frequency difference smaller than the configured threshold frequency difference F SYNCHRON which defines the transition from synchronous to asynchronous systems. Is the angle difference 2 1 within the permitted threshold da SYNC a2> a1? Is the angle difference 1 2 within the permitted threshold da SYNC a2< a1? All synchronism conditions fulfilled, the message 25 Synchron is issued. Switching under Asynchronous System Conditions For switching under asynchronous system conditions the device determines the time for issuing the On command from the angle difference and the frequency difference such that the voltages (of busbar and feeder) are identical the instant the poles make contact. For this purpose the device must be informed on the operating time of the circuit breaker for closing. Before granting a release for closing, the following conditions are checked: Is the reference voltage V1 above the setting value Vmin but below the maximum voltage Vmax? Is the voltage V2 to be synchronized above the setting value Vmin but below the maximum voltage Vmax? Is the voltage difference V2 V1 within the permitted threshold dV ASYN V2>V1? Is the voltage difference V1 V2 within the permitted threshold dV ASYN V2<V1? Are the two frequencies f1 and f2 within the permitted operating range fN 3 Hz? Is the frequeny difference f2 f1 within the permitted threshold df ASYN f2>f1? Is the frequeny difference f1 f2 within the permitted threshold df ASYN f2<f1? When the check has been terminated successfully, the device determines the next synchronizing time from the angle difference and the frequency difference. The On command is issued at synchronization time minus operating time of the circuit breaker. De-energized Switching Connecting two components of a power system is also possible if at least one of the components is de-energized. Besides release under synchronous conditions, the following additional release conditions can be selected for the check: SYNC V1>V2< SYNC V1<V2> = Release of the condition that component V1 is energized and component V2 is de-energized. = Release of the condition stating that component V1 is deenergized and component V2 is energized.

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

213

Functions

SYNC V1<V2<

= Release of the condition stating that component V1 and component V2 are de-energized.

Each of these conditions can be enabled or disabled individually; combinations are also possible (e.g., release if SYNC V1>V2< or SYNC V1<V2> are fulfilled). The release conditions can be configured individually either for automatic reclosing or for manual closing. You can for example allow manual closing for synchronism or for de-energized feeder whereas before an automatic reclosing operation, checking only de-energized conditions at one feeder terminal and afterwards only synchronism at the other. The threshold below which a power system component is considered as de-energized is defined by parameter V<. If the measured voltage exceeds the threshold V>, it is energized. Before granting a release for connecting the energized component V1 and the off-circuit component V2, the following conditions are checked: Is the reference voltage V1 above thesetting value Vmin and V> but below the maximum voltage Vmax? Is the voltage to be synchronized V2 below the threshold V<? Is the frequeny f1 within the permitted operating range fN 3 Hz? After successful termination of the check the release is granted. Switching the de-energized component 1 to the energized component 2 or connecting the de-energized component 1 to the equally de-energized component 2 the conditions to be fulfilled are the same. The associated messages indicating the release via the corresponding condition are as follows: 25 V1< V2>, 25 V1> V2< and 25 V1< V2<. Via binary input >25 V1>V2<, >25 V1<V2> and >25 V1<V2< release conditions can be issued externally provided the synchronization is controlled externally. Parameter TSUP VOLTAGE (address 6x11A) can be set to configure a monitoring time which requires above stated release conditions to be at least fulfilled for de-energized connection before switching is allowed. Direct Command/ Blocking Parameter Direct CO can be set to grant a release without performing any checks. In this case switching is released by activating the allocated binary input >25direct CO. It is obviously not reasonable to combine Direct CO with other release conditions. Blocking the entire synchronizing function is possible via the binary input >BLK 25 CLOSE. This status is indicated via 25 CLOSE BLK. SYNC Function Groups The 7SJ64 relay comprises 4 synchronizing function groups (Function group 1 to 4) which each contain all setting parameters for one synchronizer. This includes the switchgear component for which the synchronization settings are to be applied. If no switchgear component is unambiguously identified here, the synchronizing function may be used as external synchronizing feature which must be triggered by binary input messages. Allocation of switchgear component and function group is accomplished using one of the binary inputs >25-1 act to >25-4 act.

214

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Synchronism and Voltage Check (7SJ64 only)

Selecting one SYNC function group several times, causes output of error message (25 FG-Error). Interaction with the Control Basically, the synchronizing feature interacts with the device control. The switchgear component to be synchronized is selected via a parameter. If an On-command is issued, the control accounts for the fact that the switchgear component requires synchronization. The control sends a measurement request (>25 Measu. Only) to the synchronizing function which is then started. Having completed the check, the synchronizing function issues the release message (25 CloseRelease) to which the control responds by terminating the switching operation positively or negatively (see Figure 2-76).

Close command (Remote / Local)

Synchronizing function SYNCFG1 Q0

Control

Meas. request

Release SYNCFG2 Switchgear component Q0 SYNCFG3 SYNCFG4

Figure 2-76

Interaction of control and synchronizing function

Interaction with Automatic Reclosing

IThe automatic reclosing function can also interact with the synchronizing function. They are linked via the device control. The selection is made via parameters of the automatic reclosing function. Thereby you can determine which switch is activated and which function group (FG) is used. If no function group is entered, the close command of the auto reclose function is carried out in unsychronized form. Equally, the command 79 Close (message 02851) allows only unsynchronized switching. If the circuit breaker Q0 is configured as switching component, a close command of the automatic reclosing function will address this breaker and assign it a close command which will be processed by the control. As this breaker requires synchronization, the control launches the synchronizing function and awaits release. The configured conditions fulfilled, the release is granted and the control issues the close command (see Figure 2-77).

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

215

Functions

79 / SYNC FG2 Q0

Synchronizing function SYNCFG1

Control

Meas. request

SYNCFG2 AWE Q0

Release 79 Close (always asynchronized) Switchgear component Q0

SYNCFG3 SYNCFG4

Figure 2-77

Connection of the automatic reclosing function to the synchronizing function

Interaction with External Control

As another option the synchronizing function can be activated via external measurement request. The synchronizing function can be started via binary input using a measurement request (>25 Measu. Only or >25 Start and >25 Stop). After the synchronizing function has completed the check, issues a release message (25 CloseRelease, see Figure 2-78).

Synchronizing function 7SJ64 SYNCFG1 Q0

ext. measurement request (via: >25 Measu. Only or >25 Start and >25 Stop)

SYNCFG2 Release (25 CloseRelease)

Figure 2-78

SYNCFG3 SYNCFG4

Interaction of synchronizing functionand external control

Measured Values

The measured values of the synchronizing function are displayed in separate boxes for primary and secondary measured values and percentages. The measured values

216

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Synchronism and Voltage Check (7SJ64 only)

are displayed and updated only while a synchronizing function is being called. The following values are displayed: value of the reference voltage V1 value of the voltage to be synchronized V2 Frequency values f1 and f2 Differences of voltage, frequency and angle. The models featuring a four-line display have a preset default display which shows the above mentioned measured values comprised on one display (see Figure A-75 of the Appendix A.4.5).

2.16.2 Functional Settings

General The synchronizing function is only included in the 7SJ64 relay with its 4 voltage inputs. While setting the power system data (see Subsection 2.1.3) the device was already provided with data relevant for the measured values and the operating principle of the synchronizing function. This concerns the following parameters: 0202 Vnom PRIMARY 0203 Vnom SECONDARY 0213 VT Connection primary nominal voltage of the voltage transformers V1 (phase-to-phase) in kV; secondary nominal voltage of the voltage transformers V1 (phase-to-phase) in V; determines how voltage transformers are connected;

0214 Rated Frequency the operating range of the synchronizing function refers to the rated frequency of the power system (fN 3 Hz); The synchronizing function can only operate if enabled under at least one of the addresses 0161 25 Function 1 through 0164 25 Function 4 during configuration of the functional scope (see Subsection 2.1.1). The operating mode can be preselected: ASYN/SYNCHRON means that switching will take place under synchronous and asynchronous conditions. SYNCHROCHECK corresponds to the classic synchrocheck function. If not required, this function is set to Disabled. A synchronizing function group thus rendered ineffective is hidden at the menu item Synchronization, all others are shown. Only the corresponding messages of Function Group 1 are pre-allocated for IEC 608705103 (VDEW). If other function groups (2 to 4) are configured and if their messages are to be disposed of via VDEW, the must first be configured to the the system interface. Selecting one of the displayed SYNC function groups in DIGSI 4 opens a dialog box with the tabs General, Power System Data, Asynchronous Conditions, Synchronous Conditions and Synchrocheck in which the individual settings for synchronization can be made. For SYNC function group x the following holds:

2.16.2.1 General Settings The general thresholds for the synchronizing function are set at addresses 6x01 through 6x12.

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

217

Functions

Address 6x01 Synchronizing X can be set to switch the entire synchronous function group x ON or OFF. If switched off, the synchronous check does not verify the synchronizing conditions and release is not granted. Address 6x02 SyncCB is used to select the switchgear component to which the synchronizing settings will be applied. Select the option none to use the function as external synchronizing feature. It will then be triggered via binary input messages. Addresses 6x03 Vmin and 6x04 Vmax set the upper and lower limits for the request band for voltages V1 or V2 and thus determine the operating range for the synchronizing function. If the values leave this band, a message will be output. Address 6x05 V< indicates the voltage threshold below which the feeder or the busbar can safely be considered switched off (for checking a de-energized feeder or busbar). Address 6x06 V> indicates the voltage threshold above which the feeder or busbar can safely be considered energized (for checking an energized feeder or busbar). It must be set below the anticipated operational undervoltage. The setting for the mentioned voltage values is made secondary in volts. When using the PC and DIGSI 4 for configuration, these values can also be entered as primary values. Depending on the connection of the voltages these are phase-ground voltages or phase-phase voltages. Addresses 6x07 to 6x10 are set to specify the release conditions for the closing check: 6x07 SYNC V1<V2> = Component V1 must be de-energized, component V2 must be energized (connection to reference without voltage, dead line); = Component V1 must be energized, component V2 must be de-energized (connection to feeder without voltage, dead bus); = Both V1 and V2 must be without voltage (connection reference and feeder without voltage, dead bus/dead bus); = Command is released without checks.

6x08 SYNC V1>V2<

6x09 SYNC V1<V2<

6x10A Direct CO

The possible release conditions are independent of each other and can be combined. Parameter TSUP VOLTAGE (address 6x11A) can be used to set a monitoring time which requires above mentioned additional release conditions to be fulfilled at least before release is granted for switching without voltage The preset value of 0.1 s accounts for transient responses and can be applied without modification. Release via synchronous check can be limited to a configurable synchronous monitoring time T-SYN. DURATION (address 6x12). The configured conditions must be fulfilled within this time or release is not granted and the synchronizing function is shed. If this time is set to , the conditions will be checked until they are fulfilled.

218

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Synchronism and Voltage Check (7SJ64 only)

2.16.2.2 Power System Data The power system data for the synchronizing function are set at addresses 6x20 through 6x25. The circuit breaker closing time T-CB close at address 6x20 is required if the device is to close also under asynchronous system conditions, no matter whether for manual closing, for automatic reclosing after three-pole tripping, or for both. The device will then calculate the time for the close command such that the voltages are synchronous the instant the breaker poles make contact. Please note this includes the operating time of the breaker and also the pickup time of an auxiliary relay that may be connected on line side. The parameter Balancing V1/V2 (adress 6x21) can be set to account for different CT ratios of the two parts of the power system (see example in Figure 2-79). If a transformer is located between the system parts to be synchronized, its vector group can be accounted for by angle adjustment so that no external adjusting measures are required. Parameter ANGLE ADJUSTM. (address 6x22A) is used to this end. The phase angle from V1 to V2 is evaluated positively. Example (see also Figure 2-79): Busbar 400 kV primary 100 Vsecondary Feeder 220 kVprimary 110 Vsecondary Transformer 400 kV/220 kV Vector group Dy(n) 5 The transformer vector group is defined from the high side to the low side. In the example, the reference voltage transformers (V1) are the ones of the transformer high side of i.e., the angle 5 x 30 (according to vector group) that is 150: Address 6x22A: ANGLE ADJUSTM. = 150. The reference voltage transformers supply 100 V secondary for primary operation at nominal value while the feeder transformer supplies 110 V secondary. Therefore, this difference must be balanced: Address 6x21: Balancing V1/V2 = 100 V/110 V = 0.91.

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

219

Functions

L1 L2 L3

Feeder 220 kV

Dy5 400 kV/220 kV

220 kV 110 V (any voltage) U2

400 kV/100 V

UL1 UL2 UL3 U1

VT Connection = Van,Vbn,Vcn,VSy CONNECTIONof V2 = A-B ANGLE ADJUSTM. = 150 Balancing V1/V2 = 0.91

Busbar 400 kV Figure 2-79 Busbar voltage measured via transformer

Connections

7SJ64 provides three voltage inputs for connection of the voltage V1 and one voltage input for voltage V2 (see Figure 2-80 and Figure 2-79). According to definition, the three-phase voltage is the reference voltage V1. To compare the three-phase voltage V1 and the voltage V2 correctly with each other, the device must be informed on the connection type of the voltage V2. Address CONNECTIONof V2 assumes this task (parameter 6x23).
7SJ64 R15 R17 R18 R16 R13 R14 va Vb Vc V4

Voltage V1

Voltage V2

Figure 2-80

Connection of V1 and V2 at device

For the device to perform the internal conversion to primary values, the primary rated transformer voltage of the measured quantity V2 must be entered via parameter 6x25 VT Vn2, primary if a transformer is located between the system parts to be synchronized.

220

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Synchronism and Voltage Check (7SJ64 only)

2.16.2.3 Asynchronous Conditions The synchronizing function 7SJ64 can issue a close command also for asynchronous power systems such that, considering the circuit breaker operating time (address 6x20), the power systems are coupled when the phases are equal. Parameters 6x30 dV ASYN V2>V1 and 6x31 dV ASYN V2<V1 can be set to adjust the permissible voltage differences asymmetrically. Parameters 6x32 df ASYN f2>f1 and 6x33 df ASYN f2<f1 limit the operating range for asynchronous switching. These two parameters enable an asymmetrical switching range to be set.

2.16.2.4 Synchronous Conditions Address 6x40 SYNC PERMIS. activates or deactivate the connection under synchronous system conditions (YES) or (NO). Address 6x41 F SYNCHRON is an automatic threshold between synchronous and asynchronous switching. If the frequency difference is below the specified threshold, the power systems are considered synchronous and the conditions for synchronous switching apply. If it is above the threshold, the switching is asynchronous and the anticipated in-phase time is calculated. Address 6x42 dV SYNC V2>V1 and 6x43 dV SYNC V2<V1 can be used to set the permissible voltage differences asymmetrically. Address 6x44 da SYNC a2> a1 and 6x45 da SYNC a2< a1 confine the operating range for synchronous switching. These two parameters allow an asymmetrical switching range to be configured (see Figure 2-81). Moreover, the release time delay T SYNC-DELAY (address 6x46) can be set for which all synchronous conditions must at least be fulfilled for the closing command to be generated after expiration of this time.

Im Frequency difference < Parameter 6x41

6x42 dV SYNC V2>V1 6x43 dV SYNC V2<V1 6x44 da SYNC a2> a1

Switch-on range
U1 U2

Re
6x45 da SYNC a2< a1

Figure 2-81

Switching under synchronous system conditions

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

221

Functions

6x42 dV SYNC V2>V1 6x30 dV ASYN V2>V1

asynchronous operating range

synchronous operating range

6x41 F SYNCHRON

f
6x32 df ASYN f2>f1 6x33 df ASYN f2<f1

6x31 dV ASYN V2<V1

6x43 dV SYNC V2<V1

Figure 2-82

Operating range under synchronous and asynchronous conditions for voltage (V) and frequency (f)

2.16.2.5 Synchrocheck Address 6x50 dV SYNCHK V2>V1 and 6x51 dV SYNCHK V2<V1 can be used to configure the permitted voltage difference also asymmetrically. The availability of two parameters enables an asymmetrical switch-on range to be set. Address 6x52 df SYNCHK f2>f1 and 6x53 df SYNCHK f2<f1 determine the permissible frequency differences. The availability of two parameters enables an asymmetrical switch-on range to be set. Addresses 6x54 da SYNCHK a2>a1 and 6x55 da SYNCHK a2<a1 confine the operating range for synchronous switching. The availability of two parameters enables an asymmetrical switch-on range to be set.

2.16.3 Settings
Addr. 6x01 6x02 6x03 6x04 6x05 6x06 Setting Title Synchronizing SyncCB Vmin Vmax V< V> 20..125 V 20..140 V 1..60 V 20..140 V 90 V 110 V 5V 80 V ON OFF Setting Options Default Setting OFF Comments Synchronizing Function Synchronizable circuit breaker Minimum voltage limit: Vmin Maximum voltage limit: Vmax Threshold V1, V2 without voltage Threshold V1, V2 with voltage

222

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Synchronism and Voltage Check (7SJ64 only)

Addr. 6x07 6x08 6x09 6x10A 6x11A 6x12 6x20 6x21 6x22A 6x23

Setting Title SYNC V1<V2> SYNC V1>V2< SYNC V1<V2< Direct CO TSUP VOLTAGE YES NO YES NO YES NO YES NO

Setting Options

Default Setting NO NO NO NO 0.1 sec 30.00 sec 0.06 sec 1.00 0 A-B

Comments ON-Command at V1< and V2> ON-Command at V1> and V2< ON-Command at V1< and V2> Direct ON-Command Supervision time of V1>;V2> or V1<;V2< Maximum duration of Synchronization Closing (operating) time of CB Balancing factor V1/V2 Angle adjustment (transformer) Connection of V2

0.0..60.0 sec

T-SYN. DURATION 0.01..1200.00 sec; T-CB close Balancing V1/V2 ANGLE ADJUSTM. 0.01..0.60 sec 0.50..2.00 0..360

CONNECTIONof V2 A-G B-G C-G A-B B-C C-A VT Vn2, primary dV ASYN V2>V1 dV ASYN V2<V1 df ASYN f2>f1 df ASYN f2<f1 SYNC PERMIS. F SYNCHRON dV SYNC V2>V1 dV SYNC V2<V1 d SYNC 2> 1 d SYNC 2< 1 0.10..800.00 kV 0.5..40.0 V 0.5..40.0 V 0.01..2.00 Hz 0.01..2.00 Hz YES NO 0.01..0.04 Hz 0.5..40.0 V 0.5..40.0 V 2..80 2..80

6x25 6x30 6x31 6x32 6x33 6x40 6x41 6x42 6x43 6x44 6x45

12.00 kV 2.0 V 2.0 V 0.10 Hz 0.10 Hz YES 0.01 Hz 5.0 V 5.0 V 10 10

VT nominal voltage V2, primary Maximum voltage difference V2>V1 Maximum voltage difference V2<V1 Maximum frequency difference f2>f1 Maximum frequency difference f2<f1 Switching at synchronous conditions Frequency threshold ASYN <--> SYN Maximum voltage difference V2>V1 Maximum voltage difference V2<V1 Maximum angle difference alpha2>alpha1 Maximum angle difference alpha2<alpha1

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

223

Functions

Addr. 6x46 6x50 6x51 6x52 6x53 6x54 6x55

Setting Title T SYNC-DELAY

Setting Options 0.00..60.00 sec

Default Setting 0.00 sec 5.0 V 5.0 V 0.10 Hz 0.10 Hz 10 10

Comments Release delay at synchronous conditions Maximum voltage difference V2>V1 Maximum voltage difference V2<V1 Maximum frequency difference f2>f1 Maximum frequency difference f2<f1 Maximum angle difference alpha2>alpha1 Maximum angle difference alpha2<alpha1

dV SYNCHK V2>V1 0.5..40.0 V dV SYNCHK V2<V1 0.5..40.0 V df SYNCHK f2>f1 df SYNCHK f2<f1 0.01..2.00 Hz 0.01..2.00 Hz

d SYNCHK 2>1 2..80 d SYNCHK 2<1 2..80

2.16.4 List of Information

The following table lists the alarms of SYNC function group 1. Alarms of function groups 2 to 4 are nearly the same, only their group number is different.
F.No. 170.0001 >25-1 act 170.2008 >BLK 25-1 170.2102 >BLK 25 CLOSE 170.2009 >25direct CO 170.0043 >25 Measu. Only 170.2011 >25 Start 170.2012 >25 Stop 170.2013 >25 V1>V2< 170.2014 >25 V1<V2> 170.2015 >25 V1<V2< 170.2007 25 Measu. req. 170.0049 25 CloseRelease 170.0050 25 Sync. Error 170.2022 25-1 meas. 170.0051 25-1 BLOCK Alarm >25-group 1 activate >BLOCK 25-group 1 >BLOCK 25 CLOSE command >25 Direct Command output >25 Sync. Measurement Only >25 Start of synchronization >25 Stop of synchronization >25 Switch to V1> and V2< >25 Switch to V1< and V2> >25 Switch to V1< and V2< 25 Sync. Measuring request of Control 25 Sync. Release of CLOSE Command 25 Synchronization Error 25-group 1: measurement in progress 25-group 1 is BLOCKED Comments

224

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Synchronism and Voltage Check (7SJ64 only)

F.No. 170.2103 25 CLOSE BLK 170.2101 25-1 OFF 170.2025 25 MonTimeExc 170.2026 25 Synchron 170.2027 25 V1< V2> 170.2028 25 V1> V2< 170.2029 25 V1< V2< 170.2030 25 Vdiff ok 170.2031 25 fdiff ok 170.2032 25 diff ok 170.2033 25 f1>> 170.2034 25 f1<< 170.2035 25 f2>> 170.2036 25 f2<< 170.2037 25 V1>> 170.2038 25 V1<< 170.2039 25 V2>> 170.2040 25 V2<< 170.2090 25 V2>V1 170.2091 25 V2<V1 170.2092 25 f2>f1 170.2093 25 f2<f1 170.2094 25 2>1 170.2095 25 2<1 170.2096 25 FG-Error 170.2097 25 Set-Error 170.2050 V1 = 170.2051 f1 = 170.2052 V2 = 170.2053 f2 = 170.2054 dV = 170.2055 df = 170.2056 d =

Alarm

Comments 25 CLOSE command is BLOCKED Sync-group 1 is switched OFF 25 Monitoring time exceeded 25 Synchronization conditions okay 25 Condition V1<V2> fulfilled 25 Condition V1>V2< fulfilled 25 Condition V1<V2< fulfilled 25 Voltage difference (Vdiff) okay 25 Frequency difference (fdiff) okay 25 Angle difference (alphadiff) okay 25 Frequency f1 > fmax permissible 25 Frequency f1 < fmin permissible 25 Frequency f2 > fmax permissible 25 Frequency f2 < fmin permissible 25 Voltage V1 > Umax permissible 25 Voltage V1 < Umin permissible 25 Voltage V2 > Umax permissible 25 Voltage V2 < Umin permissible 25 Vdiff too large (V2>V1) 25 Vdiff too large (V2<V1) 25 fdiff too large (f2>f1) 25 fdiff too large (f2<f1) 25 alphadiff too large (a2>a1) 25 alphadiff too large (a2<a1) 25 Multiple selection of func-groups 25 Setting error V1 = f1 = V2 = f2 = dV = df = dalpha =

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

225

Functions

2.17

Temperature Detection via RTD-boxes

Up to two temperature detection units (RTD-boxes) with 12 measuring sensors in total can be applied for temperature detection and are recognized by the device. In particular they enable the thermal status of motors, generators and transformers to be monitored. Rotating machines are additionally monitored for a violation of the bearing temperature thresolds. The temperatures are measured in different locations of the protected object by employing temperature sensors (RTD = Resistance Temperature Detector) and are transmitted to the device via one or two RTD-boxes 7XV566.

Interaction with the Overload Protection

The ambient temperature or coolant temperature can be transmitted to the overload protection of the device via the RTD-box. The temperature detector required for this purpose must be connected to the detector input 1 of the first RTD-box (corresponds to RTD 1).

2.17.1 Functional Description

RTD-box 7XV56 The RTD-box 7XV566 is an external unit which is mounted on the top-hat rail. It features 6 temperature detectors and one RS485 interface for communication with the protection device. The RTD-box detects the coolant temperature of each measuring point from the resistance value of the temperature detectors (Pt100, Ni100 or Ni120) connected via a two- or three-wire lines and converts it to a digital value. The digital values are held available at a serial port. The protection device can employ up to two RTD-boxes via its service port (port C), 7SJ64 also via the additional port (port D). A maximum of 12 temperature detectors is thus available. For greater distances to the protection device the communication via fibre optic cables is recommend. Possible communication structures are shown in Appendix A.3.4. The transmitted non-linearized temperature values are converted to a temperature in degree Celsius or Fahrenheit. The conversion depends on the temperature sensor used. For each temperature detector two thresholds decision can be performed which are available for further processing. The user can make the corresponding allocations in the configuration matrix. An alarm is issued for each temperature sensor in the event of a short-circuit or interruption in the sensor circuit. Figure 2-83 shows the logic diagram of the temperature processing. The manual supplied with the RTD-box contains a connections diagram and dimensioned drawing.

Communication with the Protection Device

Processing Temperatures

226

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Temperature Detection via RTD-boxes

9011A RTD 1 TYPE

9013 RTD 1 STAGE 1

Non-linearized values

Temperature calculation

RTD 1 St.1 p.up

FNo. 14112

9015 RTD 1 STAGE 2

RTD 1 St.2 p.up

FNo. 14113

Monitoring

Fail: RTD 1
FNo. 14111

Fail: RTD
FNo. 14101

Fail: RTD-Box 1
FNo. 00264

Figure 2-83

Logic diagram of the temperature processing for the RTD-box 1

2.17.2 Configuration Notes

General Temperature detection is only effective and accessible if this function was allocated to an interface during configuration of the protective functions (Subsection 2.1.1). At address 0190 RTD-BOX INPUT the RTD-box(es) is allocated to the interface at which it will be operated (e.g. port C). The number of sensor inputs and the communication mode were set at address 0191 RTD CONNECTION. The temperature unit (C or F) was set in the Power System Data 1 at address 0276 TEMP. UNIT. The settings are the same for each input and are here shown at the example of measuring input 1. Set the type of temperature detector for RTD1 (temperature sensor for measuring point 1) at address 9011A RTD 1 TYPE. You can choose between Pt 100 W, Ni 120 W and Ni 100 W. If no temperature detector is available for RTD1, set RTD 1 TYPE = Not connected. This setting is only possible via DIGSI 4 at Additional Settings.

Device Settings

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

227

Functions

The mounting location of RTD1 is set at address 9012A RTD 1 LOCATION. You can choose between Oil, Ambient, Winding, Bearing and Other. This setting is only possible via DIGSI 4 at Additional Settings. Furthermore, you can set an alarm temperature and a tripping temperature. Dependingn on the temperature unit selected in Power System Data (section below address 0276 TEMP. UNIT), you can enter the alarm temperature at address 9013 RTD 1 STAGE 1 in degree Celsius (C) or in degree Fahrenheit (F) at address 9014 RTD 1 STAGE 1. The tripping temperature is set at address 9015 RTD 1 STAGE 2 in degree Celsius (C) or degree Fahrenheit (F) at address 9016 RTD 1 STAGE 2. The settings for the all other connected temperature detectors are made accordingly (see Settings 2.17.2.1). RTD-box Settings If temperature detectors are used with two-wire connection, the line resistance (for short-circuited temperature detector) must be measured and adjusted. For this purpose, select mode 6 in the RTD-box and enter the resistance value for the corresponding temperature detector (range 0 to 50.6 ). If a 3-wire connection is used, no further settings are required to this end. A baudrate of 9600 bits/s ensures communication. Parity is even. The factory setting of the bus number 0. Modifications at the RTD-box can be made in mode 7. The following convention applies:
Table 2-19 Mode simplex half duplex half duplex Setting the bus address at the RTD-box Number of RTD-boxes 1 1 2 Address 0 1 1st RTD-box: 1 2nd RTD-box: 2

Further information is provided in the operating manual of the RTD-box. Processing Measured Values and Messages The RTD-box is visible in DIGSI 4 as part of the 7SJ62/63/64 relays i.e., messages and measured values are displayed in the configuration matrix besides the internal functions and like them they can be masked and processed. Messages and measured values can thus be forwarded to the integrated user-defined logic (CFC) and interconnected as desired. If it is desired that a message should appear in the event buffer, a cross must be entered in the intersecting box of column/row.

228

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Temperature Detection via RTD-boxes

2.17.2.1 Settings

Addr. 9011A

Setting Title RTD 1 TYPE

Setting Options not connected Pt 100 Ohm Ni 120 Ohm Ni 100 Ohm Oil Ambient Winding Bearing Other -50..250 C; -58..482 F; -50..250 C; -58..482 F; not connected Pt 100 Ohm Ni 120 Ohm Ni 100 Ohm Oil Ambient Winding Bearing Other -50..250 C; -58..482 F; -50..250 C; -58..482 F; not connected Pt 100 Ohm Ni 120 Ohm Ni 100 Ohm Oil Ambient Winding Bearing Other

Default Setting Pt 100 Ohm

Comments RTD 1: Type

9012A

RTD 1 LOCATION

Oil

RTD 1: Location

9013 9014 9015 9016 9021A

RTD 1 STAGE 1 RTD 1 STAGE 1 RTD 1 STAGE 2 RTD 1 STAGE 2 RTD 2 TYPE

100 C 212 F 120 C 248 F not connected

RTD 1: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup RTD 1: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup RTD 1: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup RTD 1: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup RTD 2: Type

9022A

RTD 2 LOCATION

Other

RTD 2: Location

9023 9024 9025 9026 9031A

RTD 2 STAGE 1 RTD 2 STAGE 1 RTD 2 STAGE 2 RTD 2 STAGE 2 RTD 3 TYPE

100 C 212 F 120 C 248 F not connected

RTD 2: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup RTD 2: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup RTD 2: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup RTD 2: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup RTD 3: Type

9032A

RTD 3 LOCATION

Other

RTD 3: Location

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

229

Functions

Addr. 9033 9034 9035 9036 9041A

Setting Title RTD 3 STAGE 1 RTD 3 STAGE 1 RTD 3 STAGE 2 RTD 3 STAGE 2 RTD 4 TYPE

Setting Options -50..250 C; -58..482 F; -50..250 C; -58..482 F; not connected Pt 100 Ohm Ni 120 Ohm Ni 100 Ohm Oil Ambient Winding Bearing Other -50..250 C; -58..482 F; -50..250 C; -58..482 F; not connected Pt 100 Ohm Ni 120 Ohm Ni 100 Ohm Oil Ambient Winding Bearing Other -50..250 C; -58..482 F; -50..250 C; -58..482 F; not connected Pt 100 Ohm Ni 120 Ohm Ni 100 Ohm

Default Setting 100 C 212 F 120 C 248 F not connected

Comments RTD 3: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup RTD 3: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup RTD 3: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup RTD 3: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup RTD 4: Type

9042A

RTD 4 LOCATION

Other

RTD 4: Location

9043 9044 9045 9046 9051A

RTD 4 STAGE 1 RTD 4 STAGE 1 RTD 4 STAGE 2 RTD 4 STAGE 2 RTD 5 TYPE

100 C 212 F 120 C 248 F not connected

RTD 4: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup RTD 4: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup RTD 4: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup RTD 4: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup RTD 5: Type

9052A

RTD 5 LOCATION

Other

RTD 5: Location

9053 9054 9055 9056 9061A

RTD 5 STAGE 1 RTD 5 STAGE 1 RTD 5 STAGE 2 RTD 5 STAGE 2 RTD 6 TYPE

100 C 212 F 120 C 248 F not connected

RTD 5: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup RTD 5: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup RTD 5: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup RTD 5: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup RTD 6: Type

230

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Temperature Detection via RTD-boxes

Addr. 9062A

Setting Title RTD 6 LOCATION

Setting Options Oil Ambient Winding Bearing Other -50..250 C; -58..482 F; -50..250 C; -58..482 F; not connected Pt 100 Ohm Ni 120 Ohm Ni 100 Ohm Oil Ambient Winding Bearing Other -50..250 C; -58..482 F; -50..250 C; -58..482 F; not connected Pt 100 Ohm Ni 120 Ohm Ni 100 Ohm Oil Ambient Winding Bearing Other -50..250 C; -58..482 F; -50..250 C;

Default Setting Other

Comments RTD 6: Location

9063 9064 9065 9066 9071A

RTD 6 STAGE 1 RTD 6 STAGE 1 RTD 6 STAGE 2 RTD 6 STAGE 2 RTD 7 TYPE

100 C 212 F 120 C 248 F not connected

RTD 6: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup RTD 6: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup RTD 6: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup RTD 6: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup RTD 7: Type

9072A

RTD 7 LOCATION

Other

RTD 7: Location

9073 9074 9075 9076 9081A

RTD 7 STAGE 1 RTD 7 STAGE 1 RTD 7 STAGE 2 RTD 7 STAGE 2 RTD 8 TYPE

100 C 212 F 120 C 248 F not connected

RTD 7: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup RTD 7: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup RTD 7: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup RTD 7: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup RTD 8: Type

9082A

RTD 8 LOCATION

Other

RTD 8: Location

9083 9084 9085

RTD 8 STAGE 1 RTD 8 STAGE 1 RTD 8 STAGE 2

100 C 212 F 120 C

RTD 8: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup RTD 8: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup RTD 8: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

231

Functions

Addr. 9086 9091A

Setting Title RTD 8 STAGE 2 RTD 9 TYPE

Setting Options -58..482 F; not connected Pt 100 Ohm Ni 120 Ohm Ni 100 Ohm Oil Ambient Winding Bearing Other -50..250 C; -58..482 F; -50..250 C; -58..482 F; not connected Pt 100 Ohm Ni 120 Ohm Ni 100 Ohm Oil Ambient Winding Bearing Other -50..250 C; -58..482 F; -50..250 C; -58..482 F; not connected Pt 100 Ohm Ni 120 Ohm Ni 100 Ohm Oil Ambient Winding Bearing Other -50..250 C;

Default Setting 248 F not connected

Comments RTD 8: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup RTD 9: Type

9092A

RTD 9 LOCATION

Other

RTD 9: Location

9093 9094 9095 9096 9101A

RTD 9 STAGE 1 RTD 9 STAGE 1 RTD 9 STAGE 2 RTD 9 STAGE 2 RTD10 TYPE

100 C 212 F 120 C 248 F not connected

RTD 9: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup RTD 9: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup RTD 9: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup RTD 9: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup RTD10: Type

9102A

RTD10 LOCATION

Other

RTD10: Location

9103 9104 9105 9106 9111A

RTD10 STAGE 1 RTD10 STAGE 1 RTD10 STAGE 2 RTD10 STAGE 2 RTD11 TYPE

100 C 212 F 120 C 248 F not connected

RTD10: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup RTD10: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup RTD10: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup RTD10: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup RTD11: Type

9112A

RTD11 LOCATION

Other

RTD11: Location

9113

RTD11 STAGE 1

100 C

RTD11: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup

232

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Temperature Detection via RTD-boxes

Addr. 9114 9115 9116 9121A

Setting Title RTD11 STAGE 1 RTD11 STAGE 2 RTD11 STAGE 2 RTD12 TYPE

Setting Options -58..482 F; -50..250 C; -58..482 F; not connected Pt 100 Ohm Ni 120 Ohm Ni 100 Ohm Oil Ambient Winding Bearing Other -50..250 C; -58..482 F; -50..250 C; -58..482 F;

Default Setting 212 F 120 C 248 F not connected

Comments RTD11: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup RTD11: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup RTD11: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup RTD12: Type

9122A

RTD12 LOCATION

Other

RTD12: Location

9123 9124 9125 9126

RTD12 STAGE 1 RTD12 STAGE 1 RTD12 STAGE 2 RTD12 STAGE 2

100 C 212 F 120 C 248 F

RTD12: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup RTD12: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup RTD12: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup RTD12: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup

2.17.2.2 List of Information Note: Further alarms regarding thresholds of the individual temperature detectors are available at the RTD-box for output via relay contacts.
F.No. 00264 Fail: RTD-Box 1 14101 Fail: RTD 14111 Fail: RTD 1 14112 RTD 1 St.1 p.up 14113 RTD 1 St.2 p.up 14121 Fail: RTD 2 14122 RTD 2 St.1 p.up 14123 RTD 2 St.2 p.up 14131 Fail: RTD 3 14132 RTD 3 St.1 p.up 14133 RTD 3 St.2 p.up 14141 Fail: RTD 4 Alarm Failure: RTD-Box 1 Fail: RTD (broken wire/shorted) Fail: RTD 1 (broken wire/shorted) RTD 1 Temperature stage 1 picked up RTD 1 Temperature stage 2 picked up Fail: RTD 2 (broken wire/shorted) RTD 2 Temperature stage 1 picked up RTD 2 Temperature stage 2 picked up Fail: RTD 3 (broken wire/shorted) RTD 3 Temperature stage 1 picked up RTD 3 Temperature stage 2 picked up Fail: RTD 4 (broken wire/shorted) Comments

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

233

Functions

F.No. 14142 RTD 4 St.1 p.up 14143 RTD 4 St.2 p.up 14151 Fail: RTD 5 14152 RTD 5 St.1 p.up 14153 RTD 5 St.2 p.up 14161 Fail: RTD 6 14162 RTD 6 St.1 p.up 14163 RTD 6 St.2 p.up 00267 Fail: RTD-Box 2 14171 Fail: RTD 7 14172 RTD 7 St.1 p.up 14173 RTD 7 St.2 p.up 14181 Fail: RTD 8 14182 RTD 8 St.1 p.up 14183 RTD 8 St.2 p.up 14191 Fail: RTD 9 14192 RTD 9 St.1 p.up 14193 RTD 9 St.2 p.up 14201 Fail: RTD10

Alarm

Comments RTD 4 Temperature stage 1 picked up RTD 4 Temperature stage 2 picked up Fail: RTD 5 (broken wire/shorted) RTD 5 Temperature stage 1 picked up RTD 5 Temperature stage 2 picked up Fail: RTD 6 (broken wire/shorted) RTD 6 Temperature stage 1 picked up RTD 6 Temperature stage 2 picked up Failure: RTD-Box 2 Fail: RTD 7 (broken wire/shorted) RTD 7 Temperature stage 1 picked up RTD 7 Temperature stage 2 picked up Fail: RTD 8 (broken wire/shorted) RTD 8 Temperature stage 1 picked up RTD 8 Temperature stage 2 picked up Fail: RTD 9 (broken wire/shorted) RTD 9 Temperature stage 1 picked up RTD 9 Temperature stage 2 picked up Fail: RTD10 (broken wire/shorted) RTD10 Temperature stage 1 picked up RTD10 Temperature stage 2 picked up Fail: RTD11 (broken wire/shorted) RTD11 Temperature stage 1 picked up RTD11 Temperature stage 2 picked up Fail: RTD12 (broken wire/shorted) RTD12 Temperature stage 1 picked up RTD12 Temperature stage 2 picked up

14202 RTD10 St.1 p.up 14203 RTD10 St.2 p.up 14211 Fail: RTD11 14212 RTD11 St.1 p.up 14213 RTD11 St.2 p.up 14221 Fail: RTD12 14222 RTD12 St.1 p.up 14223 RTD12 St.2 p.up

234

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Phase Rotation

2.18

Phase Rotation

2.18.1 Description of Phase Rotation

General Various functions of the 7SJ62/63/64 only function correctly if the phase rotation of the voltages and currents is known. Among these functions are negative sequence protection, undervoltage protection (based only on positive sequence voltages), directional overcurrent protection, and measurement quantity monitors. A phase rotation is implemented in the 7SJ62/63/64 device using binary inputs and settings, thus making it possible for all protective and monitoring functions to operate correctly when the phase rotation is reversed. If an acb phase rotationphase rotation is normal, the appropriate setting should be entered at address 0209. (See Subsection 2.1.3). If the phase rotation can change during operation (e.g. the direction of a motor must be routinely changed), then a changeover signal at the input masked for this purpose is sufficient to inform the protective relay of the phase rotation changeover. Logic As stated before, the phase rotation is always established at address 0209 PHASE SEQ.. The binary input (FNo. 05145, >Reverse Rot.) sets the phase rotation for the opposite of the setting at 0209, via the exclusive-OR function (see Figure 2-84).

FNo. 05145

>Reverse Rot.. 0209 PHASE SEQ.

1 A B C 0 A C B

FNo. 05147

XOR

Rotation ABC
FNo. 05148

Rotation ACB Opposite Phase Sequence To The Protective Functions

Figure 2-84

Message Logic for the phase rotation Changeover

Influence on Protective Functions

The swapping of phases directly impacts the calculation of positive and negative sequence quantities, as well as phase-to-phase voltages via the subtraction of one phase-to-ground voltage from another. Therefore, this function is vital so that phase detection messages, fault values, and operating measurement values are not falsified. As stated before, this function influences the negative sequence protection function, directional overcurrent protection function, and some of the monitoring functions (see Subsection 2.10.1.3) that issue messages if the required and calculated phase rotations do not match.

2.18.2 Programming Settings

The normal phase sequence is set at 0209 PHASE SEQ. (see Subsection 2.1.3). If, on the system side, phase rotation are made temporarily, then these are communicated to the protective device using the binary input >Reverse Rot., FNo. 05145.

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

235

Functions

2.19

Protection Function Logic

The function logic is the heart of the device. It coordinates the sequence of both the protective and auxiliary functions, processes functional decisions, and processes data received from the system. In particular, the function logic is responsible for the following: Processing Measurement and Detection Logic Processing Tripping Logic

2.19.1 Pickup Logic for the Entire Device

General Device Pickup and Dropout The pickup signals for all protective functions in the device are connected via an OR function, and lead to the general device pickup. General device pickup is initiated by the first function to pickup, and general device drop out occurs when the last function drops out. A corresponding message indicating that general device pickup has occurred is reported. General device pickup is a precondition for a series of internal and external functions that occur subsequently. The following are among the internal functions controlled by general device pickup: Start of Trip Log: From general device pickup to general device drop out, all fault messages are entered in the trip log. Initialization of Oscillographic Records: The storage and maintenance of oscillographic values can also be made dependent on the general device pickup. External functions can be controlled by general device pickup, using an output contact. Examples are: Restarting devices Starting of additional devices, or similar

2.19.2 Tripping Logic of the Entire Device

2.19.2.1 Description General Trip The tripping signals for all protective functions are connected by OR and generate a message indicating that the device has initiated a trip signal. This message can be configured to an LED or binary output, just as the individual tripping messages can. Terminating the Tripping Signal All trip signals from a protection function hold the 00511 Relay TRIP function, and start the minimum trip signal duration timer (set at address 210A TMin TRIP CMD, see Figure 2-85). This trip signal duration timer ensures the trip signal is trans-

236

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Protection Function Logic

mitted to the circuit breaker for a sufficient amount of time, even if the function which issued the trip signal drops out quickly. The trip signal is only terminated after all protection functions drop out AND the minimum trip signal duration expires. Finally, it is possible to latch the trip signal until it is manually reset (lockout function). The reset takes place either by pressing the LED reset key or by activating an appropriately masked binary input. A precondition, of course, is that the circuit breaker trip coil as usual remains energized at the circuit breaker as long as the trip signal is present, and that the trip coil current is interrupted by the auxiliary contacts of the circuit breaker.

From Protective Functions

FNo. 000511

Trip

S R 0210A TMin TRIP CMD &

T

Relay TRIP

LockoutFunction (Output Relay Stored) Lockout Reset (Using LEDReset)

S R

Figure 2-85

Terminating the Trip Signal

2.19.2.2 Programming Settings for Tripping Logic Trip Signal Duration The setting of the minimum trip signal duration at address 0210A TMin TRIP CMD was already discussed in Subsection 2.1.3. This time is valid for all protective functions that can initiate trip signals, as well as for trip signals that are initiated using the device function controller.
Setting Options 0.01 ~ 32.00 s Default Setting 0.15 s Comment Minimum Trip Command Duration

Addr. 210

Setting TMin TRIP CMD

2.19.3 Statistical Counters

2.19.3.1 Description Number of Trips The number of trips initiated by the 7SJ62/63/64 is counted, as long as the position of the circuit breaker is monitored via breaker auxiliary contacts and binary inputs. For this purpose it is necessary to allocate the internal pulse counter Number of TRIPs to a binary input in the configuration matrix which is controlled by the TRIP position of the circuit breaker. The pulse count Number of TRIPs can be found in the Statistics

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

237

Functions

group if the option Measured and metered values only was enabled in the configuration matrix. Number of Automatic Reclosing Commands Fault Current The number of reclosing commands initiated by the automatic reclosing function is summed up in separate counters for the 1st and 2nd cycle.

Furthermore, the fault current in each pole of the circuit breaker is determined for each trip signal. The fault current is indicated in the fault messages and is added to previously stored fault current values in the statistic-counters to maintain an accumulation of fault currents, per pole, experienced by the breaker over time. The operating hours under load are also stored (the current value in at least one phase is larger than the limit value set under address 0212 BkrClosed I MIN). The counter and memory levels are secured against loss of auxiliary voltage.

Operating hours

2.19.3.2 Reading/Setting/Resetting SIPROTEC 4System Manual describes how to read out the statistical counters via the device front panel or DIGSI 4. Setting or resetting of the statistical counters listed above takes place under the menu item ANNUNCIATION STATISTIC by overwriting the counter values shown.

238

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Auxiliary Functions

2.20

Auxiliary Functions
The auxiliary functions of the 7SJ62/63/64 relay include:
G G G G

Message Processing Measurements Waveform Capture Commissioning Aids

2.20.1 Message Processing

After the occurrence of a system fault, data regarding the response of the protective relay and the measured quantities should be saved for future analysis. For this reason message processing is done in three ways: LED Display and Binary Outputs (Output Relays) Information via Display Field or Personal Computer Information to a Control Center LED Display and Binary Outputs (Output Relays) Important events and conditions are displayed, using LEDs on the front panel of the relay. The relay also contains output relays for remote signaling. All LEDs and binary outputs indicating specific messages can be freely configured. The relay is delivered with a default setting. The SIPROTEC 4 System Manual gives a detailed description of the configuration procedure. The Appendix of this manual deals in detail with the delivery status and the allocation options. The output relays and the LEDs can be operated in a latched or unlatched mode (individually settable for each one). The latched conditions are protected against loss of the auxiliary voltage. They are reestablished after restart of the device. However they can be reset as follows: On site by pressing the LED key on the relay. Remotely using a binary input configured for that purpose. Using one of the serial interfaces. Automatically at the beginning of a new pickup. Condition messages should not be stored. Also, they cannot be reset until the criterion to be reported is cleared. This applies to messages from monitoring functions, or similar. A green LED (RUN) displays operational readiness of the relay, and cannot be reset. It goes out if the self-check feature of the microprocessor recognizes an abnormal occurrence, or if the auxiliary voltage is lost. When auxiliary voltage is present, but the relay has an internal malfunction, then the red LED (ERROR) lights up and the processor blocks the relay.

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

239

Functions

Fault Information Display or Personal Computer

Events and conditions can be read out on the display on the front cover of the relay. Using the front PC interface or the rear service interface, a personal computer can be connected, to which the information can be sent. The relay is equipped with several event buffers, for operational messages, circuit breaker statistics, etc., which are protected against loss of the auxiliary voltage by a buffer battery. These messages can be retrieved, at any time, using the operating keypad in the display field, or transferred to a personal computer, using the serial operating interface. Readout of messages during operation is described in detail in the SIPROTEC 4System Manual.

Division of Messages

The messages are categorized as follows: Event Log: These are message that can occur during the operation of the device. They include information about the status of device functions, measurement data, system data, recording of control commands, and similar information. Trip Log: Fault messages are message from the last 8 network faults that were processed by the device. Sensitive Ground Fault Log: Ground fault messages, if the device has sensitive ground fault detection. Statistics: These values include a counter for the trip commands initiated by the device, accumulated currents interrupted by the individual poles of the circuit breaker, and the operating hours of the network or equipment being protected. A complete list of all message and output functions that can be generated by the device, with the associated information number (FNo), can be found in the Appendix. The lists also indicate where each message can be sent. The lists are based on a SIPROTEC 4 device with the maximum number of functions. If functions are not present in the specific version of the device, or if they are set as Disabled in Device Configuration, then the associated messages cannot appear.

2.20.1.1 Event Log (Operating messages) The Event Log contains operating messages that the device generates during operation. All operating messages are stored in the Annunciation Logs. Up to 200 operating messages are recorded in chronological order in the device. New messages are added at the end of the list. If the memory has been exceeded, then the oldest message is written-over for each new message.

2.20.1.2 Trip Log (Fault messages) After a short-circuit fault on the system, for example, important information about the progression of the fault can be retrieved, such as the pickup of a protective element or the initiation of a trip signal. The time the initial occurrence of the short-circuit fault occurred is accurately provided via the system clock. Time progression of the short-circuit fault is reported based on the moment of pickup, so that the duration, until the trip signal is issued and interrupted, is available. The time resolution used for reporting is 1 ms.

240

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Auxiliary Functions

Spontaneous messages

The spontaneous messages that can be viewed on the device front serve to display the most important data about a fault. For devices featuring a four-line text display the messages appear automatically in the display, after a general pickup of the device, in the sequence shown in Figure 2-86. If the device features a grahpical display, these messages will only occur if spontaneous fault messages were set at address 0611 unlike the default setting.

501 picked up 501 TRIP T Pickup= 320ms T OFF = 197ms

Figure 2-86

Protective Function that picked up first; Protective Function that dropped out last; Running time from general pickup to dropout; Running time from general pickup to the first trip command

Display of Spontaneous Messages in the HMI Example

Retrieved messages

The messages for the last eight network faults can be retrieved. The definition of a network fault is such that the time period from fault detection up to final clearing of the disturbance is considered to be one network fault. If auto-reclosing occurs, then the network fault ends after the last reclosing shot, which means after a successful reclosing or lockout. Therefore the entire clearing process, including all reclosing shots, occupies only one fault record. Within a network fault, several indications can occur (from the first pickup of a protective function to the last dropout of a protective function). These indications are recorded. In total 600 indications can be recorded. Oldest data are erased for newest data when the buffer is full.

2.20.1.3 Ground Fault Messages For devices with sensitive ground fault detection, special ground fault records are available. Messages are provided if the protection is set for Alarm Only in Address 3101, and the ground fault remains long enough for the time delay T-DELAY Pickup to expire. Up to 15 messages can be recorded for the last 3 faults.

2.20.1.4 General Interrogation The general interrogation which can be retrieved via DIGSI 4 enables the current status of the SIPROTEC device to be read out. All messages requiring general interrogation are displayed with their present value.

2.20.1.5 Spontaneous Messages The spontaneous annunciations that can be displayed via DIGSI 4 are refreshed immediately, an event or status change occur.

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

241

Functions

2.20.1.6 Statistics The messages in statistics are counters for the accumulation of interrupted current by each of the breaker poles, the number of trips issued by the device to the breaker, and the operating hours of the breaker and protected equipment. The interrupted currents are in primary terms. Statistics can be viewed on the LCD of the device, or on a PC running DIGSI 4 and connected to the operating or service interface. A password is not required to read statistics; however, a password is required to change or delete the statistics. Transmitting Information to a Control Center If the device features a serial system port, stored information can be transmitted to a central control and storage unit. Transmission is possible via different transmission protocols.

2.20.2 Measurements
Display of Measured Values A series of measured values and the values derived from them are constantly available for call up on site, or for data transfer (See table 2-20, as well as the following list). A precondition for correctly displaying the primary and percentage values is complete and correct entry of the nominal values for the voltage transformers, current transformers, and protected equipment, in accordance with Subsections 2.1.3 and 2.1.6. Table 2-20 shows the formulas which are the basis for the conversion from secondary values into primary values and percentages.

Tabelle 2-20 Conversion formula between secondary values and primary/percentage values
Measured Value Second ary IA, IB, IC, I1, I2 IN = 3I0 (calculated) ISEC. Primary %

CT PRIMARY ------------------------------------------ I SEC. CT SECONDARY

IN SEC.

I prim. ------------------------------------FullScaleCurr. I N prim. ------------------------------------FullScaleCurr.

CT PRIMARY ------------------------------------------ I N SEC. CT SECONDARY

IN SEC.

IN = measured value of the I4 input INs (Irms Ireal, Ireactive)

Ignd CT PRIM ------------------------------------------- I N SEC. Ignd CT SEC

INs SEC.

I N prim. ------------------------------------FullScaleCurr.

Ignd CT PRIM ------------------------------------------- I Ns SEC. Ignd CT SEC

I Ns prim. ------------------------------------FullScaleCurr.

242

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Auxiliary Functions

Tabelle 2-20 Conversion formula between secondary values and primary/percentage values
Measured Value Second ary VA, VB, VC, V0, V1, V2, Vsynchr. Vg SEC. Primary %

Vnom PRIMARY ------------------------------------------------- V g SEC. Vnom SECONDARY Vnom PRIMARY ------------------------------------------------- V SEC. Vnom SECONDARY Vnom PRIMARY Vph Vdelta ------------------------------------------------- V N SEC. Vnom SECONDARY

V prim. ---------------------------------------------------FullScaleVolt. ( 3 ) V prim. ----------------------------------FullScaleVolt. V prim. ----------------------------------------------3 FullScaleVolt.

Power prim. ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------3 (FullScaleVolt.) (FullScaleCurr.)

VA-B, VB-C, VC-A V SEC.

VN

VN SEC.

P, Q, S no secondary values (P and Q phaseseparated) Power factor cos (phase-separated) Frequency f in Hz cos

cos 100 in %

f in Hz

f in Hz ---------------- 100 f Nenn

Parameter Vnom PRIMARY Vnom SECONDARY CT PRIMARY CT SECONDARY Vph / Vdelta Adresse 0202 0203 0204 0205 0206A Parameter Ignd-CT PRIM Ignd-CT SEC FullScaleVolt. FullScaleCurr. Adresse 0217 0218 1101 1102

Depending on the type of device ordered and the device connections, some of the operating measured values listed below may not be available. The phase-to-ground voltages are either measured directly, if the voltage inputs are connected phase-toground, or they are calculated from the phase-to-phase voltages Vab and Vbc and the displacement voltage V0. The displacement voltage is either measured directly or calculated from the phase-toground voltages:

Vgn = 3V0/(Vph / Vdelta)

with: 3V0 = (Va + Vb + Vc) Vph/Vdelta = Transformation adjustment for ground input voltage (setting 0206A)

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

243

Functions

The ground current IG is either measured directly or calculated from the conductor currents: 3 I0 I G = ---------------------------------I gnd-CT ( CT ) mit 3I0 = (Ia + Ib + Ic) Ignd-CT = Parameter 0217 or 0218 CT = Parameter 0204 or 0205

In addition, the following may be available: Minimum and maximum values for the three phase currents Ix; the three phaseto-ground voltages Vxg; the three phase-to-phase voltages Vxy; the positive sequence components I1 and V1; the displacement voltage V0; the thermal measured values of the overload protection /Trip; the real power P, reactive power Q, and apparent power S; the frequency; and the power factor cos ; primary values. Included are the date and time they were last updated. The long-term averages of the three phase currents Ix; the positive sequence components I1 for the three phase currents; and the real power P, reactive power Q, and apparent power S; in primary values. The period of time for averaging is selectable. Minimum and maximum values for the above mentioned long-term averages, including the date and time they were last updated, in primary values. Real and reactive energy flow (including direction of flow) in kWh, MWh, or GWh primary; or in kVArh, MVArh, or GVArh primary. The measured-value resolution can be configured. /Trip overload protection value for stator in % of the trip initiating excessive temperature, /Trip thermal measured value of the restart inhibit (rotor winding), RESTART restarting limit of the restart inhibit RTD 1 to RTD 12 temperature values at the RTD-boxes. The measured values are updated at a period of 0.3 s and 1 s. The minimum and maximum values are listed with the date and time of the latest update. Using binary inputs or a SCADA interface, the maximum and minimum values can be reset. In addition, the reset can also take place cyclically, beginning with a preselected point in time. For the long-term averages mentioned above, the length of the time window for averaging and the frequency with which it is updated can be set. The associated minimum and maximum values can be reset, using binary inputs or by using the integrated control panel in the DIGSI 4 operating program. Transfer of Measured Values Set points Measured values can be retrieved by SCADA, or through DIGSI 4.

To recognize extraordinary operational conditions, warning levels can be programmed. When a programmed limit value is exceeded (or fallen below), a message

244

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Auxiliary Functions

is generated that can be masked to both output relays and LEDs. In contrast to the actual protective functions, such as time-overcurrent protection or overload protection, this monitoring program may becomes lower. Ex works, the following individual limit value levels are configured: Exceeding a preset maximum average current in Phase A Exceeding a preset maximum average current in Phase B Exceeding a preset maximum average current in Phase C Exceeding a preset maximum average positive sequence current Exceeding a preset maximum average real power Exceeding a preset maximum average reactive power Exceeding a preset maximum average apparent power Exceeding a preset temperature Falling below a preset pressure Falling below a preset current in any phase Falling below a preset power factor

2.20.3 Commissioning Aids

2.20.3.1 Test Messages to the SCADA Interface during Test Operation If the SIPROTEC4 device is connected to a central or main computer system via the SCADA interface, then the information that is transmitted can be influenced. This is only possible with some of the protocols available (see Table Protocol-dependent functions in the Appendix). Depending on the type of protocol, all messages and measured values transferred to the central control system can be identified with an added message test operationbit while the device is being tested onsite (test mode). This identification prevents the messages from being incorrectly interpreted as resulting from an actual power system disturbance or event. As another option, all messages and measured values normally transferred via the SCADA interface can be blocked during the testing (block data transmission). Data transmission block can be accomplished by controlling binary inputs, by using the operating panel on the device, or with a PC and DIGSI 4 via the operator interface. The activation and deactivation of the test mode and transmission block is described in detail in the SIPROTEC 4 System Manual.

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

245

Functions

2.20.3.2 Testing System Ports If the device features a system port and uses it to communicate with the control center, the DIGSI 4 device operation can be used to test if messages are transmitted correctly. A dialog box shows the display texts of all messages which were allocated to the system interface in the configuration matrix. In another column of the dialog box you can specify a value for the messages you intend to test (e.g. ON/OFF). Having entered password no. 6 (for hardware test menus) a message can then be generated. The associated message will be issued and can then be retrieved in the operational annunciations of the SIPROTEC device and also in the control center of the station. A detailed description of the procedure is given in Subsection 3.3.2.

2.20.3.3 Checking the Binary Inputs and Outputs The binary inputs, outputs, and LEDs of a SIPROTEC4 device can be individually and precisely controlled in DIGSI 4. This feature can be used, for example, to verify control wiring from the device to substation equipment (operational checks), during start-up. A dialog box shows all binary inputs and outputs and LEDs of the device with their present status. The operating equipment, commands, or messages that are configured (masked) to the hardware components are displayed also. After entering password no. 6 (for hardware test menus), you can switch to the opposite status in another column of the dialog box. You can energize every single output relay to check the wiring between 7SJ62/63/64 and the system without having to create the alarm allocated to it. Subsection 3.3.3 gives a detailed description of the procedure.

2.20.3.4 Triggering Oscillographic Recordings At the end of commissioning, an investigation of the stability of the protection during closing operations. For this, closing test should be carried out. Oscillographic event recordings obtain the maximum information about the behavior of the 7SJ62/63/64. Along with the capability of storing waveform data and SER information for faults, the 7SJ62/63/64 also has the capability of capturing the same data when commands are given to the device via the service program DIGSI 4, the serial interface, or a binary input. For the latter, the binary input must be masked with event 4, >Trig.Wave.Cap.. Triggering for the oscillographic recording then occurs when the input is energized. An auxiliary contact of the circuit breaker or primary switch may be used to control the binary input for triggering. An oscillographic recording that is externally triggered (that is, without a protective element pickup or device trip) is processed by the device as a normal oscillographic recording with the exception that data are not given in the Trip Log for the event. The externally triggered record has a number for establishing a sequence. Subsection 3.3.15 gives a detailed description of the procedure.

246

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Auxiliary Functions

2.20.4 Programming Settings

Average Calculation The selection of the time period for measured value averaging is set at address 8301 DMD Interval. The first number specifies the averaging time window in minutes while the second number gives the frequency of updates within the time window. A setting of 15 Min., 3 Subs, for example, means that time average generation occurs for all measured values that arrive within 15 minutes, and that output is updated three times during the 15 minute window, or every 15/3 = 5 minutes. The point in time where averaging begins (On The Hour, 15 After Hour, 30 After Hour or 45 After Hour) is set at address 8302 DMD Sync.Time. If the settings for averaging are changed, then the measured values stored in the buffer are deleted, and new results for the average calculation are only available after the set time period has passed. Minimum and Maximum Values The tracking of minimum and maximum values can be reset automatically at a programmable point in time. To select this feature, address 8311 MinMax cycRESET should be set to YES. The point in time when reset is to take place (the minute of the day in which reset will take place) is set at address 8312 MiMa RESET TIME. The reset cycle in days is entered at address 8313 MiMa RESETCYCLE, and the beginning date of the cyclical process, from the time of the setting procedure (in days), is entered at address 8314 MinMaxRES.START. Phase currents and the averages of the currents and powers can be monitored. These are stationary monitors that cannot be used as pre-warning levels by time-overcurrent protection, for example. The percentages are relative to the nominal device quantities. Furthermore, it is possible to monitor the power factor, and connected 20 mA values (if any). The settings are entered under MEASUREMENT in the sub-menu SET POINTS(MV) by overwriting the existing values. Power Meter Parameter 8315 MeterResolution can be used to maximize the resolution of the metered energy values by Factor 10 or Factor 100 compared to the Standard setting.

Limit Values

2.20.4.1 Settings for Auxiliary Functions Demand Measurement Setup

Addr. 8301 Setting Title DMD Interval Setting Options 15 Min per., 1 Sub 15 Min per., 3 Subs 15 Min per., 15 Subs 30 Min per., 1 Sub. 60 Min per., 1 Sub. 60 Min per., 10 Subs 5 Min per., 5 Subs Default Setting Comments

60 Min per., 1 Sub. Demand Calculation Intervals

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

247

Functions

Addr. 8302

Setting Title DMD Sync.Time

Setting Options On the Hour 15 Min. after Hour 30 Min. after Hour 45 Min. after Hour

Default Setting On the Hour

Comments Demand Synchronization Time

Min/Max Measurement Setup

Addr. 8311 8312 8313 8314 Setting Title MinMax cycRESET MiMa RESET TIME MiMa RESETCYCLE MinMaxRES.START NO YES 0..1439 min 1..365 day(s) 1..365 Days Setting Options Default Setting YES 0 min 7 day(s) 1 Days Comments Automatic Cyclic Reset Function MinMax Reset Timer MinMax Reset Cycle Period MinMax Start Reset Cycle in

Energy
Addr. 8315 Setting Title MeterResolution Setting Options Standard Resolution Factor 10 Resolution Factor 100 Default Setting Standard Comments Meter resolution

2.20.4.2 Information List for Auxiliary Functions Demand meter

F.No. 00963 Ia dmd= 00964 Ib dmd= 00965 Ic dmd= 00833 I1 dmd= 00834 P dmd = 00835 Q dmd = 00836 S dmd = Alarm I A demand I B demand I C demand I1 (positive sequence) Demand Active Power Demand Reactive Power Demand Apparent Power Demand Comments

248

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Auxiliary Functions

Min/Max meter
F.No. Alarm >I MIN/MAX Buffer Reset >I1 MIN/MAX Buffer Reset >Idmd MIN/MAX Buffer Reset >Theta MIN/MAX Buffer Reset Ia Min Ia Max Ib Min Ib Max Ic Min Ic Max I1 (positive sequence) Minimum I1 (positive sequence) Maximum I A Demand Minimum I A Demand Maximum I B Demand Minimum I B Demand Maximum I C Demand Minimum I C Demand Maximum I1 (positive sequence) Demand Minimum I1 (positive sequence) Demand Maximum Overload Meter Min Overload Meter Max >V MIN/MAX Buffer Reset >Vphph MIN/MAX Buffer Reset >V1 MIN/MAX Buffer Reset >P MIN/MAX Buffer Reset >S MIN/MAX Buffer Reset >Q MIN/MAX Buffer Reset >Pdmd MIN/MAX Buffer Reset >Qdmd MIN/MAX Buffer Reset >Sdmd MIN/MAX Buffer Reset >Frq. MIN/MAX Buffer Reset >Power Factor MIN/MAX Buffer Reset Comments

00395 >I MinMax Reset 00396 >I1 MiMaReset 00403 >Idmd MiMaReset 00412 > MiMa Reset 00851 Ia Min= 00852 Ia Max= 00853 Ib Min= 00854 Ib Max= 00855 Ic Min= 00856 Ic Max= 00857 I1 Min= 00858 I1 Max= 00837 IAdmdMin 00838 IAdmdMax 00839 IBdmdMin 00840 IBdmdMax 00841 ICdmdMin 00842 ICdmdMax 00843 I1dmdMin 00844 I1dmdMax 01059 /TrpMin= 01058 /TrpMax= 00397 >V MiMaReset 00398 >VphphMiMaRes 00399 >V1 MiMa Reset 00400 >P MiMa Reset 00401 >S MiMa Reset 00402 >Q MiMa Reset 00404 >Pdmd MiMaReset 00405 >Qdmd MiMaReset 00406 >Sdmd MiMaReset 00407 >Frq MiMa Reset 00408 >PF MiMaReset

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

249

Functions

F.No. 00859 Va-nMin= 00860 Va-nMax= 00861 Vb-nMin= 00862 Vb-nMax= 00863 Vc-nMin= 00864 Vc-nMax= 00865 Va-bMin= 00867 Va-bMax= 00868 Vb-cMin= 00869 Vb-cMax= 00870 Vc-aMin= 00871 Vc-aMax= 00872 Vn Min = 00873 Vn Max = 00874 V1 Min = 00875 V1 Max = 00876 Pmin= 00877 Pmax= 00878 Qmin= 00879 Qmax= 00880 Smin= 00881 Smax= 00882 fmin= 00883 fmax= 00885 PF Min= 00884 PF Max= 00845 PdMin= 00846 PdMax= 00847 QdMin= 00848 QdMax= 00849 SdMin= 00850 SdMax=

Alarm Va-n Min Va-n Max Vb-n Min Vb-n Max Vc-n Min Vc-n Max Va-b Min Va-b Max Vb-c Min Vb-c Max Vc-a Min Vc-a Max V neutral Min V neutral Max

Comments

V1 (positive sequence) Voltage Minimum V1 (positive sequence) Voltage Maximum Active Power Minimum Active Power Maximum Reactive Power Minimum Reactive Power Maximum Apparent Power Minimum Apparent Power Maximum Frequency Minimum Frequency Maximum Power Factor Minimum Power Factor Maximum Active Power Demand Minimum Active Power Demand Maximum Reactive Power Minimum Reactive Power Maximum Apparent Power Minimum Apparent Power Maximum

250

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Auxiliary Functions

Set Points
F.No. ------------I Admd> I Bdmd> I Cdmd> I1dmd> Alarm I A dmd> I B dmd> I C dmd> I1dmd> Set Point Phase A dmd> Set Point Phase B dmd> Set Point Phase C dmd> Set Point positive sequence I1dmd> |Pdmd|> |Qdmd|> |Sdmd|> Set Point |Pdmd|> Set Point |Qdmd|> Set Point |Sdmd|> Pressure< Temp> Set Point Pressure< Set Point Temp> Set Point 37-1 Undercurrent alarm 37-1 under current |Power Factor|< Set Point 55 Power factor alarm Comments

00273 SP. I A dmd> 00274 SP. I B dmd> 00275 SP. I C dmd> 00276 SP. I1dmd> ---------|Pdmd|> |Qdmd|> |Sdmd|>

00277 SP. |Pdmd|> 00278 SP. |Qdmd|> 00279 SP. |Sdmd|> ------Press< Temp>

00270 SP. Pressure< 00271 SP. Temp> 00284 SP. 37-1 alarm ------37-1 |PF|<

00285 SP. PF(55)alarm

Energy
F.No. 00924 WpForward 00925 WqForward 00928 WpReverse 00929 WqReverse 00888 Wp(puls) 00889 Wq(puls) Alarm Wp Forward Wq Forward Wp Reverse Wq Reverse Pulsed Energy Wp (active) Pulsed Energy Wq (reactive) Comments

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

251

Functions

2.21
General

Breaker Control
In addition to the protective functions described thus far, a Control command process is integrated in the SIPROTEC 7SJ62/63/64 to coordinate the operation of circuit breakers and other equipment in the power system. Control commands can originate from four command sources: Local operation using the keypad on the local user interface of the device Local or remote operation using DIGSI 4 Remote operation using the SCADA Interface (via IEC, Profibus) Automatic functions (e.g., using a binary input) The device supports the operation of circuit breakers/switchgear. The number of switchgear devices to be controlled is, basically, limited by the number of binary inputs and outputs present. High security against inadvertent device operations can be ensured if interlocking checks are enabled. A standard set of optional interlocking checks is provided for each command issued to circuit breakers/switchgear. Devices with integrated or detached operator panel can control switchgear via the operator panel of the device. Depending on the type of operator panel (text display or graphic display) the procedure is slightly different:

Operating Using the Keypad with Text Display

Control commands can be initiated using the keypad on the local user interface of the relay. Using the navigation keys , , , , the CONTROL menu can be accessed and the circuit breaker/switchgear to be operated can be selected. After entering a password, a new window is displayed in which multiple control actions (close, open, cancel) are available and can be selected using the and keys. Next a security check takes place. After the security check is completed, the ENTER key must be pressed again to carry out the command. If the ENTER key is not pressed within one minute, the selection is cancelled. Cancellation via the ESC key is possible at any time before the control command is issued. Commands can be initiated using the keypad on the local user interface of the relay. For this purpose, there are three independent keys located below the graphic display. Pressing the CTRL key causes the Control Display to appear in the LCD. The other two control keys OPEN and CLOSE then become active, and control of switching devices becomes possible. The LCD must be changed back to the default display for other, noncontrol, operational modes. The navigation keys , , , are used to select the desired device in the Control Display. The CLOSE key or the OPEN key is then pressed to convey the intended control command. After pressing the appropriate key, the selected device in the Control Display begins to blink in the targeted-position, and a message to confirm the control command is given. The ENTER key is pressed to confirm. Next a security check takes place. After the security check is complete, the ENTER key must be pressed again to carry out the control command. If the ENTER key is not pressed within one minute, the selection is cancelled. Cancellation via the ESC key is possible at any time before the control command is issued. After a successful switching operation, the Control Display shows the new position of the device, and the message Control Executed is given at the bottom of the dis-

Operation Using the Keypad with Graphic Display

252

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Breaker Control

play. For control commands with feedback, the message Swgr. Feedback OK is briefly displayed. If the selected control command is not accepted, because an interlocking condition is not met, then an error message appears in the display. The message indicates why the command was not accepted (see also SIPROTEC 4System Manual). This message must be acknowledged with ENTER before any further control commands can be issued. Operation using DIGSI 4 Operation using the SCADA Interface The procedure for issuing control commands using the DIGSI 4 program is described in the SIPROTEC 4System Manual (Control of Switchgear). Commands can be issued remotely via the SCADA interface as well. Please check MLFB order number to ensure that your individual relay has a SCADA interface module that supports this. Please refer to specific protocol documents for a complete list of supported commands (see SIPROTEC 4System Manual).

2.21.1 Types of Commands

Two (2) types of commands can be processed within the device: Control commands Internal / pseudo commands Control Commands Control commands operate (OPEN/CLOSE) binary outputs. Examples are: Commands (e.g. operation of circuit breakers, etc.) Step Commands (e.g. raising and lowering transformer LTCs) Set-point Commands with configurable time settings (Petersen coils) Internal / pseudo Commands These commands do not directly operate binary outputs. They serve to initiate internal functions, simulate changes of state, or to acknowledge changes of state. Marking/Tagging commands are used to manually overwrite or set status functions normally controlled by binary inputs. Additionally, Tagging commands are issued to establish internal settings, such as switching authority (remote vs. local), parameter set changeover, data transmission block to the SCADA interface, and measured value set-points. Acknowledgment and resetting commands for setting and resetting internal buffers. Status Information commands: Controlling activation of binary input status Binary Output Blocking

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

253

Functions

2.21.2 Steps in the Command Sequence

Safety mechanisms in the command sequence ensure that a command can only be released after a thorough check of preset criteria has been successfully concluded. Standard Interlocking checks are provided for each individual control command. Additionally, user-defined interlocking conditions can be programmed separately for each command. The actual execution of the command is also monitored afterwards. The entire sequence of a command is described briefly in the following: Check Sequence Command Entry (e.g. using the keypad on the local user interface of the device) Check Password Access Rights Check Switching Mode (interlocking activated/deactivated) Selection of Deactivated Interlocking Recognition User configurable Interlocking checks that can be selected for each command Switching Authority (local, remote) Device Position (scheduled vs. actual comparison) Zone Controlled/Field Interlocking/ (logic using CFC) System Interlocking (centrally, using SCADA system or substation controller) Double Operation (interlocking against parallel switching operation) Protection Blocking (blocking of switching operations by protective functions) Fixed Command Checks Internal process time (software watch dog which checks the time for processing the control action between initiation of the control and final close of the relay contact. After 1 second the control action will be aborted). Setting Modification in Process (if setting modification is in process, commands are denied or delayed) Equipment not Present at Output (If a circuit breaker or other operable equipment is not configured to a binary output, then the command is denied) Output Block (if an output block has been programmed for the circuit breaker, and is active at the moment the command is processed, then the command is denied) Component Hardware Malfunction Command in Progress (only one command can be processed at a time for one circuit breaker or switch) 1-of-n-check (for schemes with multiple assignments, such as common ground, whether a command has already been initiated for the affected output relay is checked). Monitoring the Command Execution Interruption of a Command because of a Cancel Command Running Time Monitor (feedback message monitoring time)

254

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Breaker Control

2.21.3 Interlocking

The interlocking checks are divided into: System Interlocking: checked by a central control system such as SCADA or substation controller Zone Controlled/Bay Interlocking: checked in the device System interlocking relies on the system data base in the substation or central control system. Circuit breakers (or other equipment) that require system interlocking in a central control system (Substation Controller) must be configured in their specific commands object properties box for the specific control device. Interlocking conditions can be selected. Zone Controlled/Bay Interlocking relies on the status of the circuit breaker and other switches that are connected to the relay. The extent of the interlocking checks is determined by the configuration of the relay. For all commands, operation with interlocking (normal mode) or without interlocking (test mode) can be selected: for Local commands, by activation of Normal/Test-key switch , for automatic commands, via command processing by CFC, for local / remote commands, using an additional interlocking disable command, via Profibus.

2.21.3.1 Interlocked/Non-Interlocked Switching The command checks that can be selected for the 7SJ62/63/64 relay are also referred to as standard interlocking. These checks can be activated (interlocked) or deactivated (non interlocked). Deactivated interlock switching means the configured interlocking conditions are not checked in the relay. Interlocked switching means that all configured interlocking conditions are checked within the command processing. If a condition could not be fulfilled, the command will be rejected by a message with a minus added to it (e.g. CO-), immediately followed by an operation response information. Table 2-21 shows some types of commands and messages. For the device the messages designated with *) are displayed in the event logs, for DIGSI 4 they appear in spontaneous messages.
Table 2-21

types of command and messages

Type of command Abbrev. CO MT IB OB CA Message CO+/ MT+/ IB+/ *) OB+/ *) CA+/

Control issued Manual tagging (positive / negative) Input blocking Output blocking Control abortion

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

255

Functions

The plus appearing in the message is a confirmation of the command execution: the command execution was as expected, in other words positive. The minus is a negative confirmation, the command was rejected. Figure 2-87 shows the messages relating to command execution and operation response information for a successful operation of the circuit breaker. The check of interlocking can be programmed separately for all switching devices and tags that were set with a tagging command. Other internal commands such as manual entry or abort are not checked, i.e. carried out independent of the interlocking. EVENT LOG --------------------19.06.01 11:52:05,625 Q0 CO+ close 19.06.01 11:52:06,134 Q0 FB+ close
Figure 2-87 Example of a message when closing the circuit breaker Q0

Standard Interlocking Defaults (fixed programming)

The following is a list of Standard Interlocking Conditions that can be selected for each controllable device. All of these are enabled as a default. Device Status Check (scheduled = actual): the switching command is rejected, and an error message is displayed, if the circuit breaker is already in the scheduled (desired) position. (If this check is enabled, then it works whether interlocking, e.g. zone controlled, is activated or deactivated.) This condition is checked in both interlocked and non-interlocked status modes. System Interlocking/Substation Controlled: To check the system interlocking, a local command is transmitted to the central unit with Switch Authority = LOCAL. A switching device that is subject to system interlocking cannot be switched by DIGSI 4. Zone Controlled/Bay Interlocking: All devices controlled by this relay can be interlocked by the CFC logic. Blocked by protection: A CLOSE-command is rejected as soon as one of the protective elements in the relay picks up. The OPEN-command, in contrast, can always be executed. Please be aware, activation of thermal overload protection elements or sensitive ground fault detection can create and maintain a fault condition status, and can therefore block CLOSE commands. If the interlocking Blocking by protection is removed, consider that the restart blocking for motors will also be disabled, and a CLOSE command to the motor would be possible. Restarting would then have to be interlocked some other way. One method would be to use a specific interlocking in the CFC logic. Double Operation Block: parallel switching operations are interlocked against one another; while one command is processed, a second cannot be carried out. Switch Authority LOCAL: When this interlocking check is enabled in the Object Properties dialog box, the status of Switching authority is checked prior to issuing a control command. If this particular setting is selected, a control command from the user interface of the device is only allowed if the Key Switch (for devices without key switch via configuration) is set to LOCAL .

256

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Breaker Control

Switch Authority DIGSI: Switching commands can be issued locally or remotely via DIGSI. As part of the safety features, the device will check the DIGSI configuration file in regard to the virtual device number to ensure that the correct configuration file is used. DIGSI must have the same virtual device number. It is important that one file can not be reused with multiple relays. But it is possible to copy the file and use the new file with another relay. Switch Authority REMOTE: When this interlocking check is enabled in the Object Properties dialog box, the status of Switching authority is checked prior to issuing a control command. If this particular setting is selected a control command from a remote DIGSI connection or via the SCADA interface is only allowed if the Key Switch (for devices without key switch via configuration) is set to REMOTE. An overview for processing the interlocking conditions in the relay is shown by Figure 2-88.
.

Device with Source of Command = LOCAL SAS REMOTE ), DIGSI AUTO Switching Authority (Local/Remote)
1

Switching Authority On/Off

Switching Mode

&
Local

Local

&

&
Remote

&

&
Switching Authority DIGSI DIGSI

DIGSI

or
&
Remote

Switching Mode Local

Non-Interlocked

&
Switching Mode Remote

or

SCHEDULED=ACT .y/n

Interlocked

&

or

feedback Indication On/Off Protection Blocking 52 Close 52 Open

SCHEDULED=ACT.y/n System Interlocking y/n Field Interlocking y/n Protection Blocking y/n Double Oper. Block y/n SW. Auth. LOCA> y/n Sw. Auth. REMOTEy/n

or

Command Output to Relay

Event Condition

1)

Source REMOTE also includes SAS. Command using substation controller. REMOTE Command using remote source such as SCADA through controller to device.

Figure 2-88

Standard Interlocking Arrangements

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

257

Functions

Figure 2-89 shows the configuration of the interlocking conditions using DIGSI 4.

Figure 2-89

DIGSI 4Dialogue box: Object properties for a command (configuration of the interlocking conditions)

For devices with operator panel the display shows the configured interlocking reasons. They are marked by letters explained in the following table 2-22.

Table 2-22

Interlocking commands Interlocking commands Abbrev. L S Z P B Message L S Z P B

Control authorization System interlock Zone controlled Target state = present state (check switch position) Block by protection

258

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Breaker Control

Figure 2-90 shows all interlocking conditions (which usually appear in the display of the device) for three switchgear items with the relevant abbreviations explained in table 2-22. All parametrized interlocking conditions are indicated (see Figure 2-90). Interlocking 01/03 -------------------Q0 Close/Open S Z P B Q1 Close/Open S Z P B Q8 Close/Open S Z P B Figure 2-90 Example of configured interlocking conditions

Control Logic using CFC

For Zone Controlled (field interlocking), control logic can be developed, using the CFC. Via specific release conditions the information released or bay interlocked are available. Switching authority configures the relay to perform Local/Remote Supervisory functions. Note, that only one source can have authority at a time. The following switching authority ranges are defined in the following priority sequence: LOCAL (commands are issued from the relay keyboard) DIGSI 4 REMOTE (commands are issued from SCADA) The devices in housing of size 1/2 or 1/1 are equipped with key switches on the front panel. The top switch is reserved for switching authority between Local and Remote mode. The switching authority condition LOCAL allows commands from the user interface of the relay, but not remote or DIGSI commands. The position Remote enables remote control. For devices in housing of size 1/3 the switching authority can be changed between Remote and Local in the operator panel after having entered the password or by means of CFC also via binary input and function key. The switching authority condition DIGSI allows commands to be initiated using DIGSI 4. Commands are allowed for both a remote and a local DIGSI 4 connection. Configuration Programming: 1. Specific Device (e.g., switching device): Switching authority LOCAL (check for commands initiated Locally via keypad): y/n

Switching Authority (for devices with operator panel)

2. Specific Device (e.g., switching device): Switching authority REMOTE (check for SAS, REMOTE, or DIGSI commands: y/n

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

259

Functions

In detail, the following interlocking logic is derived when using default configuration settings:
Current Switching Authority Status Switching Authority DIGSI Command issued Locally Command issued from SAS or SCADA Command issued from DIGSI

LOCAL LOCAL REMOTE REMOTE

Not checked Allowed checked Allowed

Interlocked - switching
authority LOCAL *2

Interlocked - DIGSI not checked Interlocked - switching

authority LOCAL *2

Interlocked - switching
authority LOCAL *2

Not checked Interlocked - switching

*1 authority REMOTE

Allowed Interlocked -switching

authority DIGSI *2

Interlocked - DIGSI not checked Allowed

checked

Interlocked - switching
authority DIGSI *1

*1 ) By-passes Interlock if Configuration for: switching authority LOCAL (check for Local status): is not marked. *2 ) By-passes Interlock if Configuration for: switch authority REMOTE (check for CLOSE, REMOTE, or DIGSI status): is not marked

SC = source of command SC = AUTO SICAM: Commands that are initiated internally (command processing in the CFC) are not subject to switching authority and are therefore always allowed. Switching Authority (for devices without operator panel) Switching Mode (for devices with operator panel) The dongle cable sets the switching authority of the device to Remote. The specifications of the previous section apply.

There are three modes: Local Remote Auto The switching mode determines whether selected interlocking conditions will be activated or deactivated at the time of the switching operation. The following switching modes are defined: Local commands (SC = LOCAL) interlocked, or non-interlocked switching. The devices in housings of size 1/2 or 1/1 are equipped with key switches on the front panel. The bottom switch is reserved for switching mode. The Normal position allows interlocked switching while the Interlocking OFF position allows non-interlocked switching. For devices in housings of size1/3 the switching authority can be changed between Interlocked and Non-interlocked in the operator panel after having entered the password or by means of CFC also via binary input and function key.

260

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Breaker Control

Remote or DIGSI 4 commands (SC = SAS, REMOTE, or DIGSI) interlocked, or non-interlocked switching. Here, deactivation of interlocking is accomplished via a separate command. The position of the key-switch is irrelevant. Auto: For commands from CFC (SC = AUTO SICAM), the notes in the CFC handbook should be referred to (e.g. component: BOOL to command) Switching Mode (for devices without operator panel) Zone Controlled/ Field Interlocking The dongle cable sets the switching authority of the device to Interlocked. The specifications of the previous section apply.

Zone Controlled (field interlocking) includes the verification that predetermined switchgear position conditions are satisfied to prevent switching errors as well as verification of the state of other mechanical interlocking such as High Voltage compartment doors etc. Interlocking conditions can be programmed separately, for each switching device, for device control CLOSE and/or OPEN. Processing of the status of the release condition for an operation switching device can be based on information acquired: directly, using a single point or double point indication (binary inputs), key-switch, or internal indication (marking), or with logic using CFC. When a switching command is initiated, the actual status of all relevant switching devices is scanned cyclically.

Substation Controller (System Interlocking) Double Operation

Substation Controller (System interlocking) involves switchgear conditions of other bays evaluated by a central control system.

Parallel switching operations are interlocked. When this function is enabled only one control can be issued at a time. All control objects are checked prior to issuing a command. When configured, the pickup of Protective elements blocks switching operations, configurable separately for both closing and tripping commands. Operations in progress will also be aborted by the pickup of a protective element. For switching commands, a check takes place whether the selected switching device is already in the scheduled/desired position (Open/Closed; scheduled/actual comparison). This means, if a circuit breaker is already in the CLOSED position and an attempt is made to issue a closing command, the command will be refused, with the operating message scheduled condition equals actual condition. If the circuit breaker/ switchgear device is in the intermediate position, then this check is not performed. Bypassing configured interlocks at the time of the switching action happens deviceinternal via interlocking recognition in the command job or globally via so-called switching modes.

Blocked by Protection

Device Position (Scheduled = Actual)

Bypassing Interlocks

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

261

Functions

VQ=ORT

The switching modes interlocked or non-interlocked can be set via the key switch. The position Test corresponds to non-interlocked switching and serves the special purpose of unlocking the standard interlocks.
G

REMOTE and DIGSI 4

Commands issued by SICAM or DIGSI 4 are unlocked via global switching mode REMOTE. A separate job order must be sent for the unlocking. The unlocking applies only for one switching operation and for command caused by the same source. Job order: command to object switching mode REMOTE, ON Job order: switching command to switching device
G

Derived command via CFC (automatic command, SC=Auto SICAM):

Behavior is determined in the CFC block (Bool to command) via configuration

2.21.4 Recording and acknowledgement of commands

During the processing of the commands, independent of the further message routing and processing, command and process feedback information are sent to the message processing centre. These messages contain message cause indication. The messages are entered in the event list. Acknowledgement of commands to the device front All messages which relate to commands that were issued from the device front Command Issued = Local are transformed into a corresponding response and shown in the display of the device. A listing of possible operating messages and their meaning is given in the SIPROTEC4 System Manual. The messages which relate to commands with the origin Command Issued = Local/ Remote/DIGSI must be send independent of the routing (configuration on the serial digital interface) to the initiating point. The acknowledgement of commands is therefore not executed by a response indication as it is done with the local command but by ordinary command and feedback information recording. The processing of commands monitors the command execution and timing of feedback information for all commands. At the same time the command is sent, the monitoring time is started (monitoring of the command execution). This time controls whether the device achieves the required final result within the monitoring time. The monitoring time is stopped as soon as the feedback information arrives. If no feedback information arrives, a response Timeout command monitoring time appears and the process is terminated. Commands and information feedback are also recorded in the event list. Normally the execution of a command is terminated as soon as the feedback information (FB+) of the relevant switchgear arrives or, in case of commands without process feedback information, the command output resets.

Acknowledgement of commands to - Local - Remote - Digsi

Monitoring of feedback information

262

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Breaker Control

The plus appearing in a feedback information confirms that the command was successful, the command was as expected, in other words positive. The minus is a negative confirmation and means that the command was not fulfilled as expected. Command Output and Switching Relays The command types needed for tripping and closing of the switchgear or for raising and lowering of transformer taps are described in the SIPROTEC4System Manual. n

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

263

Functions

264

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Installation and Commissioning

This section is primarily for personnel who are experienced in installing, testing, and commissioning protective and control systems, and are familiar with applicable safety rules, safety regulations, and the operation of a power system. Installation of the 7SJ62/63/64 is described in this section. Connections for the device are discussed. Hardware modifications that might be needed in certain cases are explained. Connection verifications required before the device is put in service are also given. Commissioning tests are provided. Some of the tests require the protected line or equipment to carry load. Preparation for the initial energization of the device is covered.

3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4

Installation and Connections Checking Connections Commissioning Final Preparation of the Device

266 318 323 344

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

265

Installation and Commissioning

3.1

Installation and Connections

Warning!
Trouble free and safe use of this SIPROTEC 4 device depends on proper transport, storage, installation, and application of the device according to the warnings in this instruction manual. Of particular importance are the general installation and safety regulations for work in a high-voltage environment (for example, ANSI, IEC, EN, DIN, or other national and international regulations.) These regulations must be observed. Failure to observe these precautions can result in death, personal injury, or severe damage of property. The rated device data is checked as recommended in the SIPROTEC 4 System Manual. The compliance these data is verified with the power system data.

Requirements

3.1.1

Installation
The device housing can be 1/3, 1/2 or Full size depending on the version. For the 1/3 and 1/2 size housing, there are four covers and four holes, as shown in Figures 3-1 and 3-2). There are six covers and six holes for the full size housing, as indicated in Figure 3-3.
G

Panel Flush Mounting

Remove the 4 covers located at the corners of the front cover, for size 1/1 the 2 additional covers located centrally at the top and bottom, reveal the 4 respectively 6 slots in the mounting flange. Insert the device into the panel cut-out and fasten it with four or six screws. For the dimensions refer to Figure 4-11 to 4-13 in Section 4.23. Replace the four or six covers. Connect the ground on the rear plate of the device to the protective ground of the panel. Use at least one M4 screw for the device ground. The cross-sectional area of the ground wire must be greater than or equal to the cross-sectional area of any other control conductor connected to the device. Furthermore, the cross-section of the ground wire must be at least 2.5 mm2. Connect the plug terminals and/or the screwed terminals on the rear side of the device according to the wiring diagram for the panel. When using forked lugs or directly connecting wires to screwed terminals, the screws must be tightened so that the heads are even with the terminal block before the lugs or wires are inserted. A ring lug must be centred in the connection chamber so that the screw thread fits in the hole of the lug. SIPROTEC 4 System Manual has pertinent information regarding wire size, lugs, bending radii (optical cables), etc.

G G G

266

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

Installation and Connections

Elongated Holes

SIEMENS
RUN

SIPROTEC
ERROR

7SJ62

MAIN MENU Annunciation Measurement

01/05 1 2

MENU

LED

ESC

ENTER

Annunciation

F1 F2 F3 F4

7 4 1

8 5 2 0

9 6 3 +/-

Meas. Val. Trip log

Figure 3-1

Panel mounting of a 7SJ62 or a 7SJ640 with a four-line display (housing size 1/3) as an example

Elongated Holes

SIEMENS
RUN ERROR

SIPROTEC
7SJ641

Schlossplatz

MENU

21 kV

1000 A

LED

CTRL

ESC

ENTER

Annunciation Local Remote Meas. Val. Trip log Interlocking OFF Normal

F1 F2 F3 F4

7 4 1

8 5 2 0

9 6 3 +/-

Figure3-2

Panel mounting of a 7SJ632 or 7SJ641 with graphic display (housing size 1/2) as an example

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

267

Installation and Commissioning

Elongated Holes

SIEMENS
RUN ERROR

SIPROTEC
7SJ645

Default Display

MENU

21 kV

1000 A

Fault Location With F4

LED

CTRL

ESC

ENTER

Local Remote

Annunciation Annunciation Meas. Values

Meas. Val

F1 F2 F3 F4

7 4 1

8 5 2 0

9 6 3 +/-

Interlocking OFF Normal

Trip Log Trip log

Figure 3-3

Panel mounting of a 7SJ635 or 7SJ645 with graphic display (housing size 1/1) as an example

Rack Mounting and Cubicle Mounting

In housing sizes 1/3 (Figure 3-4) and 1/2 (Figure 3-5) there are 4 covers and 4 securing slots, with the housing size 1/1 (Figure 3-6) there are 6 covers and 6 securing slots available. To install the device in a frame or cubicle, two mounting brackets are required. The ordering codes are stated in Appendix A, Section A.1.
G G

Loosely screw the two mounting brackets in the rack with four screws. Remove the 4 covers at the corners of the front cover, for size 1/1 the 2 covers located centrally at the top and bottom also have to be removed. The 4 respectively. 6 slots in the mounting flange are revealed and can be accessed. Fasten the device to the mounting brackets with four or six screws. Replace the four or six covers. Tighten the mounting brackets to the rack using eight screws. Connect the ground on the rear plate of the device to the protective ground of the rack. Use at least one M4 screw for the device ground. The cross-sectional area of the ground wire must be greater than or equal to the cross-sectional area of any other control conductor connected to the device. Furthermore, the cross-section of the ground wire must be at least 2.5 mm2.

G G G G

268

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

Installation and Connections

Mounting bracket

SIEMENS
RUN

SIPROTEC
ERROR

7SJ640

MAIN MENU Annunciation Measurement

01/04 1 2

MENU

LED

ESC

ENTER

Annunciation F1 Meas. Val. Trip log

7 4 1

8 5 2 0

9 6 3 +/-

F2 F3 F4

Mounting bracket

Figure 3-4

Installing a 7SJ62 or 7SJ640 in a rack or cubicle (housing size 1/3 of 19 inch rack) as an example

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

269

Installation and Commissioning

Mounting bracket

SIEMENS
RUN ERROR

SIPROTEC
7SJ641

MENU

21 kV

1000 A

LED

CTRL

ESC

ENTER

Local Remote

Annunciation Meas. Val.

Trip log

F1 F2 F3 F4

7 4 1

8 5 2 0

9 6 3 +/-

Interlocking OFF Normal

Mounting bracket

Figure 3-5

Installing a 7SJ632 or 7SJ641 in a rack or cubicle (housing size 1/2 of 19 inch rack) as an example

270

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

Installation and Connections

SIEMENS
RUN ERROR

SIPROTEC
7SJ645

MENU

21 kV

1000 A

LED

CTRL

ESC

ENTER

Local Remote

Annunciation Meas. Val.

Trip log-

F1 F2 F3 F4

7 4 1

8 5 2 0

9 6 3 +/-

Interlocking OFF Normal

Figure 3-6

Installing a 7SJ635 or 7SJ645 in a rack or cubicle (housing size 1/1 of 19 inch rack) as an example

Connect the plug terminals and/or the screwed terminals on the rear side of the device according to the wiring diagram for the rack. When using forked lugs or directly connecting wires to screwed terminals, the screws must be tightened so that the heads are even with the terminal block before the lugs or wires are inserted. A ring lug must be centred in the connection chamber so that the screw thread fits in the hole of the lug. SIPROTEC 4 System Manual has pertinent information regarding wire size, lugs, bending radii, etc. Secure the device to the panel with four screws. For dimensions refer to Figure 4-14 to 4-16 in Section 4.23. Connect the ground of the device to the protective ground of the panel. The crosssectional area of the ground wire must be greater than or equal to the cross-sectional area of any other control conductor connected to the device. Furthermore, the cross-section of the ground wire must be at least 2.5 mm2. Connect solid, low-impedance operational grounding (cross-sectional area 2.5 mm2) to the grounding surface on the side. Use at least one M4 screw for the device ground.

Panel Surface Mounting

G G

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

271

Installation and Commissioning

Connections according to the circuit diagram via screw terminals, connections for optical fibres and electrical communication modules via the inclined housings. SIPROTEC 4 System Manual has pertinent information regarding wire size, lugs, bending radii, etc.

Mounting with Detached Operator Panel

For mounting the device proceed as follows:

G G

Fasten device of housing size 1/2 with 6 screws and device of housing size 1/1 with 10 screws. For dimensions see Section 4.23, Figure 4-17 and 4-18. Connect the ground on the rear plate of the device to the protective ground of the panel. Using at least one M4 screw. The cross-sectional area of the ground wire must be equal to the cross-sectional area of any other control conductor connected to the device. The cross-section of the ground wire must be at least 2.5 mm2. Connections are realized via the plug terminals or screw terminals on the rear side of the device according to the circuit diagram. When using forked lugs for direct connections or screw terminal, the screws, before having inserted the lugs and wires, must be tightened in such a way that the screw heads are even with the terminal block. A ring lug must be centred in the connection chamber, in such a way that the screw thread fits in the hole of the lug. SIPROTEC 4 System Manual has pertinent information regarding wire size, lugs, bending radii, etc. For mounting the detached operator panel please observe the following: The removal of the 4 covers located at the corners of the front cover reveal 4 elongated holes in the mounting bracket. Insert the operator panel into the panel cut-out and fasten with four screws. For dimensions refer to Figure 4-17 and 4-18 in Section 4.23. Mount the four covers. Connect the ground on the rear plate of the operator control element to the protective ground of the panel using at least one M4 screw. The cross-sectional area of the ground wire must be equal to the cross-sectional area of any other control conductor connected to the device. The cross-section of the ground wire must be at least 2.5 mm2.

G G G G G

Caution!
Do never pull or plug the connector between the device and the detached operator panel while the device is alive!
G

Connect the operator panel to the device. Furthermore, plug the 68-pin connector of the cable belonging to the operator panel into the corresponding connection at the rear side of the device (see SIPROTEC 4 System Manual).

Mounting without Operator Panel

For mounting the device proceed as follows:

G G

Fasten device of housing size 1/2 with 6 screws and device of housing size 1/1 with 10 screws. For dimensions see Section 4.23, Figure 4-17 and 4-18. Connect the ground on the rear plate of the device to the protective ground of the panel. Using at least one M4 screw. The cross-sectional area of the ground wire

272

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

Installation and Connections

must be equal to the cross-sectional area of any other control conductor connected to the device. The cross-section of the ground wire must be at least 2.5 mm2.
G

Connections are realized via the plug terminals or screw terminals on the rear side of the device according to the circuit diagram. When using forked lugs for direct connections or screw terminal, the screws, before having inserted the lugs and wires, must be tightened in such a way that the screw heads are even with the terminal block. A ring lug must be centred in the connection chamber, in such a way that the screw thread fits in the hole of the lug. SIPROTEC 4System Manual has pertinent information regarding wire size, lugs, bending radii, etc. For mounting the D-subminiature connector of the dongle cable please observe the following: Plug the 9-pin connector of the dongle cable with the connecting parts into the control panel or the cubicle door according to Figure 3-7. For dimensions refer to Figure 4-20 in Section 4.23. Plug the 68-pin connector of the cable into the corresponding connection at the rear side of the device.

G G

Caution!
Do never pull or plug the Donglecable while the device is alive! Without the cable the device is not ready for operation! The connector of the dongle cable at the device must always be plugged during operation!

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

273

Installation and Commissioning

a 1 2 3 4

a 1 2 3 4 5

a 1 2 3 4 5

UH-

UH+

5 6

6 7

7 8

6 7 8 9

9 10

9 10 11

10 11

11 12

12a 13 14 15

13 14

12 a

15 16

16 17

17 18 a b c

18 a

a 1 2 3 4

D
Ch1

J
6 5

6 7 8 9 10

B
b c

A
Ch1

11 12 a

Control panel or cubicle door

Figure3-7

Plugging the D-subminiature connector of the dongle cable into the control panel or cubicle door (housing size 1/2 as an example).

274

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

Installation and Connections

3.1.2

Connections
Elementary diagrams for device family 7SJ62/63/64 are shown in Appendix A, Section A.2. Anschlussbeispiele fr die Strom- und Spannungswandlerkreise befinden sich im Anhang A.3. Connection examples for current and voltage transformer circuits are provided in Appendix A, Section A.3. It must be checked that the setting configuration of the Power System Data 1 (P.System Data 1), Section , corresponds with the connections to the device.

3.1.2.1 Currents

Connection Examples for 7SJ62 The Figures A-45 to A-49 show examples of the current transformer connection options for the model 7SJ62. The Figures A-50 to A-54 show examples of the voltage transformer connection options. The device can either be connected with three phaseground voltages as shown in Figure A-50 (address 0213 VT Connection = Van, Vbn, Vcn), or with two phase phase voltages and 3V0 (also called the displacement voltage) from open delta VTs as shown in Figure A-51(address 0213 VT Connection = Vab, Vbc, VGnd). For the latter, only the phasephase voltages can be connected as shown in Figures A-52 and A-53 (open delta VTs), or only 3V0 can be connected as illustrated in Figure A-54. In the device settings the appropriate voltage connection must be entered under Address 0213, VT Connection, in P.System Data1. The maximum continuous voltage rating of a 7SJ62 is 170 V. For the first case above (phase-ground voltage connections), phase-phase voltages of up to [3 170V] = 294 V can be continuously applied. For the second case, the steady state phasephase voltages connected to the device must be 170 V or less.

Voltages

3.1.2.2 Currents

Connection Examples for 7SJ63 The Figures A-55 to A-58 show examples of the current transformer connection options for the model 7SJ63. The Figures A-59 to A-62 show examples of the voltage transformer connection options. The device can either be connected with three phaseground voltages as shown in Figure A-59 (address 0213 VT Connection = Van, Vbn, Vcn), or with two phase phase voltages and 3V0 (also called the displacement voltage) from open delta VTs as shown in Figure A-60 (address 0213 VT Connection = Vab, Vbc, VGnd). For the latter, only the phasephase voltages can be connected as shown in Figure (open delta VTs), or only 3V0 can be connected as illustrated in Figure A-62. In the device settings the appropriate voltage connection must be entered under Address 0213, VT Connection, in P.System Data1. The maximum continuous voltage rating of a 7SJ63 is 170 V. For the first case above (phase-ground voltage connections), phase-phase voltages of up to [3 170V] =

Voltages

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

275

Installation and Commissioning

294 V can be continuously applied. For the second case, the steady state phasephase voltages connected to the device must be 170 V or less.

3.1.2.3 Currents

Connection Examples for 7SJ64 The Figures A-63 to A-65 show examples of the current transformer connection options for the model 7SJ64. The Figures A-66 to A-71 show examples of the voltage transformer connection options. For the normal connection as shown in Figure A-66 the 4th voltage measuring input U4 is not used. The other three voltage measuring inputs are supplied with the phaseground voltages. Correspondingly the address 0213 must be set to VT Connection = Van, Vbn, Vcn. The factor in address 0205A Vph / Vdelta must however be set to 1.73 (this factor is used internally for the conversion of measurement and fault recording values). Figure A-67 shows an example of the additional connection of an en winding of the set of voltage transformers. Address 0213 must in this case be set to VT Connection = Van,Vbn,Vcn,VGn. The factor in address 0206A Vph / Vdelta is dependent on the ratio of the en winding. Notes may be referred to in Subsection at Tranformation Ratio. Also Figure A-68 shows an example of a connection of the en winding of a set of voltage transformers, in this case, however of a central set of transformers at a busbar. For more information refer to the previous paragraph. Figure A-69 shows an example of the connection of a different voltage, in this case the busbar voltage (for Synchronization). For synchronization address 0213 must be set to VT Connection = Van,Vbn,Vcn,VSy. The factor address 6X21 Balancing V1/V2 is always equal to 1 unless the feederside VT and busbarside VT have a different transformation ratio. The factor in address 0206A Vph / Vdelta must be 1.73 (this factor is used internally for the conversion of measurement and fault recording values). The device can be also connected with two phasephase voltages and 3V0 (also called the displacement voltage) from open delta VTs as shown in Figure A-70 (address 0213 VT Connection = Vab, Vbc, VGnd). For the latter, only the phase phase voltages can be connected or only 3V0 can be connected. The maximum continuous voltage rating of a 7SJ64 is 170 V. For the first case above (phaseground voltage connections), phasephase voltages of up to [3 170V] = 294 V can be continuously applied. For the second case, the steady state phase phase voltages connected to the device must be 170 V or less.

Voltages

3.1.2.4

General Connections for 7SJ62/63/64 The configuration of the binary in and outputs, i.e. the individual adaptation to the plant conditions, is described in the SIPROTEC 4 System Manual. The connections to the plant are dependent on this actual configuration. The presettings of the device are listed in Appendix A, Section A.4. Check also if the labelling corresponds to the allocated message functions.

Binary Inputs and Outputs

276

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

Installation and Connections

Changing Setting Groups with Binary Inputs

If binary inputs are used to switch setting groups, note: Two binary inputs must be dedicated to the purpose of changing setting groups when four groups are to be switched. One binary input must be set for >Set Group Bit 0, the other input for >Set Group Bit 1. If either of these input functions is not assigned, then it is considered as not controlled. To control two setting groups, one binary input set for >Set Group Bit 0 is sufficient since the binary input >Set Group Bit 1, which is not assigned, is considered to be not controlled. The status of the signals controlling the binary inputs to activate a particular setting group must remain constant as long as that particular group is to remain active. Table 3-1 shows the relationship between >Set Group Bit 0, >Set Group Bit 1, and the setting groups A to D. Principal connection diagrams for the two binary inputs are illustrated in Figure 3-8. The figure illustrates an example in which both Set Group Bits 0 and 1 are configured to be controlled (actuated) when the associated binary input is energized (high).

Table 3-1

Setting group selection with binary inputs example

Binary Input Events >Set Group Bit 0 >Set Group Bit 1 no yes no yes
no = not energized yes = energized

Active Group Group A Group B Group C Group D

no no yes yes

Selector switch for setting group A B C D

FNo 7 >Set Group Bit 0

L+

Binary input set for: 7 >Set Group Bit 0, High

L+

A B C D

7SJ62/63/64
FNo 8 >Set Group Bit 1

Binary input set for: 8 >Set Group Bit 1, High

Figure3-8

Connection diagram (example) for setting group switching with binary inputs

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

277

Installation and Commissioning

Trip Circuit Supervision

It must be noted that two binary inputs or one binary input and one bypass resistor R must be connected in series. The pick-up threshold of the binary inputs must therefore be substantially below half the rated control DC voltage. If two binary inputs are used for the trip circuit supervision, these binary inputs must be potential free i.o.w. not be commoned with each other or with another binary input. If one binary input is used, a bypass resistor R must be employed (refer to Figure 3-9). This resistor R is connected in series with the second circuit breaker auxiliary contact (Aux2), to also allow the detection of a trip circuit failure when the circuit breaker auxiliary contact 1 (Aux1) is open, and the command relay contact has reset. The value of this resistor must be such that in the circuit breaker open condition (therefore Aux1 is open and Aux2 is closed) the circuit breaker trip coil (TC) is no longer picked up and binary input (BI1) is still picked up if the command relay contact is open.

L+

UCTR UBI 7SJ62/63/64

7SJ62/63/64 >RTC Status

RTC

Legend:

R CB
TC Aux1 Aux2

RTC CB TC Aux1 Aux2 R UCTR UBI

Relay Tripping Contact Circuit Breaker Circuit Breaker Trip Coil Circuit Breaker Auxiliary Contact (Closed when CB is Closed) Circuit Breaker Auxiliary Contact (Closed when CB is Open) bypass Resistor Control Voltage (Trip Voltage) Input Voltage for Binary Input

Figure 3-9 Trip circuit supervision with one binary input

This results in an upper limit for the resistance dimension, Rmax, and a lower limit Rmin, from which the optimal value of the arithmetic mean should be selected. R max + R min R = --------------------------------2 To ensure the minimum voltage for the control of the binary input, Rmax is derived as: U CRT U BI min R max = ------------------------------------- R CBTC I BI (High) So the circuit breaker trip coil does not remain energized in the above case, Rmin is derived as: U CTR U TC (LOW) R min = R TC ---------------------------------------------- U TC (LOW)
IBI (HIGH) UBI min Constant current with BI on (= 1,7 mA) Minimum control voltage for BI =19 V for delivery setting for nominal voltage of 24/48/60 V; =73 V for delivery setting for nominal voltage of 110/125/220/250 V;

278

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

Installation and Connections

UCTR RCBTC UCBTC (LOW)

Control voltage for trip circuit DC resistance of circuit breaker trip coil Maximum voltage on the circuit breaker trip coil that does not lead to tripping

If the calculation results that Rmax < Rmin, then the calculation must be repeated, with the next lowest switching threshold UBI min, and this threshold must be implemented in the relay using plug-in bridges (see Sub-section 3.1.3). For the power consumption of the resistance: 2 U CTR 2 P R = I R = --------------------------- R R + R CBTC

Example:
IBI (HIGH) UBI min UCTR RCBTC 1.8 mA (from SIPROTEC 7SJ62/63/64) 19 V for delivery setting for nominal voltage 24/48/60 V 73 V or delivery setting for nominal voltage 110/125/220/250 V 110 V (from system / release circuit) 500 (from system / release circuit)

UCBTC (LOW) 2 V (from system / release circuit)

110 V - 19 V R max = -------------------------------- 500 1.8 m 110 V - 2 V R min = 500 ----------------------------- - 2V R max + R min R = ------------------------------- = 38.6 k 2

R max = 50.1 k

R min = 27 k

The closest standard value of 39 k is selected; the power is:

2 110 V P R = --------------------------------------- 39 k 39 k + 0.5 k

P R 0.3 W

3.1.3
3.1.3.1

Hardware Modifications
General Hardware modifications might be necessary or desired. For example, a change of the pick-up threshold for some of the binary inputs might be advantageous in certain applications. Terminating resistors might be required for the communication bus. In either case, hardware modifications are needed. The modifications are done with jump-

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

279

Installation and Commissioning

ers on the printed circuit boards inside the device. Follow the procedure described in Subsection 3.1.3, whenever hardware modifications are done. Since the design of the modules differs, detailed information on hardware adaption is listed separately for each of the three device types 7SJ62, 7SJ63 and 7SJ64. Power Supply Voltage There are different ranges for the power supply voltage of the various power supplies. Refer to the data for the 7SJ62/63/64 ordering numbers in Section A.1 of the Appendix. The power supplies of the different variants are largely interchangeable by modifying the position of the jumpers. Jumper settings determine the rating. The assignment of these jumpers to the supply voltages is described in Subsubsections 3.1.3.3 to 3.1.3.5, separately for 7SJ62, 7SJ63 and 7SJ64. When the relays are delivered, these jumpers are set according to the name-plate sticker. Generally, they need not be altered. The life contacts of the devices are changeover contacts. In 7SJ62 all three connections are conducted to device terminals. In case of 7SJ63 and 7SJ64 the NC contact or the NO contact can be connected to the device connections via a plug-in jumper (X40). The assignment of the plug-in jumper to the type of contact and the location of the jumper is described in Subsubsections 3.1.3.4 and 3.1.3.5 for the models 7SJ63 and 7SJ64. The input transformers of the devices are set to a nominal current of 1 A or 5 A with jumpers. The position of the jumpers are set according to the name-plate sticker. The assignment of the jumpers to the nominal rate and the arrangement of the jumpers is described in 3.1.3.3 to 3.1.3.5, separately for 7SJ62, 7SJ63 and 7SJ64. All jumpers must be set for the same nominal current, i.e. a jumper (X61 to X63) one jumper for each input transformer and additionally one jumper X 60. Jumper X64 for the ground path is set to 1 A or 5 A (depending on the ordered variant) for the models with normal 1/5-A transformer irrespective of the other jumper positions. Jumper X64 is omitted for models featuring a sensitive ground fault input for the setting range from 0.001 to 1.500 A. Note: If nominal current ratings are changed exceptionally, then the new ratings must be registered in addresses 0205 CT SECONDARY/ 0218 Ignd-CT SEC in the Power System Data 1 (P.System Data 1) (see Subsection 2.1.3).

Life Contact

Nominal Currents

Control Voltages for Binary Inputs

When the device is delivered from the factory, the binary inputs are set to operate with a voltage that corresponds to the rated DC voltage of the power supply. In general, to optimize the operation of the inputs, the pick-up voltage of the inputs should be set to most closely match the actual control voltage being used. Each binary input has a pick-up voltage that can be independently adjusted; therefore, each input can be set according to the function performed. A jumper position is changed to adjust the pick-up voltage of a binary input. The physical arrangement of the binary input jumpers in relation to the pick-up voltages is described in 3.1.3.3 to 3.1.3.5 separately for 7SJ62, 7SJ63 and 7SJ64.

280

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

Installation and Connections

Note: If the 7SJ62/63/64 performs trip circuit monitoring, two binary inputs, or one binary input and a resistor, are connected in series. The pick-up voltage of these inputs must be less than half of the nominal DC voltage of the trip circuit.

Type of Contact for Binary Outputs

Input and output boards can contain relays of which the contact can be set as normally closed or normally open contact. Therefore it is necessary to rearrange a jumper. Subsections 3.1.3.3 to 3.1.3.5 describe separately for 7SJ62, 7SJ63 and 7SJ64 to which relays on which modules this applies. Only serial interfaces of devices for panel and cubicle flush mounting as well as of mounting devices with detached operator panel or without operator panel are replaceable. For more details on this matter refer to Subsubsection 3.1.3.6, Replacing Interfaces. When the device is delivered from the factory, the serial interfaces are matched to the ordered version according to the 11th and 12th figure of the ordering code of the device (or to the additional information of the ordering code). The configuration is determined by jumpers on the interface modules (RS232/RS485 in Subsection 3.1.3.6). If the device is equipped with a serial RS485 port or Profibus, they must be terminated with resistors at the last device on the bus to ensure reliable data transmission. For this purpose, the printed circuit board of the central processor unit CPU and the RS485 or Profibus interface module are provided with terminating resistors that can be connected to the system by means of jumpers. It is important to use only 1 of the options. The position of the jumpers on the printed circuit board of the corresponding central processor unit CPU is described in Subsubsections 3.1.3.3 to 3.1.3.5, see Processor Board CPU and the position of the jumpers on the interface modules in Subsubsection 3.1.3.6, see RS485/RS232 und Profibus (FMS/DP) DNP3.0/Modbus. Both jumpers must always be plugged in the same way. As delivered from the factory, the resistors are switched out.

Replacing Interfaces

Configuring RS232/RS485

Termination of Serial Interfaces

Spare Parts

Spare parts can be the battery that provides for storage of the data in the battery-buffered RAM in case of a power failure, and the miniature fuse of the internal power supply. Their physical location is shown in Figures 3-16, 3-17, 3-19, 3-20 and 3-23. The ratings of the fuse are printed on the board next the fuse itself. When exchanging the fuse, please observe the hints given in the SIPROTEC4 System Manual in the chapter Maintenance.

3.1.3.2

Disassembly of the Device Important! It is assumed for the following steps that the the device is not operative. To perform work on the printed circuit boards, such as checking or moving switching elements or exchanging modules, proceed as follows:

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

281

Installation and Commissioning

Caution!
Jumper-setting changes that affect nominal values of the device render the ordering number and the corresponding nominal values on the nameplate sticker invalid. If such changes are necessary, the changes should be clearly and fully noted on the device. Self adhesive stickers are available that can be used as replacement nameplates.

Prepare area of work. Provide a grounded mat for protecting components subject to damage from electrostatic discharges (ESD). The following equipment is needed: screwdriver with a 5 to 6 mm wide tip, 1 Philips screwdriver, 4.5 mm socket or nut driver.

o o o o

Unfasten the screw-posts of the D-subminiature connector on the back panel at location A and C (7SJ64). This activity does not apply if the device is for surface mounting. If there are additional interfaces on location B , C and D next to the interfaces at location A to C (7SJ64), remove the screws located diagonally to the interfaces. This activity is not necessary if the device is for surface mounting. Remove the four or six caps on the front cover and loosen the screws that become accessible. Carefully take off the front cover. The front cover is connected to the CPU board with a short ribbon-cable. With device versions with a detached operator panel it is possible to remove the front cover of the device right after having unscrewed all screws.

Caution!
Electrostatic discharges through the connections of the components, wiring, plugs, and jumpers must be avoided. Wearing a grounded wrist strap is preferred. Otherwise, first touch a grounded metal part.

Disconnect the ribbon cable between the front cover and the CPU board () at the front cover side. To disconnect the cable, push up the top latch of the plug connector and push down the bottom latch of the plug connector. Carefully draw out the plug connector. This action does not apply to the device version with detached operator panel. However, on the central processor unit CPU () the 7-pole plug connector X16 behind the D-subminiture connector and the plug connector of the ribbon cable (connected to the 68pole plug connector on the rear side) must be removed. Disconnect the ribbon cables between the CPU unit () and the input/output printed circuit boards (depending on the version () to ()). Remove the boards and set them on the grounded mat to protect them from ESD damage. A greater effort is required to withdraw the CPU board, especially in versions of the device for surface-mounting, because of the communication connectors.

q q

282

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

7SJ62
q

Installation and Connections

Check the jumpers according to Figures 3-16 to 3-27 and the following information Change or remove the jumpers as necessary.

The order of the boards for the individual device types and housings is shown in Figures 3-10 to 3-15. Module Arrangement of 7SJ62 Figure 3-10 shows the arrangement of the modules for 7SJ62.

1 2

Processor printed circuit board ACPU Input/output printed circuit board AI/O2

Slot 5
1

Slot 19
2

BI1 to BI3
Figure3-10

BI4 to BI11

Binary inputs (BI)

Front view of 7SJ62 after removal of the front cover (simplified and scaled down

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

283

Installation and Commissioning

7SJ63

Module Arrangement of 7SJ63

Figure 3-11shows the arrangement of the modules for 7SJ63 with housing size 1/2 and Figure 3-12 for the housing size 1/1.

1 2 3

Processor printed circuit board BCPU Input/output printed circuit board BI/O-1 Input/output printed circuit board BI/O-2

Slot 5
1

Slot 19

Slot 33
2

7SJ631
Binary inputs (BI)

BI1 to BI7
1 3

BI21 to BI24
2

7SJ632 and 7SJ633

Binary inputs (BI)

BI1 to BI7

BI8 to BI20

BI21 to BI24

Figure 3-11 Front view of the 7SJ63 with housing size 1/2 after removal of the front cover (simplified and scaled down)

284

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

7SJ63

Installation and Connections

Prozessorbaugruppe 1
1 42 1 42

2 3

Processor p. c. b. BCPU Input/output p. c. b. BI/O-1 Input/output p. c. b. BI/O-2

Slot 5
1

Slot 33
3

Slot 5
3

Slot 33
2

BI1 to BI7
Figure 3-12

BI8 to BI20

BI25 to BI37

BI21 to BI24

Binary Inputs (BI)

Front view of 7SJ635 and 7SJ636 with housing size 1/2 after removal of the front cover (simplified and scaled down)

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

285

Installation and Commissioning

7SJ64

Module Arrangement of 7SJ64

Figure 3-13 shows the arrangement of the modules for 7SJ64 with housing size 1/3 and Figure 3-14 for the housing size 1/2 and Figure 3-15 for the housing size 1/1.

1 2

Processor printed circuit board CCPU2 Input/output printed circuit board CI/O11

Slot 5
1

Slot 19
2

7SJ640
Binary inputs (BI)

BI1 to BI5
Figure3-13

BI6 and BI7

Front view of device of housing size 1/3 after removal of the front cover (simplified and scaled down)

286

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

7SJ64

Installation and Connections

1 2 3 4

Processor p. c. b. CCPU2 Input/output p. c. b. CI/O11 Input/output p. c. b. BI/O2 Input/output p. c. b. CI/O1

Slot 5
1

Slot 19
4

Slot 33
2

7SJ641
Binary inputs (BI)

BI1 to BI5
1

BI8 to BI15
3

BI6 and BI7

2

7SJ642
Binary inputs (BI)

BI1 to BI5 Figure3-14

BI8 to BI20

BI6 and BI7

Front view of 7SJ64 with housing size 1/2 after removal of the front cover (simplified and scaled down)

1 2
1 42 1 42

Processor p. c. b. CCPU2 Input/output p. c. b. CI/O11 Input/output p. c. b. BI/O2

Slot 5
1

Slot 33
3

Slot 19
3

Slot 33
2

7SJ645
Binary Inputs (BI)

BI1 to BI5

BI8 to BI20

BI21 to BI33

BI6 and BI7

Figure 3-15 Front view of 7SJ645 with housing size 1/1 after removal of the front cover (simplified and scaled down).

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

287

Installation and Commissioning

7SJ62

3.1.3.3

Jumper Settings on Printed Circuit Boards of 7SJ62 There are two different releases available of the ACPU board. Figure 3-16 shows the layout of the printed circuit board for the ACPU board up to the release 7SJ62.../DD, Figure 3-17 for devices of the release 7SJ62.../EE. The set nominal voltage of the integrated current supply is checked according to Table 3-2 and the selected operating voltage of the binary inputs BI1 to BI3 to Table 3-3. The location and ratings of the miniature fuse (F1) and of the buffer battery (G1) are shown in Figure 3-16.

Processor Board ACPU for 7SJ62.../DD

F1

X51 3 21

X53 1 2 3 X21 4 3 2 1 X52 L X23 H L H X22 L H

Front Operator Panel

Cable Binder LithiumBattery 3 V/1 Ah, Typ CR 1/2 AA Time Synchronization (Port A)

G1

Figure3-16

Processor printed circuit board ACPU for 7SJ62.../DD with jumper settings

required for the module configuration

288

Battery

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

7SJ62
Power Supply
Table 3-2

Installation and Connections

Factory Jumper Settings for the nominal voltage of the integrated Power Supply on the ACPU for 7SJ62.../DD Nominal Voltage 60/110/125 VDC 110/125/220/250 DC 115 VAC 23 23 23 Can be inter-changed Not changeable Jumpers X51 through X53 are not used 24/48 VDC 230 VAC

Jumper

X51 X52 X53

12 12 and 34 12

Pickup Voltages of BI1 to BI3

Table 3-3 Factory Jumper Settings for the Pickup Voltages of the Binary Inputs BI1 through BI3 on the ACPU for 7SJ62.../DD Jumper X21 X22 X23 19 VDC Pickup1) L L L 88 VDC Pickup2) H H H

Binary Input BI1 BI2 BI3

1 2

) Factory settings for devices with power supply voltages of 24 VDC to 125 VDC. ) Factory settings for devices with power supply voltages of 110 VDC to 220 VDC and AC 115/230 V

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

289

Installation and Commissioning

7SJ62

Processor Board ACPU for 7SJ62.../EE

The set nominal voltage of the integrated current supply is checked according to Table 3-4, the selected operating voltage of the binary inputs BI1 to BI3 according to Table 3-5 and the contact mode of the binary outputs BO1 and BO2 according to Table 3-6. The location and ratings of the miniature fuse (F1) and of the buffer battery (G1) are shown in Figure 3-17.

Fuse
F1

Front operator panel

Cable binder Time Synchronization (Port A)

Battery

G1

Figure 3-17 Processor printed circuit board ACPU for 7SJ62.../EE with jumper settings required for the

module configuration

290

T 2,0H250V 3 X41 3 X42 X21 L H X22

X51 3 21

2 1 2 1

X53 L H L H

1 2 3 4 3 2 1 X52

X23

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

7SJ62
Power Supply
Table 3-4

Installation and Connections

Factory Jumper Settings for the nominal voltage of the integrated Power Supply on the ACPU for 7SJ62.../EE Nominal Voltage

Jumper 24 to 48 VDC X51 X52 X53 none none none 60 to125 VDC 12 12 and 34 12 110 to 250 VDC, 115 to 230 VAC 23 23 23

Pickup Voltages of BI1 to BI3

Table 3-5 Factory Jumper Settings for the Pickup Voltages of the Binary Inputs BI1 through BI3 on the ACPU for 7SJ62.../EE Jumper X21 X22 X23 19 VDC Pickup1) L L L 88 VDC Pickup2) H H H

Binary Input BI1 BI2 BI3

1 2

) Factory settings for devices with power supply voltages of 24 VDC to 125 VDC. ) Factory settings for devices with power supply voltages of 110 VDC to 220 VDC and AC 115/230 V

Contact Mode for BO1 and BO2

Table 3-6 Jumper setting for the Contact Mode of the binary outputs BO1 und BO2 on the processor printed circuit board ACPU for 7SJ62.../EE Jumper X41 X42 Open in the quiescent state 12 12 Closed in the quiescent state 23 23 Presetting 12 12

BO BO1 BO2

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

291

Installation and Commissioning

7SJ62

Input/Output Board AI/O2

The layout of the printed circuit board for the input/output board AI/O2 is illustrated in Figure 3-18. The set nominal currents of the current input transformers and the selected operating voltage of the binary inputs BI4 to BI11 according to Table 3-7 are checked. Jumpers X60 to X63 must all be set to the same rated current, i.e. one jumper (X61 to X63) for each input transformer of the phase currents and in addition the common jumper X60. Jumper X64 determines the rated current for the input IE and may thus have a setting that deviates from that of the phase currents. There is no jumper X64 for the version with sensitive earth current input.

H X23 LH X24 L H X25 L H X21 LH X22 L H X26 LH LH L X27 X28

Figure3-18

The input/output board A-I/O2 with the jumpers necessary for the setting
check

5A 1A X60 5A 1A X62 5A 1A X63 5A 1A

T2

T1

X61

T3
5A 1A X64

T4

292

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

7SJ62
Pickup Voltages of BI4 to BI11
Table 3-7

Installation and Connections

Jumper settings of the control voltages of the binary inputs BI4 to BI11 on the input/output board AI/O2 Jumper X21 X22 X23 X24 X25 X26 X27 X28 19 VDC Pick-up 1) L L L L L L L L 88 VDC Pick-up 2) H H H H H H H H

Binary Inputs BI4 BI5 BI6 BI7 BI8 BI9 BI10 BI11
1 2

) Factory settings for devices with power supply voltages of 24 VDC to 125 VDC ) Factory settings for devices with power supply voltages of 110 VDC to 250 VDC and 115/230 VAC

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

293

Installation and Commissioning

7SJ63

3.1.3.4

Switching Elements on the Printed Circuit Boards of 7SJ63 There exist two different releases of the BCPU board with a different arrangement and setting of the jumpers. Figure 3-19 depicts the layout of the printed circuit board for the B-CPU board for devices up to the release 7SJ63.../DD, Figure 3-20 for devices of release .../EE and higher. For devices up to release 7SJ63.../DD check the provided nominal voltage of the integrated power supply according to Table 3-8, the quiescent state of the life contact according to Table 3-12 and the selected pickup voltages of the binary inputs BI1 through BI7 according to Table 3-13. The location and ratings of the miniature fuse (F1) and of the buffer battery (G1) are shown in Figure 3-19.

Processor Board BCPU for 7SJ63.../DD

X51 1 2 X40 3 2 1

F1

1 2 3 X53 X21 X22 X23 X24 X25 L H L H L H L H L H X52 4 3 2 1 X27 L X26 H L H

Front Operator Panel

Cable Binder LithiumBattery 3 V/1 Ah, Typ CR 1/2 AA Time Synchronization (Port A)

G1

Figure 3-19 Processor printed circuit board BCPU for 7SJ63.../DDwith jumper settings required for the module

configuration

294

Battery

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

7SJ63
Power Supply

Installation and Connections

There is no 230-V AC power supply available for 7SJ63.../DD.

Table 3-8 Factory Jumper Settings for the Nominal Voltage of the integrated Power Supply on BCPU for 7SJ63.../DD Nominal Voltage 60/110/125 VDC X51 X52 X53 1-2 1-2 and 3-4 1-2 110/125/220/250 VDC 115 VAC 2-3 2-3 2-3 Can be inter-changed Not changeable 24/48 VDC Jumpers X51 through X53 are not used

Jumper

Live Status Contact

Table 3-9 Jumper Setting for Live Status Contact-Type brought out to device terminals, on BCPU for 7SJ63.../DD Normally Open Contact 1-2 Normally Closed Contact 2-3 Factory Set 2-3

Jumper X40

Pickup Voltages of BI1 to BI7

Table 3-10 Factory Jumper Settings for the Pickup Voltages of the Binary Inputs BI1 through BI7 on the CPU Board Jumper X21 X22 X23 X24 X25 X26 X27 19 VDC Pickup1) L L L L L L L 88 VDC Pickup2) H H H H H H H

Binary Input BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6 BI7

1 2

) Factory settings for devices with power supply voltages of 24 VDC to 125 VDC ) Factory settings for devices with power supply voltages of 110 VDC to 250 VDC and 115 VAC

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

295

Installation and Commissioning

7SJ63

Processor Board BCPU for 7SJ63.../EE

For devices of release 7SJ63.../EE and higher check the provided nominal voltage of the integrated power supply according to Table 3-11, the quiescent state of the life contact according to Table 3-12 and the selected pickup voltages of the binary inputs BI1 through BI7 according to Table 3-13. The location and ratings of the miniature fuse (F1) and of the buffer battery (G1) are shown in Figure 3-20.

3 X51

2 3 2 1 X40 1

F1

1 2 3 X53 L H X23 L H

X26
H L X25

L L L H H H X21 X22 X24

4 3 2 1

X52

H L

X27

Front Operator Panel

Cable Binder LithiumBattery 3 V/1 Ah, Typ CR 1/2 AA

Time Synchronization (Port A)

G1

Figure 3-20 Processor printed circuit board BCPU for 7SJ63.../EE with jumper settings required for the module

configuration

296

Battery

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

7SJ63
Power Supply

Installation and Connections

There is a 230-V AC power supply available for 7SJ63.../EE.

Table 3-11 Jumper settings for the nominal voltage of the integrated power supply on the processor printed circuit board BCPU for 7SJ63.../EE Nominal Voltage 60/110/125 VDC X51 X52 X53 12 12 and 34 12 220/250 VDC 115/230 VAC 23 23 23 24/48 VDC 12 none none

Jumper

Live Status Contact

Table 3-12 Jumper setting for the quiescent state of the life contact on the processor printed circuit board BCPU for 7SJ63.../EE Open in the quiescent state 12 Closed in the quiescent state 23 Presetting 23

Jumper X40

Pickup Voltages of BI1 to BI7

Table 3-13 Factory Jumper Settings for the Pickup Voltages of the Binary Inputs BI1 through BI7 on the CPU Board for 7SJ63.../EE Jumper X21 X22 X23 X24 X25 X26 X27 19 VDC Pickup1) L L L L L L L 88 VDC Pickup2) H H H H H H H

Binary Input BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6 BI7

1) 2

Factory settings for devices with power supply voltages of 24 VDC to 125 VDC ) Factory settings for devices with power supply voltages of 110 VDC to 250 VDC and 115/230 VAC

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

297

Installation and Commissioning

7SJ63

Input/Output Board BI/O1

The layout of the printed circuit board for the input/output board BI/O1 is illustrated in Figure 3-21. The set nominal currents of the current input transformers and the selected operating voltage of the binary inputs BI21 to BI24 according to Table 3-14 are checked. The jumpers X60 to X63 must all be set to the same rated current, i.e. one jumper (X61 to X63) for each input transformer of the phase currents and in addition the common jumper X60. The jumper X64 determines the rated current for the input IE and may thus have a setting that deviates from that of the phase currents. There is no jumper X64 for the version with sensitive earth current input.

X73 AD2 X72 AD1 X71 AD0

Figure3-21Input/output module BI/O-1 with representation of the jumper settings required for the module configuration

1A 5A

X60 H L H 5A 1A L H H X24 X23 X62 X22 X21 L L X61 5A 1A

T2

T1

T3

T4

X63

X64

5A 1A

5A 1A

298

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

7SJ63
Pickup Voltages of BI21 to BI24
Table 3-14

Installation and Connections

Factory jumper settings for the Pickup Voltages of the binary inputs BI21 through BI24 on the BI/O-1 board
Jumper X21 X22 X23 X24 19 VDC Pickup1) L L L L 88 VDC Pickup2) H H H H

Binary Input BI21 BI22 BI23 BI24

1) 2

Factory settings for devices with power supply voltages of 24 VDC to 125 VDC. ) Factory settings for devices with power supply voltages of 110 VDC to 220 VDC and 115/230 VAC.

Bus address

Jumpers X71, X72 and X73 on the B I/O-1 board serve to set up the bus address. The jumpers must not be changed. Table 3-15 shows the factory settings for the jumpers.
Table 3-15 Jumper X71 X72 X73 Factory Settings for Jumpers X71, X72, and X73 on the BI/O-1 Board
1/ 2

Size and Full Size Housing L H L

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

299

Installation and Commissioning

7SJ63

Input/Output Board BI/O2

The layout of the printed circuit board for the input/output board BI/O2 is illustrated in Figure 3-22. Check the selected pickup voltages of the binary inputs BI8 through BI20, and BI25 through BI37, according to Table 3-16. The assignment of the binary inputs to the printed circuit board is shown in Figures 311 and 3-12.
X22 123 3 21
X21

X24 123

3 21
X23

X26 123

3 21
X25

X28 123

3 21
X27

X29 123 X30 123 X31 123 X32 123 X33 123

Figure3-22Jumpers on the BI/O-2 Board for the Binary Inputs BI8 through BI20, and BI25 through BI37. (Jumpers X71, X72 and X73 apply to 1/2 size housing)

X73 X72 X71

3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1

300

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

7SJ63
Pickup Voltages of BI8 to BI20
Table 3-16

Installation and Connections

Factory jumper settings for the Pickup Voltages of the binary inputs BI8 through BI20 and BI25 through BI37on the BI/O-2 board
Binary Input Jumper BI25 BI26 BI27 BI28 BI29 BI30 BI31 BI32 BI33 BI34 BI35 BI36 BI37 X21 X22 X23 X24 X25 X26 X27 X28 X29 X30 X31 X32 X33 19 VDC Pickup1) 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2 88 VDC Pickup2) 2-3 2-3 2-3 2-3 2-3 2-3 2-3 2-3 2-3 2-3 2-3 2-3 2-3

BI8 BI9 BI10 BI11 BI12 BI13 BI14 BI15 BI16 BI17 BI18 BI19 BI20
1) 2

Factory settings for devices with power supply voltages of 24 VDC to 125 VDC.

) Factory settings for devices with power supply voltages of 110 VDC to 220 VDC and 115/230 VAC.

Bus address

Jumpers X71, X72 and X73 on the BI/O-2 board serve to set up the bus address. The jumpers must not be changed. Table 3-17 shows the factory settings for the jumpers.
Table 3-17 Jumper Factory Settings for Jumpers X71, X72, and X73 on the BI/O-2 Board
1

/2 Size Housing 2-3 1-2 1-2

Full Size Housing Slot 33 Slot 5 1-2 1-2 2-3

X71 X72 X73

1-2 2-3 2-3

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

301

Installation and Commissioning

7SJ64

3.1.3.5

Switching Elements on the Printed Circuit Boards of 7SJ64 The layout of the printed circuit board of the processor printed circuit board C-CPU-2 is illustrated in Figure 3-23. The set nominal voltage of the integrated current supply is checked according to Table 3-18, the quiescent state of the life contact according to Table 3-19 and the selected operating voltage of the binary inputs BI1 to BI5 according to Table 3-20 and the integrated interface RS232 / RS485 according to Table 3-21 to 3-23. The location and ratings of the miniature fuse (F1) and of the buffer battery (G1) are shown in Figure 3-23.

Processor Board C-CPU-2

2 1 X51

F1

Fuse

24/48V DC T4H250V

1 2 3 X53

1 2

X55

X52

3 4

3 2 1 X103

123

Front Operator Panel

Cable Binder LithiumBattery 3 V/1 Ah, Typ CR 1/2 AA Time Synchronization (Port A)

Battery

G1

Figure3-23Processor printed circuit board C-CPU-2 with jumper settings required for the

module configuration

302

X109

X105

X90

321 321

321

1 2 3

X111 X110 X108

X107

X104 X106

1 2 3

X25 4 3 2 1 4 3 X24 2 1 4 3 2 1 X23

X22 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 X21

X40

60-250V DC/115 V AC T2H250V

Service Port (Port C)

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

7SJ64
Power Supply
Table 3-18

Installation and Connections

Jumper settings for the nominal voltage of the integrated power supply on the processor printed circuit board C-CPU-2 Nominal Voltage 24 to 48 VDC 60 to 125 VDC 12 12 and 34 12 none 110 to 250 VDC, 115 VAC 23 23 23 12

Jumper

X51 X52 X53 X55

none none none none

Live Status Contact

Table 3-19 Jumper setting for the quiescent state of the life contact on the processor printed circuit board C-CPU-2 Open in the quiescent state Closed in the quiescent state 12 23 Presetting 23

Jumper X40

Pickup Voltages of BI1 to BI5

Table 3-20 Jumper settings of the control voltages of the binary inputs BI1 to BI5 on the processor printed circuit board C-CPU-2 Jumper X21 X22 X23 X24 X25 19 VDC Pickup1) 12 (L) 12 (L)) 12 (L)) 12 (L) 12 (L) 88 VDC Pickup2) 23 (H) 23 (H) 23 (H) 23 (H) 23 (H)

Binary Inputs BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5

1 2

) Factory settings for devices with power supply voltages of 24 VDC to 125 VDC ) Factory settings for devices with power supply voltages of 110 VDC to 250 VDC and 115 VAC

Port C RS232/RS485

By repositioning jumpers the service interface (port C) can either be operated as RS232 port or as RS485 port. The jumpers X105 to X110 must be plugged in the same way!

Table 3-21

Jumper settings of the integrated interface RS232/RS485 on the processor printed circuit board C-CPU-2 RS232 12 12 RS485 12 23

Jumper X103 and X104 X105 to X110

The jumpers are preset at the factory according to the configuration ordered.

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

303

Installation and Commissioning

7SJ64

CTS

With jumper X111, CTS is activated which is necessary for the communication with the modem.
Table 3-22 Jumper setting of CTS (Clear-To-Send) on the processor printed circuit board C-CPU-2 /CTS of interface RS232 12 /CTS controlled by /RTS 23 *)

Jumper X111

*) Presetting Jumper setting 23: the connection to the modem is usually done with star coupler or optical fibre converter. Therefore the modem control signal according to RS232 standard DIN 66020 is not available. Modem signals are not required since communication to SIPROTEC devices is always carried out in the half duplex mode. Use connetion cable with ordering number 7XV51004. Jumper setting 12: this setting makes the modem signal available, i. e. for a direct RS232-connection between the SIPROTEC device and the modem this setting can be selected optionally. We recommend to use a standard RS232 modem connection cable (converter 9-pole on 25-pole). Note: For a direct connection to DIGSI 4 with interface RS232 jumper X111 must be plugged in position 23.

Terminating Resistors

If there are no external matching resistors in the system, the last devices on a RS485-bus must be configured via jumpers X103 and X104.

Table 3-23

Jumper setting of matching resistors of the interface RS485 on the processor printed circuit board CCPU2 Matching resistor closed 23 23 Matching resistor open 12 12 Presetting 12 12

Jumper X103 X104

Note: Both jumpers must always be plugged in the same way!

Currently no function is assigned to the jumper X90. The presetting is 1-2.

The terminating resistors can also be connected externally (e.g. to the connection module). In this case, the terminating resistors located on the RS485 interface module or the resistors located directly on the processor circuit board CCPU2 must be disconnected.

304

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

7SJ64
+5 V 390 A/A 220 B/B 390
Figure3-24 Termination of the RS 485 interface (external)

Installation and Connections

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

305

Installation and Commissioning

7SJ64

Input/Output Board CI/O11

The layout of the printed circuit board for the input/output board C-I/O11 is illustrated in Figure 3-25. The set nominal currents of the current input transformer are checked on the input/output board CI/O11. The jumpers X60 to X63 must all be set to the same rated current, i.e. one jumper (X61 to X63) for each input transformer of the phase currents and in addition the joint jumper X60. The jumper X64 determines the rated current for the input IE and may thus have a setting that deviates from that of the phase currents. There is no jumper X64 for the version with sensitive earth current input. For normal earth current inputs the jumper X65 is plugged in position IE and for sensitive earth current inputs in position IEE.

(AD2) (AD1) (AD0)

T10
1 2 3

L MH X21 LMH X22 1A 5A

1 2 3

1 1 2 3

X60 1A 5A X61

T9

X62

3 3 L 2 2 1 1 H X73 X72 X71

Figure3-25

The input/output board C-I/O11 with the jumpers necessary for the control of
settings

1A 5A X63 1A 5A

T11
1 2 3

T8
X64 1A 5A
1 2 3

X65 IEE IE

306

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

7SJ64
Pickup Voltages of BI6 and BI 7
Table 3-24

Installation and Connections

Jumper setting of control voltages of the binary inputs BI6 and BI7 on the binary input/output boards C I/O11 Jumper X21 X22 19 VDC Pickup1) L L 88 VDC Pickup2) M M

Binary Inputs BI6 BI7

1

2)

) Factory settings for devices with power supply voltages of 24 VDC to 125 VDC Factory settings for devices with power supply voltages of 110 VDC to 220 VDC and 115 VAC

Bus Address

The jumpers X71, X72 and X73 on the input/output board CI/O11 are for setting the bus address and must not be changed. Table 3-25 lists the jumper presettings. Mounting location: for housing size 1/3 in Figure 3-13, slot 19, for housing size 1/2 in Figure 3-14, slot 33, for housing size 1/1 in Figure 3-15, slot 33 right. .
Table 3-25 Jumper setting of printed circuit board addresses of binary input/output boards C-I/O-11 Presetting 12 (H) 12 (H) 23 (L)

Jumper X71 X72 X73

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

307

Installation and Commissioning

7SJ64

Input/Output Board BI/O2

The layout of the printed circuit board for the input/output board BI/O2 is illustrated in Figure 3-26. Check for control voltages of binary inputs: BI8 to BI20 (for housing size 1/2) according to Table 3-26. BI8 to BI33 (for housing size 1/1) according to Table 3-27. The assignment of the binary inputs to the printed circuit board is shown in Figures 3-14 and 3-15.

X22 123

321
X21

X24 123

3 21
X23

X26 123

321
X25

X28 123

321
X27

X29 123 X30 123 X31 123 X32 123 X33 123

X73 X72 X71

3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1

Figure3-26

The input/output board BI/O2 with the jumpers necessary for the setting
check

308

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

7SJ64
Pickup Voltages of BI8 to BI20

Installation and Connections

Check for control voltages of binary inputs BI8 to BI20 (for housing size 1/2) according to Table 3-26.
Table 3-26 Jumper setting of control voltages of the binary inputs BI8 and BI20 on the binary input/output boards BI/O2 for version 7SJ642... (Size 1/2) Jumper X21 X22 X23 X24 X25 X26 X27 X28 X29 X30 X31 X32 X33 19 VDC Pickup1) 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 88 VDC Pickup2) 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23

Binary inputs Slot 19 BI8 BI9 BI10 BI11 BI12 BI13 BI14 BI15 BI16 BI17 BI18 BI19 BI20
1

2)

) Factory settings for devices with power supply voltages of 24 VDC to 125 VDC Factory settings for devices with power supply voltages of 110 VDC to 220 VDC and 115 VAC

Pickup Voltages of BI8 to BI33

Check for control voltages of binary inputs BI8 to BI20 (for housing size 1/1) according to Table 3-27.
Table 3-27 Jumper setting of control voltages of the binary inputs BI8 and BI20 on the binary input/output boards BI/O2 for version 7SJ645... (Size 1/1) Jumper X21 X22 X23 X24 X25 X26 X27 X28 X29 X30 X31 X32 X33 19 VDC Pickup1) 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 88 VDC Pickup2) 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23

Binary inputs Slot 33 left Slot 19 right BI8 BI9 BI10 BI11 BI12 BI13 BI14 BI15 BI16 BI17 BI18 BI19 BI20
1

BI21 BI22 BI23 BI24 BI25 BI26 BI27 BI28 BI29 BI30 BI31 BI32 BI33

2)

) Factory settings for devices with power supply voltages of 24 VDC to 125 VDC Factory settings for devices with power supply voltages of 110 VDC to 220 VDC and 115 VAC

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

309

Installation and Commissioning

7SJ64

Bus address

Jumpers X71, X72 and X73 on the input/output board BI/O2 are for setting the bus address and must not be changed. Table 3-28 and 3-29 lists the jumper presettings. The mounting locations are shown in Figures 3-14 and 3-15.

Table 3-28

Jumper setting of printed circuit board addresses of the binary input/output boards B I/O2 for housing size 1/2 Mounting location Slot 19

Jumper

X71 X72 X73

12 23 12

Tabelle 3-29 Jumper setting of printed circuit board addresses of the binary input/output boards B I/O2 for housing size 1/1 Mounting location Jumper Slot 19 right X71 X72 X73 12 23 12 Slot 33 left 23 12 12

310

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

7SJ64
Input/Output Board CI/O1

Installation and Connections

The layout of the printed circuit board for the input/output board C-I/O1 is illustrated in Figure 3-27. The selected operating voltage of the binary inputs BI8 to BI15 is checked according to Table 3-30. The contacts of the output relay BO6 can be changed from normally open to normally closed operation. The selected contact mode is checked according to Table 3-32. The mounting locations are shown in Figure 3-14.

1 2 3

H L

Figure3-27

The input/output board CI/O1 with the jumpers necessary for the control of settings

LMH

X36 X35

LMH

X34 X33

LMH

X32 X31

X73 X72 X71

(AD2) (AD1) (AD0)

LMH

X30 X29

LMH

X28 X27

LMH

X26 X25

LMH

X24 X23

LMH

X22 X21

X40

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

311

Installation and Commissioning

7SJ64

Pickup Voltages of BI8 to BI 15

Table 3-30 Jumper settings for the Pick-up Voltages of the binary inputs BI8 to BI15 on the input/output board CI/O11 for 7SJ641 (housing size 1/2) Jumper X21/X22 X23/X24 X25/X26 X27/X28 X29/X30 X31/X32 X33/X34 X35/X36 19 VDC Pickup1) L L L L L L L L 88 VDC Pickup2) M M M M M M M M

Binary Inputs BI8 BI9 BI10 BI11 BI12 BI13 BI14 BI15
1 2

) Factory settings for devices with power supply voltages of 24 VDC to 125 VDC ) Factory settings for devices with power supply voltages of 110 VDC to 250 VDC and 115 VAC

Contact mode

For the version 7SJ641 the contacts of binary output BO6 can be changed from normally open to normally closed operation. Table 3-31 shows the jumper settings for the contact mode.
Table 3-31 Jumper setting for the contact mode of output BO6 on the input/output board C I/O1 for BO6 Jumper X40 Open in quiescent Closed in quiescent state (NC) state (NO) 12 23 Presetting 12

Device version 7SJ641

Bus address

The jumpers X71, X72 and X73 on the input/output board CI/O1 are for setting the bus address and must not be changed. Table 3-32 lists the jumper presettings. The mounting location of the PCB is illustrated in Figure 3-14.
Table 3-32 Jumper setting of printed circuit board addresses of binary input/output boards CI/O1 for 7SJ641 Presetting H L H

Jumper X71 X72 X73

312

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

Installation and Connections

3.1.3.6

Interface Modules The interface modules are located on the processor printed circuit boards CPU ( in Figure 3-10 to 3-15) of the devices 7SJ62/63/64. Figure 3-28 shows the printed circuit board and the modules.

Exchanging Interface Modules

Mounting Location
(Rear Side of Housing)

Service interface (7SJ62/63) additional port (7SJ64)

Port C (7SJ62/63) Port D (7SJ64)

System interface

Port B

Figure3-28

Processor printed circuit board CPU with interface modules

Please note the following:

G

Only interface modules of devices with panel flush mounting and cubicle mounting as well as of mounting devices with detached operator panel or without operator panel can be exchanged. Interface modules of devices in surface mounting housings with double-level terminals must be exchanged in our manufacturing centre.

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

313

Installation and Commissioning

Use only interface modules that can be ordered in our facilities (see also Appendix A, Section A.1.1). You may have to ensure the termination of the ports featuring bus capability according to the marging heading Termination.

Table 3-33

Exchangeable interface modules Mounting Location/Port Exchange Modules RS232 RS485 Optical 820 nm Profibus FMS RS485 Profibus FMS Double Ring

Interface

System Interface (7SJ62/63/64)

Profibus FMS Single Ring B Profibus DP RS485 Profibus DP Double Ring Modbus RS485 Modbus 820 nm DNP 3.0 RS485 Optical DNP 3.0 820 nm

DIGSI 4/Modem Interface/RTD-Box (7SJ62/63)1) Additional Interface / RTD-Box (7SJ64)

1

RS232 C RS485 Optical 820 nm RS485 D Optical 820 nm

) for 7SJ64 the Port C / service port is fix, it is not a plug-in module

For the order numbers of the exchangeable modules please refer to Subsection A.1.6 Accessories in the Appendix. RS232/RS485 The interface RS232 can be modified to interface RS485 and vice versa, according to Figure 3-30. Figure 3-28 shows the printed circuit board CCPU and the interface modules. Figure 3-29 shows the location of the jumpers of interface RS232 on the interface module. Terminating resistors are not required. They are disconnected.

314

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

Installation and Connections

1 2 3 1 2 3 X12 1 2 3 1 2 3 X11 X10 1 2 3 1 2 3 X3 X6 X7 X4 X5 1 2 3 8X

Jumper X3 X4

Terminating Resistors disconnected 12 *) 12 *)

*) Default Setting

X13 C53207A324-B180

Figure 3-29 Location of the jumpers for configuration of RS232

CTS

With jumper X11, CTS is activated which is necessary for the communication with the modem.
Tabelle 3-34 Jumper setting of CTS (Clear-To-Send) on the interface module Jumper X11
*) Default Setting

/CTS from interface RS232 12

/CTS triggered by /RTS 23 *)

Jumper setting 23: the connection to the modem is usually done with star coupler or optical fibre converter. Therefore the modem control signal according to RS232 standard DIN 66020 is not available. Modem signals are not required since communication to SIPROTEC devices is always carried out in the half duplex mode. Use connetion cable with ordering number 7XV51004. Jumper setting 12: this setting makes the modem signal available, i. e. for a direct RS232-connection between the SIPROTEC device and the modem this setting can be selected optionally. We recommend to use a standard RS232 modem connection cable (converter 9-pole on 25-pole). Note: For a direct connection to DIGSI 4 with interface RS232 jumper X11 must be plugged in position 23.

RS485/RS232

Interface RS485 can be modified to interface RS232 and vice versa, according to Figure 3-29. Busbar capable interfaces require a termination at the last device of the bus, i.e. terminating resistors must be connected. For 7SJ62/63/64 this applies to the variant with interface RS485 or Profibus. The terminating resistors are located on the corresponding interface module that is mounted to the processor input/output board CPU ( in Figure 3-10 to 3-15).

Termination

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

315

Installation and Commissioning

The module for interface RS485 is illustrated in Figure 3-30, the module for Profibus (FMS and DP) and DNP3.0 and Modbus in Figure 3-31. With default setting, jumpers are plugged in such a way that terminating resistors are disconnected. For the configuration of the terminating resistors both jumpers have to be plugged in the same way.

1 2 3 1 2 3 X12 1 2 3 1 2 3 X11 X10 1 2 3 1 2 3 X3 X6 X7 X4 X5 1 2 3 8X

Terminating Resistors Jumper connected X3 X4 23 23

*) Default Setting

disconnected 12 *) 12 *)

X13 C53207A324-B180

Figure3-30

Location of jumpers for the configuration of terminating resistors of interface RS485

Profibus (FMS/DP) DNP3.0/Modbus

C53207-A322Terminating Resistors Jumper X3 X4 connected 12 12

*)Default

2 3 4 B100 B101
X4 3 2 1

disconnected 23 *) 23 *) Setting

3 2 1 X3

Figure 3-31 Location of jumpers for the configuration of terminating resistors at the interface Profibus (FMS and DP), DNP3.0 and Modbus

The terminating resistors can also be connected externally (e.g. to the connection module) as illustrated in Figure 3-24. In this case, the terminating resistors located on the interface module must be disconnected.

316

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

Installation and Connections

3.1.3.7

Reassembly of Device To reassemble the device, proceed as follows:

Carefully insert the boards into the case. The installation locations of the boards are shown in Figure 3-10 to 3-15. For the model of the device designed for surface mounting, use the metal lever to insert the processor circuit board CPU board. The installation is easier with the lever. First plug the plug connectors of the ribbon cable into the input/output boards I/O and then onto the processor module CPU. Be careful to not bend any of the connecting pins! Do not use force! Insert the plug connector of the ribbon cable between the processor module CPU and the front cover into the socket of the front cover. For the version with detached operator panel the latter is to be ignored. Instead the plug connector of the ribbon cable connected to a 68pole plug connector on the rear side of the device must be plugged into the plug connector of the processor circuit board CPU. The 7-pole plug connector X16 connected to the ribbon cable must be plugged behind the D-subminiature female connector. Since the connection is protectPress the latches of the plug connectors together. Replace the front cover and secure to the housing with the screws. Replace the covers. Re-fasten the interfaces on the rear of the device housing. This activity is not necessary if the device is designed for surface mounting.

o o

o o o

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

317

Installation and Commissioning

3.2
3.2.1

Checking Connections
Data Connections
The following tables list the pin-assignments for the various serial interfaces of the device and the time synchronization interface. The position of the connections can be seen in Figure 3-32.

5 9 6 1 Oprerating Interface front side

RS232-LWL RS232 RS485

1 6 9 5

1 6 9 5 Time Synchronization and Service Interface rear side

Serial System Interfaces rear side

Figure3-32

9 pin D-subminiature Connector

PC Operating Interface at Front

When the recommended communication cable is used, correct connection between the SIPROTEC device and the PC is automatically ensured. See the Appendix, Subsection A.1 for an ordering description of the cable. Check the data connection if the service (port C) is used to communicate with the device via fix wiring or a modem. If the service port is used as input for one or two thermoboxes, verify the interconnection according to one of the connection examples given in the Appendix A.3.4. When a serial interface of the device is connected to a central substation control system, the data connection must be checked. A visual check of the transmit channel and the receive channel is important. Each connection is dedicated to one transmission direction. The data output of one device must be connected to the data input of the other device, and vice versa. The data cable connections are designated in sympathy with DIN 66020 and ISO 2110 (see also Table 3-35): TxD RxD RTS CTS DGND data transmit data receive request to send clear to send signal/chassis ground

Service Port

System (SCADA) Interface

318

P-Slave AME

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

Checking Connections

The cable shield is to be grounded at both ends so that potential differences cannot cause circulating currents to flow along the shield. In areas of extremely strong EMC interferences, the interference immunity factor can be improved by leading the ground wire in a separate shielded pair of strands. Additional Interface (only7SJ64) The additional interface available only for 7SJ64 (port D) serves for signal injection of one or two thermoboxes. The interconnection according to one of the connection examples in Appendix (A.3.4) must be checked. .
Table 3-35 Pin No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 RxD TxD GND RTS CTS RxD TxD GND RTS CTS A/A (RxD/TxDN) C/C (GND) *) B/B (RxD/TxDP) Installation of the D-Subminiature Port PC Interface at Front RS 232 RS 485 Profibus FMS Slave, RS 485 Modbus, RS485 Profibus DP Slave, RS485 DNP3.0, RS485 Shield (with shield ends electrically connected) B/B (RxD/TxDP) CNTRA (TTL) C/C (GND) + 5 V voltage supply (max. load < 100 mA) *) A/A (RxD/TxDN) A RTS (TTL Pegel) GND1 VCC1 B

*) Pin 7 also can carry the RS 232 RTS signal to an RS 485 interface. Pin 7 must therefore not be connected!

Termination

The RS485 interface is capable of half-duplex service with the signals A/A' and B/B' with a common relative potential C/C' (DGND). Verify that only the last device on the bus has the terminating resistors connected, and that the other devices on the bus do not. The jumpers for the terminating resistors are on the interface module RS485 (Figure 3-30) or on the Profibus module RS485 (Figure 3-31) or for 7SJ64 also directly on CCPU2 (see Figure 3-23 and Table 3-23). The terminating resistors can also be connected externally (e.g. to the connection module) as illustrated in Figure 3-24. In this case, the terminating resistors located on the RS485 or the Profibus interface module or directly on the printed circuit board of the CCPU2 board of 7SJ64 must be disconnected. If the bus is extended, make sure again that only the last device on the bus has the terminating resistors switched-in, and that all other devices on the bus do not.

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

319

Installation and Commissioning

Time Synchronization Interface

Either 5-VDC-, 12-VDC- or 24-VDC- time synchronization signals can be processed if the connections are made as indicated in Table 3-36.
Table 3-36 PinNo. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Pin-assignments for the D-subminiature port of the Time Synchronization Interface Designation P24_TSIG P5_TSIG M_TSIG *) Shield P12_TSIG P_TSYNC*) Signal Meaning Input 24 V Input 5 V Return Line *) Shield Potential Input 12 V Input 24 V*) Shield Potential

9 Shield *) assigned, but not available

Optical Fibers

Signals transmitted via optical fibers are unaffected by interference. The fibers guarantee electrical isolation between the connections. Transmit and receive connections are shown with the symbols for transmit and for receive. The normal setting for the optical fiber interface isLight off. If this setting is to be changed, use the operating program DIGSI 4, as described in the SIPROTEC 4 System Manual.

Warning!
Laser injection! Do not look directly into the fibre-optic elements!

Temperature Meter (Thermobox)

If one or two 7XV566 temperature meters are connected, check their connections to the ports (port C or D). Verify also the termination: the terminating resistors must be connected to 7SJ62/63/ 64 (see Subsection 3.1.3.6 at Termination. For further information refer to the operating manual of 7XV566. Check the transmission settings at the temperature meter. Besides the baudrate and the parity observe also the bus number. For connection of one 7XV566 thermobox: Bus number = 0 (to be set at 7XV566) For connection of two 7XV566 thermoboxes: Bus number = 1 for the 1st thermobox (to be set at 7XV566 for RTD1 to 6), Bus number = 2 for the 2nd thermobox (to be set at 7XV566 for RTD7 to 12). Please observe that the detector input 1 (RTD1) of the 1st thermobox is reserved for the input of the ambient temperature/coolant temperature for the overload protection.

320

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

Checking Connections

3.2.2

Checking Power Plant Connections

Warning!
The following procedures are carried out with dangerous voltages present. Therefore, only qualified people who are familiar with and adhere to the safety procedures and precautionary measures shall perform the procedures.

Caution!
Operating the device on a battery charger without a connected battery can lead to unusually high voltages and consequently, the destruction of the device. For limit values see Sub-section 4.2.1 under Technical Data.

If an undervoltage element (27) is enabled and ON and the current supervision of the 27 element is OFF, then the 27 element will immediately trip when voltage is removed from the device. This will prevent the user from being able to set the device or perform other actions. To avoid this possible problem, current supervision must be set ON or the voltage protection must be blocked. This can be accomplished via the operation (see note in Subsection 2.5.2.2). Before the device is energized for the first time, the device should be in the final operating environment for at least 2 hours to equalize the temperature, to minimize humidity and avoid condensation. Connection are checked with the device at its final location. The plant must first be switched off and grounded.

o o

Protective switches (e.g. test switches, fuses, or miniature circuit breakers) for the power supply and the measured voltages must be opened. Check the continuity of all current and voltage transformer connections against the system and connection diagrams:
G G G G G G G G

Are the current transformers grounded properly? Are the polarities of the current transformers the same? Is the phase relationship of the current transformers correct? Are the voltage transformers grounded properly? Are the polarities of the voltage transformers correct? Is the phase relationship of the voltage transformers correct? Is the polarity for current input I4 correct (if used), also refer to Subsection 3.1.2, Currents? Is the polarity for voltage input U4 correct (only 7SJ64 and if used, e.g. with broken delta winding or busbar voltage), cf. also Subsection 3.1.2.3 Connection Examples for 7SJ64.

Check the functions of all test switches that may be installed for the purposes of secondary testing and isolation of the device. Of particular importance are test switches in current transformer circuits. Be sure these switches short-circuit the current transformers when they are in the test mode (open).

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

321

Installation and Commissioning

The short-circuit feature of the current circuits of the device are to be checked. An ohmmeter or other test equipment for checking continuity is needed.
G G

Remove the front panel of the device (see Figure 3-10 to 3-15). Remove the ribbon cable connected to the I/O board with the measured current and measured voltage inputs (on the front side it is the right printed circuit board, for housing size 1/3, see Figure 3-10 [slot 19], for housing size 1/2 see Figure 3-11 or 3-14 [slot 33], for housing size 1/1 see Figure 3-12 or 3-15 [slot 33 right]). Furthermore, remove the printed circuit board so that there is no more contact anymore with the plug-in terminal. At the terminals of the device, check continuity for each pair of terminals that receives current from the CTs. Firmly re-insert the I/O board. Carefully connect the ribbon cable. Do not bend any connector pins! Do not use force! Check continuity for each of the current terminal-pairs again. Attach the front panel and tighten the screws.

G G G G

o o o o o o o o o o o o o

Connect an ammeter in the supply circuit of the power supply. A range of about 1 A for the meter is appropriate. Close the protective switches to apply voltage to the power supply. The measured steady state current should be insignificant. Transient movement of the ammeter merely indicates the charging current of capacitors. Check the polarity and magnitude of the voltage at the device terminals. Remove the voltage from the power supply by opening the protective switches. Disconnect the measuring test equipment; restore the normal power supply connections. Apply voltage to the power supply. Close the protective switches for the voltage transformers. Verify that the voltage phase rotation at the device terminals is correct. Note that the device can be set for ABC rotation or ACB rotation under Address 0209 PHASE SEQ.in P.System Data1. Open the protective switches for the voltage transformers and the power supply. Check the trip and close circuits to the power system circuit breakers and the other primary equipment that is to be controlled by the 7SJ62/63/64. Verify that the control wiring to and from other devices is correct. Check the signalling connections. Close the protective switches to apply voltage to the power supply.

322

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

Commissioning

3.3

Commissioning

Warning!
When operating an electrical device, certain parts of the device inevitably have dangerous voltages. Severe personal injury or property damage can result if the device is not handled properly. Only qualified people shall work on and around this device after becoming thoroughly familiar with all warnings and safety notices in this instruction manual as well as with the applicable safety steps, safety regulations, and precautionary measures. The main points to observe are: The device is to be grounded to the substation ground before any other connections are made. Hazardous voltages can exist in the power supply and at the connections to current transformers, voltage transformers, and test circuits. Hazardous voltages can be present in the device even after the power supply voltage has been removed, i.e. capacitors can still be charged. After removing voltage from the power supply, wait a minimum of 10 seconds before re-energizing the power supply. This wait allows the initial conditions to be firmly established before the device is re-energized. The limit values given in Technical Data (Chapter 10) must not be exceeded, neither during testing nor during commissioning.

When testing the device with secondary test equipment, make sure that no other measurement quantities are connected and that the trip and close commands to the circuit breakers and other primary switches are disconnected from the device unless expressly stated.

DANGER!
Current transformer secondary circuits must be short-circuited before the current leads to the device are disconnected! If test switches are installed that automatically short-circuit the current transformer circuits, opening these test switches (placing them in the "Test" position) is sufficient provided the short-circuit function has been previously tested. For the commissioning switching operations have to be carried out. A prerequisite for the prescribed tests is that these switching operations can be executed without danger. They are accordingly not meant for operational checks.

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

323

Installation and Commissioning

Warning!
Primary test may only be carried out by qualified personnel, who are familiar with the commissioning of protection systems, the operation of the plant and the safety rules and regulations (switching, earthing, etc.).

3.3.1

Testing mode and transmission blocking

If the SIPROTEC4 device is connected to a central or main computer system via the SCADA interface, then the information that is transmitted can be influenced. This is only possible with some of the protocols availabel (see Table Protocol-dependent functions in the Appendix). If Test mode is set ON, then a message sent by the device to the main system has an additional test bit. This bit allows the message to be recognized as resulting from testing and not an actual fault or power system event. If DataStop is set ON, transmission to the SCADA is blocked. Both of these features should be checked. The procedures for setting Test mode and DataStop are described in the SIPROTEC 4 System Manual. Note that when DIGSI 4 is being used, the program must be in the Online operating mode for the test features to be used.

3.3.2

Checking the System (SCADA) Interface

Provided that the device is equipped with a system (SCADA) interface that is used for the communication with a substation, it is possible to test via the DIGSI 4 operational function if messages are transmitted correctly. Do not apply this test function in the real operating mode of the device.

Preliminary Remarks

DANGER!
The transmission and reception of messages via the system (SCADA) interface by means of the testing mode is the real exchange of information between the SIPROTEC4 device and the substation. Connected equipment such as circuit breakers or disconnectors can be operated as a result of these actions!

Note: After termination of this test, the device will reboot. All annunciation buffers are erased. If required, these buffers should be extracted with DIGSI 4 prior to the test.

324

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

Commissioning

The system interface test is carried out Online using DIGSI 4:

G G G

Double-click on the Online directory to open the required dialogue box. Click on Test and the functional options appear on the right side of the window. Double-click on Testing Messages for System Interface shown in the list view. The dialogue box Testing System Interface opens (refer to 3-33).

Structure of the Dialogue Box

In the column Indication, all message texts that were configured for the system interface in the matrix will then appear. In the column Status Scheduled the user has to define the value for the messages to be tested. Depending on the type of message different entering fields are available (e.g. message ON / message OFF). By doubleclicking onto one of the fields the required value can be selected from the list.

Figure 3-33 Dialog Box: Generate indications

Changing the Operating State

Clicking for the first time onto one of the field in column Action you will be asked for password n 6 (for hardware test menus). Having entered the correct password messages can be issued. To do so, click on Send. The corresponding message is issued and can be read out either from the event log of the SIPROTEC4 - device or from the substation. As long as the windows is open, further tests can be performed.

Test in Message Direction

For all information that is transmitted to the central station the following is tested in Status Scheduled:
G

Make sure that each checking process is carried out carefully without causing any danger (see above and refer to DANGER!)

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

325

Installation and Commissioning

Click on Send and check whether the transmitted information reaches the central station and shows the desired reaction.

Exiting the Test Mode Test in Command Direction

To end the System Interface Test, click on Close. The device is briefly out of service while the start-up routine is executed. The dialogue box closes. The information beginning with > is transmitted towards the device. This kind of information must be indicated by the central station. Check whether the reaction is correct.
f

3.3.3

Checking the Binary Inputs and Outputs

The binary inputs, outputs, and LEDs of a SIPROTEC4 device can be individually and precisely controlled using DIGSI 4. This feature is used to verify control wiring from the device to plant equipment during commissioning. This test feature shall not be used while the device is in service on a live system.

Preliminary Notes

DANGER!
Changing the status of a binary input or output using the test feature of DIGSI 4 results in an actual and immediate corresponding change in the SIPROTEC device. Connected equipment such as circuit breakers or disconnectors will be operated as a result of these actions! Note: After termination of the hardware test, the device will reboot. Thereby, all annunciation buffers are erased. If required, these buffers should be extracted with DIGSI 4 prior to the test. The hardware test can be done using DIGSI 4 in the online operating mode:
G G G

Open the Online directory by double-clicking; the operating functions for the device appear. Click on Test; the function selection appears in the right half of the screen. Double-click in the list view on Hardware Test. The dialogue box of the same name opens (see Figure 3-34).

326

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

Commissioning

Figure3-34

Dialogue box for hardware test example

Structure of the Test Dialogue Box

The dialogue box is divided into three groups: BI for binary inputs, REL for output relays, and LED for light-emitting diodes. Each of these groups is associated with an appropriately marked switching area. By double-clicking in an area, components within the associated group can be turned on or off. In the Status column, the present (physical) state of the hardware component is displayed. The binary inputs and outputs are indicated by an open or closed switch symbol, the LEDs by a dark or illuminated LED symbol. The possible intended condition of a hardware component is indicated with clear text under the Scheduled column, which is next to the Status column. The intended condition offered for a component is always the opposite of the present state. The right-most column indicates the commands or messages that are configured (masked) to the hardware components.

Changing the Hardware Conditions

To change the condition of a hardware component, click on the associated switching field in the Scheduled column. Password No. 6 (if activated during configuration) will be requested before the first hardware modification is allowed. After entry of the correct password a condition change will be executed. Further condition changes remain possible while the dialog box is open.

Test of the Binary Outputs

Each individual output relay can be energized allowing a check of the wiring between the output relay of the 7SJ62/63/64 and the plant, without having to generate the message that is assigned to the relay. As soon as the first change of state for any one of the output relays is initiated, all output relays are separated from the internal device functions, and can only be operated by the hardware test function. This implies that a

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

327

Installation and Commissioning

switching signal to an output relay from e.g. a protection function or control command cannot be executed.
G G G

Ensured that the switching of the output relay can be executed without danger (see above under DANGER!). Each output relay must be tested via the corresponding Scheduledcell in the dialog box. The test sequence must be terminated (refer to margin heading Exiting the Procedure), to avoid the initiation of inadvertent switching operations by further tests.

Test of the Binary Inputs

To test the wiring between the plant and the binary inputs of the 7SJ62/63/64 the condition in the plant which initiates the binary input must be generated and the response of the device checked. To do this, the dialogue box Hardware Test must again be opened to view the physical state of the binary inputs. The password is not yet required.
G G

Each state in the plant which causes a binary input to pick up must be generated. The response of the device must be checked in the Statuscolumn of the dialogue box. To do this, the dialogue box must be updated. The options may be found below under the margin heading Updating the Display.

If however the effect of a binary input must be checked without carrying out any switching in the plant, it is possible to trigger individual binary inputs with the hardware test function. As soon as the first state change of any binary input is triggered and the password nr. 6 has been entered, all binary inputs are separated from the plant and can only be activated via the hardware test function.
G

Terminate the test sequence (see above under the margin heading Exiting the Procedure).

Test of the LEDs

The LEDs may be tested in a similar manner to the other input/output components. As soon as the first state change of any LED has been triggered, all LEDs are separated from the internal device functionality and can only be controlled via the hardware test frunction. This implies that no LED can be switched on anymore by e.g. a protection function or operation of the LED reset key. When the dialog box Hardware Test is opened, the present conditions of the hardware components at that moment are read in and displayed. An update occurs: for each harware component, if a command to change the condition is successfully performed, for all hardware components if the Update button is clicked, for all hardware components with cyclical updating if the Automatic Update (20sec) field is marked.

Updating the Display

Exiting the Procedure

To end the hardware test, click on Close. The dialog box closes. The device becomes unavailable for a brief start-up period immediately after this. Then all hardware components are returned to the operating conditions determined by the plant settings.

328

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

Commissioning

3.3.4

Tests for the Circuit Breaker Failure Protection

If the device provides a breaker failure protection and if this is used, the integration of this protection function in the system must be tested under practical conditions. Due to the variety of application options and the available system configurations, it is not possible to make a detailed description of the necessary tests. It is important to consider the local conditions and the protection and plant drawings. It is advised to isolate the circuit breaker of the tested feeder at both sides, i.e. to keep the busbar isolator and the line isolator open, in order to ensure operation of the breaker without risk.

Caution!
Also for tests on the local circuit breaker of the feeder a trip command to the surrounding circuit breakers can be issued for the busbar. Therefore the tripping of the surrounding circuit breakers (busbar) must be deactivated, e. g. by switching off the corresponding control voltages.Nevertheless ensure that trip remains possible in case of a real primary fault if parts of the power plant are in service.

The trip command of the tested Multi-Functional Protective Relay is made ineffective so that the local breaker can be tripped only by the breaker failure protection function of 7SJ62/63/64. Although the following lists do not claim to be complete it may also contain points which are to be ignored in the current application. Circuit Breaker Auxiliary Contacts If the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts are connected to the device, these provide an essential input to the functionality of the breaker failure protection. Make sure the correct assignment has been checked (Section 3.3.3). If the breaker failure protection can also be started by external protection devices, the external start conditions should be checked. In order for the breaker failure protection to be started, a current must flow at least via the monitored phase. This may be a secondary injected current.
G

External Start Conditions

Starting by trip command of the external protection: binary input functions >50BF ext SRC (FNo 01431) (in spontaneous or fault messages). After every start, the message 50BF ext Pickup (FNo 01457) must appear in the spontaneous or fault messages. After time expiration TRIP-Timer (address 7005) tripping command of the circuit breaker failure protection.

G G

Switch off test current. If BF start is possible without current flow:

G

To close the circuit breaker to be monitored to both sides with the disconnector switches open.

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

329

Installation and Commissioning

BF start by trip command of the external protection without current flow: binary input functions >50BF ext SRC (FNo 01431) ((in spontaneous or fault messages). After every start, the message 50BF ext Pickup (FNo 01457) must appear in the spontaneous or fault messages. After time expiration TRIP-Timer (address 7005) tripping command of the circuit breaker failure protection.

G G

Opening the circuit breaker again. Busbar tripping For testing the distribution of the trip commands in the substation in the case of breaker failures it is important to check that the trip commands to the surrounding circuit breakers is correct. The surrounding circuit breakers are all those which need to trip when the feeder circuit breaker fails. These are therefore the circuit breakers of all feeders which feed the busbar or busbar section to which the feeder with the fault is connected. A general detailed test guide cannot be specified because the layout of the surrounding circuit breakers largely depends on the switchgear topology. In particular with multiple busbars the trip distribution logic for the surrounding circuit breakers must be checked. Here it should be checked for every busbar section that all circuit breakers which are connected to the same busbar section as the feeder circuit breaker under observation are tripped, and no other breakers. Tripping of the Remote End If the trip command of the circuit breaker failure protection must also trip the circuit breaker at the remote end of the feeder under observation, the transmission channel for this remote trip must also be checked. All temporary measures taken for testing must be undone, e.g. especially switching states, interrupted trip commands, changes to setting values or individually switched off protection functions.

Termination

3.3.5

Testing User-Defined Functions

A 7SJ62/63/64 has a vast capability for allowing functions to be defined by the user, especially with the CFC logic. Any special function or logic added to the device must be checked. Naturally, general test procedures cannot be given. Rather, the configuration of these user-defined functions and the necessary associated conditions must be known and verified. Of particular importance are the possible interlocking conditions of the circuit breakers and other primary switching devices. They must be considered and tested.

330

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

Commissioning

3.3.6

Current, Voltage, and Phase Rotation Testing

The connections of the current and voltage transformers are tested using primary quantities. Secondary load current of at least 10 % of the nominal current of the device is necessary. With proper connections of the measuring circuits, none of the measured-values supervision elements in the device should pick up. If an element detects a problem, the relevant condition can be viewed in the Event Log. If current summation errors occur, then check the matching factors. See Subsection ). Messages from the symmetry monitoring could occur because there actually are asymmetrical conditions in the network. If these asymmetrical conditions are normal service conditions, the corresponding monitoring functions should be made less sensitive. See Subsection 2.10.2).

Load Current [10% IN]

Current and Voltage Values

Currents and voltages can be seen in the display field on the front of the device under Measurement. The quantities can also be viewed under Measurement in the DIGSI 4 window. The currents and voltages displayed by the device can be compared to the quantities measured by an independent source. If the measured values are not plausible, the connection must be checked and corrected after the line has been isolated and the current transformer circuits have been short-circuited. The measurements must then be repeated.

Phase Rotation

The phase rotation must correspond to the configured phase rotation, in general a clockwise phase rotation. If the system has an anti-clockwise phase rotation, this must have been considered when the power system data was set (address 0209 PHASE SEQ., refer to Subsection ). If the phase rotation is incorrect, the alarm Fail Ph. Seq. (FNo 00171) is generated. The measured value phase allocation must be checked and corrected, if required, after the line has been isolated and current transformers have been short-circuited. The phase rotation check must then be repeated. The VT mcb of the feeder must be opened. The measured voltages in the operational measured values appear with a value close to zero (small measured voltages are of no consequence). Check in the spontaneous messages that the VT mcb trip was entered (message >FAIL:FEEDER VT ON in the spontaneous messages). Beforehand it has to be assured that the position of the VT mcb is connected to the device via a binary input. Close the VT mcb: The above messages appear under the spontaneous messages as OFF, i.e. >FAIL:FEEDER VT OFF. If one of the events does not appear, the connection and routing of these signals must be checked. If the ONstate and OFFstate are swapped, the contact type (Hactive or Lactive) must be checked and remedied.

Voltage Transformer Miniature Circuit Breaker (VT mcb)

7SJ64 only

If a busbar voltage is used (for synchronism check) and the assigned VT mcb is connected to the device, the following function must also be checked: If the VT mcb is open the message >FAIL: BUS VT ON appears, if it is closed the message >FAIL: BUS VT OFF is displayed. Switch off the protected power line.

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

331

Installation and Commissioning

3.3.7

Testing the Reverse Interlocking Scheme (if applicable)

This testing causes trip contacts of the 7SJ62/63/64 to close. If tripping of the relevant circuit breakers and primary interrupting devices is to be avoided, the 7SJ62/63/64 trip contacts must be isolated. Proper backup relaying should exist. An operational check of the reverse interlocking scheme might cause tripping by the protective relays that block the 7SJ62/63/64 (depending on the procedure used). If the blocking relays will trip, the trip contacts that control primary interrupting devices must be isolated if the devices are not to be operated. Again, proper backup relaying should exist. Simple methods of testing and operational checking a reverse interlocking scheme are illustrated with an example. In this example, the 50-2 element and the 50N-2 element of the 7SJ62/63/64 are employed in a reverse interlocking scheme that provides bus protection in a radial distribution system with three feeders. The tripping of both elements is blocked when Binary Input 1 is energized. The input mask is [>BLOCK 502 (H) or >BLOCK 50N-2 (H)]. The elements have slight time delays to provide coordination with the blocking protective relays. The blocking relays are the three feeder relays. Each feeder relay has a blocking contact programmed to close when the 51 element or 51N element picks up. The three contacts are connected in parallel to apply control voltage to Binary Input 1 when any one of them closes. An actual scheme might employ elements and binary inputs other than those given in the example. The binary inputs could also be set to block tripping when the inputs are de-energized. The blocking devices might be configured differently as well. In any case, testing and operationally checking a reverse interlocking scheme are typically simple. The procedures below can be adapted as needed.

Caution!
During testing, observe the current ratings of the inputs given in Technical Data, Subsection 4.1.1. Allow a cool-down period if the continuous ratings are exceeded. With the 7SJ62/63/64 isolated from the current transformers and tripping circuits, inject test current into any one phase current input and the ground current input. Slowly ramp-up the current until the pickup values of 50-2 and 50N-2 are found (monitor contacts or LEDs). Slowly decrease the current until the dropout values are found. Verify that the pickup and dropout values are as expected. The time delays of the elements can be measured with a timer set to start on the application of current and stop on the closure of the trip contact masked to close when either 50-2 or 50N-2 trips. Test one element at a time. For either element, first set the time delay for 0.00 second. Suddenly apply current greater than the pickup value. Record the time. Repeat the test with the time delay included. The difference between the results provides an estimate of the time delay. Be sure the time delays are as expected. The tripping block can be verified by manually applying voltage to Binary Input 1, and injecting a test current above the pickup of the element under consideration, for a time period much longer than the time delay setting. To operationally check the scheme, current can be simultaneously injected into the 7SJ62/63/64 and one of the feeder relays. The feeder relay must be isolated from current transformers and trip circuits of primary equipment. Proper backup relaying

332

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

Commissioning

should be available. The magnitude of the test current must be high enough to pickup both the feeder blocking element and the 7SJ62/63/64 tripping element. (The blocking element could be less sensitive in secondary terms.) Suddenly apply the current and verify that 50-2 and 50N-2 are blocked. Suddenly remove the current and verify that 50-2 and 50N-2 do not trip. If the blocking element has an equal or higher sensitivity than the tripping element, then tests in which the current is slowly decreased can be done to verify that there are no element dropout-miscoordinations. Repeat the testing for each blocking device. Restore the current and tripping circuits of the 7SJ62/63/64 and the feeder relays.

3.3.8

Directional Checks with Load Current

The connections of the current and voltage transformers are checked using load current on the protected line. The secondary load current must be at least 0.10 IN. The load current should be in-phase or lagging the voltage (resistive or resistive-inductive load). The direction of the load current must be known. If there is a doubt, network loops should be opened or other action taken to guarantee the direction of the load current. The line remains energized during this directional test. DThe direction can be derived directly from the operational measured values. Initially the correlation of the measured load direction with the actual direction of load flow is checked. In this case the normal situation is assumed whereby the forward direction (measuring direction) extends from the busbar towards the line (Figure 3-35). P positive, if active power flows into the line, P negative, if active power flows towards the busbar, Q positive, if reactive power flows into the line, Q negative, if reactive power flows toward the busbar.

Load Current 10 % IN

Positive Real Power in the Direction of the Line SLoad = Apparent Power Phasor

jQ Negative Reactive Power Positive Reactive Power

Figure 3-35

Apparent Power

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

333

Installation and Commissioning

The power measurement provides an initial indication as to whether the measured values have the correct polarity. If both the active power as well as the reactive power have the wrong sign, the polarity in addresse 0201 CT Starpoint must be checked and rectified. However, energy metering itself is not able to detect all connection errors. For this reason, directional messages should be generated by means of the directional overcurrent protection. The 67-TOC element is used to generate directional messages. The pickup threshold of 67-TOC, approximately [1.1 Address 1507 67-TOC PICKUP], must be reduced so that the available load current causes a continuous pickup of the element. The direction reported in the messages, such as Phase A forward or Phase A reverse must correspond to the actual power flow. While performing this test and interpreting the results, be careful that the Forward direction of 67-TOC is in the direction of the line (or object to be protected). This is not necessarily identical with the direction of the normal network current flow or the load current flow for this test. For all three phases, the corresponding power flow directional messages must be reported properly. If all directions are incorrect, then there is conflict between the polarity of the current transformers and the polarity set under Address 0201 CT Starpoint, in P.System Data1. The polarity of the current transformers must be determined and properly set in the 7SJ62/63/64 according to Subsection 2.1.3. If the directional data are diverse, then individual phases in the current or voltage connections are interchanged, or the phase sequence is not correct. The connections must be checked and corrected. Finally the phase is again de-energized. Note! Set the pickup values that have been changed for testing back to the valid settings!

3.3.9

Polarity check for the voltage input U4 (only 7SJ64)

Depending on the application of the voltage measuring input U4 of a 7SJ64, a polarity check may be necessary. If no measuring voltage is connected to this input, this subsection is irrelevant. If the input U4 is used for measuring the displacement voltage Uen (power system data 1 address 0213 VT Connection = Van,Vbn,Vcn,VGn or Vab, Vbc, VGnd), the polarity is checked together with the measured current test according to Subsection 3.3.11.

Only for Synchronism Check in 7SJ64

If the input U4 is used for measuring a voltage for synchronism check (power system data 1 address 0213 VT Connection = Van,Vbn,Vcn,VSy , observe the following: The single-phase voltage U2 to be synchronized must be connected to the input U4; The polarity must be checked as follows using the synchronism check function: The device must be equipped with the synchronism and voltage check. For verifying the synchrocheck function at address 016x, SYNC Funktion x must be configured to SYNCHROCHECK (refer to Subsection 2.1.1). The voltage U2 to be synchronized must be specified correctly under address 6X23 CONNECTIONof V2 (refer to Subsection 2.16.2).

334

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

Commissioning

If a transformer is located between the measuring points of reference voltage U1 and the voltage to be synchronized U2, the angle must correspond to the phase rotation through which the vector group of the transformer as seen from the feeder in the direction of the busbar rotates the voltage. For this purpose an angle corresponding to the transformer vector group is entered in address 6X22 ANGLE ADJUSTM. An example is shown in Subsection 2.16.2 gegeben. If necessary different transformation ratios of the voltage transformers on the busbar and the feeder may have to be considered under address ON under address 6X01 Synchronizing X. A further aid for checking in the connection are the messages 170.2090 25 V2>V1, 170.2091 25 V2<V1, 170.2094 25 a2>a1 and 170.2095 25 a2<a1 in the spontaneous annunciations.
G G G

Circuit breaker is open. The feeder is isolated (zero voltage). The VTmcbs of both voltage transformer circuits must be closed. The program Direct CO = YES (address 6X10A) must be set for the synchrocheck; the other programs (addresses 6X07 to 6X09) are set to NO. A request for synchro-check is initiated via binary input (FNo. 170.0043 >25 Measu. Only). The synchro-check must give close release (message 25 CloseRelease, FNr 170.0049). If not, check all relevant parameters again (synchrocheck configured and switched on correctly, see sections 2.1.1 and 2.16.2). Set address 6X10 Direct CO to NO. Then the circuit breaker is closed while the line isolator is open (see Figure 3-36). Both voltage transformers therefore measure the same voltage. The program SYNC-Funktionsgruppe X = ASYN/SYNCHRON (Adresse 016X) is set. A request for synchro-check measurement is initiated via binary input (FNo. 170.0043 >25 Measu. Only). The synchro-check must give close release (message 25 CloseRelease, FNo 170.0049).

G G G G

Busbar U2
U4

7SJ64
U1

Injection Figure3-36

Measuring voltages for synchro-check

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

335

Installation and Commissioning

If not, first check whether one of the aforenamed messages 170.2090 25 V2>V1 or 170.2091 25 V2<V1 or 170.2094 25 a2>a1 or 170.2095 25 a2<a1 is available in the spontaneous messages. The messages 25 V2>V1 or 25 V2<V1 indicates that the magnitude (ratio) adaptation is incorrect. Check address 6X21 Balancing V1/V2 and recalculate the adaptation factor. The messages 25 a2>a1 or 25 a2<a1 indicates that the phase relation of the busbar voltage does not match the setting under address 6X23 CONNECTIONof V2 (see Subsection 2.16.2.2). When measuring across a power transformer, address 6X22 ANGLE ADJUSTM. must also be checked; this must adapt the vector group (see Subsection 2.16.2.2). If these are correct, there is probably a reverse polarity of the voltage transformer terminals U1.

G G G

For the synchro-check the program SYNC V1>V2< = YES (address 6X08) and SYNC Funktion X = ASYN/SYNCHRON (address 016X) is set. Open the VT mcb of the busbar voltage. A request for synchro-check measurement is initiated via binary input (FNo. 170.0043 >25 Measu. Only). There is no close release. If there is, the VT mcb for the busbar voltage is not allocated. Check whether this is the required state, alternatively check the binary input >FAIL: BUS VT if necessary (FNo 06510). Close the VT mcb of the busbar voltage is to be closed again. Open the circuit breaker. The program SYNC V1<V2> = YES (address 6X07) and SYNC V1>V2< = NO (address 6X08) is set for the synchro-check. A request measurement for synchro-check is initiated via binary input (FNo. 170.0043 >25 Measu. Only). The synchronism check must release closing (message 25 CloseRelease, FNo 170.0049). If not, check all voltage connections and the corresponding parameters again carefully as described in Subsection 2.16.2. Open the VT mcb of the feeder voltage. Via binary input (FNo. 170.0043 >25 Measu. Only) initiate the measuring request. No close release is given. Close the VT mcb of the busbar voltage again.

G G G G

G G G

Addresses 6X07 to 6X10 must be restored as they were changed for the test. If the routing of the LEDs or signal relays was changed for the test, this must also be restored.

3.3.10 Ground Fault Check in a Non-Grounded System

The ground fault check is only necessary if the device is connected to an isolated or resonant-grounded system and the ground fault detection is applied. The device must therefore be provided with the ground fault detection function according to its ordering

336

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

Commissioning

code (position 15 in ordering code: D or B or F or H). Furthermore, address 0131 Sens. Gnd Fault = Enabled must have been preset during configuration to enable this function (according to Subsction 2.1.1). If none of this is the case, Subsection 3.3.10 is not relevant. The primary check serves to find out the correct polarity of the transformer connections for the determination of the earth fault direction.

DANGER!
Primary measurements must only be carried out on disconnected and grounded equipment of the power system. Danger to life exists even on disconnected equipment because of capacitive coupling from other energized equipment of the power system! Using the primary earth fault method a most reliable test result is guaranteed. Therefore please proceed as follows:
G G

Isolate the line and earth it on both ends. During the whole testing procedure the line must be open at the remote end. Make a test connection between a single phase and ground. On overhead lines it can be connected anywhere, however, it must be located behind the current transformers (looking from the busbar of the feeder to be checked). Cables are earthed on the remote end (sealing end). Remove the protective earthing of the line. Connect a circuit breaker to the line end that is to be checked. Check the direction indication (LED if allocated) The faulty phase (FNo 01272 for L1 or 01273 for L2 or 01274 for L3) and the direction of the line, i.e. SensGnd Forward (FNo 01276) must be displayed in the earth fault protocol. The active and reactive components of the earth current are also displayed. The reactive current (INs Reac, FNo 000702) is the most relevant for isolated systems, for resonant-earthed systems it is the active current (INs Real, FNo 000701). If the display shows the message SensGnd Reverse (FNo 01277), either the current or voltage transformer terminals are swopped in the neutral path. In case the message SensGnd undef. (FNo 01278) appears the earth current may be too low. Deenergize and earth the line.

G G G G

The check is then finished.

3.3.11 Polarity Check for the Current Measuring Input IN

If the standard connection of the device is used whereby the current measuring input IN is connected in the star-point of the set of current transformers (refer also to the connection circuit diagrams in the Appendix A.3, Figure A-45, A-55, then the correct polarity of the earth current path in general will result automatically.

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

337

Installation and Commissioning

If however the current IN is derived from a separate summation CT (e.g. a core balance CT, see Section A.3, Figure A-47, A-57, A-64) an additional polarity check with this current is necessary. If the device is provided with the sensitive current measuring input IN and it is connected to an isolated or resonant-grounded system, the polarity check for IN was already carried out with the earth fault check according to 3.3.10. Then this Subsection 3.3.11 can be ignored. Otherwise the test is done with a disconnected trip circuit and primary load current. It must be noted that during all simulations that do not exactly correspond with situations that may occur in practice, the non-symmetry of measured values may cause the measured value monitoring to pick up. This must therefore be ignored during such tests.

DANGER!
Working on measurement transformers requires the highest precautions! Short-circuit current transformers before any current connections to the device are opened!

Directional Testing for a Grounded Network

The check can either be carried out with function directional ground fault protection (address 0116) or function ground fault detection (address 0131), which can be operated as additional short-circuit protection. In the following the check is described using the directional ground fault protection function (address 0116) as an example. To establish 3V0 (a displacement voltage), the connection of one VT winding is removed from the device. In Figure 3-37, the open delta VTs are modified so that only Vb and Vc are connected to the inputs Ve-n of the device. Alternatively, Va from the wye-VTs can be disconnected. If no connection for VNs (Ve-n connection) is foreseen, the secondary side of the corresponding phase can be disconnected as shown in Figure 3-38. The device receives only the current from the phase where the associated voltage connection at the device is missing. If the line current is in-phase or lagging the voltage (resistive or resistive-inductive load), the same current-voltage relationships exist for the device in this test simulation as during a phase-ground fault in the direction of the line. At least one stage of the ground fault protection must be set to be directional. The pickup threshold of this stages must be below the load current flowing on the line; if necessary the pick-up threshold must be reduced. The parameters that have been changed must be noted. After switching the line on and off again, the direction indication must be checked: in the fault messages the messages 67N picked up and Ground forward must at least be present. If the directional pick up is not present, either the earth current connection or the displacement voltage connection is incorrect. If the wrong direction is indicated, either the direction of load flow is from the line toward the busbar or the earth current path has a swapped polarity. In the latter case, the connection must be rectified after the line has been isolated and the current transformers short-circuited. In the event that the pick-up alarms were not even generated, the measured earth (residual) current or the displacement voltage evolved may be too small. This can be checked by means of the operational measured values.

338

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

Commissioning

Attention! If parameters were changed for this test, they must be returned to their original state after completion of the test!

A Bus B C

e n
Ve Ia Ib Ic IN Vn Ia' Ib' Ic' IN'

7SJ62/63/64 Line Figure 3-37 Polarity Testing for IN, Example with Current Transformers Configured in a Holmgreen-Connection (VTs with Broken Delta Connection e-n Winding)

A Bus B C

Va Vb Vc Vn Ia Ib Ic IN Ia' Ib' I c' IN'

7SJ62/63/64 Line Figure 3-38 Polarity Testing for IN, Example with Current Transformers Configured in a Holmgreen-Connection (VTs Wye-Connected)

3.3.12 Checking the Temperature Measurement via RTD-Box

After the termination of the RS485 port and the setting of the bus address have been verified according to Subsection 3.2.1, the measured temperature values and thresholds can be checked. If temperature sensors are used with 2-phase connection you must first determine the line resistance for the temperature detector being short-circuited. Select mode 6 at the

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

339

Installation and Commissioning

RTD-Box and enter the resistance value you have determined for the corresponding sensor (range: 0 to 50.6 ) to the RTD-Box. When using the preset 3-phase connection for the temperature detectors no further entry must be made. For checking the measured temperature values the temperature detectors are replaced by settable resistances (e.g. precision resistance decade) and the correct assignment of the resistance value and the displayed temperature for 2 or 3 temperature values from table 3-37 are verified.
Table 3-37 Assignment of temperature and resistance of the detectors Ni 100 DIN 43760 74,255 79,1311726 84,1457706 89,2964487 94,581528 100 105,551528 111,236449 117,055771 123,011173 129,105 135,340259 141,720613 148,250369 154,934473 161,7785 168,788637 175,971673 183,334982 190,88651 198,63475 206,58873 214,757989 223,152552 231,782912 240,66 249,79516 259,200121 268,886968 278,868111 289,15625 Ni 120 DIN 34760 89,106 94,9574071 100,974925 107,155738 113,497834 120 126,661834 133,483738 140,466925 147,613407 154,926 162,408311 170,064735 177,900442 185,921368 194,1342 202,546364 211,166007 220,001979 229,063812 238,3617 247,906476 257,709587 267,783063 278,139495 288,792 299,754192 311,040145 322,664362 334,641733 346,9875 Pt 100 IEC 751 80,3062819 84,270652 88,2216568 92,1598984 96,085879 100 103,902525 107,7935 111,672925 115,5408 119,397125 123,2419 127,075125 130,8968 134,706925 138,5055 142,292525 146,068 149,831925 153,5843 157,325125 161,0544 164,772125 168,4783 172,172925 175,856 179,527525 183,1875 186,835925 190,4728 194,098125

Temperature in C 50 40 30 20 10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200 210 220 230 240 250

340

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

Commissioning

Temperature thresholds that are configured in the protection device can be checked by slowly approaching the resistance value.

3.3.13 Measuring the operating time of the circuit breaker (only 7SJ64)
Only for Synchronism Check If the device 7SJ64 is equipped with the function for synchronism and voltage check and it is applied, it is necessary under asynchronous system conditions that the operating time of the circuit breaker is measured and set correctly when closing. If the synchronism check function is not used or only for closing under synchronous system conditions, this subsection is irrelevant. For measuring the operating time a setup as shown in figure 3-39. The timer is set to 1 s and a graduation of 1 ms. The circuit breaker is closed manually. At the same time the timer is started. After closing the poles of the circuit breaker, the voltage UFeeder appears and the timer is stopped. The time displayed by the timer is the real circuit breaker closing time. If the timer is not stopped due to an unfavourable closing moment, the attempt will be repeated. It is particularly favourable to calculate the mean from several (3 to 5) successful switching attempts. Set the calculated time under address 6X20 as T-CB close (under power system data 2). Select the next lower adjustable value.

Busbar UBusbar
Start

L+

Timer
L
Stop

Close

UFeeder Feeder Figure3-39 Measuring the circuit breaker closing time

3.3.14 Switching Check for the Configured Operating Devices

Control by Local Command If the configured operating devices were not switched sufficiently in the hardware test already described (Subsection 3.3.3), all configured switching devices must be switched on and off from the device via the integrated control element. The feedback

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

341

Installation and Commissioning

information of the circuit breaker position injected via binary inputs is read out at the device and compared with the actual breaker position. For devices with graphic display this is easy to do with the control display. The switching procedure is described in the SIPROTEC 4System Manual. The switching authority must be set in correspondence with the source of commands used. The switching mode can be selected from interlocked and non-interlocked switching. Please take note that non-interlocked switching can be a safety hazard. Control by Protective Function Tripping of the primary equipment by protective elements can be verified if desired. However, be fully aware that such testing can result in closing of the circuit breaker by the reclosing element in the 7SJ62/63/64 or an external reclosing device. If circuit breaker closing is to be avoided, be sure the closing is defeated before the test is performed. If reclosing is desired, select an element in the 7SJ62/63/64 that initiates reclosing, and test the control by tripping this element in the testing. To avoid a trip-closetrip event, be sure the protective element is dropped out before the close occurs.

DANGER!
A successfully started test cycle can lead to the closing of the circuit breaker!

Control from a Remote Control Centre

If the device is connected to a remote substation via a system (SCADA) interface, the corresponding switching tests may also be checked from the substation. Please also take into consideration that the switching authority is set in correspondence with the source of commands used.

3.3.15 Triggering Oscillographic Recordings

At the end of commissioning, an investigation of switching operations of the circuit breaker(s) or primary switching device(s), under load conditions, should be done to assure the stability of the protection during the dynamic processes. Oscillographic recordings obtain the maximum information about the behaviour of the 7SJ62/63/64. Requirements Along with the capability of recording waveform data during system faults, the 7SJ62/ 63/64 also has the capability of capturing the same data when commands are given to the device via the service program DIGSI 4, the serial interfaces, or a binary input. For the latter, the binary input must be assigned to the function >Trig.Wave.Cap. (FNo 00004). Triggering for the oscillographic recording then occurs when the input is energized. For example, an auxiliary contact of the circuit breaker or control switch may be used to control the binary input for triggering. An oscillographic recording that is externally triggered (that is, without a protective element pick-up or device trip) is processed by the device as a normal fault recording with the exception that data are not given in the fault messages (trip log). The externally triggered record has a number for establishing a sequence.

342

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

Commissioning

Triggering with DIGSI 4

To trigger oscillographic recording with DIGSI 4, click on Test in the left part of the window. Double click the entry Test Wave Form in the list in the right part of the window to trigger the recording. See Figure 3-40.

Figure 3-40 Triggering oscillographic recording with DIGSI 4

A report is given in the bottom left region of the screen. In addition, message segments concerning the progress of the procedure are displayed. The SIGRA program or the Comtrade Viewer program is required to view and analyse the oscillographic data.

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

343

Installation and Commissioning

3.4

Final Preparation of the Device

Tighten the used screws at the terminals; those ones not being used should be slightly fastened. Ensure all pin connectors are properly inserted.

Caution!
Do not use force! The tightening torques must not be exceeded as the threads and terminal chambers may otherwise be damaged!

Verify that all service settings are correct. This is a crucial step because some setting changes might have been made during commissioning. The protective settings under device configuration, input/output configuration are especially important (Section 2.1.1) as well as the power system data, and activated Groups A through D (if applicable). All desired elements and functions must be set ON. See Chapter 2. Keep a copy of all of the in-service settings on a PC. Check the internal clock of the device. If necessary, set the clock or synchronize the clock if it is not automatically synchronized. For assistance, refer to the SIPROTEC 4 System Manual. The Annunciation memory buffers should be cleared, particularly the Event Log and Trip Log. Future information will then only apply for actual system events and faults. To clear the buffers, press MAIN MENU Annunciation Set/Reset. The numbers in the switching statistics should be reset to the values that were existing prior to the testing, or to values in accordance with the user's practices. Set the statistics by pressing MAIN MENU Annunciation Statistic. Refer to the SIPROTEC 4 System Manual if more information is needed. Press the
ESC

key, several times if necessary, to return to the default display.

Clear the LEDs on the front panel by pressing the LED key. Any output relays that were picked up prior to clearing the LEDs are reset when the clearing action is performed. Future indications of the LEDs will then apply only for actual events or faults. Pressing the LED key also serves as a test for the LEDs because they should all light when the button is pushed. Any LEDs that are lit after the clearing attempt are displaying actual conditions. The green RUN LED must be on. The red ERROR LED must not be lit. Close the protective switches. If test switches are available, then these must be in the operating position. The device is now ready for operation. n

344

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

Technical Data

4
General Device Data Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (50 and 50N Elements) Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (51 and 51N Elements) Directional Time Overcurrent Protection (67 and 67N Elements) Inrush Restraint Dynamic Cold Load Pick-up Function (50c, 50Nc, 51Nc, 67c, 67Nc) Voltage Protection (27 and 59) Negative Sequence Protection (46) Motor Starting Protection (48) Start Inhibit for Motors (66/68) Frequency Protection (81 Over-Frequency and Under-Frequency) Thermal Overload Protection (49) Sensitive Ground Fault Detection (64, 50Ns, 67Ns) Intermittent Ground Fault Protection Automatic Reclosing System (79M) Fault Location Breaker Failure Protection (50BF) Synchronism and Voltage Check (25) (7SJ64 only) RTD-Boxes for Temperature Detection User Defined Functions with CFC Additional Functions Breaker Control Dimensions 346 359 360 370 371 371 372 373 379 380 381 382 384 387 388 389 389 390 391 392 395 399 400

This chapter provides the technical data of the SIPROTEC 4 7SJ62/63/64 devices and the individual functions of the devices, including the limiting values that under no circumstances may be exceeded. The electrical and functional data for devices equipped with all options are followed by the mechanical data with dimensional drawings. 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7 4.8 4.9 4.10 4.11 4.12 4.13 4.14 4.15 4.16 4.17 4.18 4.19 4.20 4.21 4.22 4.23

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000G1140C1471

345

Technical Data

4.1
4.1.1

General Device Data

Analog Inputs
Nominal Frequency fN IN 50 Hz or 60 Hz 1 A or 5 A 1.6 A1) (adjustable)

Current Inputs

Nominal Current

Ground Current, SensitiveINs

Burden per Phase and Ground Path At IN = 1 A approx. 0.05 VA At IN = 5 A approx. 0.3 VA Sensitive Ground Fault Detection 1 A approx. 0.05 VA AC Current Overload Capability Thermal (rms) 100 30 4 250 IN < 1 s IN < 10 s IN continuous IN for 0.5 cycle

Dynamic (current pulse)

AC Current Overload Capability for Sensitive Ground Fault Detection INs1) Thermal (rms) 300 A < 1 s 100 A < 10 s 15 A continuous dynamic (impulse) 750 A for 0.5 cycle Voltage Inputs Secondary Nominal Voltage Measuring Range Burden at 100 V AC Voltage Input Overload Capacity Thermal (rms) Measuring Transducer Inputs (7SJ63 only) Input Current Input Resistance Burden
1

100 V to 225 V AC 0 V to 170 V AC approx. 0.3 VA 230 V continuous 0 mA DC to 20 mA DC 10 5.8 mW at 24 mA

) only in versions with input for sensitive ground fault detection (ordering data see Appendix A.1)

4.1.2

Power Supply
Voltage Supply Via Integrated Converter
Nominal Power Supply Direct Voltage UH DC Permissible Voltage Ranges 24/48 VDC 19 to 58 VDC 60/110/125 VDC 48 to 150 V DC

Direct Voltage

Nominal Power Supply Direct Voltage UH DC 110/125/220/250 VDC Permissible Voltage Ranges 88 to 300 V DC

346

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000G1140C1471

General Device Data

Permissible AC Ripple Voltage, peak to peak 15 % of the power supply voltage to IEC 6025511

Power Consumption 7SJ621, 7SJ622 7SJ631 7SJ632, 7SJ633 7SJ635, 7SJ636 7SJ640 7SJ641 7SJ642 7SJ645

Quiescent approx. 4 W approx. 4 W approx. 5,5 W approx. 7 W approx. 5 W approx. 5 W approx. 5 W approx. 5 W

Energized approx. 7 W approx. 10 W approx. 16 W approx. 20 W approx. 7,5 W approx. 12 W approx. 12 W approx. 16 W

Bridging Time for Failure/Short Circuit to IEC 6025511 Alternative Voltage Voltage Supply via Integrated Converter
Nominal Power Supply Alternating Voltage UH AC Permissible Voltage Ranges

50 ms at U 110 VDC 20 ms at U 24 VDC

115 VAC 92 to 132 VAC

230 VAC*) 184 to 265 VAC*)

*) 7SJ62 and 7SJ63 only Power Consumption 7SJ621, 7SJ622 7SJ631 7SJ632, 7SJ633 7SJ635, 7SJ636 7SJ640 7SJ641 7SJ642 7SJ645 Bridging Time for Failure/Short Circuit
Quiescent approx. 3 VA approx. 3 VA approx. 5 VA approx. 7 VA approx. 6.5 VA approx. 6.5 VA approx. 6.5 VA approx. 6.5 VA Energized approx. 9 VA approx. 12 VA approx. 18 VA approx. 23 VA approx. 12.5 VA approx. 12.5 VA approx. 16.5 VA approx. 21 VA

200 ms

4.1.3

Binary Inputs and Outputs

Number 7SJ621* 7SJ622* 7SJ631* 7SJ632* 7SJ633* 8 (configurable) 11 (configurable) 11 (configurable) 24 (configurable) 20 (configurable)

Binary Inputs

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000G1140C1471

347

Technical Data

7SJ635* 7SJ636* 7SJ640* 7SJ641* 7SJ642* 7SJ645* Nominal Voltage Range Device 7SJ62 7SJ63 7SJ640 7SJ641 7SJ642 7SJ645 Current Consumption, Energized
(independent of the control voltage)

37 (configurable) 33 (configurable) 7 (configurable) 15 (configurable) 20 (configurable) 33 (configurable) 24 VDC to 250 VDC, bipolar Binary Inputs
--BI 1....6; BI 8....19 BI 25....36 --BI 1 ... BI 11 BI 7; BI 20....24 BI 37 BI 1...7 BI 1...15 BI 1...7; BI 20 BI 1...7; BI 20; BI 33 approx. 1.8 mA approx. 4 ms

--BI 8...19 BI 8...19; BI 21...32

approx. 0.9 mA approx. 9 ms

Pickup Times Switching Thresholds For Nominal Voltages 24/48/60 VDC and 60/110/125 VDC For Nom. Voltages 110/125 VDC and 220/250 VDC and 115/230 VAC Maximum Permissible Voltage Impulse Filter on Input Output Relays

adjustable voltage range with jumpers UPU 19 VDC UDO 14 VDC UPU 88 VDC UDO 66 VDC 300 VDC 220 nF Coupling Capacitor at 220 V with recovery time > 60 ms

Output Relay for Commands/Annunciations1) (see also General Diagrams in High-duty relays (motor control)2 Appendix A.2) Number and Information acc. to the order variant (allocatable): Values in ( ): up to release .../DD
NO Contact 6 (8) 4 (6) 8 11 11 14 14 NO/NC (switch selectable) 3 (1) 3 (1) 1 1 1 1 1 High-duty relay 4 4 8 8

Order Variant 7SJ621 7SJ622 7SJ631 7SJ632 7SJ633 7SJ635 7SJ636

348

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000G1140C1471

General Device Data

Order Variant 7SJ640 7SJ641 7SJ642 7SJ645 Switching Capability MAKE BREAK

NO Contact 5 12 8 11

NO/NC (switch selectable) 1 2 1 1

High-duty relay 4 8 250 V 30 A 0,5 s 1000 W 2) 500 W 1%

1000 W/VA 1) 30 W/VA 40 W resistive 25 W/VA at L/R 50 ms 250 V 5 A continous 30 A 0,5 s 5 A continous 30 A for 0,5 s 8 ms 8 ms

Switching Voltage Permissible Current per Contact / Max. inrush peak Permissible Current per Contact and Total Current on common path Switching Capability for 30 s for 28 V to 250 V for 24 V

Permissible relative closing time Operating time, approx..

1)

ULlisted with the following nominal value: 120 V ac 240 V ac 240 V ac 24 V dc 48 V dc 240 V dc 120 V ac 240 V ac ULlisted with the following nominal value: 240 V dc 120 V dc 60 V dc

Pilot duty, B300 Pilot duty, B300 5 A General Purpose 5 A General Purpose 0.8 A General Purpose 0.1 A General Purpose 1/6 hp (4.4 FLA) 1/2 hp (4.9 FLA) 1.6 FLA 3.2 FLA 5.5 FLA

2)

4.1.4

Communications Interfaces
Connection front panel, non-isolated, RS 232, 9-pin DSUB port for connecting a personal computer with DIGSI 4 min. 4800 Baud; max. 38400 Baud for 7SJ63/64: max. 115 200 Baud Factory Setting: 38400 Baud; Parity: 8E1 15 meters / 50 feet

PC Front Interface

Operation Transmission Speed

Maximum Distance of Transmission

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000G1140C1471

349

Technical Data

Rear Service/Modem Interface

Connection Operation Transmission Speed

isolated interface for data transfer with DIGSI 4 min. 4800 Bd, max. 38400 Baud for 7SJ63/64: max. 115 200 Baud Factory Setting: 38400 Bd RS232/RS485 depends on order code rear panel, mounting location C 9 pin DSUB port on the case bottom shielded data cable 500 V AC

RS232/RS485 Connection for flush mounted case for panel-surface mounted case Test Voltage RS232 Maximum Distance of Transmission RS485 Maximum Distance of Transmission Fibre Optical Link1) Connector Type with flush-mounted case with panel surfacemounted case Optical Wavelength

15 meters / 50 feet

1 km / 3280 feet / 0.62 mile STConnector rear panel, mounting location C at FO housing on the case bottom = 820 nm

Laser Class 1 Under EN 608251/ 2 using glass fiber 50/125 m or using glass fiber 62.5/125 m Optical Link Signal Attenuation Channel Distance Character Idle State
1

max. 8 dB, with glass fiber 62.5/125 m max. 1.5 km (0.95 miles) selectable: factory setting Light off

) not for 7SJ64 isolated interface for data transfer with RTD-boxes min. 4800 Bd, max. 115 200 Baud Factory Setting: 38400 Bd

Additional Port (only 7SJ64)

Connection Transmission Speed RS485 Connection for Flush Mounted Case for panel surfacemounted case Test Voltage Maximum Distance of Transmission Fibre Optical Link Connector Type with flush-mounted case

rear panel, installation location D 9 pin DSUB Port RS 485 at the housing on the case bottom shielded data cable 500 V AC 1 km / 3280 feet / 0.62 mile

STConnector rear panel, mounting location D

350

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000G1140C1471

General Device Data

with panel surfacemounted case Optical Wavelength

at housing on the case bottom = 820 nm

Laser Class 1 Under EN 608251/ 2 using glass fiber 50/125 m or using glass fiber 62.5/125 m Optical Link Signal Attenuation Channel Distance Character Idle State System (SCADA) Interface (optional) IEC 608705103 RS232/RS485/ depends on order code RS232 Connection for flush mounted case for panel surfacemounted case Test Voltage Transmission Speed Maximum Distance of Transmission RS485 Connection for Flush Mounted Case for panel surfacemounted case Test Voltage Transmission Speed Maximum Distance of Transmission Fibre Optical Link Connector Type with flush-mounted case with panel surfacemounted case Optical Wavelength rear panel, mounting location B 9 pin DSUB port at the housing on the case bottom 500 V AC min. 4800 Bd, max. 38400 Bd Factory Setting: 38400 Bd 15 meters / 49 feet rear panel, installation location B 9 pin DSUB Port RS 485 at the housing on the case bottom 500 V AC min. 4800 Bd, max. 38400 Bd Factory Setting: 38400 Bd 1 km / 3280 feet / 0.62 mile STConnector rear panel, mounting location B at housing on the case bottom = 820 nm floating interface for data transfer to a master terminal max. 8 dB, with glass fiber 62.5/125 m max. 1.5 km (0.95 miles) selectable: factory setting Light off

Laser Class 1 Under EN 608251/ 2 using glass fiber 50/125 m or using glass fiber 62.5/125 m Optical Link Signal Attenuation Channel Distance Character Idle State PROFIBUS RS485 (FMS and DP) Connection for Flush Mounted Case max. 8 dB, with glass fiber 62.5/125 m max. 1.5 km (0.95 miles) selectable: factory setting Light off rear panel, installation location B 9 pin DSUB Port RS 485

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000G1140C1471

351

Technical Data

for panel surfacemounted case Test Voltage Transmission Speed Maximum Distance of Transmission

at the housing on the case bottom 500 V AC up to 1.5 M Baud 1 km / 3280 feet / 0.62 mile at 93.75 kBd 500 m /1640 feet /0.31 mile at 187.5 kBd 200 m / 660 feet at 1.5 MBd

Profibus (FMS and DP) Fibre Optical Link Connector type

For Flush-Mounted Case For Panel SurfaceMounted Case Transmission Speed recommended: Optical Wavelength

integrated ST connector for OWG direct access; for FMS single ring or twin ring, depending on order for DP only double ring rear panel, mounting location B at the housing on the case bottom up to 1.5 M Baud > 500 k Baud with normal casing 57600 Bd with detached operator panel = 820 nm

Laser class 1 Under EN 608251/ 2 using glass fiber 50/125 m or using glass fiber 62.5/125 m Optical Link Signal Attenuation Channel Distance DNP3.0 / MODBUS RS485 Connection for Flush Mounted Case for panel surfacemounted case Test Voltage Transmission Speed Maximum Distance of Transmission DNP3.0 / MODBUS Fibre Optical Link Connector Type Connection with flush-mounted case with panel surfacemounted case Transmission Speed Optical Wavelength STConnector transmitter/receiver rear panel, mounting location B at the housing on the case bottom max. 19200 Bd = 820 nm rear panel, installation location B 9 pin DSUB Port at the housing on the case bottom 500 V; 50 Hz max. 19200 Bd 1 km / 3280 feet / 0.62 mile max. 8 dB, with glass fiber 62.5/125 m max. 1.5 km (0.95 miles)

Laser Class 1 Under EN 608251/ 2 using glass fiber 50/125 m or using glass fiber 62.5/125 m Optical Link Signal Attenuation Channel Distance max. 8 dB, with glass fiber 62.5/125 m max. 1.5 km (0.95 miles)

352

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000G1140C1471

General Device Data

Clock

Time Synchronization DCF77/IRIG BSignal Connection For Flush-mounted Case rear panel, mounting location A 9 - pin DSUB port For Panel Surfaceat the double-deck terminal on Mounted Case the case bottom Signal Rated Voltage Signal Levels and Burdens:
5V VIHigh VILow IIHigh RI 6.0 V Rated Signal Voltage 12 V 15.8 V 1.4 V at IILow = 0.25 mA 4.5 mA to 9.3 mA 1930 at VI = 8.7 V 1700 at VI = 15.8 V 24 V 31 V 1.9 V at IILow = 0.25 mA 4.5 mA to 8.7 mA 3780 at VI = 17 V 3560 at VI = 31 V

selectable 5 V, 12 V or 24 V

1.0 V at IILow = 0.25 mA

4.5 mA to 9.4 mA 890 at VI = 4 V 640 at VI = 6 V

4.1.5

Electrical Tests
Standards: IEC 60255 (Product Standards) ANSI/IEEEC37.90.0,.C37.90.0.1, C37.90.0.2 UL 508 DIN 57 435 Part 303 See also standards for individual tests IEC 602555, IEC 6087021 2.5 kV (rms) AC

Specifications

Insulation Tests

Standards: High Voltage Test (routine test) All circuits except power supply, Binary Inputs, and Communications Interface High Voltage Test (routine test) only power supply and binary inputs High Voltage Test (routine test) Only Isolated Communications and Time Synchronization Interfaces

3.5 kVDC 500 V (rms) AC

Impulse Voltage Test (type test) 5 kV (peak): 1.2/50 s: 0.5 Ws: 3 positive All Circuits Except Communications and 3 negative impulses in intervals of 5 s and Time Synchronization Interfaces, Class III EMC Tests for Immunity (Type Tests) Standards: IEC 602556 and 22, (Product standards) EN 500822 (Generic standard) DIN 57 435 Part 303 ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 and C37.90.2

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000G1140C1471

353

Technical Data

High Frequency Test IEC 60255221, Class III and VDE 0435 Part 303, Class III Electrostatic Discharge IEC 60255222 Class IV and IEC 6100042, Class IV Irradiation with HF Field, non-modulated IEC 60255223 (Report) Class III Irradiation with HF Field, amplitude modulated IEC 6100043, Class III

2.5 kV (Peak): 1 MHz: = 15 s; 400 Surges per s: Test Duration 2 s Ri=200 8 kV contact discharge: 15 kV airdischarge, both polarities:150 pF:Ri=330 10 V/m: 27 MHz to 500 MHz

10 V/m: 80 MHz to1000 MHz: 80 % AM: 1 kHz

Irradiation with HF Field, 10 V/m: 900 MHz: repetition frequency Pulse Modulated 200 Hz: duty cycle of 50 % IEC 6100043/ENV 50204, Class III Fast Transient Disturbance Variables/ 4 kV: 5/50 ns: 5 kHz: Burst length = 15 ms; Burst IEC 60255224 and repetition rate 300 ms: both polarities: IEC 61000-4-4, Class IV Ri = 50 : Test Duration 1 min High Energy Surge Voltages (SURGE), IEC 6100045 Installation Class 3 Power Supply Measuring Inputs, Binary Inputs and Relay Outputs

common mode: diff. mode: common mode: diff. mode:

2 kV: 12 : 9 F 1 kV: 2 : 18 F 2 kV: 42 : 0.5 F 1 kV: 42 : 0.5 F

Line Conducted HF, amplitude module.10 V: 150 kHz to 80 MHz: 80 % AM: 1 kHz IEC 6100046, Class III Power System Frequency Magnetic Field IEC 6100048, Class IV IEC 602556 30 A/m continuous: 300 A/m for 3 s: 50 Hz 0.5 mT: 50 Hz

Oscillatory Surge Withstand Capability 2.5 to 3 kV (Peak Value): 1MHz to 1.5 MHz ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 damped wave: 50 surges per s: duration 2 s: Ri = 150 to 200 Fast Transient Surge Withstand Cap. 4 kV to 5 kV: 10/150 ns: 50 Pulse per s; ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 both polarities: Duration 2 s: Ri = 80 Radiated Electromagnetic Interference 35 V/m: 25 MHz to 1000 MHz ANSI/IEEE C37.90.2 amplitude and pulse modulated Damped Oscillations similar to IEC 60694412, IEC 61000412 EMC Tests For Noise Emission (type test) Standard: Radio Noise Voltage to Lines, Only Power Supply Voltage IECCISPR 22 Radio Noise Field Strength IECCISPR 22 354 2.5 kV (Peak Value), polarity alternating 100 kHz, 1 MHz, 10 MHz and 50 MHz, Ri = 200 EN 500811 (Generic Standard) 150 kHz to 30 MHz Limit Class B 30 MHz to 1000 MHz Limit Class B

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000G1140C1471

General Device Data

Harmonic Currents on the Network Lead at 230 VAC*) IEC 6100032 Voltage Variations and Flicker on the Network Lead at 230 VAC*) IEC 6100033 *) for 7SJ62 and 7SJ63

Device is to be assigned Class D (applies only for devices with > 50 VA power consumption) Limits are observed

4.1.6

Mechanical Stress Tests

Standards: Vibration IEC 60255211, Class 2 IEC 6006826 IEC 6025521 and IEC 60068 Sinusoidal 10 Hz to 60 Hz: 0.075 mm Amplitude; 60 Hz to 150 Hz: 1 g acceleration frequency sweep rate 1 Octave/min 20 cycles in 3 orthogonal axes. Half-sine shaped acceleration 5 g, duration 11 ms, 3 shocks in each direction of 3 orthogonal axes Sinusoidal 1 Hz to 8 Hz 3.5 mm Amplitude (horizontal axis) 1 Hz to 8 Hz: 1.5 mm Amplitude (Vertical axis) 8 Hz to 35 Hz: 1 g acceleration (horizontale axis) 8 Hz to 35 Hz: 0.5 g acceleration (Vertical axis) Frequency Sweep Rate1 Octave/min 1 cycle in 3 orthogonal axes IEC 6025521 and IEC 600682 Sinusoidal 5 Hz to 8 Hz: 7.5 mm Amplitude; 8 Hz to 150 Hz: 2 g acceleration Frequency sweep rate1 Octave/min 20 cycles in 3 orthogonal axes. Half-sine shaped Acceleration 15 g, duration 11 ms, 3 shocks in each direction of 3 orthogonal axes. Half-sine shaped Acceleration 10 g, duration 16 ms, 1000 shocks in each direction of 3 orthogonal axes.

Vibration and Shock Stress During Operation

Shock IEC 60255212, Class 1 IEC 60068227 Seismic Vibration IEC 60255213, Class 1 IEC 6006833

Vibration and Shock Stress During Transport

Standards: Vibration IEC 60255211, Class 2 IEC 6006826

Shock IEC 60255212, Class1 IEC 60068227 Continuous Shock IEC 60255212, Class 1 IEC 60068229

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000G1140C1471

355

Technical Data

4.1.7

Climatic Stress Tests

Type tested (acc. IEC6008621 and 2, Test Bd, for 16 h) Limiting temporary (transient) operating temperature Recommended permanent operating temperature (acc. IEC 602556) 13F to +185F or 25 C to +85 C

Ambient Temperatures1)

4F to +158F +23F to +131F

or 20 C to +70 C or 5 C to +55 C

Visibility of display may be impaired at +131F (or +55 C) and above Limiting temperatures for storage Limiting temperatures for transport 13F to +131F 13F to +158F or 25 C to +55 C or 25 C to +70 C

STORE AND TRANSPORT THE DEVICE WITH FACTORY PACKAGING.

1

) ULcertified (Standard 508, Industrial Control Equipment): or 5 C to +70 C

Limiting temperatures for normal operation (output relays not energized) 23F to +158F Limiting temperatures with max. load (max. cont. permissible energization of inputs and outputs) for 7SJ62 23F to +131F for 7SJ63/64 23F to +104F Humidity Permissible Humidity

or 5 C to +55 C or 5 C to +40

Mean value per year 75% relative humidity, on 56 days of the year up to 93% relative humidity. CONDENSATION MUST BE AVOIDED

Siemens recommends that all devices be installed such that they are not exposed to direct sunlight, nor subject to large fluctuations in temperature that may cause condensation to occur.

4.1.8

Service Conditions
The protective device is designed for use in an industrial environment and an electrical utility environment. Proper installation procedures should be followed to ensure electromagnetic compatibility (EMC). In addition, the following are recommended: All contacts and relays that operate in the same cubicle, cabinet, or relay panel as the numerical protective device should, as a rule, be equipped with suitable surge suppression components. For substations with operating voltages of 100 kV and above, all external cables should be shielded with a conductive shield grounded at both ends. The shield must be capable of carrying the fault currents that could occur. For substations with lower operating voltages, no special measures are normally required.

356

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000G1140C1471

General Device Data

Do not withdraw or insert individual modules while the protective device is energized. When handling the modules or the device outside of the case, standards for components sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD) must be observed. The modules and device are not endangered when inserted into the case.

4.1.9

Certifications

UL listing 7SJ62B 7SJ62E 7SJ63B 7SJ63C 7SJ63E 7SJ64B1) 7SJ64C1) 7SJ64E1) 7SJ64F1)
1)

UL recognition 7SJ62D

7SJ63A Models with threaded terminals 7SJ63D Models with plugin terminals

7SJ64A1) 7SJ64D1) 7SJ64G1)

in preparation (April 2002)

4.1.10 Construction
Case ULcertification conditions: Dimensions 7XP20 For use on a Flat Surface of a Type 1 Enclosure see dimensional drawings, Section 4.23

Variant 7SJ62B 7SJ62D/E 7SJ631/2/3B 7SJ635/6B 7SJ631/2/3D/E 7SJ63/5/6D/E 7SJ631/2/3A/C

Case in surface mounting housing in flush mounting housing in surface mounting housing in surface mounting housing in flush mounting housing in flush mounting housing in housing for detached operator panel

Size
1/ 1/ 1/ 1/ 1/ 1/ 1/ 3 3 2 1 2 1 2

Weight (mass) 9.9 pounds (4,5 kg) 8.8 pounds (4 kg) 16.5 pounds (7,5 kg) 33 pounds (15 kg) 14.3 pounds (6,5 kg) 28.6 pounds (13 kg) 17.6 pounds (8 kg)

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000G1140C1471

357

Technical Data

Variant 7SJ63/5/6A/C 7SJ631/2/3F/G 7SJ63/5/6F/G 7SJ640B 7SJ641/2B 7SJ645B 7SJ641/2A/C 7SJ645A/C 7SJ641/2F/G 7SJ645F/G 7SJ640D/E 7SJ641/2D/E 7SJ645D/E

Case in housing for detached operator panel in housing without operator panel in housing without operator panel in surface mounting housing in surface mounting housing in surface mounting housing in housing for detached operator panel in housing for detached operator panel in housing without operator panel in housing without operator panel in flush mounting housing in flush mounting housing in flush mounting housing

Size
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Weight (mass) 33 pounds (15 kg) 17.6 pounds (8 kg) 33 pounds (15 kg) 17.6 pounds (8 kg) 24.3 pounds (11 kg) 33 pounds (15 kg) 17.6 pounds (8 kg) 26.4 pounds (12 kg) 17.6 pounds (8 kg) 26.4 pounds (12kg) 11.0 pounds (5 kg) 13.2 pounds (6 kg) 22.0 pounds (10 kg) 5.5 pounds (2,5 kg)

/1 /2 /1 /3 /2 /1 /2 /1 /2 /1 /3
2 1

1/ 1/

Detached operator panel

International Protection Under IEC 60529 for the equipment in the surface mounted case IP 51 in the flush mounted case and in model with the offsett operating element Front IP 51 Back IP 50 For personal protection IP 2x Terminals covered with cap

358

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000G1140C1471

Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (50 and 50N Elements)

4.2

Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (50 and 50N Elements)

Pickup Current Pickup Current Pickup Current Pickup Current Delay Times T 501 (phases) 0.50 A to 175.00 A1)(increments 0.05 A)1) or (ineffective, no pickup) 50N1 (ground)0.25 A to 175.00 A1)(increments 0.05 A)1) or (ineffective, no pickup) 502 (phases) 0.50 A to 175.00 A1)(increments 0.05 A)1) or (ineffective, no pickup) 50N2 (ground)0.25 A to 175.00 A1)(increments 0.05 A)1) or (ineffective, no pickup) 501, 502, 0.00 s to 60.00 s (increments 0.01 s) 50N1, 50N2 or (does not expire)

Pickup and Time Delay Ranges/ Resolutions

The set times are pure delay times. Inherent Operating Times Pickup times without delay (T) or inrush stabilization. With inrush stabilization add 10 ms 501, 502, 50N1, 50N2 Current = 2 x Pickup Value Current = 10x Pickup Value Dropout Times 501, 502, 50N1, 50N2 Dropout Tolerances Dropout/Pickup (ratio) Pickup Current 501, 502, 50N1, 50N2 Delay Times T Power supply direct voltage in range 0.8 VPS/ VPS nominal 1.15 Temperatur in range 23 F amb 131 F Frequency in range 0.95 f/fN 1.05 Frequency in range f < 55 Hz or f > 65 Hz Harmonic currents Up to 10 % 3. Harmonic Up to 10 % 5. Harmonic approx. 40 ms approx. 0.95 for I/IN 0.3 2 % of setting value or 50 mA1) 1 % of setting value or 10 ms 1% 0.06% /10 F 1% function is blocked 1% 1% approx. 30 ms approx. 25 ms

Influencing Variables for Pickup

1)

For IN = 1 A, divide all limits and increments by 5.

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000G1140C1471

359

Technical Data

4.3

Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (51 and 51N Elements)

Pickup Current Pickup Current 51 51N 0.50 A to 20.00 A1) (Increments 0.05 A)1) 0.25 A to 20.00 A1) (Increments 0.05 A)1) 0.05 s to 3.20 s (Increments 0.01 s) or (delay does not expire) 0.05 s to 15.00 s (Increments 0.01 s) or (delay does not expire)

Pickup and Time Multiplier Ranges/ Resolutions

Time Multipliers for Tp, TEp Ip, IEp, IECCharacteristics Time Multiplier for 51, 51N ANSI characteristics Trip Time Characteristics as per IEC D

As per IEC 60255-3, Section 3.5.2 or BS 142 (See also Figure 4-1 and 4-2)

NORMAL INVERSE (Type A)

0.14 t = --------------------------------- T p [s] 0.02 ( I Ip ) 1 13.5 t = -------------------------- T p [s] 1 ( I Ip ) 1 80 t = -------------------------- T p [s] 2 ( I Ip ) 1 120 t = -------------------------- T p [s] 1 ( I Ip ) 1
For All Characteristics t Tp I Ip trip time in seconds setting value of the time multiplier fault current setting value of the pickup current

VERY INVERESE (Type B)

EXTREMELY INV. (Type C)

LONG INVERSE (Type B)

The trip times for I/Ip 20 are identical to those for I/Ip = 20. Pickup threshold approx. 1.10 Ip

) For IN = 1 A, divide all limits and increments by 5.

360

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000G1140C1471

Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (51 and 51N Elements)

Reset Time Characteristic as per IEC

As per IEC 602553, Section 3.5.2 or BS 142 (See also Figure 4-1 and 4-2))

NORMAL INVERSE (Type A)

9.7 t Reset = -------------------------- T p 2 ( I Ip ) 1 43.2 t Reset = -------------------------- T p 2 ( I Ip ) 1 58.2 t Reset = -------------------------- T p 2 ( I Ip ) 1 80 t Reset = -------------------------- T p 2 ( I Ip ) 1
For all Characteristics tRESET Tp I Ip = Reset time in seconds = Setting value of the time multiplier = Fault Current = Setting value of the pickup current

VERY INVERSE (Type B)

EXTREMELY INV. (Type C)

LONG INVERSE (Type B)

Dropout

IEC without DiskEmulation Dropout/Pickup (ratio) IEC with Disk Emulation Dropout/Pickup (ratio)

approx. [1.05 Ip setting value] for Ip/IN>0.3, corresponds to approx. [0.95pickup threshold] approx. [0.90 Ip setting value] 2 % of setting value or 50 mA1) 5 % of reference (calculated) value + 2 % current tolerance, respectively 30 ms 5 % of reference (calculated) value + 2 % current tolerance, respectively 30 ms 1% 0.06% /10 F 1 %, referring to reference time function is blocked 1% 1%

Tolerances

Pickup-, Dropout Thresholds Ip, IEp Trip Time for 2 I/Ip 20 Dropout Time for 0.05 I/Ip 0.90

Influencing Variables

Power Supply Direct Voltage in Range 0.8 VPS/ VPS nominal 1.15 Temperature in Range 23 F amb 131 F Frequency in Range 0.95 f/fN 1.05 Frequency in range f < 55 Hz or f > 65 Hz Harmonic currents Up to 10 % 3. Harmonic Up to 10 % 5. Harmonic

) For IN = 1 A, divide all limits and increments by 5.

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000G1140C1471

361

Technical Data

Reset Time
100 t [s] 30 20 10 Tp 3,2 3,2 1,6 0,8 0,4 0,2 0,1 1 0,5 0,3 0,2 0,1 0,05 0,05 0,05 100 t [s] 30 20 10

Operate Time

Tp 3,2

5
3 2

5
3 2 1 0,5 0,3 0,2 0,1 0,05 0,1 0,05 1,6 0,8 0,4 0,2

0,1

0,2

0,3

0,5 0,7 I/Ip

10 I/Ip

20

Reset Normal inverse: (Type A)

9, 7 t = --------------------------- T p 2 ( I Ip ) 1

[s]

Normal inverse: (Type A)

0, 14 t = ----------------------------------- T p [s] 0, 02 1 (I I ) p

1000 t [s]

1000

500
300 200 100

t [s]
Tp 3,2 1,6 0,8 0,4 0,2 0,1 0,05

500
300 200 100

50
30 20 10 5 3 2 1 0,5 0,3 0,2 0,1 0,05 0,05

50
30 20 10 5 3 2 1 0,5 0,3 Tp 3,2 1,6 0,8 0,4 0,1 0,05 0,05 1 2 3 5 10 I/Ip Very inverse: (Type B)
13, 5 t = --------------------------- T [s] p 1 ( I Ip ) 1

0,2 0,1

0,1

0,2

0,3

0,5 0,7 I/Ip

20

Reset Very inverse: (Type B)

43, 2 t = --------------------------- T p [s] 2 ( I Ip ) 1

Figure 4-1

Reset Time and Trip Time Characteristics Of The Inverse-time Overcurrent Protection, As Per IEC 607553

362

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000G1140C1471

Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (51 and 51N Elements)

Reset Time
1000 1000 Tp 3,2 t [s] 1,6 100 100 0,8 0,4 0,2 0,1 0,05

Operate Time

500
300 t [s] 200

500
300 200

50
30 20 10 5 3 2 1 0,5 0,3

50
30 20 10 5 3 2 1 0,5 0,3 Tp 3,2 1,6 0,8

0,1 0,05 0,05 0,1 0,2 0,3 0,5 0,7 I/Ip

58, 2 Reset Extremely inverse: t = --------------------------- T [s] - p 2 (Type C) (I I ) 1 p

0,1 0,05 1 1 2 3

0,05 5 10

0,1 0,2 20 I/Ip

0,4

Extremely inverse: (Type C)

80 t = --------------------------- T [s] p 2 ( I Ip ) 1

1000 t [s] 500 300 200 100 Tpp T 3,2 1,6 0,8 0,4 0,2 0,1 0,05

1000 t [s] 500 300 200 100

50
30 20 10 5 3 2 1 0,5 0,3

50
30 20 10 5 3 2 1 0,5 0,05 1 2 3 5 7 10 I/Ip
[s]

Tp 3,2 1,6 0,8 0,4 0,2 0,1 20

0,1 0,05 0,05 0,1 0,2 0,3 0,5 0,7 I/Ip Reset Long inverse: (Type B)
80 t = --------------------------- T p 2 (I Ip ) 1

Long inverse: (Type B)

120 t = --------------------------- T p 1 (I Ip ) 1

[s]

Figure 4-2

Reset Time and Trip Time Characteristics Of The Inverse-time Overcurrent Protection, As Per IEC 607553

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000G1140C1471

363

Technical Data

Trip Time Characteristics as per ANSI

As per ANSI/IEEE (see also Figures 4-3 to 4-6)

INVERSE

8.9341 t = -------------------------------------- + 0.17966 D [s] ( I I p )2.0938 1 0.2663 t = -------------------------------------- + 0.03393 D [s] 1.2969 ( I Ip ) 1 5.6143 t = ----------------------- + 2.18592 D [s] ( I Ip ) 1 0.0103 t = --------------------------------- + 0.0228 D [s] 0.02 ( I Ip ) 1 3.922 t = -------------------------- + 0.0982 D [s] 2 ( I Ip ) 1 5.64 t = -------------------------- + 0.02434 D [s] ( I I p )2 1 0.4797 t = -------------------------------------- + 0.21359 D [s] 1.5625 ( I Ip ) 1
For all Characteristics t D I Ip = Trip time in seconds = Setting value of the time multiplier = Fault Current = Setting value of the pickup current

SHORT INVERSE

LONG INVERSE

MODERATELY INV.

VERY INVERSE

EXTREMELY INVERSE

DEFINITE INVERSE

The trip times for I/Ip 20 are identical to those for I/Ip = 20. Pickup Threshold approx. 1.10 Ip

) For IN = 1 A, divide all limits and increments by 5.

364

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000G1140C1471

Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (51 and 51N Elements)

Reset Time Characteristic as per ANSI

As per ANSI/IEEE (see also Figures 4-3 to 4-6)

ANSI INVERSE

8.8 t Reset = -------------------------------------- D [s] 2.0938 ( I Ip ) 1 0.831 t Reset = -------------------------------------- D [s] 1.2969 ( I Ip ) 1 12.9 t Reset = -------------------------- D [s] ( I I p ) 1 1 0.97 t Reset = -------------------------- D [s] ( I I p ) 2 1 4.32 t Reset = -------------------------- D [s] ( I I p ) 2 1 5.82 t Reset = -------------------------- D [s] ( I I p ) 2 1 1.03940 t Reset = -------------------------------------- D [s] ( I I p ) 1.5625 1
For all Characteristics

ANSI SHORT INVERSE

ANSI LONG INVERSE

ANSI MODERATELY INV.

ANSI VERY INVERSE

ANSI EXTREMELY INV.

ANSI DEFINITE INV.

for 0.05 < (I/Ip) 0.90

tRESET D I Ip

= Reset time in seconds = Setting value of the time multiplier = Fault Current = Setting value of the pickup current

Dropout

ANSI without DiskEmulation Dropout/Pickup (ratio) ANSI with Disk Emulation Dropout/Pickup (ratio)

approx. [1.05 Ip setting value] for Ip/IN>0.3, corresponds to approx. [0.95pickup threshold] approx. [0.90 Ip setting value] 2 % of setting value or 50 mA1) 5 % of reference (calculated) value + 2 % current tolerance, respectively 30 ms 5 % of reference (calculated) value + 2 % current tolerance, respectively 30 ms 1% 0.06% /10 F 1 %, referring to reference time function is blocked

Tolerances

Pickup-, Dropout Thresholds Ip, IEp Trip Time for 2 I/Ip 20 Dropout Time for 0.05 I/Ip 0.90

Influencing Variables

Power Supply Direct Voltage in Range 0.8 VPS/ VPS nominal 1.15 Temperature in Range 23 F amb 131 F Frequency in Range 0.95 f/fN 1.05 Frequency in range f < 55 Hz or f > 65 Hz
1

) For IN = 1 A, divide all limits and increments by 5. 365

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000G1140C1471

Technical Data

Reset Time
500 t [s] D [s] 200 100 50 30 20 10 5 3 2 1 0.5 0.3 0.2 0.1 0.05 0.05 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 I/Ip
8.8 t = ------------------------------------------ D [s] 2.0938 1 (I Ip )

Operate Time
500 t [s] 200 100 50 30 20 10 5 3 2 1 0.5 0.3 0.2 0.1 1.0 0.05 1 2 3 5 10 I/Ip INVERSE
8.9341 t = ------------------------------------------ + 0.17966 D [s] 2.0938 1 ( I Ip )

15
10 5 2 1 0.5

D [s]

15
10 5 2 1 0.5

20

RESET INVERSE

500 t [s] 200 100 50 30 20 10 5 3 2 1 0.5 0.3 0.2 0.1 0.05 0.05 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 I/Ip 1.0 2 1 0.5 D [s] 15 10 5

500 t [s] 200 100 50 30 20 10 5 3 2 1 0.5 0.3 0.2 0.1

D [s] 15 10 5 2 10 I/Ip 20

0.5
0.05

1 5

RESET SHORT INVERSE

0.831 t = ------------------------------------------ D [s] 1.2969 1 (I I )

SHORT INVERSE

0.2663 t = ------------------------------------------ + 0.03393 D[s] 1.2969 1 (I Ip )

Figure 4-3

Reset Time and Trip Time Characteristics Of The Inverse-time Overcurrent Protection, As Per ANSI/IEEE

366

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000G1140C1471

Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (51 and 51N Elements)

Reset Time
500 t [s] 200 100 50 30 20 10 5 3 2 1 0.5 0.3 0.2 0.1 0.05 0.05 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 I/Ip RESET LONG INVERSE
12.9 t = --------------------------- D [s] - 1 ( I I p ) 1

Operate Time
500 t [s] 200 100 D [s] 50 15 10 5 2 1 0.5

D [s]

15
10 5 2 1 0.5

30 20 10 5 3 2 1 0.5 0.3 0.2 0.1 0.05 1.0 1 2 3 5 10 I/Ip LONG INVERSE 20

5.6143 t = ------------------------ + 2.18592 D [s] ( I Ip ) 1

500 t [s] t [s] 200 100 50 30 20 10 5 3 2 1 0.5 0.3 0.2 0.1 0.05 0.05 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 I/Ip RESET MODERATELY INVERSE
0.97 t = --------------------------- D [s] - 2 ( I I p ) 1

500 200 100 50 D [s] 15 10 5 2 1 0.5 30 20 10 5 3 2 1 0.5 0.3 0.2 0.1 0.05 1.0 1 2 3 5 10 I/Ip MODERATELY INVERSE
0.0103 t = ------------------------------------ + 0.0228 D [s] 0.02 1 (I Ip )

D [s] 15 10 5 2 1 0.5 20

Figure 4-4

Reset Time and Trip Time Characteristics Of The Inverse-time Overcurrent Protection, As Per ANSI/IEEE

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000G1140C1471

367

Technical Data

Reset Time
500 t [s] t [s] 200 D [s] 100 50 30 20 10 5 3 2 1 0.5 0.3 0.2 0.1 0.05 0.05 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 I/Ip
4.32 t = --------------------------- D - 2 ( I I p ) 1

Operate Time
500 200

15 10 5 2 1 0.5

100 50 30 20 10 5 3 2 1 0.5 0.3 0.2 0.1 0.05 1.0 1 2 3 5 10 I/Ip

3.922 t = --------------------------- + 0.0982 D [s] 2 ( I Ip ) 1

D [s] 15 10 5 2 1 0.5 20

RESET VERY INVERSE

500

[s]

VERY INVERSE
500 t [s]

t [s] 200 100 50 30 20

D [s] 15 10

200 100 50

5 2

30 20 10

10 1 5 3 2 1 0.5 0.3 0.2 0.1 0.05 0.05 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 I/Ip 1.0 0.5

5 3 2 1 0.5 0.3 0.2 0.1 0.05 1 2 3 5 0,5 10 1 20 I/Ip [s] 2 D [s] 15 10 5

RESET EXTREMELY INVERSE

5.82 t = --------------------------- D - 2 ( I I p ) 1

EXTREMELY INVERSE

5.64 t = --------------------------- + 0.02434 D [s] 2 (I Ip ) 1

Figure 4-5

Reset Time and Trip Time Characteristics Of The Inverse-time Overcurrent Protection, As Per ANSI/IEEE

368

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000G1140C1471

Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (51 and 51N Elements)

Reset Time
500 t [s] t [s] 200 100 50 30 20 10 5 3 2 1 1 0.5 0.5 0.3 0.2 0.1 0.05 0.05 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 I/Ip
1.0394 t = ------------------------------------------ D [s] 1.5625 1 (I Ip )

Operate Time
500 200 100 50

D [s] 15 10 5

30 20 10 5 D [s] 15 10 5 2 1 0.5

3 2 1 0.5 0.3 0.2 0.1 0.05 1.0 1 2 3 5 10 I/Ip 20

RESET DEFINITE INVERSE

DEFINITE INVERSE

0.4797 t = ------------------------------------------ + 0.21359 D [s] 1.5625 1 (I Ip )

Figure 4-6

Reset Time and Trip Time Characteristics Of The Inverse-time Overcurrent Protection, As Per ANSI/IEEE

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000G1140C1471

369

Technical Data

4.4

Directional Time Overcurrent Protection (67 and 67N Elements)

The same specifications and characteristics apply as for non-directional time overcurrent protection (see Sub-sections 4.2 and 4.3). Moreover, the following data apply for determining fault direction: Polarization With short-circuit free voltages, with voltage memory (memory duration is 2 cycles) for measurement voltages that are too low. Can be set in 3 stages (3 protection areas): 45 86 0 86 45 86 (if short-circuit free voltage vertical to short circuit voltage) Unlimited for one and two phase faults. For three phase faults, dynamically unlimited, steady-state approx. 7V phase-tophase. With zero sequence quantities Can be set in 3 stages (3 protection areas) 45 84 0 84 45 84 approx. 5 V displacement voltage, measured approx. 12 V displacement voltage, calculated

Overcurrent Elements Determining Direction For Phase Faults

Forward Range Inductive Resistive Capacitive

Directional Sensitivity

For Ground Faults

Polarization Forward Range Inductive Resistive Capacitive Directional Sensitivity

Inherent Operating Times

Pickup times without intentional delay or inrush stabilization. With inrush stabilization, add 10 ms. 67-1, 67-2, 67N-1, 67N-2 Current = [2 x pickup] Current = [10 x pickkup] Dropout Times 67-1, 67-2, 67N-1, 67N-2 approx. 40 ms approx. 45 ms approx. 40 ms

Tolerances

Phase angle errors under reference conditions For phase faults and for ground faults 3 electrical

Influencing Variables

Frequency Influence With no memory voltage Function is blocked approx. 1 in range 0.95 < f/fN < 1.05 in frequency range f < 55 Hz or f > 65 Hz

370

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000G1140C1471

Inrush Restraint

4.5

Inrush Restraint
Controlled Elements All 50, 50N, 51, 51N, 67, and 67N Elements I2f/I 10 % to 45 % (Increments 1 %)

Adjustment Ranges/ Resolution Function Limits Crossblock Crossblock

Stabilization Factor Second Harmonic

Lower Function Limit Upper Function Limit, Adjustable Ia, Ib, Ic

1

at least one phase current 1.25 A1) 1.50 A to 125.00 A1)(Increments 0.05 A)1) ON/OFF

) For IN = 1 A, divide all limits and increments by 5.

4.6

Dynamic Cold Load Pick-up Function (50c, 50Nc, 51Nc, 67c, 67Nc)
Controlled Elements Directional and non-directional time overcurrent protective elements (separate phase andground settings) Current CriteriaBkrClosed I MIN Interrogation on the circuit breaker position Automatic reclosing function ready Binary input 3 time levels (TCB Open, TActive, TStop) Current threshold BkrClosed I MIN (reset on current falling below threshold: monitoring with timer) 0.20 A to 5.00 A1) (Increments 0.05 A)1 ) 0 s to 21600 s (= 6 h) (Increments 1 s) 4 s to 21600 s (= 6 h) (Increments 1 s)

Timed Changeover of Settings

Initiation Criteria

Timing Current Control

Adjustment Ranges/ Resolution

Current ControlBkrClosed I MIN Time Until Changeover To Dynamic Settings Period Dynamic Settings are Effective After a Reclosure Fast Reset Time TCB Open TActive

TStop

1 s to 600 s (= 10 min) (Increments 1 s) or (fast reset inactive) Adjustable within the same ranges 1) and with the same increments 1) as the directional and non-directional time overcurrent protection

Dynamic Settings of Pickup Currents and Time Delays or Time Multipliers

1

) For IN = 1 A, divide all limits and increments by 5.

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000G1140C1471

371

Technical Data

4.7

Voltage Protection (27 and 59)

Undervoltage 27-1, 27-2 Measurement Quantities: PositiveSequence Voltages 10 V to 210 V 10 V to 120 V r = 1.05 to 3.00 r pickup 27-Delay (Increments 1 V) (Increments 1 V) (Increments 0.01)

Setting Ranges / Resolution

- Pickup Voltage,(phase-ground volt.) - Pickup Voltage, (phase-phase volt.) Dropout Ratio for 27-1 Dropout Ratio for 27-1 Time Delays

max. 130 V for phase-phase voltages max. 225 V for phase-ground voltage 0.00 s to 100.00 s (Increments 0.01 s) or (does not expire) ON/OFF 0.20 A to 5.00 A1) (Increments 0.05 A)1)

Current Supervision by 50 Element BkrClosed I MIN Overvoltage 59-1, 59-2

- Pickup Voltage, (phase-ground volt.) - Pickup Voltage, (phase-phase volt.) Time Delays 59-Delay

40 V to 225 V 40 V to 130 V

(Increments 1 V) (Increments 1 V)

0.00 s to 100.00 s (Increments 0.01 s) or (does not expire)

The set time are pure delay times.

Inherent Operating Times

Pickup Times Undervoltage Overvoltage Dropout Times Undervoltage Overvoltage

27-1, 27-2 59-1, 59-2 27-1, 27-2 59-1, 59-2

approx. 50 ms approx. 50 ms approx. 50 ms approx. 50 ms 1.05 0.95 3% of set value, or 1V 1% of set value, or 10 ms

Dropout Ratios Tolerances Influencing Variables

Dropout / Pickup (Voltage ratio) 27-2 Dropout / Pickup (Voltage ratio) 59 Pickup Voltages Time Delays T

Power supply DC voltage (VDC) in range 0.8 VPS/ VPS nominal 1.15 1% Temperature in range 23 F amb 131 F Frequency in range 0.95 f/fN 1.05 Frequency in range f < 55 Hz or f > 65 Hz 27-1, 27-2 59-1, 59-2 Harmonics - Up to 10% 3rd harmonic - Up to 10% 5th harmonic
1)

0.3 % /10 F 1%

increased tolerances; overfunction possible function is blocked 1% 1%

For IN = 1A, divide the limits by 5.

372

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000G1140C1471

Negative Sequence Protection (46)

4.8
4.8.1

Negative Sequence Protection (46)

DefiniteTime Elements (46-1 and 46-2)
Pickup Current Pickup Current Time Delays 46-1 46-2 46-1, 46-2 0.50 A to 15.00 A 1)(Increments 0.05 A) 1) or (ineffective, no pickup) 0.50 A to 15.00 A 1)(Increments 0.05 A) 1) or (ineffective, no pickup) 0.00 s to 60.00 s (Increments 0.01 s) or (does not expire) at least one phase current > 0.5 A1) all phase currents 20 A1) approx. 35 ms approx. 35 ms approx. 0.95 for I2/IN > 0.3 3% of set value or 50 mA1) 1% or 10 ms 1% 0.06% /10 F 1% function is blocked 1% 1%

Pickup and Time Delay Ranges/ Resolutions

Functional Limits

Lower Functional Limit Upper Functional Limit

Inherent Operating Times Dropout Tolerances Influencing Variables for PickupPickup Currents

Pickup Time Dropout Time Dropout/Pickup (ratio) 46-1, 46-2 Pickup Currents 46-1, 46-2 Time Delays Power Supply DC voltage in range 0.8 VPS/ VPS nominal 1.15 Temperature in range 23 F amb 131 F Frequency in range 0.95 f/fN 1.05 Frequency in range f < 55 Hz or f > 65 Hz Harmonic currents Up to 10 % 3rd Harmonic Up to 10 % 5th Harmonic

4.8.2

InverseTime Elements (46-TOC)

Pickup Current Time Multiplier (IEC) Time Multiplier (ANSI) 46TOC TI2p DI2p 0.50 A to 10.00 A1)(Increments 0.05 A)1) 0.05 s to 3.20 s (Increments 0.01 s) or (does not trip) 0.50 s to 15.00 s (Increments 0.01 s) or (does not trip) at least one phase current > 0.5 A1) all phase currents 20 A1)

Pickup and Time Multiplier

Functional Limits

Lower Functional Limit Upper Functional Limit

1

) For IN = 1 A, divide all limits and increments by 5.

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000G1140C1471

373

Technical Data

Trip Time Characteristics as per IEC 602553

See also Figure4-7

IEC NORMAL INVERSE

0.14 t = --------------------------------------- T I2p [s] 0.02 ( I 2 I 2p ) 1 13.5 t = --------------------------------- T I2p [s] 1 ( I 2 I 2p ) 1 80 t = --------------------------------- T I2p [s] 2 ( I 2 I 2p ) 1
Where:

IEC VERY INVERSE

IEC EXTREMELY INVERSE

for 1.1 < (I2/I2p) 20

t TI2p I2 I2p

trip time in seconds setting value of the time multiplier negative sequence currents setting value of the pickup current

Trip Time Characteristics as per ANSI

See also Figures4-8 and 4-9

ANSI INVERSE

8.9341 t = --------------------------------------------- + 0.17966 D I2p [s] 2.0938 ( I 2 I 2p ) 1 0.0103 t = --------------------------------------- + 0.0228 D I2p [s] 0.02 ( I 2 I 2p ) 1 3.922 t = --------------------------------- + 0.0982 D I2p [s] ( I 2 I 2p ) 2 1 5.64 t = --------------------------------- + 0.02434 D I2p [s] 2 ( I 2 I 2p ) 1
Where: t DI2p I2 I2p trip time in seconds setting value of the time multiplier negative sequence currents setting value of the pickup current

ANSI MODERATELY INVERSE ANSI VERY INVERSE

ANSI EXTREMELY INVERSE

for 1.1 < (I2/I2p) 20

The trip times for I2/I2p 20 are identical to those for I2/I2p= 20. Pickup Threshold Tolerances Pickup Current I2p Time for 2 I2/I2p 20 approx. 1.10 I2p 3% of set value or 50 mA1) 5% of reference (calculated) value + 2 % current tolerance, or 30 ms

1)

For IN = 1 A, divide all limits and increments by 5.

374

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000G1140C1471

Negative Sequence Protection (46)

Reset Time Characteristics as per ANSI

See Also Figures 4-8 and 4-9

ANSI INVERSE

8.8 t Reset = --------------------------------------------- D I2p [s] ( I 2 I 2p )2.0938 1 0.97 t Reset = --------------------------------- D I2p [s] 2 ( I 2 I 2p ) 1 4.32 t Reset = --------------------------------- D I2p 2 ( I 2 I 2p ) 1 5.82 t Reset = --------------------------------- D I2p ( I 2 I 2p )2 1
Where:

ANSI MODERATELY INVERSE ANSI VERY INVERSE

[s]

ANSI EXTREMELY INVERSE

[s]

for 0.05 < (I2/I2p) 0.90

tReset DI2p I2 I2p

trip time in seconds setting value of the time multiplier negative sequence currents setting value of the pickup current

Dropout

IEC and ANSI (without Disk Emulation) ANSI with DiskEmulation

approx. 1.05 I2p Setting Value, which is approx. [0.95 pickup threshold] approx. 0.90 I2p Setting Value 2% of set value or 50 mA1) 5% of reference (calculated) value + 2 % current tolerance, minimum 30 ms 1% 0.06% /10 F 1% function is blocked 1% 1%

Tolerances

Reset Current I2p Time for 0.05 I2/I2p 0.90

Influencing Variables for Pickup Currents

Power supply DC voltage in range 0.8 VPS/ VPS nominal 1.15 Temperature in range 23 F amb 131 F Frequency in range 0.95 f/fN 1.05 Frequency in range f < 55 Hz or f > 65 Hz Harmonic currents Up to 10 % 3rd Harmonic Up to 10 % 5th Harmonic

1)

For IN = 1 A, divide all limits and increments by 5.

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000G1140C1471

375

Technical Data

100 t [s] 30 20 10 TI2p 3.2

100 t [s] 30 20 10

5
3 2 1 0.5 0.3 0.2 0.1 0.05 1 2 3 5 7 10 I2/I2p 20 0.1 0.05 1.6 0.8 0.4 0.2

5
3 2 1 0.5 0.3 0.2 0.2 0.1 0.05 1 2 3 5 0.05 10 20 I2/I2p 0.1 TI2p 3.2 1.6 0.8 0.4

IEC NORMAL INVERSE:

t = -------------------------------------------- T I2p [s] 0.02 (I I ) 1 2 2p

0.14

IEC VERY INVERSE:

[s] t = ----------------------------------- T I2p 1 (I I ) 1 2 2p

13.5

100 t [s]

20 10 5 3 2 1 0.5 0.3 0.2 0.8 0.1 0.05 1 2 3 5 0.05 10 I2/I2p

80 IEC EXTREMELY INVERSE: t = ----------------------------------- T I2p [s] 2 ( I2 I2p ) 1

= Trip time in seconds

TI2p= Setting value of the time multiplier

I2 = Negative Sequence Current I2p = Setting value of the pickup current

TI2p 3.2 1.6

0.4 0.1 0.2 20

Figure 4-7

Trip Time Characteristic Curves Of The Inverse-time Negative Sequence Element 46-TOC, per IEC 602553

376

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000G1140C1471

Negative Sequence Protection (46)

Reset Time
500 t [s] D [s] 200 100 50 30 20 10 5 3 2 1 0.5 0.3 0.2 0.1 0.05 0.05 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 I/Ip
8, 8 t = -------------------------------------------- D [s] - 2, 0938 1 ( I Ip )

Operate Time
500 t [s] 200 100 50 30 20 10 5 3 2 1 0.5 0.3 0.2 0.1 1.0 0.05 1 2 3 5 10 I/Ip INVERSE
8, 9341 t = -------------------------------------------- + 0, 17966 D [s] 2, 0938 1 ( I Ip )

15
10 5 2 1 0.5

D [s]

15
10 5 2 1 0.5

20

RESET INVERSE

500 t [s] t [s] 200 100 50 30 20 10 5 3 2 1 0.5 0.3 0.2 0.1 0.05 0.05 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 I/Ip RESET MODERATELY INVERSE 1.0 1 0.5 2 D [s] 15 10 5

500 200 100 50 30 20 10 5 3 2 1 0.5 0.3 0.2 0.1 0.05 1 2 3 5 10 I/Ip MODERATELY INVERSE 20 2 1 0.5 D [s] 15 10 5

0, 97 t = --------------------------- D [s] - 2 ( I I p ) 1

0, 0103 t = ------------------------------------- + 0, 0228 D [s] 0, 02 1 (I Ip )

Figure 4-8

Reset Time and Trip Time Characteristics Of The Inverse-time Negative Sequence Element, 46-TOC, ANSI

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000G1140C1471

377

Technical Data

Reset Time
500 t [s] t [s] 200 D [s] 100 50 30 20 10 5 3 2 1 0.5 0.3 0.2 0.1 0.05 0.05 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 I/Ip
4,32 t = --------------------------- D - 2 ( I I p ) 1
[s]

Operate Time
500 200

15 10 5 2 1 0.5

100 50 30 20 10 5 3 2 1 0.5 0.3 0.2 0.1 0.05 1.0 1 2 3 5 10 I/Ip

3, 922 t = --------------------------- + 0, 0982 D [s] 2 ( I Ip ) 1

D [s] 15 10 5 2 1 0.5 20

RESET VERY INVERSE

VERY INVERSE

500 t [s] t [s] 200 100 50 30 20 2 10 1 5 3 2 1 0.5 0.3 0.2 0.1 0.05 0.05 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 I/Ip
5, 82 t = --------------------------- D - 2 ( I I p ) 1
[s]

500 D [s] 15 10 50 5 30 20 10 5 0.5 3 2 1 0.5 0.3 0.2 0.1 0.05 1.0 1 2 3 5 0.5 10 1 20 I/Ip
5, 64 t = --------------------------- + 0, 02434 D [s] 2 (I Ip ) 1

200 100

D [s] 15 10 5 2

RESET EXTREMELY INVERSE

EXTREMELY INVERSE

Figure 4-9

Reset Time and Trip Time Characteristics Of The Inverse-time Negative Sequence Element, 46-TOC, ANSI

378

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000G1140C1471

Motor Starting Protection (48)

4.9

Motor Starting Protection (48)

Motor Starting Current Pickup Threshold ISTARTUP IMOTOR START 5.00 A to 80.00 A1) (Increments 0.05 A)1) 3.00 A to 50.00 A1)(Increments 0.05 A)1) 1.0 to 180.0 s (Increments 0.1 s)

Setting Ranges/Increments

Permissible Starting Time TSTARTUP

Permissible Locked Rotor Time TLOCKED-ROTOR 0.5 s to 120.0 s (Increments 0.1 s) or (step is ineffective) Trip Time Characteristic Trip Time Characteristics for Irms > IMOTOR START Where: I STARTUP 2 t = ----------------------- T STARTUP I rms
ISTARTUP Irms IMOTOR START t Motor starting current setting. Actual current flowing. Pickup threshold setting, used to detect motor startup. Trip time in seconds.

Dropout Ratio Tolerance

Irms/IMOTOR START Pickup Threshold Time Delay

approx. 0.95 2 % of set value, or 50 mA1) 5 % or 30 ms

Influencing Values for Pickup Threshold

Power supply DC voltage (VDC) in range 0.8 VPS/ VPS nominal 1.15 1% Temperature in range 23 F amb 131 F Frequency in range 0.95 f/fN 1.05 Frequency in range f < 55 Hz or f > 65 Hz Harmonics - Up to 10% 3rd harmonic - Up to 10% 5th harmonic 0.3% /10 F 1% function is blocked 1% 1%

) for IN= 1 A, divide all limits by 5.

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000G1140C1471

379

Technical Data

4.10

Start Inhibit for Motors (66/68)

Starting Current IStart/IMotor nom Relative to Nominal Motor Current Nominal Motor Current Maximum Permissible Starting Time Temperature Equalization Time Minimum inhibit time IMotor nom TStart Max TEqual 3.0 to 10.0 1.0 A to 6.0 A1) 3 s to 320 s (Increments 0.1) (Increments 0.5 A)1) (Increments 1 s)

Setting Ranges / Resolutions

0.0 min to 320.0 min (Increments 0.1 min)

TMIN. INHIBIT TIME0.2 min to 120.0 min (Increments 0.1 min) 1 to 4 1 to 2 0.2 to 100.0 (Increments 1) (Increments 1) (Increments 0.1)

Maximum Permissible nwarm Number of Warm Starts Difference between Cold and Warm Starts Extension K-Factor for Cooling Simulations of Rotor at Rest Extension K-Factor for Cooling Simulations of Rotor in operation Restarting Limit ncold - nwarm kat STOP

kat RUNNING

0.2 to 100.0

(Increments 0.1)

n COLD 1 RESTART = Rot.max.perm -------------------------n COLD Where: Restart Temperature limit below which restarting is possible

Rot.max.permmaximum permissible motor over-temperature (= 100 % in operating measured value Rot/Rot trip) nCold Influencing Values Power supply DC voltage (VDC) in range 0.8 VPS/ VPS nominal 1.15 1% Temperature in range 23 F amb 131 F Frequency in range 0.95 f/fN 1.05 Frequency in range f < 55 Hz or f > 65 Hz
1)

Number of permissible restarts from cold state

0.3% /10 F 1% function is blocked

For IN = 1 A, divide all limits by 5.

380

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000G1140C1471

Frequency Protection (81 Over-Frequency and Under-Frequency)

4.11

Frequency Protection (81 Over-Frequency and Under-Frequency)

Number of Frequency Elements Pickup Frequency 811 to 814 811 to 814 Time Delay 811 to 814 4: each can be 81/O or 81/U 45.50 Hz to 54.50 Hz (Increments 0.01 Hz) @ fN = 50 Hz 55.50 Hz to 64.50 Hz(Increments 0.01 Hz) @ fN = 60 Hz 0.00 s to 100.00 s (Increments 0.01 s) or (does not expire) 10 V to 150 V (Increments 1 V)

Setting Ranges/ Resolutions

Undervoltage Blocking Vmin (V1 positive sequence voltage)

The set times are pure delay times.

Inherent Operating Times Dropout Frequency Dropout Voltage Tolerances

Pickup Times 81/O or 81/U Dropout Times 81/O or 81/U f = | Pickup Value Dropout Value | Dropout Ratio for Undervoltage Blocking(V / Vmin) Pickup Frequencies 81/O or 81U Undervoltage Blocking Time Delays 81/O or 81/U

approx. 150 ms approx. 150 ms approx. 20 mHz approx. 1.05 10 mHz 3% of set value or 1 V 1% of set value or 10 ms

Influencing Variables

Power supply DC voltage (VDC) in range 0.8 VPS/ VPS nominal 1.15 0.1% Temperature in range 23 F amb 131 F Frequency in range f < 55 Hz or f > 65 Hz Harmonics - Up to 10% 3rd harmonic - Up to 10% 5th harmonic 0.06% /10 F function is blocked 1% 1%

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000G1140C1471

381

Technical Data

4.12

Thermal Overload Protection (49)

K-Factor per IEC 60255-8 Time Constant Thermal Alarm ( ALARM) Current Overload Alarm (I ALARM) Alarm/Trip IAlarm 0.10 to 4.00 (Increments 0.01)

Setting Ranges/ Resolutions

1.0 min to 999.9 min (Increments 0.1 min) 50% to 100% of the trip temperature rise (Increments 1%) 0.50 A to 20.00 A1) (Increments 0.05 A)1) 1.0 to 10.0 relative to the time constant for the machine running(Increments 0.1) 10 s to 15000 s 40 C to 200 C 104 F to 392 F See also Figure 4-10 (Increments 1 s) (Increments 1 C) (Increments 1 F)

Extension K-Factor kt - Factor when Machine Stopped Emergency Time TEMERGENCY

Rated overtemperature (for IN) Trip Characteristic Curve Trip Characteristic Curve for (I/ k IN) 8 Where:

I pre 2 I ------------ 2 ------------ k I N k I N t = ln -----------------------------------------------I ------------ 2 1 k I N

t I Ipre k

[min]

IN

trip time in minutes Temperature rise time constant Load current Pre-load current Setting factor per VDE 0435 Part 3011 and IEC 602558, (see also Figure 4-10) Nominal current of the device

Dropout Relations

/trip /Alarm I/IAlarm

Drops out with Alarm approx. 0.99 approx. 0.97 2 % or 50 mA1); 2 % class per IEC 60 2558 3 % or 1 s for I/(k IN) > 1.25; 3 % class per IEC 60 2558

Tolerances

Referring to k IN Thermal trip and alarm times

Influencing Variables Referring to [k IN]

Power supply DC voltage (VDC) in range 0.8 VPS/ VPS nominal 1.15 1% Temperature in range 23 F amb 131 F requency in range 0.95 f/fN 1.05 Frequency in range f < 55 Hz or f > 65 Hz
1)

0.3% /10 F 1% increased tolerances

For IN = 1 A, divide all limits and increments by 5.

382

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000G1140C1471

Thermal Overload Protection (49)

100 t [min] 50
Parameter: Setting Value of Time Constant

100 t [min] 50

30 20

30 20

[min] 1000
Parameter: Setting Value of Time Constant

10

500

10

5
200 3 2 100

[min] 1000

3 2

500

1 50

1 200

0.5 20 0.3 0.2 10

0.5 100

0.3 0.2

50

0.1 5

0.1 20

0.05 1 2 3 4

1 5

2 6 7 8 I/k 10 12

0.05 1 2

2 3 4

5 5

10 6 7 8 10 12 I/k IN

IN with 90 % pre-load:

without pre-load:

2 I ------------- k I N t = ln ------------------------------- [min] I 2 ------------- 1 k I N

I pre 2 I ------------- ------------- - k I k I N N t = ln --------------------------------------------------- [min] 2 I ------------- 1 k I - N

Figure 4-10 Trip Time Characteristic Curves For The Thermal Overload Protection (49)

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000G1140C1471

383

Technical Data

4.13

Sensitive Ground Fault Detection (64, 50Ns, 67Ns)

Displacement Voltage, Measured Displacement Voltage, Calculated Pickup Delay Time Additional Trip Delay TDelay Pickup TDelay Ve> 1.8 V to 130.0 V (increments 0.1V) 3VO>10.0 V to 225.0 V (increments 0.1V) 0.04 s to 320.00 s (increments 0.01 s) or (does not pickup) 0.10 s to 40000.00 s (increments 0.01 s) or (ineffective)

Displacement Voltage Element Characteristics - For all Types of Ground Faults

Measuring time (Inherent Pickup Delay) approx. 60 ms Dropout Value Measurement Tolerance Ve> (measured): 3V0> (calculated): Operating Time Tolerances
The set times are pure delay times

[0.95 pickup value] or [Pickup value 0.6 V] 3% of setting value, or 0.3 V 3% of setting value, or 3 V 1 % of setting value, or 10 ms Voltage measurement (phase to ground) 10 V to 100 V 10 V to 100 V (increments 1 V) (increments 1 V)

Phase Detection for Ground Faults on an Ungrounded System

Measuring Principle VPHASE MIN (ground fault phase) VPHASE MAX (healthy phases) Measurement Tolerance as per VDE 0435, Part 303

3% of setting value, or 1 V

Ground Fault Pickup for All Types of Ground Faults

Definite Time Characteristic Pickup Current 50-Ns-1 for sensitive transformer for normal 1-A transformer for normal 5-A transformer Delay Time 50-Ns-1

0.001 A to 1.500 A (increments 0.001 A) 0.05 A to 35.00 A (increments 0.01 A) 0.25 A to 175.00 A (increments 0.05 A) 0.00 s to 320.00 s (increments 0.01 s) or (ineffective)

Pickup Current 50-Ns-2 for sensitive transformer for normal 1-A transformer for normal 5-A transformer Delay Time 50-Ns-2

0.001 A to 1.500 A (increments 0.001 A) 0.05 A to 35.00 A (increments 0.01 A) 0.25 A to 175.00 A (increments 0.05 A) 0.00 s to 320.00 s (increments 0.01 s) or (ineffective) 60 ms (non-directional) 80 ms (directional) approx. 0.95 for INs 50 mA 2 % of setting value or 1 mA 1 % of setting value or 20 ms

Inherent Pickup Time Dropout/Pickup (ratio) Measurement Tolerance Operating Time Tolerance

384

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000G1140C1471

Sensitive Ground Fault Detection (64, 50Ns, 67Ns)

User-defined Characteristic

user-specified characteristic (defined by maximum of 20 pairs of current trip time values) 0.001 A to 1.400 A (increments 0.001 A) 0.05 A to 35.00 A (increments 0.01 A) 0.25 A to 175.00 A (increments 0.05 A) 0.10 to 4.00 or (ineffective) approx. 1.10 INsp approx. 1.05 INsp for INsp > 50 mA 2 % of setting value or 1 mA 7% of reference value for 2 I/INsp 20 + 2% current tolerance, or 70 ms 1% 0.06% /10 F 1% function is blocked 1% 1% (increments 0.01)

Pickup Current 51 Ns for sensitive transformer for normal 1-A transformer for normal 5-A transformer Time multiplier 51 Ns

Pickup Threshold Dropout Threshold Measurement Tolerance Operating Time Tolerance in the Linear Range Influencing Variables Power supply direct voltage in range 0.8 VPS/ VPS nominal 1.15 Temperatur in range 23 F amb 131 F Frequency in range 0.95 f/fN 1.05 Frequency in range f < 55 Hz or f > 65 Hz Harmonic currents Up to 10 % 3rd Harmonic Up to 10 % 5th Harmonic

Note: When using the sensitive transformer, the linear range of the measuring input for the sensitive ground fault acquisition is from 0.001 A to 1.6 A. The function is however still preserved for greater currents.
The set times are pure delay times for the definite time characteristic.

Direction Determination for All Types of Ground Faults

Direction Measurement IG and VG measured (ground quantities) 3I0 and 3V0 calculated Measuring Principle Measuring Enable IRelease direct. element (Current component perpendicular (90) to Direction Phasor) for sensitive transformer for normal 1-A transformer for normal 5-A transformer Dropout/Pickup (ratio) Real/reactive power measurement

0.001 A to 1.200 A (increments 0.001A) 0.05 A to 30.00 A (increments 0.01A) 0.25 A to 150.00 A (increments 0.05 A) approx. 0.80

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000G1140C1471

385

Technical Data

Measuring Method Direction Phasor Dropout Delay TReset Delay

cos and sin 45.0 to +45.0 1 s to 60 s (increments 0.1) (increments 1 s)

Angle correction for cable converter in 2 operating points F1/I1 and F2/I2: (for resonant-grounded system) Angle correction F1, F2 Currents I1, I2 for sensitive transformer for normal 1-A transformer for normal 5-A transformer Measurement Tolerance Angle Tolerance 0.0 to 5.0 (increments 0.1)

0.001 A to 1.600 A (increments 0.001A) 0.05 A to 35.00 A (increments 0.01A) 0.25 A to 175.00 A (increments 0.01A) 2 % of setting value or 1 mA 3

Note: Due to the high sensitivity the linear range of the measuring input IN with integrated sensitive input transformer is from 0.001 A to 1.6 A. For currents greater than 1.6 A, correct directionality can no longer be guaranteed.

386

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000G1140C1471

Intermittent Ground Fault Protection

4.14

Intermittent Ground Fault Protection

Pick-up value for IE for 3I0 for IEE IIE> IIE> IIE> TV Tsum Tres 0.25 A to 175.00 A1) (increments 0.05 A)1) 0.25 A to 175.00 A1) (increments 0.05 A)1) 0.050 A to 1.500 A (increments 0.001 A) 0.00 s to 10.00 s 0.00 s to 100.00 s 1 s to 600 s 2 to 10 (increments 0.01 s) (increments 0.01 s) (increments 1 s) (increments 1)

Setting Ranges/ Resolutions

Pick-up prolongation time Earth fault accumulation time Reset time for accumulation

Number of pick-ups for intermittent earth fault Inherent Operating Times Pickup Times Current = 1.25 x Pickup Value Current 2 x Pickup Value

approx. 30 ms approx. 22 ms

Drop-off Time (without prolongation time) approx. 22 ms Tolerances Pickup Value IE> Times TV, Tsum, Tres Influencing Variables 3 % of setting value e.g. 50 mA1) 1 % of setting value or 10 ms

Power supply DC voltage (VDC) in range 0.8 VPS/ VPS nominal 1.15 0.1% Temperature in range 23 F amb 131 F Frequency in range f/fN < 55 Hz or > 65 Hz Frequency in range f < 55 Hz or f > 65 Hz 0.06% /10 F 1% function is blocked

) For IN = 1 A, divide all limits and increments by 5.

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000G1140C1471

387

Technical Data

4.15

Automatic Reclosing System (79M)

Number of Reclosures For Phase Faults-Processing 79 Initiates: Selectable For Ground Faults-Processing 79 Initiates: Selectable 0 to 9 (for both phase and ground) Shots 1 to 4 individually adjustable 50-1, 50-2, 51, 67-1, 67-2, 67-TOC, 46-1, 46-2, 46-TOC, Binary Inputs 50-1, 50-2, 51, 67-1, 67-2, 67-TOC, 50N-1, 50N-2, 51N, 67N-1, 67N-2, 67N-TOC, Sensitive Ground Fault Protection, Binary Inputs Trip of protective elements for which 79 blocking is set. phase fault detected by a protective element. binary input Last trip command after the reclosing cycle is complete (unsuccessful reclosing). Trip command from the breaker failure protection. Opening the circuit breaker without 79 initiation. External CLOSE Command Dead Time 0.01 s to 320.00 s (Increments 0.01 s) (Separate for phase and ground and individual for shots 1 to 4) Extension of Dead Time Blocking duration after manual close Auto reclosing reset time Safety time until 79 is ready Start-signal monitoring time Circuit Breaker supervision time Maximum dead time extension Action time Using binary input with time monitoring 0.50 s to 320.00 s 0.50 s to 320.00 s 0.01 s to 320.00 s 0.01 s to 320.00 s or 0.10 s to 320.00 s 0.50 s to 320.00 s or 0.01 s to 320.00 s or (Increments 0.01 s (Increments 0.01 s) (Increments 0.01 s) (Increments 0.01 s) (Increments 0.01 s) (Increments 0.01 s) (Increments 0.01 s)

Blocking of 79

The following protection functions can be influenced by the automatic reclosing function individually for the cycles 1 to 4 (setting value T=T/ instantaneous T=0/ blocked T=infinite): 50-1, 50-2, 51, 67-1, 67-2, 67-TOC, 50N-1, 50N-2, 51N, 67N-1, 67N-2, 67N-TOC Additional Functions Definitive Trip Circuit breaker monitoring using, breaker auxiliary contacts Synchronous closing (optionally with integrated or external synchrocheck)

388

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000G1140C1471

Fault Location

4.16

Fault Location
Units of Distance Measurement Trigger Secondary , Miles or km of line length 2) Trip command, Pickup of an Element, Dropout of an Element, or External command via binary input 0.001 to 1.243 /km1) (Incr. 0.001 /km) 0.002 to 2.000 /mile1)(Incr. 0.001 /mile) 2.5% line length (without infeed) or 0.005 1), 30 k 90 and Vk / VN 0.1 and Ik/IN 0.1

Reactance Setting (secondary)1) Reactance Setting (secondary) Measurement Tolerance per VDE 0435 part 303 for Sinusoidal Measurement Quantities
1) 2)

For IN = 1 A, multiply all values by 5; the increment is always 0.001. Homogeneous lines are assumed when the fault distance is given in miles or km.

4.17

Breaker Failure Protection (50BF)

Pickup of 50 Element Time Delay BkrClosed I MIN 0.20 A to 5.00 A 1) (Increments 0.05 A)1) TRIP-Timer 0.06 s to 60.00 s or (no trip) (Increments 0.01 s)

Pickup and Time Delay Ranges/ Resolutions Initiating Time

Pickup Times (protection initiates) - For Internal Start - Using Controls - For External Start Reset Time included in time delay included in time delay included in time delay approx. 25 ms 2) BkrClosed I MIN 2% of set value, or 50 mA1) TRIP-Timer 1% or 20 ms

Tolerances Influencing Variables

Pickup Current Time Delay

Power supply DC voltage (VDC) in range 0.8 VPS/ VPS nominal 1.15 1% Temperature in range 23 F amb 131 F Frequency in range 0.95 f/fN 1.05 Frequency in range f < 55 Hz or f > 65 Hz Harmonics - Up to 10% 3rd harmonic - Up to 10% 5th harmonic
1 2

0.06% /10 F 1% function is blocked 1% 1%

) For IN = 1A, divide all limits by 5. ) A further delay for the current may be caused by compensation in the CT secondary circuit.

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000G1140C1471

389

Technical Data

4.18

Synchronism and Voltage Check (25) (7SJ64 only)

Synchrocheck Asynchron/Synchron live-bus / dead line dead-bus / live-line dead-bus and dead-line bypassing Maximum operating voltage Minimum operating voltage Umax Umin 20 V to 140 V (phase-to-phase)(Incr. 1 V) 20 V to 125 V (phase-to-phase)(Incr. 1 V) 1 V to 60 V (phase-to-phase) (Incr. 1 V) 20 V to 140 V (phase-to-phase)(Incr. 1 V) 0.10 kV to 800.00 kV (Incr. 0.01 kV)

Operating Modes Additional Release Conditions

Voltages

U< for dead-line / dead-bus check U> for live-line/ live-bus check Primary transformer rated voltage U2N Tolerances Drop-off to pick-up ratios U-Measurement f-Measurement Measurement Voltage difference Tolerance f-measurement Tolerance (f2>f1; f2<f1)

2 % of pick-up value or 2 V approx. 0.9 (U>) or 1.1 (U<) 0.5 V to 40 V (phase-to-phase) (Incr. 1 V) 1V 0.01 Hz to 2.00 Hz 15 mHz 2 to 80 2 5 for f 1 Hz 10 for f > 1 Hz 0.01 s to 0.60 s 0.01 Hz to 0.04 Hz 0 to 360 0.50 to 2.00 (Incr. 0.01 s) (Incr. 0,01 Hz) (Increments 1) (Incr. 0,01) (Incr. 0.01 s) (Incr. 0,1 s) (Incr. 0,01 s) (Incr. 0.01 Hz) (Increments 1)

measurement (2>1; 2<1) Tolerance Maximum error angle

Circuit-breaker operating time Threshold ASYN SYN Matching Times

Circuit-breaker operating time Threshold synchronous / non-synchronous Vector group matching via angle Diff. voltage transformers U1/U2

Minimum measuring time approx. 80 ms Maximum duration TSYN DURATION 0.01 s to 1200.00 s; of synchronization Supervision time Closing time of CB Tolerance of all timers TSUP VOLTAGE 0.0 s to 60.0 s TCB close 0.00 s to 60.00 s 1 % of set value or 10 ms

Measured Values of the Synchronizing Function

Reference voltage - Range - Tolerance*)

*) for rated frequency

U1 in kV primary, in V secondary or in % VNom 10 % to 120 % VNom 1 % of measured value or 0.5 % of VNom

390

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000G1140C1471

RTD-Boxes for Temperature Detection

Voltage to be synchronized - Range - Tolerance*) Frequency of U1 - Range - Tolerance*) Frequency of U2 - Range - Tolerance*) Voltage difference - Range - Tolerance*) Frequency difference - Range - Tolerance*) Angle difference - Range - Tolerance*)
*) for rated frequency

U2 in kV primary, in V secondary or in % VNom 10 % to 120 % VNom 1 % of measured value or 0.5 % of VNom f1 in Hz fN 5 Hz 20 mHz f1 in Hz fN 5 Hz 20 mHz (U2 U1) in kV primary, in V secondary or in % VNom 10 % to 120 % VNom 1 % of measured value or 0.5 % of VNom (f2 f1) in mHz fN 5 Hz 20 mHz (2 1) in 0 to 180 0.5

4.19

RTD-Boxes for Temperature Detection

Connectable RTD-boxes Number of temperature detectors per RTD-box Type of measurement Mounting identification 1 or 2 max. 6 Pt 100 or Ni 100 or Ni 120 Oil or Ambient or Winding or Bearing or Other

Temperature Detectors

Thresholds for Indications

for each measuring point: Stage 1 50 C to 250 C (in increments of 1 C) 58 F to 482 F (in increments of 1 F) or (no indication) 50 C to 250 C (in increments of 1 C) 58 F to 482 F (in increments of 1 F) or (no indication)

Stage 2

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000G1140C1471

391

Technical Data

4.20

User Defined Functions with CFC

Function Modules and Task Levels:
Task Level Function Modules Description
MW_BEARB PLC1_BEARB PLC_BEARB SFS_BEARB Meter Slow PLC Fast PLC Interlocking processing

Function Modules

ABSVALUE ADD AND BOOL_TO_CO

Magnitude Calculation Addition AND-Gate Boolean to Control (Conversion) Boolean to Double Point (Conversion) Boolean to Internal Single Point Indication (Conversion) Create Double Point Indication Switching Sequence Command information Connection D-Flipflop Status Memory for Restart Double Point Indication to Boolean (Conversion) Division Decode Double Point Indication Dynamic Or Live-zero, non linear Curve Timer (max. 1193 h)

X X

X X X

X X X

X X

BOOL_TO_DI

BOOL_TO_IC

BUILD_DI CMD_CHAIN CMD_INF CONNECT D_FF D_FF_MEMO DI_TO_BOOL

X X X X X X

X X X X X X

X X X X X X

DIV DM_DECODE DYN_OR LIVE_ZERO LONG_TIMER

X X X X X

X X X X

X X X X

X X X X

392

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000G1140C1471

User Defined Functions with CFC

Task Level Function Modules Description

MW_BEARB PLC1_BEARB PLC_BEARB SFS_BEARB Meter Slow PLC Fast PLC Interlocking processing

LOOP

Feedback Loop

X X X X X X

X X X X X X X X X X X X

X X X X X X X X X X X

X X X X X X X X X X

LOWER_SETPOINT Lower limit MUL NAND NEG NOR OR RS_FF SQUARE_ROOT SR_FF SUB TIMER Multiplication NAND-Gate Negator NOR-Gate OR-Gate RS-Flipflop Root Extractor SR-Flipflop Subtraction Timer

UPPER_SETPOINT Upper limit X_OR ZERO_POINT XOR-Gate Zero suppression

Limits

Maximum number of TICKS in the task levels

Run-Time Level 7SJ62 Limits in TICKS 7SJ63 2536 300 130 2173

7SJ64 10000 2000 400 10000

MW_BEARB (Measured value processing) PLC1_BEARB (Slow PLC processing) PLC_BEARB (Fast PLC processing) SFS_BEARB (Interlocking)

2536 255 130 2173

TICKS required by the individual elements

Individual Element Module, basic requirement each input more than 3 inputs for generic modules Connection to an input Connection to an output signal Additional for each configuration sheet Amount of TICKS 5 1 6 7 1

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000G1140C1471

393

Technical Data

Additonal limits for the following 4 CFCblocks

Run-Time Level Maximum Number of Blocks in the Sequence Levels Already Mentioned LONG_TIMER TIMER CMD_CHAIN D_FF_MEMO ---18 9 ------20 ----50

MW_BEARB PLC1_BEARB PLC_BEARB SFS_BEARB

394

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000G1140C1471

Additional Functions

4.21

Additional Functions
Operating Measured Values for Currents in A or kA primary; in A secondary, Ia, Ib, Ic or in % of INom - Range - Tolerance*) IG and 3I0 10% to 200% INom 1% of measure value or 0.5 % of INom in A or kA primary; in A secondary and or in % of INom in A or kA primary; in A secondary, or in % of INom in A or kA primary; in A secondary and or in % of INom in kV primary; in V secondary or in % of VNom 10% to 120% VNom 1% of measured value or 0.5 % of VNom in kV primary; in V secondary or in % of VNom 10% to 120% VNom 1% of measured value or 0.5 % of VNom in kV primary; in V secondary or in % of VNom in kV primary; in V secondary or in % of VNom in kVA (MVA or GVA) primary, and in % SNom 0% to 120% SNom 2% SNom for V/VNom and I/INom = 50% to 120% with SNom = 3 VNom INom in kW (MW or GW) primary, and in % SNom 0% to 120% SNom 3% SNom for V/VNom and I/INom = 50% to 120% and |cos | = 0.707 to 1 with SNom = 3 VNom INom in kVAr (MVAr or GVAr) primary and in % SNom

Operational Measured Values

Positive sequence current I1 Negative sequence current I2

Operating Measured Values for Voltages (phase-ground) Va, Vb, Vc - Range - Tolerance*) Operating Measured Values for Voltages (phase-phase) Va-b, Vb-c, Vc-a, Vsyn - Range - Tolerance*) VGND and V0 Positive sequence voltage V1 Negative sequence voltage V2 Operating Measured Values for Power S, Apparent Power - Range - Tolerance*)

P, Real power (with sign, total and phase-segregated) - Range - Tolerance*)

Q, Reactive power (with sign, total and phase-segregated) *) at f = fN

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000G1140C1471

395

Technical Data

- Range - Tolerance*)

0% to 120% SNom 3% SNom for V/VNom and I/INom = 50% to 120% and |sin | = 0.707 to 1 with SNom = 3 VNom INom total and phase-segregated) -1 to 1 5% for |cos | 0.707

Operating Measured Values for Power Factor cos - Range - Tolerance*) Operating Measured Values for Frequency f - Range - Tolerance*) Thermal Overload Protection - Range - Tolerance*) Motor Restart Blocking - Range - Tolerance*)

in Hz (displayed with primary values) fN 5 Hz 20 mHz / Trip 0% to 400% 5% class accuracy per IEC 60255-8 L/L Trip 0% to 400% 5% class accuracy per IEC 60255-8 Temperature limit RESTART/L aus in % Time until release of reclose blocking Treclose in min

Operating Measured Values for Sensitive Ground Fault Protection - Range - Tolerance*) Operating Measured Values for the Measurement Transducer - Operating Range - Accuracy Range - Tolerance

INs, INsa, INsr (total, active, and reactive current) in A or kA primary and in mA secondary 0 mA to 1600 mA 2% of measure value or 1 mA (7SJ63 only) 0 mA to 24 mA 1 mA to 20 mA 1.5% relative to nominal value of 20 mA

For Standard Usage of the Measurement Transducer for Pressure and Temperature Monitoring: Operating Measured Value Pressure in hPa for Pressure - Operating Range (pre-set) 0 hPa to 1200 hPa Operating Measured Value for Temperature - Operating Range (pre-set) Measured values of the synchronizing function (7SJ64) Measured values of the RTD-Box
*) at f = fN

Temperature in C 0 C to 240 C see Section 4.18 see Section 4.19 (RTD-Boxes)

396

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000G1140C1471

Additional Functions

Long-Term Mean Value

Time Window Frequency of Updates Long-Term Means of Currents Real Power Reactive Power Apparent Power

5, 15, 30 or 60 minutes adjustable Ia dmd, Ib dmd, Ic dmd, I1 dmd in A (kA) Pdmd in W (kW, MW) Qdmd in VAr, (kVAr, MVAr) Sdmd in VA, (kVA, MVA) with date and time Time of day adjustable (in minutes, 0 to 1439 min). Time frame and starting time adjustable (in days, 1 to 365 days, and ). Using binary input Using keypad Using communication Ia, Ib, Ic, I1 (positive sequence) Va-n, Vb-n, Vc-n, V1 (positive sequence) Va-b, Vb-c, Vc-a, Vn /Trip S, P, Q, cos , Frequency IAdmd, IBdmd, ICdmd, I1dmd (positive sequence) Sdmd, Pdmd, Qdmd Imax/Imin > I - balance factor, for I > I - balance limit. Factor and limit are adjustable. Vmax/Vmin > V - balance factor,for V > V balance limit. Factor and limit are adjustable. | ia+ib+ic+[kn in] | > I - sum threshold value, adjustable. kn = CTn ratio / CTphase ratio

Min/Max Report

Report of Measured Values Reset Automatic

Reset

Manual

Min/Max Values for Current Min/Max Values for Voltages Min/Max Values for Thermal Overload Protection Min/Max Values for Power/ Other Min/Max Values for Averages (LOG of Primary Values) Measured Values Supervision Current Asymmetry Voltage Asymmetry

Current Sum

Current Phase Sequence Voltage Phase Sequence Limit Value Monitor

Clockwise (ABC)/ counter-clockwise (ACB) Clockwise (ABC)/ counter-clockwise (ACB) Ia > Limit value IA dmd> Ib > Limit value IB dmd> Ic > Limit value IC dmd> I1 > Limit value I1 dmd> IL < Limit value 37-1 cos < Lower limit value |cos |< P > Limit value |Pdmd|> Q > Limit value |Qdmd|> S > Limit value Sdmd>

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000G1140C1471

397

Technical Data

Pressure < Lower limit value Press< Temperature > Limit value Temp> Trip Log Recording of indication of the last 8 power system faults Recording of indication of the last 3 power system ground faults Resolution for Event Log (Operational Messages) Resolution for Trip Log (Fault Records) Time Deviation (Internal Clock) Buffer Battery 1 ms 1 ms Maximum 0.01% Lithium Battery, 3 V / 1 Ah, type CR 1/2 AA Self-discharging time > 5 years Message Fail Battery if battery charge is low Maximum 8 fault records saved Memory maintained by buffer battery in case of loss of power supply Recording Time Total of 5 s Pre-event and post-event recording and memory time adjustable 1 sample/1.25 ms (16 sam/cyc) 1 sample/1.04 ms (16 sam/cyc) Wp, Wq (real and reactive energy) in kWh (MWh or GWh) and in kVARh (MVARh or GVARh) 28 bit or 0 to 268435455 decimal for IEC 60870-5-103 (VDEW protocol) 31 bit or 0 to 2147483647 decimal for other protocols (other than VDEW) 5% for I > 0.5 INom, V> 0.5 VNom and |cos | 0.707 Up to 9 digits Up to 9 decimal places separated according to 1st and 2nd cycle Up to 4 digits (kA) per pole Up to 7 digits Current exceeds an adjustable current threshold (BkrClosed I MIN) With one or two binary inputs. Phase Rotation Field Check Operating Measured Values Circuit Breaker / Switching Device Test Creation of a Test Measurement Report

Time Stamping

Waveform Capture

Sampling Rate for 50 Hz Sampling Rate for 60 Hz Energy Counter Values for Energy

- Range

- Tolerance*) Statistics (Circuit Breaker) Saved Number of Trips Number of closing commands of the automatic reclosing function Accumulated Interrupted Current Operating Hours Counter Trip Circuit Monitor (74TC) Commissioning Start-up Aids Operating Hours Range Criterion to Count

398

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000G1140C1471

Breaker Control

Clock

Time Synchronization

IRIG-B/DCF77-signal Binary signal Communication

Operating Modes for Time Tracking

# 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Operating Mode Internal IEC 608705103 PROFIBUS FMS IRIG B Time signal DCF77 Time signal SIMEAS Time signal Sync. Box Pulse via binary input Explanations Internal synchronization using RTC (pre-set) External synchronization using SCADA interface (IEC 608705103) External synchronization using PROFIBUS interface External synchronization using IRIG B External synchronization using DCF 77 External synchronization using SIMEAS Sync. Box External synchronization with pulse via binary input

Setting Group Switchover of theFunction Parameters

Number of Available Setting Groups Switchover Performed

4 (parameter group A, B, C and D) Using the keypad DIGSI 4 using the front PC port with protocol via system (SCADA) interface using binary input

4.22

Breaker Control
Number of Controlled Switching Device (e.g. Circuit Breakers) Interlocking Messages (Feedback) Control Commands Operating Command to Switching Device Programmable Logic Controller Local Control Remote Control Depends on the number of binary Devices inputs and outputs available Freely programmable interlocking Feedback messages; closed, open, intermediate position Single command, double command 1, 1 plus 1 common, or 2 contacts PLC logic, graphic input tool Control via menu control, assignment of function keys Using communication interfaces SCADA DIGSI 4 (e.g. via modem)

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000G1140C1471

399

Technical Data

4.23

Dimensions

Housing for Panel Flush Mounting or Cubicle Installation (Size 1/3 x 19)

29.5 (1.16)

172 (6.77) Mounting plate

34 (1.34)

29.5 (1.16)

172 (6.77) Mounting plate

29 30 (1.14) (1.18) 150 (5.91) 145 (5.71)

F R
266 (10.47) 266 (10.47) 244 (9.61) 244 (9.61)

(0.08)

2 (0.08)

D Q B

C A

34 (1.34) Side View (with screwed terminals) Side View (with plug-in terminals)

7SJ64 Rear View 150 (5.91) 145 (5.71)

146 + 2 (5.75 + 0.07)

5 (0.19) or M4 255.8 0.3 (10.07 0.01)

F R

245 + 1 (9.64 +0.03 )

C
6 (0.24)

Dimensions in mm Values in brackets in inches

Q B A

5.4 (0.21) 7.3 (0.28)

105 0.5 (4.13 0.01) 131.5 0.3 (5.17 0.01) Panel Cut-Out 7SJ62 Rear View

13.2 (0.51)

Figure 4-11

Dimensions 7SJ62 or 7SJ64 for panel flush mounting or cubicle installation (size 1/3 x 19)

400

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000G1140C1471

Dimensions

Housing for Panel Flush Mounting or Cubicle Installation (Size 1/2 x 19)

29.5 (1.16)

172 (6.77) Mounting plate

34 (1.34)

29.5 (1.16)

172 (6.77) Mounting plate

29 30 (1.14) (1.18)

225 (8.86) 220 (8.66)

F
266 (10.47) 266 (10.47) 244 (9.61) 244 (9.61)

(0.08)

2 (0.08)

D Q J B
34 (1.34)

C A

Side view (with screwed terminals)

Side view (with plug-in terminals)

7SJ64 Rear view

221 +2 (8.70 +0.08 ) 225 (8.86) 220 (8.66)

255.8 0.3 (10.07 +0.01 )

245 + 1 (9.64 +0.04 )

5 (0.20) or M4

F R K

Dimensions in mm Values in brackets in inches

6 (0.24)

C Q J B A

5.4 (0.21)

180 0.5 (7.09 0.02 ) 206.5 0.3 (8.13 0.01 ) Panel cut-out 7SJ63 Rear view

13.2 (0.52) 7.3 (0.29)

Figure 4-12

Dimensions 7SJ63 or 7SJ64 for panel flush mounting or cubicle installation (size 1/2 x 19)

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000G1140C1471

401

Technical Data

Housing for Panel Flush Mounting or Cubicle Installation (Size 1/1 x 19)
29.5 (1.16) 172 (6.77) Mounting plate 34 (1.34) 29.5 (1.16) 172 (6.77) Mounting plate 29 30 (1.14) (1.18)

266 (10.47)

266 (10.47)

244 (9.61)

244 (9.61)

Dimensions in mm Values in brackets in inches

(0.08)

2 (0.08)

34 (1.34) Side view (with screwed terminals) Side view (with plug-in terminals) 446 +2 (17.56 +0.08)

450 (17.72) 445 (17.52)

255.8 0.3 (10.07 0.01)

6 (0.24) 245 + 1 (9.64 + 0.03)

5 (0.20) or M4

F R P K

5 (0.20) or M4

6 (0.24)

6 (0.24)

5 (0.20) or M4

D Q N J B

C A

5 (0.20) or M4

6 (0.24)

5.4 (0.21)

7SJ64 Rear view 450 (17.72) 445 (17.52)

13.2 (0.52) 7.3 (0.29)

216.1 0.3 (8.51 0.01)

13.2 (0.52) 13.2 (0.52)

425.5 0.3 (16.75 0.01) panel cut -out (view from the device front)

F R L K

C Q M J B A

7SJ63 Rear view

Figure 4-13

Dimensions 7SJ63 or 7SJ64 for panel flush mounting or cubicle installation (size 1/1 x 19)

402

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000G1140C1471

Dimensions

Housing for Panel Surface Mounting (Size 1/3 x 19)

165 (6.50) 144 (5.76)
31 46 45 60

10.5 (0.41)

260 (10.24) 29.5 (1.16)

280 (11.02) 320 (12.60) 344 (13.54)

9 (0.35)

1 16

15 30

25

71 (2.80) Front view

72(2.83) 52 (2.05) (0.98) Side view

266 (10.47)

150 (5.91)

Dimensions in mm Values in brackets in inches

Figure 4-14

Dimensions 7SJ62 or 7SJ63 for panel surface mounting (size 1/3 x 19)

Housing for Panel Surface Mounting (Size 1/2 x 19)

240 (9.45) 219 (8.62)
51 76 75 100

10.5 (0.41)

260 (10.24) 29.5 (1.16)

280 (11.02) 320 (12.60) 344 (13.54)

225 (8.86)

25 50

9 (0.35)

25 (0.98)

26

71 (2.80) Front view

72 (2.83) Side view

52 2.05)

Dimensions in mm Values in brackets in inches Figure 4-15 Dimensions 7SJ63 or 7SJ64 for panel surface mounting (size
1/ 2

x 19)

266 (10.47)

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000G1140C1471

403

Technical Data

Housing for Panel Surface Mounting (Size 1/1)

465 (18.31) 444 (17.48)
101 151 150 200

260 (10.24) 10.5 (0.41) 29.5 (1.16)

280 (11.02) 320 (12.60) 344 (13.54)

450 (17.72)

25 (0.98)

9 (0.35)

51

50 100

71 (2.80)

72 (2.83) Side view

52 2.05)

Front view

Dimensions in mm Values in brackets in inches

Figure 4-16

Dimensions 7SJ63 or 7SJ64 for panel surface mounting (size 1/1 x 19)

404

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000G1140C1471

266 (10.47)

Dimensions

Housing for Mounting with Detached Operator Panel (Size 1/2 x 19)

(1.14) Mounting plate 209.5 (8.25) Mounting plate 34 (1.34) 209.5 (8.25)

(1.18)

29 30

225 (8.86) 220 (8.66)

F R
312.8 (12.31) 312.8 (12.31) 244 (9.61) 266 (10.47) 266 (10.47) 244 (9.61)

D Q J B
34 (1.34)

C A

7SJ64 Rear view

Side view (with screw terminals)

Side view (with plug-in terminals)

225 (8.86) 220 (8.66) 4.5 (0.18)

F
300 0.3 (11.81 0.01)

Dimensions in mm Values in brackets in inches

J B A

6.4 (0.25) 12.5 (0.49) 100 0.3 (3.93 0.11) 200 0.3 (7.87 0.11) Mounting Holes of Mounting Plate 7SJ63 Rear view

Figure 4-17

Dimensions 7SJ63 or 7SJ64 for mounting with detached operator panel (size 1/2 x 19)

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000G1140C1471

405

Technical Data

Housing for Mounting with Detached Operator Panel (Size 1/1 x 19)
Mounting Plate 209.5 ( 8.25) 34 (1.34) Mounting Plate 209.5 (8.25)

(1.14) 29 30

(1.18)

312.8 (12.31)

312.8 (12.31)

244 (9.61)

266 (10.47)

266 (10.47)

244 (9.61)

34 (1.34)

Side View (with Screw Terminals) 450 (17.72) 445 (17.52)

Side View (with Screw Terminals)

4.5 (0.18)

F R P K
300 0.3 (11.81 0.01) 6.4 (0.25)

D Q N J B

C A

7SJ64 Rear View 25 100 0.3 (3.94 0.01) 200 0.3 (7.87 0.01) 300 0.3 (11.81 0.01)

F R L K

400 0.3 (15.75 0.01) Mounting Holes of Mounting Plate

C Q M J B A

Dimensions in mm Values in brackets in inches

Figure 4-18

Dimensions 7SJ63 or 7SJ64 for mounting with detached operator panel (size 1/1 x 19)

7SJ63 Rear View

406

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000G1140C1471

Dimensions

Detached Operator Panel

(1.16) (1.06) 29.5 27 Mounting Plate 68-pin Connection Cable to Device Length 2.2 m (0.09)

225 (8.86) 220 (8.66)

266 (10.47)

2 (0.08)

Side View

246.2 (9.69)

Rear View

221 + 2 (8.70 + 0.08)

5 (0.20) or M4 255.8 0.3 (10.07 0.01) 247.2 + 1 (9.73 + 0.04)

6 (0.24)

4.3 (0.17) 13.2 (0.52) 7.3 (0.29)

180 0.5 (7.07 0.02) 206.5 0.3 (8.13 0.01) Panel Cut-Out

Figure 4-19

Dimensions of a detached operator panel for a 7SJ63 or a 7SJ64 device

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000G1140C1471

407

Technical Data

40 0,2

20 1

Panel cutout or cubicle door cutout

Figure 4-20

Dimensioned drawing for the panel cutout or cubicle door cutout of the D-subminiature connector of the dongle cable for 7SJ63 or 7SJ64 without integrated operator panel n

408

34 1

D-Subminiature Connector of the Dongle Cable (Panel or Cubicle Door Cutout)

Dimensions in mm

4,5 oder M4

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000G1140C1471

Appendix

A
This appendix is primarily a reference for the experienced user. This section provides ordering information for the models of 7SJ62/63/64. General diagrams indicating the terminal connections of the 7SJ62/63/64 models are included. Following the general diagrams are diagrams that show the proper connections of the devices to primary equipment in many typical power system configurations. Tables with all settings and all information available in a 7SJ62/63/64 equipped with all options are provided. Default settings are also given.

A.1 A.2 A.3 A.4 A.5 A.6 A.7 A.8 A.9 A.10 A.11

Ordering Information and Accessories Elementary Diagrams Connection Examples Default Settings Interoperability List Protocol-dependent functions Functions Overview Settings Overview of the masking features of the user defined information Information List Measured Values

410 426 470 494 503 505 506 508 541 545 582

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

409

A Appendix

7SJ62

A.1
A.1.1

Ordering Information and Accessories

Ordering Information 7SJ62 V4.4 (present release .../EE and higher)
6 7

SIPROTEC 4 Multifunction Protection with Controls

Number of Binary Inputs and Outputs 8 Binary Inputs, 8 Binary Outputs, 1 Live Status Contact 11 Binary Inputs, 6 Binary Outputs, 1 Live Status Contact Measuring Inputs (3 x V, 4 x I) Iph = 1 A, Ie = 1 A (min. = 0.05 A); 15th position only with: C, E, G Iph = 1 A, Ie = sensitive (min. = 0.001 A); 15th position only with: B, D, F, H Iph = 5 A, Ie = 5 A (min. = 0.25 A); 15th position only with: C, E, G Iph = 5 A, Ie = sensitive (min. = 0.001 A); 15th position only with: B, D, F, H Iph = 5 A, Ie = 1 A (min. = 0.05 A); 15th position only with: C, E, G Power Supply, Binary Input Pickup Threshold Setting 24 to 48 VDC, Binary Input Threshold 19 VDC 60 to 125 VDC, Binary Input Threshold 19 VDC 110 to 250 VDC, 115/230 VAC, Binary Input Threshold 88 VDC

Order No. 7SJ62

1 2 1 2 5 6 7

9 10 11 12

13 14 15 16

2 4 5 B D E A B C D E 0 1 2 3 4 51) 61) 9

Construction Surface-mounting case for panel, 2 tier terminals top/ bottom Flush-mounting case for panel/ cubicle, plug-in terminals (2/3 pin connector) Flush-mounting case for panel/ cubicle, screw-type terminals (direct connection/ ring lugs) Region-specific Default/ Language Settings and Function Versions Region DE, 50 Hz, IEC, Language German (Language can be changed) Region World, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, Language English (Language can be changed) Region US, 60 Hz, ANSI, Language American English (Language can be changed) Region FR, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, Language French (Language can be changed) Region World, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, Language Spanish (Language can be changed) System interfaces (Port B) No system interface IEC Protocol, RS232 IEC Protocol, RS485 IEC Protocol, Optical 820 nm, ST-Connector Profibus FMS Slave, RS485 Profibus FMS Slave, Optical, Single Ring, ST-Connector) Profibus FMS Slave, Optical, Double Ring, ST-Connector) For further interface options see Additional Information L

see Page 411

11

Additional Information L System Interfaces (Device Rear) Profibus DP Slave, RS485 Profibus DP Slave, 820 nm, Optical Double Ring, STConnector1) Modbus RS485) Modbus, 820 nm, Optical, STConnector2) DNP3.0, RS485 DNP3.0, 820 nm, Optical, STConnector2)

L
0 0 0 0 0 0 A B1) D E2) G H2)

1) 2)

not available if B is in position 9; if the optical interface is required, see the comment on page 422. not available if B is in position 9.

410

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

7SJ62

A.1 Ordering Information and Accessories

SIPROTEC 4 Multifunction Protection with Controls

DIGSI 4/Modem Interface (Device Rear, Port C) No rear DIGSI 4 Interface DIGSI 4/Modem, RS232 DIGSI 4/Modem/RTD-Box 3), RS485 DIGSI 4/Modem/RTD-Box 3), Optical 820 nm, ST-Connector Measuring/Fault recording with Fault recording with Fault recording, with Average values, with Min/Max values Functions Designation Basic Elements: (included in all versions) ANSI no. Description

Order No.

7SJ62

9 10 11 12

13 14 15 16

0 1 2 3 1 3

Control Time-overcurrent protection phase 50-1, 50-2, 51 50N/51N Time-overcurrent protection ground 50N-1, 50N-2, 51N 50N/51N Time-overcurrent protection ground via insensitive IEE-function: 50N-1, 50N-2, 51 N5) 49 Overload protection (with 2 time constants) 46 Negative sequence protection 46-1, 46-2, 46-TOC 50BF Circuit breaker failure protection 74TC Trip circuit monitoring Cold-load pickup (Dynamic setting changes)50c-1, 50c-2, 50Nc-1, 50Nc-2, 51Nc Inrush blocking 86 Lock out 50/51 V/f 27/59 81O/U 67/67N 47 V/f 67/67N 47 27/59 81O/U Under/Overvoltage 59-1,59-2, 27-1, 27-2 Under/Over frequency Directional overcurrent protection for phase and ground Phase Sequence Voltage Directional overcurrent protection for phase and ground Phase Sequence Voltage Under/Overvoltage 59-1, 59-2, 27-1, 27-2 Under/Over frequency F E F C F G

Dir Dir

Dir

IEF

67/67N 47
67/67N 47 67Ns 64 67/67N 47 67Ns 64 67Ns 64

Directional overcurrent protection for phase and ground Phase Sequence Voltage Intermittent earth fault
Directional overcurrent protection for phase and ground Phase Sequence Voltage Directional sensitive ground fault protection4) Displacement voltage Directional overcurrent protection for phase and ground Phase Sequence Voltage Directional sensitive ground fault direction recording4) Displacement voltage Intermittent earth fault Directional sensitive ground fault protection4) Displacement voltage Directional sensitive ground fault protection4) Displacement voltage Undercurrent monitoring Motor starting time supervision Motor start inhibit (66/68) Under/Overvoltage 59-1, 59-2, 27-1, 27-2 Under/Over frequency Directional overcurrent protection for phase and ground Phase Sequence Voltage Directional sensitive ground fault protection4) Displacement voltage Undercurrent monitoring Motor starting time supervision Motor start inhibit (66/68) Under/Overvoltage 59-1, 59-2, 27-1, 27-2 Under/Over frequency F D4)

P C

Dir.earth-f. det. Dir.earth-f. det.

Dir

IEF

Dir

P D4)

Dir.earth-f. det. Dir.earth-f. det. Motor V/f

F B4) H F4 )

67Ns 64 37 48 66/86 27/59 81O/U 67/67N 47 67Ns 64 37 48 66/86 27/59 81O/U

Dir.earth-f. det.

Motor V/f

H H4)

see Page 412

Dir V/f IEF

= Directional overcurrent protection = Voltage-/frequency protection = Intermittent earth fault protection

3)

4 ) 5

RTD-Box 7XV5662*AD10 (see also the comment on page 422 and Section A.1.6, Accessories)

for isolated/compensated networks, only for sensitive ground current transformer if 7th digit = 2, 6. ) only for non-sensitive ground current transformer if 7th digit = 1, 5, 7.

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

411

A Appendix

7SJ62
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

SIPROTEC 4 Multifunction Protection with Controls

Functions continued from page 411 Designation Basic Elements: (included in all versions)

Order No. 7SJ62

ANSI no. Description Control Time-overcurrent protection phase 50-1, 50-2, 51 50N/51N Time-overcurrent protection ground 50N-1, 50N-2, 51N 50N/51N Time-overcurrent protection ground via insensitive IEE-function: 50N-1, 50N-2, 51 N5) 49 Overload protection (with 2 time constants) 46 Negative sequence protection 46-1, 46-2, 46-TOC 50BF Circuit breaker failure protection 74TC Trip circuit monitoring Cold-load pickup (Dynamic setting changes: 50c-1, 50c-2, 50Nc-1, 50Nc-2, 51Nc Inrush blocking 86 Lock out 50/51 IEF V/f 67/67N 47 67Ns 37 64 48 66/86 27/59 81O/U 67/67N 47 37 48 66/86 27/59 81O/U Direction determination for overcurrent, phase and ground Phase sequence Directional sensitive ground fault detection4) Undercurrent monitoring Displacement voltage Motor starting time supervision Motor start inhibit Under-/overvoltage Under-/overfrequency Intermittent earth fault Direction determination for overcurrent, phase and ground Phase sequence Undercurrent monitoring Motor starting time supervision Motor start inhibit Under-/overvoltage Under-/overfrequency R H4)

Dir.earth-f. det.

Motor

Dir

Motor

Dir

V/f

H G

Automatic Reclosing (79), Fault Locator No 79, no Fault Locator With 79 With Fault Locator With 79 and Fault Locator
+Z

0 1 2 3

X
9 9

with ATEX 100 approval (for the protection of explosion-protected motors of the protection type increased safety e)

Dir V/f IEF Notes:

4 5

= Directional overcurrent protection = Voltage-/frequency protection = Intermittent earth fault protection

) for isolated/compensated networks, only for sensitive ground current transformer if 7th digit = 2, 6. ) only for non-sensitive ground current transformer if 7th digit = 1, 5, 7.

412

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

7SJ62
A.1.2

A.1 Ordering Information and Accessories

Ordering Information 7SJ62 V4.2 (releases to date until .../DD)

6 7

SIPROTEC 4 Multifunction Protection with Controls

Number of Binary Inputs and Outputs 8 Binary Inputs, 8 Binary Outputs, 1 Live Status Contact 11 Binary Inputs, 6 Binary Outputs, 1 Live Status Contact Nominal Current IN = 1 A IN = 5 A Power Supply, Binary Input Pickup Threshold Setting 24 to 48 VDC, Binary Input Threshold 19 VDC 60 to 125 VDC, Binary Input Threshold 19 VDC 110 to 250 VDC, 115 VAC, Binary Input Threshold 88 VDC 220 to 250 VDC, 230 VAC, Binary Input Threshold 88 VDC

Order No.

7SJ62
1 2 1 5

9 10 11 12

13 14 15 16

2 4 5 6 B D E A B C D E M N P Q R 0 1 2 3 4 51) 61) 9 0 1 2 3

Construction Surface-mounting case for panel, 2 tier terminals top/ bottom Flush-mounting case for panel/ cubicle, plug-in terminals (2/3 pin connector) Flush-mounting case for panel/ cubicle, screw-type terminals (direct connection/ ring lugs) Region-specific Default/ Language Settings and Function Versions Region DE, 50 Hz, IEC, Language German (Language can be changed) Region World, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, Language English (Language can be changed) Region US, 60 Hz, ANSI, Language American English (Language can be changed) Region FR, 50/60Hz, IEC/ANSI, Language French (Language can be changed) Region World, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, Language Spanish (Language can be changed) Region DE, 50 Hz, IEC, Language German (Language cannot be changed) Region World, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, Language English (Language cannot be changed) Region US, 60 Hz, ANSI, Language American English (Language cannot be changed) Region FR, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, Language French (Language cannot be changed) Region World, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, Language Spanish (Language canot be changed) System interfaces (Rear ports) No system interface IEC Protocol, RS232 IEC Protocol, RS485 IEC Protocol, Optical 820 nm, ST-Connector Profibus FMS Slave, RS485 Profibus FMS Slave, Optical, Single Ring, ST-Connector1)) Profibus FMS Slave, Optical, Double Ring, ST-Connector1) For further interface options see Additional Information L DIGSI 4/Modem Interface (Rear Ports) No rear DIGSI 4 Interface DIGSI 4, RS232 DIGSI 4, RS485 DIGSI 4, Optical 820 nm, ST-Connector See Page 414

11

Additional Information L System Interfaces (Device Rear) Profibus DP Slave, RS485 Profibus DP Slave, 820 nm, Optical Double Ring, STConnector1) Modbus RS485) Modbus, 820 nm, Optical, STConnector2) DNP3.0, RS485 DNP3.0, 820 nm, Optical, STConnector2)
1) not available if B is in position 9; if 2) not available if B is in position 9.

L
0 0 0 0 0 0 A B1) D E2) G H2)

the optical interface is required, see the comment on page 422

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

413

A Appendix

7SJ62
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

SIPROTEC 4 Multifunction Protection with Controls

DIGSI 4/Modem Interface (Device Rear) No rear DIGSI 4 Interface DIGSI 4, RS232 DIGSI 4, RS485 DIGSI 4, Optical 820 nm, ST-Connector Measuring/Fault recording with Fault recording with Fault recording, with Average values, with Min/Max values Functions Basic Elements: Controls

Order No.

7SJ62

0 1 2 3 1 3

(included in all versions)

Time-overcurrent protection phase 50-1, 50-2, 51 and Time-overcurrent protection ground 50N-1, 50N-2, 51N Overload protection (with 2 time constants) 49 Negative sequence protection 46-1, 46-2, 46-TOC Circuit breaker failure protection Trip circuit monitoring Inrush stabilization Dynamic setting changes Lock out 86 Under/Overvoltage 59-1, 27-1, 27-2 Under/Over frequency 81 Directional overcurrent protection for phase and ground 67-1, 67-2, 67-TOC, 67-N-1, 67N-2, 67N-TOC Directional overcurrent protection for phase and ground 67-1, 67-2, 67-TOC, 67-N-1, 67N-2, 67N-TOC Under/Overvoltage 59-1, 27-1, 27-2 Under/Over frequency 81 Directional overcurrent protection for phase and ground 67-1, 67-2, 67-TOC, 67-N-1, 67N-2, 67N-TOC Ground fault direction recording Displacement voltage Sensitive ground fault protection 64, 50Ns, 67Ns-1, 67Ns-2 Ground fault direction recording Displacement voltage Ground fault direction recording Displacement voltage Undercurrent monitoring Motor starting time supervision Motor start inhibit (66/68) Under/Overvoltage 59-1, 27-1, 27-2 Under/Over frequency 81 Directional overcurrent protection for phase and ground 67-1, 67-2, 67-TOC, 67-N-1, 67N-2, 67N-TOC Ground fault direction recording Displacement voltage Undercurrent monitoring Motor starting time supervision Motor start inhibit (66/68) Under/Overvoltage 59-1, 27-1, 27-2 Under/Over frequency 81 Directional overcurrent protection for phase and ground 67-1, 67-2, 67-TOC, 67-N-1, 67N-2, 67N-TOC Undercurrent monitoring Motor starting time supervision Motor start inhibit (66/68) Under/Overvoltage 59-1, 27-1, 27-2 Under/Over frequency 81 F E F C F G

Basic Elements Plus: Basic Elements Plus: Basic Elements Plus:

Basic Elements Plus:

F D*)

Basic Elements Plus:

F B*)

Basic Elements Plus:

H F*)

Basic Elements Plus:

H H*)

Basic Elements Plus:

H G

Automatic Reclosing (79), Fault Locator No 79, no Fault Locator With 79 With Fault Locator With 79 and Fault Locator
*)

0 1 2 3

Device is equipped with sensitive current transformer input in ground circuit

414

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

7SJ63
A.1.3

A.1 Ordering Information and Accessories

Ordering Information 7SJ63 V4.4 (present release .../EE and higher)

SIPROTEC 4 Multifunction Protection with Controls

Order No.

7SJ63
1 2 3 5 6 1 2 5 6 7

9 10 11 12

13 14 15 16

Housing, Number of Binary Inputs and Outputs, Measuring Transducer Inputs Housing 1/2 19, 11 BI, 8 BO, 1 Live Status Contact Housing 1/2 19, 24 BI, 11 BO, 2 High-duty relays (4 Contacts), 1 Live Status Contact Housing 1/2 19, 20 BI, 11 BO, 2 MT, 2 High-duty relays (4 Contacts) 1 Live Status Contact Housing 1/1 19, 37 BI, 14 BO, 4 High-duty relays (8 Contacts), 1 Live Status Contact Housing 1/1 19, 33 BI, 14 BO, 2 MT, 4 High-duty relays (8 Contacts), 1 Live Status Contact Measuring Inputs (3 x U, 4 x I) Iph = 1 A, Ie = 1 A (min. = 0.05 A); 15th position only with: A, C, E, G Iph = 1 A, Ie = sensitive (min. = 0.001 A); 15th position only with: B, D, F, H Iph = 5 A, Ie = 5 A (min. = 0.25 A); 15th position only with: A, C, E, G Iph = 5 A, Ie = sensitive (min. = 0.001 A); 15th position only with: B, D, F, H Iph = 5 A, Ie = 1 A (min. = 0.05 A); 15th position only with: A, C, E, G Power Supply, Binary Input Pickup Threshold Setting 24 to 48 VDC, Binary Input Threshold 19 VDC 60 to 125 VDC, Binary Input Threshold 19 VDC 110 to 250 VDC, 115/230 VAC, Binary Input Threshold 88 VDC Construction Surface-mounting case, plug-in terminals, detached operator panel

2 4 5 A B C D E F G

Installation in a low-voltage compartment Installation in a low-voltage compartment

Surface-mounting case for panel, 2 tier terminals top/bottom Surface-mounting case, screw-type terminals (ring lugs), detached operator panel Flush-mounting case for panel/cubicle, plug-in terminals (2/3 pin connector) Flush-mounting case for panel/cubicle, screw-type terminals (ring lugs) Surface-mounting case, screw-type terminals (ring lugs), without operator panel Installation in a low-voltage compartment Surface-mounting case, plug-in terminals, without operator panel Installation in a low-voltage compartment Region-specific Default/ Language Settings and Function Versions Region DE, 50 Hz, IEC, Language German (Language can be changed) Region World, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, Language English (Language can be changed) Region US, 60 Hz, ANSI, Language American English (Language can be changed) Region FR, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, Language French (Language can be changed) Region World, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, Language Spanish (Language can be changed) System Interface - Rear Port B No system interface IEC-Protocol, RS232 IEC-Protocol, RS485 IEC-Protocol, Optical, 820 nm, ST-Connector Profibus FMS Slave, RS485 Profibus FMS Slave, Optical, Single Ring, ST-Connector1) Profibus FMS Slave, Optical, Double Ring, ST-Connector 1) For further interface options see Additional Information L

A B C D E 0 1 2 3 4 51) 61) 9

siehe Seite 416

11

Additional Information L System Interfaces (Device Rear) Profibus DP Slave, RS485 Profibus DP Slave, 820 nm, Optical Double Ring, STConnector1) Modbus RS485) Modbus, 820 nm, Optical, STConnector2) DNP3.0, RS485 DNP3.0, 820 nm, Optical, STConnector2)

L
0 0 0 0 0 0 A B1) D E2) G H2))

1) not for B at position 9; if 2) not for B at position 9.

the optical interface is required, see the comment on page 422.

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

415

A Appendix

7SJ63
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

IPROTEC 4 Multifunction Protection with Controls

DIGSI 4/Modem Interface (Device rear, Port C) No DIGSI 4 Interface at the back DIGSI 4, Modem, Electrical RS232 DIGSI 4, Modem, RTD-Box3), Electrical RS458 DIGSI 4, Modem, RTD-Box3), Optical 820 nm, ST-Connector Measuring/Fault recording Slave pointer, Average values, Min/Max values, Fault recording Functions Designation Basic Elements Included in all versions ANSI no. Description

Order No.

7SJ63

0 1 2 3 3

Controls 50/51 Time-overcurrent protection phase 50-1, 50-2, 51 50N/51N Time-overcurrent protection ground 50N-1, 50N-2, 51N 50N/51N Time-overcurrent protection ground via insensitive IEE-function: 50N-1, 50N-2, 51 N5) 49 Overload protection (with 2 time constants) 49 46 Negative sequence protection 46-1, 46-2, 46-TOC 50BF Circuit breaker failure protection 74TC Trip circuit monitoring Cold-load pickup (Dynamic setting changes)50c-1, 50c-2, 50Nc-1, 50Nc-2, 51Nc Inrush stabilization 86 Lock out V/f 27/59 81O/U 67/67N 47 V/f 67/67N 47 27/59 81O/U Over/Undervoltage 59-1, 59-2, 27-1, 27-2 Over/Under frequency Directional overcurrent time protection for phase and ground Phase sequence Directional overcurrent time protection for phase and ground Phase sequence Over/Undervoltage 59-1, 59-2, 27-1, 27-2 Over/Under frequency

F A

F E F C F G

Dir Dir

Dir

IEF

67/67N 47
67/67N 67Ns 64

Directional overcurrent time protection for phase and ground Phase sequence Intermittent earth fault
Directional overcurrent time protection for phase and ground Directional sensitive ground fault detection4) Displacement Voltage Directional overcurrent time protection for phase and ground Phase sequence Directional sensitive ground fault detection4) Displacement Voltage Intermittent earth fault Directional sensitive ground fault detection4) Displacement Voltage Directional sensitive ground fault detection4) Displacement Voltage Undercurrent monitoring Motor starting time supervision Motor start inhibit Over/Undervoltage 59-1, 59-2, 27-1, 27-2 Over/Under frequency Directional overcurrent time protection for phase and ground Phase sequence Directional sensitive ground fault detection4) Displacement Voltage Undercurrent monitoring Motor starting time supervision Motor start inhibit Over/Undervoltage 59-1, 59-2, 27-1, 27-2 Over/Under frequency F D4) P D4)

P C

Dir.earth.-f. det. Dir.earth.-f. det.

Dir Dir IEF

67/67N 47 67Ns 64 67Ns 64

Dir.earth.-f. det. Dir.earth.-f. det. Motor V/f

F B4) H F4 )

67Ns 64 37 48 66/86 27/59 81O/U 67/67N 47 67Ns 64 37 48 66/86 27/59 81O/U

Dir.earth.-f. det.

Motor

V/f

H H4)

Motor

see page 417

Dir V/f IEF

= = =

Directional overcurrent protection Voltage-/frequency protection Intermittent earth fault protection

4)

) RTD-Box 7XV5662*AD10 (see also comment on page 422 and Section A.1.6 Accessories). for isolated/compensated networks, only for sensitive ground current transformer if 7th digit = 2, 6. 5 ) only for non-sensitive ground current transformer if 7th digit = 1, 5, 7.

416

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

7SJ63

A.1 Ordering Information and Accessories

SIPROTEC 4 Multifunction Protection with Controls

Functions continued from page 416 Designation Basic Elements Included in all versions

Order No. 7SJ63

9 10 11 12

13 14 15 16

ANSI no. Description Controls 50/51 Time-overcurrent protection phase 50-1, 50-2, 51 50N/51N Time-overcurrent protection ground 50N-1, 50N-2, 51N 50N/51N Time-overcurrent protection ground via insensitive IEE-function: 50N-1, 50N-2, 51 N5) 49 Overload protection (with 2 time constants) 49 46 Negative sequence protection 46-1, 46-2, 46-TOC 50BF Circuit breaker failure protection 74TC Trip circuit monitoring Cold-load pickup (Dynamic setting changes): 50c-1, 50c-2, 50Nc-1, 50Nc-2, 51Nc Inrush stabilization 86 Lock out

Dir.earth-f. det. Motor

Dir

67/67N 67Ns 64 48 66/86 27/59 81O/U

Directional overcurrent time protection for phase and ground Directional sensitive ground fault detection4) Displacement Voltage Motor starting time supervision Motor start inhibit Over/Undervoltage 59-1, 59-2, 27-1, 27-2 Over/Under frequency Intermittent earth fault No 79, no Fault Locator With 79 Fault Locator 1) With 79 and Fault Locator 1)

R H4)

Automatic Reclosing (79), Fault Locator 0 1 2 3

+Z X

with ATEX 100 approval (for the protection of explosion-protected motors of the protection type increased safety e)

9 9

Dir V/f IEF Notes:

4 5

= = =

Directional overcurrent protection Voltage-/frequency protection Intermittent earth fault protection

) for isolated/compensated networks, only for sensitive ground current transformer if the 7th digit = 2, 6. ) only for non-sensitive ground current transformer if the 7th digit = 1, 5, 7.

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

417

A Appendix

7SJ63

A.1.4

Ordering Information 7SJ63 V4.2 (releases to date until .../DD)

SIPROTEC 4 Multifunction Protection with Controls

Order No.

7SJ63
1 2 3 5 6 1 5

9 10 11 12

13 14 15 16

Housing, Number of Binary Inputs and Outputs, Measuring Transducer Inputs Housing 1/2 19, 11 BI, 8 BO, 1 Live Status Contact Housing 1/2 19, 24 BI, 11 BO, 2 High-duty relays (4 Contacts), 1 Live Status Contact Housing 1/2 19, 20 BI, 11 BO, 2 MT, 2 High-duty relays (4 Contacts) 1 Live Status Contact Housing 1/1 19, 37 BI, 14 BO, 4 High-duty relays (8 Contacts), 1 Live Status Contact Housing 1/1 19, 33 BI, 14 BO, 2 MT, 4 High-duty relays (8 Contacts), 1 Live Status Contact Nominal Current IN = 1 A IN = 5 A Power Supply, Binary Input Pickup Threshold Setting 24 to 48 VDC, Binary Input Threshold 19 VDC 60 to 125 VDC, Binary Input Threshold 19 VDC 110 to 250 VDC, 115 VAC, Binary Input Threshold 88 VDC Construction Surface-mounting case, plug-in terminals, detached operator panel

2 4 5 A B C D E A B C D E M N P Q R 0 1 2 3 4 51) 61) 9

Installation in a low-voltage compartment Installation in a low-voltage compartment

Surface-mounting case for panel, 2 tier terminals top/bottom Surface-mounting case, screw-type terminals (ring lugs), detached operator panel Flush-mounting case for panel/cubicle, plug-in terminals (2/3 pin connector) Flush-mounting case for panel/cubicle, screw-type terminals (ring lugs) Region-Specific Default/Language Settings and Function Versions Region DE, 50 Hz, IEC, Language German (Language can be changed) Region World, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, Language English (Language can be changed) Region US, 60 Hz, ANSI, Language Americal English (Language can be changed) Region FR, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, Language French (Language can be changed) Region World, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, Language Spanish (Language can be changed Region DE, 50 Hz, IEC, Language German (Language cannot be changed) Region World, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, Language English (Language cannot be changed) Region US, 60 Hz, ANSI, Language Americal English (Language cannot be changed) Region FR, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, Language French (Language cannot be changed) Region World, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, Language Spanish (Language cannot be changed) System Interface - Rear Ports No system interface IEC-Protocol, RS232 IEC-Protocol, RS485 IEC-Protocol, Optical, 820 nm, ST-Connector Profibus FMS Slave, RS485 Profibus FMS Slave, Optical, Single Ring, ST-Connector1) Profibus FMS Slave, Optical, Double Ring, ST-Connector 1) For further interface options see Additional Information L

See page 419

11

Additional Information L System Interfaces (device rear) Profibus DP Slave, RS485 Profibus DP Slave, 820 nm, Optical Double Ring, STConnector1) Modbus RS485) Modbus, 820 nm, Optical, STConnector2) DNP3.0, RS485 DNP3.0, 820 nm, Optical, STConnector2)

L
0 0 0 0 0 0 A B1) D E2) G H2)

1) not for B at position 9; if the optical interface is required, 2) cannot be delivered in connection with 9th digit B.

see the comment on page 422

418

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

7SJ63

A.1 Ordering Information and Accessories

6 7

SIPROTEC 4 Multifunction Protection with Controls

DIGSI 4/Modem Interface (Device rear) No DIGSI 4 Interface at the back DIGSI 4, Electrical RS232 DIGSI 4, Electrical RS458 DIGSI 4, Optical 820 nm, ST-Connector Measuring/Fault recording Slave pointer, Average values, Min/Max values, Fault recording Functions Designation Basic Elements Included in all versions ANSI no. Description

Order No.

7SJ63

8 9 10 11 12

13 14 15 16

0 1 2 3 3

50/51 50N/51N 49 46 50BF 74 86 37 47 V/f Dir Dir V/f 67/67N 67/67N

Controls Time-overcurrent protection phase 50-1, 50-2, 51 and Time-overcurrent protection ground 50N-1, 50N-2, 51N, Overload protection (with 2 time constants), Negative sequence protection 46-1, 46-2, 46-TOC, Circuit breaker failure protection, Trip circuit monitoring Inrush stabilization Cold-load pickup (Dynamic setting changes) 50c-1, 50c-2, 50Nc-1, 50Nc-2, 51Nc Lockout Undercurrent monitoring Phase Sequence Voltage Over/Undervoltage 59-1, 27-1, 27-2 Over/Under frequency 81 Directional overcurrent time protection for phase and ground 67-1,67-2,67-TOC, 67N-1, 67N-2, 67N-TOC Directional overcurrent time protection for phase and ground 67-1,67-2,67-TOC, 67N-1, 67N-2, 67N-TOC Over/Under frequency 81 Over/Undervoltage 59-1, 27-1, 27-2 Directional overcurrent time protection for phase and ground 67-1,67-2,67-TOC, 67N-1, 67N-2, 67N-TOC Displacement Voltage Directional sensitive ground fault protection 64, 50Ns, 67Ns-1, 67Ns-2 Directional sensitive ground fault protection 64, 50Ns, 67Ns-1, 67Ns-2 Displacement Voltage Directional sensitive ground fault protection 64, 50Ns, 67Ns-1, 67Ns-2 Displacement Voltage Motor starting time supervision Motor start inhibit Over/Undervoltage 59-1, 59-2, 27-1, 27-2 Over/Under frequency Directional overcurrent time protection for phase and ground 67-1,67-2,67-TOC, 67N-1, 67N-2, 67N-TOC Displacement Voltage Motor starting time supervision Motor start inhibit Over/Undervoltage 59-1, 59-2, 27-1, 27-2 Over/Under frequency Directional sensitive ground fault protection 64, 50Ns, 67Ns-1, 67Ns-2 Directional overcurrent time protection for phase and ground 67-1,67-2,67-TOC, 67N-1, 67N-2, 67N-TOC Motor starting time supervision Motor start inhibit Over/Undervoltage 59-1, 59-2, 27-1, 27-2 Over/Under frequency Motor starting time supervision Motor start inhibit No 79, no Fault Locator With 79 Fault Locator With 79 and Fault Locator

F A

F E F C F G

Dir.earth-f. det.

Dir

67/67N 64 67Ns 67Ns 64

F D*)

Dir.earth-f. det. Dir.earth-f. det. Motor V/f

F B*) H F*)

67Ns 64 48 66/86 27/59 81O/U 67/67N 64 48 66/86 27/59 81O/U 67Ns

Dir.earth-f. det.

Motor

Dir

V/f

H H*)

Motor

Dir

V/f

67/67N 48 66/86 27/59 81O/U

H G

Motor

48 66/86

H A

Automatic Reclosing (79), Fault Locator 0 1 2 3

*)

Device is equipped with sensitive current transformer input in ground circuit.

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

419

A Appendix

7SJ64

A.1.5

Ordering Information 7SJ64 V4.4

SIPROTEC 4 Multifunction Protection with Controls Order No.

Housing, Number of Binary Inputs and Outputs Housing 1/3 19, 7 BI, 5 BO, 1 Live Status Contact; 9th position only with: B, D, E Housing 1/2 19, 15 BI, 13 BO, 1 Lifekontakt Housing 1/2 19, 20 BI, 8 BO, 2 High-duty relays (4 Contacts), 1 Live Status Contact Housing 1/1 19, 33 BI, 11BO, 4 High-duty relays (8 Contacts), 1 Live Status Contact Measuring Inputs (4 x U, 4 x I) Iph = 1 A, Ie = 1 A (min. = 0.05 A); 15th position only with: A, C, E, G Iph = 1 A, Ie = sensitive (min. = 0,001 A); 15th position only with: B, D, F, H Iph = 5 A, Ie = 5 A (min. = 0,25 A); 15th position only with: A, C, E, G Iph = 5 A, Ie = sensitive (min. = 0,001 A); 15th position only with: B, D, F, H Iph = 5 A, Ie = 1 A (min. = 0,05 A); 15th position only with: A, C, E, G Power Supply, Binary Input Pickup Threshold Setting 24 to 48 VDC, Binary Input Threshold 19 V DC 60 to 125 VDC, Binary Input Threshold 19 V DC 110 to 250 VDC, 115 VAC, Binary Input Threshold 88 V DC Construction Surface-mounting case, plug-in terminals, detached operator panel

7SJ64

9 10 11 12

13 14 15 16

0 1 2 5 1 2 5 6 7 2 4 5 A B C D E F

Installation in a low-voltage compartment Installation in a low-voltage compartment

Surface-mounting case for panel, 2 tier terminals top/bottom Surface-mounting case, screw-type terminals (ring lugs), detached operator panel Flush-mounting case for panel/cubicle, plug-in terminals (2/3 pin connector) Flush-mounting case for panel/cubicle, screw-type terminals (ring lugs) Surface-mounting case, screw-type terminals (ring lugs), without operator panel Installation in a low-voltage compartment

Surface-mounting case, plug-in terminals, without operator panel Installation in a low-voltage compartment

Region-specific Default/ Language Settings and Function Versions Region DE, 50 Hz, IEC, Language German (Language can be changed) Region World, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, Language English (Language can be changed) Region US, 60 Hz, ANSI, Language American English (Language can be changed) Region FR, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, Language French (Language can be changed) Region World, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, Language Spanish (Language can be changed) System Interface - Rear Port B No system interface IEC-Protocol, RS232 IEC-Protocol, RS485 IEC-Protocol, Optical, 820 nm, ST-Connector Profibus FMS Slave, RS485 Profibus FMS Slave, Optical, Single Ring, ST-Connector 1) Profibus FMS Slave, Optical, Double Ring, ST-Connector 1) For further interface options see Additional Information L

A B C D E 0 1 2 3 4 51) 61) 9

see Page 421 bis 422

11

+
Additional Information L Profibus DP Slave, RS485 Profibus DP Slave, 820 nm, Optical Double Ring, STConnector1) Modbus RS485) Modbus, 820 nm, Optical, STConnector2) DNP3.0, RS485 DNP3.0, 820 nm, Optical, STConnector2)

L 0
A B1) D E2) G H2)

1) 2)

cannot be delivered in connection with 9th digit B; if the optical interface is required, see the comment on page 422 cannot be delivered in connection with 9th digit B

420

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

7SJ64

A.1 Ordering Information and Accessories

SIPROTEC 4 Multifunction Protection with Controls Order No.

DIGSI 4/Modem Interface (Port C) DIGSI 4/Modem, electrical RS232 DIGSI 4/Modem, RTD-Box3), electrical RS485 For further interface options see Additional Information M

7SJ64

9 10 11 12

13 14 15 16

1 2 9

+
Additional Information M (Port C and Port D) Port C: not installed Port C: DIGSI 4/Modem, electrical RS232 Port C: DIGSI 4/Modem, RTD-Box3), electrical RS485 Port D: RTD-Box3), Optical 820 nm, STConnector Port D: RTD-Box3), electrical RS485 Measuring/Fault recording Slave pointer, Average values, Min/Max values, Fault recording Functions Designation Basic Elements: (included in all versions) ANSI no. Description Control Time-overcurrent protection phase 50-1, 50-2, 51 50N/51N Time-overcurrent protection ground 50N-1, 50N-2, 51N 50N/51N Time-overcurrent protection ground via insensitive IEE-function: 50N-1, 50N-2, 51 N5) 49 Overload protection (with 2 time constants) 46 Negative sequence protection 46-1, 46-2, 46-TOC 50BF Circuit breaker failure protection 74TC Trip circuit monitoring Cold-load pickup (Dynamic setting changes: 50c-1, 50c-2, 50Nc-1, 50Nc-2, 51Nc Inrush blocking 86 Lock out 50/51 V/f Dir Dir V/f 27/59 81O/U 67/67N 47 67/67N 47 27/59 81O/U Under/Overvoltage 59-1,59-2, 27-1, 27-2 Under/Over frequency Directional overcurrent protection for phase and ground Phase Sequence Voltage Directional overcurrent protection for phase and ground Phase Sequence Voltage Under/Overvoltage 59-1, 59-2, 27-1, 27-2 Under/Over frequency

M
0 1 2 A F 3

F A

F E F C F G

Dir

IEF

67/67N 47
67/67N 47 67Ns 64

Directional overcurrent protection for phase and ground Phase Sequence Voltage Intermittent earth fault
Directional overcurrent protection for phase and ground Phase Sequence Voltage Directional sensitive ground fault protection4) Displacement voltage Directional overcurrent protection for phase and ground Phase Sequence Voltage Directional sensitive ground fault direction recording4) Displacement voltage Intermittent earth fault Directional sensitive ground fault protection4) Displacement voltage Directional sensitive ground fault protection4) Displacement voltage Undercurrent monitoring Motor starting time supervision Motor start inhibit Under/Overvoltage 59-1, 59-2, 27-1, 27-2 Under/Over frequency F D4)

P C

Dir.earth-f. det. Dir.earth-f. det.

Dir

Dir

IEF

67/67N 47 67Ns 64 67Ns 64

P D4)

Dir.earth-f. det. Dir.earth-f. det. Motor V/f

F B 4) H F4 )

67Ns 64 37 48 66/86 27/59 81O/U

see page 422 Dir V/f IEF

3 ) 4) 5

= = =

Directional overcurrent protection Voltage-/frequency protection Intermittent earth fault protection

RTD-Box 7XV5662*AD10 (see also comment on page 422 and Section A.1.6 Accessories). for isolated/compensated networks, only for sensitive ground current transformer if 7th digit = 2, 6. ) only for non-sensitive ground current transformer if 7th digit = 1, 5, 7.

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

421

A Appendix

7SJ64
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

SIPROTEC 4 Multifunction Protection with Controls Order No.

Functions continued from page 421 Designation Basic Elements: (included in all versions)

7SJ64

ANSI no.Description Control 50/51Time-overcurrent protection phase 50-1, 50-2, 51 50N/51NTime-overcurrent protection ground 50N-1, 50N-2, 51N 50N/51NTime-overcurrent5protection ground via insensitive IEE-function: 50N-1, 50N-2, 51N )

49 46 50BF 74TC

86 Dir.earth-f. det. Dir Motor V/f 67/67N 47 67Ns 64 37 48 66/86 27/59 81O/U V/f 67/67N 47 67Ns 37 64 48 66/86 27/59 81O/U

Overload protection (with 2 time constants) Negative sequence protection 46-1, 46-2, 46-TOC Circuit breaker failure protection Trip circuit monitoring Cold-load pickup (Dynamic setting changes: 50c-1, 50c-2, 50Nc-1, 50Nc-2, 51Nc Inrush blocking Lock out Directional overcurrent protection for phase and ground Phase Sequence Voltage Directional sensitive ground fault protection4) Displacement voltage Undercurrent monitoring Motor starting time supervision Motor start inhibit (66/68) Under/Overvoltage 59-1, 59-2, 27-1, 27-2 Under/Over frequency Direction determination for overcurrent, phase and ground Phase sequence Directional sensitive ground fault detection4) Undercurrent monitoring Displacement voltage Motor starting time supervision Motor start inhibit Under-/overvoltage Under-/overfrequency Intermittent earth fault H H4)

Dir.earth-f. det.

Motor

Dir

IEF

R H4)

Automatic Reclosing (79), Fault Locator, Synchronization Without With 79 With Fault Locator With 79 and Fault Locator With Synchronization With Synchronization, 79 and Fault Locator

0 1 2 3 4 7

Notes:
4 5)

) for isolated/compensated networks, only for sensitive ground current transformer if 7th digit = 2, 6. only for non-sensitive ground current transformer if 7th digit = 1, 5, 7.

Comment (applies for all device versions 7SJ62/63/64)

1)

if the optical interface is required you must order the following: 11th digit = 4 (RS485) and in addition: for single ring: for double ring: SIEMENS OLM SIEMENS OLM 6GK15023AB10 6GK15024AB10

The converter requires an operating voltage of 24 V DC. If the available operating voltage is > 24 V DC the additional power supply 7XV58100BA00 is required. 3) if you want to run the RTD-Box at an optical interface, you need also the RS485FOconverter 7XV56500*A00 (see Accessories at A.1.6).

422

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

A.1 Ordering Information and Accessories

A.1.6
Interface Modules

Accessories
Exchange interface modules
Name RS232 RS485 Optical 820 nm Profibus FMS RS485 Profibus FMS double ring Profibus FMS single ring Profibus DP RS485 Profibus DP double ring Modbus RS485 Modbus 820 nm DNP 3.0 RS485 DNP 3.0 820 nm Order No. C53207A351D6411 C53207A351D6421 C53207A351D6431 C53207A351D6031 C53207A351D6061 C53207A351D6091 C53207A351D6111 C53207A351D6131 C53207A351D6211 C53207A351D6231 C53207A351D6311 C53207A351D6331

RTD-Box

For up to 6 temperature measuring points (at most 2 devices can be connected to 7SJ62/63/64)
Name RTD-Box, UN = 24 to 60 V AC/DC RTD-Box, UN = 90 to 240 V AC/DC Order No. 7XV56622AD100000 7XV56625AD100000

RS485/Fibre Optic Converter

RS485/Fibre Optic Converter 820 nm; FCConnector 820 nm; STConnector

Order No. 7XV56500AA00 7XV56500BA00

Terminal Block Covering Caps

Covering cap for terminal block type 18-terminal voltage, 12-terminal current block 12-terminal voltage, 8-terminal current block

Order No. C73334-A1-C31-1 C73334-A1-C32-1

Short Circuit Links Short circuit links for terminal type Voltage terminal, 18-terminal, or 12-terminal Current terminal,12-terminal, or 8-terminal Order No. C73334-A1-C34-1 C73334-A1-C33-1

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

423

A Appendix

Female Plugs Connector Type 2-pin 3-pin Mounting Rail for 19"-Racks Order No. C73334-A1-C35-1 C73334-A1-C36-1

Name Angle Strip (Mounting Rail)

Order No. C73165-A63-C200-3

Battery Lithium-Battery 3 V/1 Ah, Type CR 1/2 AA VARTA Interface Cable Order No 6127 101 501

An interface cable is necessary for communication between the SIPROTEC device and a PC. Requirements for the computer are Windows 95 or Windows NT4 and the operating software DIGSI 4. Interface cable between PC or SIPROTEC device Cable with 9-pin male/female connections Order No. 7XV5100-4

Operating Software DIGSI 4

Software for setting and operating SIPROTEC 4 devices Operating Software DIGSI 4 DIGSI 4, basic version with license for 10 computers DIGSI 4, complete version with all option packages Order No. 7XS5400-0AA00 7XS5402-0AA0

Graphical Analysis Program SIGRA

Software for graphical visualization, analysis, and evaluation of fault data. Option package of the complete version of DIGSI 4 Graphical analysis program SIGRA Full version with license for 10 PCs Order No. 7XS5410-0AA0

Display Editor

Software for creating basic and power system control pictures. Option package of the complete version of DIGSI 4 Display Editor 4 Full version with license for 10 PCs Order No. 7XS5420-0AA0

424

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

A.1 Ordering Information and Accessories

Graphic Tools

Graphical Software to aid in the setting of characteristic curves and provide zone diagrams for overcurrent and distance protective devices. Option package of the complete version of DIGSI 4. Graphic Tools 4 Full version with license for 10 PCs Order No. 7XS5430-0AA0

DIGSI REMOTE 4

Software for remotely operating protective devices via a modem (and possibly a star connector) using DIGSI 4. (Option package of the complete version of DIGSI 4. DIGSI REMOTE 4 Full version with license for 10 PCs Order No. 7XS5440-2AA0

SIMATIC CFC 4

Graphical software for configuration of control interlocking conditions or creating additional logic functions in SIPROTEC 4 devices. Option package for the complete version of DIGSI 4. SIMATIC CFC 4 Full version with license for 10 PCs Order No. 7XS5450-0AA0

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

425

A Appendix

7SJ62

A.2
A.2.1
A.2.1.1

Elementary Diagrams
Elementary Diagrams for 7SJ62
Housing for panel flush mounting or cubicle installation

7SJ621D/E Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 Q8 R14 R16 R15 R17 R18 F14 F15 F16 F17 F18 R9 R10 R8 R7 Rear Service Port R11 R12 R13 Front PC Port BI6 BI7 Time Synchronization C Ia Ib Ic I4 Va Vb Vc/VG BI1 BI2 Live Status Contact Power Supply Rear SCADA Port
(~)

BO1 BO2 BO3 BO4 BO5 BO6 BO7 BO8

F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 F11 F12 F13 R1 R2 R3 R4 R6 R5 F3 F4 F5 + F1 F2

Jumper: 12 NO 23 NC
BO1 BO2 F6 F7 F8 F9

beginning with release .../EE

BI3
BI4 BI5 BI8

Ground at Back Wall of Housing

Figure A-1 Connection Diagram For 7SJ621D/E (Panel Flush Mounted or Cubicle Mounted)

426

Assignment of Pins of Interfaces, refer to Table 3-35 and 3-36 in Subsection 3.2.1
Interference suppression capacitors at the relay contacts, Ceramic, 4.7 nF, 250 V

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

7SJ62
7SJ622D/E

A.2 Elementary Diagrams

Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 Q8 R14 R16 R15 R17 R18 F14 F15 F16 F17 F18 R9 R10 R11 R12 R8 R2 R6 R7 R13

Ia Ib Ic I4 Va Vb

BO1 BO2 BO3 BO4 BO5 BO7

F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 F11 F12 F13 R1 R3 R4 R5

Jumper: 12 NO 23 NC
BO1 BO2 F6 F7 F8 F9

beginning with release .../EE

Vc/VG BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6 BI7 BI8 BI9 BI10 BI11 Rear Service Port Time Synchronization Front PC Port Power Supply Rear SCADA Port
(~)

Live Status Contact +

F3 F4 F5 F1 F2
Assignment of Pins of Interfaces, refer to Table 3-35 and 3-36 in Subsection 3.2.1
Interference suppression capacitors at the relay contacts, Ceramic, 4.7 nF, 250 V

Ground at Back Wall of Housing

Figure A-2 Connection Diagram For 7SJ622D/E (Panel Flush Mounted or Cubicle Mounted)

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

427

A Appendix

7SJ62

A.2.1.2

Panel Surface Mounting

7SJ621B

15 30 14 29 13 28 12 27 45 60 44 43 59 58 42 57 41 56 40 55 39 54

Ia Ib Ic I4 Va Vb Vc/VG BI1 BI2

BO1 BO2 BO3 BO4 BO5 BO6 BO7 BO8

26 25 9 24 35 50 34 49 33 48 32 31 46 47 52 36 51
(~)

Jumper: 12 NO 23 NC
BO1 BO2 F6 F7 F8 F9

beginning with release .../EE

Live Status Contact BI3 BI4 BI5 BI8 Power Supply +

10 L+ (V+) 11 L (V)

38 53 37

BI6 BI7 Front PC Port

Assignment of Pins of Interface, refer to Table 3-35 in Subsection 3.2.1

Ground at Side Wall of Housing

Interference suppression capacitors at the relay contacts, Ceramic, 4.7 nF, 250 V

Figure A-3 Connection Diagram For 7SJ621B (Panel Surface Mounted)

The connections for additional serial interfaces are taken from Figures A-5 or A-6.

428

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

7SJ62
7SJ622B

A.2 Elementary Diagrams

15 30 14 29 13 28 12 27 45 60 44 43 59 58 42 57 41 56 40 55 39 54 38 53 37 52 36

Ia Ib Ic I4 Va Vb

BO1 BO2 BO3 BO4 BO5 BO7

26 25 9 24 34 49 33 48 32 47 31 46

Jumper: 12 NO 23 NC
BO1 BO2 F6 F7 F8 F9

beginning with release .../EE

Vc/VG BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6 BI7 BI8 BI9 BI10 BI11 Front PC Port Power Supply
(~)

Live Status Contact +

51 35 50 10 L+ (V+) 11 L (V)

Assignment of Pins of Interface, refer to Table 3-35 in Subsection 3.2.1

Ground at Side Wall of Housing

Interference suppression capacitors at the relay contacts, Ceramic, 4.7 nF, 250 V

Figure A-4 Connection Diagram For 7SJ622B (Panel Surface Mounted)

The connections for additional serial interfaces are taken from Figures A-5 or A-6.

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

429

A Appendix

7SJ62

7SJ62B (up to development state ... /CC)

Channel B
Profibus

Rear SCADA Port

Optical or Electrical

4 5 6 7 8

RS232 RS485 CTS B RTS GND GND TxD A RxD

Channel C RS232 19 CTS 20 RTS 21 GND 22 TxD 23 RxD RS485 B GND A

Rear Service Port

Optical or Electrical

Time Synchronization

17 2 18 3 1

IN 12 V COMMON IN 5 V IN 24 V Shield

Figure A-5 Connection Diagram For 7SJ62B up to release ... /CC (Panel Surface Mounted)

430

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

7SJ62
7SJ621/2B (beginning with release .../DD)

A.2 Elementary Diagrams

Rear SCADA Port

Optical or Electrical

Channel B
elektrical RS232/RS485

Assignment of Pins of Interface, refer to Table 3-35 in Subsection 3.2.1

Rear Service Port

Optical or Electrical

Channel C
elektrical RS232/RS485

Time Synchronization

17 2 18 3 1

IN 12 V COMMON IN 5 V IN 24 V Shield

Figure A-6

Connection Diagram For 7SJ621/2B beginning with release .. /DD (Panel Surface Mounted)

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

431

A Appendix

7SJ63

A.2.2
A.2.2.1

Elementary Diagrams for 7SJ63

Housing for panel flush mounting or cubicle installation

7SJ631D/E
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 Q8 R14 R16 R15 R17 R18 F10 F11 F12 F13 F15 F16 F14 F17 F18 IA IB BO3 IC I4 Va Vb Vc/VG BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6 BI7 BO11 BO12 BO13 BO14 BO15 Live status contact Jumper1) (NO, NC) Power supply
+
(~ )

BO1 BO2

F6 F8 F5 F9 F7

R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 F3 F4 F1 F2
1)

Jumper: 12 NO 23 NC

Rear SCADA Port Rear Service Port Time Synchronization R9 R10 R11 R12 R13 BI21 BI22 BI23 BI24 Front PC Port

Ground at Back Wall of Housing

Interference suppression capacitors at the relay contacts, Ceramic, 4.7 nF, 250 V

Figure A-7

General diagram 7SJ631D/E (panel flush mounting or cubicle installation)

432

Assignment of Pins of Interfaces, refer to Table 3-35 and 3-36 in Subsection 3.2.1
7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

7SJ63
7SJ632D/E

A.2 Elementary Diagrams

Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 Q8 R14 R16 R15 R17 R18 F10 F11 F12 F13 F15 F16 F14 F17 F18 K1 K2 K3 K4 K6 K7 K8 K9 K5 K10 K11 K12 K13 K14 K15 K16 R9 R10 R11 R12 R13

IA IB

BO1 BO2 BO3

IC I4 Va Vb Vc/VG BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6 BI7 BI8 BI9 BI10 BI11 BI12 BI13 BI14 BI15 BI16 BI17 BI18 BI19 BI20 BI21 BI22 BI23 BI24

*)

BO4

F6 F8 F5 F9 F7 J1 () J2 (+) J3 J4 K18 K17 J7 J9 J8 J11 J12 R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 F3 F4

+
(~ )

BO5 BO6 BO7 BO8 BO9 BO10 BO11 BO12 BO13 BO14 BO15 Live status contact 1 Jumper ) (NO, NC) Power supply Rear SCADA Port Rear Service Port/RTD-Box Time Synchronization Front PC Port Ground at Back Wall of Housing

1)

Jumper: 12 NO 23 NC

F1 F2

C A

Interference suppression capacitors at the relay contacts, Ceramic, 4.7 nF, 250 V

*) High-duty relays Interference suppression capacitors MP, 22 nF, 250 V

Figure A-8 General diagram 7SJ632D/E (panel flush mounting or cubicle installation)

Assignment of Pins of Interfaces, refer to Table 3-35 and 3-36 in Subsection 3.2.1

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

433

A Appendix

7SJ63

7SJ633D/E

Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 Q8 R14 R16 R15 R17 R18 F10 F11 F12 F13 F15 F16 F14 F17 F18 K1 K2 K3 K4 K6 K7 K8 K9 K5 K10 K11 K12 K13 K14 K15 K16 (+) R9 () R10 (+) R11 () R12

IA IB

BO1 BO2 BO3

IC I4 Va Vb Vc/VG BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6 BI7 BI8 BI9 BI10 BI11 BI12 BI13 BI14 BI15 BI16 BI17 BI18 BI19 BI20
Transducer 1 Transducer 2

*)

BO4

F6 F8 F5 F9 F7 J1 () J2 (+) J3 J4 K18 K17 J7 J9 J8 J11 J12 R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 F3 F4

+
(~ )

BO5 BO6 BO7 BO8 BO9 BO10 BO11 BO12 BO13 BO14 BO15 Live status contact 1 Jumper ) (NO, NC) Power supply Rear SCADA Port Rear Service Port Time Synchronization Front PC Port Ground at Back Wall of Housing

1)

Jumper: 12 NO 23 NC

F1 F2

Interference suppression capacitors at the relay contacts, Ceramic, 4.7 nF, 250 V

*)

High-duty relays Interference suppression capacitors MP, 22 nF, 250 V

Figure A-9

General diagram 7SJ633D/E (panel flush mounting or cubicle installation)

434

Assignment of Pins of Interfaces, refer to Table 3-35 and 3-36 in Subsection 3.2.1
7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

7SJ63
7SJ635D/E

A.2 Elementary Diagrams

Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 Q8 R14 R16 R15 R17 R18 F10 F11 F12 F13 F15 F16 F14 F17 F18 K1 K2 K3 K4 K6 K7 K8 K9 K5 K10 K11 K12 K13 K14 K15 K16 R9 R10 R11 R12 R13 M1 M2 M3 M4 M6 M7 M8 M9 M5 M10 M11 M12 M13 M14 M15 M16

IA IB

BO1 BO2 BO3

IC I4 Va Vb Vc/VG BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6 BI7 BI8 BI9 BI10 BI11 BI12 BI13 BI14 BI15 BI16 BI17 BI18 BI19 BI20 BI21 BI22 BI23 BI24 BI25 BI26 BI27 BI28 BI29 BI30 BI31 BI32 BI33 BI34 BI35 BI36 BI37

*)

BO4 BO5 BO6 BO7 BO8 BO9

F6 F8 F5 F9 F7 J1 () J2 (+) J3 J4 K18 K17 J7 J9 J8 J11 J12 R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 L1 () L2 (+) L3 L4 M18 M17 L7 L9 L8 L11 L12 F3 F4
+
(~ )

*) High-duty relays
Interference suppression capacitors MP, 22 nF, 250 V

BO10 BO11 BO12 BO13 BO14 BO15

*)
BO16 BO17 BO18 BO19 BO20 BO21 BO22 Live status contact 1 Jumper ) (NO, NC) Power supply Rear SCADA Port Rear Service Port Time Synchronization Front PC Port Ground at Back Wall of Housing

) Jumper: 12 NO 23 NC

F1 F2 B

C A

Figure A-10 General diagram 7SJ635D/E (panel flush mounting or cubicle installation)

Interference suppression capacitors at the relay contacts, Ceramic, 4.7 nF, 250 V

Assignment of Pins of Interfaces, refer to Table 3-35 and 3-36 in Subsection 3.2.1

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

435

A Appendix

7SJ63

7SJ636D/E
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 Q8 R14 R16 R15 R17 R18 F10 F11 F12 F13 F15 F16 F14 F17 F18 K1 K2 K3 K4 K6 K7 K8 K9 K5 K10 K11 K12 K13 K14 K15 K16 (+) R9 () R10 (+) R11 () R12 M1 M2 M3 M4 M6 M7 M8 M9 M5 M10 M11 M12 M13 M14 M15 M16 F6 F8 F5 F9 F7 J1 () J2 (+) J3 J4 K18 K17 J7 J9 J8 J11 J12 R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 L1 () L2 (+) L3 L4 M18 M17 L7 L9 L8 L11 L12 F3 F4
+
(~ )

IA IB

BO1 BO2 BO3

IC I4 Va Vb Vc/VG BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6 BI7 BI8 BI9 BI10 BI11 BI12 BI13 BI14 BI15 BI16 BI17 BI18 BI19 BI20

*)

BO4

*)

BO5 BO6 BO7 BO8 BO9 BO10 BO11 BO12 BO13 BO14 BO15

High-duty relays Interference suppression capacitors MP, 22 nF, 250 V

*)
BO16 BO17 BO18 BO19 BO20 BO21 BO22

Transducer 1 Transducer 2

Live status contact 1 Jumper ) (NO, NC) Power supply Rear SCADA Port Rear Service Port Time Synchronization Front PC Port Ground at Back Wall of Housing

1)

Jumper: 12 NO 23 NC

C A

BI33 BI34 BI35 BI36 BI37

Interference suppression capacitors at the relay contacts, Ceramic, 4.7 nF, 250 V

Figure A-11 General diagram 7SJ636D/E (panel flush mounting or cubicle installation)

436

Assignment of Pins of Interfaces, refer to Table 3-35 and 3-36 in Subsection 3.2.1
7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

BI25 BI26 BI27 BI28 BI29 BI30 BI31 BI32

F1 F2

7SJ63
A.2.2.2 Housing for panel surface mounting

A.2 Elementary Diagrams

7SJ631B
25 50 24 49 23 48 22 47 21 20 46 19 44 55 80 56 81 82 58 57 83 59 IA IB BO3 IC I4 Va Vb Vc/VG BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6 BI7 BO11 BO12 BO13 BO14 BO15 BO1 BO2 76 77 51 53 52

100 75 99 74 98 73 97 72

Live status contact 1 Jumper ) (NO, NC) Power supply

+
(~ )

54 79 15 L+ (V+) 16 L (V)

1)

Jumper: 12 NO 23 NC

Front PC Port 96 71 95 70 94 BI21 BI22 BI23 BI24

Assignment of Pins of Interface, refer to Table 3-35 in Subsection 3.2.1

Ground at Side Wall of Housing

Interference suppression capacitors at the relay contacts, Ceramic, 4.7 nF, 250 V

Figure A-12 General diagram 7SJ631B (panel surface mounting)

For connections of the further interfaces, see figures A-15 or A-16.

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

437

A Appendix

7SJ63

7SJ632B

25 50 24 49 23 48 22 47 21 20 46 19 44 55 80 56 81 82 58 57 83 59 84 60 85 61 62 87 63 88 86 64 89 65 90 66 91 67 96 71 95 70 94

IA IB

BO1 BO2 BO3

IC I4 Va Vb Vc/VG BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6 BI7 BI8 BI9 BI10 BI11 BI12 BI13 BI14 BI15 BI16 BI17 BI18 BI19 BI20 BI21 BI22 BI23 BI24

*)

BO4 BO5 BO6 BO7 BO8 BO9

76 77 51 53 52 11 () 36 (+) 10 35 12 37 14 39 40 13 38 100 75 99 74 98 73 97 72 54 79
+
(~ )

BO10 BO11 BO12 BO13 BO14 BO15 Live status contact 1 Jumper ) (NO, NC) Power supply

1)

Jumper: 12 NO 23 NC

15 L+ (V+) 16 L (V)

Front PC Port

Assignment of Pins of Interface, refer to Table 3-35 in Subsection 3.2.1

Interference suppression capacitors at the relay contacts, Ceramic, 4.7 nF, 250 V

Ground at Side Wall of Housing

*) High-duty relays Interference suppression capacitors MP, 22 nF, 250 V

Figure A-13 General diagram 7SJ632B (panel surface mounting)

For connections of the further interfaces see figures or A-16 .

438

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

7SJ63
7SJ633B

A.2 Elementary Diagrams

25 50 24 49 23 48 22 47 21 20 46 19 44 55 80 56 81 82 58 57 83 59 84 60 85 61 62 87 63 88 86 64 89 65 90 66 91 67 (+) () (+) () 96 71 95 70

IA IB

BO1 BO2 BO3

IC I4 Va Vb Vc/VG BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6 BI7 BI8 BI9 BI10 BI11 BI12 BI13 BI14 BI15 BI16 BI17 BI18 BI19 BI20
Transducer 1 Transducer 2

*)

BO4 BO5 BO6 BO7 BO8 BO9

76 77 51 53 52 11 () 36 (+) 10 35 12 37 14 39 40 13 38 100 75 99 74 98 73 97 72 54 79
+
(~ )

BO10 BO11 BO12 BO13 BO14 BO15 Live status contact 1 Jumper ) (NO, NC) Power supply

1)

Jumper: 12 NO 23 NC

15 L+ (V+) 16 L (V)

Front PC Port

Assignment of Pins of Interface, refer to Table 3-35 in Subsection 3.2.1

Ground at Side Wall of Housing

Interference suppression capacitors at the relay contacts, Ceramic, 4.7 nF, 250 V

*)

High-duty relays Interference suppression capacitors MP, 22 nF, 250 V

Figure A-14 General diagram 7SJ633B (panel surface mounting)

For connections of the further interfaces see figures A-15 or A-16.

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

439

A Appendix

7SJ63

7SJ631/2/3B (up to release ... /DD)

Channel B
Profibus

Rear SCADA Port

Optical or Electrical

4 5 6 7 8 9

RS232 RS485 B CTS RTS GND GND A TxD RxD Shield

Channel C 29 30 31 32 33 34 RS232 RS485 B CTS RTS GND GND A TxD RxD Shield

Rear Service Port

Optical or Electrical

Time Synchronization

27 2 28 3 1

IN 12 V COMMON IN 5 V IN 24 V Shield

Figure A-15 General diagram 7SJ631/2/3B up to release .../DD (panel surface mounting)

440

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

7SJ63
7SJ631/2/3B (beginning with release ... /EE)

A.2 Elementary Diagrams

Rear SCADA Port

Optical or Electrical

Channel B
elektrical RS232/RS485

Assignment of Pins of Interface, refer to Table 3-35 in Subsection 3.2.1

Rear Service Port

Optical or Electrical

Channel C
elektrical RS232/RS485

Time Synchronization

27 2 28 3 1

IN 12 V COMMON IN 5 V IN 24 V Shield

Figure A-16 Connection Diagram For 7SJ631/2/3B beginning with release /EE (Panel Surface Mounted)

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

441

A Appendix

7SJ63

7SJ635B
50 100 49 99 48 98 47 97 46 45 96 44 94 105 155 106 156 157 108 107 158 109 169 120 170 121 122 172 123 173 171 124 174 125 175 126 176 127 196 146 195 145 194 177 128 178 129 130 180 131 181 179 132 182 133 183 134 184 135 IA IB BO3 IC I4 Va Vb Vc/VG BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6 BI7 BI8 BI9 BI10 BI11 BI12 BI13 BI14 BI15 BI16 BI17 BI18 BI19 BI20 BI21 BI22 BI23 BI24 BI25 BI26 BI27 BI28 BI29 BI30 BI31 BI32 BI33 BI34 BI35 BI36 BI37 Ground at Side Wall of Housing BO1 BO2 151 152 101 103 102 19 () 69 (+) 18 68 20 70 23 73 74 22 72 200 150 199 149 198 148 197 147 27 () 77 (+) 26 76 28 78 31 81 30 29 79 104 154
+
(~ )

*)

BO4 BO5 BO6 BO7 BO8 BO9

*) High-duty relays Interference suppression capacitors MP, 22 nF, 250 V

BO10 BO11 BO12 BO13 BO14 BO15

*)
BO16 BO17 BO18 BO19 BO20 BO21 BO22 Live status contact 1 Jumper ) (NO, NC) Power supply

1)

Jumper: 12 NO 23 NC

37 L+ (V+) 38 L (V)

Front PC Port

Assignment of Pins of Interface, refer to Table 3-35 in Subsection 3.2.1

Interference suppression capacitors at the relay contacts, Ceramic, 4.7 nF, 250 V

Figure A-17 General diagram 7SJ635B (panel surface mounting)

For connections of the further interfaces see figures A-19 or A-20. 442

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

7SJ63
7SJ636B
50 100 49 99 48 98 47 97 46 45 96 44 94 105 155 106 156 157 108 107 158 109 169 120 170 121 122 172 123 173 171 124 174 125 175 126 176 127 (+) 196 () 146 (+) 195 () 145 177 128 178 129 130 180 131 181 179 132 182 133 183 134 184 135 IA IB BO3 IC I4 Va Vb Vc/VG BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6 BI7 BI8 BI9 BI10 BI11 BI12 BI13 BI14 BI15 BI16 BI17 BI18 BI19 BI20 BO1 BO2 151 152 101 103 102 19 () 69 (+) 18 68 20 70 23 73 74 22 72 200 150 199 149 198 148 197 147 27 () 77 (+) 26 76 28 78 31 81 30 29 79 104 154
+
(~ )

A.2 Elementary Diagrams

*)

BO4 BO5 BO6 BO7 BO8 BO9

*) High-duty relays Interference suppression capacitors MP, 22 nF, 250 V

BO10 BO11 BO12 BO13 BO14 BO15

*)
BO16 BO17 BO18 BO19 BO20 BO21 BO22

Transducer 1 Transducer 2

Live status contact 1 Jumper ) (NO, NC) Power supply

1)

Jumper: 12 NO 23 NC

BI25 BI26 BI27 BI28 BI29 BI30 BI31 BI32 BI33 BI34 BI35 BI36 BI37

37 L+ (V+) 38 L (V)

Front PC Port

Assignment of Pins of Interface, refer to Table 3-35 in Subsection 3.2.1

Interference suppression capacitors at the relay contacts, Ceramic, 4.7 nF, 250 V

Ground at Side Wall of Housing

Figure A-18 General diagram 7SJ636B (panel surface mounting)

For connections of the further interfaces see figures A-19 or A-20.

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

443

A Appendix

7SJ63

7SJ635/6B (up to release ... /DD)

Channel B
Profibus

Rear SCADA Port

Optical or Electrical

4 5 6 7 8 9

RS232 RS485 B CTS RTS GND GND A TxD RxD Shield

Channel C 54 55 56 57 58 59 RS232 RS485 B CTS RTS GND GND A TxD RxD Shield

Rear Service Port

Optical or Electrical

Time Synchronization

52 2 53 3 1

IN 12 V COMMON IN 5 V IN 24 V Shield

Figure A-19 General diagram 7SJ635/6B up to release .../DD (panel surface mounting)

444

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

7SJ63
7SJ635/6B (beginning with release .../EE)

A.2 Elementary Diagrams

Rear SCADA Port

Optical or Electrical

Channel B
elektrical RS232/RS485

Assignment of Pins of Interface, refer to Table 3-35 in Subsection 3.2.1

Rear Service Port

Optical or Electrical

Channel C
elektrical RS232/RS485

Time Synchronization

52 2 53 3 1

IN 12 V COMMON IN 5 V IN 24 V Shield

Figure A-20 Connection Diagram For 7SJ635/6B beginning with release /EE (Panel Surface Mounted)

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

445

A Appendix

7SJ63

A.2.2.3

Devices With Detached Operation Unit

7SJ631A/C

Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 Q8 R14 R16 R15 R17 R18 F10 F11 F12 F13 F15 F16 F14 F17 F18

IA IB

BO1 BO2 BO3

IC I4 Va Vb Vc/VG BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6 BI7

F6 F8 F5 F9 F7

BO11 BO12 BO13 BO14 BO15 Live status contact 1 Jumper ) (NO, NC) Power supply Rear SCADA Port Rear Service i Port
+
(~ )

R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 F3 F4 F1 F2 B
1)

Jumper: 12 NO 23 NC

R9 R10 R11 R12 R13

BI21 BI22 BI23 BI24

Time Syncronization

Ground at Back Wall of Housing Front PC Port

Operation Ground at Back unit Wall of Housing

Figure A-21 General diagram 7SJ631A/C (devices with separate operation unit)

446

Assignment of Pins of Interfaces, refer to Table 3-35 and 3-36 in Subsection 3.2.1
Interference suppression capacitors at the relay contacts, Ceramic, 4.7 nF, 250 V 7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

7SJ63
7SJ632A/C

A.2 Elementary Diagrams

Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 Q8 R14 R16 R15 R17 R18 F10 F11 F12 F13 F15 F16 F14 F17 F18 K1 K2 K3 K4 K6 K7 K8 K9 K5 K10 K11 K12 K13 K14 K15 K16 R9 R10 R11 R12 R13

IA IB

BO1 BO2 BO3

IC I4 Va Vb Vc/VG BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6 BI7 BI8 BI9 BI10 BI11 BI12 BI13 BI14 BI15 BI16 BI17 BI18 BI19 BI20 BI21 BI22 BI23 BI24

*)

BO4

F6 F8 F5 F9 F7 J1 () J2 (+) J3 J4 K18 K17 J7 J9 J8 J11 J12 R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 F3 F4

+
(~)

BO5 BO6 BO7 BO8 BO9 BO10 BO11 BO12 BO13 BO14 BO15 Live status contact 1 Jumper ) (NO, NC) Power supply Rear SCADA Port Rear Service Port Time Synchronization

1)

Jumper: 12 NO 23 NC

F1 F2

C A

Ground at Back Wall of Housing Front PC Port

Operation Ground at Back unit Wall of Housing

Interference suppression capacitors at the relay contacts, Ceramic, 4.7 nF, 250 V

*)

Figure A-22 General diagram 7SJ632A/C (devices with separate operation unit)

High-duty relays Interference suppression capacitors MP, 22 nF, 250 V

Assignment of Pins of Interfaces, refer to Table 3-35 and 3-36 in Subsection 3.2.1

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

447

A Appendix

7SJ63

7SJ633A/C

Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 Q8 R14 R16 R15 R17 R18 F10 F11 F12 F13 F15 F16 F14 F17 F18 K1 K2 K3 K4 K6 K7 K8 K9 K5 K10 K11 K12 K13 K14 K15 K16 (+) R9 () R10 (+) R11 () R12

IA IB

BO1 BO2 BO3

IC I4 Va Vb Vc/VG BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6 BI7 BI8 BI9 BI10 BI11 BI12 BI13 BI14 BI15 BI16 BI17 BI18 BI19 BI20
Transducer 1 Transducer 2

*)

BO4 BO5 BO6 BO7 BO8 BO9

F6 F8 F5 F9 F7 J1 () J2 (+) J3 J4 K18 K17 J7 J9 J8 J11 J12 R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 F3 F4

+
(~ )

BO10 BO11 BO12 BO13 BO14 BO15 Live status contact 1 Jumper ) (NO, NC) Power supply Rear SCADA Port Rear Service Port Time Synchronization

1)

Jumper: 12 NO 23 NC

F1 F2

Ground at Back Wall of Housing Front PC Port

Operation Ground at Back unit Wall of Housing

Figure A-23 General diagram 7SJ633A/C (devices with separate operation unit)

448

Assignment of Pins of Interfaces, refer to Table 3-35 and 3-36 in Subsection 3.2.1
Interference suppression capacitors at the relay contacts, Ceramic, 4.7 nF, 250 V

*)

High-duty relays Interference suppression capacitors MP, 22 nF, 250 V

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

7SJ63
7SJ635A/C
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 Q8 R14 R16 R15 R17 R18 F10 F11 F12 F13 F15 F16 F14 F17 F18 K1 K2 K3 K4 K6 K7 K8 K9 K5 K10 K11 K12 K13 K14 K15 K16 R9 R10 R11 R12 R13 M1 M2 M3 M4 M6 M7 M8 M9 M5 M10 M11 M12 M13 M14 M15 M16 IA IB BO3 IC I4 Va Vb Vc/VG BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6 BI7 BI8 BI9 BI10 BI11 BI12 BI13 BI14 BI15 BI16 BI17 BI18 BI19 BI20 BI21 BI22 BI23 BI24 BI25 BI26 BI27 BI28 BI29 BI30 BI31 BI32 BI33 BI34 BI35 BI36 BI37 Front PC Port BO1 BO2 F6 F8 F5 F9 F7 J1 () J2 (+) J3 J4 K18 K17 J7 J9 J8 J11 J12 R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 L1 () L2 (+) L3 L4 M18 M17 L7 L9 L8 L11 L12 F3 F4
+
(~ )

A.2 Elementary Diagrams

*)

BO4

*)

BO5 BO6 BO7 BO8 BO9 BO10 BO11 BO12 BO13 BO14 BO15

High-duty relays Interference suppression capacitors MP, 22 nF, 250 V

*)
BO16 BO17 BO18 BO19 BO20 BO21 BO22 Live status contact 1 Jumper ) (NO, NC) Power supply Rear SCADA Port Rear Service Port Time Synchronization

1)

Jumper: 12 NO 23 NC

F1 F2 B

C A

Ground at Back Wall of Housing

Operation Ground at Back unit Wall of Housing

Figure A-24 General diagram 7SJ635A/C (devices with separate operation unit)

Assignment of Pins of Interfaces, refer to Table 3-35 and 3-36 in Subsection 3.2.1
Interference suppression capacitors at the relay contacts, Ceramic, 4.7 nF, 250 V

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

449

A Appendix

7SJ63

7SJ636A/C
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 Q8 R14 R16 R15 R17 R18 F10 F11 F12 F13 F15 F16 F14 F17 F18 K1 K2 K3 K4 K6 K7 K8 K9 K5 K10 K11 K12 K13 K14 K15 K16 (+) () (+) () R9 R10 R11 R12 M1 M2 M3 M4 M6 M7 M8 M9 M5 M10 M11 M12 M13 M14 M15 M16 IA IB BO3 IC I4 Va Vb Vc/VG BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6 BI7 BI8 BI9 BI10 BI11 BI12 BI13 BI14 BI15 BI16 BI17 BI18 BI19 BI20 BO1 BO2 F6 F8 F5 F9 F7 J1 () J2 (+) J3 J4 K18 K17 J7 J9 J8 J11 J12 R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 L1 () L2 (+) L3 L4 M18 M17 L7 L9 L8 L11 L12 F3 F4
+
(~ )

*)

BO4

*)

BO5 BO6 BO7 BO8 BO9 BO10 BO11 BO12 BO13 BO14 BO15

High-duty relays Interference suppression capacitors MP, 22 nF, 250 V

*)
BO16 BO17 BO18 BO19 BO20 BO21 BO22

Transducer 1 Transducer 2

Live status contact 1 Jumper ) (NO, NC) Power supply Rear SCADA Port Rear Service Port Time Synchronization Ground at Back Wall of Housing

1)

Jumper: 12 NO 23 NC

C A

BI33 BI34 BI35 BI36 BI37

Front PC Port

Operation Ground at Back unit Wall of Housing

Figure A-25 General diagram 7SJ636A/C (devices with separate operation unit)

450

Assignment of Pins of Interfaces, refer to Table 3-35 and 3-36 in Subsection 3.2.1
Interference suppression capacitors at the relay contacts, Ceramic, 4.7 nF, 250 V 7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

BI25 BI26 BI27 BI28 BI29 BI30 BI31 BI32

F1 F2

7SJ63
A.2.2.4 Devices for panel surface mounting without Operation Unit

A.2 Elementary Diagrams

7SJ631F/G

Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 Q8 R14 R16 R15 R17 R18 F10 F11 F12 F13 F15 F16 F14 F17 F18

IA IB

BO1 BO2 BO3

IC I4 Va Vb Vc/VG BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6 BI7

F6 F8 F5 F9 F7

BO11 BO12 BO13 BO14 BO15 Live status contact 1 Jumper ) (NO, NC) Power supply Rear SCADA Port Rear Service i Port
+
(~ )

R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 F3 F4 F1 F2 B
1)

Jumper: 12 NO 23 NC

R9 R10 R11 R12 R13

BI21 BI22 BI23 BI24

Time Syncronization

Ground at Back Wall of Housing PC Port (to Panel or Door) Interference suppression capacitors at the relay contacts, Ceramic, 4.7 nF, 250 V

Figure A-26 General diagram 7SJ631F/G (devices for panel surface mounting without operation unit)

Assignment of Pins of Interfaces, refer to Table 3-35 and 3-36 in Subsection 3.2.1

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

451

A Appendix

7SJ63

7SJ632F/G

Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 Q8 R14 R16 R15 R17 R18 F10 F11 F12 F13 F15 F16 F14 F17 F18 K1 K2 K3 K4 K6 K7 K8 K9 K5 K10 K11 K12 K13 K14 K15 K16 R9 R10 R11 R12 R13

IA IB

BO1 BO2 BO3

IC I4 Va Vb Vc/VG BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6 BI7 BI8 BI9 BI10 BI11 BI12 BI13 BI14 BI15 BI16 BI17 BI18 BI19 BI20 BI21 BI22 BI23 BI24

*)

BO4

F6 F8 F5 F9 F7 J1 () J2 (+) J3 J4 K18 K17 J7 J9 J8 J11 J12 R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 F3 F4

+
(~ )

BO5 BO6 BO7 BO8 BO9 BO10 BO11 BO12 BO13 BO14 BO15 Live status contact 1 Jumper ) (NO, NC) Power supply Rear SCADA Port Rear Service Port Time Synchronization

1)

Jumper: 12 NO 23 NC

F1 F2

C A

Ground at Back Wall of Housing PC Port (to Panel or Door)

Figure A-27 General diagram 7SJ632F/G (devices for panel surface mounting without operation unit)

452

Assignment of Pins of Interfaces, refer to Table 3-35 and 3-36 in Subsection 3.2.1
Interference suppression capacitors at the relay contacts, Ceramic, 4.7 nF, 250 V

*)

High-duty relays Interference suppression capacitors MP, 22 nF, 250 V

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

7SJ63
7SJ633F/G

A.2 Elementary Diagrams

Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 Q8 R14 R16 R15 R17 R18 F10 F11 F12 F13 F15 F16 F14 F17 F18 K1 K2 K3 K4 K6 K7 K8 K9 K5 K10 K11 K12 K13 K14 K15 K16 (+) () (+) () R9 R10 R11 R12

IA IB

BO1 BO2 BO3

IC I4 Va Vb Vc/VG BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6 BI7 BI8 BI9 BI10 BI11 BI12 BI13 BI14 BI15 BI16 BI17 BI18 BI19 BI20
Transducer 1 Transducer 2

*)

BO4

F6 F8 F5 F9 F7 J1 () J2 (+) J3 J4 K18 K17 J7 J9 J8 J11 J12 R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 F3 F4

+
(~ )

BO5 BO6 BO7 BO8 BO9 BO10 BO11 BO12 BO13 BO14 BO15 Live status contact 1 Jumper ) (NO, NC) Power supply Rear SCADA Port Rear Service Port Time Synchronization

1)

Jumper: 12 NO 23 NC

F1 F2

Ground at Back Wall of Housing PC Port (to Panel or Door)

Figure A-28 General diagram 7SJ633F/G (devices for panel surface mounting without operation unit)

Assignment of Pins of Interfaces, refer to Table 3-35 and 3-36 in Subsection 3.2.1
Interference suppression capacitors at the relay contacts, Ceramic, 4.7 nF, 250 V

*)

High-duty relays Interference suppression capacitors MP, 22 nF, 250 V

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

453

A Appendix

7SJ63

7SJ635F/G
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 Q8 R14 R16 R15 R17 R18 F10 F11 F12 F13 F15 F16 F14 F17 F18 K1 K2 K3 K4 K6 K7 K8 K9 K5 K10 K11 K12 K13 K14 K15 K16 R9 R10 R11 R12 R13 M1 M2 M3 M4 M6 M7 M8 M9 M5 M10 M11 M12 M13 M14 M15 M16 IA IB BO3 IC I4 Va Vb Vc/VG BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6 BI7 BI8 BI9 BI10 BI11 BI12 BI13 BI14 BI15 BI16 BI17 BI18 BI19 BI20 BI21 BI22 BI23 BI24 BI25 BI26 BI27 BI28 BI29 BI30 BI31 BI32 BI33 BI34 BI35 BI36 BI37 BO1 BO2 F6 F8 F5 F9 F7 J1 () J2 (+) J3 J4 K18 K17 J7 J9 J8 J11 J12 R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 L1 () L2 (+) L3 L4 M18 M17 L7 L9 L8 L11 L12 F3 F4
+
(~ )

*)

BO4

BO5 BO6 BO7 BO8 BO9 BO10 BO11 BO12 BO13 BO14 BO15

*) High-duty relays Interference suppression capacitors MP, 22 nF, 250 V

*)
BO16 BO17 BO18 BO19 BO20 BO21 BO22 Live status contact 1 Jumper )(NO, NC) Power supply Rear SCADA Port Rear Service Port Time Synchronization

1)

Jumper: 12 NO 23 NC

F1 F2 B

C A

Ground at Back Wall of Housing PC Port (to Panel or Door)

Figure A-29 General diagram 7SJ635F/G (devices for panel surface mounting without operation unit)

454

Assignment of Pins of Interfaces, refer to Table 3-35 and 3-36 in Subsection 3.2.1
Interference suppression capacitors at the relay contacts, Ceramic, 4.7 nF, 250 V 7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

7SJ63
7SJ636F/G
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 Q8 R14 R16 R15 R17 R18 F10 F11 F12 F13 F15 F16 F14 F17 F18 K1 K2 K3 K4 K6 K7 K8 K9 K5 K10 K11 K12 K13 K14 K15 K16 (+) () (+) () R9 R10 R11 R12 M1 M2 M3 M4 M6 M7 M8 M9 M5 M10 M11 M12 M13 M14 M15 M16 IA IB BO3 IC I4 Va Vb Vc/VG BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6 BI7 BI8 BI9 BI10 BI11 BI12 BI13 BI14 BI15 BI16 BI17 BI18 BI19 BI20 BO1 BO2 F6 F8 F5 F9 F7 J1 () J2 (+) J3 J4 K18 K17 J7 J9 J8 J11 J12 R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 L1 () L2 (+) L3 L4 M18 M17 L7 L9 L8 L11 L12 F3 F4
+
(~ )

A.2 Elementary Diagrams

*)

BO4

BO5 BO6 BO7 BO8 BO9 BO10 BO11 BO12 BO13 BO14 BO15

*)

High-duty relays Interference suppression capacitors MP, 22 nF, 250 V

*)
BO16 BO17 BO18 BO19 BO20 BO21 BO22

Transducer 1 Transducer 2

Live status contact 1 Jumper ) (NO, NC) Power supply Rear SCADA Port Rear Service Port Time Synchronization

1)

Jumper: 12 NO 23 NC

C A

BI33 BI34 BI35 BI36 BI37

Ground at Back Wall of Housing PC Port (to Panel or Door)

Figure A-30 General diagram 7SJ636F/G (devices for panel surface mounting without operation unit)

Assignment of Pins of Interfaces, refer to Table 3-35 and 3-36 in Subsection 3.2.1
Interference suppression capacitors at the relay contacts, Ceramic, 4.7 nF, 250 V

BI25 BI26 BI27 BI28 BI29 BI30 BI31 BI32

F1 F2

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

455

A Appendix

7SJ64

A.2.3
A.2.3.1

Elementary Diagrams for 7SJ64

Housing for panel flush mounting or cubicle installation

7SJ640D/E
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 Q8 R15 R17 R18 R16 R13 R14 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 R9 R10 R11 R12 IA IB IC I4 Va Vb Vc V4 BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6 BI7 Live status contact 1 Jumper ) (NO, NC) Power supply
+
(~ )

BO1 BO2 BO3

R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R7 R8

BO4 BO5

F3 F4 F1 F2

1)

Jumper: 12 NO 23 NC

Additional Port Rear Service Port

D C

Rear SCADA Port Time Synchronization

B A

Front PC Port Ground at Back Wall of Housing

Figure A-31 General diagram 7SJ640D/E (panel flush mounting or cubicle installation)

456

Assignment of Pins of Interfaces, refer to Table 3-35 and 3-36 in Subsection 3.2.1

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

7SJ64
7SJ641D/E
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 Q8 R15 R17 R18 R16 R13 R14 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 R9 R10 R11 R12 K17 K18 J1 J2 J3 J4 J6 J5 J7 J8 J9 J10 J11 J12 IA IB IC I4 Va Vb Vc V4 BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6 BI7 BO4 BO5 R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 K3 K4

A.2 Elementary Diagrams

BO1 BO2 BO3

BO6 Jumper1) (NO, NC)

BO7 BO8 BO9

K6 K7 K8 K5 K9 K10 K11 K12 K13 K14 K15 K16

BO10 BO11 BO12 BO13

B8 BI9 BI10 BI11 BI12 BI13 BI14 BI15

Live status contact 1 Jumper ) (NO, NC) Power supply

+
(~ )

F3 F4 F1 F2

1)

Jumper: 12 NO 23 NC

Additional Port Rear Service Port

D C B A

Rear SCADA Port Time Synchronization

Front PC Port Ground at Back Wall of Housing

Figure A-32 General diagram 7SJ641D/E (panel flush mounting or cubicle installation)

Assignment of Pins of Interfaces, refer to Table 3-35 and 3-36 in Subsection 3.2.1

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

457

A Appendix

7SJ64

7SJ642D/E
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 Q8 R15 R17 R18 R16 R13 R14 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 R9 R10 R11 R12 K1 K2 K3 K4 K6 K7 K8 K9 K5 K10 K11 K12 K13 K14 K15 K16 IA IB IC I4 Va Vb Vc V4 BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6 BI7 BO12 BI8 BI9 BI10 BI11 BI12 BI13 BI14 BI15 BI16 BI17 BI18 BI19 BI20 BO4 BO5 BO1 BO2 BO3 R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 J1 () J2 (+) J3 J4 K18 K17 J7 J9 J8 J11 J12

*)

BO6

BO7 BO8 BO9 B10 B11

Live status contact 1 Jumper ) (NO, NC) Power supply

+
(~ )

F3 F4 F1 F2

1)

Jumper: 12 NO 23 NC

Additional Port Rear Service Port

D C B A

Rear SCADA Port Time Synchronization

Front PC Port

Assignment of Pins of Interfaces, refer to Table 3-35 and 3-36 in Subsection 3.2.1

*) High-duty relays
Ground at Back Wall of Housing Interference suppression capacitors MP, 22 nF, 250 V

Figure A-33 General diagram 7SJ642D/E (panel flush mounting or cubicle installation)

458

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

7SJ64
7SJ645D/E
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 Q8 R15 R17 R18 R16 R13 R14 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 R9 R10 R11 R12 K1 K2 K3 K4 K6 K7 K8 K9 K5 K10 K11 K12 K13 K14 K15 K16 P1 P2 P3 P4 P6 P7 P8 P9 P5 P10 P11 P12 P13 P14 P15 P16 IA IB IC I4 Va Vb Vc V4 BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6 BI7 BO12 BI8 BI9 BI10 BI11 BI12 BI13 BI14 BI15 BI16 BI17 BI18 BI19 BI20 BI21 BI22 BI23 BI24 BI25 BI26 BI27 BI28 BI29 BI30 BI31 BI32 BI33 Live status contact 1 Jumper ) (NO, NC) Power supply Additional Port Rear Service Port
+
(~ )

A.2 Elementary Diagrams

BO1 BO2 BO3

R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 J1 () J2 (+) J3 J4 K18 K17 J7 J9 J8 J11 J12 N1 () N2 (+) N3 N4 P18 P17 N7 N9 N8 N11 N12 F3 F4 F1 F2 D C B A
1)

BO4 BO5

*) BO6
BO7 BO8 BO9 B10 B11

BO13 BO14 BO15 BO16 BO17 BO18 BO19

Jumper: 12 NO 23 NC

Rear SCADA Port Time Synchronization

Assignment of Pins of Interfaces, refer to Table 3-35 and 3-36 in Subsection 3.2.1

*) High-duty relays
Interference suppression capacitors MP, 22 nF, 250 V

Front PC Port Ground at Back Wall of Housing

Figure A-34 General diagram 7SJ645D/E (panel flush mounting or cubicle installation)

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

459

A Appendix

7SJ64

A.2.3.2

Housing for panel surface mounting

7SJ640B
15 30 14 29 13 28 12 27 45 44 60 59 26 25 37 36 35 34 33 52 54 39 53 38 IA IB IC I4 Va Vb Vc V4 BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6 BI7 2 17 3 18 4 19 1 Live status contact 1 Jumper ) (NO, NC) Power supply
+
(~ )

BO1 BO2 BO3

43 58 42 57 56 41 55 40

BO4 BO5

31 32 10 L+ (V+) 11 L (V)

1)

Jumper: 12 NO 23 NC

Earthing Terminal (16) IN SYNC IN 12 V COM SYNC COMMON IN 5 V IN 24 V Screen

Time Synchronisation

Additional Port Rear Service Port

D C B

Rear SCADA Port Front PC Port Ground at Back Wall of Housing

Figure A-35 General diagram 7SJ640B (panel surface mounting)

460

Assignment of Pins of Interfaces, refer to Table 3-35 and 3-36 in Subsection 3.2.1

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

7SJ64
7SJ641B
25 50 24 49 23 48 22 47 20 19 44 45 21 46 58 57 56 55 54 83 95 70 94 69 43 18 42 17 41 40 14 39 38 13 37 12 36 11 IA IB IC I4 Va Vb Vc V4 BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6 BO11 BI7 BO12 B8 BI9 BI10 BI11 BI12 BI13 BI14 BI15 Time Synchronisation 2 27 3 28 4 29 1 BO13 BO4 BO5 BO1 BO2 BO3 74 99 73 98 97 72 96 71 90 65 64 88 63 89 87 62 86 61 85 60 84 59 51 52
+
(~ )

A.2 Elementary Diagrams

BO6 Jumper1) (NO, NC) BO7 BO8 BO9

1)

Jumper: 12 NO 23 NC

BO10

Live status contact 1 Jumper ) (NO, NC) Power supply

15 L+ (V+) 16 L (V) Earthing Terminal (26) IN SYNC IN 12 V COM SYNC COMMON IN 5 V IN 24 V Screen

Additional Port Rear Service Port

D C B

Rear SCADA Port Front PC Port Ground at Back Wall of Housing

Figure A-36 General diagram 7SJ641B (panel surface mounting)

Assignment of Pins of Interfaces, refer to Table 3-35 and 3-36 in Subsection 3.2.1

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

461

A Appendix

7SJ64

7SJ642B
25 50 24 49 23 48 22 47 20 19 44 45 21 46 58 57 56 55 54 83 95 70 94 69 66 65 64 63 91 90 89 88 87 62 61 60 86 85 84 59 IA IB IC I4 Va Vb Vc V4 BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6 BI7 BO12 BI8 BI9 BI10 BI11 BI12 BI13 BI14 BI15 BI16 BI17 BI18 BI19 BI20 Time Synchronisation Live status contact 1 Jumper ) (NO, NC) Power supply
+
(~ )

BO1 BO2 BO3

74 99 73 98 97 72 96 71 12 () 37 (+) 11 36 38 13 18 17 42 14 39 51 52 15 L+ (V+) 16 L (V) EarthingTerminal Terminal (26) 2 27 3 28 4 29 1 IN SYNC IN 12 V COM SYNC COMMON IN 5 V IN 24 V Screen
1)

BO4 BO5

*)

BO6

BO7 BO8 BO9 B10 B11

Jumper: 12 NO 23 NC

Additional Port Rear Service Port

D C B

Rear SCADA Port Front PC Port

Assignment of Pins of Interfaces, refer to Table 3-35 and 3-36 in Subsection 3.2.1

*) High-duty relays
Ground at Back Wall of Housing Interference suppression capacitors MP, 22 nF, 250 V

Figure A-37 General diagram 7SJ642B (panel surface mounting)

462

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

7SJ64
7SJ645B
50 100 49 99 48 98 47 97 45 44 94 95 46 96 108 107 106 105 104 158 195 145 194 144 125 124 123 122 175 174 173 172 171 121 120 119 170 169 168 118 140 139 138 137 190 189 188 187 186 136 135 134 185 184 183 133 IA IB IC I4 Va Vb Vc V4 BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6 BI7 BI8 BI9 BI10 BI11 BI12 BI13 BI14 BI15 BI16 BI17 BI18 BI19 BI20 BI21 BI22 BI23 BI24 BI25 BI26 BI27 BI28 BI29 BI30 BI31 BI32 BI33 BO1 BO2 BO3 BO4 BO5 149 199 148 198 197 147 196 146 19 () 69 (+) 18 68 70 20 23 22 72 21 71 34 () 84 (+) 33 83 85 35 40 39 89 36 86 101 102
+
(~ )

A.2 Elementary Diagrams

*)

BO6

BO7 BO8 BO9 BO10 BO11 BO12

*)
BO13 BO14 BO15 BO16 BO17 BO18 BO19 Live status contact Jumper1) (NO, NC) Power supply

1)

Jumper: 12 NO 23 NC

37 L+ (V+) 38 L (V) EarthingTerminal Terminal (51) 2 IN SYNC 52 IN 12 V 3 COM SYNC 53 COMMON 4 IN 5 V 54 IN 24 V Schirm 1 D C B

Time Synchronisation

Additional Port Rear Service Port

Rear SCADA Port Front PC Port Ground at Back Wall of Housing

Assignment of Pins of Interfaces, refer to Table 3-35 and 3-36 in Subsection 3.2.1

*) High-duty relays
Interference suppression capacitors MP, 22 nF, 250 V

Figure A-38 General diagram 7SJ645B (panel surface mounting)

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

463

A Appendix

7SJ64

A.2.3.3

Housing for Mounting with Detached Operator Panel

7SJ641A/C
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 Q8 R15 R17 R18 R16 R13 R14 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 R9 R10 R11 R12 K17 K18 J1 J2 J3 J4 J6 J5 J7 J8 J9 J10 J11 J12 IA IB IC I4 Va Vb Vc V4 BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6 BI7 BO4 BO5 BO1 BO2 BO3 R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 K3 K4

BO6 Jumper1) (NO, NC)

BO7 BO8 BO9

K6 K7 K8 K5 K9 K10 K11 K12 K13 K14 K15 K16

1)

BO10 BO11 BO12 BO13

Jumper: 12 NO 23 NC

B8 BI9 BI10 BI11 BI12 BI13 BI14

Live status contact 1 Jumper ) (NO, NC) Power supply

+
(~ )

F3 F4 F1 F2

Additional Port BI15 Rear Service Port Rear SCADA Port Time Synchronization

D C B A

Front PC Port Earthing at the Rear Wall

Front Serial Operating Interface

Operator Panel

Earthing at the Rear Wall

Figure A-39 General diagram 7SJ641A/C (panel surface mounting with detached operator panel)

464

Assignment of Pins of Interfaces, refer to Table 3-35 and 3-36 in Subsection 3.2.1

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

7SJ64
7SJ642A/C
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 Q8 R15 R17 R18 R16 R13 R14 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 R9 R10 R11 R12 K1 K2 K3 K4 K6 K7 K8 K9 K5 K10 K11 K12 K13 K14 K15 K16 IA IB IC I4 Va Vb Vc V4 BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6 BI7 BO12 BI8 BI9 BI10 BI11 BI12 BI13 BI14 BI15 BI16 BI17 BI18 BI19 BI20 BO4 BO5 BO1 BO2 BO3 R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 J1 () J2 (+) J3 J4 K18 K17 J7 J9 J8 J11 J12

A.2 Elementary Diagrams

*)

BO6

BO7 BO8 BO9 B10 B11

Live status contact 1 Jumper ) (NO, NC) Power supply

+
(~ )

F3 F4 F1 F2

1)

Jumper: 12 NO 23 NC

Additional Port Rear Service Port

D C B A

Rear SCADA Port Time Synchronization

Front PC Port

Assignment of Pins of Interfaces, refer to Table 3-35 and 3-36 in Subsection 3.2.1

*) High-duty relays
Earthing at the Rear Wall Interference suppression capacitors MP, 22 nF, 250 V

Front Serial Operating Interface

Operator Panel

Earthing at the Rear Wall

Figure A-40 General diagram 7SJ642A/C (panel surface mounting with detached operator panel)

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

465

A Appendix

7SJ64

7SJ645A/C
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 Q8 R15 R17 R18 R16 R13 R14 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 R9 R10 R11 R12 K1 K2 K3 K4 K6 K7 K8 K9 K5 K10 K11 K12 K13 K14 K15 K16 P1 P2 P3 P4 P6 P7 P8 P9 P5 P10 P11 P12 P13 P14 P15 P16 IA IB IC I4 Va Vb Vc V4 BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6 BO12 BI7 BI8 BI9 BI10 BI11 BI12 BI13 BI14 BI15 BI16 BI17 BI18 BI19 BI20 BI21 BI22 BI23 BI24 BI25 BI26 BI27 BI28 BI29 BI30 BI31 BI32 BI33 BO5 BO1 BO2 BO3 BO4 R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 J1 () J2 (+) J3 J4 K18 K17 J7 J9 J8 J11 J12 N1 () N2 (+) N3 N4 P18 P17 N7 N9 N8 N11 N12 F3 F4
+
(~ )

*)

BO6

BO7 BO8 BO9 B10 B11

BO13 BO14 BO15 BO16 BO17 BO18 BO19 Live status contact 1 Jumper ) (NO, NC) Power supply Additional Port Rear Service Port

1)

Jumper: 12 NO 23 NC

F1 F2 D C B A

Rear SCADA Port Time Synchronization

Assignment of Pins of Interfaces, refer to Table 3-35 and 3-36 in Subsection 3.2.1

*) High-duty relays
Interference suppression capacitors MP, 22 nF, 250 V

Front PC Port Earthing at the Rear Wall

Front Serial Operating Interface

Operator Panel

Earthing at the Rear Wall

Figure A-41 General diagram 7SJ645A/C (panel surface mounting with detached operator panel)

466

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

7SJ64
A.2.3.4 Devices for panel surface mounting without Operator Panel

A.2 Elementary Diagrams

7SJ641F/G
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 Q8 R15 R17 R18 R16 R13 R14 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 R9 R10 R11 R12 K17 K18 J1 J2 J3 J4 J6 J5 J7 J8 J9 J10 J11 J12 IA IB IC I4 Va Vb Vc V4 BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6 BI7 BO4 BO5 BO1 BO2 BO3

R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 K3 K4

BO6 Jumper1) (NO, NC)

BO7 BO8 BO9

K6 K7 K8 K5 K9 K10 K11 K12 K13 K14 K15 K16

1)

Jumper: 12 NO 23 NC

BO10 BO11 BO12 BO13

B8 BI9 BI10 BI11 BI12 BI13 BI14

Live status contact 1 Jumper ) (NO, NC) Power supply

+
(~ )

F3 F4 F1 F2

Additional Port BI15 Rear Service Port

D C B A

Rear SCADA Port Time Synchronization

Front PC Port Earthing at the Rear Wall Serial Operating Interface (to panel or door)

Figure A-42 General diagram 7SJ641F/G (panel surface mounting without operator panel)

Assignment of Pins of Interfaces, refer to Table 3-35 and 3-36 in Subsection 3.2.1

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

467

A Appendix

7SJ64

7SJ642F/G
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 Q8 R15 R17 R18 R16 R13 R14 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 R9 R10 R11 R12 K1 K2 K3 K4 K6 K7 K8 K9 K5 K10 K11 K12 K13 K14 K15 K16 IA IB IC I4 Va Vb Vc V4 BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6 BI7 BO12 BI8 BI9 BI10 BI11 BI12 BI13 BI14 BI15 BI16 BI17 BI18 BI19 BI20 BO4 BO5 BO1 BO2 BO3 R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 J1 () J2 (+) J3 J4 K18 K17 J7 J9 J8 J11 J12

*)

BO6

BO7 BO8 BO9 B10 B11

Live status contact 1 Jumper ) (NO, NC) Power supply

+
(~ )

F3 F4 F1 F2

1)

Jumper: 12 NO 23 NC

Additional Port Rear Service Port

D C B A

Rear SCADA Port Time Synchronization

Front PC Port

Assignment of Pins of Interfaces, refer to Table 3-35 and 3-36 in Subsection 3.2.1

*) High-duty relays
Earthing at the Rear Wall Serial Operating Interface (to panel or door) Interference suppression capacitors MP, 22 nF, 250 V

Figure A-43 General diagram 7SJ642F/G (panel surface mounting without operator panel)

468

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

7SJ64
7SJ645F/G
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 Q8 R15 R17 R18 R16 R13 R14 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 R9 R10 R11 R12 K1 K2 K3 K4 K6 K7 K8 K9 K5 K10 K11 K12 K13 K14 K15 K16 P1 P2 P3 P4 P6 P7 P8 P9 P5 P10 P11 P12 P13 P14 P15 P16 IA IB IC I4 Va Vb Vc V4 BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6 BO12 BI7 BI8 BI9 BI10 BI11 BI12 BI13 BI14 BI15 BI16 BI17 BI18 BI19 BI20 BI21 BI22 BI23 BI24 BI25 BI26 BI27 BI28 BI29 BI30 BI31 BI32 BI33 BO5 BO1 BO2 BO3 BO4 R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 J1 () J2 (+) J3 J4 K18 K17 J7 J9 J8 J11 J12 N1 () N2 (+) N3 N4 P18 P17 N7 N9 N8 N11 N12 F3 F4
+
(~ )

A.2 Elementary Diagrams

*)

BO6

BO7 BO8 BO9 B10 B11

*)
BO13 BO14 BO15 BO16 BO17 BO18 BO19 Live status contact 1 Jumper ) (NO, NC) Power supply Additional Port Rear Service Port

1)

Jumper: 12 NO 23 NC

F1 F2 D C B A

Rear SCADA Port Time Synchronization

Assignment of Pins of Interfaces, refer to Table 3-35 and 3-36 in Subsection 3.2.1

*) High-duty relays
Interference suppression capacitors MP, 22 nF, 250 V

Front PC Port Earthing at the Rear Wall Serial Operating Interface (to panel or door)

Figure A-44 General diagram 7SJ645F/G (panel surface mounting without operator panel)

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

469

A Appendix

7SJ62

A.3
A.3.1

Connection Examples
Connection Examples for 7SJ62

Panel Surface Mounted Flush-mounted/Cubicle 15 14

L

Q1 Q3 Q5

Ia Ib Ic

Q2 Q4 Q6

30 29 28

13
l

12

Q7 7SJ62

I4

Q8

27

Figure A-45 Current connections to three current transformers with a starpoint connection for ground current (Grounded-Wye Connection with residual 3I0 Neutral Current), normal circuit layout appropriate for all networks.

Panel Surface Mounted Flush-mounted/Cubicle 15 14 13

L l

Q1 Q3 Q5

Ia Ib Ic

Q2 Q4 Q6

30 29 28

12

Q7 7SJ62

I4

Q8

27

Figure A-46 Current connections to two current transformers - only for ungrounded or compensated networks.

470

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

7SJ62

A.3 Connection Examples

Panel Surface Mounted Flush-mounted/Cubicle 15 14 13

L l

Q1 Q3 Q5

Ia Ib Ic

Q2 Q4 Q6

30 29 28

27

Q8 7SJ62

I4

Q7

12

Important! Cable shield grounding must be done on the cable side! Note: Change of Address 0201 setting changes polarity of I4 Current Input !

Figure A-47 Current connections to three current transformers and a core balance neutral current transformer for ground current - preferred for effectively or low-resistance grounded networks

Panel Surface Mounted Flush-mounted/Cubicle 15 14 13

L l

Q1 Q3 Q5

Ia Ib Ic

Q2 Q4 Q6

30 29 28

27

Q8 7SJ62

I4

Q7

12

Important! Cable shield grounding must be done on the cable side! Note: Change of Address 0201 setting changes polarity of I4 Current Input !

Figure A-48 Current connections to two current transformers and core balance neutral current transformer for sensitive ground fault detection - only for ungrounded or compensated networks

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

471

A Appendix

7SJ62

Panel Surface Mounted Flush-mounted/Cubicle 15 14 13

L l

Q1 Q3 Q5

Ia Ib Ic

Q2 Q4 Q6

30 29 28

27

Q8 7SJ62

I4

Q7

12

Important! Cable shield grounding must be done on the cable side! Note: Change of Address 0201 setting changes polarity of I4 Current Input !

Figure A-49 Current connections to three current transformers core balance neutral current transformers for sensitive ground fault detection.

A B C
A B a b

Busbar

Panel Surface Mounted Flush-mounted/Cubicle 45 R14 44 R15 43 R17 15 14 13

L l

Va Vb Vc R16 R18 Q2 Q4 Q6 60 59 30 29 28

Q1 Q3 Q5

Ia Ib Ic

12

Q7

I4

Q8

27

7SJ62 A B C

Figure A-50 Current and voltage connections to three current transformers and three voltage transformers (phase-ground), normal circuit layout appropriate for all networks.

472

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

7SJ62

A.3 Connection Examples

A B C
A B da dn a b

Busbar

Panel Surface Mounted Flush-mounted/Cubicle 45 R14 44 R15 59 R18 15 Q1 14 Q3 13 Q5

L l

Va-b Vc-b VG R16 60 R17 43 Q2 Q4 Q6 30 29 28

Ia Ib Ic

12 Q7

I4

Q8

27

7SJ62 A B C

Figure A-51 Current and voltage connections to three current transformers, two voltage transformers (phase-phase) and open delta VT for V4, appropriate for all networks.

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

473

A Appendix

7SJ62
A B C
A BA B

Busbar

ba

Panel Surface Mounted Flush-mounted/Cubicle Va-b Vc-b R16 60 R18 59 Ia Ib Ic Q2 Q4 Q6 30 29 28

45 R14 44 R15 43 R17 15 14 13

L l

Q1 Q3 Q5

12

Q7 7SJ62

I4

Q8

27

Figure A-52 Current and voltage connections to two current transformers and two voltage transformers, for ungrounded or compensated networks, if no directional ground protections is needed.

A B C
A BA B

Busbar
If only 2 VTs are present on system side, device should be connected in open delta, short unused voltage input.

ba

Panel Surface Mounted Flush-mounted/Cubicle Va-b 45 R14 44 R15 43 R17 15 14 13

L l

Vc-b

R16 60 R18 59

Q1 Q3 Q5

Ia Ib Ic

Q2 Q4 Q6

30 29 28

12

Q7 7SJ62

I4

Q8

27

Figure A-53 Current and voltage connections to three current transformers with starpoint connection (Grounded-Wye Connection with residual 3I0 Neutral Current), two voltage transformers, for ungrounded or compensated networks; no directional ground protection, since displacement voltage cannot be calculated

474

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

7SJ62

A.3 Connection Examples

A B C
A B da dn

Busbar

Panel Surface Mounted Flush-mounted/Cubicle 45 R14 44 R15 59 R18 15 14 13

L l

Va-b Vc-b VG Ia Ib
Ic

R16 60 R17 43 Q2 Q4 Q6 Q7 30 29 28 12

Q1 Q3 Q5 Q8 7SJ62

27

I4

Important! Cable shield grounding must be done on the cable side! Note: Change of Address 0201 setting changes polarity of I4 Current Input !

Figure A-54 Current and voltage connections to three current transformers, core balance neutral current transformers and open delta voltage transformers, maximum precision for sensitive ground fault detection.

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

475

A Appendix

7SJ63

A.3.2

Connection Examples for 7SJ63

Panel Surface Mounted Flush-mounted/Cubicle 25 24 23

L l

Q1 Q3 Q5

Ia Ib Ic

Q2 Q4 Q6

50 49 48

22

Q7 7SJ631/2/3

I4

Q8

47

Size 1/2

Panel Surface Mounted Flush-mounted/Cubicle 50 49 48

L l

Q1 Q3 Q5

Ia Ib Ic

Q2 Q4 Q6

100 99 98

47

Q7 7SJ635/6

I4

Q8

97

Size 1/1

Figure A-55 Current connections to three current transformers with a starpoint connection for ground current(Grounded-Wye Connection with residual 3I0 Neutral Current), normal circuit layout appropriate for all networks.

476

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

7SJ63

A.3 Connection Examples

Panel Surface Mounted Flush-mounted/Cubicle 25 24 23

L l

Q1 Q3 Q5

Ia Ib Ic

Q2 Q4 Q6

50 49 48

22

Q7 7SJ631/2/3

I4

Q8

47

Size 1/2

Panel Surface Mounted Flush-mounted/Cubicle 50 49

L

Q1 Q3 Q5

Ia Ib Ic

Q2 Q4 Q6

100 99 98

48
l

47

Q7 7SJ635/6

I4

Q8

97

Size 1/1

Figure A-56 Current connections to two current transformers - only for ungrounded or compensated networks.

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

477

A Appendix

7SJ63

Panel Surface Mounted Flush-mounted/Cubicle 25 24 23

L l

Q1 Q3 Q5

Ia Ib Ic

Q2 Q4 Q6

50 49 48

47

Q8 7SJ631/2/3

I4

Q7

22

Important! Cable shield grounding must be done on the cable side! Note: Change of Address 0201 setting changes polarity of 3I0 Current Input !

Size 1/2

Panel Surface Mounted Flush-mounted/Cubicle 50 49 48 Q1 Q3 Q5 Ia Ib Ic Q2 Q4 Q6 100 99 98

97

Q8 7SJ635/6

I4

Q7

47

Important! Cable shield grounding must be done on the cable side!

K k

Note:

Change of Address 0201 setting changes polarity of 3I0 Current Input !

Size 1/1
Figure A-57 Current connections to three current transformers and a core balance neutral current transformer for ground current preferred for effectively or low-resistance grounded networks

478

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

7SJ63

A.3 Connection Examples

Panel Surface Mounted Flush-mounted/Cubicle 25 24 23

L l

Q1 Q3 Q5

Ia Ib Ic

Q2 Q4 Q6

50 49 48

47

Q8 7SJ631/2/3

I4

Q7

22

Important! Cable shield grounding must be done on the cable side! Note: Change of Address 0201 setting changes polarity of I4 Current Input !

Size 1/2

Panel Surface Mounted Flush-mounted/Cubicle 50 49 48

L l

Q1 Q3 Q5

Ia Ib Ic

Q2 Q4 Q6

100 99 98

97

Q8 7SJ635/6

I4

Q7

47

Important! Cable shield grounding must be done on the cable side! Note: Change of Address 0201 setting changes polarity of I4 Current Input !

Size 1/1
Figure A-58 Current connections to two current transformers and a core balance neutral current transformer for sensitive ground fault detection only for ungrounded or compensated networks

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

479

A Appendix

7SJ63

A B C
A B a b

Busbar

Panel Surface Mounted Flush-mounted/Cubicle 21 R14 46 R15 19 R17 25 24 23

L l

Va Vb Vc R16 R18 Q2 Q4 Q6 20 44 50 49 48

Q1 Q3 Q5

Ia Ib Ic

22

Q7

I4

Q8

47

7SJ631/2/3 A B C

Size 1/2

A B C
A B a b

Busbar

Panel Surface Mounted Flush-mounted/Cubicle 46 R14 96 R15 44 R17 50 49 48

L l

Va Vb Vc R16 R18 Q2 Q4 Q6 45 94 100 99 98

Q1 Q3 Q5

Ia Ib Ic

47

Q7

I4

Q8

97

7SJ635/6 A B C

Size 1/1

Figure A-59 Current and voltage connections to three current transformers and three voltage transformers (phase-ground), normal circuit layout appropriate for all networks.

480

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

7SJ63

A.3 Connection Examples

A B C
A B da dn a b

Busbar

Panel Surface Mounted Flush-mounted/Cubicle 21 R14 46 R15 44 R18 25 Q1 24 Q3 23 Q5

L l

Va-b Vc-b VG R16 20 R17 19 Q2 Q4 Q6 50 49 48

Ia Ib Ic

22 Q7

I4

Q8

47

7SJ631/2/3 A B C

Size 1/2
A B C
A B da dn a b

Busbar

Panel Surface Mounted Flush-mounted/Cubicle 46 R14 96 R15 94 R18 50 Q1 49 Q3 48 Q5

L l

Va-b Vc-b VG R16 45 R17 44 Q2 Q4 Q6 100 99 98

Ia Ib Ic

47 Q7

I4

Q8

97

7SJ635/6 A B C

Size 1/1

Figure A-60 Current and voltage connections to three current transformers, two voltage transformers (phase-phase) and open delta VT for V4, appropriate for all networks.

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

481

A Appendix

7SJ63
A B C
A BA B

Busbar

ba

Panel Surface Mounted Flush-mounted/Cubicle Va-b Vc-b R16 20 R18 44 Ia Ib Ic Q2 Q4 Q6 50 49 48

21 R14 46 R15 19 R17 25 24

L

Q1 Q3 Q5

23
l

22

Q7

I4

Q8

47

7SJ631/2/3 A B C

Size 1/2

A B C
A BA B

Busbar

ba

Panel Surface Mounted Flush-mounted/Cubicle Va-b 46 R14 96 R15 44 R17 50 49

L

Vc-b

R16 45 R18 94

Q1 Q3 Q5

Ia Ib Ic

Q2 Q4 Q6

100 99 98

48
l

47

Q7 7SJ635/6

I4

Q8

97

Size 1/1

Figure A-61 Current and voltage connections to two current transformers and two voltage transformers, for ungrounded or compensated networks, if no directional ground protections is needed.

482

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

7SJ63

A.3 Connection Examples

A B C
A B da dn

Busbar

Panel Surface Mounted Flush-mounted/Cubicle 21 R14 46 R15 44 R18 25 24

L

Va-b Vc-b VG Ia Ib Ic R16 20 R17 19 Q2 Q4 Q6 50 49 48

Q1 Q3 Q5

23
l

7SJ631/2/3
K k

Size 1/2
A B C
A B da dn

Busbar

Panel Surface Mounted Flush-mounted/Cubicle 46 R14 96 R15 94 R18 50 49 48 Q1 Q3 Q5 Va-b Vc-b VG Ia Ib Ic R16 45 R17 44 Q2 Q4 Q6 100 99 98

Important! Cable shield grounding must be done on the cable side!

47

Q8

I4

Q7

22

97

Q8

I4

Q7

47

7SJ635/6

Size 1/1

Figure A-62 Current and voltage connections to three current transformers, core balance neutral current transformers and open delta voltage transformers, maximum precision for sensitive ground fault detection.
7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

Note:

Change of Address 0201 setting changes polarity of INS Current Input !

483

A Appendix

7SJ64

A.3.3

Connection Examples for 7SJ64

Current Transformer Connection Examples

15 14 13
P2 S2

Panel Surface Mounted Flush-mounted/Cubicle Q1 Q3 Q5 Ia Ib Ic Q2 Q4 Q6 30 29 28

P1

S1

12

Q7 7SJ640

I4

Q8

27

Housing Size 1/3

Panel Surface Mounted Flush-mounted/Cubicle (50) 25 (49) 24 (48) 23

P2 S2

Q1 Q3 Q5

Ia Ib Ic

Q2 Q4 Q6

50 (100) 49 (99) 48 (98)

P1

S1

(47) 22

Q7 7SJ641/2/(5)

I4

Q8

47 (97)

Housing Size 1/2 (Figures in Brackets Relating to Size 1/1)

Figure A-63 Current connections to three current transformers with a star-point connection for earth current (residual 3I0 neutral current), normal circuit layout appropriate for all networks

484

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

7SJ64

A.3 Connection Examples

Panel Surface Mounted Flush-mounted/Cubicle 15 14 13

P2 S2

Q1 Q3 Q5

Ia Ib Ic

Q2 Q4 Q6

30 29 28

P1

S1

27

Q8 7SJ640

I4

Q7

12

P2

S2

P1

S1

Important! Cable shield grounding must be done on the cable side! Note: Change of Address 0201 setting changes polarity of I4 Current Input !

Housing Size 1/3

Panel Surface Mounted Flush-mounted/Cubicle (50) 25 (49) 24

P2

Q1 Q3 Q5

Ia Ib Ic

Q2 Q4 Q6

50 (100) 49 (99) 48 (98)

(48) 23
S2

P1

S1

(97) 47

Q8 7SJ641/2/(5)

I4

Q7

22 (47)

P2

S2

P1

S1

Important! Cable shield grounding must be done on the cable side! Note: Change of Address 0201 setting changes polarity of I4 Current Input !

Housing Size 1/2 (Figures in Brackets Relating to Size 1/1)

Figure A-64 Current connections to three current transformers with separate earth current transformer (summation current transformer or cable core balance current transformer)

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

485

A Appendix

7SJ64

Panel Surface Mounted Flush-mounted/Cubicle 15 14 13

P2 S2

Q1 Q3 Q5

Ia Ib Ic

Q2 Q4 Q6

30 29 28

P1

S1

27

Q8 7SJ640

I4

Q7

12

P2

S2

P1

S1

Important! Cable shield grounding must be done on the cable side! Note: Change of Address 0201 setting changes polarity of I4 Current Input !

Housing Size 1/3

Panel Surface Mounted Flush-mounted/Cubicle (50) 25 (49) 24

P2

Q1 Q3 Q5

Ia Ib Ic

Q2 Q4 Q6

50 (100) 49 (99) 48 (98)

(48) 23
S2

P1

S1

(97) 47

Q8 7SJ641/2/(5)

I4

Q7

22 (47)

P2

S2

P1

S1

Important! Cable shield grounding must be done on the cable side! Note: Change of Address 0201 setting changes polarity of I4 Current Input !

Housing Size 1/2 (Figures in Brackets Relating to Size 1/1)

Figure A-65 Current connections to two current transformers with separate earth current transformer (summation current transformer or cable core balance current transformer)

486

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

7SJ64
Voltage Transformer Connection Examples

A.3 Connection Examples

A
B C

Panel Surface Mounted Flush Mounted/Cubicle 45 R15

A B

Va Vb Vc

44 R17 60 R18
a b

59 R16 26 R13 25 R14 7SJ640 U4

Housing Size 1/3

A
B C

Panel Surface Mounted Flush Mounted/Cubicle (45) 20 R15

A B

Va Vb Vc

(44) 19 R17 (94) 44 R18

a b

(95) 45 R16

(46) 21 R13 (96) 46 R14

U4

7SJ641/2/(5)

Housing Size 1/2 (Figures in Brackets Relating to Size 1/1)

Figure A-66 Voltage connections to three Wye-connected voltage transformers (normal circuit layout)

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

487

A Appendix

7SJ64

A
B C

Panel Surface Mounted Flush Mounted/Cubicle 45 R15

A B

Ua Ub Uc

44 R17 60 R18
da dn a b

59 R16 U4

26 R13 25 R14

7SJ640

Housing Size 1/3

A
B C

Panel Surface Mounted Flush Mounted/Cubicle (45) 20 R15

A B

Va Vb Vc

(44) 19 R17 (94) 44 R18

da dn a b

(95) 45 R16 V4

(46) 21 R13 (96) 46 R14

7SJ641/2/(5)

Housing Size 1/2 (Figures in Brackets Relating to Size 1/1)

Figure A-67

Voltage connections to three Wye-connected voltage transformers with additional open-delta windings (dadnwinding)

488

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

7SJ64

A.3 Connection Examples

A
B C
A

da

dn

Panel Surface Mounted Flush Mounted/Cubicle 45 R15 Va Vb Vc

44 R17 60 R18
a b

59 R16 V4

26 R13 25 R14

7SJ640

Housing Size 1/3

A
B C
A

da

dn

Panel Surface Mounted Flush Mounted/Cubicle (45) 20 R15 Va Vb Vc

(44) 19 R17 (94) 44 R18

a b

(95) 45 R16 V4

(46) 21 R13 (96) 46 R14

7SJ641/2/(5)

Housing Size 1/2 (Figures in Brackets Relating to Size 1/1)

Figure A-68 Voltage connections to three Wye-connected voltage transformers with additional open-delta windings (dadnwinding) from the busbar

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

489

A Appendix

7SJ64

A
B C
A

(any voltage)
a

Panel Surface Mounted Flush Mounted/Cubicle 45 R15 Va Vb Vc

44 R17 60 R18
a b

59 R16 V4

26 R13 25 R14

7SJ640

Housing Size 1/3

A
B C
A

(any voltage)
a

Panel Surface Mounted Flush Mounted/Cubicle (45) 20 R15 Va Vb Vc

(44) 19 R17 (94) 44 R18

a b

(95) 45 R16 V4

(46) 21 R13 (96) 46 R14

7SJ641/2/(5)

Housing Size 1/2 (Figures in Brackets Relating to Size 1/1)

Figure A-69 Voltage connections to three Wye-connected voltage transformers and additionally to any phase-to-phase voltage (for synchronism check for example)

490

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

7SJ64

A.3 Connection Examples

A
B C

Panel Surface Mounted Flush Mounted/Cubicle 45 R15

A B

Va-b Vb-c

44 R17 60 R18
da dn a b

59 R16 V4

26 R13 25 R14

7SJ640

Housing Size 1/3

A
B C

Panel Surface Mounted Flush Mounted/Cubicle (45) 20 R15

A B

Va-b Vb-c

(44) 19 R17 (94) 44 R18

da dn a b

(95) 45 R16 V4

(46) 21 R13 (96) 46 R14

7SJ641/2/(5)

Housing Size 1/2 (Figures in Brackets Relating to Size 1/1)

Figure A-70

Voltage connections to three Wye-connected voltage transformers with additional open-delta windings (dadnwinding)

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

491

A Appendix

7SJ64

A
B C
A

(any desired voltage)

a

Panel Surface Mounted Flush Mounted/Cubicle Va-b Vc-b

45 R15 44 R17

B A

b a

60 R18 59 R16 V4

26 R13 25 R14

7SJ640

Housing Size 1/3

A
B C
A

(any desired voltage)

a

Panel Surface Mounted Flush Mounted/Cubicle Ua-b Uc-b

(45) 58 R15 (44) 57 R17

B A

b a

(94) 56 R18 (95) 55 R16 (46) 54 R13 (96) 83 R14 7SJ641/2/(5) U4

Housing Size 1/2 (Figures in Brackets Relating to Size 1/1)

Figure A-71 VT circuits with 2 VTs and any desired voltage from the bus-bar VTs (phase phase)

492

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

A.3 Connection Examples

A.3.4

Connection Examples for RTD-Box

1

7SJ62/63/64

Port C )

7XV5650 T1 FO/RS485 Converter

A B

A A B B A A B B

7XV566 RTD-Box
Bus number: 00 A and B jumpers for the terminating resistors

7SJ62/63/64

A Port C2) B
*) for 7SJ64 optionally port C or D

7XV566 RTD-Box
Bus number: 00 A and B jumpers for the terminating resistors

Figure A-72 Simplex operation with one RTD-Box above: optical design (1 FO); below: design with RS485

7SJ62/63/64

Port C1)

R1 7XV5650 T1 FO/RS485 Converter

A B

A A B B A A B B

7XV566 RTD-Box
Bus number: 01 A and B jumpers for the terminating resistors

7SJ62/63/64

A Port C2) B
*) for 7SJ64 optionally port C or D

7XV566 RTD-Box
Bus number: 01 A and B jumpers for the terminating resistors

Figure A-73 Half-duplex operation with one RTD-Box above: optical design (2 FOs); below: design with RS485

7SJ62/63/64

Port C1)

R1 7XV5650 T1 FO/RS485 Converter

A B

A B A A B B

7XV566 RTD-Box
Busnummer: 01

7XV566 RTD-Box
Bus number: 02 A and B jumpers for the terminating resistors

7SJ62/63/64

A Port C2) B

A B A A

7XV566 RTD-Box
Bus number: 01

7XV566 RTD-Box
Bus number: 02 A and B jumpers for the terminating resistors

1) for 7SJ64 port D 2) for 7SJ64 optionally port C or D

B B

Figure A-74 Half-duplex operation with two RTD-Boxes above: optical design (2 FOs); below: design with RS485

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

493

A Appendix

A.4
A.4.1

Default Settings
LED Displays
The LED indication presettings which are preset in the device when it leaves the factory are summarised in Table A-1. Please take into consideration that LED8 to LED14 is not available in the devices in housings of size 1/3.

Table A-1 LED LED 1 LED 2 LED 3 LED 4 LED 5 LED 6

LED indication presettings Descriptive Text Relay Tripped Pickup Phase A Pickup Phase B Pickup Phase C Pickup G Measurement Failure Brief Text Relay TRIP 50/51 Ph A PU 67 A picked up 50/51 Ph B PU 67 B picked up 50/51 Ph C PU 67 C picked up Message # 511 1762 2692 1763 2693 1764 2694 Comments One the protective functions initiated a trip. Pickup by A Element Pickup by B Element Pickup by C Element Pickup by Ground Element Monitoring Message

50N/51N Pickedup 1765 67 N picked up 2695 Failure I Fail I balance Fail V balance Fail Ph. Seq. I Fail Ph. Seq. V Bkr OPENED >Door open 162 163 167 175 176

LED 7 LED 8 LED 9 LED 10

Breaker OPENED Cabinet door open

Not Configured Internal message made in CFC Individual message coupled via BI Individual message coupled via BI Not Configured

Spring not charged >CB wait

LED 11 to 14

A.4.2

Binary Inputs
The presettings of the binary inputs are listed (dependent on the ordering variant) in Tables A-2 to A-4.

494

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

A.4 Default Settings

Positions that are not indicated in the following tables have no presetting.
Table A-2 Binary input presettings for all devices and ordering variants LCD Text >BLOCK 50-2 >BLOCK 50N-2 >Reset LED >Light on >52-b >52-a Function No. 1721 1724 0005 ---4602 4601 Remarks Blocking the high-set stage of the overcurrent protection, Hactive Reset of LED indicators, Hactive Switch on light for device display, Hactive Circuit breaker open, Hactive Circuit breaker closed, Hactive

Binary Input BI1

BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5

1 2

) only devices without power relays ) only devices with power relays

Table A-3

Further binary input presettings for 7SJ631* LCD Text Disc.Swit. OPEN Disc.Swit. CLOSE GndSwit. OPEN GndSwit. CLOSE >CB Ready >DoorClose Function No. ------------------ Remarks Disconnector switch open Disconnector switch closed Ground switch open Ground switch closed Spring charged Door closed no presetting

Binary Input BI6 BI7 BI 21 BI 22 BI 23 BI 24 (further)

Table A-4

Further binary input presettings for 7SJ632*, 7SJ633*, 7SJ635* , 7SJ636*, 7SJ641*, 7SJ642* and 7SJ645* LCD Text Disc.Swit. OPEN Disc.Swit. CLOSE GndSwit. OPEN GndSwit. CLOSE >CB Ready >DoorClose Function No. ------------------ Remarks Disconnector switch open Disconnector switch closed Ground switch open Ground switch closed Spring charged Door closed no presetting

Binary Input BI 6 BI 7 BI 8 BI 9 BI 11 BI 12 (further)

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

495

A Appendix

A.4.3

Binary Outputs
The presettings of the binary outputs are listed (dependent on the ordering variant) in Tables A-5 to A-8. The Elementary Diagrams in Appendix A, A.2 show which binary outputs can be used as accelerated binary outputs, i. e. suited for a fast command tripping. Positions that are not indicated in the following tables have no presetting.
Table A-5 Binary Output BO1 BO2 BO3 Binary Output presetting for all ordering variants of 7SJ62 and 7SJ63 LCD Text Relay TRIP 52Breaker OPEN 52Breaker CLOSE 79 Close 52Breaker CLOSE 79 Close. Function No. 0511 ------2851 ---2851 Remarks Relay (general) TRIP command, unlatched Relay TRIP Breaker CLOSE Auto Reclosing Command Breaker CLOSE Auto Reclosing Command

Table A-6 Binary Output BO4

Further binary output presettings for 7SJ62** LCD Text Failure S I Fail I balance Fail V balance Fail Ph. Seq. V Fail Ph. Seq. I Relay PICKUP Function No. 0162 0163 0167 0176 0175 0501 Remarks

Monitoring

BO7

Relay (general) TRIP command, unlatched

Tabelle A-7 Binary Output BO11 BO12 BO13 BO14 BO15

Further binary output presettings for all 7SJ63** LCD Text GndSwit. OPEN GndSwit. CLOSE Disc.Swit. OPEN Disc.Swit. CLOSE Failure S I Fail I balance Fail V balance Fail Ph. Seq. V Fail Ph. Seq. I Function No. ------------0162 0163 0167 0176 0175 Remarks Ground switch open Ground switch closed Disconnector switch open Disconnector switch closed

Monitoring

496

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

A.4 Default Settings

Tabelle A-8 Binary Output BO10

Further binary output presettings for 7SJ632*, 7SJ633*, 7SJ635* and 7SJ636* LCD Text Relay PICKUP Function No. 0501 Remarks Relay (general) PICKUP, unlatched

Tabelle A-9 Binary Output BO3 BO4 BO5

Binary Output presetting for all ordering variants of 7SJ64** LCD Text Relay TRIP 52Breaker OPEN 52Breaker CLOSE 79 Close 52Breaker CLOSE 79 Close. Function No. 0511 ------2851 ---2851 Remarks Relay (general) TRIP command, unlatched Relay TRIP Breaker CLOSE Auto Reclosing Command Breaker CLOSE Auto Reclosing Command

Table A-10 Binary Output BO1 BO2 BO10 BO11

Further binary output presettings for 7SJ641*, 7SJ642* and 7SJ645* LCD Text GndSwit. OPEN GndSwit. CLOSE Disc.Swit. OPEN Disc.Swit. CLOSE Function No. ------------Remarks Ground switch open Ground switch closed Disconnector switch open Disconnector switch closed

A.4.4

Function Keys
Applies for all devices and ordered variants:
Function Keys F1 F2 F3 F4 Presetting Display of operational indications Display of the primary operational measured values Display of the fault indications of the last fault event No presetting

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

497

A Appendix

A.4.5

Standard Default Display

1 2 3 E 0.50kA 0.50kA 0.50kA 0.0A 12 23 31 E ULE 99.6 99.4 99.8 6.31kV 6.30kV 6.29kV 2V ULL 99.5 99.3 99.7 S: P: Q: F: 0.0MVA U12: 0kV 0.0MW IL2: 0A 0.0MVAR --cos: ---

Default Display of the 4-Line Display

[%] I L1 78.4 L2 78.1 L3 78.9 L1 L2 L3 E 78.4A 78.1A 78.9A 0.0A

I1:123.4A f: 50.01Hz U1:10.3kV cos:0.85 P: 1.1MW Q 0.2MVAR L1 L2 L3 E 78.4A 78.1A 78.9A 0.0A MAX 81.2A MAX 81.0A MAX 81.9A

U1=10.0kV dU= 0V f1=50.11Hz df= 13mHz U2=10.0kV d=0.013 f1=50.02Hz

Figure A-75 Default display for 4-line display

only for 7SJ64

Standard Default Display of the Graphic Display

[%] L1 L2 L3

IL 0.0 0.0 0.0 I

ULE 0.0 0.0 0.0

ULL 0.0 0.0 0.0 U 0kV 0kV 0kV 0kV 0kV 0kV 0kV

12 23 31 L1 L2 L3 E L1 L2 L3 S: P: Q: F: cos:
Figure A-76 Default display of the graphic display

0A 0A 0A 0A I-MIN 0A 0A 0A

I-MAX 0A 0A 0A 0.0MVA 0.0MW 0.0MVAR -----

498

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

A.4 Default Settings

A.4.6

Spontaneous Display Annunciations

The spontaneous annunciations that can be viewed on the device front serve to display the most important data about a fault. The in appear automatically in the display, after a general pickup of the device, in the sequence shown in Figure A-77.

Text Display

501 picked up 501 TRIP T Pickup= 320ms T OFF = 197ms

Protective Function that picked up first; Protective Function that dropped out last; Running time from general pickup to dropout; Running time from general pickup to the first trip command

Figure A-77 Display of Spontaneous Annunciations in the HMI Example

Graphic Display

All devices featuring a graphic display allow you to select whether or not to view automatically the most important fault data on the display after a general pick-up (see Subsection 2.20.1.2). The information corresponds to those of Figure A-77.

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

499

A Appendix

A.4.7

Pre-Defined CFC Charts

Some CFC Charts are already supplied with the SIPROTEC device. Depending on the variant the following charts may be implemented:

Device and System Logic

The NEGATOR block assigns the input signal DataStop directly to an output. This is not directly possible without the interconnection of this block.

IN: Device, General >DataStop SP

OUT: Control Device UnblockDT IntSP

OUT: Device, General Feeder gnd IntSP IN: Control Device GndSwit. DP

IN: Control Device, 52 Breaker DP OUT: Device, General Brk OPENEDIntSP IN: P.System Data 2 Relay TRIP OUT Figure A-78 Device and System Logic

Set points

Using modules on the running sequence measured value processing, a low current monitor for the three phase currents is implemented. The output message is set high as soon as one of the three phase currents falls below the set threshold:

IN: Set points 37-1 LV IN: Measurement Ia = MV IN: Set points 37-1 LV IN: Measurement Ib = MV IN: Set points 37-1 LV IN: Measurement Ic = MV
Figure A-79 Undercurrent monitoring (ANSI 37-1)

OUT: Set points SP. 37-1 alarm OUT

500

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

A.4 Default Settings

Blocks of the task level MW_BEARB (measured value processing) are used to implement the overcurrent monitoring and the power monitoring.

IN: Set points I Admd> LV IN: Demand meter Ia dmd= MV

OUT: Set points SP. I A dmd> OUT

IN: Set points I Bdmd> LV IN: Demand meter Ib dmd= MV

OUT: Set points SP. I B dmd> OUT

IN: Set points I Cdmd> LV IN: Demand meter Ic dmd= MV

OUT: Set points SP. I C dmd> OUT

IN: Set points I1dmd> LV IN: Demand meter I1 dmd= MV Figure A-80 Overcurrent monitoring

OUT: Set points SP. I1 dmd> OUT

IN: Set points |Pdmd|> LV

OUT: Set points SP. |Pdmd|> OUT

IN: Demand meter P dmd = MV

IN: Set points |Qdmd|> LV

OUT: Set points SP. |Qdmd|> OUT

IN: Demand meter Q dmd = MV

IN: Set points |Sdmd|> LV IN: Demand meter S dmd = MV

OUT: Set points SP. |Sdmd|> OUT

IN: Set points |PF|< LU

OUT: Set points SP. PF(55)alarm OUT

IN: Measurement PF = MV Figure A-81 Power monitoring

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

501

A Appendix

Interlocking

Standard Interlocking for three switching devices Worksheet 1:

IN: Control Device 52Breaker DP IN: Control Device 52Breaker DP

Interlocking .15 X1 Interlocking .14 X1 Interlocking .13 X1

Interlocking .15 X2

IN: Control Device Disc.Swit. DP IN: Control Device Disc.Swit. DP IN: Control Device GndSwit. DP
Interlocking .15 X3 Interlocking .14 X3 Interlocking .14 X2 Interlocking .13 X3

IN: Control Device GndSwit. DP

IN: Process Data >CB ready SP IN: Process Data >DoorClose SP OUT: Control Device 52 Close IntSP

Worksheet 2 (continuation of Worksheet 1):

IN: Process Data >DoorClose SP

OUT:Control Device 52 Open IntSP

Interlocking. 1 Y Annunciation Interlocking. 8 Y Interlocking. 5 Y Annunciation IN: Process Data >DoorClose SP Interlocking. 1 Y Annunciation Interlocking. 8 Y Interlocking. 10 Y IN: Process Data >DoorClose SP

OUT:Control Device Disc.Close IntSP

OUT:Control Device Disc.Open IntSP

Interlocking. 1 Y Annunciation Interlocking. 3 Y Annunciation Interlocking. 10 Y IN: Process Data >DoorClose SP

OUT: Control Device GndSw Cl. IntSP OUT: Control Device GndSw Open IntSP

Figure A-82 Standard Interlocking For Circuit Breaker, Disconnector and Ground Switch

502

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

A.5 Interoperability List

A.5
1. 1.1 X 1.2 X X 1.3 X 2.

Interoperability List
Physical layer Electrical interface EIA RS-485 Optical interface Glass fibre Plastic fibre Transmission speed 9600 bit/s Link layer X Number of loads for one equipment: 32 F-SMA type connector BFOC/2,5 type connector 19200 bit/s

X X

There are no choices for the link layer 3. 3.1 3.2 X 3.3 3.3.1 X X X 3.3.2 3.3.3 3.3.4 3.3.5 3.3.6 3.3.7 Application layer Transmission mode for application data Mode 1 (least significant octet first) as defined in 4.10 of IEC 60870-5-4 Common address of ASDU One common address of ADSU (identical with station address) More than one common address of ASDU

Selection of standard information numbers in monitor direction System functions in monitor direction 0 End of general interrogation 0 Time synchronization X 2 Reset FCB 3 Reset CU X 4 Start/restart 5 Power on X

see separate table in the device manual (Information List in the following section)

Measurands in monitor direction 144 Measurand I 146 Measurand I, V, P, Q 148 Measurands IL1,2,3, VL1,2,3, P, Q, f Generic functions in monitor direction 240 Read headings of all defined groups 243 Read directory of a single entry 245 End of general interrogation generic data 250 Write entry with execution

145 147

Measurands I, V Measurands IN, VEN

3.3.8

241 244 249 251

Read values of all entries of one group Read value of a single entry Write entry with confirmation Write entry aborted

3.4 3.4.1 X 3.4.2 X X

Selection of standard information numbers in control direction System functions in control direction 0 Initiation of general interrogation 0 Time synchronization X General commands in control direction 16 Auto-recloser on / off 17 Teleprotection on / off 18 Protection on / off 19 LED reset X

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

503

A Appendix

X X 3.4.3

23 25

Activate characteristic 1 Activate characteristic 3

X X

24 26

Activate characteristic 2 Activate characteristic 4

Generic functions in control direction 240 Read headings of all defined groups 243 Read directory of a single entry 245 General interrogation of generic data 249 Write entry with confirmation 251 Write entry abort Basic application functions Test mode Disturbance data Private data Miscellaneous X

241 244 248 250

Read values of all entries of one group Read value of a single entry Write entry Write entry with execution

3.5 X X X 3.6

Blocking of monitor direction Generic services

Measurand Current L1 Current L2 Current L3 Voltage L1-E Voltage L2-E Voltage L3-E Voltage L1-L2 Active power P Reactive power Q Frequency f

max. value = rated value x 1.2 2.4 X

504

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

A.6 Protocol-dependent functions

A.6

Protocol-dependent functions
IEC 608705103 Profibus FMS Profibus DP DNP3.0 Modbus ASCII/ RTU Yes Yes Additional interface (optional) Yes Yes Yes

Protocol Function Operational measured values Metered values Fault recording

Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes

Yes Yes

No. Only via addi- No. Only via addi- No. Only via additional service inter- tional service inter- tional service interface face face No. Only via addi- No. Only via addi- No. Only via additional service inter- tional service inter- tional service interface face face Pre-defined Userdefined messages in CFC Pre-defined Userdefined messages in CFC Via protocol; DCF77/IRIG B; Interface; Binary input Yes Pre-defined Userdefined messages in CFC Via DCF77/IRIG B; Interface; Binary input

Remote relay setting

No. Only via addi- Yes tional service interface Yes Yes

Yes

User-defined messages and switching objects

Yes

Time synchronization Via protocol; DCF77/IRIG B; Interface; Binary input Messages with time stamp Commissioning aids Measured value indication blocking Yes Yes

Via protocol; Via DCF77/IRIG B; DCF77/IRIG B; Interface; Interface; Binary input Binary input Yes No

No

Yes

Yes

No

No

No

Yes

Creating test mes- Yes sages Physical mode Transmission mode Baudrate Type Asynchronous Cyclically/Event 4800 to 38400 RS232 RS485 Optical fibre

Yes

No

No

No

Yes

Asynchronous Cyclically/ Event Up to 1.5 MBaud RS485 Optical fibre Single ring Double ring

Asynchronous Cyclically Up to 1.5 MBaud RS485 Optical fibre Double ring

Asynchronous Cyclically/Event 4800 to 19200 RS485 Optical fibre

Asynchronous Cyclically 2400 to 19200 RS485 Optical fibre

4800 to 115200 RS232 RS485 Optical fibre

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

505

A Appendix

A.7

Functions Overview

Note: Addresses may be missing depending on the type and the ordered variant
Addr. 103 104 112 Setting Title Grp Chge OPTION OSC. FAULT REC. Charac. Phase Setting Options Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Definite Time only Time Overcurrent Curve IEC Time Overcurrent Curve ANSI User Defined Pickup Curve User Defined Pickup and Reset Curve Disabled Definite Time only Time Overcurrent Curve IEC Time Overcurrent Curve ANSI User Defined Pickup Curve User Defined Pickup and Reset Curve Disabled Definite Time only Time Overcurrent Curve IEC Time Overcurrent Curve ANSI User Defined Pickup Curve User Defined Pickup and Reset Curve Disabled Definite Time only Time Overcurrent Curve IEC Time Overcurrent Curve ANSI User Defined Pickup Curve User Defined Pickup and Reset Curve Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Definite Time only User Defined Pickup Curve Disabled with Ignd (measured) with 3I0 (calculated) with Ignd,sensitive (measured) Default Setting Disabled Disabled Definite Time only Comments Setting Group Change Option Oscillographic Fault Records 50/51

113

Charac. Ground

Definite Time only

50N/51N

115

67/67-TOC

Definite Time only

67, 67-TOC

116

67N/67N-TOC

Definite Time only

67N, 67N-TOC

117 122 131

Coldload Pickup InrushRestraint Sens. Gnd Fault

Disabled Disabled Disabled

Cold Load Pickup 2nd Harmonic Inrush Restraint (sensitive) Ground fault

133

INTERM.EF

Disabled

Intermittent earth fault protection

506

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

A.7 Functions Overview

Addr. 140 46

Setting Title

Setting Options Disabled Time Overcurrent Curve ANSI Time Overcurrent Curve IEC Definite Time only Disabled Enabled Disabled Without ambient temperature measurement With ambient temperature measurement Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled ASYN/SYNCHRON SYNCHROCHECK Disabled ASYN/SYNCHRON SYNCHROCHECK Disabled ASYN/SYNCHRON SYNCHROCHECK Disabled ASYN/SYNCHRON SYNCHROCHECK Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled with 2 Binary Inputs with 1 Binary Input Disabled Port C Port D

Default Setting Disabled

Comments 46 Negative Sequence Protection

141 142

48 49

Disabled Disabled

48 Startup Supervision of Motors 49 Thermal Overload Protection

143 150 154 161

66 #of Starts 27/59 81 O/U 25 Function 1

Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

66 Startup Counter for Motors 27, 59 Under/Overvoltage Protection 81 Over/Underfrequency Protection 25 Function group 1

162

25 Function 2

Disabled

25 Function group 2

163

25 Function 3

Disabled

25 Function group 3

164

25 Function 4

Disabled

25 Function group 4

170 171 180 182

50BF 79 Auto Recl. Fault Locator 74 Trip Ct Supv

Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

50BF Breaker Failure Protection 79 Auto-Reclose Function Fault Locator 74TC Trip Circuit Supervision

190

RTD-BOX INPUT

Disabled

External Temperature Input

191

RTD CONNECTION 6 RTD simplex operation 6 RTD half duplex operation 12 RTD half duplex operation

6 RTD simplex operation

Ext. Temperature Input Connection Type

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

507

A Appendix

A.8

Settings

Note: The following table lists all data which are available in the maximum complement of the devices. Dependent on the ordered model, only those data may be present which are valid for the individual version. In the list below, the setting ranges and default setting values for the pickup currents are for a device with a nominal current rating IN = 1 A. For a nominal current rating IN = 5 A, multiply the Setting Options values and Default Setting values by 5. Consider the current transformer ratios when setting the device with primary values. Addresses to which the letter A is attached can only be modified by using the DIGSI 4 software at Further Settings.

Addr. 201 202 203 204 205 206A 209 210A 211A 212 213

Setting Title CT Starpoint Vnom PRIMARY Vnom SECONDARY CT PRIMARY CT SECONDARY Vph / Vdelta PHASE SEQ. TMin TRIP CMD

Function Power System Data 1 Power System Data 1 Power System Data 1 Power System Data 1 Power System Data 1 Power System Data 1 Power System Data 1 Power System Data 1

Setting Options towards Line towards Busbar 0.10..800.00 kV 100..225 V 10..50000 A 1A 5A 1.00..3.00 ABC ACB 0.01..32.00 sec 0.01..32.00 sec 0.04..1.00 A Van, Vbn, Vcn Vab, Vbc, VGnd Van, Vbn, Vcn, VGnd Van, Vbn, Vcn, VSyn 50 Hz 60 Hz km Miles 1..50000 A

Default Setting towards Line 12.00 kV 100 V 100 A 1A 1.73 ABC 0.15 sec 1.00 sec 0.04 A Van, Vbn, Vcn

Comments CT Starpoint Rated Primary Voltage Rated Secondary Voltage (L-L) CT Rated Primary Current CT Rated Secondary Current Matching ratio Phase-VT To Open-Delta-VT Phase Sequence Minimum TRIP Command Duration Maximum Close Command Duration Closed Breaker Min. Current Threshold VT Connection

TMax CLOSE CMD Power System Data 1 BkrClosed I MIN VT Connection Power System Data 1 Power System Data 1

214 215 217

Rated Frequency Distance Unit Ignd-CT PRIM

Power System Data 1 Power System Data 1 Power System Data 1

50 Hz km 60 A

Rated Frequency Distance measurement unit Ignd-CT rated primary current

508

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

A.8 Settings

Addr. 218 235A 276 302

Setting Title Ignd-CT SEC ATEX100 TEMP. UNIT CHANGE

Function Power System Data 1 Power System Data 1 Power System Data 1 Change Group

Setting Options 1A 5A NO YES Degree Celsius Degree Fahrenheit Group A Group B Group C Group D Binary Input Protocol Save with Pickup Save with TRIP Start with TRIP Fault event Power System fault 0.30..5.00 sec 0.05..0.50 sec 0.05..0.50 sec 0.10..5.00 sec; Display Targets on every Pickup Display Targets on TRIP only YES NO Ignd (measured) 3I0 (calculated) 0.10..800.00 kV 10..50000 A -0.33..7.00 -0.33..7.00

Default Setting 1A NO Degree Celsius Group A

Comments Ignd-CT rated secondary current Storage of th. Replicas w/o Power Supply Unit of temparature measurement Change to Another Setting Group

401

WAVEFORMTRIG- Oscillographic GER Fault Records WAVEFORM DATA MAX. LENGTH PRE. TRIG. TIME POST REC. TIME BinIn CAPT.TIME FltDisp.LED/LCD Oscillographic Fault Records Oscillographic Fault Records Oscillographic Fault Records Oscillographic Fault Records Oscillographic Fault Records Device, General Settings

Save with Pickup

Waveform Capture

402 403 404 405 406 610

Fault event 2.00 sec 0.25 sec 0.10 sec 0.50 sec Display Targets on every Pickup

Scope of Waveform Data Max. length of a Waveform Capture Record Captured Waveform Prior to Trigger Captured Waveform after Event Capture Time via Binary Input Fault Display on LED / LCD

611 613A 1101 1102 1103 1104 1105 1106

Spont. FltDisp. 50N/51N/67N w. FullScaleVolt. FullScaleCurr. RG/RL Ratio XG/XL Ratio x' x'

Device, General Settings Power System Data 1 Power System Data 2 Power System Data 2 Power System Data 2 Power System Data 2 Power System Data 2 Power System Data 2

NO Ignd (measured) 12.00 kV 100 A 1.00 1.00

Spontaneous display of flt.annunciations 50N/51N/67N Ground Overcurrent with Measurem:FullScaleVoltage(Equipm.rating) Measurem:FullScaleCurrent(Equipm.rating) RG/RL - Ratio of Gnd to Line Resistance XG/XL - Ratio of Gnd to Line Reactance x' - Line Reactance per length unit x' - Line Reactance per length unit

0.010..10.000 Ohm / 1.000 Ohm / mile mile 0.005..6.215 Ohm / km 0.620 Ohm / km

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

509

A Appendix

Addr. 1107 1201

Setting Title I MOTOR START FCT 50/51

Function Power System Data 2 50/51 Phase/ Ground Overcurrent 50/51 Phase/ Ground Overcurrent 50/51 Phase/ Ground Overcurrent 50/51 Phase/ Ground Overcurrent 50/51 Phase/ Ground Overcurrent 50/51 Phase/ Ground Overcurrent 50/51 Phase/ Ground Overcurrent 50/51 Phase/ Ground Overcurrent 50/51 Phase/ Ground Overcurrent 50/51 Phase/ Ground Overcurrent 50/51 Phase/ Ground Overcurrent

Setting Options 0.60..10.00 A ON OFF 0.10..35.00 A;

Default Setting 2.50 A ON

Comments Motor Start Current (Block 49, Start 48) 50, 51 Phase Time Overcurrent 50-2 Pickup

1202

50-2 PICKUP

2.00 A

1203

50-2 DELAY

0.00..60.00 sec;

0.00 sec

50-2 Time Delay

1204

50-1 PICKUP

0.10..35.00 A;

1.00 A

50-1 Pickup

1205

50-1 DELAY

0.00..60.00 sec;

0.50 sec

50-1 Time Delay

1207

51 PICKUP

0.10..4.00 A

1.00 A

51 Pickup

1208

51 TIME DIAL

0.05..3.20 sec;

0.50 sec

51 Time Dial

1209

51 TIME DIAL

0.50..15.00;

5.00

51 Time Dial

1210

51 Drop-out

Instantaneous Disk Emulation Normal Inverse Very Inverse Extremely Inverse Long Inverse Very Inverse Inverse Short Inverse Long Inverse Moderately Inverse Extremely Inverse Definite Inverse 50-2 instantaneously 50 -1 instantaneously 51 instantaneously Inactive

Disk Emulation

Drop-out characteristic

1211

51 IEC CURVE

Normal Inverse

IEC Curve

1212

51 ANSI CURVE

Very Inverse

ANSI Curve

1213A MANUAL CLOSE

50/51 Phase/ Ground Overcurrent

50-2 instantaneously

Manual Close Mode

510

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

A.8 Settings

Addr.

Setting Title

Function 50/51 Phase/ Ground Overcurrent 50/51 Phase/ Ground Overcurrent 50/51 Phase/ Ground Overcurrent 50/51 Phase/ Ground Overcurrent 50/51 Phase/ Ground Overcurrent 50/51 Phase/ Ground Overcurrent 50/51 Phase/ Ground Overcurrent 50/51 Phase/ Ground Overcurrent 50/51 Phase/ Ground Overcurrent 50/51 Phase/ Ground Overcurrent 50/51 Phase/ Ground Overcurrent 50/51 Phase/ Ground Overcurrent 50/51 Phase/ Ground Overcurrent 50/51 Phase/ Ground Overcurrent

Setting Options Always with 79 active 1.00..20.00 I / Ip; 0.01..999.00 Time Dial 0.05..0.95 I / Ip; 0.01..999.00 Time Dial ON OFF 0.05..35.00 A;

Default Setting Always

Comments 50-2 active

1214A 50-2 active

1230

51/51N

51/51N

1231

MofPU Res T/Tp

Multiple of Pickup <-> T/Tp

1301

FCT 50N/51N

ON

50N, 51N Ground Time Overcurrent 50N-2 Pickup

1302

50N-2 PICKUP

0.50 A

1303

50N-2 DELAY

0.00..60.00 sec;

0.10 sec

50N-2 Time Delay

1304

50N-1 PICKUP

0.05..35.00 A;

0.20 A

50N-1 Pickup

1305

50N-1 DELAY

0.00..60.00 sec;

0.50 sec

50N-1 Time Delay

1307

51N PICKUP

0.05..4.00 A

0.20 A

51N Pickup

1308

51N TIME DIAL

0.05..3.20 sec;

0.20 sec

51N Time Dial

1309

51N TIME DIAL

0.50..15.00;

5.00

51N Time Dial

1310

51N RESET

Instantaneous Disk Emulation Normal Inverse Very Inverse Extremely Inverse Long Inverse Very Inverse Inverse Short Inverse Long Inverse Moderately Inverse Extremely Inverse Definite Inverse

Disk Emulation

Drop-Out Characteristic

1311

51N IEC CURVE

Normal Inverse

IEC Curve

1312

51N ANSI CURVE

Very Inverse

ANSI Curve

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

511

A Appendix

Addr.

Setting Title

Function 50/51 Phase/ Ground Overcurrent

Setting Options

Default Setting

Comments Manual Close Mode

1313A MANUALCLOSEMODE

50N-2 instantane50N-2 instantaneously ously 50N-1 instantaneously 51N instantaneously Inactive Always with 79 Active 1.00..20.00 I / Ip; 0.01..999.00 Time Dial 0.05..0.95 I / Ip; 0.01..999.00 Time Dial OFF ON 0.10..35.00 A; OFF Always

1314A 50N-2 active

50/51 Phase/ Ground Overcurrent 50/51 Phase/ Ground Overcurrent 50/51 Phase/ Ground Overcurrent 67 Directional Phase/Ground Overcurrent 67 Directional Phase/Ground Overcurrent 67 Directional Phase/Ground Overcurrent 67 Directional Phase/Ground Overcurrent 67 Directional Phase/Ground Overcurrent 67 Directional Phase/Ground Overcurrent 67 Directional Phase/Ground Overcurrent 67 Directional Phase/Ground Overcurrent 67 Directional Phase/Ground Overcurrent 67 Directional Phase/Ground Overcurrent

50N-2 active

1330

50N/51N

50N/51N

1331

MofPU Res T/TEp

Multiple of Pickup <-> T/ TEp 67, 67-TOC Phase Time Overcurrent 67-2 Pickup

1501

FCT 67/67-TOC

1502

67-2 PICKUP

2.00 A

1503

67-2 DELAY

0.00..60.00 sec;

0.10 sec

67-2 Time Delay

1504

67-1 PICKUP

0.10..35.00 A;

1.00 A

67-1 Pickup

1505

67-1 DELAY

0.00..60.00 sec;

0.50 sec

67-1Time Delay

1507

67-TOC PICKUP

0.10..4.00 A

1.00 A

67-TOC Pickup

1508

67 TIME DIAL

0.05..3.20 sec;

0.50 sec

67-TOC Time Dial

1509

67 TIME DIAL

0.50..15.00;

5.00

67-TOC Time Dial

1510

67-TOC Drop-out

Instantaneous Disk Emulation Normal Inverse Very Inverse Extremely Inverse Long Inverse

Disk Emulation

Drop-Out Characteristic

1511

67- IEC CURVE

Normal Inverse

IEC Curve

512

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

A.8 Settings

Addr. 1512

Setting Title 67- ANSI CURVE

Function 67 Directional Phase/Ground Overcurrent

Setting Options Very Inverse Inverse Short Inverse Long Inverse Moderately Inverse Extremely Inverse Definite Inverse

Default Setting Very Inverse

Comments ANSI Curve

1513A MANUALCLOSEMODE

67 Directional Phase/Ground Overcurrent

67-2 instantane67-2 instantaneously ously 67-1 instantaneously 67-TOC instantaneously Inactive with 79 active always Inductive (135) Resistive (90) Capacitive(45) Forward Reverse 1.00..20.00 I / Ip; 0.01..999.00 Time Dial 0.05..0.95 I / Ip; 0.01..999.00 Time Dial OFF ON 0.05..35.00 A; OFF always

Manual Close Mode

1514A 67 active

67 Directional Phase/Ground Overcurrent 67 Directional Phase/Ground Overcurrent 67 Directional Phase/Ground Overcurrent 67 Directional Phase/Ground Overcurrent 67 Directional Phase/Ground Overcurrent

67 active

1515A Normal Load

Inductive (135)

Normal Load (Torque angle of dir. fct) Phase Direction

1516

67 Direction

Forward

1530

67

67

1531

MofPU Res T/Tp

Multiple of Pickup <-> T/Tp

1601

FCT 67N/67N-TOC 67 Directional Phase/Ground Overcurrent 67N-2 PICKUP 67 Directional Phase/Ground Overcurrent 67 Directional Phase/Ground Overcurrent 67 Directional Phase/Ground Overcurrent 67 Directional Phase/Ground Overcurrent 67 Directional Phase/Ground Overcurrent

67N, 67N-TOC Ground Time Overcurrent 67N-2 Pickup

1602

0.50 A

1603

67N-2 DELAY

0.00..60.00 sec;

0.10 sec

67N-2 Time Delay

1604

67N-1 PICKUP

0.05..35.00 A;

0.20 A

67N-1 Pickup

1605

67N-1 DELAY

0.00..60.00 sec;

0.50 sec

67N-1 Time Delay

1607

67N-TOC PICKUP

0.05..4.00 A

0.20 A

67N-TOC Pickup

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

513

A Appendix

Addr. 1608

Setting Title 67N-TOC T-DIAL

Function 67 Directional Phase/Ground Overcurrent 67 Directional Phase/Ground Overcurrent 67 Directional Phase/Ground Overcurrent 67 Directional Phase/Ground Overcurrent 67 Directional Phase/Ground Overcurrent

Setting Options 0.05..3.20 sec;

Default Setting 0.20 sec

Comments 67N-TOC Time Dial

1609

67N-TOC T-DIAL

0.50..15.00;

5.00

67N-TOC Time Dial

1610

67N-TOC RESET

Instantaneous Disk Emulation Normal Inverse Very Inverse Extremely Inverse Long Inverse Very Inverse Inverse Short Inverse Long Inverse Moderately Inverse Extremely Inverse Definite Inverse 67N-2 instantaneously 67N-1 instantaneously 67N-TOC instantaneously Inactive always with 79 active Inductive (135) Resistive (90) Capacitive(45) Forward Reverse 1.00..20.00 I / Ip; 0.01..999.00 Time Dial 0.05..0.95 I / Ip; 0.01..999.00 Time Dial OFF ON No Current Breaker Contact 79M Auto Reclosing ready

Disk Emulation

Drop-Out Characteristic

1611

67N-TOC IEC

Normal Inverse

IEC Curve

1612

67N-TOC ANSI

Very Inverse

ANSI Curve

1613A MANUALCLOSEMODE

67 Directional Phase/Ground Overcurrent

67N-2 instantaneously

Manual Close Mode

1614A 67N active

67 Directional Phase/Ground Overcurrent 67 Directional Phase/Ground Overcurrent 67 Directional Phase/Ground Overcurrent 67 Directional Phase/Ground Overcurrent 67 Directional Phase/Ground Overcurrent Cold Load Pikkup Cold Load Pikkup

always

67N active

1615A Normal Load

Inductive (135)

Normal Load (Torque angle of dir. fct) Ground Direction

1616

67N Direction

Forward

1630

M.of PU TD

Multiples of PU Time-Dial

1631

I/IEp Rf T/TEp

67N TOC

1701 1702

COLDLOAD PIKKUP Start Condition

OFF No Current

Cold-Load-Pickup Function Start Condition

514

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

A.8 Settings

Addr. 1703 1704 1705 1801 1802 1803 1804 1805 1806 1807 1901 1902 1903 1904 1905 1906 1907 2001 2002 2003 2004

Setting Title CB Open Time Active Time Stop Time 50c-2 PICKUP 50c-2 DELAY 50c-1 PICKUP 50c-1 DELAY 51c PICKUP 51c TIME DIAL 51c TIME DIAL 50Nc-2 PICKUP 50Nc-2 DELAY 50Nc-1 PICKUP 50Nc-1 DELAY 51Nc PICKUP 51Nc T-DIAL 51Nc T-DIAL 67c-2 PICKUP 67c-2 DELAY 67c-1 PICKUP 67c-1 DELAY

Function Cold Load Pikkup Cold Load Pikkup Cold Load Pikkup Cold Load Pikkup Cold Load Pikkup Cold Load Pikkup Cold Load Pikkup Cold Load Pikkup Cold Load Pikkup Cold Load Pikkup Cold Load Pikkup Cold Load Pikkup Cold Load Pikkup Cold Load Pikkup Cold Load Pikkup Cold Load Pikkup Cold Load Pikkup Cold Load Pikkup Cold Load Pikkup Cold Load Pikkup Cold Load Pikkup

Setting Options 0..21600 sec 1..21600 sec 1..600 sec; 0.10..35.00 A; 0.00..60.00 sec; 0.10..35.00 A; 0.00..60.00 sec; 0.10..4.00 A; 0.05..3.20 sec; 0.50..15.00; 0.05..35.00 A; 0.00..60.00 sec; 0.05..35.00 A; 0.00..60.00 sec; 0.10..4.00 A; 0.05..3.20 sec; 0.50..15.00; 0.10..35.00 A; 0.00..60.00 sec; 0.10..35.00 A; 0.00..60.00 sec;

Default Setting 3600 sec 3600 sec 600 sec 10.00 A 0.00 sec 2.00 A 0.30 sec 1.50 A 0.50 sec 5.00 7.00 A 0.00 sec 1.50 A 0.30 sec 1.00 A 0.50 sec 5.00 10.00 A 0.00 sec 2.00 A 0.30 sec

Comments Circuit Breaker OPEN Time Active Time Stop Time 50c-2 Pickup 50c-2 Time Delay 50c-1 Pickup 50c-1 Time Delay 51c Pickup 51c Time dial 51c Time dial 50Nc-2 Pickup 50Nc-2 Time Delay 50Nc-1 Pickup 50Nc-1 Time Delay 51Nc Pickup 51Nc Time Dial 51Nc Time Dial 67c-2 Pickup 67c-2 Time Delay 67c-1 Pickup 67c-1 Time Delay

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

515

A Appendix

Addr. 2005 2006 2007 2101 2102 2103 2104 2105 2106 2107 2201

Setting Title 67c-TOC PICKUP 67c-TOC T-DIAL 67c-TOC T-DIAL 50Nc-2 PICKUP 67Nc-2 DELAY 67Nc-1 PICKUP 67Nc-1 DELAY

Function Cold Load Pikkup Cold Load Pikkup Cold Load Pikkup Cold Load Pikkup Cold Load Pikkup Cold Load Pikkup Cold Load Pikkup

Setting Options 0.10..4.00 A; 0.05..3.20 sec; 0.50..15.00; 0.05..35.00 A; 0.00..60.00 sec; 0.05..35.00 A; 0.00..60.00 sec; 0.05..4.00 A; 0.05..3.20 sec; 0.50..15.00; OFF ON 10..45 %

Default Setting 1.50 A 0.50 sec 5.00 7.00 A 0.00 sec 1.50 A 0.30 sec 1.00 A 0.50 sec 5.00 OFF

Comments 67c Pickup 67c Time Dial 67c Time Dial 50Nc-2 Pickup 67Nc-2 Time Delay 67Nc-1 Pickup 67Nc-1 Time Delay 67Nc-TOC Pickup 67Nc-TOC Time Dial 67Nc-TOC Time Dial Inrush Restraint

67Nc-TOC PICKUP Cold Load Pikkup 67Nc-TOC T-DIAL 67Nc-TOC T-DIAL INRUSH REST. Cold Load Pikkup Cold Load Pikkup 50/51 Phase/ Ground Overcurrent 50/51 Phase/ Ground Overcurrent 50/51 Phase/ Ground Overcurrent 50/51 Phase/ Ground Overcurrent 50/51 Phase/ Ground Overcurrent

2202

2nd HARMONIC

15 %

2nd. harmonic in % of fundamental Cross Block

2203

CROSS BLOCK

NO YES 0.00..180.00 sec

NO

2204

CROSS BLK TIMER I Max

0.00 sec

Cross Block Time

2205

0.30..25.00 A

7.50 A

Maximum Current for Inrush Restraint (Sensitive) Ground Fault

3101

Sens. Gnd Fault

64, 50Ns, 51Ns, OFF 67Ns (SensiON tive) Gnd Flt Alarm Only 64, 50Ns, 51Ns, 0.001..1.600 A 67Ns (Sensitive) Gnd Flt 64, 50Ns, 51Ns, 0.05..35.00 A 67Ns (Sensitive) Gnd Flt

OFF

3102

CT Err. I1

0.050 A

Current I1 for CT Angle Error Current I1 for CT Angle Error

3102

CT Err. I1

1.00 A

516

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

A.8 Settings

Addr. 3103

Setting Title CT Err. F1

Function

Setting Options

Default Setting 0.0

Comments CT Angle Error at I1

64, 50Ns, 51Ns, 0.0..5.0 67Ns (Sensitive) Gnd Flt 64, 50Ns, 51Ns, 0.001..1.600 A 67Ns (Sensitive) Gnd Flt 64, 50Ns, 51Ns, 0.05..35.00 A 67Ns (Sensitive) Gnd Flt 64, 50Ns, 51Ns, 0.0..5.0 67Ns (Sensitive) Gnd Flt 64, 50Ns, 51Ns, 10..100 V 67Ns (Sensitive) Gnd Flt 64, 50Ns, 51Ns, 10..100 V 67Ns (Sensitive) Gnd Flt 64, 50Ns, 51Ns, 1.8..130.0 V 67Ns (Sensitive) Gnd Flt 64, 50Ns, 51Ns, 10.0..225.0 V 67Ns (Sensitive) Gnd Flt 64, 50Ns, 51Ns, 0.04..320.00 sec; 67Ns (Sensitive) Gnd Flt

3104

CT Err. I2

1.000 A

Current I2 for CT Angle Error Current I2 for CT Angle Error CT Angle Error at I2

3104

CT Err. I2

10.00 A

3105

CT Err. F2

0.0

3106

VPH MIN

40 V

L-Gnd Voltage of Faulted Phase Vph Min L-Gnd Voltage of Unfaulted Phase Vph Max 64-1 Ground Displacement Voltage 64-1 Ground Displacement Voltage Time-DELAY Pickup

3107

VPH MAX

75 V

3109

64-1 VGND

40.0 V

3110

64-1 VGND

70.0 V

3111

T-DELAY Pickup

1.00 sec

3112

64-1 DELAY

64, 50Ns, 51Ns, 0.10..40000.00 sec; 10.00 sec 67Ns (Sensi tive) Gnd Flt 64, 50Ns, 51Ns, 0.001..1.500 A 67Ns (Sensitive) Gnd Flt 64, 50Ns, 51Ns, 0.05..35.00 A 67Ns (Sensitive) Gnd Flt 64, 50Ns, 51Ns, 0.00..320.00 sec; 67Ns (Sensitive) Gnd Flt 64, 50Ns, 51Ns, Forward 67Ns (SensiReverse tive) Gnd Flt Non-Directional 64, 50Ns, 51Ns, 0.001..1.500 A 67Ns (Sensitive) Gnd Flt 0.300 A

64-1 Time Delay

3113

50Ns-2 PICKUP

50Ns-2 Pickup

3113

50Ns-2 PICKUP

10.00 A

50Ns-2 Pickup

3114

50Ns-2 DELAY

1.00 sec

50Ns-2 Time Delay

3115

67Ns-2 DIRECT.

Forward

67Ns-2 Direction

3117

50Ns-1 PICKUP

0.100 A

50Ns-1 Pickup

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

517

A Appendix

Addr. 3117

Setting Title 50Ns-1 PICKUP

Function

Setting Options

Default Setting 2.00 A

Comments 50Ns-1 Pickup

64, 50Ns, 51Ns, 0.05..35.00 A 67Ns (Sensitive) Gnd Flt 64, 50Ns, 51Ns, 0.00..320.00 sec; 67Ns (Sensitive) Gnd Flt 64, 50Ns, 51Ns, 0.001..1.400 A 67Ns (Sensitive) Gnd Flt 64, 50Ns, 51Ns, 0.05..4.00 A 67Ns (Sensitive) Gnd Flt 64, 50Ns, 51Ns, 0.10..4.00 sec; 67Ns (Sensitive) Gnd Flt 64, 50Ns, 51Ns, Forward 67Ns (SensiReverse tive) Gnd Flt Non-Directional 64, 50Ns, 51Ns, 0.001..1.200 A 67Ns (Sensitive) Gnd Flt 64, 50Ns, 51Ns, 0.05..30.00 A 67Ns (Sensitive) Gnd Flt

3118

50Ns-1 DELAY

2.00 sec

50Ns-1 Time delay

3119

51Ns PICKUP

0.100 A

51Ns Pickup

3119

51Ns PICKUP

1.00 A

51Ns Pickup

3120

51Ns TIME DIAL

1.00 sec

51Ns Time Dial

3122

67Ns-1 DIRECT.

Forward

67Ns-1 Direction

3123

RELEASE DIRECT. RELEASE DIRECT.

0.010 A

Release directional element Release directional element Correction Angle for Dir. Determination Measurement method for Direction Reset Delay

3123

0.50 A

3124

PHI CORRECTION 64, 50Ns, 51Ns, -45.0..45.0 67Ns (Sensitive) Gnd Flt MEAS. METHOD 64, 50Ns, 51Ns, COS Phi 67Ns (SensiSIN phi tive) Gnd Flt 64, 50Ns, 51Ns, 0..60 sec 67Ns (Sensitive) Gnd Flt 64, 50Ns, 51Ns, Vgnd OR INs 67Ns (SensiVgnd AND INs tive) Gnd Flt 64, 50Ns, 51Ns, 1.00..20.00 Multiple 67Ns (Sensiof Pickup; tive) Gnd Flt 0.01..999.00 Time Dial Intermittent Earth Fault Intermittent Earth Fault Intermittent Earth Fault OFF ON 0.05..35.00 A 0.05..35.00 A

0.0

3125

COS Phi

3126

RESET DELAY

1 sec

3130

PU CRITERIA

Vgnd OR INs

Sensitive Ground Fault PICKUP criteria Multiples of PU Time-Dial

3131

M.of PU TD

3301 3302 3302

INTERM.EF Iie> Iie>

OFF 1.00 A 1.00 A

Intermittent earth fault protection Pick-up value of interm. E/F stage Pick-up value of interm. E/F stage

518

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

A.8 Settings

Addr. 3302 3303 3304 3305 3306 4001

Setting Title Iie> T-det.ext. T-sum det. T-reset Nos.det. FCT 46

Function Intermittent Earth Fault Intermittent Earth Fault Intermittent Earth Fault Intermittent Earth Fault Intermittent Earth Fault 46 Negative Sequence (Time Overcurrent) 46 Negative Sequence (Time Overcurrent) 46 Negative Sequence (Time Overcurrent) 46 Negative Sequence (Time Overcurrent) 46 Negative Sequence (Time Overcurrent) 46 Negative Sequence (Time Overcurrent) 46 Negative Sequence (Time Overcurrent) 46 Negative Sequence (Time Overcurrent) 46 Negative Sequence (Time Overcurrent)

Setting Options 0.050..1.500 A 0.00..10.00 sec 0.00..100.00 sec 1..600 sec 2..10 OFF ON

Default Setting 1.000 A 0.10 sec 20.00 sec 300 sec 3 OFF

Comments Pick-up value of interm. E/F stage Detection extension time Sum of detection times Reset time No. of det. for start of int. E/ F prot 46 Negative Sequence Protection

4002

46-1 PICKUP

0.10..3.00 A

0.10 A

46-1 Pickup

4003

46-1 DELAY

0.00..60.00 sec;

1.50 sec

46-1 Time Delay

4004

46-2 PICKUP

0.10..3.00 A

0.50 A

46-2 Pickup

4005

46-2 DELAY

0.00..60.00 sec;

1.50 sec

46-2 Time Delay

4006

46 IEC CURVE

Normal Inverse Very Inverse Extremely Inverse Extremely Inverse Inverse Moderately Inverse Very Inverse 0.10..2.00 A

Extremely Inverse

IEC Curve

4007

46 ANSI CURVE

Extremely Inverse

ANSI Curve

4008

46-TOC PICKUP

0.90 A

46-TOC Pickup

4009

46-TOC TIMEDIAL

0.50..15.00;

5.00

46-TOC Time Dial

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

519

A Appendix

Addr. 4010

Setting Title 46-TOC TIMEDIAL

Function 46 Negative Sequence (Time Overcurrent) 46 Negative Sequence (Time Overcurrent) 48/66 Motor (Startup Monitor / Counter) 48/66 Motor (Startup Monitor / Counter) 48/66 Motor (Startup Monitor / Counter) 48/66 Motor (Startup Monitor / Counter) 49 Thermal Overload 49 Thermal Overload 49 Thermal Overload 49 Thermal Overload 49 Thermal Overload 49 Thermal Overload 49 Thermal Overload 49 Thermal Overload 49 Thermal Overload 48/66 Motor (Startup Monitor / Counter) 48/66 Motor (Startup Monitor / Counter)

Setting Options 0.05..3.20 sec;

Default Setting 0.50 sec

Comments 46-TOC Time Dial

4011

46-TOC RESET

Instantaneous Disk Emulation

Instantaneous

46-TOC Drop Out

4101

FCT 48/66

OFF ON 1.00..16.00 A

OFF

48 / 66 Motor (Startup Monitor/Counter) Startup Current

4102

STARTUP CURRENT STARTUP TIME

5.00 A

4103

1.0..180.0 sec

10.0 sec

Startup Time

4104

LOCK ROTOR TIME FCT 49

0.5..120.0 sec;

2.0 sec

Permissible Locked Rotor Time 49 Thermal overload protection 49 K-Factor Time Constant 49 Thermal Alarm Stage Current Overload Alarm Setpoint Kt-FACTOR when motor stops Emergency time 49 Temperature rise at rated sec. curr. 49 Temperature rise at rated sec. curr. 66 Startup Counter for Motors I Start / I Motor nominal

4201

OFF ON Alarm Only 0.10..4.00 1.0..999.9 min 50..100 % 0.10..4.00 A 1.0..10.0 10..15000 sec 40..200 C 104..392 F OFF ON 3.0..10.0

OFF

4202 4203 4204 4205

49 K-FACTOR TIME CONSTANT 49 ALARM I ALARM

1.10 100.0 min 90 % 1.00 A 1.0 100 sec 100 C 212 F OFF

4207A K-FACTOR 4208A T EMERGENCY 4209 4210 4301 49 TEMP. RISE I 49 TEMP. RISE I FCT 66

4302

IStart/IMOTnom

4.9

520

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

A.8 Settings

Addr. 4303

Setting Title T START MAX

Function 48/66 Motor (Startup Monitor / Counter) 48/66 Motor (Startup Monitor / Counter) 48/66 Motor (Startup Monitor / Counter) 48/66 Motor (Startup Monitor / Counter) 48/66 Motor (Startup Monitor / Counter) 48/66 Motor (Startup Monitor / Counter) 48/66 Motor (Startup Monitor / Counter) 48/66 Motor (Startup Monitor / Counter) 27/59 Under/ Over Voltage 27/59 Under/ Over Voltage 27/59 Under/ Over Voltage 27/59 Under/ Over Voltage 27/59 Under/ Over Voltage 27/59 Under/ Over Voltage 27/59 Under/ Over Voltage 27/59 Under/ Over Voltage 27/59 Under/ Over Voltage

Setting Options 3..320 sec

Default Setting 10 sec

Comments Maximum Permissible Starting Time Temperature Equalizaton Time Rated Motor Current

4304

T Equal

0.0..320.0 min

1.0 min

4305

I MOTOR NOMINAL MAX.WARM STARTS #COLD-#WARM

0.20..1.20 A

1.00 A

4306

1..4

Maximum Number of Warm Starts Number of Cold Starts Warm Starts Extension of Time Constant at Stop Extension of Time Constant at Running Minimum Restart Inhibit Time 59 Overvoltage Protection

4307

1..2

4308

K at STOP

0.2..100.0

5.0

4309

K at RUNNING

0.2..100.0

2.0

4310

T MIN. INHIBIT

0.2..120.0 min

6.0 min

5001

FCT 59

OFF ON Alarm Only 40..260 V 40..130 V 0.00..100.00 sec; 40..260 V 40..130 V 0.00..100.00 sec; OFF ON Alarm Only 10..210 V

OFF

5002 5003 5004 5005 5006 5007 5101

59-1 PICKUP 59-1 PICKUP 59-1 DELAY 59-2 PICKUP 59-2 PICKUP 59-2 DELAY FCT 27

110 V 110 V 0.50 sec 120 V 120 V 0.50 sec OFF

59-1 Pickup 59-1 Pickup 59-1 Time Delay 59-2 Pickup 59-2 Pickup 59-2 Time Delay 27 Undervoltage Protection

5102

27-1 PICKUP

75 V

27-1 Pickup

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

521

A Appendix

Addr. 5103

Setting Title 27-1 PICKUP

Function 27/59 Under/ Over Voltage 27/59 Under/ Over Voltage 27/59 Under/ Over Voltage 27/59 Under/ Over Voltage 27/59 Under/ Over Voltage 27/59 Under/ Over Voltage 27/59 Under/ Over Voltage Measurement Supervision Measurement Supervision Measurement Supervision 81 Over/Under Frequency 81 Over/Under Frequency 81 Over/Under Frequency 81 Over/Under Frequency 81 Over/Under Frequency 81 Over/Under Frequency 81 Over/Under Frequency 81 Over/Under Frequency 81 Over/Under Frequency 81 Over/Under Frequency 81 Over/Under Frequency

Setting Options 10..120 V 1.05..3.00 0.00..100.00 sec; 10..210 V 10..120 V 0.00..100.00 sec; OFF ON ON OFF 10..100 V 0.10..1.00 A OFF ON 10..150 V 45.50..54.50 Hz 55.50..64.50 Hz 0.00..100.00 sec; 45.50..54.50 Hz 55.50..64.50 Hz 0.00..100.00 sec; 45.50..54.50 Hz 55.50..64.50 Hz 0.00..100.00 sec;

Default Setting 75 V 1.20 1.50 sec 70 V 70 V 0.50 sec ON OFF 30 V 0.10 A OFF 65 V 49.50 Hz 59.50 Hz 60.00 sec 49.00 Hz 59.00 Hz 30.00 sec 47.50 Hz 57.50 Hz 3.00 sec

Comments 27-1 Pickup 27-1 Drop out Ratio 27-1 Time Delay 27-2 Pickup 27-2 Pickup 27-2 Time Delay Current Supervision Fuse Fail Monitor Zero Sequence Voltage Residual Current 81 Over/Under Frequency Protection Minimum required voltage for operation 81-1 Pickup 81-1 Pickup 81-1 Time Delay 81-2 Pickup 81-2 Pickup 81-2 Time Delay 81-3 Pickup 81-3 Pickup 81-3 Time delay

5105A 27-1 DOUT RATIO 5106 5110 5111 5112 27-1 DELAY 27-2 PICKUP 27-2 PICKUP 27-2 DELAY

5120A CURRENT SUPERV. 5301 5302 5303 5401 5402 5403 5404 5405 5406 5407 5408 5409 5410 5411 FUSE FAIL MON. FUSE FAIL 3Vo FUSE FAIL RESID FCT 81 O/U Vmin 81-1 PICKUP 81-1 PICKUP 81-1 DELAY 81-2 PICKUP 81-2 PICKUP 81-2 DELAY 81-3 PICKUP 81-3 PICKUP 81-3 DELAY

522

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

A.8 Settings

Addr. 5412 5413 5414 6101 6102 6103 6104 6105 6106 6107 6108 6109

Setting Title 81-4 PICKUP 81-4 PICKUP 81-4 DELAY Synchronizing SyncCB Vmin Vmax V< V> SYNC V1<V2> SYNC V1>V2< SYNC V1<V2<

Function 81 Over/Under Frequency 81 Over/Under Frequency 81 Over/Under Frequency

Setting Options 45.50..54.50 Hz 55.50..64.50 Hz 0.00..100.00 sec;

Default Setting 51.00 Hz 61.00 Hz 30.00 sec OFF

Comments 81-4 Pickup 81-4 Pickup 81-4 Time delay Synchronizing Function Synchronizable circuit breaker

SYNC Function ON group 1 OFF SYNC Function group 1 SYNC Function 20..125 V group 1 SYNC Function 20..140 V group 1 SYNC Function 1..60 V group 1 SYNC Function 20..140 V group 1 SYNC Function YES group 1 NO SYNC Function YES group 1 NO SYNC Function YES group 1 NO SYNC Function YES group 1 NO SYNC Function 0.0..60.0 sec group 1

90 V 110 V 5V 80 V NO NO NO NO 0.1 sec 30.00 sec 0.06 sec 1.00 0 A-B

Minimum voltage limit: Vmin Maximum voltage limit: Vmax Threshold V1, V2 without voltage Threshold V1, V2 with voltage ON-Command at V1< and V2> ON-Command at V1> and V2< ON-Command at V1< and V2> Direct ON-Command Supervision time of V1>;V2> or V1<;V2< Maximum duration of Synchronization Closing (operating) time of CB Balancing factor V1/V2 Angle adjustment (transformer) Connection of V2

6110A Direct CO 6111A TSUP VOLTAGE 6112 6120 6121

T-SYN. DURATION SYNC Function 0.01..1200.00 sec; group 1 T-CB close Balancing V1/V2 SYNC Function 0.01..0.60 sec group 1 SYNC Function 0.50..2.00 group 1

6122A ANGLE ADJUSTM. SYNC Function 0..360 group 1 6123 CONNECTIONof V2 SYNC Function A-G group 1 B-G C-G A-B B-C C-A SYNC Function 0.10..800.00 kV group 1

6125

VT Vn2, primary

12.00 kV

VT nominal voltage V2, primary

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

523

A Appendix

Addr. 6130 6131 6132 6133 6140 6141 6142 6143 6144 6145 6146 6150 6151 6152 6153 6154 6155 6201 6202 6203 6204

Setting Title dV ASYN V2>V1 dV ASYN V2<V1 df ASYN f2>f1 df ASYN f2<f1 SYNC PERMIS. F SYNCHRON dV SYNC V2>V1 dV SYNC V2<V1 d SYNC 2> 1 d SYNC 2< 1 T SYNC-DELAY dV SYNCHK V2>V1 dV SYNCHK V2<V1 df SYNCHK f2>f1 df SYNCHK f2<f1 d SYNCHK 2>1 d SYNCHK 2<1 Synchronizing SyncCB Vmin Vmax

Function

Setting Options

Default Setting 2.0 V 2.0 V 0.10 Hz 0.10 Hz YES 0.01 Hz 5.0 V 5.0 V 10 10 0.00 sec 5.0 V 5.0 V 0.10 Hz 0.10 Hz 10 10 OFF

Comments Maximum voltage difference V2>V1 Maximum voltage difference V2<V1 Maximum frequency difference f2>f1 Maximum frequency difference f2<f1 Switching at synchronous conditions Frequency threshold ASYN <--> SYN Maximum voltage difference V2>V1 Maximum voltage difference V2<V1 Maximum angle difference alpha2>alpha1 Maximum angle difference alpha2<alpha1 Release delay at synchronous conditions Maximum voltage difference V2>V1 Maximum voltage difference V2<V1 Maximum frequency difference f2>f1 Maximum frequency difference f2<f1 Maximum angle difference alpha2>alpha1 Maximum angle difference alpha2<alpha1 Synchronizing Function Synchronizable circuit breaker

SYNC Function 0.5..40.0 V group 1 SYNC Function 0.5..40.0 V group 1 SYNC Function 0.01..2.00 Hz group 1 SYNC Function 0.01..2.00 Hz group 1 SYNC Function YES group 1 NO SYNC Function 0.01..0.04 Hz group 1 SYNC Function 0.5..40.0 V group 1 SYNC Function 0.5..40.0 V group 1 SYNC Function 2..80 group 1 SYNC Function 2..80 group 1 SYNC Function 0.00..60.00 sec group 1 SYNC Function 0.5..40.0 V group 1 SYNC Function 0.5..40.0 V group 1 SYNC Function 0.01..2.00 Hz group 1 SYNC Function 0.01..2.00 Hz group 1 SYNC Function 2..80 group 1 SYNC Function 2..80 group 1 SYNC Function ON group 2 OFF SYNC Function group 2 SYNC Function 20..125 V group 2 SYNC Function 20..140 V group 2

90 V 110 V

Minimum voltage limit: Vmin Maximum voltage limit: Vmax

524

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

A.8 Settings

Addr. 6205 6206 6207 6208 6209 V< V>

Setting Title

Function

Setting Options

Default Setting 5V 80 V NO NO NO NO 0.1 sec 30.00 sec 0.06 sec 1.00 0 A-B

Comments Threshold V1, V2 without voltage Threshold V1, V2 with voltage ON-Command at V1< and V2> ON-Command at V1> and V2< ON-Command at V1< and V2> Direct ON-Command Supervision time of V1>;V2> or V1<;V2< Maximum duration of Synchronization Closing (operating) time of CB Balancing factor V1/V2 Angle adjustment (transformer) Connection of V2

SYNC Function 1..60 V group 2 SYNC Function 20..140 V group 2 SYNC Function YES group 2 NO SYNC Function YES group 2 NO SYNC Function YES group 2 NO SYNC Function YES group 2 NO SYNC Function 0.0..60.0 sec group 2

SYNC V1<V2> SYNC V1>V2< SYNC V1<V2<

6210A Direct CO 6211A TSUP VOLTAGE 6212 6220 6221

T-SYN. DURATION SYNC Function 0.01..1200.00 sec; group 2 T-CB close Balancing V1/V2 SYNC Function 0.01..0.60 sec group 2 SYNC Function 0.50..2.00 group 2

6222A ANGLE ADJUSTM. SYNC Function 0..360 group 2 6223 CONNECTIONof V2 SYNC Function A-G group 2 B-G C-G A-B B-C C-A SYNC Function 0.10..800.00 kV group 2 SYNC Function 0.5..40.0 V group 2 SYNC Function 0.5..40.0 V group 2 SYNC Function 0.01..2.00 Hz group 2 SYNC Function 0.01..2.00 Hz group 2 SYNC Function YES group 2 NO SYNC Function 0.01..0.04 Hz group 2 SYNC Function 0.5..40.0 V group 2

6225 6230 6231 6232 6233 6240 6241 6242

VT Vn2, primary dV ASYN V2>V1 dV ASYN V2<V1 df ASYN f2>f1 df ASYN f2<f1 SYNC PERMIS. F SYNCHRON dV SYNC V2>V1

12.00 kV 2.0 V 2.0 V 0.10 Hz 0.10 Hz YES 0.01 Hz 5.0 V

VT nominal voltage V2, primary Maximum voltage difference V2>V1 Maximum voltage difference V2<V1 Maximum frequency difference f2>f1 Maximum frequency difference f2<f1 Switching at synchronous conditions Frequency threshold ASYN <--> SYN Maximum voltage difference V2>V1

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

525

A Appendix

Addr. 6243 6244 6245 6246 6250 6251 6252 6253 6254 6255 6301 6302 6303 6304 6305 6306 6307 6308 6309

Setting Title dV SYNC V2<V1 d SYNC 2> 1 d SYNC 2< 1 T SYNC-DELAY dV SYNCHK V2>V1 dV SYNCHK V2<V1 df SYNCHK f2>f1 df SYNCHK f2<f1 d SYNCHK 2>1 d SYNCHK 2<1 Synchronizing SyncCB Vmin Vmax V< V> SYNC V1<V2> SYNC V1>V2< SYNC V1<V2<

Function

Setting Options

Default Setting 5.0 V 10 10 0.00 sec 5.0 V 5.0 V 0.10 Hz 0.10 Hz 10 10 OFF

Comments Maximum voltage difference V2<V1 Maximum angle difference alpha2>alpha1 Maximum angle difference alpha2<alpha1 Release delay at synchronous conditions Maximum voltage difference V2>V1 Maximum voltage difference V2<V1 Maximum frequency difference f2>f1 Maximum frequency difference f2<f1 Maximum angle difference alpha2>alpha1 Maximum angle difference alpha2<alpha1 Synchronizing Function Synchronizable circuit breaker

SYNC Function 0.5..40.0 V group 2 SYNC Function 2..80 group 2 SYNC Function 2..80 group 2 SYNC Function 0.00..60.00 sec group 2 SYNC Function 0.5..40.0 V group 2 SYNC Function 0.5..40.0 V group 2 SYNC Function 0.01..2.00 Hz group 2 SYNC Function 0.01..2.00 Hz group 2 SYNC Function 2..80 group 2 SYNC Function 2..80 group 2 SYNC Function ON group 3 OFF SYNC Function group 3 SYNC Function 20..125 V group 3 SYNC Function 20..140 V group 3 SYNC Function 1..60 V group 3 SYNC Function 20..140 V group 3 SYNC Function YES group 3 NO SYNC Function YES group 3 NO SYNC Function YES group 3 NO SYNC Function YES group 3 NO SYNC Function 0.0..60.0 sec group 3

90 V 110 V 5V 80 V NO NO NO NO 0.1 sec

Minimum voltage limit: Vmin Maximum voltage limit: Vmax Threshold V1, V2 without voltage Threshold V1, V2 with voltage ON-Command at V1< and V2> ON-Command at V1> and V2< ON-Command at V1< and V2> Direct ON-Command Supervision time of V1>;V2> or V1<;V2<

6310A Direct CO 6311A TSUP VOLTAGE

526

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

A.8 Settings

Addr. 6312 6320 6321

Setting Title

Function

Setting Options

Default Setting 30.00 sec 0.06 sec 1.00 0 A-B

Comments Maximum duration of Synchronization Closing (operating) time of CB Balancing factor V1/V2 Angle adjustment (transformer) Connection of V2

T-SYN. DURATION SYNC Function 0.01..1200.00 sec; group 3 T-CB close Balancing V1/V2 SYNC Function 0.01..0.60 sec group 3 SYNC Function 0.50..2.00 group 3

6322A ANGLE ADJUSTM. SYNC Function 0..360 group 3 6323 CONNECTIONof V2 SYNC Function A-G group 3 B-G C-G A-B B-C C-A SYNC Function 0.10..800.00 kV group 3 SYNC Function 0.5..40.0 V group 3 SYNC Function 0.5..40.0 V group 3 SYNC Function 0.01..2.00 Hz group 3 SYNC Function 0.01..2.00 Hz group 3 SYNC Function YES group 3 NO SYNC Function 0.01..0.04 Hz group 3 SYNC Function 0.5..40.0 V group 3 SYNC Function 0.5..40.0 V group 3 SYNC Function 2..80 group 3 SYNC Function 2..80 group 3 SYNC Function 0.00..60.00 sec group 3 SYNC Function 0.5..40.0 V group 3 SYNC Function 0.5..40.0 V group 3 SYNC Function 0.01..2.00 Hz group 3

6325 6330 6331 6332 6333 6340 6341 6342 6343 6344 6345 6346 6350 6351 6352

VT Vn2, primary dV ASYN V2>V1 dV ASYN V2<V1 df ASYN f2>f1 df ASYN f2<f1 SYNC PERMIS. F SYNCHRON dV SYNC V2>V1 dV SYNC V2<V1 d SYNC 2> 1 d SYNC 2< 1 T SYNC-DELAY dV SYNCHK V2>V1 dV SYNCHK V2<V1 df SYNCHK f2>f1

12.00 kV 2.0 V 2.0 V 0.10 Hz 0.10 Hz YES 0.01 Hz 5.0 V 5.0 V 10 10 0.00 sec 5.0 V 5.0 V 0.10 Hz

VT nominal voltage V2, primary Maximum voltage difference V2>V1 Maximum voltage difference V2<V1 Maximum frequency difference f2>f1 Maximum frequency difference f2<f1 Switching at synchronous conditions Frequency threshold ASYN <--> SYN Maximum voltage difference V2>V1 Maximum voltage difference V2<V1 Maximum angle difference alpha2>alpha1 Maximum angle difference alpha2<alpha1 Release delay at synchronous conditions Maximum voltage difference V2>V1 Maximum voltage difference V2<V1 Maximum frequency difference f2>f1

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

527

A Appendix

Addr. 6353 6354 6355 6401 6402 6403 6404 6405 6406 6407 6408 6409

Setting Title df SYNCHK f2<f1 d SYNCHK 2>1 d SYNCHK 2<1 Synchronizing SyncCB Vmin Vmax V< V> SYNC V1<V2> SYNC V1>V2< SYNC V1<V2<

Function

Setting Options

Default Setting 0.10 Hz 10 10 OFF

Comments Maximum frequency difference f2<f1 Maximum angle difference alpha2>alpha1 Maximum angle difference alpha2<alpha1 Synchronizing Function Synchronizable circuit breaker

SYNC Function 0.01..2.00 Hz group 3 SYNC Function 2..80 group 3 SYNC Function 2..80 group 3 SYNC Function ON group 4 OFF SYNC Function group 4 SYNC Function 20..125 V group 4 SYNC Function 20..140 V group 4 SYNC Function 1..60 V group 4 SYNC Function 20..140 V group 4 SYNC Function YES group 4 NO SYNC Function YES group 4 NO SYNC Function YES group 4 NO SYNC Function YES group 4 NO SYNC Function 0.0..60.0 sec group 4

90 V 110 V 5V 80 V NO NO NO NO 0.1 sec 30.00 sec 0.06 sec 1.00 0 A-B

Minimum voltage limit: Vmin Maximum voltage limit: Vmax Threshold V1, V2 without voltage Threshold V1, V2 with voltage ON-Command at V1< and V2> ON-Command at V1> and V2< ON-Command at V1< and V2> Direct ON-Command Supervision time of V1>;V2> or V1<;V2< Maximum duration of Synchronization Closing (operating) time of CB Balancing factor V1/V2 Angle adjustment (transformer) Connection of V2

6410A Direct CO 6411A TSUP VOLTAGE 6412 6420 6421

T-SYN. DURATION SYNC Function 0.01..1200.00 sec; group 4 T-CB close Balancing V1/V2 SYNC Function 0.01..0.60 sec group 4 SYNC Function 0.50..2.00 group 4

6422A ANGLE ADJUSTM. SYNC Function 0..360 group 4 6423 CONNECTIONof V2 SYNC Function A-G group 4 B-G C-G A-B B-C C-A SYNC Function 0.10..800.00 kV group 4

6425

VT Vn2, primary

12.00 kV

VT nominal voltage V2, primary

528

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

A.8 Settings

Addr. 6430 6431 6432 6433 6440 6441 6442 6443 6444 6445 6446 6450 6451 6452 6453 6454 6455 7001 7004 7005 7101

Setting Title dV ASYN V2>V1 dV ASYN V2<V1 df ASYN f2>f1 df ASYN f2<f1 SYNC PERMIS. F SYNCHRON dV SYNC V2>V1 dV SYNC V2<V1 d SYNC 2> 1 d SYNC 2< 1 T SYNC-DELAY dV SYNCHK V2>V1 dV SYNCHK V2<V1 df SYNCHK f2>f1 df SYNCHK f2<f1 d SYNCHK 2>1 d SYNCHK 2<1 FCT 50BF Chk BRK CONTACT TRIP-Timer FCT 79

Function

Setting Options

Default Setting 2.0 V 2.0 V 0.10 Hz 0.10 Hz YES 0.01 Hz 5.0 V 5.0 V 10 10 0.00 sec 5.0 V 5.0 V 0.10 Hz 0.10 Hz 10 10 OFF OFF 0.25 sec OFF

Comments Maximum voltage difference V2>V1 Maximum voltage difference V2<V1 Maximum frequency difference f2>f1 Maximum frequency difference f2<f1 Switching at synchronous conditions Frequency threshold ASYN <--> SYN Maximum voltage difference V2>V1 Maximum voltage difference V2<V1 Maximum angle difference alpha2>alpha1 Maximum angle difference alpha2<alpha1 Release delay at synchronous conditions Maximum voltage difference V2>V1 Maximum voltage difference V2<V1 Maximum frequency difference f2>f1 Maximum frequency difference f2<f1 Maximum angle difference alpha2>alpha1 Maximum angle difference alpha2<alpha1 50BF Breaker Failure Protection Check Breaker contacts TRIP-Timer 79 Auto-Reclose Function

SYNC Function 0.5..40.0 V group 4 SYNC Function 0.5..40.0 V group 4 SYNC Function 0.01..2.00 Hz group 4 SYNC Function 0.01..2.00 Hz group 4 SYNC Function YES group 4 NO SYNC Function 0.01..0.04 Hz group 4 SYNC Function 0.5..40.0 V group 4 SYNC Function 0.5..40.0 V group 4 SYNC Function 2..80 group 4 SYNC Function 2..80 group 4 SYNC Function 0.00..60.00 sec group 4 SYNC Function 0.5..40.0 V group 4 SYNC Function 0.5..40.0 V group 4 SYNC Function 0.01..2.00 Hz group 4 SYNC Function 0.01..2.00 Hz group 4 SYNC Function 2..80 group 4 SYNC Function 2..80 group 4 50BF Breaker Failure 50BF Breaker Failure 50BF Breaker Failure 79M Auto Reclosing OFF ON OFF ON 0.06..60.00 sec; OFF ON

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

529

A Appendix

Addr. 7103 7105 7108 7113 7114 7115 7116 7117 7127 7128 7129 7130 7131 7132 7133 7134 7135 7136 7137 7138 7139

Setting Title BLOCK MC Dur. TIME RESTRAINT SAFETY 79 ready CHECK CB? T-Start MONITOR CB TIME OUT Max. DEAD EXT. T-ACTION DEADTIME 1: PH DEADTIME 1: G DEADTIME 2: PH DEADTIME 2: G DEADTIME 3: PH DEADTIME 3: G DEADTIME 4: PH DEADTIME 4: G # OF RECL. GND # OF RECL. PH Cmd.via control Internal SYNC External SYNC

Function 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing

Setting Options 0.50..320.00 sec; 0 0.50..320.00 sec 0.01..320.00 sec No check Check each cycle 0.01..320.00 sec; 0.10..320.00 sec 0.50..1800.00 sec; 0.01..320.00 sec; 0.01..320.00 sec 0.01..320.00 sec 0.01..320.00 sec 0.01..320.00 sec 0.01..320.00 sec 0.01..320.00 sec 0.01..320.00 sec 0.01..320.00 sec 0..9 0..9

Default Setting 1.00 sec 3.00 sec 0.50 sec No check 0.50 sec 3.00 sec 100.00 sec 0.20 sec 0.50 sec 0.50 sec 0.50 sec 0.50 sec 0.50 sec 0.50 sec 0.50 sec 0.50 sec 1 1

Comments AR blocking duration after manual close 79 Auto Reclosing reset time Safety Time until 79 is ready Check circuit breaker before AR? AR start-signal monitoring time Circuit Breaker (CB) Supervision Time Maximum dead time extension Action time Dead Time 1: Phase Fault Dead Time 1: Ground Fault Dead Time 2: Phase Fault Dead Time 2: Ground Fault Dead Time 3: Phase Fault Dead Time 3: Ground Fault Dead Time 4: Phase Fault Dead Time 4: Ground Fault Number of Reclosing Cycles Ground Number of Reclosing Cycles Phase Close command via control device Internal 25 synchronisation

YES NO

NO

External 25 synchronisation

530

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

A.8 Settings

Addr. 7140 7150

Setting Title ZONE SEQ.COORD. 50-1

Function 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing

Setting Options OFF ON No influence Starts 79 Stops 79 No influence Starts 79 Stops 79 No influence Starts 79 Stops 79 No influence Starts 79 Stops 79 No influence Starts 79 Stops 79 No influence Starts 79 Stops 79 No influence Starts 79 Stops 79 No influence Starts 79 Stops 79 No influence Starts 79 Stops 79 No influence Starts 79 Stops 79 No influence Starts 79 Stops 79 No influence Starts 79 Stops 79 No influence Starts 79 Stops 79 No influence Starts 79 Stops 79 No influence Starts 79 Stops 79

Default Setting OFF No influence

Comments ZSC - Zone sequence coordination 50-1

7151

50N-1

No influence

50N-1

7152

50-2

No influence

50-2

7153

50N-2

No influence

50N-2

7154

51

No influence

51

7155

51N

No influence

51N

7156

67-1

No influence

67-1

7157

67N-1

No influence

67N-1

7158

67-2

No influence

67-2

7159

67N-2

No influence

67N-2

7160

67 TOC

No influence

67 TOC

7161

67N TOC

No influence

67N TOC

7162

sens Ground Flt

No influence

(Sensitive) Ground Fault

7163

46

No influence

46

7164

BINARY INPUT

No influence

Binary Input

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

531

A Appendix

Addr. 7165 7200

Setting Title 3Pol.PICKUP BLK bef.1.Cy:50-1

Function 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing

Setting Options YES NO

Default Setting NO

Comments 3 Pole Pickup blocks 79 before 1. Cycle: 50-1

Set value, T=T Set value, T=T instantaneous, T= 0 blocked, T= infinite Set value, T=T Set value, T=T instantaneous, T= 0 blocked, T= infinite Set value, T=T Set value, T=T instantaneous, T= 0 blocked, T= infinite Set value, T=T Set value, T=T instantaneous, T= 0 blocked, T= infinite Set value, T=T Set value, T=T instantaneous, T= 0 blocked, T= infinite Set value, T=T Set value, T=T instantaneous, T= 0 blocked, T= infinite Set value, T=T Set value, T=T instantaneous, T= 0 blocked, T= infinite Set value, T=T Set value, T=T instantaneous, T= 0 blocked, T= infinite Set value, T=T Set value, T=T instantaneous, T= 0 blocked, T= infinite Set value, T=T Set value, T=T instantaneous, T= 0 blocked, T= infinite Set value, T=T Set value, T=T instantaneous, T= 0 blocked, T= infinite Set value, T=T Set value, T=T instantaneous, T= 0 blocked, T= infinite Set value, T=T Set value, T=T instantaneous, T= 0 blocked, T= infinite Set value, T=T Set value, T=T instantaneous, T= 0 blocked, T= infinite Set value, T=T Set value, T=T instantaneous, T= 0 blocked, T= infinite

7201

bef.1.Cy:50N-1

before 1. Cycle: 50N-1

7202

bef.1.Cy:50-2

before 1. Cycle: 50-2

7203

bef.1.Cy:50N-2

before 1. Cycle: 50N-2

7204

bef.1.Cy:51

before 1. Cycle: 51

7205

bef.1.Cy:51N

before 1. Cycle: 51N

7206

bef.1.Cy:67-1

before 1. Cycle: 67-1

7207

bef.1.Cy:67N-1

before 1. Cycle: 67N-1

7208

bef.1.Cy:67-2

before 1. Cycle: 67-2

7209

bef.1.Cy:67N-2

before 1. Cycle: 67N-2

7210

bef.1.Cy:67 TOC

before 1. Cycle: 67 TOC

7211

bef.1.Cy:67NTOC

before 1. Cycle: 67N TOC

7212

bef.2.Cy:50-1

before 2. Cycle: 50-1

7213

bef.2.Cy:50N-1

before 2. Cycle: 50N-1

7214

bef.2.Cy:50-2

before 2. Cycle: 50-2

532

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

A.8 Settings

Addr. 7215

Setting Title bef.2.Cy:50N-2

Function 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing

Setting Options

Default Setting

Comments before 2. Cycle: 50N-2

Set value, T=T Set value, T=T instantaneous, T= 0 blocked, T= infinite Set value, T=T Set value, T=T instantaneous, T= 0 blocked, T= infinite Set value, T=T Set value, T=T instantaneous, T= 0 blocked, T= infinite Set value, T=T Set value, T=T instantaneous, T= 0 blocked, T= infinite Set value, T=T Set value, T=T instantaneous, T= 0 blocked, T= infinite Set value, T=T Set value, T=T instantaneous, T= 0 blocked, T= infinite Set value, T=T Set value, T=T instantaneous, T= 0 blocked, T= infinite Set value, T=T Set value, T=T instantaneous, T= 0 blocked, T= infinite Set value, T=T Set value, T=T instantaneous, T= 0 blocked, T= infinite Set value, T=T Set value, T=T instantaneous, T= 0 blocked, T= infinite Set value, T=T Set value, T=T instantaneous, T= 0 blocked, T= infinite Set value, T=T Set value, T=T instantaneous, T= 0 blocked, T= infinite Set value, T=T Set value, T=T instantaneous, T= 0 blocked, T= infinite Set value, T=T Set value, T=T instantaneous, T= 0 blocked, T= infinite Set value, T=T Set value, T=T instantaneous, T= 0 blocked, T= infinite

7216

bef.2.Cy:51

before 2. Cycle: 51

7217

bef.2.Cy:51N

before 2. Cycle: 51N

7218

bef.2.Cy:67-1

before 2. Cycle: 67-1

7219

bef.2.Cy:67N-1

before 2. Cycle: 67N-1

7220

bef.2.Cy:67-2

before 2. Cycle: 67-2

7221

bef.2.Cy:67N-2

before 2. Cycle: 67N-2

7222

bef.2.Cy:67 TOC

before 2. Cycle: 67 TOC

7223

bef.2.Cy:67NTOC

before 2. Cycle: 67N TOC

7224

bef.3.Cy:50-1

before 3. Cycle: 50-1

7225

bef.3.Cy:50N-1

before 3. Cycle: 50N-1

7226

bef.3.Cy:50-2

before 3. Cycle: 50-2

7227

bef.3.Cy:50N-2

before 3. Cycle: 50N-2

7228

bef.3.Cy:51

before 3. Cycle: 51

7229

bef.3.Cy:51N

before 3. Cycle: 51N

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

533

A Appendix

Addr. 7230

Setting Title bef.3.Cy:67-1

Function 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing

Setting Options

Default Setting

Comments before 3. Cycle: 67-1

Set value, T=T Set value, T=T instantaneous, T= 0 blocked, T= infinite Set value, T=T Set value, T=T instantaneous, T= 0 blocked, T= infinite Set value, T=T Set value, T=T instantaneous, T= 0 blocked, T= infinite Set value, T=T Set value, T=T instantaneous, T= 0 blocked, T= infinite Set value, T=T Set value, T=T instantaneous, T= 0 blocked, T= infinite Set value, T=T Set value, T=T instantaneous, T= 0 blocked, T= infinite Set value, T=T Set value, T=T instantaneous, T= 0 blocked, T= infinite Set value, T=T Set value, T=T instantaneous, T= 0 blocked, T= infinite Set value, T=T Set value, T=T instantaneous, T= 0 blocked, T= infinite Set value, T=T Set value, T=T instantaneous, T= 0 blocked, T= infinite Set value, T=T Set value, T=T instantaneous, T= 0 blocked, T= infinite Set value, T=T Set value, T=T instantaneous, T= 0 blocked, T= infinite Set value, T=T Set value, T=T instantaneous, T= 0 blocked, T= infinite Set value, T=T Set value, T=T instantaneous, T= 0 blocked, T= infinite Set value, T=T Set value, T=T instantaneous, T= 0 blocked, T= infinite

7231

bef.3.Cy:67N-1

before 3. Cycle: 67N-1

7232

bef.3.Cy:67-2

before 3. Cycle: 67-2

7233

bef.3.Cy:67N-2

before 3. Cycle: 67N-2

7234

bef.3.Cy:67 TOC

before 3. Cycle: 67 TOC

7235

bef.3.Cy:67NTOC

before 3. Cycle: 67N TOC

7236

bef.4.Cy:50-1

before 4. Cycle: 50-1

7237

bef.4.Cy:50N-1

before 4. Cycle: 50N-1

7238

bef.4.Cy:50-2

before 4. Cycle: 50-2

7239

bef.4.Cy:50N-2

before 4. Cycle: 50N-2

7240

bef.4.Cy:51

before 4. Cycle: 51

7241

bef.4.Cy:51N

before 4. Cycle: 51N

7242

bef.4.Cy:67-1

before 4. Cycle: 67-1

7243

bef.4.Cy:67N-1

before 4. Cycle: 67N-1

7244

bef.4.Cy:67-2

before 4. Cycle: 67-2

534

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

A.8 Settings

Addr. 7245

Setting Title bef.4.Cy:67N-2

Function 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing Fault Locator Measurement Supervision

Setting Options

Default Setting

Comments before 4. Cycle: 67N-2

Set value, T=T Set value, T=T instantaneous, T= 0 blocked, T= infinite Set value, T=T Set value, T=T instantaneous, T= 0 blocked, T= infinite Set value, T=T Set value, T=T instantaneous, T= 0 blocked, T= infinite Pickup TRIP OFF ON 10..100 V 0.58..0.90 0.10..1.00 A 0.10..0.90 0.05..2.00 A; 0.00..0.95 Pickup ON 50 V 0.75 0.50 A 0.50 0.10 A 0.10 ON 60 Min per., 1 Sub.

7246

bef.4.Cy:67 TOC

before 4. Cycle: 67 TOC

7247

bef.4.Cy:67NTOC

before 4. Cycle: 67N TOC

8001 8101 8102 8103 8104 8105 8106 8107 8201 8301

START MEASURE. SUPERV

Start fault locator with Measurement Supervision Voltage Threshold for Balance Monitoring Balance Factor for Voltage Monitor Current Threshold for Balance Monitoring Balance Factor for Current Monitor Summated Current Monitoring Threshold Summated Current Monitoring Factor 74TC TRIP Circuit Supervision Demand Calculation Intervals

BALANCE V-LIMIT Measurement Supervision BAL. FACTOR V BALANCE I LIMIT BAL. FACTOR I I THRESHOLD I FACTOR FCT 74TC DMD Interval Measurement Supervision Measurement Supervision Measurement Supervision Measurement Supervision Measurement Supervision

74TC Trip CirON cuit Supervision OFF Demand Mea15 Min per., 1 Sub surement Setup 15 Min per., 3 Subs 15 Min per., 15 Subs 30 Min per., 1 Sub. 60 Min per., 1 Sub. 60 Min per., 10 Subs 5 Min per., 5 Subs Demand MeaOn the Hour surement Setup 15 Min. after Hour 30 Min. after Hour 45 Min. after Hour

8302

DMD Sync.Time

On the Hour

Demand Synchronization Time

8311 8312 8313

MinMax cycRESET Min/Max MeaNO surement Setup YES MiMa RESET TIME Min/Max Mea0..1439 min surement Setup MiMa RESETCYCLE Min/Max Mea1..365 day(s) surement Setup

YES 0 min 7 day(s)

Automatic Cyclic Reset Function MinMax Reset Timer MinMax Reset Cycle Period

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

535

A Appendix

Addr. 8314 8315

Setting Title MinMaxRES.START MeterResolution

Function

Setting Options

Default Setting 1 Days Standard

Comments MinMax Start Reset Cycle in Meter resolution

Min/Max Mea1..365 Days surement Setup Energy Standard Resolution Factor 10 Resolution Factor 100 not connected Pt 100 Ohm Ni 120 Ohm Ni 100 Ohm Oil Ambient Winding Bearing Other -50..250 C; -58..482 F; -50..250 C; -58..482 F; not connected Pt 100 Ohm Ni 120 Ohm Ni 100 Ohm Oil Ambient Winding Bearing Other -50..250 C; -58..482 F; -50..250 C; -58..482 F; not connected Pt 100 Ohm Ni 120 Ohm Ni 100 Ohm

9011A RTD 1 TYPE

RTD-Box

Pt 100 Ohm

RTD 1: Type

9012A RTD 1 LOCATION

RTD-Box

Oil

RTD 1: Location

9013 9014 9015 9016

RTD 1 STAGE 1 RTD 1 STAGE 1 RTD 1 STAGE 2 RTD 1 STAGE 2

RTD-Box RTD-Box RTD-Box RTD-Box RTD-Box

100 C 212 F 120 C 248 F not connected

RTD 1: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup RTD 1: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup RTD 1: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup RTD 1: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup RTD 2: Type

9021A RTD 2 TYPE

9022A RTD 2 LOCATION

RTD-Box

Other

RTD 2: Location

9023 9024 9025 9026

RTD 2 STAGE 1 RTD 2 STAGE 1 RTD 2 STAGE 2 RTD 2 STAGE 2

RTD-Box RTD-Box RTD-Box RTD-Box RTD-Box

100 C 212 F 120 C 248 F not connected

RTD 2: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup RTD 2: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup RTD 2: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup RTD 2: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup RTD 3: Type

9031A RTD 3 TYPE

536

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

A.8 Settings

Addr.

Setting Title

Function RTD-Box

Setting Options Oil Ambient Winding Bearing Other -50..250 C; -58..482 F; -50..250 C; -58..482 F; not connected Pt 100 Ohm Ni 120 Ohm Ni 100 Ohm Oil Ambient Winding Bearing Other -50..250 C; -58..482 F; -50..250 C; -58..482 F; not connected Pt 100 Ohm Ni 120 Ohm Ni 100 Ohm Oil Ambient Winding Bearing Other -50..250 C; -58..482 F; -50..250 C;

Default Setting Other

Comments RTD 3: Location

9032A RTD 3 LOCATION

9033 9034 9035 9036

RTD 3 STAGE 1 RTD 3 STAGE 1 RTD 3 STAGE 2 RTD 3 STAGE 2

RTD-Box RTD-Box RTD-Box RTD-Box RTD-Box

100 C 212 F 120 C 248 F not connected

RTD 3: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup RTD 3: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup RTD 3: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup RTD 3: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup RTD 4: Type

9041A RTD 4 TYPE

9042A RTD 4 LOCATION

RTD-Box

Other

RTD 4: Location

9043 9044 9045 9046

RTD 4 STAGE 1 RTD 4 STAGE 1 RTD 4 STAGE 2 RTD 4 STAGE 2

RTD-Box RTD-Box RTD-Box RTD-Box RTD-Box

100 C 212 F 120 C 248 F not connected

RTD 4: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup RTD 4: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup RTD 4: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup RTD 4: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup RTD 5: Type

9051A RTD 5 TYPE

9052A RTD 5 LOCATION

RTD-Box

Other

RTD 5: Location

9053 9054 9055

RTD 5 STAGE 1 RTD 5 STAGE 1 RTD 5 STAGE 2

RTD-Box RTD-Box RTD-Box

100 C 212 F 120 C

RTD 5: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup RTD 5: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup RTD 5: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

537

A Appendix

Addr. 9056

Setting Title RTD 5 STAGE 2

Function RTD-Box RTD-Box

Setting Options -58..482 F; not connected Pt 100 Ohm Ni 120 Ohm Ni 100 Ohm Oil Ambient Winding Bearing Other -50..250 C; -58..482 F; -50..250 C; -58..482 F; not connected Pt 100 Ohm Ni 120 Ohm Ni 100 Ohm Oil Ambient Winding Bearing Other -50..250 C; -58..482 F; -50..250 C; -58..482 F; not connected Pt 100 Ohm Ni 120 Ohm Ni 100 Ohm Oil Ambient Winding Bearing Other -50..250 C;

Default Setting 248 F not connected

Comments RTD 5: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup RTD 6: Type

9061A RTD 6 TYPE

9062A RTD 6 LOCATION

RTD-Box

Other

RTD 6: Location

9063 9064 9065 9066

RTD 6 STAGE 1 RTD 6 STAGE 1 RTD 6 STAGE 2 RTD 6 STAGE 2

RTD-Box RTD-Box RTD-Box RTD-Box RTD-Box

100 C 212 F 120 C 248 F not connected

RTD 6: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup RTD 6: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup RTD 6: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup RTD 6: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup RTD 7: Type

9071A RTD 7 TYPE

9072A RTD 7 LOCATION

RTD-Box

Other

RTD 7: Location

9073 9074 9075 9076

RTD 7 STAGE 1 RTD 7 STAGE 1 RTD 7 STAGE 2 RTD 7 STAGE 2

RTD-Box RTD-Box RTD-Box RTD-Box RTD-Box

100 C 212 F 120 C 248 F not connected

RTD 7: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup RTD 7: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup RTD 7: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup RTD 7: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup RTD 8: Type

9081A RTD 8 TYPE

9082A RTD 8 LOCATION

RTD-Box

Other

RTD 8: Location

9083

RTD 8 STAGE 1

RTD-Box

100 C

RTD 8: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup

538

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

A.8 Settings

Addr. 9084 9085 9086

Setting Title RTD 8 STAGE 1 RTD 8 STAGE 2 RTD 8 STAGE 2

Function RTD-Box RTD-Box RTD-Box RTD-Box

Setting Options -58..482 F; -50..250 C; -58..482 F; not connected Pt 100 Ohm Ni 120 Ohm Ni 100 Ohm Oil Ambient Winding Bearing Other -50..250 C; -58..482 F; -50..250 C; -58..482 F; not connected Pt 100 Ohm Ni 120 Ohm Ni 100 Ohm Oil Ambient Winding Bearing Other -50..250 C; -58..482 F; -50..250 C; -58..482 F; not connected Pt 100 Ohm Ni 120 Ohm Ni 100 Ohm

Default Setting 212 F 120 C 248 F not connected

Comments RTD 8: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup RTD 8: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup RTD 8: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup RTD 9: Type

9091A RTD 9 TYPE

9092A RTD 9 LOCATION

RTD-Box

Other

RTD 9: Location

9093 9094 9095 9096

RTD 9 STAGE 1 RTD 9 STAGE 1 RTD 9 STAGE 2 RTD 9 STAGE 2

RTD-Box RTD-Box RTD-Box RTD-Box RTD-Box

100 C 212 F 120 C 248 F not connected

RTD 9: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup RTD 9: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup RTD 9: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup RTD 9: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup RTD10: Type

9101A RTD10 TYPE

9102A RTD10 LOCATION RTD-Box

Other

RTD10: Location

9103 9104 9105 9106

RTD10 STAGE 1 RTD10 STAGE 1 RTD10 STAGE 2 RTD10 STAGE 2

RTD-Box RTD-Box RTD-Box RTD-Box RTD-Box

100 C 212 F 120 C 248 F not connected

RTD10: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup RTD10: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup RTD10: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup RTD10: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup RTD11: Type

9111A RTD11 TYPE

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

539

A Appendix

Addr.

Setting Title

Function

Setting Options Oil Ambient Winding Bearing Other -50..250 C; -58..482 F; -50..250 C; -58..482 F; not connected Pt 100 Ohm Ni 120 Ohm Ni 100 Ohm Oil Ambient Winding Bearing Other -50..250 C; -58..482 F; -50..250 C; -58..482 F;

Default Setting Other

Comments RTD11: Location

9112A RTD11 LOCATION RTD-Box

9113 9114 9115 9116

RTD11 STAGE 1 RTD11 STAGE 1 RTD11 STAGE 2 RTD11 STAGE 2

RTD-Box RTD-Box RTD-Box RTD-Box RTD-Box

100 C 212 F 120 C 248 F not connected

RTD11: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup RTD11: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup RTD11: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup RTD11: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup RTD12: Type

9121A RTD12 TYPE

9122A RTD12 LOCATION RTD-Box

Other

RTD12: Location

9123 9124 9125 9126

RTD12 STAGE 1 RTD12 STAGE 1 RTD12 STAGE 2 RTD12 STAGE 2

RTD-Box RTD-Box RTD-Box RTD-Box

100 C 212 F 120 C 248 F

RTD12: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup RTD12: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup RTD12: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup RTD12: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup

540

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

A.9 Overview of the masking features of the user defined information

A.9

Overview of the masking features of the user defined information

Type of Information Binary Inputs

Source Function Keys

Destination Binary Outputs Measurement

CFC Task level PLC1 (slow) PLC (fast) Interlocking X X X X X X X X X2) X2) X X X X X2) X2) X2) X2) X2) X2) X2) X2) X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

CFC

Annunciation:
Single Point SP_Ev SP SP Double Point DP DP_I Output Slow OUT OUT OUT Output Fast OUT OUT Tagging IntSP_ Ev IntSP IntSP IntDP IntDP_I Tap Changer TxTap Transformer Tap Changer X Internal Single Point Indication Event Internal Single Point Indication ON/OFF Internal Single Point Indication Open/Close Internal Double Point Indication (Breaker indication X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X1) X1) X1) X1) Protection ON/OFF Protection Open/Close X X X X X X X X Output Indication Event Output Indication ON/OFF Output Indication Open/Close X X X X X X X X X1) X1) Double Point Indication (Breaker indication 00 = not valid/transmitted as 3) Double Point Indication (Breaker indication 00 = intermediate/transmitted as 0) X X X X X X X1) X1) Single Point Indication Event Single Point Indication ON/OFF Single Point Indication Open/Close X X X X X X X X X X

00 = not valid/transmitted as 3)
Internal Double Point Indication (Breaker indication

00 = intermediate/transmitted as 0)

Control Commands without feedback:

Single Controls C_S C_S
1) 2)

ON/OFF Open/Close

X X

X X

CFC X X

LED

Only for measurement setpoints (is processed cyclically every 600 ms); do not use for binary inputs. Only for commands (is triggered by commands only).

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

541

A Appendix

Type of Information Binary Inputs

Source Function Keys

Destination Binary Outputs Measurement

CFC Task level PLC1 (slow) PLC (fast) Interlocking X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

CFC

Single Controls negated C_SN C_SN C_D2 C_D2 C_D2 C_D3 C_D3 C_D3 C_D4 C_D4 C_D4 C_D12 C_D12 C_D12 C_D2N C_D2N C_D2N
1) 2

ON/OFF Open/Close ON/OFF Open/Close Transformer Tap Changer ON/OFF Open/Close Transformer Tap Changer ON/OFF Open/Close Transformer Tap Changer ON/OFF Open/Close Transformer Tap Changer ON/OFF Open/Close Transformer Tap Changer

X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

CFC X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

LED

Double Controls 1 Trip 1 Close

Double Controls 1 Trip 1 Close 1 Common

Double Controls 2 Trip 2 Close

Double Controls 1 Trip 2 Close

Double Controls negated

Only for measurement setpoints (is processed cyclically every 600 ms); do not use for binary inputs. ) Only for commands (is triggered by commands only).

542

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

A.9 Overview of the masking features of the user defined information

Type of Information Binary Inputs

Source Function Keys

Destination Binary Outputs Measurement

CFC Task level PLC1 (slow) PLC (fast) Interlocking X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

CFC

Control Commands with feedback:

Single Controls CF_S SP CF_S SP CF_S DP CF_S DP_I CF_D2 SP CF_D2 SP CF_D2 DP CF_D2 DP_I CF_D2 TxTap Double Controls 1 Trip 1 Close 1 Common CF_D3 SP CF_D3 SP CF_D3 DP CF_D3 DP_I CF_D3 TxTap Double Controls 2 Trip 2 Close CF_D4 SP CF_D4 SP CF_D4 DP Double Point Indication (Breaker indication 00 = not valid/transmitted as 3) Single Point Indication Open/Close Single Point Indication ON/OFF Control Feedback Control Feedback Control Feedback X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Double Point Indication (Breaker indication 00 = not valid/transmitted as 3) Single Point Indication Open/Close Single Point Indication ON/OFF Control Feedback Control Feedback Control Feedback X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Double Point Indication (Breaker indication 00 = not valid/transmitted as 3) Double Point Indication (Breaker indication Single Point Indication Open/Close Double Point Indication (Breaker indication 00 = not valid/transmitted as 3) Single Point Indication Open/Close Single Point Indication ON/OFF Control Feedback Control Feedback Control Feedback X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

Double Point Indication (Breaker indication Control 00 = intermediate/transmitted as 0) Feedback Single Point Indication ON/OFF Control Feedback Control Feedback Control Feedback Control Feedback Control Feedback

Double Controls 1 Trip 1 Close

00 = intermediate/transmitted as 0)
Transformer Tap Changer

Double Point Indication (Breaker indication Control 00 = intermediate/transmitted as 0) Feedback Transformer Tap Changer Control Feedback

CFC

LED

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

543

A Appendix

Type of Information Binary Inputs

Source Function Keys

Destination Binary Outputs Measurement

CFC Task level PLC1 (slow) PLC (fast) Interlocking X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

CFC

CF_D4 DP_I CF_D4 TxTap

Double Point Indication (Breaker indication

Control Feedback Control Feedback Control Feedback Control Feedback Control Feedback

X X X X X X X X X

X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

X X X X

CFC X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

LED

00 = intermediate/transmitted as 0)
Transformer Tap Changer

Double Controls 1 Trip 2 Close CF_D12 Single Point Indication ON/OFF SP CF_D12 Single Point Indication Open/Close SP DP CF_D12 Double Point Indication (Breaker indication 00 = not valid/transmitted as 3)

CF_D12 Double Point Indication (Breaker indication Control 00 = intermediate/transmitted as 0) DP_I Feedback CF_D12 Transformer Tap Changer TxTap Double Controls 1 Trip 1 Close negated CF_D2N Single Point Indication ON/OFF SP CF_D2N Single Point Indication Open/Close SP CF_D2N Double Point Indication (Breaker indication 00 = not valid/transmitted as 3) DP Control Feedback Control Feedback Control Feedback Control Feedback

CF_D2N Double Point Indication (Breaker indication Control 00 = intermediate/transmitted as 0) DP_I Feedback CF_D2N Transformer Tap Changer TxTap Control Feedback

Measured Values:
MV MVU LV LVU Measured Value Measured Value, User Defined Limit Value Limit Value, User Defined X X X X X

Metered Values:
MVMV PMV Metered Value of Measured Values Pulse Metered Values X

544

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

A.10 Information List

A.10 Information List

NOTE: The following table lists all data which are available in the maximum complement of the device. Dependent on the ordered model, only those data may be present which are valid for the individual version. The symbol > indicates that the source of the indication is a binary input. Indications for T103 are always reported ON / OFF if they are subject to general interrogation for IEC 60870-5-103. If not, they are reported only as ON. New user-defined indications or such newly allocated to IEC 60870-5-103 are set to ON / OFF and subjected to general interrogation if the information type is not a spontaneous event (".._Ev"). In columns Event Log, Trip Log and Ground Fault Log the following applies: UPPER CASE: lower case: *: <blank>: ON/OFF definitely set, not allocatable preset, allocatable not preset, allocatable neither preset nor allocatable

O/O OUT SP

ON / OFF Output Indication Single Point Indication

DP C CF MV LV

Double Point Indication Command without feedback Command with Feedback Measured Value Limit Value

IntSP Internal Single Point Indication SP_E Spontaneous Event v

F.No.

Description

Function

Type of Information

Log-Buffers

Configurable in Matrix

IEC 60870-5-103

Ground Fault Log On/Off

Marked in Oscill. Record

Trip (Fault) Log On/Off

00003

>Synchronize Internal Real Time Clock (>Time Synch) >Trigger Waveform Capture (>Trig.Wave.Cap.) >Reset LED (>Reset LED)

Device, General Settings Oscillographic Fault Records Device, General Settings Change Group

SP_Ev

LED BI

BO

135

48

00004

SP

LED BI

BO

135

49

00005

SP

LED BI

BO

135

50

00007

>Setting Group Select Bit 0 (>Set Group Bit0) >Setting Group Select Bit 1 (>Set Group Bit1) >Test mode (>Test mode)

SP

LED BI

BO

135

51

00008

Change Group

SP

LED BI

BO

135

52

00015

Device, General Settings

SP

LED BI

BO

135

53

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

545

General Interrogation GI GI GI GI GI GI

Event Log On/Off

Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking

Information-No

Binary Output

Function Key

Binary Input

Type

LED

A Appendix

F.No.

Description

Function

Type of Information

Log-Buffers

Configurable in Matrix

IEC 60870-5-103

Ground Fault Log On/Off

Marked in Oscill. Record

Trip (Fault) Log On/Off

00016

>Stop data transmission (>DataStop) Device is Operational and Protecting (Device OK) At Least 1 Protection Funct. is Active (ProtActive) Reset Device (Reset Device)

Device, General Settings Device, General Settings Device, General Settings Device, General Settings Device, General Settings Device, General Settings Device, General Settings Device, General Settings Device, General Settings Device, General Settings Device, General Settings Device, General Settings Device, General Settings Device, General Settings Device, General Settings Device, General Settings Power System Data 2 79M Auto Reclosing Device, General Settings Device, General Settings Device, General Settings

SP

LED BI

BO

135

54

00051

OUT

ON OFF ON OFF ON

LED

BO

135

81

00052

IntSP

LED

BO

160

18

00055

OUT

00056

Initial Start of Device (Initial Start)

OUT

ON

LED

BO

160

00060

Reset LED (Reset LED)

OUT_Ev ON

LED

BO

160

19

00067

Resume (Resume)

OUT

on

LED

BO

00068

Clock Synchronization Error (Clock SyncError) Daylight Saving Time (DayLightSavTime) Setting calculation is running (Settings Calc.) Settings Check (Settings Check)

OUT

on off ON OFF ON OFF

LED

BO

00069

OUT

LED

BO

00070

OUT

LED

BO

160

22

00071

OUT

LED

BO

00072

Level-2 change (Level-2 change)

OUT

ON OFF

LED

BO

00073

Local setting change (Local change) Event lost (Event Lost)

OUT

00110

OUT_Ev ON

LED

BO

135

130

00113

Flag Lost (Flag Lost)

OUT

ON

LED

BO

135

136

00125

Chatter ON (Chatter ON)

OUT

ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF

LED

BO

135

145

00126

Protection ON/OFF (via system port) (ProtON/OFF) 79 ON/OFF (via system port) (79 ON/OFF) Error with a summary alarm (Error Sum Alarm) Error 5V (Error 5V)

IntSP

LED

BO

00127

IntSP

LED

BO

00140

OUT

LED

BO

160

47

00144

OUT

LED

BO

00145

Error 0V (Error 0V)

OUT

LED

BO

546

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

General Interrogation GI GI GI GI GI GI GI

Event Log On/Off

Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking

Information-No

Binary Output

Function Key

Binary Input

Type

LED

A.10 Information List

F.No.

Description

Function

Type of Information

Log-Buffers

Configurable in Matrix

IEC 60870-5-103

Ground Fault Log On/Off

Marked in Oscill. Record

Trip (Fault) Log On/Off

00146

Error -5V (Error -5V)

Device, General Settings Device, General Settings Device, General Settings Measurement Supervision Measurement Supervision Measurement Supervision Measurement Supervision Measurement Supervision Measurement Supervision Measurement Supervision Device, General Settings Device, General Settings Device, General Settings Device, General Settings Device, General Settings Device, General Settings Device, General Settings Device, General Settings Device, General Settings Measurement Supervision Oscillographic Fault Records

OUT

ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF

LED

BO

00147

Error Power Supply (Error PwrSupply) Alarm Summary Event (Alarm Sum Event) Failure: General Current Supervision (Fail I Superv.) Failure: Current Summation (Failure I) Failure: Current Balance (Fail I balance) Failure: Voltage Balance (Fail V balance) Failure: Phase Sequence (Fail Ph. Seq.) Failure: Phase Sequence Current (Fail Ph. Seq. I) Failure: Phase Sequence Voltage (Fail Ph. Seq. V) Failure: Battery empty (Fail Battery) I/O-Board Error (I/O-Board error)

OUT

LED

BO

00160

OUT

LED

BO

160

46

00161

OUT

LED

BO

160

32

00162

OUT

LED

BO

135

182

00163

OUT

LED

BO

135

183

00167

OUT

LED

BO

135

186

00171

OUT

LED

BO

160

35

00175

OUT

LED

BO

135

191

00176

OUT

LED

BO

135

192

00177

OUT

LED

BO

00178

OUT

LED

BO

00183

Error Board 1 (Error Board 1)

OUT

LED

BO

00184

Error Board 2 (Error Board 2)

OUT

LED

BO

00185

Error Board 3 (Error Board 3)

OUT

LED

BO

00186

Error Board 4 (Error Board 4)

OUT

LED

BO

00187

Error Board 5 (Error Board 5)

OUT

LED

BO

00188

Error Board 6 (Error Board 6)

OUT

LED

BO

00189

Error Board 7 (Error Board 7)

OUT

LED

BO

00197

Measurement Supervision is switched OFF (MeasSup OFF) Waveform data deleted (Wave. deleted)

OUT

LED

BO

135

197

00203

OUT_Ev ON

LED

BO

135

203

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

547

General Interrogation GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI

Event Log On/Off

Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking

Information-No

Binary Output

Function Key

Binary Input

Type

LED

A Appendix

F.No.

Description

Function

Type of Information

Log-Buffers

Configurable in Matrix

IEC 60870-5-103

Ground Fault Log On/Off

Marked in Oscill. Record

Trip (Fault) Log On/Off

00264

Failure: RTD-Box 1 (Fail: RTD-Box 1) Failure: RTD-Box 2 (Fail: RTD-Box 2) Supervision Pressure (Superv.Pressure) Supervision Temperature (Superv.Temp.) Set Point Pressure< (SP. Pressure<) Set Point Temp> (SP. Temp>)

RTD-Box

OUT

ON OFF ON OFF on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off ON OFF

LED

BO

00267

RTD-Box

OUT

LED

BO

00268

Measurement

OUT

LED

BO

00269

Measurement

OUT

LED

BO

00270

Set Points (Measured Values) Set Points (Measured Values) Set Points (Statistic) Set Points (Measured Values) Set Points (Measured Values) Set Points (Measured Values) Set Points (Measured Values) Set Points (Measured Values) Set Points (Measured Values) Set Points (Measured Values) Set Points (Measured Values) Set Points (Measured Values) Device, General Settings Device, General Settings Device, General Settings Power System Data 2 Min/Max Measurement Setup

OUT

LED

BO

00271

OUT

LED

BO

00272

Set Point Operating Hours (SP. Op Hours>) Set Point Phase A dmd> (SP. I A dmd>) Set Point Phase B dmd> (SP. I B dmd>) Set Point Phase C dmd> (SP. I C dmd>) Set Point positive sequence I1dmd> (SP. I1dmd>) Set Point |Pdmd|> (SP. |Pdmd|>)

OUT

LED

BO

135

229

00273

OUT

LED

BO

135

230

00274

OUT

LED

BO

135

234

00275

OUT

LED

BO

135

235

00276

OUT

LED

BO

135

236

00277

OUT

LED

BO

135

237

00278

Set Point |Qdmd|> (SP. |Qdmd|>)

OUT

LED

BO

135

238

00279

Set Point |Sdmd|> (SP. |Sdmd|>)

OUT

LED

BO

135

239

00284

Set Point 37-1 Undercurrent alarm (SP. 37-1 alarm) Set Point 55 Power factor alarm (SP. PF(55)alarm) Power System fault (Pow.Sys.Flt.)

OUT

LED

BO

135

244

00285

OUT

LED

BO

135

245

00301

OUT

ON OFF ON

135

231

00302

Fault Event (Fault Event)

OUT

135

232

00303

sensitive Ground fault (sens Gnd flt) >Manual close signal (>Manual Close) >I MIN/MAX Buffer Reset (>I MinMax Reset)

OUT

ON OFF

ON

135

233

00356

SP

LED BI

BO

150

00395

SP

ON

BI

BO

548

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

General Interrogation GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI

Event Log On/Off

Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking

Information-No

Binary Output

Function Key

Binary Input

Type

LED

A.10 Information List

F.No.

Description

Function

Type of Information

Log-Buffers

Configurable in Matrix

IEC 60870-5-103

Ground Fault Log On/Off

Marked in Oscill. Record

Trip (Fault) Log On/Off

00396

>I1 MIN/MAX Buffer Reset (>I1 MiMaReset) >V MIN/MAX Buffer Reset (>V MiMaReset) >Vphph MIN/MAX Buffer Reset (>VphphMiMaRes) >V1 MIN/MAX Buffer Reset (>V1 MiMa Reset) >P MIN/MAX Buffer Reset (>P MiMa Reset) >S MIN/MAX Buffer Reset (>S MiMa Reset) >Q MIN/MAX Buffer Reset (>Q MiMa Reset) >Idmd MIN/MAX Buffer Reset (>Idmd MiMaReset) >Pdmd MIN/MAX Buffer Reset (>Pdmd MiMaReset) >Qdmd MIN/MAX Buffer Reset (>Qdmd MiMaReset) >Sdmd MIN/MAX Buffer Reset (>Sdmd MiMaReset) >Frq. MIN/MAX Buffer Reset (>Frq MiMa Reset) >Power Factor MIN/MAX Buffer Reset (>PF MiMaReset) >BLOCK Op Counter (>BLOCK Op Count) >Theta MIN/MAX Buffer Reset (> MiMa Reset) Relay PICKUP (Relay PICKUP)

Min/Max Measurement Setup Min/Max Measurement Setup Min/Max Measurement Setup Min/Max Measurement Setup Min/Max Measurement Setup Min/Max Measurement Setup Min/Max Measurement Setup Min/Max Measurement Setup Min/Max Measurement Setup Min/Max Measurement Setup Min/Max Measurement Setup Min/Max Measurement Setup Min/Max Measurement Setup Statistics

SP

ON

BI

BO

00397

SP

ON

BI

BO

00398

SP

ON

BI

BO

00399

SP

ON

BI

BO

00400

SP

ON

BI

BO

00401

SP

ON

BI

BO

00402

SP

ON

BI

BO

00403

SP

ON

BI

BO

00404

SP

ON

BI

BO

00405

SP

ON

BI

BO

00406

SP

ON

BI

BO

00407

SP

ON

BI

BO

00408

SP

ON

BI

BO

00409

SP

on off ON

LED BI

BO

00412

Min/Max Measurement Setup Power System Data 2 Power System Data 2 Power System Data 2 Power System Data 2 Power System Data 2 Power System Data 2

SP

BI

BO

00501

OUT

ON

LED

BO

150

151

00511

Relay GENERAL TRIP command (Relay TRIP) Primary fault current Ia (Ia =)

OUT

ON

LED

BO

150

161

00533

OUT

ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF LED BO

150

177

00534

Primary fault current Ib (Ib =)

OUT

150

178

00535

Primary fault current Ic (Ic =)

OUT

150

179

00561

Manual close signal detected (Man.Clos.Detect)

OUT

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

549

General Interrogation GI GI

Event Log On/Off

Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking

Information-No

Binary Output

Function Key

Binary Input

Type

LED

A Appendix

F.No.

Description

Function

Type of Information

Log-Buffers

Configurable in Matrix

IEC 60870-5-103

Ground Fault Log On/Off

Marked in Oscill. Record

Trip (Fault) Log On/Off

01020

Counter of operating hours (Op.Hours=) Accumulation of interrupted current Ph A ( Ia =) Accumulation of interrupted current Ph B ( Ib =) Accumulation of interrupted current Ph C ( Ic =) >Start Fault Locator (>Start Flt. Loc) Flt Locator: secondary REACTANCE (Xsec =) Flt Locator: Distance to fault (dist =) Fault Locator Loop AG (FL Loop AG) Fault Locator Loop BG (FL Loop BG) Fault Locator Loop CG (FL Loop CG) Fault Locator Loop AB (FL Loop AB) Fault Locator Loop BC (FL Loop BC) Fault Locator Loop CA (FL Loop CA) Fault location invalid (Flt.Loc.invalid) >BLOCK 64 (>BLOCK 64)

Statistics

OUT

01021

Statistics

OUT

01022

Statistics

OUT

01023

Statistics

OUT

01106

Fault Locator

SP

ON

LED BI

BO

151

01118

Fault Locator

OUT

ON OFF ON OFF ON

151

18

01119

Fault Locator

OUT

151

19

01123

Fault Locator

OUT

01124

Fault Locator

OUT

ON

01125

Fault Locator

OUT

ON

01126

Fault Locator

OUT

ON

01127

Fault Locator

OUT

ON

01128

Fault Locator

OUT

ON

01132

Fault Locator

OUT

ON

01201

64, 50Ns, 51Ns, 67Ns (Sensitive) Gnd Flt 64, 50Ns, 51Ns, 67Ns (Sensitive) Gnd Flt 64, 50Ns, 51Ns, 67Ns (Sensitive) Gnd Flt 64, 50Ns, 51Ns, 67Ns (Sensitive) Gnd Flt 64, 50Ns, 51Ns, 67Ns (Sensitive) Gnd Flt

SP

ON OFF

LED BI

BO

151

101

01202

>BLOCK 50Ns-2 (>BLOCK 50Ns2)

SP

ON OFF

LED BI

BO

151

102

01203

>BLOCK 50Ns-1 (>BLOCK 50Ns1)

SP

ON OFF

LED BI

BO

151

103

01204

>BLOCK 51Ns (>BLOCK 51Ns)

SP

ON OFF

LED BI

BO

151

104

01207

>BLOCK 50Ns/67Ns (>BLK 50Ns/ 67Ns)

SP

ON OFF

LED BI

BO

151

107

550

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

General Interrogation GI GI GI GI GI GI

Event Log On/Off

Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking

Information-No

Binary Output

Function Key

Binary Input

Type

LED

A.10 Information List

F.No.

Description

Function

Type of Information

Log-Buffers

Configurable in Matrix

IEC 60870-5-103

Ground Fault Log On/Off

Marked in Oscill. Record

Trip (Fault) Log On/Off

01211

50Ns/67Ns is OFF (50Ns/67Ns OFF)

64, 50Ns, 51Ns, 67Ns (Sensitive) Gnd Flt 64, 50Ns, 51Ns, 67Ns (Sensitive) Gnd Flt 64, 50Ns, 51Ns, 67Ns (Sensitive) Gnd Flt 64, 50Ns, 51Ns, 67Ns (Sensitive) Gnd Flt 64, 50Ns, 51Ns, 67Ns (Sensitive) Gnd Flt 64, 50Ns, 51Ns, 67Ns (Sensitive) Gnd Flt 64, 50Ns, 51Ns, 67Ns (Sensitive) Gnd Flt 64, 50Ns, 51Ns, 67Ns (Sensitive) Gnd Flt 64, 50Ns, 51Ns, 67Ns (Sensitive) Gnd Flt 64, 50Ns, 51Ns, 67Ns (Sensitive) Gnd Flt 64, 50Ns, 51Ns, 67Ns (Sensitive) Gnd Flt 64, 50Ns, 51Ns, 67Ns (Sensitive) Gnd Flt 64, 50Ns, 51Ns, 67Ns (Sensitive) Gnd Flt 64, 50Ns, 51Ns, 67Ns (Sensitive) Gnd Flt 64, 50Ns, 51Ns, 67Ns (Sensitive) Gnd Flt 64, 50Ns, 51Ns, 67Ns (Sensitive) Gnd Flt

OUT

ON OFF

LED

BO

151

111

01212

50Ns/67Ns is ACTIVE (50Ns/67Ns ACT)

OUT

ON OFF

LED

BO

151

112

01215

64 displacement voltage pick up (64 Pickup)

OUT

ON OFF

LED

BO

151

115

01217

64 displacement voltage element TRIP (64 TRIP)

OUT

ON

LED

BO

151

117

01221

50Ns-2 Pickup (50Ns-2 Pickup)

OUT

ON OFF

LED

BO

151

121

01223

50Ns-2 TRIP (50Ns-2 TRIP)

OUT

ON

LED

BO

151

123

01224

50Ns-1 Pickup (50Ns-1 Pickup)

OUT

ON OFF

LED

BO

151

124

01226

50Ns-1 TRIP (50Ns-1 TRIP)

OUT

ON

LED

BO

151

126

01227

51Ns picked up (51Ns Pickup)

OUT

ON OFF

LED

BO

151

127

01229

51Ns TRIP (51Ns TRIP)

OUT

ON

LED

BO

151

129

01230

Sensitive ground fault detection BLOCKED (Sens. Gnd block)

OUT

ON OFF

ON OFF

LED

BO

151

130

01272

Sensitive Ground fault picked up in Ph A (Sens. Gnd Ph A)

OUT

ON OFF

ON

ON

LED

BO

160

48

01273

Sensitive Ground fault picked up in Ph B (Sens. Gnd Ph B)

OUT

ON OFF

ON

ON

LED

BO

160

49

01274

Sensitive Ground fault picked up in Ph C (Sens. Gnd Ph C)

OUT

ON OFF

ON

ON

LED

BO

160

50

01276

Sensitive Gnd fault in forward direction (SensGnd Forward)

OUT

ON OFF

ON

ON

LED

BO

160

51

01277

Sensitive Gnd fault in reverse direction (SensGnd Reverse)

OUT

ON OFF

ON

ON

LED

BO

160

52

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

551

General Interrogation GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI

Event Log On/Off

Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking

Information-No

Binary Output

Function Key

Binary Input

Type

LED

A Appendix

F.No.

Description

Function

Type of Information

Log-Buffers

Configurable in Matrix

IEC 60870-5-103

Ground Fault Log On/Off

Marked in Oscill. Record

Trip (Fault) Log On/Off

01278

Sensitive Gnd fault direction undefined (SensGnd undef.)

64, 50Ns, 51Ns, 67Ns (Sensitive) Gnd Flt 50BF Breaker Failure 50BF Breaker Failure 50BF Breaker Failure 50BF Breaker Failure 50BF Breaker Failure 50BF Breaker Failure 50BF Breaker Failure 50BF Breaker Failure 50BF Breaker Failure 50BF Breaker Failure 49 Thermal Overload 49 Thermal Overload 49 Thermal Overload 49 Thermal Overload 49 Thermal Overload 49 Thermal Overload 49 Thermal Overload 49 Thermal Overload 49 Thermal Overload 49 Thermal Overload

OUT

ON OFF

ON

ON

LED

BO

151

178

01403

>BLOCK 50BF (>BLOCK 50BF)

SP

ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON M ON OFF

LED BI

BO

166

103

01431

>50BF initiated externally (>50BF ext SRC) 50BF is switched OFF (50BF OFF)

SP

LED BI

BO

166

104

01451

OUT

LED

BO

166

151

01452

50BF is BLOCKED (50BF BLOCK)

OUT

LED

BO

166

152

01453

50BF is ACTIVE (50BF ACTIVE)

OUT

LED

BO

166

153

01456

50BF (internal) PICKUP (50BF int Pikkup) 50BF (external) PICKUP (50BF ext Pickup) 50BF TRIP (50BF TRIP)

OUT

LED

BO

166

156

01457

OUT

LED

BO

166

157

01471

OUT

LED

BO

160

85

01480

50BF (internal) TRIP (50BF int TRIP) 50BF (external) TRIP (50BF ext TRIP) >BLOCK 49 Overload Protection (>BLOCK 49 O/L) >Emergency start of motors (>EmergencyStart) 49 Overload Protection is OFF (49 O / L OFF) 49 Overload Protection is BLOKKED (49 O/L BLOCK) 49 Overload Protection is ACTIVE (49 O/L ACTIVE) 49 Overload Current Alarm (I alarm) (49 O/L I Alarm) 49 Overload Alarm! Near Thermal Trip (49 O/L Alarm) 49 Winding Overload (49 Winding O/L) 49 Thermal Overload TRIP (49 Th O/L TRIP) >49 Reset of Thermal Overload Image (>RES 49 Image)

OUT

ON

LED

BO

166

180

01481

OUT

ON

LED

BO

166

181

01503

SP

LED BI

BO

167

01507

SP

ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON M ON OFF

LED BI

BO

167

01511

OUT

LED

BO

167

11

01512

OUT

LED

BO

167

12

01513

OUT

LED

BO

167

13

01515

OUT

LED

BO

167

15

01516

OUT

LED

BO

167

16

01517

OUT

LED

BO

167

17

01521

OUT

LED

BO

167

21

01580

SP

ON OFF

LED BI

BO

552

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

General Interrogation GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI

Event Log On/Off

Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking

Information-No

Binary Output

Function Key

Binary Input

Type

LED

A.10 Information List

F.No.

Description

Function

Type of Information

Log-Buffers

Configurable in Matrix

IEC 60870-5-103

Ground Fault Log On/Off

Marked in Oscill. Record

Trip (Fault) Log On/Off

01581

49 Thermal Overload Image reset (49 Image res.) >BLOCK 50/51 (>BLK 50/51)

49 Thermal Overload 50/51 Phase/ Ground Overcurrent 50/51 Phase/ Ground Overcurrent 50/51 Phase/ Ground Overcurrent 50/51 Phase/ Ground Overcurrent 50/51 Phase/ Ground Overcurrent 50/51 Phase/ Ground Overcurrent 50/51 Phase/ Ground Overcurrent 50/51 Phase/ Ground Overcurrent Cold Load Pickup

OUT

ON OFF

LED

BO

01704

SP

LED BI

BO

01714

>BLOCK 50N/51N (>BLK 50N/ 51N)

SP

LED BI

BO

01721

>BLOCK 50-2 (>BLOCK 50-2)

SP

LED BI

BO

60

01722

>BLOCK 50-1 (>BLOCK 50-1)

SP

LED BI

BO

60

01723

>BLOCK 51 (>BLOCK 51)

SP

LED BI

BO

60

01724

>BLOCK 50N-2 (>BLOCK 50N-2)

SP

LED BI

BO

60

01725

>BLOCK 50N-1 (>BLOCK 50N-1)

SP

LED BI

BO

60

01726

>BLOCK 51N (>BLOCK 51N)

SP

LED BI

BO

60

01730

>BLOCK Cold-Load-Pickup (>BLOCK CLP) >BLOCK Cold-Load-Pickup stop timer (>BLK CLP stpTim) >ACTIVATE Cold-Load-Pickup (>ACTIVATE CLP) 50/51 O/C switched OFF (50/51 PH OFF)

SP

LED BI

BO

01731

Cold Load Pickup

SP

ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF

LED BI

BO

60

243

01732

Cold Load Pickup

SP

LED BI

BO

01751

50/51 Phase/ Ground Overcurrent 50/51 Phase/ Ground Overcurrent 50/51 Phase/ Ground Overcurrent 50/51 Phase/ Ground Overcurrent 50/51 Phase/ Ground Overcurrent

OUT

LED

BO

60

21

01752

50/51 O/C is BLOCKED (50/51 PH BLK)

OUT

ON OFF

ON OFF

LED

BO

60

22

01753

50/51 O/C is ACTIVE (50/51 PH ACT)

OUT

ON OFF

LED

BO

60

23

01756

50N/51N is OFF (50N/51N OFF)

OUT

ON OFF

LED

BO

60

26

01757

50N/51N is BLOCKED (50N/51N BLK)

OUT

ON OFF

ON OFF

LED

BO

60

27

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

553

General Interrogation GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI

Event Log On/Off

Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking

Information-No

Binary Output

Function Key

Binary Input

Type

LED

A Appendix

F.No.

Description

Function

Type of Information

Log-Buffers

Configurable in Matrix

IEC 60870-5-103

Ground Fault Log On/Off

Marked in Oscill. Record

Trip (Fault) Log On/Off

01758

50N/51N is ACTIVE (50N/51N ACT)

50/51 Phase/ Ground Overcurrent 50/51 Phase/ Ground Overcurrent 50/51 Phase/ Ground Overcurrent 50/51 Phase/ Ground Overcurrent 50/51 Phase/ Ground Overcurrent 50/51 Phase/ Ground Overcurrent 50/51 Phase/ Ground Overcurrent 50/51 Phase/ Ground Overcurrent 50/51 Phase/ Ground Overcurrent 50/51 Phase/ Ground Overcurrent 50/51 Phase/ Ground Overcurrent 50/51 Phase/ Ground Overcurrent 50/51 Phase/ Ground Overcurrent 50/51 Phase/ Ground Overcurrent 50/51 Phase/ Ground Overcurrent 50/51 Phase/ Ground Overcurrent

OUT

ON OFF

LED

BO

60

28

01761

50(N)/51(N) O/C PICKUP (50(N)/ 51(N) PU)

OUT

ON OFF

LED

BO

160

84

01762

50/51 Phase A picked up (50/51 Ph A PU)

OUT

ON OFF

LED

BO

160

64

01763

50/51 Phase B picked up (50/51 Ph B PU)

OUT

ON OFF

LED

BO

160

65

01764

50/51 Phase C picked up (50/51 Ph C PU)

OUT

ON OFF

LED

BO

160

66

01765

50N/51N picked up (50N/ 51NPickedup)

OUT

ON OFF

LED

BO

160

67

01791

50(N)/51(N) TRIP (50(N)/ 51(N)TRIP)

OUT

ON

LED

BO

160

68

01800

50-2 picked up (50-2 picked up)

OUT

ON OFF

LED

BO

60

75

01804

50-2 Time Out (50-2 TimeOut)

OUT

LED

BO

60

49

01805

50-2 TRIP (50-2 TRIP)

OUT

ON

LED

BO

160

91

01810

50-1 picked up (50-1 picked up)

OUT

ON OFF

LED

BO

60

76

01814

50-1 Time Out (50-1 TimeOut)

OUT

LED

BO

60

53

01815

50/51 I> TRIP (50/51 TRIP)

OUT

ON

LED

BO

160

90

01820

51 picked up (51 picked up)

OUT

ON OFF

LED

BO

60

77

01824

51 Time Out (51 Time Out)

OUT

LED

BO

60

57

01825

51 TRIP (51 TRIP)

OUT

ON

LED

BO

60

58

554

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

General Interrogation GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI

Event Log On/Off

Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking

Information-No

Binary Output

Function Key

Binary Input

Type

LED

A.10 Information List

F.No.

Description

Function

Type of Information

Log-Buffers

Configurable in Matrix

IEC 60870-5-103

Ground Fault Log On/Off

Marked in Oscill. Record

Trip (Fault) Log On/Off

01831

50N-2 picked up (50N-2 picked up)

50/51 Phase/ Ground Overcurrent 50/51 Phase/ Ground Overcurrent 50/51 Phase/ Ground Overcurrent 50/51 Phase/ Ground Overcurrent 50/51 Phase/ Ground Overcurrent 50/51 Phase/ Ground Overcurrent 50/51 Phase/ Ground Overcurrent 50/51 Phase/ Ground Overcurrent 50/51 Phase/ Ground Overcurrent 50/51 Phase/ Ground Overcurrent 50/51 Phase/ Ground Overcurrent 50/51 Phase/ Ground Overcurrent 50/51 Phase/ Ground Overcurrent 50/51 Phase/ Ground Overcurrent 50/51 Phase/ Ground Overcurrent 50/51 Phase/ Ground Overcurrent

OUT

ON OFF

LED

BO

60

59

01832

50N-2 Time Out (50N-2 TimeOut)

OUT

LED

BO

60

60

01833

50N-2 TRIP (50N-2 TRIP)

OUT

ON

LED

BO

160

93

01834

50N-1 picked up (50N-1 picked up)

OUT

ON OFF

LED

BO

60

62

01835

50N-1 Time Out (50N-1 TimeOut)

OUT

LED

BO

60

63

01836

50N-1 TRIP (50N-1 TRIP)

OUT

ON

LED

BO

160

92

01837

51N picked up (51N picked up)

OUT

ON OFF

LED

BO

60

64

01838

51N Time Out (51N TimeOut)

OUT

LED

BO

60

65

01839

51N TRIP (51N TRIP)

OUT

ON

LED

BO

60

66

01840

Phase A trip blocked by inrush detection (PhA InrushBlk)

OUT

ON OFF

LED

BO

60

101

01841

Phase B trip blocked by inrush detection (PhB InrushBlk)

OUT

ON OFF

LED

BO

60

102

01842

Phase C trip blocked by inrush detection (PhC InrushBlk)

OUT

ON OFF

LED

BO

60

103

01843

Cross blk: PhX blocked PhY (INRUSH X-BLK)

OUT

ON OFF

LED

BO

60

104

01851

50-1 BLOCKED (50-1 BLOCKED)

OUT

ON OFF

ON OFF

LED

BO

60

105

01852

50-2 BLOCKED (50-2 BLOCKED)

OUT

ON OFF

ON OFF

LED

BO

60

106

01853

50N-1 BLOCKED (50N-1 BLOKKED)

OUT

ON OFF

ON OFF

LED

BO

60

107

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

555

General Interrogation GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI

Event Log On/Off

Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking

Information-No

Binary Output

Function Key

Binary Input

Type

LED

A Appendix

F.No.

Description

Function

Type of Information

Log-Buffers

Configurable in Matrix

IEC 60870-5-103

Ground Fault Log On/Off

Marked in Oscill. Record

Trip (Fault) Log On/Off

01854

50N-2 BLOCKED (50N-2 BLOKKED)

50/51 Phase/ Ground Overcurrent 50/51 Phase/ Ground Overcurrent 50/51 Phase/ Ground Overcurrent 50/51 Phase/ Ground Overcurrent 50/51 Phase/ Ground Overcurrent 50/51 Phase/ Ground Overcurrent 50/51 Phase/ Ground Overcurrent 50/51 Phase/ Ground Overcurrent 50/51 Phase/ Ground Overcurrent 50/51 Phase/ Ground Overcurrent 50/51 Phase/ Ground Overcurrent 50/51 Phase/ Ground Overcurrent 50/51 Phase/ Ground Overcurrent 50/51 Phase/ Ground Overcurrent 50/51 Phase/ Ground Overcurrent Cold Load Pickup

OUT

ON OFF

ON OFF

LED

BO

60

108

01855

51 BLOCKED (51 BLOCKED)

OUT

ON OFF

ON OFF

LED

BO

60

109

01856

51N BLOCKED (51N BLOCKED)

OUT

ON OFF

ON OFF

LED

BO

60

110

01910

>50-2 instantaneously (>INSTANT. 50-2)

SP

LED BI

BO

01911

50-2 instantaneously (50-2 INSTANT.)

OUT

ON OFF

ON OFF

LED

BO

01912

>50-1 instantaneously (>INSTANT. 50-1)

SP

LED BI

BO

01913

50-1 instantaneously (50-1 INSTANT.)

OUT

ON OFF

ON OFF

LED

BO

01914

>51 instantaneously (>INSTANT. 51)

SP

LED BI

BO

01915

51 instantaneously (51 INSTANT.)

OUT

ON OFF

ON OFF

LED

BO

01916

>50N-2 instantaneously (>INSTANT. 50N-2)

SP

LED BI

BO

01917

50N-2 instantaneously (50N-2 INSTANT.)

OUT

ON OFF

ON OFF

LED

BO

01918

>50N-1 instantaneously (>INSTANT. 50N-1)

SP

LED BI

BO

01919

50N-1 instantaneously (50N-1 INSTANT.)

OUT

ON OFF

ON OFF

LED

BO

01983

>51N instantaneously (>INSTANT. 51N)

SP

LED BI

BO

01984

51N instantaneously (51N INSTANT.)

OUT

ON OFF

ON OFF

LED

BO

01994

Cold-Load-Pickup switched OFF (CLP OFF)

OUT

ON OFF

LED

BO

60

244

556

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

General Interrogation GI GI GI GI

Event Log On/Off

Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking

Information-No

Binary Output

Function Key

Binary Input

Type

LED

A.10 Information List

F.No.

Description

Function

Type of Information

Log-Buffers

Configurable in Matrix

IEC 60870-5-103

Ground Fault Log On/Off

Marked in Oscill. Record

Trip (Fault) Log On/Off

01995

Cold-Load-Pickup is BLOCKED (CLP BLOCKED) Cold-Load-Pickup is RUNNING (CLP running) Dynamic settings are ACTIVE (Dyn set. ACTIVE)

Cold Load Pickup

OUT

ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF

ON OFF

LED

BO

60

245

01996

Cold Load Pickup

OUT

LED

BO

60

246

01997

Cold Load Pickup

OUT

LED

BO

60

247

02604

>BLOCK 67/67-TOC (>BLK 67/67- 67 Directional TOC) Phase/Ground Overcurrent >BLOCK 67N/67N-TOC (>BLK 67N/67NTOC) 67 Directional Phase/Ground Overcurrent 67 Directional Phase/Ground Overcurrent 67 Directional Phase/Ground Overcurrent 67 Directional Phase/Ground Overcurrent 67 Directional Phase/Ground Overcurrent 67 Directional Phase/Ground Overcurrent

SP

LED BI

BO

02614

SP

LED BI

BO

02615

>BLOCK 67-2 (>BLOCK 67-2)

SP

LED BI

BO

63

73

02616

>BLOCK 67N-2 (>BLOCK 67N-2)

SP

LED BI

BO

63

74

02621

>BLOCK 67-1 (>BLOCK 67-1)

SP

LED BI

BO

63

02622

>BLOCK 67-TOC (>BLOCK 67TOC)

SP

LED BI

BO

63

02623

>BLOCK 67N-1 (>BLOCK 67N-1)

SP

LED BI

BO

63

02624

>BLOCK 67N-TOC (>BLOCK 67N- 67 Directional TOC) Phase/Ground Overcurrent Phase A forward (Phase A forward) 67 Directional Phase/Ground Overcurrent 67 Directional Phase/Ground Overcurrent 67 Directional Phase/Ground Overcurrent 67 Directional Phase/Ground Overcurrent 67 Directional Phase/Ground Overcurrent 67 Directional Phase/Ground Overcurrent

SP

LED BI

BO

63

02628

OUT

ON

LED

BO

63

81

02629

Phase B forward (Phase B forward)

OUT

ON

LED

BO

63

82

02630

Phase C forward (Phase C forward)

OUT

ON

LED

BO

63

83

02632

Phase A reverse (Phase A reverse)

OUT

ON

LED

BO

63

84

02633

Phase B reverse (Phase B reverse)

OUT

ON

LED

BO

63

85

02634

Phase C reverse (Phase C reverse)

OUT

ON

LED

BO

63

86

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

557

General Interrogation GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI

Event Log On/Off

Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking

Information-No

Binary Output

Function Key

Binary Input

Type

LED

A Appendix

F.No.

Description

Function

Type of Information

Log-Buffers

Configurable in Matrix

IEC 60870-5-103

Ground Fault Log On/Off

Marked in Oscill. Record

Trip (Fault) Log On/Off

02635

Ground forward (Ground forward)

67 Directional Phase/Ground Overcurrent 67 Directional Phase/Ground Overcurrent 67 Directional Phase/Ground Overcurrent 67 Directional Phase/Ground Overcurrent 67 Directional Phase/Ground Overcurrent 67 Directional Phase/Ground Overcurrent 67 Directional Phase/Ground Overcurrent 67 Directional Phase/Ground Overcurrent 67 Directional Phase/Ground Overcurrent 67 Directional Phase/Ground Overcurrent 67 Directional Phase/Ground Overcurrent 67 Directional Phase/Ground Overcurrent 67 Directional Phase/Ground Overcurrent 67 Directional Phase/Ground Overcurrent 67 Directional Phase/Ground Overcurrent

OUT

ON

LED

BO

63

87

02636

Ground reverse (Ground reverse)

OUT

ON

LED

BO

63

88

02637

67-1 is BLOCKED (67-1 BLOKKED)

OUT

ON OFF

ON OFF

LED

BO

63

91

02642

67-2 picked up (67-2 picked up)

OUT

ON OFF

LED

BO

63

67

02646

67N-2 picked up (67N-2 picked up)

OUT

ON OFF

LED

BO

63

62

02647

67-2 Time Out (67-2 Time Out)

OUT

LED

BO

63

71

02648

67N-2 Time Out (67N-2 Time Out)

OUT

LED

BO

63

63

02649

67-2 TRIP (67-2 TRIP)

OUT

ON

LED

BO

63

72

02651

67/67-TOC switched OFF (67/67TOC OFF)

OUT

ON OFF

LED

BO

63

10

02652

67/67-TOC is BLOCKED (67 BLOKKED)

OUT

ON OFF

ON OFF

LED

BO

63

11

02653

67/67-TOC is ACTIVE (67 ACTIVE)

OUT

ON OFF

LED

BO

63

12

02655

67-2 is BLOCKED (67-2 BLOKKED)

OUT

ON OFF

ON OFF

LED

BO

63

92

02656

67N/67N-TOC switched OFF (67N OFF)

OUT

ON OFF

LED

BO

63

13

02657

67N/67N-TOC is BLOCKED (67N BLOCKED)

OUT

ON OFF

ON OFF

LED

BO

63

14

02658

67N/67N-TOC is ACTIVE (67N ACTIVE)

OUT

ON OFF

LED

BO

63

15

02659

67N-1 is BLOCKED (67N-1 BLOK- 67 Directional KED) Phase/Ground Overcurrent

OUT

ON OFF

ON OFF

LED

BO

63

93

558

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

General Interrogation GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI

Event Log On/Off

Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking

Information-No

Binary Output

Function Key

Binary Input

Type

LED

A.10 Information List

F.No.

Description

Function

Type of Information

Log-Buffers

Configurable in Matrix

IEC 60870-5-103

Ground Fault Log On/Off

Marked in Oscill. Record

Trip (Fault) Log On/Off

02660

67-1 picked up (67-1 picked up)

67 Directional Phase/Ground Overcurrent 67 Directional Phase/Ground Overcurrent 67 Directional Phase/Ground Overcurrent

OUT

ON OFF

LED

BO

63

20

02664

67-1 Time Out (67-1 Time Out)

OUT

LED

BO

63

24

02665

67-1 TRIP (67-1 TRIP)

OUT

ON

LED

BO

63

25

02668

67N-2 is BLOCKED (67N-2 BLOK- 67 Directional KED) Phase/Ground Overcurrent 67-TOC is BLOCKED (67-TOC BLOKKED) 67 Directional Phase/Ground Overcurrent 67 Directional Phase/Ground Overcurrent 67 Directional Phase/Ground Overcurrent 67 Directional Phase/Ground Overcurrent 67 Directional Phase/Ground Overcurrent 67 Directional Phase/Ground Overcurrent 67 Directional Phase/Ground Overcurrent 67 Directional Phase/Ground Overcurrent 67 Directional Phase/Ground Overcurrent

OUT

ON OFF

ON OFF

LED

BO

63

94

02669

OUT

ON OFF

ON OFF

LED

BO

63

95

02670

67-TOC picked up (67-TOC pickedup)

OUT

ON OFF

LED

BO

63

30

02674

67-TOC Time Out (67-TOC Time Out)

OUT

LED

BO

63

34

02675

67-TOC TRIP (67-TOC TRIP)

OUT

ON

LED

BO

63

35

02677

67N-TOC is BLOCKED (67N-TOC BLOCKED)

OUT

ON OFF

ON OFF

LED

BO

63

96

02679

67-2 TRIP (67N-2 TRIP)

OUT

ON

LED

BO

63

64

02681

67N-1 picked up (67N-1 picked up)

OUT

ON OFF

LED

BO

63

41

02682

67N-1 Time Out (67N-1 Time Out)

OUT

LED

BO

63

42

02683

67N-1 TRIP (67N-1 TRIP)

OUT

ON

LED

BO

63

43

02684

67N-TOC picked up (67N-TOCPik- 67 Directional kedup) Phase/Ground Overcurrent 67N-TOC Time Out (67N-TOC TimeOut) 67 Directional Phase/Ground Overcurrent 67 Directional Phase/Ground Overcurrent

OUT

ON OFF

LED

BO

63

44

02685

OUT

LED

BO

63

45

02686

67N-TOC TRIP (67N-TOC TRIP)

OUT

ON

LED

BO

63

46

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

559

General Interrogation GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI

Event Log On/Off

Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking

Information-No

Binary Output

Function Key

Binary Input

Type

LED

A Appendix

F.No.

Description

Function

Type of Information

Log-Buffers

Configurable in Matrix

IEC 60870-5-103

Ground Fault Log On/Off

Marked in Oscill. Record

Trip (Fault) Log On/Off

02691

67/67N picked up (67/67N pickedup)

67 Directional Phase/Ground Overcurrent 67 Directional Phase/Ground Overcurrent 67 Directional Phase/Ground Overcurrent 67 Directional Phase/Ground Overcurrent 67 Directional Phase/Ground Overcurrent 67 Directional Phase/Ground Overcurrent 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing Power System Data 2 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing

OUT

ON OFF

LED

BO

63

50

02692

67/67-TOC Phase A picked up (67 A picked up)

OUT

ON OFF

LED

BO

63

51

02693

67/67-TOC Phase B picked up (67 B picked up)

OUT

ON OFF

LED

BO

63

52

02694

67/67-TOC Phase C picked up (67 C picked up)

OUT

ON OFF

LED

BO

63

53

02695

67N/67N-TOC picked up (67N pikked up)

OUT

ON OFF

LED

BO

63

54

02696

67/67N TRIP (67/67N TRIP)

OUT

ON

LED

BO

63

55

02701

>79 ON (>79 ON)

SP

ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON

LED BI

BO

40

02702

>79 OFF (>79 OFF)

SP

LED BI

BO

40

02703

>BLOCK 79 (>BLOCK 79)

SP

LED BI

BO

40

02711

>79 External start of internal A/R (>79 Start) >Start 79 Ground program (>Start 79 Gnd) >Start 79 Phase program (>Start 79 Ph) >Enable 50/67-(N)-2 (override 79 blk) (>Enable ANSI#-2) >Switch zone sequence coordination ON (>ZSC ON) >Switch zone sequence coordination OFF (>ZSC OFF) >Circuit breaker READY for reclosing (>CB Ready) >AR: Sync. release from ext. sync.-check (>Sync.release) 79 Auto recloser is switched OFF (79 OFF) 79 Auto recloser is switched ON (79 ON)

SP

LED BI

BO

02715

SP

LED BI

BO

40

15

02716

SP

ON

LED BI

BO

40

16

02720

SP

ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON

LED BI

BO

40

20

02722

SP

LED BI

BO

02723

SP

LED BI

BO

02730

SP

LED BI

BO

40

30

02731

SP

LED BI

BO

02781

OUT

ON

LED

BO

40

81

02782

IntSP

ON OFF

LED

BO

160

16

560

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

General Interrogation GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI

Event Log On/Off

Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking

Information-No

Binary Output

Function Key

Binary Input

Type

LED

A.10 Information List

F.No.

Description

Function

Type of Information

Log-Buffers

Configurable in Matrix

IEC 60870-5-103

Ground Fault Log On/Off

Marked in Oscill. Record

Trip (Fault) Log On/Off

02784

79 Auto recloser is NOT ready (79 is NOT ready) 79 - Auto-reclose is dynamically BLOCKED (79 DynBlock) 79: CB ready monitoring window expired (79 T-CBreadyExp) 79 - in progress (79 in progress)

79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing

OUT

ON OFF ON OFF ON ON

LED

BO

160

130

02785

OUT

LED

BO

40

85

02788

OUT

LED

BO

02801

OUT

ON

LED

BO

40

101

02808

79: CB open with no trip (79 BLK: CB open) 79: Start-signal monitoring time expired (79 T-Start Exp) 79: Maximum dead time expired (79 TdeadMax Exp) 79: no starter configured (79 no starter) 79: no cycle configured (79 no cycle) 79: blocking due to trip (79 BLK by trip) 79: blocking due to 3-phase pickup (79 BLK:3ph p.u.) 79: action time expired before trip (79 Tact expired) 79: max. no. of cycles exceeded (79 Max. No. Cyc) 79 1st cycle running (79 1stCyc. run.) 79 2nd cycle running (79 2ndCyc. run.) 79 3rd cycle running (79 3rdCyc. run.) 79 4th or higher cycle running (79 4thCyc. run.) 79 - Close command (79 Close)

OUT

ON OFF ON

LED

BO

02809

OUT

LED

BO

02810

OUT

ON

LED

BO

02823

OUT

ON OFF ON OFF ON

LED

BO

02824

OUT

LED

BO

02827

OUT

LED

BO

02828

OUT

ON

LED

BO

02829

OUT

ON

LED

BO

02830

OUT

ON

LED

BO

02844

OUT

ON

LED

BO

02845

OUT

ON

LED

BO

02846

OUT

ON

LED

BO

02847

OUT

ON

LED

BO

02851

OUT

ON

LED

BO

160

128

02862

79 - cycle successful (79 Successful) 79 - Lockout (79 Lockout)

OUT

ON

ON

LED

BO

40

162

02863

OUT

ON

ON

LED

BO

40

163

02865

79: Synchro-check request (79 Sync.Request)

OUT

ON

LED

BO

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

561

General Interrogation GI GI GI GI GI

Event Log On/Off

Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking

Information-No

Binary Output

Function Key

Binary Input

Type

LED

A Appendix

F.No.

Description

Function

Type of Information

Log-Buffers

Configurable in Matrix

IEC 60870-5-103

Ground Fault Log On/Off

Marked in Oscill. Record

Trip (Fault) Log On/Off

02878

79-A/R single phase reclosing sequence (79 L-N Sequence) 79-A/R multi-phase reclosing sequence (79 L-L Sequence) Zone Sequencing is active (ZSC active) Zone sequence coordination switched ON (ZSC ON) Zone sequence coordination switched OFF (ZSC OFF) 79 1st cycle zone extension release (79 1.CycZoneRel) 79 2nd cycle zone extension release (79 2.CycZoneRel) 79 3rd cycle zone extension release (79 3.CycZoneRel) 79 4th cycle zone extension release (79 4.CycZoneRel) No. of 1st AR-cycle CLOSE commands,3pole (79 #Close1./3p=) No. of higher AR-cycle CLOSE commands,3p (79 #Close2./3p=) 79: Close request to Control Function (79 CloseRequest) >52-a contact (OPEN, if bkr is open) (>52-a) >52-b contact (OPEN, if bkr is closed) (>52-b) >BLOCK Motor Startup counter (>BLOCK 66)

79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing 79M Auto Reclosing Statistics

OUT

ON

LED

BO

40

180

02879

OUT

ON

LED

BO

40

181

02883

OUT

ON OFF ON

ON

LED

BO

02884

OUT

LED

BO

02885

OUT

ON

LED

BO

02889

OUT

LED

BO

02890

OUT

LED

BO

02891

OUT

LED

BO

02892

OUT

LED

BO

02896

OUT

02898

Statistics

OUT

02899

79M Auto Reclosing Power System Data 2 Power System Data 2 48/66 Motor (Startup Monitor / Counter) 48/66 Motor (Startup Monitor / Counter) 48/66 Motor (Startup Monitor / Counter) 48/66 Motor (Startup Monitor / Counter) 48/66 Motor (Startup Monitor / Counter)

OUT

ON

LED

BO

04601

SP

LED BI

BO

04602

SP

LED BI

BO

04822

SP

LED BI

BO

04823

>Emergency start (>66 emer.start)

SP

ON OFF

LED BI

BO

168

51

04824

66 Motor start protection OFF (66 OFF)

OUT

ON OFF

LED

BO

168

52

04825

66 Motor start protection BLOKKED (66 BLOCKED)

OUT

ON OFF

ON OFF

LED

BO

168

53

04826

66 Motor start protection ACTIVE (66 ACTIVE)

OUT

ON OFF

LED

BO

168

54

562

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

General Interrogation GI GI GI GI GI GI

Event Log On/Off

Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking

Information-No

Binary Output

Function Key

Binary Input

Type

LED

A.10 Information List

F.No.

Description

Function

Type of Information

Log-Buffers

Configurable in Matrix

IEC 60870-5-103

Ground Fault Log On/Off

Marked in Oscill. Record

Trip (Fault) Log On/Off

04827

66 Motor start protection TRIP (66 TRIP)

48/66 Motor (Startup Monitor / Counter) 48/66 Motor (Startup Monitor / Counter) 48/66 Motor (Startup Monitor / Counter) 46 Negative Sequence (Time Overcurrent) Power System Data 1 Power System Data 1 Power System Data 1 46 Negative Sequence (Time Overcurrent) 46 Negative Sequence (Time Overcurrent) 46 Negative Sequence (Time Overcurrent) 46 Negative Sequence (Time Overcurrent) 46 Negative Sequence (Time Overcurrent) 46 Negative Sequence (Time Overcurrent) 46 Negative Sequence (Time Overcurrent) 46 Negative Sequence (Time Overcurrent) 81 Over/Under Frequency 81 Over/Under Frequency

OUT

ON OFF

LED

BO

168

55

04828

>66 Reset thermal memory (>66 RM th.repl.)

SP

ON OFF

LED BI

BO

04829

66 Reset thermal memory (66 RM th.repl.)

OUT

ON OFF

LED

BO

05143

>BLOCK 46 (>BLOCK 46)

SP

LED BI

BO

70

126

05145

>Reverse Phase Rotation (>Reverse Rot.) Phase rotation ABC (Rotation ABC) Phase rotation ACB (Rotation ACB) 46 switched OFF (46 OFF)

SP

ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF

LED BI

BO

05147

OUT

LED

BO

70

128

05148

OUT

LED

BO

70

129

05151

OUT

LED

BO

70

131

05152

46 is BLOCKED (46 BLOCKED)

OUT

ON OFF

ON OFF

LED

BO

70

132

05153

46 is ACTIVE (46 ACTIVE)

OUT

ON OFF

LED

BO

70

133

05159

46-2 picked up (46-2 picked up)

OUT

ON OFF

LED

BO

70

138

05165

46-1 picked up (46-1 picked up)

OUT

ON OFF

LED

BO

70

150

05166

46-TOC picked up (46-TOC pickedup)

OUT

ON OFF

LED

BO

70

141

05170

46 TRIP (46 TRIP)

OUT

ON

LED

BO

70

149

05171

46 Disk emulation picked up (46 Dsk pickedup)

OUT

LED

BO

05203

>BLOCK 81O/U (>BLOCK 81O/U)

SP

ON OFF ON OFF

LED BI

BO

70

176

05206

>BLOCK 81-1 (>BLOCK 81-1)

SP

LED BI

BO

70

177

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

563

General Interrogation GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI

Event Log On/Off

Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking

Information-No

Binary Output

Function Key

Binary Input

Type

LED

A Appendix

F.No.

Description

Function

Type of Information

Log-Buffers

Configurable in Matrix

IEC 60870-5-103

Ground Fault Log On/Off

Marked in Oscill. Record

Trip (Fault) Log On/Off

05207

>BLOCK 81-2 (>BLOCK 81-2)

81 Over/Under Frequency 81 Over/Under Frequency 81 Over/Under Frequency 81 Over/Under Frequency 81 Over/Under Frequency 81 Over/Under Frequency 81 Over/Under Frequency 81 Over/Under Frequency 81 Over/Under Frequency 81 Over/Under Frequency 81 Over/Under Frequency 81 Over/Under Frequency 81 Over/Under Frequency 81 Over/Under Frequency 81 Over/Under Frequency 27/59 Under/Over Voltage 27/59 Under/Over Voltage 27/59 Under/Over Voltage 27/59 Under/Over Voltage Measurement Supervision Measurement Supervision

SP

ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON M ON OFF

LED BI

BO

70

178

05208

>BLOCK 81-3 (>BLOCK 81-3)

SP

LED BI

BO

70

179

05209

>BLOCK 81-4 (>BLOCK 81-4)

SP

LED BI

BO

70

180

05211

81 OFF (81 OFF)

OUT

LED

BO

70

181

05212

81 BLOCKED (81 BLOCKED)

OUT

LED

BO

70

182

05213

81 ACTIVE (81 ACTIVE)

OUT

LED

BO

70

183

05214

81 Under Voltage Block (81 Under V Blk) 81-1 picked up (81-1 picked up)

OUT

LED

BO

70

184

05232

OUT

LED

BO

70

230

05233

81-2 picked up (81-2 picked up)

OUT

LED

BO

70

231

05234

81-3 picked up (81-3 picked up)

OUT

LED

BO

70

232

05235

81-4 picked up (81-4 picked up)

OUT

LED

BO

70

233

05236

81-1 TRIP (81-1 TRIP)

OUT

LED

BO

70

234

05237

81-2 TRIP (81-2 TRIP)

OUT

ON

LED

BO

70

235

05238

81-3 TRIP (81-3 TRIP)

OUT

ON

LED

BO

70

236

05239

81-4 TRIP (81-4 TRIP)

OUT

ON

LED

BO

70

237

06503

>BLOCK 27 undervoltage protection (>BLOCK 27) >27-Switch current supervision ON (>27 I SUPRVSN) >BLOCK 27-1 Undervoltage protection (>BLOCK 27-1) >BLOCK 27-2 Undervoltage protection (>BLOCK 27-2) >Failure: Feeder VT (>FAIL:FEEDER VT) >Failure: Busbar VT (>FAIL: BUS VT)

SP

LED BI

BO

74

06505

SP

ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF

LED BI

BO

74

06506

SP

LED BI

BO

74

06508

SP

LED BI

BO

74

06509

SP

LED BI

BO

74

06510

SP

LED BI

BO

74

10

564

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

General Interrogation GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI

Event Log On/Off

Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking

Information-No

Binary Output

Function Key

Binary Input

Type

LED

A.10 Information List

F.No.

Description

Function

Type of Information

Log-Buffers

Configurable in Matrix

IEC 60870-5-103

Ground Fault Log On/Off

Marked in Oscill. Record

Trip (Fault) Log On/Off

06513

>BLOCK 59-1 overvoltage protection (>BLOCK 59-1) 27 Undervoltage protection switched OFF (27 OFF) 27 Undervoltage protection is BLOKKED (27 BLOCKED) 27 Undervoltage protection is ACTIVE (27 ACTIVE) 27-1 Undervoltage picked up (27-1 picked up) 27-1 Undervoltage PICKUP w/curr. superv (27-1 PU CS) 27-2 Undervoltage picked up (27-2 picked up) 27-2 Undervoltage PICKUP w/curr. superv (27-2 PU CS) 27-1 Undervoltage TRIP (27-1 TRIP) 27-2 Undervoltage TRIP (27-2 TRIP) 59-Overvoltage protection switched OFF (59 OFF) 59-Overvoltage protection is BLOKKED (59 BLOCKED) 59-Overvoltage protection is ACTIVE (59 ACTIVE) 59 picked up (59-1 picked up)

27/59 Under/Over Voltage 27/59 Under/Over Voltage 27/59 Under/Over Voltage 27/59 Under/Over Voltage 27/59 Under/Over Voltage 27/59 Under/Over Voltage 27/59 Under/Over Voltage 27/59 Under/Over Voltage 27/59 Under/Over Voltage 27/59 Under/Over Voltage 27/59 Under/Over Voltage 27/59 Under/Over Voltage 27/59 Under/Over Voltage 27/59 Under/Over Voltage 27/59 Under/Over Voltage 27/59 Under/Over Voltage 27/59 Under/Over Voltage Measurement Supervision 48/66 Motor (Startup Monitor / Counter) 48/66 Motor (Startup Monitor / Counter)

SP

LED BI

BO

74

13

06530

OUT

ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON M ON OFF

LED

BO

74

30

06531

OUT

LED

BO

74

31

06532

OUT

LED

BO

74

32

06533

OUT

LED

BO

74

33

06534

OUT

LED

BO

74

34

06537

OUT

LED

BO

74

37

06538

OUT

LED

BO

74

38

06539

OUT

LED

BO

74

39

06540

OUT

ON

LED

BO

74

40

06565

OUT

ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON M ON OFF

LED

BO

74

65

06566

OUT

LED

BO

74

66

06567

OUT

LED

BO

74

67

06568

OUT

LED

BO

74

68

06570

59 TRIP (59-1 TRIP)

OUT

LED

BO

74

70

06571

59-2 Overvoltage V>> picked up (59-2 picked up) 59-2 Overvoltage V>> TRIP (59-2 TRIP) Voltage Transformer Fuse Failure (VT Fuse Failure) >BLOCK Startup Supervision (>BLK START-SUP)

OUT

ON OFF ON

LED

BO

06573

OUT

LED

BO

06575

OUT

ON OFF

LED

BO

74

74

06801

SP

LED BI

BO

06805

>Rotor locked (>Rotor locked)

SP

LED BI

BO

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

565

General Interrogation GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI

Event Log On/Off

Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking

Information-No

Binary Output

Function Key

Binary Input

Type

LED

A Appendix

F.No.

Description

Function

Type of Information

Log-Buffers

Configurable in Matrix

IEC 60870-5-103

Ground Fault Log On/Off

Marked in Oscill. Record

Trip (Fault) Log On/Off

06811

Startup supervision OFF (STARTSUP OFF)

48/66 Motor (Startup Monitor / Counter) 48/66 Motor (Startup Monitor / Counter) 48/66 Motor (Startup Monitor / Counter) 48/66 Motor (Startup Monitor / Counter) 48/66 Motor (Startup Monitor / Counter) 48/66 Motor (Startup Monitor / Counter) 74TC Trip Circuit Supervision 74TC Trip Circuit Supervision 74TC Trip Circuit Supervision 74TC Trip Circuit Supervision 74TC Trip Circuit Supervision 74TC Trip Circuit Supervision 74TC Trip Circuit Supervision 74TC Trip Circuit Supervision Intermittent Earth Fault Intermittent Earth Fault Intermittent Earth Fault

OUT

ON OFF

LED

BO

169

51

06812

Startup supervision is BLOCKED (START-SUP BLK)

OUT

ON OFF

ON OFF

LED

BO

169

52

06813

Startup supervision is ACTIVE (START-SUP ACT)

OUT

ON OFF

LED

BO

169

53

06821

Startup supervision TRIP (STARTSUP TRIP)

OUT

ON

LED

BO

169

54

06822

Rotor locked (Rotor locked)

OUT

ON

LED

BO

169

55

06823

Startup supervision Pickup (START-SUP pu)

OUT

ON OFF

LED

BO

169

56

06851

>BLOCK 74TC (>BLOCK 74TC)

SP

LED BI

BO

06852

>74TC Trip circuit superv.: trip relay (>74TC trip rel.) >74TC Trip circuit superv.: bkr relay (>74TC brk rel.) 74TC Trip circuit supervision OFF (74TC OFF) 74TC Trip circuit supervision is BLOKKED (74TC BLOCKED) 74TC Trip circuit supervision is ACTIVE (74TC ACTIVE) 74TC blocked. Bin. input is not set (74TC ProgFail) 74TC Failure Trip Circuit (FAIL: Trip cir.) >block interm. E/F prot. (>IEF block) Interm. E/F prot. is switched off (IEF OFF) Interm. E/F prot. is blocked (IEF blokked)

SP

ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF

LED BI

BO

170

51

06853

SP

LED BI

BO

170

52

06861

OUT

LED

BO

170

53

06862

OUT

LED

BO

153

16

06863

OUT

LED

BO

153

17

06864

OUT

LED

BO

170

54

06865

OUT

LED

BO

170

55

06903

SP

LED BI

BO

152

06921

OUT

ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF

LED

BO

152

10

06922

OUT

LED

BO

152

11

06923

Interm. E/F prot. is active (IEF ena- Intermittent Earth bled) Fault Interm. E/F detection stage Iie> (IIE Fault det) Intermittent Earth Fault

OUT

LED

BO

152

12

06924

OUT

LED

BO

566

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

General Interrogation GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI

Event Log On/Off

Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking

Information-No

Binary Output

Function Key

Binary Input

Type

LED

A.10 Information List

F.No.

Description

Function

Type of Information

Log-Buffers

Configurable in Matrix

IEC 60870-5-103

Ground Fault Log On/Off

Marked in Oscill. Record

Trip (Fault) Log On/Off

06925

Interm. E/F stab detection (IIE stab.Flt) Interm. E/F detection stage Iie> (IIE Fault det) Interm. E/F detected (Intermitt.EF)

Intermittent Earth Fault Intermittent Earth Fault Intermittent Earth Fault Intermittent Earth Fault Intermittent Earth Fault Intermittent Earth Fault Intermittent Earth Fault Intermittent Earth Fault 50/51 Phase/ Ground Overcurrent 50/51 Phase/ Ground Overcurrent 50/51 Phase/ Ground Overcurrent

OUT

LED

BO

06926

OUT

ON

152

13

06927

OUT

ON OFF ON

LED

BO

152

14

06928

Counter of det. times elapsed (IEF Tsum exp.) Interm. E/F: reset time running (IEF Tres run.) Interm. E/F: trip (IEF Trip)

OUT

LED

BO

152

15

06929

OUT

ON OFF ON

LED

BO

152

16

06930

OUT

LED

BO

152

17

06931

Max RMS current value of fault = (Iie/In=) No. of detections by stage Iie>= (Nos.IIE=) 50-1 InRush picked up (50-1 InRushPU)

OUT

ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF LED BO

152

18

06932

OUT

152

19

07551

OUT

60

80

07552

50N-1 InRush picked up (50N-1 InRushPU)

OUT

ON OFF

LED

BO

60

81

07553

51 InRush picked up (51 InRushPU)

OUT

ON OFF

LED

BO

60

82

07554

51N InRush picked up (51N InRus- 50/51 Phase/ hPU) Ground Overcurrent InRush OFF (InRush OFF) 50/51 Phase/ Ground Overcurrent 50/51 Phase/ Ground Overcurrent 50/51 Phase/ Ground Overcurrent 50/51 Phase/ Ground Overcurrent 50/51 Phase/ Ground Overcurrent 50/51 Phase/ Ground Overcurrent

OUT

ON OFF

LED

BO

60

83

07556

OUT

ON OFF

LED

BO

60

92

07557

InRush Phase BLOCKED (InRushPhBLOCKED)

OUT

ON OFF

ON OFF

LED

BO

60

93

07558

InRush Ground BLOCKED (InRush Gnd BLK)

OUT

ON OFF

LED

BO

60

94

07559

67-1 InRush picked up (67-1 InRushPU)

OUT

ON OFF

LED

BO

60

84

07560

67N-1 InRush picked up (67N-1 InRushPU)

OUT

ON OFF

LED

BO

60

85

07561

67-TOC InRush picked up (67TOC InRushPU)

OUT

ON OFF

LED

BO

60

86

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

567

General Interrogation GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI

Event Log On/Off

Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking

Information-No

Binary Output

Function Key

Binary Input

Type

LED

A Appendix

F.No.

Description

Function

Type of Information

Log-Buffers

Configurable in Matrix

IEC 60870-5-103

Ground Fault Log On/Off

Marked in Oscill. Record

Trip (Fault) Log On/Off

07562

67N-TOC InRush picked up (67NTOCInRushPU)

50/51 Phase/ Ground Overcurrent 50/51 Phase/ Ground Overcurrent 50/51 Phase/ Ground Overcurrent 50/51 Phase/ Ground Overcurrent 50/51 Phase/ Ground Overcurrent 50/51 Phase/ Ground Overcurrent RTD-Box

OUT

ON OFF

LED

BO

60

87

07563

>BLOCK InRush Phase (>BLOCK InRushPh)

SP

LED BI

BO

07564

Ground InRush picked up (Gnd InRush PU)

OUT

ON OFF

LED

BO

60

88

07565

Phase A InRush picked up (Ia InRush PU)

OUT

ON OFF

LED

BO

60

89

07566

Phase B InRush picked up (Ib InRush PU)

OUT

ON OFF

LED

BO

60

90

07567

Phase C InRush picked up (Ic InRush PU)

OUT

ON OFF

LED

BO

60

91

14101

Fail: RTD (broken wire/shorted) (Fail: RTD) Fail: RTD 1 (broken wire/shorted) (Fail: RTD 1) RTD 1 Temperature stage 1 picked up (RTD 1 St.1 p.up) RTD 1 Temperature stage 2 picked up (RTD 1 St.2 p.up) Fail: RTD 2 (broken wire/shorted) (Fail: RTD 2) RTD 2 Temperature stage 1 picked up (RTD 2 St.1 p.up) RTD 2 Temperature stage 2 picked up (RTD 2 St.2 p.up) Fail: RTD 3 (broken wire/shorted) (Fail: RTD 3) RTD 3 Temperature stage 1 picked up (RTD 3 St.1 p.up) RTD 3 Temperature stage 2 picked up (RTD 3 St.2 p.up) Fail: RTD 4 (broken wire/shorted) (Fail: RTD 4) RTD 4 Temperature stage 1 picked up (RTD 4 St.1 p.up) RTD 4 Temperature stage 2 picked up (RTD 4 St.2 p.up)

OUT

ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF

LED

BO

14111

RTD-Box

OUT

LED

BO

14112

RTD-Box

OUT

LED

BO

14113

RTD-Box

OUT

LED

BO

14121

RTD-Box

OUT

LED

BO

14122

RTD-Box

OUT

LED

BO

14123

RTD-Box

OUT

LED

BO

14131

RTD-Box

OUT

LED

BO

14132

RTD-Box

OUT

LED

BO

14133

RTD-Box

OUT

LED

BO

14141

RTD-Box

OUT

LED

BO

14142

RTD-Box

OUT

LED

BO

14143

RTD-Box

OUT

LED

BO

568

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

General Interrogation GI GI GI GI GI

Event Log On/Off

Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking

Information-No

Binary Output

Function Key

Binary Input

Type

LED

A.10 Information List

F.No.

Description

Function

Type of Information

Log-Buffers

Configurable in Matrix

IEC 60870-5-103

Ground Fault Log On/Off

Marked in Oscill. Record

Trip (Fault) Log On/Off

14151

Fail: RTD 5 (broken wire/shorted) (Fail: RTD 5) RTD 5 Temperature stage 1 picked up (RTD 5 St.1 p.up) RTD 5 Temperature stage 2 picked up (RTD 5 St.2 p.up) Fail: RTD 6 (broken wire/shorted) (Fail: RTD 6) RTD 6 Temperature stage 1 picked up (RTD 6 St.1 p.up) RTD 6 Temperature stage 2 picked up (RTD 6 St.2 p.up) Fail: RTD 7 (broken wire/shorted) (Fail: RTD 7) RTD 7 Temperature stage 1 picked up (RTD 7 St.1 p.up) RTD 7 Temperature stage 2 picked up (RTD 7 St.2 p.up) Fail: RTD 8 (broken wire/shorted) (Fail: RTD 8) RTD 8 Temperature stage 1 picked up (RTD 8 St.1 p.up) RTD 8 Temperature stage 2 picked up (RTD 8 St.2 p.up) Fail: RTD 9 (broken wire/shorted) (Fail: RTD 9) RTD 9 Temperature stage 1 picked up (RTD 9 St.1 p.up) RTD 9 Temperature stage 2 picked up (RTD 9 St.2 p.up) Fail: RTD10 (broken wire/shorted) (Fail: RTD10) RTD10 Temperature stage 1 pikked up (RTD10 St.1 p.up) RTD10 Temperature stage 2 pikked up (RTD10 St.2 p.up) Fail: RTD11 (broken wire/shorted) (Fail: RTD11) RTD11 Temperature stage 1 pikked up (RTD11 St.1 p.up) RTD11 Temperature stage 2 pikked up (RTD11 St.2 p.up)

RTD-Box

OUT

ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF

LED

BO

14152

RTD-Box

OUT

LED

BO

14153

RTD-Box

OUT

LED

BO

14161

RTD-Box

OUT

LED

BO

14162

RTD-Box

OUT

LED

BO

14163

RTD-Box

OUT

LED

BO

14171

RTD-Box

OUT

LED

BO

14172

RTD-Box

OUT

LED

BO

14173

RTD-Box

OUT

LED

BO

14181

RTD-Box

OUT

LED

BO

14182

RTD-Box

OUT

LED

BO

14183

RTD-Box

OUT

LED

BO

14191

RTD-Box

OUT

LED

BO

14192

RTD-Box

OUT

LED

BO

14193

RTD-Box

OUT

LED

BO

14201

RTD-Box

OUT

LED

BO

14202

RTD-Box

OUT

LED

BO

14203

RTD-Box

OUT

LED

BO

14211

RTD-Box

OUT

LED

BO

14212

RTD-Box

OUT

LED

BO

14213

RTD-Box

OUT

LED

BO

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

569

General Interrogation

Event Log On/Off

Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking

Information-No

Binary Output

Function Key

Binary Input

Type

LED

A Appendix

F.No.

Description

Function

Type of Information

Log-Buffers

Configurable in Matrix

IEC 60870-5-103

Ground Fault Log On/Off

Marked in Oscill. Record

Trip (Fault) Log On/Off

14221

Fail: RTD12 (broken wire/shorted) (Fail: RTD12) RTD12 Temperature stage 1 pikked up (RTD12 St.1 p.up) RTD12 Temperature stage 2 pikked up (RTD12 St.2 p.up) >67-2 instantaneously (>INSTANT. 67-2)

RTD-Box

OUT

ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF

LED

BO

14222

RTD-Box

OUT

LED

BO

14223

RTD-Box

OUT

LED

BO

14501

67 Directional Phase/Ground Overcurrent 67 Directional Phase/Ground Overcurrent 67 Directional Phase/Ground Overcurrent 67 Directional Phase/Ground Overcurrent 67 Directional Phase/Ground Overcurrent 67 Directional Phase/Ground Overcurrent 67 Directional Phase/Ground Overcurrent 67 Directional Phase/Ground Overcurrent 67 Directional Phase/Ground Overcurrent 67 Directional Phase/Ground Overcurrent 67 Directional Phase/Ground Overcurrent 67 Directional Phase/Ground Overcurrent SYNC Function group 1 SYNC Function group 2

SP

LED BI

BO

14502

67-2 instantaneously (67-2 INSTANT.)

OUT

ON OFF

ON OFF

LED

BO

14503

>67-1 instantaneously (>INSTANT. 67-1)

SP

LED BI

BO

14504

67-1 instantaneously (67-1 INSTANT.)

OUT

ON OFF

ON OFF

LED

BO

14505

>67-TOC instantaneously (>INSTANT 67-TOC)

SP

LED BI

BO

14506

67-TOC instantaneously (67-TOC INSTANT.)

OUT

ON OFF

ON OFF

LED

BO

14507

>67N-2 instantaneously (>INSTANT. 67N-2)

SP

LED BI

BO

14508

67N-2 instantaneously (67N-2 INSTANT.)

OUT

ON OFF

ON OFF

LED

BO

14509

>67N-1 instantaneously (>INSTANT. 67N-1)

SP

LED BI

BO

14510

67N-1 instantaneously (67N-1 INSTANT.)

OUT

ON OFF

ON OFF

LED

BO

14511

>67N-TOC instantaneously (>INST. 67N-TOC)

SP

LED BI

BO

14512

67N-TOC instantaneously (67NTOC INSTANT)

OUT

ON OFF

ON OFF

LED

BO

170.2095 25 alphadiff too large (a2<a1) (25 2<1) 170.2095 25 alphadiff too large (a2<a1) (25 2<1)

OUT

on off on off

LED

BO

OUT

LED

BO

570

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

General Interrogation

Event Log On/Off

Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking

Information-No

Binary Output

Function Key

Binary Input

Type

LED

A.10 Information List

F.No.

Description

Function

Type of Information

Log-Buffers

Configurable in Matrix

IEC 60870-5-103

Ground Fault Log On/Off

Marked in Oscill. Record

Trip (Fault) Log On/Off

170.2095 25 alphadiff too large (a2<a1) (25 2<1) 170.2095 25 alphadiff too large (a2<a1) (25 2<1) 170.2094 25 alphadiff too large (a2>a1) (25 2>1) 170.2094 25 alphadiff too large (a2>a1) (25 2>1) 170.2094 25 alphadiff too large (a2>a1) (25 2>1) 170.2094 25 alphadiff too large (a2>a1) (25 2>1) 170.2032 25 Angle difference (alphadiff) okay (25 diff ok) 170.2032 25 Angle difference (alphadiff) okay (25 diff ok) 170.2032 25 Angle difference (alphadiff) okay (25 diff ok) 170.2032 25 Angle difference (alphadiff) okay (25 diff ok) 170.2103 25 CLOSE command is BLOCKED (25 CLOSE BLK) 170.2103 25 CLOSE command is BLOCKED (25 CLOSE BLK) 170.2103 25 CLOSE command is BLOCKED (25 CLOSE BLK) 170.2103 25 CLOSE command is BLOCKED (25 CLOSE BLK) 170.2029 25 Condition V1<V2< fulfilled (25 V1< V2<) 170.2029 25 Condition V1<V2< fulfilled (25 V1< V2<) 170.2029 25 Condition V1<V2< fulfilled (25 V1< V2<) 170.2029 25 Condition V1<V2< fulfilled (25 V1< V2<) 170.2027 25 Condition V1<V2> fulfilled (25 V1< V2>) 170.2027 25 Condition V1<V2> fulfilled (25 V1< V2>) 170.2027 25 Condition V1<V2> fulfilled (25 V1< V2>)

SYNC Function group 3 SYNC Function group 4 SYNC Function group 1 SYNC Function group 2 SYNC Function group 3 SYNC Function group 4 SYNC Function group 1 SYNC Function group 2 SYNC Function group 3 SYNC Function group 4 SYNC Function group 1 SYNC Function group 2 SYNC Function group 3 SYNC Function group 4 SYNC Function group 1 SYNC Function group 2 SYNC Function group 3 SYNC Function group 4 SYNC Function group 1 SYNC Function group 2 SYNC Function group 3

OUT

on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off

LED

BO

OUT

LED

BO

OUT

LED

BO

OUT

LED

BO

OUT

LED

BO

OUT

LED

BO

OUT

LED

BO

41

209

OUT

LED

BO

OUT

LED

BO

OUT

LED

BO

OUT

LED

BO

41

37

OUT

LED

BO

OUT

LED

BO

OUT

LED

BO

OUT

LED

BO

OUT

LED

BO

OUT

LED

BO

OUT

LED

BO

OUT

LED

BO

OUT

LED

BO

OUT

LED

BO

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

571

General Interrogation GI GI

Event Log On/Off

Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking

Information-No

Binary Output

Function Key

Binary Input

Type

LED

A Appendix

F.No.

Description

Function

Type of Information

Log-Buffers

Configurable in Matrix

IEC 60870-5-103

Ground Fault Log On/Off

Marked in Oscill. Record

Trip (Fault) Log On/Off

170.2027 25 Condition V1<V2> fulfilled (25 V1< V2>) 170.2028 25 Condition V1>V2< fulfilled (25 V1> V2<) 170.2028 25 Condition V1>V2< fulfilled (25 V1> V2<) 170.2028 25 Condition V1>V2< fulfilled (25 V1> V2<) 170.2028 25 Condition V1>V2< fulfilled (25 V1> V2<) 170.2093 25 fdiff too large (f2<f1) (25 f2<f1)

SYNC Function group 4 SYNC Function group 1 SYNC Function group 2 SYNC Function group 3 SYNC Function group 4 SYNC Function group 1 SYNC Function group 2 SYNC Function group 3 SYNC Function group 4 SYNC Function group 1 SYNC Function group 2 SYNC Function group 3 SYNC Function group 4 SYNC Function group 1 SYNC Function group 2 SYNC Function group 3 SYNC Function group 4 SYNC Function group 1 SYNC Function group 2 SYNC Function group 3 SYNC Function group 4

OUT

on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off

LED

BO

OUT

LED

BO

OUT

LED

BO

OUT

LED

BO

OUT

LED

BO

OUT

LED

BO

170.2093 25 fdiff too large (f2<f1) (25 f2<f1)

OUT

LED

BO

170.2093 25 fdiff too large (f2<f1) (25 f2<f1)

OUT

LED

BO

170.2093 25 fdiff too large (f2<f1) (25 f2<f1)

OUT

LED

BO

170.2092 25 fdiff too large (f2>f1) (25 f2>f1)

OUT

LED

BO

170.2092 25 fdiff too large (f2>f1) (25 f2>f1)

OUT

LED

BO

170.2092 25 fdiff too large (f2>f1) (25 f2>f1)

OUT

LED

BO

170.2092 25 fdiff too large (f2>f1) (25 f2>f1)

OUT

LED

BO

170.2031 25 Frequency difference (fdiff) okay (25 fdiff ok) 170.2031 25 Frequency difference (fdiff) okay (25 fdiff ok) 170.2031 25 Frequency difference (fdiff) okay (25 fdiff ok) 170.2031 25 Frequency difference (fdiff) okay (25 fdiff ok) 170.2034 25 Frequency f1 < fmin permissible (25 f1<<) 170.2034 25 Frequency f1 < fmin permissible (25 f1<<) 170.2034 25 Frequency f1 < fmin permissible (25 f1<<) 170.2034 25 Frequency f1 < fmin permissible (25 f1<<)

OUT

LED

BO

41

208

OUT

LED

BO

OUT

LED

BO

OUT

LED

BO

OUT

LED

BO

OUT

LED

BO

OUT

LED

BO

OUT

LED

BO

572

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

General Interrogation GI

Event Log On/Off

Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking

Information-No

Binary Output

Function Key

Binary Input

Type

LED

A.10 Information List

F.No.

Description

Function

Type of Information

Log-Buffers

Configurable in Matrix

IEC 60870-5-103

Ground Fault Log On/Off

Marked in Oscill. Record

Trip (Fault) Log On/Off

170.2033 25 Frequency f1 > fmax permissible (25 f1>>) 170.2033 25 Frequency f1 > fmax permissible (25 f1>>) 170.2033 25 Frequency f1 > fmax permissible (25 f1>>) 170.2033 25 Frequency f1 > fmax permissible (25 f1>>) 170.2036 25 Frequency f2 < fmin permissible (25 f2<<) 170.2036 25 Frequency f2 < fmin permissible (25 f2<<) 170.2036 25 Frequency f2 < fmin permissible (25 f2<<) 170.2036 25 Frequency f2 < fmin permissible (25 f2<<) 170.2035 25 Frequency f2 > fmax permissible (25 f2>>) 170.2035 25 Frequency f2 > fmax permissible (25 f2>>) 170.2035 25 Frequency f2 > fmax permissible (25 f2>>) 170.2035 25 Frequency f2 > fmax permissible (25 f2>>) 170.2025 25 Monitoring time exceeded (25 MonTimeExc) 170.2025 25 Monitoring time exceeded (25 MonTimeExc) 170.2025 25 Monitoring time exceeded (25 MonTimeExc) 170.2025 25 Monitoring time exceeded (25 MonTimeExc) 170.2096 25 Multiple selection of funcgroups (25 FG-Error) 170.2096 25 Multiple selection of funcgroups (25 FG-Error) 170.2096 25 Multiple selection of funcgroups (25 FG-Error) 170.2096 25 Multiple selection of funcgroups (25 FG-Error) 170.2097 25 Setting error (25 Set-Error)

SYNC Function group 1 SYNC Function group 2 SYNC Function group 3 SYNC Function group 4 SYNC Function group 1 SYNC Function group 2 SYNC Function group 3 SYNC Function group 4 SYNC Function group 1 SYNC Function group 2 SYNC Function group 3 SYNC Function group 4 SYNC Function group 1 SYNC Function group 2 SYNC Function group 3 SYNC Function group 4 SYNC Function group 1 SYNC Function group 2 SYNC Function group 3 SYNC Function group 4 SYNC Function group 1

OUT

on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off

LED

BO

OUT

LED

BO

OUT

LED

BO

OUT

LED

BO

OUT

LED

BO

OUT

LED

BO

OUT

LED

BO

OUT

LED

BO

OUT

LED

BO

OUT

LED

BO

OUT

LED

BO

OUT

LED

BO

OUT

LED

BO

41

205

OUT

LED

BO

OUT

LED

BO

OUT

LED

BO

OUT

LED

BO

OUT

LED

BO

OUT

LED

BO

OUT

LED

BO

OUT

LED

BO

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

573

General Interrogation GI

Event Log On/Off

Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking

Information-No

Binary Output

Function Key

Binary Input

Type

LED

A Appendix

F.No.

Description

Function

Type of Information

Log-Buffers

Configurable in Matrix

IEC 60870-5-103

Ground Fault Log On/Off

Marked in Oscill. Record

Trip (Fault) Log On/Off

170.2097 25 Setting error (25 Set-Error)

SYNC Function group 2 SYNC Function group 3 SYNC Function group 4 SYNC Function group 1 SYNC Function group 2 SYNC Function group 3 SYNC Function group 4 SYNC Function group 1 SYNC Function group 2 SYNC Function group 3 SYNC Function group 4 SYNC Function group 1 SYNC Function group 2 SYNC Function group 3 SYNC Function group 4 SYNC Function group 1 SYNC Function group 2 SYNC Function group 3 SYNC Function group 4 SYNC Function group 1 SYNC Function group 2

OUT

on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off

LED

BO

170.2097 25 Setting error (25 Set-Error)

OUT

LED

BO

170.2097 25 Setting error (25 Set-Error)

OUT

LED

BO

170.2007 25 Sync. Measuring request of Control (25 Measu. req.) 170.2007 25 Sync. Measuring request of Control (25 Measu. req.) 170.2007 25 Sync. Measuring request of Control (25 Measu. req.) 170.2007 25 Sync. Measuring request of Control (25 Measu. req.) 170.0049 25 Sync. Release of CLOSE Command (25 CloseRelease) 170.0049 25 Sync. Release of CLOSE Command (25 CloseRelease) 170.0049 25 Sync. Release of CLOSE Command (25 CloseRelease) 170.0049 25 Sync. Release of CLOSE Command (25 CloseRelease) 170.2026 25 Synchronization conditions okay (25 Synchron) 170.2026 25 Synchronization conditions okay (25 Synchron) 170.2026 25 Synchronization conditions okay (25 Synchron) 170.2026 25 Synchronization conditions okay (25 Synchron) 170.0050 25 Synchronization Error (25 Sync. Error) 170.0050 25 Synchronization Error (25 Sync. Error) 170.0050 25 Synchronization Error (25 Sync. Error) 170.0050 25 Synchronization Error (25 Sync. Error) 170.2091 25 Vdiff too large (V2<V1) (25 V2<V1) 170.2091 25 Vdiff too large (V2<V1) (25 V2<V1)

SP

LED

SP

LED

SP

LED

SP

LED

OUT

LED

BO

41

201

OUT

LED

BO

OUT

LED

BO

OUT

LED

BO

OUT

LED

BO

41

206

OUT

LED

BO

OUT

LED

BO

OUT

LED

BO

OUT

LED

BO

41

202

OUT

LED

BO

OUT

LED

BO

OUT

LED

BO

OUT

LED

BO

OUT

LED

BO

574

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

General Interrogation GI GI GI

Event Log On/Off

Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking

Information-No

Binary Output

Function Key

Binary Input

Type

LED

A.10 Information List

F.No.

Description

Function

Type of Information

Log-Buffers

Configurable in Matrix

IEC 60870-5-103

Ground Fault Log On/Off

Marked in Oscill. Record

Trip (Fault) Log On/Off

170.2091 25 Vdiff too large (V2<V1) (25 V2<V1) 170.2091 25 Vdiff too large (V2<V1) (25 V2<V1) 170.2090 25 Vdiff too large (V2>V1) (25 V2>V1) 170.2090 25 Vdiff too large (V2>V1) (25 V2>V1) 170.2090 25 Vdiff too large (V2>V1) (25 V2>V1) 170.2090 25 Vdiff too large (V2>V1) (25 V2>V1) 170.2030 25 Voltage difference (Vdiff) okay (25 Vdiff ok) 170.2030 25 Voltage difference (Vdiff) okay (25 Vdiff ok) 170.2030 25 Voltage difference (Vdiff) okay (25 Vdiff ok) 170.2030 25 Voltage difference (Vdiff) okay (25 Vdiff ok) 170.2038 25 Voltage V1 < Umin permissible (25 V1<<) 170.2038 25 Voltage V1 < Umin permissible (25 V1<<) 170.2038 25 Voltage V1 < Umin permissible (25 V1<<) 170.2038 25 Voltage V1 < Umin permissible (25 V1<<) 170.2037 25 Voltage V1 > Umax permissible (25 V1>>) 170.2037 25 Voltage V1 > Umax permissible (25 V1>>) 170.2037 25 Voltage V1 > Umax permissible (25 V1>>) 170.2037 25 Voltage V1 > Umax permissible (25 V1>>) 170.2040 25 Voltage V2 < Umin permissible (25 V2<<) 170.2040 25 Voltage V2 < Umin permissible (25 V2<<) 170.2040 25 Voltage V2 < Umin permissible (25 V2<<)

SYNC Function group 3 SYNC Function group 4 SYNC Function group 1 SYNC Function group 2 SYNC Function group 3 SYNC Function group 4 SYNC Function group 1 SYNC Function group 2 SYNC Function group 3 SYNC Function group 4 SYNC Function group 1 SYNC Function group 2 SYNC Function group 3 SYNC Function group 4 SYNC Function group 1 SYNC Function group 2 SYNC Function group 3 SYNC Function group 4 SYNC Function group 1 SYNC Function group 2 SYNC Function group 3

OUT

on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off

LED

BO

OUT

LED

BO

OUT

LED

BO

OUT

LED

BO

OUT

LED

BO

OUT

LED

BO

OUT

LED

BO

41

207

OUT

LED

BO

OUT

LED

BO

OUT

LED

BO

OUT

LED

BO

OUT

LED

BO

OUT

LED

BO

OUT

LED

BO

OUT

LED

BO

OUT

LED

BO

OUT

LED

BO

OUT

LED

BO

OUT

LED

BO

OUT

LED

BO

OUT

LED

BO

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

575

General Interrogation GI

Event Log On/Off

Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking

Information-No

Binary Output

Function Key

Binary Input

Type

LED

A Appendix

F.No.

Description

Function

Type of Information

Log-Buffers

Configurable in Matrix

IEC 60870-5-103

Ground Fault Log On/Off

Marked in Oscill. Record

Trip (Fault) Log On/Off

170.2040 25 Voltage V2 < Umin permissible (25 V2<<) 170.2039 25 Voltage V2 > Umax permissible (25 V2>>) 170.2039 25 Voltage V2 > Umax permissible (25 V2>>) 170.2039 25 Voltage V2 > Umax permissible (25 V2>>) 170.2039 25 Voltage V2 > Umax permissible (25 V2>>) 170.0051 25-group 1 is BLOCKED (25-1 BLOCK) 170.2022 25-group 1: measurement in progress (25-1 meas.) 170.0051 25-group 2 is BLOCKED (25-2 BLOCK) 170.2022 25-group 2: measurement in progress (25-2 meas.) 170.0051 25-group 3 is BLOCKED (25-3 BLOCK) 170.2022 25-group 3: measurement in progress (25-3 meas.) 170.0051 25-group 4 is BLOCKED (25-4 BLOCK) 170.2022 25-group 4: measurement in progress (25-4 meas.) 234.2100 27, 59 blocked via operation (27, 59 blk) 52 Breaker (52Breaker)

SYNC Function group 4 SYNC Function group 1 SYNC Function group 2 SYNC Function group 3 SYNC Function group 4 SYNC Function group 1 SYNC Function group 1 SYNC Function group 2 SYNC Function group 2 SYNC Function group 3 SYNC Function group 3 SYNC Function group 4 SYNC Function group 4 27/59 Under/Over Voltage Control Device

OUT

on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off ON OFF

LED

BO

OUT

LED

BO

OUT

LED

BO

OUT

LED

BO

OUT

LED

BO

OUT

LED

BO

41

204

OUT

LED

BO

41

203

OUT

LED

BO

OUT

LED

BO

OUT

LED

BO

OUT

LED

BO

OUT

LED

BO

OUT

LED

BO

IntSP

LED

BO

CF_D12 on off DP on off on off on off on off on off on off BI

BO

240

160

52 Breaker (52Breaker)

Control Device

CB

240

160

170.2009 >25 Direct Command output (>25direct CO) 170.2009 >25 Direct Command output (>25direct CO) 170.2009 >25 Direct Command output (>25direct CO) 170.2009 >25 Direct Command output (>25direct CO) 170.2011 >25 Start of synchronization (>25 Start)

SYNC Function group 1 SYNC Function group 2 SYNC Function group 3 SYNC Function group 4 SYNC Function group 1

SP

LED BI

SP

LED BI

SP

LED BI

SP

LED BI

SP

LED BI

576

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

General Interrogation GI GI GI GI

Event Log On/Off

Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking

Information-No

Binary Output

Function Key

Binary Input

Type

LED

A.10 Information List

F.No.

Description

Function

Type of Information

Log-Buffers

Configurable in Matrix

IEC 60870-5-103

Ground Fault Log On/Off

Marked in Oscill. Record

Trip (Fault) Log On/Off

170.2011 >25 Start of synchronization (>25 Start) 170.2011 >25 Start of synchronization (>25 Start) 170.2011 >25 Start of synchronization (>25 Start) 170.2012 >25 Stop of synchronization (>25 Stop) 170.2012 >25 Stop of synchronization (>25 Stop) 170.2012 >25 Stop of synchronization (>25 Stop) 170.2012 >25 Stop of synchronization (>25 Stop) 170.2015 >25 Switch to V1< and V2< (>25 V1<V2<) 170.2015 >25 Switch to V1< and V2< (>25 V1<V2<) 170.2015 >25 Switch to V1< and V2< (>25 V1<V2<) 170.2015 >25 Switch to V1< and V2< (>25 V1<V2<) 170.2014 >25 Switch to V1< and V2> (>25 V1<V2>) 170.2014 >25 Switch to V1< and V2> (>25 V1<V2>) 170.2014 >25 Switch to V1< and V2> (>25 V1<V2>) 170.2014 >25 Switch to V1< and V2> (>25 V1<V2>) 170.2013 >25 Switch to V1> and V2< (>25 V1>V2<) 170.2013 >25 Switch to V1> and V2< (>25 V1>V2<) 170.2013 >25 Switch to V1> and V2< (>25 V1>V2<) 170.2013 >25 Switch to V1> and V2< (>25 V1>V2<) 170.0043 >25 Sync. Measurement Only (>25 Measu. Only) 170.0043 >25 Sync. Measurement Only (>25 Measu. Only)

SYNC Function group 2 SYNC Function group 3 SYNC Function group 4 SYNC Function group 1 SYNC Function group 2 SYNC Function group 3 SYNC Function group 4 SYNC Function group 1 SYNC Function group 2 SYNC Function group 3 SYNC Function group 4 SYNC Function group 1 SYNC Function group 2 SYNC Function group 3 SYNC Function group 4 SYNC Function group 1 SYNC Function group 2 SYNC Function group 3 SYNC Function group 4 SYNC Function group 1 SYNC Function group 2

SP

on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off

LED BI

SP

LED BI

SP

LED BI

SP

LED BI

SP

LED BI

SP

LED BI

SP

LED BI

SP

LED BI

SP

LED BI

SP

LED BI

SP

LED BI

SP

LED BI

SP

LED BI

SP

LED BI

SP

LED BI

SP

LED BI

SP

LED BI

SP

LED BI

SP

LED BI

SP

LED BI

SP

LED BI

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

577

General Interrogation

Event Log On/Off

Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking

Information-No

Binary Output

Function Key

Binary Input

Type

LED

A Appendix

F.No.

Description

Function

Type of Information

Log-Buffers

Configurable in Matrix

IEC 60870-5-103

Ground Fault Log On/Off

Marked in Oscill. Record

Trip (Fault) Log On/Off

170.0043 >25 Sync. Measurement Only (>25 Measu. Only) 170.0043 >25 Sync. Measurement Only (>25 Measu. Only) 170.0001 >25-group 1 activate (>25-1 act)

SYNC Function group 3 SYNC Function group 4 SYNC Function group 1 SYNC Function group 2 SYNC Function group 3 SYNC Function group 4 Device, General Settings SYNC Function group 1 SYNC Function group 2 SYNC Function group 3 SYNC Function group 4 SYNC Function group 1 SYNC Function group 2 SYNC Function group 3 SYNC Function group 4 Process Data

SP

on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off * *

LED BI

SP

LED BI

SP

LED BI

170.0001 >25-group 2 activate (>25-2 act)

SP

LED BI

170.0001 >25-group 3 activate (>25-3 act)

SP

LED BI

170.0001 >25-group 4 activate (>25-4 act)

SP

LED BI

>Back Light on (>Light on)

SP

LED BI

BO

170.2102 >BLOCK 25 CLOSE command (>BLK 25 CLOSE) 170.2102 >BLOCK 25 CLOSE command (>BLK 25 CLOSE) 170.2102 >BLOCK 25 CLOSE command (>BLK 25 CLOSE) 170.2102 >BLOCK 25 CLOSE command (>BLK 25 CLOSE) 170.2008 >BLOCK 25-group 1 (>BLK 25-1)

SP

LED BI

SP

LED BI

SP

LED BI

SP

LED BI

SP

LED BI

170.2008 >BLOCK 25-group 2 (>BLK 25-2)

SP

LED BI

170.2008 >BLOCK 25-group 3 (>BLK 25-3)

SP

LED BI

170.2008 >BLOCK 25-group 4 (>BLK 25-4)

SP

LED BI

>Cabinet door open (>Door open)

SP

LED BI

BO

CB

101

>CB ready Spring is charged (>CB ready) >CB waiting for Spring charged (>CB wait) >Door closed (>DoorClose) >Error Control Voltage (>ErrCntrlV) >Error Meter (>Err Meter)

Process Data

SP

LED BI

BO

CB

Process Data

SP

on off * on off on off on off

LED BI

BO

CB

101

Process Data Process Data

SP SP

LED BI LED BI

BO BO

CB CB 240 182 1 GI

Process Data

SP

LED BI

BO

CB

240

184

>Error Motor Voltage (>Err Mot V)

Process Data

SP

LED BI

BO

CB

240

181

578

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

General Interrogation GI GI GI GI

Event Log On/Off

Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking

Information-No

Binary Output

Function Key

Binary Input

Type

LED

A.10 Information List

F.No.

Description

Function

Type of Information

Log-Buffers

Configurable in Matrix

IEC 60870-5-103

Ground Fault Log On/Off

Marked in Oscill. Record

Trip (Fault) Log On/Off

>No Voltage (Fuse blown) (>No Volt.) >SF6-Loss (>SF6-Loss)

Process Data

SP

ON OFF on off on off on off * *

LED BI

BO

CB

160

38

Process Data

SP

LED BI

BO

CB

240

183

>Transformer Danger (>Tx Danger) >Transformer Temperature (>Tx Temp.) Breaker OPENED (Brk OPENED)

Process Data

SP

LED BI

BO

CB

240

186

Process Data

SP

LED BI

BO

CB

240

185

Device, General Settings Device, General Settings Control Authorization Control Authorization Control Authorization Control Authorization Control Authorization Control Device

IntSP

LED

BO

Clock Synchronization (SynchClock) Control Authority (Cntrl Auth)

IntSP_E v DP ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF on off on off on off on off on off on off on off ON OFF * * LED BI LED BI LED 101 85 1 GI

Control Authority (Cntrl Auth)

IntSP

LED

Controlmode LOCAL (ModeLOCAL) Controlmode LOCAL (ModeLOCAL) Controlmode REMOTE (ModeREMOTE) Disconnect Switch (Disc.Swit.)

DP

LED

101

86

IntSP

LED

IntSP

LED

CF_D2

BO

240

161

Disconnect Switch (Disc.Swit.)

Control Device

DP

CB

240

161

Error FMS FO 1 (Error FMS1)

Device, General Settings Device, General Settings Protocol

OUT

BO

Error FMS FO 2 (Error FMS2)

OUT

LED

BO

Error Systeminterface (SysIntErr.)

IntSP

LED

BO

Fan ON/OFF (Fan ON/OFF)

Control Device

CF_D2

BO

240

175

Fan ON/OFF (Fan ON/OFF)

Control Device

DP

CB

240

175

Fault Recording Start (FltRecSta)

Oscillographic Fault Records Device, General Settings Control Device

IntSP

BO

Feeder GROUNDED (Feeder gnd)

IntSP

LED

BO

Ground Switch (GndSwit.)

CF_D2

on off

BO

240

164

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

579

General Interrogation GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI

Event Log On/Off

Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking

Information-No

Binary Output

Function Key

Binary Input

Type

LED

A Appendix

F.No.

Description

Function

Type of Information

Log-Buffers

Configurable in Matrix

IEC 60870-5-103

Ground Fault Log On/Off

Marked in Oscill. Record

Trip (Fault) Log On/Off

Ground Switch (GndSwit.)

Control Device

DP

on off ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF LED

BI

CB

240

164

Group A (Group A)

Change Group

IntSP

BO

160

23

Group B (Group B)

Change Group

IntSP

LED

BO

160

24

Group C (Group C)

Change Group

IntSP

LED

BO

160

25

Group D (Group D)

Change Group

IntSP

LED

BO

160

26

Hardware Test Mode (HWTestMod) Interlocking: 52 Close (52 Close) Interlocking: 52 Open (52 Open) Interlocking: Disconnect switch Close (Disc.Close) Interlocking: Disconnect switch Open (Disc.Open) Interlocking: Ground switch Close (GndSw Cl.) Interlocking: Ground switch Open (GndSw Open) Q2 Open/Close (Q2 Op/Cl)

Device, General Settings Control Device Control Device Control Device

IntSP

LED

BO

IntSP IntSP IntSP

Control Device

IntSP

Control Device

IntSP

Control Device

IntSP

Control Device

CF_D2

on off on off on off on off ON OFF on off on off on off on off ON OFF LED BI BI

BO

240

162

Q2 Open/Close (Q2 Op/Cl)

Control Device

DP

CB

240

162

Q9 Open/Close (Q9 Op/Cl)

Control Device

CF_D2

BO

240

163

Q9 Open/Close (Q9 Op/Cl)

Control Device

DP

CB

240

163

Stop data transmission (DataStop)

Device, General Settings

IntSP

BO

160

20

170.2101 Sync-group 1 is switched OFF (25- SYNC Function 1 OFF) group 1 170.2101 Sync-group 2 is switched OFF (25- SYNC Function 2 OFF) group 2 170.2101 Sync-group 3 is switched OFF (25- SYNC Function 3 OFF) group 3 170.2101 Sync-group 4 is switched OFF (25- SYNC Function 4 OFF) group 4 Test mode (Test mode) Device, General Settings

OUT

LED

BO

41

36

OUT

LED

BO

OUT

LED

BO

OUT

LED

BO

IntSP

LED

BO

160

21

580

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

General Interrogation GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI

Event Log On/Off

Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking

Information-No

Binary Output

Function Key

Binary Input

Type

LED

A.10 Information List

F.No.

Description

Function

Type of Information

Log-Buffers

Configurable in Matrix

IEC 60870-5-103

Ground Fault Log On/Off

Marked in Oscill. Record

Trip (Fault) Log On/Off

Threshold Value 1 (ThreshVal1)

Threshold-Switch

IntSP

on off

LED BI

FK

BO

CB

Unlock data transmission via BI (UnlockDT)

Control Device

IntSP

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

581

General Interrogation

Event Log On/Off

Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking

Information-No

Binary Output

Function Key

Binary Input

Type

LED

A Appendix

A.11 Measured Values

F.No.

Description

Function

IEC 60870-5-103 Data Unit (ASDU)

Configurable in Matrix Control Display CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD Default Display DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD

Information-No

Function type

Compatibility

Position

00601 00602

Ia (Ia =) Ib (Ib =)

Measurement Measurement

134 160 134

137 145 137 137 137

priv comp priv priv priv

9 3 9 9 9

1 1 2 3 4

00603 00604 00605 00606 00621 00622 00623 00624

Ic (Ic =) In (In =) I1 (positive sequence) (I1 =) I2 (negative sequence) (I2 =) Va (Va =) Vb (Vb =) Vc (Vc =) Va-b (Va-b=)

Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement

134 134

134 134 134 160 134

137 137 137 145 137 137 137

priv priv priv comp priv priv priv

9 9 9 3 9 9 9

5 6 7 2 8 9 10

00625 00626 00627 00629 00630 00632 00641 00642 00644 00645 00661 00701

Vb-c (Vb-c=) Vc-a (Vc-a=) VN (VN =) V1 (positive sequence) (V1 =) V2 (negative sequence) (V2 =) Vsync (synchronism) (Vsync =) P (active power) (P =) Q (reactive power) (Q =) Frequency (Freq=) S (apparent power) (S =) Threshold of Restart Inhibit ( REST. =) Resistive ground current in isol systems (INs Real) Reactive ground current in isol systems (INs Reac) Temperature of Rotor ( Rotor) Thermal Overload ( /trip) Time untill release of reclose-blocking (T reclose=) INs Senstive Ground Fault Current (INs =)

Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement

134 134

134 134 134

137 137 137

priv priv priv

9 9 9

11 12 13

134

137

priv

15

00702

Measurement

134

137

priv

16

00805 00807 00809

Measurement Measurement Measurement

00830

Measurement

582

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC

A.11 Measured Values

F.No.

Description

Function

IEC 60870-5-103 Data Unit (ASDU)

Configurable in Matrix Control Display CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD Default Display DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD

Information-No

Function type

Compatibility

Position

00831 00832 00833

3Io (zero sequence) (3Io =) Vo (zero sequence) (Vo =) I1 (positive sequence) Demand (I1 dmd=)

Measurement Measurement Demand Measurement Setup Demand Measurement Setup Demand Measurement Setup Demand Measurement Setup Min/Max Measurement Setup Min/Max Measurement Setup Min/Max Measurement Setup Min/Max Measurement Setup Min/Max Measurement Setup Min/Max Measurement Setup Min/Max Measurement Setup Min/Max Measurement Setup Min/Max Measurement Setup Min/Max Measurement Setup Min/Max Measurement Setup Min/Max Measurement Setup Min/Max Measurement Setup Min/Max Measurement Setup Min/Max Measurement Setup Min/Max Measurement Setup Min/Max Measurement Setup

00834

Active Power Demand (P dmd =)

00835

Reactive Power Demand (Q dmd =)

00836

Apparent Power Demand (S dmd =)

00837

I A Demand Minimum (IAdmdMin)

00838

I A Demand Maximum (IAdmdMax)

00839

I B Demand Minimum (IBdmdMin)

00840

I B Demand Maximum (IBdmdMax)

00841

I C Demand Minimum (ICdmdMin)

00842

I C Demand Maximum (ICdmdMax)

00843

I1 (positive sequence) Demand Minimum (I1dmdMin) I1 (positive sequence) Demand Maximum (I1dmdMax) Active Power Demand Minimum (PdMin=)

00844

00845

00846

Active Power Demand Maximum (PdMax=)

00847

Reactive Power Minimum (QdMin=)

00848

Reactive Power Maximum (QdMax=)

00849

Apparent Power Minimum (SdMin=)

00850

Apparent Power Maximum (SdMax=)

00851

Ia Min (Ia Min=)

00852

Ia Max (Ia Max=)

00853

Ib Min (Ib Min=)

CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

583

A Appendix

F.No.

Description

Function

IEC 60870-5-103 Data Unit (ASDU)

Configurable in Matrix Control Display CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD Default Display DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD

Information-No

Function type

Compatibility

Position

00854

Ib Max (Ib Max=)

Min/Max Measurement Setup Min/Max Measurement Setup Min/Max Measurement Setup Min/Max Measurement Setup Min/Max Measurement Setup Min/Max Measurement Setup Min/Max Measurement Setup Min/Max Measurement Setup Min/Max Measurement Setup Min/Max Measurement Setup Min/Max Measurement Setup Min/Max Measurement Setup Min/Max Measurement Setup Min/Max Measurement Setup Min/Max Measurement Setup Min/Max Measurement Setup Min/Max Measurement Setup Min/Max Measurement Setup Min/Max Measurement Setup Min/Max Measurement Setup Min/Max Measurement Setup Min/Max Measurement Setup Min/Max Measurement Setup

00855

Ic Min (Ic Min=)

00856

Ic Max (Ic Max=)

00857

I1 (positive sequence) Minimum (I1 Min=)

00858

I1 (positive sequence) Maximum (I1 Max=)

00859

Va-n Min (Va-nMin=)

00860

Va-n Max (Va-nMax=)

00861

Vb-n Min (Vb-nMin=)

00862

Vb-n Max (Vb-nMax=)

00863

Vc-n Min (Vc-nMin=)

00864

Vc-n Max (Vc-nMax=)

00865

Va-b Min (Va-bMin=)

00867

Va-b Max (Va-bMax=)

00868

Vb-c Min (Vb-cMin=)

00869

Vb-c Max (Vb-cMax=)

00870

Vc-a Min (Vc-aMin=)

00871

Vc-a Max (Vc-aMax=)

00872

V neutral Min (Vn Min =)

00873

V neutral Max (Vn Max =)

00874

V1 (positive sequence) Voltage Minimum (V1 Min =) V1 (positive sequence) Voltage Maximum (V1 Max =) Active Power Minimum (Pmin=)

00875

00876

00877

Active Power Maximum (Pmax=)

584

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC

A.11 Measured Values

F.No.

Description

Function

IEC 60870-5-103 Data Unit (ASDU)

Configurable in Matrix Control Display CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CFC CD CD CD CD CD CFC CFC CFC CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD Default Display DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD

Information-No

Function type

Compatibility

Position

00878

Reactive Power Minimum (Qmin=)

Min/Max Measurement Setup Min/Max Measurement Setup Min/Max Measurement Setup Min/Max Measurement Setup Min/Max Measurement Setup Min/Max Measurement Setup Min/Max Measurement Setup Min/Max Measurement Setup Energy Energy Measurement Energy Energy Energy Energy Demand Measurement Setup Demand Measurement Setup Demand Measurement Setup Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement Min/Max Measurement Setup Min/Max Measurement Setup Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement 134 134 134 134 146 146 146 146 priv priv priv priv 9 9 9 9 1 2 3 4 134 137 priv 9 14

00879

Reactive Power Maximum (Qmax=)

00880

Apparent Power Minimum (Smin=)

00881

Apparent Power Maximum (Smax=)

00882

Frequency Minimum (fmin=)

00883

Frequency Maximum (fmax=)

00884

Power Factor Maximum (PF Max=)

00885

Power Factor Minimum (PF Min=)

00888 00889 00901 00924 00925 00928 00929 00963

Pulsed Energy Wp (active) (Wp(puls)) Pulsed Energy Wq (reactive) (Wq(puls)) Power Factor (PF =) Wp Forward (WpForward) Wq Forward (WqForward) Wp Reverse (WpReverse) Wq Reverse (WqReverse) I A demand (Ia dmd=)

00964

I B demand (Ib dmd=)

00965

I C demand (Ic dmd=)

00991 00992 00996 00997 01058

Pressure (Press =) Temperature (Temp =) Transducer 1 (Td1=) Transducer 2 (Td2=) Overload Meter Max ( /TrpMax=)

01059

Overload Meter Min ( /TrpMin=)

01068 01069 01070 01071

Temperature of RTD 1 ( RTD 1 =) Temperature of RTD 2 ( RTD 2 =) Temperature of RTD 3 ( RTD 3 =) Temperature of RTD 4 ( RTD 4 =)

CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

585

A Appendix

F.No.

Description

Function

IEC 60870-5-103 Data Unit (ASDU)

Configurable in Matrix Control Display CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD Default Display DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD

Information-No

Function type

Compatibility

Position

01072 01073 01074 01075 01076 01077 01078 01079 30701 30702 30703 30704 30705 30706 30707 30708 30709

Temperature of RTD 5 ( RTD 5 =) Temperature of RTD 6 ( RTD 6 =) Temperature of RTD 7 ( RTD 7 =) Temperature of RTD 8 ( RTD 8 =) Temperature of RTD 9 ( RTD 9 =) Temperature of RTD10 ( RTD10 =) Temperature of RTD11 ( RTD11 =) Temperature of RTD12 ( RTD12 =) P, L1 (active power, phase L1) (P, L1 =) P, L2 (active power, phase L2) (P, L2 =) P, L3 (active power, phase L3) (P, L3 =) Q, L1 (reactive power, phase L1) (Q, L1 =) Q, L2 (reactive power, phase L2) (Q, L2 =) Q, L3 (reactive power, phase L3) (Q, L3 =) Power Factor, phase L1 (PF, L1 =) Power Factor, phase L2 (PF, L2 =) Power Factor, phase L3 (PF, L3 =) 37-1 under current (37-1)

Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement Set Points (Measured Values) SYNC Function group 1 SYNC Function group 2 SYNC Function group 3 SYNC Function group 4 SYNC Function group 1 SYNC Function group 2 SYNC Function group 3 SYNC Function group 4 SYNC Function group 1 SYNC Function group 2

134 134 134 134 134 134 134 134

146 146 146 146 146 146 146 146

priv priv priv priv priv priv priv priv

9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9

5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

170.2056 dalpha = (d =)

130

priv

170.2056 dalpha = (d =)

130

priv

170.2056 dalpha = (d =)

130

priv

170.2056 dalpha = (d =)

130

priv

170.2055 df = (df =)

130

priv

170.2055 df = (df =)

130

priv

170.2055 df = (df =)

130

priv

170.2055 df = (df =)

130

priv

170.2054 dV = (dV =)

130

priv

170.2054 dV = (dV =)

130

priv

586

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC

A.11 Measured Values

F.No.

Description

Function

IEC 60870-5-103 Data Unit (ASDU)

Configurable in Matrix Control Display CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD Default Display DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD

Information-No

Function type

Compatibility

Position

170.2054 dV = (dV =)

SYNC Function group 3 SYNC Function group 4 SYNC Function group 1 SYNC Function group 2 SYNC Function group 3 SYNC Function group 4 SYNC Function group 1 SYNC Function group 2 SYNC Function group 3 SYNC Function group 4 Set Points (Measured Values) Set Points (Measured Values) Set Points (Measured Values) Set Points (Measured Values) Statistics

130

priv

170.2054 dV = (dV =)

130

priv

170.2051 f1 = (f1 =)

130

priv

170.2051 f1 = (f1 =)

130

priv

170.2051 f1 = (f1 =)

130

priv

170.2051 f1 = (f1 =)

130

priv

170.2053 f2 = (f2 =)

130

priv

170.2053 f2 = (f2 =)

130

priv

170.2053 f2 = (f2 =)

130

priv

170.2053 f2 = (f2 =)

130

priv

I A dmd> (I Admd>)

I B dmd> (I Bdmd>)

I C dmd> (I Cdmd>)

I1dmd> (I1dmd>)

Number of TRIPs= (#of TRIPs=) Operating hours greater than (OpHour>) Pressure< (Press<)

Set Points (Measured Values) Set Points (Measured Values) SYNC Function group 1 SYNC Function group 2 SYNC Function group 3 130 1 priv 9 1

Temp> (Temp>)

170.2050 V1 = (V1 =)

170.2050 V1 = (V1 =)

130

priv

170.2050 V1 = (V1 =)

130

priv

CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

587

A Appendix

F.No.

Description

Function

IEC 60870-5-103 Data Unit (ASDU)

Configurable in Matrix Control Display CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD Default Display DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD

Information-No

Function type

Compatibility

Position

170.2050 V1 = (V1 =)

SYNC Function group 4 SYNC Function group 1 SYNC Function group 2 SYNC Function group 3 SYNC Function group 4 Set Points (Measured Values) Set Points (Measured Values) Set Points (Measured Values) Set Points (Measured Values)

130

priv

170.2052 V2 = (V2 =)

130

priv

170.2052 V2 = (V2 =)

130

priv

170.2052 V2 = (V2 =)

130

priv

170.2052 V2 = (V2 =)

130

priv

|Pdmd|> (|Pdmd|>)

|Power Factor|< (|PF|<)

|Qdmd|> (|Qdmd|>)

|Sdmd|> (|Sdmd|>)

588

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC

Index

Index
Numerics
27 10, 94, 372 46 10, 104, 373 46-1 104, 373 46-2 104, 373 46-TOC 10, 105, 373 48 112, 379 49 130, 382 50 9, 38, 359 50-1 9 50-2 9 50BF 205, 389 50c 87 50N 9, 38, 359 50N-1 9 50N-2 9 50Nc 87 50Ns 11, 155, 384 51 9, 38, 360 51 and 51N 360 51N 9, 38, 360 51Nc 87 51Ns 11 59 10, 94, 372 64 155, 384 66/68 112, 380 67 10, 64, 370 67 and 67N Elements 370 67c 87 67N 10, 64, 370 67Nc 87 67Ns 11, 155, 384 67N-TOC 10 67-TOC 10 74TC 147, 398 79M 177, 388 81 126, 381 81 O/U 126 AI/O2 292 Analog Inputs 2, 346 Analog Outputs 346 Angular Error Compensation 166 Automatic Reclosing 11, 194 Automatic Reclosing System 177, Auxiliary voltage 288 Auxiliary Voltages 140 Average Calculation 247

388

B
Battery 424 BCPU 294 BI/O2 300 Binary Inputs 4 Binary Inputs and Outputs 4, 276 Binary Outputs 4 Blocked by Protection 261 Blocking of auto reclose via internal control 192 Blocking of Reclosing 190 Blocking Three-Phase Faults 192 Blocking Time 181, 188 Breaker Control 13, 252, 399 Breaker Failure Protection 12, 205, 209, 389 Buffer Battery 140 Bus address 307, 310, 312

C
Caution (definition) ii CFC 392 Changeover of setting groups 277 Check Current and voltage connection 331 Rotation 331 Checking Connections 318 Checking System Connections 321 Checking the Binary Inputs and Outputs 326 Circuit Breaker Monitoring 183, 188 Climatic Stress Tests 356 Clock 353, 399 Command Duration 29 Command Output and Switching Relays 263 Command Sequence 254 Commissioning 323

A
Accessories 423 Acknowledgement of commands to local/remote/Digsi 262 commands to the device front 262 ACPU 288

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

589

Index

Commissioning Aids 245 Communication 7 Communications Interfaces 349 Connection Examples 470 Connections 275, 318 Construction 357 Contact mode for output relay BO1 and BO2 291 Contact type for output relays 281 Control Functions 6 Control voltage 288, 291, 294 Control voltage of BI 1 to BI 7 294 Control voltage of BI 21 to BI 24 298 Control voltage of BI 8 to BI 20 308 Control voltage of BI8 to BI20 309 Control voltages of BI 25 to BI 37 308 Control voltages of BI18 to BI33 309 Control voltages of BI4 to BI11 293 Covering Caps 423 Cross Blocking 47 Cross blocking 58 Cubicle Installation 426, 432, 456 Current Flow Monitoring 29 Current Inputs 346 Current Rotation 143 Current Supervision 101 Current Symmetry 142 Currents 275, 276

Direction check with load current 333 Directional Time Overcurrent Ground Protection 81 Directional Time Overcurrent Protection 10, 63, 370 Disassembly of the Device 281 Display Editor 424 DNP3.0 8, 352 Double Operation 261 Dynamic Blocking 181, 188 Dynamic Cold Load Pick-up Function 87, 371 Dynamic Cold Load Setting Adjustment 10

E
Electrical Tests 353 Elementary Diagrams 426 EMC Tests for Immunity 353 EMC Tests For Noise Emission 354 Emergency Start 117 Emergency Starting 136 Excessive rotor temperature 114 Exchanging interface modules 313 Extension of Time Constants 116, 136 External Current Transformer Circuits 142

F D
Danger (definition) ii DCF77 399 Default Settings 494 Definite 359 Definite Time Elements (46-1, 46-2) 104 Definite Time, Directional Overcurrent Protection 66 Definite Time, Instantaneous Overcurrent Protection 39 Definite-Time, Overcurrent Protection 359 Detached Operation Unit 446 Detached Operator Panel 405 Determination of Direction 70, 156 Determination of the Phase with a Ground Connection Fault Location 201, 204, 389 Fault value recording 245 Femal Plugs 424 Fibre optic cable 320 Final Preparation of the Device 344 Frequency Protection 10, 126, 128, Front Elements 4 Functional Scope 20 Fuse 144 FuseFailureMonitoring 144

381

G
General Device Dropout 236 General Device Pickup 236 Graphic Tools 425 Graphical symbols iii Ground fault check 336 Ground Impedance Ratios 34 Group alarms 154

164
Device Dropout 236 Device Pickup 236 Device Position 261 DIGRA 424 DIGSI REMOTE 4 425 Dimensions 400

590

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

Index

H
Hardware Modifications 279 Hardware Monitoring 140 Housing for Panel Flush Mounting or Cubicle Installation (Size 1/1 x 19) 402 for Panel Surface Mounting (Size 1/1) 404 for Panel Surface Mounting (Size 1/3 x 19") 403 for Panel Surface Mounting (Size 1/3 x 19) 403

I
Information List 545 Initiation of Reclosing 190 Inrush Restraint 371 Installation 266 Insulation Tests 353 Interface Cable 424 Interface Modules 313 Interface modules 423 Interlocking 255 Intermittent Ground Fault Protection 387 Intermittierender Erdfehlerschutz 170 Interoperability List 503 Inverse Time Element (46-TOC) 105 Inverse Time-Overcurrent Protection 43, 360 IRIG B 399

Measurements 242 Measuring Transducer Inputs 346 Mechanical Stress Tests 355 Memory Components 140 Message Processing 239 Microcomputer System 4 Min/Max Report 397 Minimum and Maximum Values 247 MODBUS 8 Monitoring Functions 11, 140 Monitoring of feedback information 262 Motor Starting Protection 112, 379 Motor Starting Recognition 138 Mounting Rail for 19"-Racks 424 Multi-Shot Reclosing 180

N
Negative Sequence Current Protection 10 Negative Sequence Protection 104, 373 No Trip No Flag 23 Nominal Frequency 26 Nominal rated values 34 Note (definition) ii Numerical Values 18

O
Open Breaker Times 191 Operating Hours Counter 398 Operating Software 424 Ordering Data 410 Ordering Information 410 Overcurrent 38 Overcurrent Protection 38 Over-Frequency 381 Overview of the masking features 541 Overvoltage Protection 95, 101 Overvoltage protection 100

K
kfactor 134 Khlmitteltemperatur

136

L
Life contact 303 Limit Values 247 Load 333 Location of Ground Connections 160 Long-Term Mean Value 397

P
Panel Flush Mounting 426, 432, 456 Panel Installation 401 Panel Surface Mounting 271, 428, 437 Parameter names iii Parameter options iii PC Front Interface 349 PC Operating Interface at Front 318

M
Manual Close Mode 50, 78, 82 Measured Values 395 Measured Values Monitoring 140 Measured Values Supervision 397

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

591

Index

Phase Rotation 26, 235, 331 Pickup voltages of BI 6 and BI 7 307 Pickup voltages of BI1 to BI5 303 Pickup voltages of BI1 to BI7 295, 297 Pickup voltages of BI18 to BI15 312 Pickup voltages of BI21 to BI24 299 Pickup voltages of BI8 to BI20 301 Polarity Check 337 Polarity of Current Transformers 27 Power Supply 5, 346 Power System Data 1 26 Power System Data 2 34 Pre-Defined CFC Charts 500 Probing 141 Processor Printed Circuit Boards C-CPU-2 PROFIBUS 7, 351 ProfibusInterface 316 Protective Functions 6 Protocol 505 Protocol-dependent functions 505

288, 290

Q
Qualified personnel (definition) iii

Schalten bei asynchronen Netzbedingungen 213 Schalten bei synchronen Netzbedingungen 213 Sensitive Ground Fault Detection 11, 155, 384 Serial Interfaces 4, 281 Service Conditions 356 Set points 244 Setting Groups 33 Setting groups Changeover 277 Short Circuit Links 423 SIMATIC CFC 4 425 Single-Shot Reclosing 180 Software Monitoring 141 Start Inhibit for Motors 10, 380 Starting Time Monitoring for Motors 10 Static Blocking 181 Statistical Counters 237 Statistics 398 Switching Authority 259 Switching elements on the printed circuit boards 302 Switching Mode 260, 261 Symbol conventions iii Synchrones Schalten 212 Synchronisierfunktion 210 System (SCADA) Interface 318

R
Rack mounting and cubicle mounting 268 Reactance Setting 35 Rear Service/Modem Interface 350 Reassembly of Device 317 Recognition of Running Condition 36 Recording of Event and Fault Data 7 Reference Voltages 140 Regionalization 16 Reset Time Characteristics As Per ANSI 365, 375 Restarting limit 115 Reverse Interlocking Bus Protection 49 Reverse Interlocking for Looped Lines 73 Reverse Interlocking Scheme 332 RS232 350 RS485 350 RTD 226

T
Temperature Detection 391 Temperature meter 320 Temperature unit 26 Temperaturerfassung 226 Termination 304, 315 Testing the Reverse Interlocking Scheme 332 Text Values 18 Thermal Overload Protection 10, 130, 382 Thermobox 226, 320 Time Constant 135 Time Stamping 398 Time synchronization interface 5, 320 Time-Overcurrent Protection 9 Triggering Oscillographic Recordings 342 Trip and Close Command Duration 29 Trip Circuit Monitor 398 Trip Log 236, 398 Trip Time Characteristics As Per ANSI 364, 374 As Per IEC 360, 374 Typographic conventions iii

S
SCADA Interface

351

592

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

Index

U
UL-listing 349, 357 Unbalanced Load 104 Under-Frequency 381 Undervoltage Protection 96, 100 Units of Length 27 User Specified Curves 69, 79, 82

VTs Nominal Values 28 VTs Ratios 28

W
Warning (definition) ii Watchdog 141 Waveform Capture 247,

398

V
Vibration and Shock Stress 355 Voltage Inputs 346 Voltage Protection 10, 94, 372 Voltage Rotation 143 Voltage Symmetry 142 Voltage transformer m.c.b. 423

Z
Zone Controlled/ Field Interlocking Zone Sequence Coordination 186 Zone Sequencing 193

261

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

593

Index

594

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C1471

Corrections To Siemens AG Dept. PTD PA D DM D13623 Berlin Germany Dear reader, printing errors can never be entirely eliminated: therefore, should you come across any when reading this manual, kindly enter them in this form together with any comments or suggestions for improvement that you may have. Corrections/Suggestions Address: Company/Dept.: From Name:

Phone no.:

Fax no.:

7SJ62/63/64 Manual C53000-G1140-C147-1

Subject to technical alteration

Copying of this document and giving it to others and the use or communication of the contents thereof, are forbidden without express authority. Offenders are liable to the payment of damages. All rights are reserved in the event of the grant of a patent or the registration of a utility model or design. Order-no.: C53000-G1140-C147-1 Available from: LZF Frth-Bislohe Printed in Germany/Imprim en Allemagne AG 0302 0.2 FO 610 Am

Siemens Aktiengesellschaft